Relion 670 series

Transformer protection RET670 2.0 IEC

Technical Manual
 Document ID: 1MRK 504 139-UEN
Issued: May 2014
Revision: -
Product version: 2.0

Copyright 2014 ABB. All rights reserved

Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written
permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third
party, nor used for any unauthorized purpose.

The software and hardware described in this document is furnished under a license
and may be used or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.

This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the
OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)

This product includes cryptographic software written/developed by: Eric Young

(eay@cryptsoft.com) and Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).

Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or
product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.

Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.
Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept
or product description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed
properties. All persons responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this
manual must satisfy themselves that each intended application is suitable and
acceptable, including that any applicable safety or other operational requirements
are complied with. In particular, any risks in applications where a system failure and/
or product failure would create a risk for harm to property or persons (including but
not limited to personal injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of the
person or entity applying the equipment, and those so responsible are hereby
requested to ensure that all measures are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks.

This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be
completely ruled out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested
to notify the manufacturer. Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in
no event shall ABB be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from
the use of this manual or the application of the equipment.
Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European
Communities on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning
electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive
2006/95/EC). This conformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB in
accordance with the product standard EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive, and
with the product standards EN 60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low voltage
directive. The product is designed in accordance with the international standards of
the IEC 60255 series.
 Table of contents

Table of contents

Section 1 Introduction.....................................................................41
This manual......................................................................................41
Intended audience............................................................................41
Product documentation.....................................................................42
Product documentation set..........................................................42
Document revision history...........................................................43
Related documents......................................................................44
Document symbols and conventions................................................44
Symbols.......................................................................................44
Document conventions................................................................45
IEC61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping.......................................46

Section 2 Available functions.........................................................53

Main protection functions..................................................................53
Back-up protection functions............................................................55
Control and monitoring functions......................................................58
Communication.................................................................................62
Basic IED functions..........................................................................65

Section 3 Analog inputs..................................................................69

Introduction.......................................................................................69
Function block..................................................................................69
Signals..............................................................................................70
Settings.............................................................................................72
Monitored data..................................................................................79
Operation principle...........................................................................80

Section 4 Binary input and output modules....................................83

Binary input.......................................................................................83
Binary input debounce filter.........................................................83
Oscillation filter............................................................................83
Settings........................................................................................83
Setting parameters for binary input modules..........................83
Setting parameters for binary input/output module................84

Section 5 Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI ..........................85

Local HMI screen behaviour.............................................................85
Identification................................................................................85
Settings........................................................................................85
Local HMI signals.............................................................................85

1
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Identification................................................................................85
Function block.............................................................................85
Signals.........................................................................................86
Basic part for LED indication module...............................................86
Identification................................................................................86
Function block.............................................................................86
Signals.........................................................................................87
Settings........................................................................................88
Monitored data.............................................................................88
Identification................................................................................88
Function block.............................................................................89
Signals.........................................................................................89
Settings........................................................................................89
Operation principle...........................................................................90
Local HMI....................................................................................90
Display....................................................................................90
LEDs.......................................................................................93
Keypad...................................................................................94
LED..............................................................................................96
Functionality ..........................................................................96
Status LEDs...........................................................................96
Indication LEDs......................................................................96
Function keys............................................................................104
Functionality ........................................................................104
Operation principle...............................................................104

Section 6 Differential protection...................................................107

Transformer differential protection T2WPDIF and T3WPDIF ........107
Identification..............................................................................107
Functionality .............................................................................107
Function block...........................................................................109
Signals.......................................................................................110
Settings......................................................................................113
Monitored data...........................................................................118
Operation principle....................................................................119
Function calculation principles.............................................121
Logic diagram.......................................................................142
Technical data...........................................................................146
1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF .....................147
Identification..............................................................................147
Functionality..............................................................................147
Function block...........................................................................148
Signals.......................................................................................148
Settings......................................................................................148

2
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Monitored data...........................................................................149
Operation principle....................................................................149
Logic diagram.......................................................................150
Technical data...........................................................................151
Low impedance restricted earth fault protection REFPDIF ...........152
Identification..............................................................................152
Functionality..............................................................................152
Function block...........................................................................153
Signals.......................................................................................153
Settings......................................................................................154
Monitored data...........................................................................155
Operation principle....................................................................155
Fundamental principles of the restricted earth-fault
protection..............................................................................155
Restricted earth-fault protection, low impedance
differential protection............................................................157
Calculation of differential current and bias current...............159
Detection of external earth faults..........................................160
Algorithm of the restricted earth-fault protection..................162
Technical data...........................................................................162
Additional security logic for differential protection LDRGFC ..........163
Identification..............................................................................163
Functionality..............................................................................163
Function block...........................................................................164
Signals.......................................................................................164
Settings......................................................................................165
Monitored data...........................................................................166
Operation principle....................................................................166
Technical data...........................................................................170

Section 7 Impedance protection...................................................173

Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic
ZMQPDIS, ZMQAPDIS, ZDRDIR...................................................173
Identification..............................................................................173
Functionality..............................................................................173
Function block...........................................................................174
Signals.......................................................................................175
Settings......................................................................................176
Monitored data...........................................................................179
Operation principle....................................................................179
Full scheme measurement...................................................179
Impedance characteristic.....................................................180
Minimum operating current...................................................183
Measuring principles............................................................183

3
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Directional impedance element for quadrilateral

characteristics......................................................................186
Simplified logic diagrams......................................................189
Technical data...........................................................................192
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed angle
FDPSPDIS......................................................................................193
Identification..............................................................................193
Identification.........................................................................193
Functionality..............................................................................193
Function block...........................................................................194
Signals.......................................................................................194
Settings......................................................................................195
Operation principle....................................................................196
Phase-to-earth fault..............................................................198
Phase-to-phase fault............................................................200
Three-phase faults...............................................................202
Load encroachment..............................................................202
Minimum operate currents....................................................207
Simplified logic diagrams......................................................207
Technical data...........................................................................213
Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for
series compensated lines ZMCPDIS, ZMCAPDIS, ZDSRDIR.......213
Identification..............................................................................213
Functionality..............................................................................214
Function block...........................................................................214
Signals.......................................................................................215
Settings......................................................................................217
Monitored data...........................................................................220
Operation principle....................................................................221
Full scheme measurement...................................................221
Impedance characteristic.....................................................221
Minimum operating current...................................................225
Measuring principles............................................................225
Directionality for series compensation..................................228
Simplified logic diagrams......................................................230
Technical data...........................................................................233
Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic
ZMHPDIS ......................................................................................234
Identification..............................................................................234
Functionality..............................................................................234
Function block...........................................................................235
Signals.......................................................................................235
Settings......................................................................................236
Operation principle....................................................................237

4
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Full scheme measurement...................................................237

Impedance characteristic.....................................................238
Basic operation characteristics.............................................239
Theory of operation..............................................................241
Simplified logic diagrams......................................................250
Technical data...........................................................................254
Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth faults
ZMMPDIS, ZMMAPDIS..................................................................254
Identification..............................................................................254
Functionality..............................................................................255
Function block...........................................................................255
Signals.......................................................................................256
Settings......................................................................................257
Operation principle....................................................................258
Full scheme measurement...................................................258
Impedance characteristic.....................................................259
Minimum operating current...................................................261
Measuring principles............................................................262
Directionality.........................................................................264
Simplified logic diagrams......................................................266
Technical data...........................................................................269
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic and
additional distance protection directional function for earth
faults ZDMRDIR, ZDARDIR...........................................................269
Identification..............................................................................269
Functionality..............................................................................270
Function block...........................................................................270
Signals.......................................................................................270
Settings......................................................................................271
Monitored data...........................................................................272
Operation principle....................................................................273
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic
ZDMRDIR.............................................................................273
Additional distance protection directional function for
earth faults ZDARDIR...........................................................275
Mho impedance supervision logic ZSMGAPC................................278
Identification..............................................................................278
Functionality..............................................................................278
Function block...........................................................................278
Signals.......................................................................................278
Settings......................................................................................279
Operation principle....................................................................279
Fault inception detection......................................................279

5
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Faulty phase identification with load encroachment

FMPSPDIS.....................................................................................281
Identification..............................................................................281
Functionality..............................................................................281
Function block...........................................................................282
Signals.......................................................................................282
Settings......................................................................................283
Operation principle....................................................................283
The phase selection function................................................283
Technical data...........................................................................294
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic, separate
settings ZMRPDIS, ZMRAPDIS and ZDRDIR................................295
Identification..............................................................................295
Functionality..............................................................................295
Function block...........................................................................296
Signals.......................................................................................296
Settings......................................................................................298
Operation principle....................................................................300
Full scheme measurement...................................................300
Impedance characteristic.....................................................301
Minimum operating current...................................................305
Measuring principles............................................................305
Directional impedance element for quadrilateral
characteristics......................................................................308
Simplified logic diagrams......................................................311
Technical data...........................................................................314
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable
angle FRPSPDIS............................................................................315
Identification..............................................................................315
Functionality..............................................................................315
Function block...........................................................................316
Signals.......................................................................................316
Settings......................................................................................317
Operation principle....................................................................318
Phase-to-earth fault..............................................................320
Phase-to-phase fault............................................................322
Three-phase faults...............................................................323
Load encroachment..............................................................324
Minimum operate currents....................................................329
Simplified logic diagrams......................................................330
Technical data...........................................................................335
High speed distance protection ZMFPDIS.....................................335
Identification..............................................................................335
Functionality..............................................................................335

6
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Function block...........................................................................337
Signals.......................................................................................337
Settings......................................................................................340
Monitored data...........................................................................344
Operation principle....................................................................344
Filtering.................................................................................344
Distance measuring zones...................................................345
Phase-selection element......................................................346
Directional element...............................................................347
Fuse failure...........................................................................348
Power swings.......................................................................348
Measuring principles............................................................348
Load encroachment..............................................................351
Simplified logic schemes......................................................352
Technical data...........................................................................358
High speed distance protection ZMFCPDIS ..................................358
Identification..............................................................................358
Functionality..............................................................................358
Function block...........................................................................360
Signals.......................................................................................360
Settings......................................................................................363
Monitored data...........................................................................368
Operation principle....................................................................369
Filtering.................................................................................369
Distance measuring zones...................................................369
Phase-selection element......................................................371
Directional element...............................................................371
Fuse failure...........................................................................372
Power swings.......................................................................373
Measuring principles............................................................373
Simplified logic schemes......................................................375
Technical data...........................................................................382
Power swing detection ZMRPSB ...................................................382
Identification..............................................................................382
Functionality..............................................................................382
Function block...........................................................................383
Signals.......................................................................................383
Settings......................................................................................384
Operation principle....................................................................385
Resistive reach in forward direction.....................................386
Resistive reach in reverse direction.....................................387
Reactive reach in forward and reverse direction..................388
Basic detection logic.............................................................388

7
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Operating and inhibit conditions...........................................390

Technical data...........................................................................391
Power swing logic PSLPSCH ........................................................391
Identification..............................................................................391
Functionality..............................................................................392
Function block...........................................................................392
Signals.......................................................................................392
Settings......................................................................................393
Operation principle....................................................................393
Communication and tripping logic........................................393
Blocking logic.......................................................................394
Pole slip protection PSPPPAM ......................................................396
Identification..............................................................................396
Functionality..............................................................................396
Function block...........................................................................397
Signals.......................................................................................397
Settings......................................................................................398
Monitored data...........................................................................399
Operation principle....................................................................399
Technical data...........................................................................402
Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM..................................................403
Identification..............................................................................403
Functionality..............................................................................403
Function block...........................................................................403
Signals.......................................................................................404
Settings......................................................................................405
Monitored data...........................................................................406
Operation principle....................................................................406
Lens characteristic...............................................................409
Detecting an out-of-step condition........................................411
Maximum slip frequency.......................................................412
Taking care of the circuit breaker ........................................413
Design..................................................................................415
Technical data...........................................................................416
Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ...................................................416
Identification..............................................................................416
Functionality..............................................................................416
Function block...........................................................................416
Signals.......................................................................................416
Settings......................................................................................417
Operation principle....................................................................418
Under impedance protection for generators and transformers
ZGVPDIS........................................................................................421

8
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Identification..............................................................................421
Functionality..............................................................................421
Function block...........................................................................422
Signals.......................................................................................422
Settings......................................................................................423
Monitored data...........................................................................424
Operation principle....................................................................424
Operation principle of zone 1...............................................426
Operation principle of zone 2...............................................428
Operation principle of zone 3...............................................432
Load encroachment..............................................................432
Under voltage seal-in...........................................................433
Technical data...........................................................................434

Section 8 Current protection.........................................................435

Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output
PHPIOC .........................................................................................435
Identification..............................................................................435
Functionality..............................................................................435
Function block...........................................................................435
Signals.......................................................................................435
Settings......................................................................................436
Monitored data...........................................................................436
Operation principle....................................................................436
Technical data...........................................................................437
Four step phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output
OC4PTOC .....................................................................................437
Identification..............................................................................438
Functionality..............................................................................438
Function block...........................................................................439
Signals.......................................................................................439
Settings......................................................................................441
Monitored data...........................................................................446
Operation principle....................................................................447
Second harmonic blocking element...........................................451
Technical data...........................................................................452
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC ................453
Identification..............................................................................453
Functionality..............................................................................453
Function block...........................................................................453
Signals.......................................................................................453
Settings......................................................................................454
Monitored data...........................................................................454
Operation principle....................................................................454

9
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Technical data...........................................................................455
Four step residual overcurrent protection, (Zero sequence or
negative sequence directionality) EF4PTOC .................................455
Identification..............................................................................455
Functionality..............................................................................456
Function block...........................................................................456
Signals.......................................................................................456
Settings......................................................................................457
Monitored data...........................................................................463
Operation principle....................................................................463
Operating quantity within the function..................................464
Internal polarizing.................................................................465
External polarizing for earth-fault function............................466
Directional detection for earth fault function.........................466
Base quantities within the protection....................................466
Internal earth-fault protection structure................................467
Four residual overcurrent steps............................................467
Directional supervision element with integrated
directional comparison function............................................468
Second harmonic blocking element.....................................470
Switch on to fault feature......................................................472
Technical data...........................................................................474
Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent
protection NS4PTOC .....................................................................475
Identification..............................................................................475
Functionality..............................................................................475
Function block...........................................................................476
Signals.......................................................................................476
Settings......................................................................................477
Monitored data...........................................................................482
Operation principle....................................................................482
Operating quantity within the function..................................482
Internal polarizing facility of the function..............................483
External polarizing for negative sequence function..............484
Internal negative sequence protection structure..................484
Four negative sequence overcurrent stages........................484
Directional supervision element with integrated
directional comparison function............................................485
Technical data...........................................................................488
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection
SDEPSDE .....................................................................................488
Identification..............................................................................489
Functionality..............................................................................489
Function block...........................................................................491

10
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Signals.......................................................................................491
Settings......................................................................................492
Monitored data...........................................................................494
Operation principle....................................................................494
Function inputs.....................................................................494
Technical data...........................................................................500
Thermal overload protection, one time constant, Celsius/
Fahrenheit LCPTTR/LFPTTR.........................................................501
Identification..............................................................................502
Functionality..............................................................................502
Function block...........................................................................503
Signals.......................................................................................503
Settings......................................................................................504
Monitored data...........................................................................505
Operation principle....................................................................506
Technical data...........................................................................510
Thermal overload protection, two time constants TRPTTR ...........510
Identification..............................................................................510
Functionality..............................................................................510
Function block...........................................................................511
Signals.......................................................................................511
Settings......................................................................................512
Monitored data...........................................................................513
Operation principle....................................................................513
Technical data...........................................................................517
Breaker failure protection 3-phase activation and output
CCRBRF ........................................................................................517
Identification..............................................................................517
Functionality..............................................................................517
Function block...........................................................................518
Signals.......................................................................................518
Settings......................................................................................519
Monitored data...........................................................................520
Operation principle....................................................................520
Technical data...........................................................................523
Pole discordance protection CCPDSC...........................................523
Identification..............................................................................523
Functionality..............................................................................524
Function block...........................................................................524
Signals.......................................................................................524
Settings......................................................................................525
Monitored data...........................................................................525
Operation principle....................................................................525
Pole discordance signaling from circuit breaker...................528

11
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Unsymmetrical current detection..........................................528

Technical data...........................................................................529
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP...............................529
Identification..............................................................................529
Functionality..............................................................................529
Function block...........................................................................530
Signals.......................................................................................530
Settings......................................................................................531
Monitored data...........................................................................532
Operation principle....................................................................532
Low pass filtering..................................................................534
Calibration of analog inputs..................................................535
Technical data...........................................................................536
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP ................................537
Identification..............................................................................537
Functionality..............................................................................537
Function block...........................................................................538
Signals.......................................................................................538
Settings......................................................................................539
Monitored data...........................................................................541
Operation principle....................................................................541
Low pass filtering..................................................................543
Calibration of analog inputs..................................................543
Technical data...........................................................................545
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC .............................................545
Identification..............................................................................545
Functionality..............................................................................545
Function block...........................................................................546
Signals.......................................................................................546
Settings......................................................................................546
Monitored data...........................................................................547
Operation principle....................................................................547
Technical data...........................................................................548
Capacitor bank protection CBPGAPC............................................548
Identification..............................................................................549
Functionality..............................................................................549
Function block...........................................................................549
Signals.......................................................................................549
Settings......................................................................................551
Monitored data...........................................................................552
Operation principle....................................................................552
Measured quantities.............................................................552
Reconnection inhibit feature.................................................555

12
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Overcurrent feature..............................................................556
Undercurrent feature............................................................557
Capacitor harmonic overload feature...................................557
Capacitor reactive power overload feature...........................559
Technical data...........................................................................560
Negativ sequence time overcurrent protection for machines
NS2PTOC ......................................................................................561
Identification..............................................................................561
Functionality..............................................................................561
Function block...........................................................................562
Signals.......................................................................................562
Settings......................................................................................563
Monitored data...........................................................................564
Operation principle....................................................................564
Start sensitivity.....................................................................566
Alarm function......................................................................566
Logic diagram.......................................................................567
Technical data...........................................................................567
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection VRPVOC..............568
Identification..............................................................................568
Functionality..............................................................................568
Function block...........................................................................569
Signals.......................................................................................569
Settings......................................................................................570
Monitored data...........................................................................571
Operation principle....................................................................571
Measured quantities.............................................................571
Base quantities.....................................................................571
Overcurrent protection..........................................................571
Logic diagram.......................................................................573
Undervoltage protection.......................................................573
Technical data...........................................................................574

Section 9 Voltage protection........................................................577

Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV ................................577
Identification..............................................................................577
Functionality..............................................................................577
Function block...........................................................................578
Signals.......................................................................................578
Settings......................................................................................579
Monitored data...........................................................................581
Operation principle....................................................................581
Measurement principle.........................................................582
Time delay............................................................................582

13
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Blocking................................................................................588
Design..................................................................................589
Technical data...........................................................................591
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV ..................................591
Identification..............................................................................591
Functionality..............................................................................592
Function block...........................................................................592
Signals.......................................................................................592
Settings......................................................................................593
Monitored data...........................................................................595
Operation principle....................................................................595
Measurement principle.........................................................596
Time delay............................................................................596
Blocking................................................................................602
Design..................................................................................602
Technical data...........................................................................604
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV .................605
Identification..............................................................................605
Functionality..............................................................................605
Function block...........................................................................605
Signals.......................................................................................605
Settings......................................................................................606
Monitored data...........................................................................608
Operation principle....................................................................608
Measurement principle.........................................................608
Time delay............................................................................608
Blocking................................................................................614
Design..................................................................................614
Technical data...........................................................................615
Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH ............................................616
Identification..............................................................................616
Functionality..............................................................................616
Function block...........................................................................617
Signals.......................................................................................617
Settings......................................................................................617
Monitored data...........................................................................618
Operation principle....................................................................619
Measured voltage.................................................................621
Operate time of the overexcitation protection.......................622
Cooling.................................................................................626
Overexcitation protection function measurands...................626
Overexcitation alarm............................................................627
Logic diagram.......................................................................627

14
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Technical data...........................................................................628
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV ......................................628
Identification..............................................................................628
Functionality..............................................................................628
Function block...........................................................................629
Signals.......................................................................................629
Settings......................................................................................629
Monitored data...........................................................................630
Operation principle....................................................................630
Technical data...........................................................................632
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV ..................................................633
Identification..............................................................................633
Functionality..............................................................................633
Function block...........................................................................633
Signals.......................................................................................633
Settings......................................................................................634
Operation principle....................................................................634
Technical data...........................................................................636

Section 10 Frequency protection....................................................637

Underfrequency protection SAPTUF .............................................637
Identification..............................................................................637
Functionality..............................................................................637
Function block...........................................................................637
Signals.......................................................................................638
Settings......................................................................................638
Monitored data...........................................................................639
Operation principle....................................................................639
Measurement principle.........................................................639
Time delay............................................................................639
Voltage dependent time delay..............................................640
Blocking................................................................................641
Design..................................................................................641
Technical data...........................................................................642
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF ...............................................643
Identification..............................................................................643
Functionality..............................................................................643
Function block...........................................................................644
Signals.......................................................................................644
Settings......................................................................................644
Monitored data...........................................................................645
Operation principle....................................................................645
Measurement principle.........................................................645
Time delay............................................................................645

15
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Blocking................................................................................646
Design..................................................................................646
Technical data...........................................................................647
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC .............................647
Identification..............................................................................647
Functionality..............................................................................647
Function block...........................................................................648
Signals.......................................................................................648
Settings......................................................................................648
Monitored data...........................................................................649
Operation principle....................................................................649
Measurement principle.........................................................649
Time delay............................................................................649
Blocking................................................................................650
Design..................................................................................650
Technical data...........................................................................651

Section 11 Multipurpose protection................................................653

General current and voltage protection CVGAPC..........................653
Identification..............................................................................653
Functionality..............................................................................653
Function block...........................................................................654
Signals.......................................................................................654
Settings......................................................................................656
Monitored data...........................................................................663
Operation principle....................................................................663
Measured quantities within CVGAPC...................................663
Base quantities for CVGAPC function..................................666
Built-in overcurrent protection steps.....................................666
Built-in undercurrent protection steps...................................671
Built-in overvoltage protection steps....................................672
Built-in undervoltage protection steps..................................672
Logic diagram.......................................................................672
Technical data...........................................................................677

Section 12 System protection and control......................................681

Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC.......................................................681
Identification..............................................................................681
Functionality..............................................................................681
Function block...........................................................................681
Signals.......................................................................................681
Settings......................................................................................682
Operation principle....................................................................682
Filter calculation example..........................................................686

16
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Section 13 Secondary system supervision.....................................689

Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC............................................689
Identification..............................................................................689
Functionality..............................................................................689
Function block...........................................................................689
Signals.......................................................................................690
Settings......................................................................................690
Operation principle....................................................................690
Technical data...........................................................................692
Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC................................................692
Identification..............................................................................692
Functionality..............................................................................693
Function block...........................................................................693
Signals.......................................................................................694
Settings......................................................................................695
Monitored data...........................................................................696
Operation principle....................................................................696
Zero and negative sequence detection................................696
Delta current and delta voltage detection.............................698
Dead line detection...............................................................701
Main logic.............................................................................702
Technical data...........................................................................705
Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC..................................................705
Identification..............................................................................705
Functionality..............................................................................705
Function block...........................................................................706
Signals.......................................................................................706
Settings......................................................................................707
Monitored data...........................................................................707
Operation principle....................................................................708
Technical data...........................................................................709

Section 14 Control..........................................................................711
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing
SESRSYN......................................................................................711
Identification..............................................................................711
Functionality..............................................................................711
Function block...........................................................................712
Signals.......................................................................................712
Settings......................................................................................714
Monitored data...........................................................................717
Operation principle....................................................................717
Basic functionality.................................................................717

17
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Logic diagrams.....................................................................718
Technical data...........................................................................729
Interlocking ....................................................................................730
Functionality..............................................................................730
Operation principle....................................................................730
Logical node for interlocking SCILO .........................................733
Identification.........................................................................733
Functionality.........................................................................733
Function block......................................................................734
Signals..................................................................................734
Logic diagram.......................................................................734
Interlocking for busbar earthing switch BB_ES .........................735
Identification.........................................................................735
Functionality.........................................................................735
Function block......................................................................735
Logic diagram.......................................................................736
Signals..................................................................................736
Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS..........................736
Identification.........................................................................736
Functionality.........................................................................736
Function block......................................................................737
Logic diagram.......................................................................738
Signals..................................................................................739
Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC ................740
Identification.........................................................................741
Functionality.........................................................................741
Function block......................................................................741
Logic diagram.......................................................................742
Signals..................................................................................742
Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC ................................743
Identification.........................................................................743
Functionality.........................................................................744
Function block......................................................................745
Logic diagram.......................................................................746
Signals..................................................................................748
Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB BH .....................................................751
Identification.........................................................................751
Functionality.........................................................................751
Function blocks....................................................................752
Logic diagrams.....................................................................754
Signals..................................................................................759
Interlocking for double CB bay DB ...........................................763
Identification.........................................................................763

18
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Functionality.........................................................................763
Logic diagrams.....................................................................765
Function block......................................................................768
Signals..................................................................................769
Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE ..........................................773
Identification.........................................................................773
Functionality.........................................................................773
Function block......................................................................774
Logic diagram.......................................................................775
Signals..................................................................................780
Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO ............................782
Identification.........................................................................783
Functionality.........................................................................783
Function block......................................................................784
Logic diagram.......................................................................785
Signals..................................................................................786
Position evaluation POS_EVAL.................................................788
Identification.........................................................................788
Functionality.........................................................................788
Function block......................................................................788
Logic diagram.......................................................................789
Signals..................................................................................789
Apparatus control APC...................................................................789
Functionality..............................................................................789
Error handling............................................................................790
Bay control QCBAY...................................................................793
Functionality.........................................................................793
Function block......................................................................793
Signals..................................................................................794
Settings................................................................................794
Operation principle...............................................................794
Local/Remote switch.................................................................796
Function block......................................................................797
Signals..................................................................................797
Settings................................................................................798
Operation principle...............................................................799
Switch controller SCSWI...........................................................800
Functionality ........................................................................800
Function block......................................................................800
Signals..................................................................................800
Settings................................................................................802
Operation principle...............................................................802
Circuit breaker SXCBR..............................................................808

19
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Functionality ........................................................................808
Function block......................................................................808
Signals..................................................................................809
Settings................................................................................810
Operation principle...............................................................810
Circuit switch SXSWI.................................................................814
Functionality ........................................................................814
Function block......................................................................814
Signals..................................................................................815
Settings................................................................................816
Operation principle...............................................................816
Bay reserve QCRSV..................................................................820
Functionality.........................................................................820
Function block......................................................................820
Signals..................................................................................821
Settings................................................................................822
Operation principle...............................................................822
Reservation input RESIN...........................................................824
Functionality.........................................................................824
Function block......................................................................824
Signals..................................................................................825
Settings................................................................................826
Operation principle...............................................................826
Voltage control................................................................................828
Identification..............................................................................828
Functionality..............................................................................829
Automatic voltage control for tap changer TR1ATCC and
TR8ATCC .................................................................................829
Operation principle...............................................................829
Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs
TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC ........................................................841
Operation principle...............................................................841
Connection between TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC and
TCMYLTCor TCLYLTC.............................................................845
Function block...........................................................................849
Signals.......................................................................................852
Settings......................................................................................859
Monitored data...........................................................................867
Operation principle....................................................................868
Technical data...........................................................................869
Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI
presentation SLGAPC....................................................................870
Identification..............................................................................870
Functionality..............................................................................871

20
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Function block...........................................................................871
Signals.......................................................................................871
Settings......................................................................................873
Monitored data...........................................................................873
Operation principle....................................................................873
Graphical display..................................................................874
Selector mini switch VSGAPC........................................................875
Identification..............................................................................875
Functionality..............................................................................876
Function block...........................................................................876
Signals.......................................................................................876
Settings......................................................................................877
Operation principle....................................................................877
Generic communication function for Double Point indication
DPGAPC........................................................................................878
Identification..............................................................................878
Functionality..............................................................................878
Function block...........................................................................878
Signals.......................................................................................878
Settings......................................................................................879
Operation principle....................................................................879
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC........................879
Identification..............................................................................879
Functionality..............................................................................879
Function block...........................................................................880
Signals.......................................................................................880
Settings......................................................................................880
Operation principle....................................................................881
AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0 AUTOBITS..........881
Identification..............................................................................881
Functionality..............................................................................882
Function block...........................................................................882
Signals.......................................................................................882
Settings......................................................................................883
Operation principle....................................................................898
Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD....................................898
Identification..............................................................................898
Functionality..............................................................................898
Function block...........................................................................899
Signals.......................................................................................899
Settings......................................................................................900
Operation principle....................................................................900

Section 15 Scheme communication...............................................901

21
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent

protection ECPSCH .......................................................................901
Identification..............................................................................901
Functionality..............................................................................901
Function block...........................................................................901
Signals.......................................................................................902
Settings......................................................................................902
Operation principle....................................................................903
Blocking scheme..................................................................903
Permissive under/overreaching scheme..............................904
Unblocking scheme..............................................................905
Technical data...........................................................................906
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual
overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH...............................................907
Identification..............................................................................907
Functionality..............................................................................907
Function block...........................................................................908
Signals.......................................................................................908
Settings......................................................................................909
Operation principle....................................................................909
Directional comparison logic function...................................909
Fault current reversal logic...................................................909
Weak-end infeed logic..........................................................910
Technical data...........................................................................912

Section 16 Logic.............................................................................913
Tripping logic common 3-phase output SMPPTRC .......................913
Identification..............................................................................913
Functionality..............................................................................913
Function block...........................................................................913
Signals.......................................................................................914
Settings......................................................................................915
Operation principle....................................................................915
Logic diagram.......................................................................917
Technical data...........................................................................920
Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC...........................................................920
Identification..............................................................................920
Functionality..............................................................................921
Function block...........................................................................921
Signals.......................................................................................921
Settings......................................................................................923
Operation principle....................................................................923
Logic for group alarm ALMCALH....................................................924
Identification..............................................................................924

22
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Functionality..............................................................................924
Function block...........................................................................925
Signals.......................................................................................925
Settings......................................................................................926
Operation principle....................................................................926
Identification...................................................................................926
Functionality..............................................................................926
Function block...........................................................................927
Operation principle....................................................................927
Signals.......................................................................................927
Settings......................................................................................928
Identification...................................................................................928
Functionality..............................................................................928
Function block...........................................................................929
Operation principle....................................................................929
Signals.......................................................................................929
Settings......................................................................................930
Configurable logic blocks................................................................930
Functionality..............................................................................930
Inverter function block INV........................................................932
Function block......................................................................932
Signals..................................................................................933
OR function block OR................................................................933
Function block......................................................................933
Signals..................................................................................933
AND function block AND...........................................................934
Function block......................................................................934
Signals..................................................................................934
Timer function block TIMER......................................................934
Function block......................................................................934
Signals..................................................................................935
Settings................................................................................935
Pulse timer function block PULSETIMER..................................935
Function block......................................................................935
Signals..................................................................................935
Settings................................................................................936
Exclusive OR function block XOR.............................................936
Function block......................................................................936
Signals..................................................................................936
Loop delay function block LOOPDELAY...................................936
Function block......................................................................937
Signals..................................................................................937
Set-reset with memory function block SRMEMORY.................937

23
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Function block......................................................................937
Signals..................................................................................938
Settings................................................................................938
Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY.................938
Function block......................................................................939
Signals..................................................................................939
Settings................................................................................939
Controllable gate function block GATE......................................939
Function block......................................................................939
Signals..................................................................................940
Settings................................................................................940
Settable timer function block TIMERSET..................................940
Function block......................................................................940
Signals..................................................................................940
Settings................................................................................941
Configurable logic Q/T....................................................................941
Functionality..............................................................................941
ANDQT function block...............................................................941
Function block......................................................................941
Signals..................................................................................941
ORQT function block.................................................................942
Function block......................................................................942
Signals..................................................................................942
Inverter function block INVERTERQT.......................................942
Function block......................................................................943
Signals..................................................................................943
Exclusive OR function block XORQT........................................943
Function block......................................................................943
Signals..................................................................................943
Set/Reset function block SRMEMORYQT.................................944
Function block......................................................................944
Signals..................................................................................944
Settings................................................................................945
Reset/Set function block RSMEMORYQT.................................945
Function block......................................................................945
Signals..................................................................................945
Settings................................................................................946
Settable timer function block TIMERSETQT.............................946
Signals..................................................................................946
Settings................................................................................947
Pulse timer function block PULSETIMERQT.............................947
Signals..................................................................................947
Settings................................................................................947

24
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

InvalidLogic INVALIDQT............................................................947
Function block......................................................................948
Signals..................................................................................948
Single indication signal combining function block
INDCOMBSPQT........................................................................949
Signals..................................................................................949
Function block...........................................................................950
Signals..................................................................................950
Technical data................................................................................951
Fixed signals FXDSIGN..................................................................952
Identification..............................................................................952
Functionality..............................................................................952
Function block...........................................................................953
Signals.......................................................................................953
Settings......................................................................................953
Operation principle....................................................................953
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I..........................................954
Identification..............................................................................954
Function block...........................................................................954
Signals.......................................................................................954
Monitored data...........................................................................955
Settings......................................................................................955
Operation principle....................................................................955
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node
representation BTIGAPC................................................................956
Identification..............................................................................956
Functionality..............................................................................957
Function block...........................................................................957
Signals.......................................................................................957
Settings......................................................................................958
Monitored data...........................................................................958
Operation principle....................................................................958
Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16A........................................959
Identification..............................................................................959
Functionality..............................................................................959
Function block...........................................................................960
Signals.......................................................................................960
Setting parameters....................................................................961
Operation principle....................................................................961
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node
representation ITBGAPC................................................................962
Identification..............................................................................962
Functionality..............................................................................962
Function block...........................................................................963

25
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Signals.......................................................................................963
Settings......................................................................................964
Operation principle....................................................................964
Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and overflow
supervision TEIGAPC.....................................................................965
Identification..............................................................................965
Functionality..............................................................................965
Function block...........................................................................966
Signals.......................................................................................966
Settings......................................................................................967
Operation principle....................................................................967
Operation Accuracy..............................................................969
Memory storage...................................................................969
Technical data...........................................................................969

Section 17 Monitoring.....................................................................971
Measurements................................................................................971
Identification..............................................................................971
Functionality..............................................................................971
Function block...........................................................................973
Signals.......................................................................................975
Settings......................................................................................978
Monitored data...........................................................................989
Operation principle....................................................................993
Measurement supervision....................................................993
Measurements CVMMXN.....................................................997
Phase current measurement CMMXU...............................1002
Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements
VMMXU, VNMMXU............................................................1003
Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI,
CMSQI................................................................................1003
Technical data.........................................................................1003
Analog inputs................................................................................1005
Introduction..............................................................................1005
Function block.........................................................................1006
Signals.....................................................................................1006
Settings....................................................................................1008
Monitored data.........................................................................1015
Operation principle..................................................................1016
Gas medium supervision SSIMG.................................................1017
Identification............................................................................1017
Functionality............................................................................1017
Function block.........................................................................1018
Signals.....................................................................................1018

26
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Settings....................................................................................1019
Operation principle..................................................................1019
Technical data.........................................................................1020
Liquid medium supervision SSIML...............................................1020
Identification............................................................................1020
Functionality............................................................................1021
Function block.........................................................................1021
Signals.....................................................................................1021
Settings....................................................................................1022
Operation principle..................................................................1022
Technical data.........................................................................1023
Breaker monitoring SSCBR..........................................................1023
Identification............................................................................1023
Functionality............................................................................1024
Function block.........................................................................1024
Signals.....................................................................................1024
Settings....................................................................................1025
Monitored data.........................................................................1027
Operation principle..................................................................1027
Circuit breaker contact travel time......................................1029
Circuit breaker status.........................................................1030
Remaining life of circuit breaker.........................................1031
Accumulated energy...........................................................1032
Circuit breaker operation cycles.........................................1033
Circuit breaker operation monitoring..................................1034
Circuit breaker spring charge monitoring...........................1035
Circuit breaker gas pressure indication..............................1036
Technical data.........................................................................1036
Event function EVENT..................................................................1036
Identification............................................................................1037
Functionality............................................................................1037
Function block.........................................................................1037
Signals.....................................................................................1037
Settings....................................................................................1038
Operation principle..................................................................1040
Disturbance report DRPRDRE.....................................................1041
Identification............................................................................1042
Functionality............................................................................1042
Function block.........................................................................1043
Signals.....................................................................................1044
Settings....................................................................................1049
Monitored data.........................................................................1088
Operation principle..................................................................1092

27
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Technical data.........................................................................1099
Logical signal status report BINSTATREP...................................1100
Identification............................................................................1100
Functionality............................................................................1100
Function block.........................................................................1101
Signals.....................................................................................1101
Settings....................................................................................1102
Operation principle..................................................................1102
Measured value expander block RANGE_XP..............................1103
Identification............................................................................1103
Functionality............................................................................1103
Function block.........................................................................1103
Signals.....................................................................................1104
Operation principle..................................................................1104
Limit counter L4UFCNT................................................................1104
Identification............................................................................1104
Identification.......................................................................1104
Functionality............................................................................1105
Operation principle..................................................................1105
Design................................................................................1105
Reporting............................................................................1106
Function block.........................................................................1107
Signals.....................................................................................1107
Settings....................................................................................1108
Monitored data.........................................................................1108
Technical data.........................................................................1108

Section 18 Metering.....................................................................1109
Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT.......................................................1109
Identification............................................................................1109
Functionality............................................................................1109
Function block.........................................................................1109
Signals.....................................................................................1110
Settings....................................................................................1110
Monitored data.........................................................................1111
Operation principle..................................................................1111
Technical data.........................................................................1113
Function for energy calculation and demand handling
ETPMMTR....................................................................................1113
Identification............................................................................1113
Functionality............................................................................1113
Function block.........................................................................1114
Signals.....................................................................................1114
Settings....................................................................................1115

28
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Monitored data.........................................................................1116
Operation principle..................................................................1117
Technical data.........................................................................1120
Technical data....................................................................1120

Section 19 Station communication...............................................1121

670 series protocols.....................................................................1121
DNP3 protocol..............................................................................1121
IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol.......................................1121
Communication interfaces and protocols................................1121
Settings....................................................................................1122
Technical data.........................................................................1122
Generic communication function for Single Point indication
SPGAPC, SP16GAPC.............................................................1122
Functionality.......................................................................1123
Function block....................................................................1123
Signals................................................................................1123
Settings..............................................................................1124
Monitored data...................................................................1124
Operation principle.............................................................1125
Generic communication function for Measured Value
MVGAPC.................................................................................1125
Functionality.......................................................................1125
Function block....................................................................1125
Signals................................................................................1126
Settings..............................................................................1126
Monitored data...................................................................1127
Operation principle.............................................................1127
IEC 61850-8-1 redundant station bus communication............1127
Functionality.......................................................................1127
Function block....................................................................1127
Signals................................................................................1128
Settings..............................................................................1128
Monitored data...................................................................1128
Principle of operation..........................................................1128
IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol...................................1131
Introduction..............................................................................1131
Function block.........................................................................1131
Signals.....................................................................................1131
Output signals....................................................................1131
Settings....................................................................................1134
Monitored data.........................................................................1137
Operation principle..................................................................1138
Technical data.........................................................................1141

29
Technical Manual
Table of contents

LON communication protocol.......................................................1141

Functionality............................................................................1141
Settings....................................................................................1142
Operation principle..................................................................1142
Technical data.........................................................................1160
SPA communication protocol.......................................................1160
Functionality............................................................................1160
Design.....................................................................................1160
Settings....................................................................................1161
Operation principle..................................................................1161
Communication ports.........................................................1169
Technical data.........................................................................1169
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol...................................1169
Introduction..............................................................................1169
Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS.........................1169
Functionality.......................................................................1169
Identification.......................................................................1170
Function block....................................................................1170
Signals................................................................................1170
Settings..............................................................................1171
Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103
I103MEASUSR........................................................................1171
Functionality.......................................................................1171
Identification.......................................................................1172
Function block....................................................................1172
Signals................................................................................1172
Settings..............................................................................1173
Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 I103AR....1173
Functionality.......................................................................1173
Identification.......................................................................1173
Function block....................................................................1174
Signals................................................................................1174
Settings..............................................................................1174
Function status earth-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 I103EF.........1174
Functionality.......................................................................1174
Identification.......................................................................1174
Function block....................................................................1175
Signals................................................................................1175
Settings..............................................................................1175
Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103
I103FLTPROT.........................................................................1175
Functionality.......................................................................1175
Identification.......................................................................1175
Function block....................................................................1176

30
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Signals................................................................................1176
Settings..............................................................................1177
IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED................................1177
Functionality.......................................................................1177
Identification.......................................................................1178
Function block....................................................................1178
Signals................................................................................1178
Settings..............................................................................1178
Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV............1179
Functionality.......................................................................1179
Identification.......................................................................1179
Function block....................................................................1179
Signals................................................................................1179
Settings..............................................................................1180
Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103
I103USRDEF...........................................................................1180
Functionality.......................................................................1180
Identification.......................................................................1180
Function block....................................................................1181
Signals................................................................................1181
Settings..............................................................................1181
Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103CMD..............1182
Functionality.......................................................................1182
Identification.......................................................................1182
Function block....................................................................1182
Signals................................................................................1182
Settings..............................................................................1183
IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD................1183
Functionality.......................................................................1183
Identification.......................................................................1183
Function block....................................................................1183
Signals................................................................................1183
Settings..............................................................................1184
Function commands user defined for IEC 60870-5-103
I103USRCMD..........................................................................1184
Functionality.......................................................................1184
Identification.......................................................................1184
Function block....................................................................1184
Signals................................................................................1184
Settings..............................................................................1185
Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103
I103GENCMD..........................................................................1185
Functionality.......................................................................1185
Identification.......................................................................1186

31
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Function block....................................................................1186
Signals................................................................................1186
Settings..............................................................................1186
IED commands with position and select for IEC
60870-5-103 I103POSCMD....................................................1187
Functionality.......................................................................1187
Identification.......................................................................1187
Function block....................................................................1187
Signals................................................................................1187
Settings..............................................................................1188
Operation principle .................................................................1188
General...............................................................................1188
Communication ports.........................................................1198
Technical data.........................................................................1199
Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking
GOOSEINTLKRCV.......................................................................1199
Functionality............................................................................1199
Function block.........................................................................1200
Signals.....................................................................................1200
Settings....................................................................................1202
Goose binary receive GOOSEBINRCV........................................1203
Function block.........................................................................1203
Signals.....................................................................................1203
Settings....................................................................................1204
GOOSE function block to receive a double point value
GOOSEDPRCV............................................................................1205
Identification............................................................................1205
Functionality............................................................................1205
Function block.........................................................................1205
Signals.....................................................................................1205
Settings....................................................................................1206
Operation principle .................................................................1206
GOOSE function block to receive an integer value
GOOSEINTRCV...........................................................................1206
Identification............................................................................1206
Functionality............................................................................1206
Function block.........................................................................1207
Signals.....................................................................................1207
Settings....................................................................................1207
Operation principle .................................................................1207
GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value
GOOSEMVRCV...........................................................................1208
Identification............................................................................1208
Functionality............................................................................1208

32
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Function block.........................................................................1208
Signals.....................................................................................1208
Settings....................................................................................1209
Operation principle .................................................................1209
GOOSE function block to receive a single point value
GOOSESPRCV............................................................................1209
Identification............................................................................1209
Functionality............................................................................1210
Function block.........................................................................1210
Signals.....................................................................................1210
Settings....................................................................................1210
Operation principle .................................................................1210
GOOSE VCTR configuration for send and receive
GOOSEVCTRCONF....................................................................1211
Identification............................................................................1211
Functionality............................................................................1211
Settings....................................................................................1212
GOOSE voltage control receiving block GOOSEVCTRRCV........1212
Identification............................................................................1212
Functionality............................................................................1212
Function block.........................................................................1212
Signals.....................................................................................1213
MULTICMDRCV and MULTICMDSND........................................1213
Functionality............................................................................1213
Design.....................................................................................1213
General...............................................................................1213
Function block.........................................................................1214
Signals.....................................................................................1214
Settings....................................................................................1216
Operation principle..................................................................1216
Security events on protocols SECALARM....................................1217
Security alarm SECALARM.....................................................1217
Signals................................................................................1217
Settings..............................................................................1217
Activity logging parameters ACTIVLOG.......................................1217
Activity logging ACTIVLOG.....................................................1217
Settings....................................................................................1217

Section 20 Remote communication..............................................1219

Binary signal transfer....................................................................1219
Identification............................................................................1219
Functionality............................................................................1219
Function block.........................................................................1220
Signals.....................................................................................1220

33
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Settings....................................................................................1222
Monitored data.........................................................................1225
Operation principle..................................................................1227
Transmission of analog data from LDCM LDCMTransmit............1228
Function block.........................................................................1228
Signals.....................................................................................1229

Section 21 Basic IED functions....................................................1231

Authority check ATHCHCK...........................................................1231
Identification............................................................................1231
Functionality............................................................................1231
Settings....................................................................................1232
Operation principle .................................................................1232
Authorization handling in the IED.......................................1234
Authority management AUTHMAN...............................................1234
Identification............................................................................1234
AUTHMAN...............................................................................1235
Settings....................................................................................1235
FTP access with password FTPACCS.........................................1235
Identification............................................................................1235
FTP access with SSL, FTPACCS............................................1235
Settings....................................................................................1236
Authority status ATHSTAT...........................................................1236
Identification............................................................................1236
Functionality............................................................................1236
Function block.........................................................................1236
Signals.....................................................................................1236
Settings....................................................................................1237
Operation principle .................................................................1237
Self supervision with internal event list.........................................1237
Functionality............................................................................1237
Function block.........................................................................1237
Signals.....................................................................................1238
Settings....................................................................................1238
Operation principle..................................................................1238
Internal signals...................................................................1240
Supervision of analog inputs..............................................1241
Technical data.........................................................................1242
Time synchronization....................................................................1242
Functionality............................................................................1242
Function block.........................................................................1243
Signals.....................................................................................1243
Settings....................................................................................1243
Operation principle .................................................................1248

34
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

General concepts...............................................................1248
Real-time clock (RTC) operation........................................1250
Synchronization alternatives..............................................1251
Process bus IEC 61850-9-2LE synchronization.................1254
Technical data.........................................................................1255
Parameter setting groups.............................................................1255
Functionality............................................................................1255
Function block.........................................................................1255
Signals.....................................................................................1255
Settings....................................................................................1256
Operation principle..................................................................1256
ChangeLock function CHNGLCK.................................................1258
Functionality............................................................................1258
Function block.........................................................................1258
Signals.....................................................................................1258
Settings....................................................................................1258
Operation principle .................................................................1259
Test mode functionality TEST......................................................1259
Functionality............................................................................1259
Function block.........................................................................1260
Signals.....................................................................................1260
Settings....................................................................................1260
Operation principle .................................................................1260
IED identifiers...............................................................................1262
Functionality............................................................................1262
Settings ...................................................................................1263
Product information......................................................................1263
Functionality............................................................................1263
Settings ...................................................................................1263
Factory defined settings..........................................................1264
Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI............................................1264
Functionality............................................................................1264
Function block.........................................................................1265
Signals.....................................................................................1265
Operation principle..................................................................1266
Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO .......................................1266
Functionality............................................................................1266
Function block.........................................................................1266
Signals.....................................................................................1266
Operation principle..................................................................1267
Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI................................................1267
Functionality............................................................................1267
Function block.........................................................................1267

35
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Signals.....................................................................................1268
Operation principle..................................................................1268
Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI...........................................1268
Functionality............................................................................1268
Frequency values....................................................................1269
Function block.........................................................................1270
Signals.....................................................................................1270
Settings....................................................................................1271
Operation principle .................................................................1273
Global base values GBASVAL.....................................................1274
Identification............................................................................1274
Functionality............................................................................1274
Settings....................................................................................1274
Primary system values PRIMVAL.................................................1274
Identification............................................................................1274
Functionality............................................................................1275
Settings....................................................................................1275
Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM............................................1275
Functionality............................................................................1275
Function block.........................................................................1275
Signals.....................................................................................1275
Settings....................................................................................1276
Operation principle .................................................................1276
Denial of service DOS..................................................................1277
Functionality ...........................................................................1277
Function blocks........................................................................1277
Signals.....................................................................................1277
Settings....................................................................................1278
Monitored data.........................................................................1278
Operation principle..................................................................1280

Section 22 IED hardware.............................................................1281

Overview.......................................................................................1281
Variants of case size with local HMI display............................1281
Case from the rear side...........................................................1283
Hardware modules.......................................................................1288
Overview..................................................................................1288
Numeric processing module (NUM)........................................1289
Introduction.........................................................................1289
Functionality.......................................................................1289
Block diagram.....................................................................1290
Power supply module (PSM)...................................................1290
Introduction.........................................................................1290
Design................................................................................1290

36
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Technical data....................................................................1291
Local human-machine interface (Local HMI)...........................1291
Transformer input module (TRM)............................................1291
Introduction.........................................................................1291
Design................................................................................1291
Technical data....................................................................1293
Analog digital conversion module, with time
synchronization (ADM) ...........................................................1294
Introduction.........................................................................1294
Design................................................................................1294
Binary input module (BIM).......................................................1296
Introduction.........................................................................1296
Design................................................................................1296
Signals................................................................................1299
Settings..............................................................................1300
Monitored data...................................................................1300
Technical data....................................................................1300
Binary output modules (BOM).................................................1301
Introduction.........................................................................1301
Design................................................................................1301
Signals................................................................................1303
Settings..............................................................................1303
Monitored data...................................................................1304
Technical data....................................................................1307
Static binary output module (SOM).........................................1308
Introduction.........................................................................1308
Design................................................................................1308
Signals................................................................................1309
Settings..............................................................................1310
Monitored data...................................................................1310
Technical data....................................................................1312
Binary input/output module (IOM)............................................1313
Introduction.........................................................................1313
Design................................................................................1313
Signals................................................................................1316
Settings..............................................................................1317
Monitored data...................................................................1317
Technical data....................................................................1319
mA input module (MIM)...........................................................1321
Introduction.........................................................................1321
Design................................................................................1321
Signals................................................................................1322
Settings..............................................................................1323

37
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Monitored data...................................................................1324
Technical data....................................................................1325
Serial and LON communication module (SLM) ......................1325
Introduction.........................................................................1325
Design................................................................................1325
Technical data....................................................................1326
Galvanic RS485 communication module.................................1327
Introduction.........................................................................1327
Design................................................................................1327
Technical data....................................................................1328
Optical ethernet module (OEM)...............................................1329
Introduction.........................................................................1329
Functionality.......................................................................1329
Design................................................................................1329
Technical data....................................................................1330
Line data communication module (LDCM)..............................1330
Introduction.........................................................................1330
Design................................................................................1330
Technical data....................................................................1331
Galvanic X.21 line data communication (X.21-LDCM)............1332
Introduction.........................................................................1332
Design................................................................................1333
Functionality.......................................................................1335
Technical data....................................................................1335
GPS time synchronization module (GTM)...............................1335
Introduction.........................................................................1335
Design................................................................................1336
Monitored data...................................................................1336
Technical data....................................................................1336
GPS antenna...........................................................................1336
Introduction.........................................................................1336
Design................................................................................1336
Technical data....................................................................1338
IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B...........................1338
Introduction.........................................................................1338
Design................................................................................1338
Settings..............................................................................1339
Technical data....................................................................1339
Dimensions...................................................................................1340
Case without rear cover...........................................................1340
Case with rear cover................................................................1342
Flush mounting dimensions.....................................................1344
Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions.................................1345

38
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Wall mounting dimensions.......................................................1346

External resistor unit for high impedance differential
protection.................................................................................1346
Mounting alternatives...................................................................1348
Flush mounting........................................................................1348
Overview............................................................................1348
Mounting procedure for flush mounting..............................1349
19 panel rack mounting..........................................................1350
Overview............................................................................1350
Mounting procedure for 19 panel rack mounting...............1351
Wall mounting..........................................................................1351
Overview............................................................................1351
Mounting procedure for wall mounting...............................1352
How to reach the rear side of the IED................................1353
Side-by-side 19 rack mounting...............................................1353
Overview............................................................................1353
Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting..........1354
IED in the 670 series mounted with a RHGS6 case...........1354
Side-by-side flush mounting....................................................1355
Overview............................................................................1355
Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting.........1356
Technical data..............................................................................1356
Enclosure.................................................................................1356
Connection system..................................................................1357
Influencing factors...................................................................1357
Type tests according to standard............................................1358

Section 23 Labels.........................................................................1361
Labels on IED...............................................................................1361

Section 24 Connection diagrams.................................................1365

Section 25 IED and functionality tests..........................................1367

Section 26 Inverse time characteristics........................................1369

Application....................................................................................1369
Principle of operation....................................................................1372
Mode of operation....................................................................1372
Inverse characteristics..................................................................1377

Section 27 Glossary.....................................................................1407
Glossary.......................................................................................1407

39
Technical Manual
40
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 1
Introduction

Section 1 Introduction

1.1 This manual

The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists
function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and
technical data, sorted per function. The manual can be used as a technical reference
during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during
normal service.

1.2 Intended audience

This manual addresses system engineers and installation and commissioning

personnel, who use technical data during engineering, installation and
commissioning, and in normal service.

The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems,

protection equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logic in
the IEDs. The installation and commissioning personnel must have a basic
knowledge in handling electronic equipment.

41
Technical Manual
Section 1 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Introduction

1.3 Product documentation

1.3.1 Product documentation set

Deinstalling & disposal

Planning & purchase

Decommissioning
Commissioning

Maintenance
Engineering

Operation
Installing
Engineering manual
Installation manual

Commissioning manual
Operation manual

Application manual

Technical manual

Communication
protocol manual
Cyber security
deployment guideline
IEC07000220-4-en.vsd

IEC07000220 V4 EN

Figure 1: The intended use of manuals throughout the product lifecycle

The engineering manual contains instructions on how to engineer the IEDs using
the various tools available within the PCM600 software. The manual provides
instructions on how to set up a PCM600 project and insert IEDs to the project
structure. The manual also recommends a sequence for the engineering of
protection and control functions, LHMI functions as well as communication
engineering for IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850 and DNP3.

The installation manual contains instructions on how to install the IED. The
manual provides procedures for mechanical and electrical installation. The chapters
are organized in the chronological order in which the IED should be installed.

The commissioning manual contains instructions on how to commission the IED.

The manual can also be used by system engineers and maintenance personnel for
assistance during the testing phase. The manual provides procedures for the
checking of external circuitry and energizing the IED, parameter setting and

42
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 1
Introduction

configuration as well as verifying settings by secondary injection. The manual

describes the process of testing an IED in a substation which is not in service. The
chapters are organized in the chronological order in which the IED should be
commissioned. The relevant procedures may be followed also during the service
and maintenance activities.

The operation manual contains instructions on how to operate the IED once it has
been commissioned. The manual provides instructions for the monitoring,
controlling and setting of the IED. The manual also describes how to identify
disturbances and how to view calculated and measured power grid data to
determine the cause of a fault.

The application manual contains application descriptions and setting guidelines

sorted per function. The manual can be used to find out when and for what purpose
a typical protection function can be used. The manual can also provide assistance
for calculating settings.

The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists
function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and
technical data, sorted per function. The manual can be used as a technical reference
during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during
normal service.

The communication protocol manual describes the communication protocols

supported by the IED. The manual concentrates on the vendor-specific
implementations.

The point list manual describes the outlook and properties of the data points
specific to the IED. The manual should be used in conjunction with the
corresponding communication protocol manual.

The cyber security deployment guideline describes the process for handling cyber
security when communicating with the IED. Certification, Authorization with role
based access control, and product engineering for cyber security related events are
described and sorted by function. The guideline can be used as a technical
reference during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and
during normal service.

1.3.2 Document revision history

Document revision/date History
-/May 2014 First release

43
Technical Manual
Section 1 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Introduction

1.3.3 Related documents

Documents related to RET670 Identify number
Application manual 1MRK 504 138-UEN
Commissioning manual 1MRK 504 140-UEN
Product guide 1MRK 504 141-BEN
Technical manual 1MRK 504 139-UEN
Type test certificate 1MRK 504 141-TEN

670 series manuals Identify number

Operation manual 1MRK 500 118-UEN
Engineering manual 1MRK 511 308-UEN
Installation manual 1MRK 514 019-UEN
Communication protocol manual, IEC 1MRK 511 304-UEN
60870-5-103
Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 1MRK 511 302-UEN
Edition 1
Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 1MRK 511 303-UEN
Edition 2
Communication protocol manual, LON 1MRK 511 305-UEN
Communication protocol manual, SPA 1MRK 511 306-UEN
Accessories guide 1MRK 514 012-BEN
Cyber security deployment guideline 1MRK 511 309-UEN
Connection and Installation components 1MRK 513 003-BEN
Test system, COMBITEST 1MRK 512 001-BEN

1.4 Document symbols and conventions

1.4.1 Symbols

The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard

which could result in electrical shock.

The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could

result in personal injury.

The caution hot surface icon indicates important information or

warning about the temperature of product surfaces.

44
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 1
Introduction

The caution icon indicates important information or warning related

to the concept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence
of a hazard which could result in corruption of software or damage
to equipment or property.

The information icon alerts the reader of important facts and

conditions.

The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your
project or how to use a certain function.

Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to

understand that under certain operational conditions, operation of damaged
equipment may result in degraded process performance leading to personal injury
or death. It is important that the user fully complies with all warning and
cautionary notices.

1.4.2 Document conventions

Abbreviations and acronyms in this manual are spelled out in the glossary. The
glossary also contains definitions of important terms.
Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the
push button icons.
For example, to navigate between the options, use and .
HMI menu paths are presented in bold.
For example, select Main menu/Settings.
LHMI messages are shown in Courier font.
For example, to save the changes in non-volatile memory, select Yes and
press .
Parameter names are shown in italics.
For example, the function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.
Each function block symbol shows the available input/output signal.
the character ^ in front of an input/output signal name indicates that the
signal name may be customized using the PCM600 software.
the character * after an input/output signal name indicates that the signal
must be connected to another function block in the application
configuration to achieve a valid application configuration.
Logic diagrams describe the signal logic inside the function block and are
bordered by dashed lines.

45
Technical Manual
Section 1 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Introduction

Signals in frames with a shaded area on their right hand side represent
setting parameter signals that are only settable via the PST or LHMI.
If an internal signal path cannot be drawn with a continuous line, the
suffix -int is added to the signal name to indicate where the signal starts
and continues.
Signal paths that extend beyond the logic diagram and continue in
another diagram have the suffix -cont.

1.4.3 IEC61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping

Table 1: IEC61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping
Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes
AEGPVOC AEGGAPC AEGPVOC
AGSAL SECLLN0 AGSAL
AGSAL
ALMCALH ALMCALH
ALTIM ALTIM
ALTMS ALTMS
ALTRK ALTRK
BCZSPDIF BCZSPDIF BCZSPDIF
BCZTPDIF BCZTPDIF BCZTPDIF
BDCGAPC SWSGGIO BDCGAPC
BRCPTOC BRCPTOC BRCPTOC
BTIGAPC B16IFCVI BTIGAPC
BUSPTRC_B1 BBSPLLN0 LLN0
BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B2 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B3 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B4 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B5 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B6 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B7 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B8 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B9 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B10 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B11 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B12 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B13 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B14 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B15 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B16 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B17 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
Table continues on next page

46
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

BUSPTRC_B18 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B19 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B20 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B21 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B22 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B23 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B24 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUTPTRC_B1 BBTPLLN0 LLN0
BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B2 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B3 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B4 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B5 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B6 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B7 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B8 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BZNSPDIF_A BZNSPDIF BZNSGAPC
BZNSPDIF
BZNSPDIF_B BZNSPDIF BZNSGAPC
BZNSPDIF
BZNTPDIF_A BZNTPDIF BZNTGAPC
BZNTPDIF
BZNTPDIF_B BZNTPDIF BZNTGAPC
BZNTPDIF
CBPGAPC CBPLLN0 LLN0
CBPMMXU CBPPTRC
CBPPTRC HOLPTOV
HOLPTOV HPH1PTOV
HPH1PTOV PH3PTOC
PH3PTOC PH3PTUC
PH3PTUC RP3PDOP
RP3PDOP
CCPDSC CCRPLD CCPDSC
CCRBRF CCRBRF CCRBRF
CCSRBRF CCSRBRF CCSRBRF
CCSSPVC CCSRDIF CCSSPVC
CMMXU CMMXU CMMXU
CMSQI CMSQI CMSQI
COUVGAPC COUVLLN0 LLN0
COUVPTOV COUVPTOV
COUVPTUV COUVPTUV
Table continues on next page

47
Technical Manual
Section 1 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

CVGAPC GF2LLN0 LLN0
GF2MMXN GF2MMXN
GF2PHAR GF2PHAR
GF2PTOV GF2PTOV
GF2PTUC GF2PTUC
GF2PTUV GF2PTUV
GF2PVOC GF2PVOC
PH1PTRC PH1PTRC
CVMMXN CVMMXN CVMMXN
DPGAPC DPGGIO DPGAPC
DRPRDRE DRPRDRE DRPRDRE
ECPSCH ECPSCH ECPSCH
ECRWPSCH ECRWPSCH ECRWPSCH
EF4PTOC EF4LLN0 LLN0
EF4PTRC EF4PTRC
EF4RDIR EF4RDIR
GEN4PHAR GEN4PHAR
PH1PTOC PH1PTOC
EFPIOC EFPIOC EFPIOC
ETPMMTR ETPMMTR ETPMMTR
FDPSPDIS FDPSPDIS FDPSPDIS
FMPSPDIS FMPSPDIS FMPSPDIS
FRPSPDIS FPSRPDIS FPSRPDIS
FTAQFVR FTAQFVR FTAQFVR
FUFSPVC SDDRFUF FUFSPVC
GENPDIF GENPDIF LLN0
GENGAPC
GENPDIF
GENPHAR
GENPTRC
GOPPDOP GOPPDOP LLN0
GOPPDOP
PH1PTRC
GRPTTR GRPTTR LLN0
GRPTTR
GRPTUC
GSPTTR GSPTTR GSPTTR
GUPPDUP GUPPDUP LLN0
GUPPDUP
PH1PTRC
HZPDIF HZPDIF HZPDIF
INDCALCH INDCALH
ITBGAPC IB16FCVB ITBGAPC
L3CPDIF L3CPDIF LLN0
L3CGAPC
L3CPDIF
L3CPHAR
L3CPTRC
L4UFCNT L4UFCNT L4UFCNT
Table continues on next page

48
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

L6CPDIF L6CPDIF LLN0
L6CGAPC
L6CPDIF
L6CPHAR
L6CPTRC
LAPPGAPC LAPPLLN0 LLN0
LAPPPDUP LAPPPDUP
LAPPPUPF LAPPPUPF
LCCRPTRC LCCRPTRC LCCRPTRC
LCNSPTOC LCNSPTOC LCNSPTOC
LCNSPTOV LCNSPTOV LCNSPTOV
LCP3PTOC LCP3PTOC LCP3PTOC
LCP3PTUC LCP3PTUC LCP3PTUC
LCPTTR LCPTTR LCPTTR
LCZSPTOC LCZSPTOC LCZSPTOC
LCZSPTOV LCZSPTOV LCZSPTOV
LD0LLN0 LLN0 LLN0
LDLPSCH LDLPDIF LDLPSCH
LDRGFC STSGGIO LDRGFC
LEXPDIS LEXPDIS LLN0
LEXPDIS
LEXPTRC
LFPTTR LFPTTR LFPTTR
LMBRFLO LMBRFLO LMBRFLO
LOVPTUV LOVPTUV LOVPTUV
LPHD LPHD LPHD
LT3CPDIF LT3CPDIF LLN0
LT3CGAPC
LT3CPDIF
LT3CPHAR
LT3CPTRC
LT6CPDIF LT6CPDIF LLN0
LT6CGAPC
LT6CPDIF
LT6CPHAR
LT6CPTRC
MVGAPC MVGGIO MVGAPC
NS2PTOC NS2LLN0 LLN0
NS2PTOC NS2PTOC
NS2PTRC NS2PTRC
NS4PTOC EF4LLN0 LLN0
EF4PTRC EF4PTRC
EF4RDIR EF4RDIR
GEN4PHAR PH1PTOC
PH1PTOC
OC4PTOC OC4LLN0 LLN0
GEN4PHAR GEN4PHAR
PH3PTOC PH3PTOC
PH3PTRC PH3PTRC
Table continues on next page

49
Technical Manual
Section 1 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

OEXPVPH OEXPVPH OEXPVPH
OOSPPAM OOSPPAM LLN0
OOSPPAM
OOSPTRC
OV2PTOV GEN2LLN0 LLN0
OV2PTOV OV2PTOV
PH1PTRC PH1PTRC
PAPGAPC PAPGAPC PAPGAPC
PCFCNT PCGGIO PCFCNT
PH4SPTOC OCNDLLN0 LLN0
GEN4PHAR GEN4PHAR
PH1BPTOC PH1BPTOC
PH1PTRC PH1PTRC
PHPIOC PHPIOC PHPIOC
PRPSTATUS RCHLCCH RCHLCCH
SCHLCCH
PSLPSCH ZMRPSL PSLPSCH
PSPPPAM PSPPPAM LLN0
PSPPPAM
PSPPTRC
QCBAY QCBAY LLN0
QCRSV QCRSV QCRSV
REFPDIF REFPDIF REFPDIF
ROTIPHIZ ROTIPHIZ LLN0
ROTIPHIZ
ROTIPTRC
ROV2PTOV GEN2LLN0 LLN0
PH1PTRC PH1PTRC
ROV2PTOV ROV2PTOV
SAPFRC SAPFRC SAPFRC
SAPTOF SAPTOF SAPTOF
SAPTUF SAPTUF SAPTUF
SCCVPTOC SCCVPTOC SCCVPTOC
SCILO SCILO SCILO
SCSWI SCSWI SCSWI
SDEPSDE SDEPSDE LLN0
SDEPSDE
SDEPTOC
SDEPTOV
SDEPTRC
SESRSYN RSY1LLN0 LLN0
AUT1RSYN AUT1RSYN
MAN1RSYN MAN1RSYN
SYNRSYN SYNRSYN
SINGLELCCH SCHLCCH
SLGAPC SLGGIO SLGAPC
SMBRREC SMBRREC SMBRREC
SMPPTRC SMPPTRC SMPPTRC
Table continues on next page

50
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

SP16GAPC SP16GGIO SP16GAPC
SPC8GAPC SPC8GGIO SPC8GAPC
SPGAPC SPGGIO SPGAPC
SSCBR SSCBR SSCBR
SSIMG SSIMG SSIMG
SSIML SSIML SSIML
STBPTOC STBPTOC STBPTOC
STEFPHIZ STEFPHIZ STEFPHIZ
STTIPHIZ STTIPHIZ STTIPHIZ
SXCBR SXCBR SXCBR
SXSWI SXSWI SXSWI
T2WPDIF T2WPDIF LLN0
T2WGAPC
T2WPDIF
T2WPHAR
T2WPTRC
T3WPDIF T3WPDIF LLN0
T3WGAPC
T3WPDIF
T3WPHAR
T3WPTRC
TCLYLTC TCLYLTC TCLYLTC
TCMYLTC TCMYLTC TCMYLTC
TEIGAPC TEIGGIO TEIGAPC
TMAGAPC TMAGGIO TMAGAPC
TR1ATCC TR1ATCC TR1ATCC
TR8ATCC TR8ATCC TR8ATCC
TRPTTR TRPTTR TRPTTR
UV2PTUV GEN2LLN0 LLN0
PH1PTRC PH1PTRC
UV2PTUV UV2PTUV
VDCPTOV VDCPTOV VDCPTOV
VDSPVC VDRFUF VDSPVC
VMMXU VMMXU VMMXU
VMSQI VMSQI VMSQI
VNMMXU VNMMXU VNMMXU
VRPVOC VRLLN0 LLN0
PH1PTRC PH1PTRC
PH1PTUV PH1PTUV
VRPVOC VRPVOC
VSGAPC VSGGIO VSGAPC
WRNCALH WRNCALH
ZC1PPSCH ZPCPSCH ZPCPSCH
ZC1WPSCH ZPCWPSCH ZPCWPSCH
Table continues on next page

51
Technical Manual
Section 1 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

ZCLCPSCH ZCLCPLAL LLN0
ZCLCPSCH
ZCPSCH ZCPSCH ZCPSCH
ZCRWPSCH ZCRWPSCH ZCRWPSCH
ZCVPSOF ZCVPSOF ZCVPSOF
ZGVPDIS ZGVLLN0 LLN0
PH1PTRC PH1PTRC
ZGVPDIS ZGVPDIS
ZGVPTUV ZGVPTUV
ZMCAPDIS ZMCAPDIS ZMCAPDIS
ZMCPDIS ZMCPDIS ZMCPDIS
ZMFCPDIS ZMFCLLN0 LLN0
PSFPDIS PSFPDIS
ZMFPDIS ZMFPDIS
ZMFPDIS ZMFLLN0 LLN0
PSFPDIS PSFPDIS
ZMFPDIS ZMFPDIS
ZMHPDIS ZMHPDIS ZMHPDIS
ZMMAPDIS ZMMAPDIS ZMMAPDIS
ZMMPDIS ZMMPDIS ZMMPDIS
ZMQAPDIS ZMQAPDIS ZMQAPDIS
ZMQPDIS ZMQPDIS ZMQPDIS
ZMRAPDIS ZMRAPDIS ZMRAPDIS
ZMRPDIS ZMRPDIS ZMRPDIS
ZMRPSB ZMRPSB ZMRPSB
ZSMGAPC ZSMGAPC ZSMGAPC

52
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 2
Available functions

Section 2 Available functions

2.1 Main protection functions

2 = number of basic instances

0-3 = option quantities
3- = optional function included in packages A03 (refer to ordering details)
A03

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Transformer

RET670 (A10)

RET670 (A30)

RET670 (B30)

RET670 (A40)

RET670 (B40)

RET670 (A25)
RET670

Differential protection
T2WPDIF 87T Transformer 1-2 1 1
differential
protection, two
winding
T3WPDIF 87T Transformer 1-2 1 1
differential
protection, three
winding
HZPDIF 87 1Ph high 0-6 1 3-A02 3-A02 3-A02 3-A02
impedance
differential
protection
REFPDIF 87N Restricted earth 0-3 1 2 2 2-B 2-B
fault protection, low 1-A01 1-A01
impedance
LDRGFC 11RE Additional security 0-1
L logic for differential
protection
Impedance protection
ZMQPDIS, 21 Distance protection 0-5 4-B12 4-B12 4-B12 4-B12
ZMQAPDIS zone, quadrilateral
characteristic
ZDRDIR 21D Directional 0-2 2-B12 2-B12 2-B12 2-B12
impedance
quadrilateral
ZMCAPDIS 21 Additional distance
measuring zone,
quadrilateral
characteristic
Table continues on next page

53
Technical Manual
Section 2 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Available functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Transformer

RET670 (A10)

RET670 (A30)

RET670 (B30)

RET670 (A40)

RET670 (B40)

RET670 (A25)
RET670

ZMCPDIS, 21 Distance 0-5

ZMCAPDIS measuring zone,
quadrilateral
characteristic for
series
compensated lines
ZDSRDIR 21D Directional 0-2
impedance
quadrilateral,
including series
compensation
FDPSPDIS 21 Phase selection, 0-2 2-B12 2-B12 2-B12 2-B12
quadrilateral
characteristic with
fixed angle
ZMHPDIS 21 Fullscheme 0-5 4-B13 4-B13 4-B13 4-B13
distance protection,
mho characteristic
ZMMPDIS, 21 Fullscheme 0-5 4-B13 4-B13 4-B13 4-B13
ZMMAPDIS distance protection,
quadrilateral for
earth faults
ZDMRDIR 21D Directional 0-2 2-B13 2-B13 2-B13 2-B13
impedance
element for mho
characteristic
ZDARDIR Additional distance 0-1 1-B13 1-B13 1-B13 1-B13
protection
directional function
for earth faults
ZSMGAPC Mho impedance 0-1 1-B13 1-B13 1-B13 1-B13
supervision logic
FMPSPDIS 21 Faulty phase 0-2 2-B13 2-B13 2-B13 2-B13
identification with
load
enchroachment
ZMRPDIS, 21 Distance protection 0-5
ZMRAPDIS zone, quadrilateral
characteristic,
separate settings
FRPSPDIS 21 Phase selection, 0-2
quadrilateral
characteristic with
fixed angle
ZMFPDIS 21 High speed 01
distance protection
ZMFCPDIS 21 High speed 01
distance protection
for series
compensated lines
Table continues on next page

54
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 2
Available functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Transformer

RET670 (A10)

RET670 (A30)

RET670 (B30)

RET670 (A40)

RET670 (B40)

RET670 (A25)
RET670

ZMRPSB 68 Power swing 0-1 1-B12 1-B12 1-B12 1-B12

detection 1-B13 1-B13 1-B13 1-B13
PSLPSCH Power swing logic 0-1
PSPPPAM 78 Pole slip/out-of- 0-1
step protection
OOSPPAM 78 Out-of-step 01
protection
PPLPHIZ Phase preference 0-1
logic
ZGVPDIS 21 Underimpedance 01 1-B14 1-B14 1-B14 1-B14
for generators and
transformers

2.2 Back-up protection functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function Transformer

description
RET670 (A10)

RET670 (A30)

RET670 (B30)

RET670 (A40)

RET670 (B40)

RET670 (A25)
RET670

Current protection
PHPIOC 50 Instantaneous 0-8 3 2 2 3 3 2-C19
phase
overcurrent
protection
OC4PTOC 51_671) Four step phase 0-8 3 2 2 3 3 2-C19
overcurrent
protection
EFPIOC 50N Instantaneous 0-8 3 2 2 3 3 2-C19
residual
overcurrent
protection
EF4PTOC 51N Four step 0-8 3 2 2 3 3 2-C19
67N2) residual
overcurrent
protection
NS4PTOC 46I2 Four step 0-8 2-C42 2-C42 2-C42 3-C43 3-C43 2-C19
directional
negative phase
sequence
overcurrent
protection
Table continues on next page

55
Technical Manual
Section 2 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Available functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function Transformer

description

RET670 (A10)

RET670 (A30)

RET670 (B30)

RET670 (A40)

RET670 (B40)

RET670 (A25)
RET670

SDEPSDE 67N Sensitive 0-3 1 1-C16 1-C16 1-C16 1-C16 1-C16

directional
residual
overcurrent and
power protection
LCPTTR 26 Thermal overload 02
protection, one
time constant,
Celsius
LFPTTR 26 Thermal overload 02
protection, one
time constant,
Fahrenheit
TRPTTR 49 Thermal overload 0-6 1 1B 1B 2B 2B
protection, two 1-C05 1-C05 1-C05 1-C05
time constant
CCRBRF 50BF Breaker failure 0-6 3 2 4 3 6
protection
CCPDSC 52PD Pole discordance 0-2 1 2 1 2
protection
GUPPDUP 37 Directional 0-2 1-C17 1-C17 1-C17 1-C17
underpower
protection
GOPPDOP 32 Directional 0-2 1-C17 1-C17 1-C17 1-C17
overpower
protection
BRCPTOC 46 Broken 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
conductor check
CBPGAPC Capacitor bank 0-6
protection
NS2PTOC 46I2 Negative 0-2
sequence time
overcurrent
protection for
machines
VRPVOC 51V Voltage 0-3
restrained
overcurrent
protection

Voltage protection
UV2PTUV 27 Two step 0-3 1-D01 1B 1B 1B 1B 2-D02
undervoltage 1-D01 1-D01 2-D02 2-D02
protection
OV2PTOV 59 Two step 0-3 1-D01 1B 1B 1B 1B 2-D02
overvoltage 1-D01 1-D01 1-D02 1-D02
protection
Table continues on next page

56
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 2
Available functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function Transformer

description

RET670 (A10)

RET670 (A30)

RET670 (B30)

RET670 (A40)

RET670 (B40)

RET670 (A25)
RET670

ROV2PTOV 59N Two step 0-3 1-D01 1B 1B 1B 1B 2-D02

residual 1-D01 1-D01 1-D02 1-D02
overvoltage
protection
OEXPVPH 24 Overexcitation 0-2 1-D03 1-D03 2-D04 2-D04
protection
VDCPTOV 60 Voltage 0-2 2 2 2 2 2 2
differential
protection
LOVPTUV 27 Loss of voltage 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
check

Frequency protection
SAPTUF 81 Underfrequency 0-6 6-E01 6-E01 6-E01 6-E01 6-E01
protection
SAPTOF 81 Overfrequency 0-6 6-E01 6-E01 6-E01 6-E01 6-E01
protection
SAPFRC 81 Rate-of-change 0-6 6-E01 6-E01 6-E01 6-E01 6-E01
frequency
protection

Multipurpose protection
CVGAPC General current 0-9 6-F02 6-F02 6-F02 6-F02
and voltage
protection

General calculation
SMAIHPAC Multipurpose filter 0-6

1) 67 requires voltage
2) 67N requires voltage

57
Technical Manual
Section 2 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Available functions

2.3 Control and monitoring functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Transformer

RET670 (A10)

RET670 (A30)

RET670 (B30)

RET670 (A40)

RET670 (B40)

RET670 (A25)
RET670

Control
SESRSYN 25 Synchrocheck, 0-6 1 1 1-B, 2- 1-B, 3- 1-B, 4-
energizing check and H01 H02 H03
synchronizing
APC30 3 Apparatus control for 0-1 1-H09 1-H09 1-H09 1-H09 1-H09
up to 6 bays, max 30
apparatuses (6CBs)
incl. interlocking
QCBAY Apparatus control 1+5/APC30 1 1+5/ 1+5/ 1+5/ 1+5/ 1+5/
APC3 APC3 APC3 APC3 APC3
0 0 0 0 0
LOCREM Handling of LRswitch 1+5/APC30 1 1+5/ 1+5/ 1+5/ 1+5/ 1+5/
positions APC3 APC3 APC3 APC3 APC3
0 0 0 0 0
LOCREMCTRL LHMI control of PSTO 1+5/APC30 1 1+5/ 1+5/ 1+5/ 1+5/ 1+5/
APC3 APC3 APC3 APC3 APC3
0 0 0 0 0
TR1ATCC 90 Automatic voltage 0-4 1-H11 1-H11 1-H11, 1-H11, 2
control for tap 2-H16 2-H16 2-H16
changer, single control
TR8ATCC 90 Automatic voltage 0-4 1-H15 1-H15 1-H15, 1-H15, 2
control for tap 2-H18 2-H18 2-H18
changer, parallel
control
TCMYLTC 84 Tap changer control 0-4 4 4 4 4 4
and supervision, 6
binary inputs
TCLYLTC 84 Tap changer control 0-4 4 4 4 4 4
and supervision, 32
binary inputs
SLGAPC Logic rotating switch 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
for function selection
and LHMI presentation
VSGAPC Selector mini switch 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
DPGAPC Generic 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
communication
function for Double
Point indication
SPC8GAPC Single point generic 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
control 8 signals
AUTOBITS AutomationBits, 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
command function for
DNP3.0
SINGLECMD Single command, 16 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
signals
Table continues on next page

58
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 2
Available functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Transformer

RET670 (A10)

RET670 (A30)

RET670 (B30)

RET670 (A40)

RET670 (B40)

RET670 (A25)
RET670

VCTRSEND Horizontal 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
communication via
GOOSE for VCTR
GOOSEVCTRR Horizontal 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
CV communication via
GOOSE for VCTR
I103CMD Function commands 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
for IEC 60870-5-103
I103GENCMD Function commands 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
generic for IEC
60870-5-103
I103POSCMD IED commands with 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
position and select for
IEC 60870-5-103
I103IEDCMD IED commands for 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
IEC 60870-5-103
I103USRCMD Function commands 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
user defined for IEC
60870-5-103
Secondary system supervision
CCSSPVC 87 Current circuit 0-5 2 3 3 5 4
supervision
FUFSPVC Fuse failure 0-4 1 3 3 3 3
supervision
VDSPVC 60 Fuse failure 0-4 1-G03 1-G03 1-G03 1-G03 1-G03 1-G03
supervision based on
voltage difference
Logic
SMPPTRC 94 Tripping logic 1-6 6 6 6 6 6 6
TMAGAPC Trip matrix logic 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
ALMCALH Logic for group alarm 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
WRNCALH Logic for group 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
warning
INDCALH Logic for group 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
indication
AND, OR, INV, Configurable logic 40-280 40-28 40-28 40-28 40-28 40-28 40-28
PULSETIMER, blocks 0 0 0 0 0 0
GATE,
TIMERSET,
XOR, LLD,
SRMEMORY,
RSMEMORY
Table continues on next page

59
Technical Manual
Section 2 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Available functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Transformer

RET670 (A10)

RET670 (A30)

RET670 (B30)

RET670 (A40)

RET670 (B40)

RET670 (A25)
RET670

ANDQT, ORQT, Configurable logic 01

INVERTERQT, blocks Q/T
XORQT,
SRMEMORYQ
T,
RSMEMORYQ
T,
TIMERSETQT,
PULSETIMERQ
T, INVALIDQT,
INDCOMBSPQ
T,
INDEXTSPQT
SLGAPC, Extension logic 01
VSGAPC, AND, package
OR,
PULSETIMER,
GATE,
TIMERSET,
XOR, LLD,
SRMEMORY,
INV
FXDSIGN Fixed signal function 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
block
B16I Boolean 16 to Integer 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
conversion
BTIGAPC Boolean 16 to Integer 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
conversion with Logic
Node representation
IB16 Integer to Boolean 16 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
conversion
ITBGAPC Integer to Boolean 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
conversion with Logic
Node representation
TEIGAPC Elapsed time 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
integrator with limit
transgression and
overflow supervision
Monitoring
CVMMXN, Measurements 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
CMMXU,
VMMXU,
CMSQI,
VMSQI,
VNMMXU
AISVBAS Function block for 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
service value
presentation of
secondary analog
inputs
EVENT Event function 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
Table continues on next page

60
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 2
Available functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Transformer

RET670 (A10)

RET670 (A30)

RET670 (B30)

RET670 (A40)

RET670 (B40)

RET670 (A25)
RET670

DRPRDRE, Disturbance report 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

A1RADR,
A2RADR,
A3RADR,
A4RADR,
B1RBDR,
B2RBDR,
B3RBDR,
B4RBDR,
B5RBDR,
B6RBDR
SPGAPC Generic 64 64 64 64 64 64 64
communication
function for Single
Point indication
SP16GAPC Generic 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
communication
function for Single
Point indication 16
inputs
MVGAPC Generic 24 24 24 24 24 24 24
communication
function for Measured
Value
BINSTATREP Logical signal status 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
report
RANGE_XP Measured value 66 66 66 66 66 66 66
expander block
SSIMG 63 Gas medium 21 21 21 21 21 21 21
supervision
SSIML 71 Liquid medium 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
supervision
SSCBR Circuit breaker 0-6 3-M13 2-M12 4-M14 3-M13 6-M15
monitoring
I103MEAS Measurands for IEC 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
60870-5-103
I103MEASUSR Measurands user 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
defined signals for
IEC 60870-5-103
I103AR Function status auto- 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
recloser for IEC
60870-5-103
I103EF Function status earth- 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
fault for IEC
60870-5-103
I103FLTPROT Function status fault 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
protection for IEC
60870-5-103
I103IED IED status for IEC 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
60870-5-103
Table continues on next page

61
Technical Manual
Section 2 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Available functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Transformer

RET670 (A10)

RET670 (A30)

RET670 (B30)

RET670 (A40)

RET670 (B40)

RET670 (A25)
RET670

I103SUPERV Supervison status for 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

IEC 60870-5-103
I103USRDEF Status for user 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
defiend signals for
IEC 60870-5-103
L4UFCNT Event counter with 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
limit supervision
Metering
PCFCNT Pulse-counter logic 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
ETPMMTR Function for energy 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
calculation and
demand handling

2.4 Communication

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Transformer

RET670 (A10)

RET670 (A30)

RET670 (B30)

RET670 (A40)

RET670 (B40)

RET670 (A25)
RET670

Station communication
LONSPA, SPA SPA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
communication
protocol
ADE LON 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
communication
protocol
HORZCOMM Network variables 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
via LON
PROTOCOL Operation 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
selection between
SPA and IEC
60870-5-103 for
SLM
RS485PROT Operation 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
selection for
RS485
RS485GEN RS485 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
DNPGEN DNP3.0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
communication
general protocol
Table continues on next page

62
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 2
Available functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Transformer

RET670 (A10)

RET670 (A30)

RET670 (B30)

RET670 (A40)

RET670 (B40)

RET670 (A25)
RET670

DNPGENTCP DNP3.0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
communication
general TCP
protocol
CHSERRS48 DNP3.0 for 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 EIA-485
communication
protocol
CH1TCP, DNP3.0 for TCP/ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CH2TCP, IP communication
CH3TCP, protocol
CH4TCP
CHSEROPT DNP3.0 for TCP/ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
IP and EIA-485
communication
protocol
MST1TCP, DNP3.0 for serial 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
MST2TCP, communication
MST3TCP, protocol
MST4TCP
DNPFREC DNP3.0 fault 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
records for TCP/IP
and EIA-485
communication
protocol
IEC61850-8-1 Parameter setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
function for IEC
61850
GOOSEINTLK Horizontal 59 59 59 59 59 59 59
RCV communication via
GOOSE for
interlocking
GOOSEBINR Goose binary 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
CV receive
GOOSEDPRC GOOSE function 64 64 64 64 64 64 64
V block to receive a
double point value
GOOSEINTR GOOSE function 32 32 32 32 32 32 32
CV block to receive an
integer value
GOOSEMVR GOOSE function 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
CV block to receive a
measurand value
GOOSESPRC GOOSE function 64 64 64 64 64 64 64
V block to receive a
single point value
GOOSEVCTR GOOSE VCTR 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CONF configuration for
send and receive
Table continues on next page

63
Technical Manual
Section 2 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Available functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Transformer

RET670 (A10)

RET670 (A30)

RET670 (B30)

RET670 (A40)

RET670 (B40)

RET670 (A25)
RET670

VCTRSEND Horizontal 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
communication via
GOOSE for VCTR
GOOSEVCTR Horizontal 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
RCV communication via
GOOSE for VCTR
MULTICMDR Multiple command 60/10 60/10 60/10 60/10 60/10 60/10 60/10
CV, and transmit
MULTICMDS
ND
FRONT, Ethernet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
LANABI, configuration of
LANAB, links
LANCDI,
LANCD
GATEWAY Ethernet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
configuration of
link one
OPTICAL103 IEC 60870-5-103 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Optical serial
communication
RS485103 IEC 60870-5-103 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
serial
communication for
RS485
AGSAL Generic security 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
application
component
LD0LLN0 IEC 61850 LD0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
LLN0
SYSLLN0 IEC 61850 SYS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
LLN0
LPHD Physical device 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
information
PCMACCS IED Configuration 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Protocol
SECALARM Component for 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
mapping security
events on
protocols such as
DNP3 and IEC103
FSTACCS Field service tool 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
access via SPA
protocol over
ethernet
communication
ACTIVLOG Activity logging 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
parameters
ALTRK Service Tracking 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Table continues on next page

64
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 2
Available functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Transformer

RET670 (A10)

RET670 (A30)

RET670 (B30)

RET670 (A40)

RET670 (B40)

RET670 (A25)
RET670

SINGLELCCH Single ethernet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

port link status
PRPSTATUS Dual ethernet port 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
link status
Process bus
communication
IEC 61850-9-2 1)
PRP IEC 62439-3 0-1 1-P03 1-P03 1-P03 1-P03 1-P03 1-P03
parallel
redundancy
protocol
Remote communication
Binary signal 6/36 6/36 6/36 6/36 6/36 6/36 6/36
transfer receive/
transmit
Transmission of 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
analog data from
LDCM
Receive binary 6/3/3 6/3/3 6/3/3 6/3/3 6/3/3 6/3/3 6/3/3
status from remote
LDCM
Scheme communication
ECPSCH 85 Scheme 0-1 1 1 1 1
communication
logic for residual
overcurrent
protection
ECRWPSCH 85 Current reversal 0-1 1 1 1 1
and weak-end
infeed logic for
residual
overcurrent
protection

1) Only included for 9-2LE products

2.5 Basic IED functions

Table 2: Basic IED functions

IEC 61850 or function Description
name
INTERRSIG Self supervision with internal event list
SELFSUPEVLST Self supervision with internal event list
TIMESYNCHGEN Time synchronization module
Table continues on next page

65
Technical Manual
Section 2 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Available functions

IEC 61850 or function Description

name
SYNCHBIN, Time synchronization
SYNCHCAN,
SYNCHCMPPS,
SYNCHLON,
SYNCHPPH,
SYNCHPPS,
SYNCHSNTP,
SYNCHSPA,
SYNCHCMPPS
TIMEZONE Time synchronization
DSTBEGIN, GPS time synchronization module
DSTENABLE, DSTEND
IRIG-B Time synchronization
SETGRPS Number of setting groups
ACTVGRP Parameter setting groups
TESTMODE Test mode functionality
CHNGLCK Change lock function
SMBI Signal matrix for binary inputs
SMBO Signal matrix for binary outputs
SMMI Signal matrix for mA inputs
SMAI1 - SMAI20 Signal matrix for analog inputs
3PHSUM Summation block 3 phase
ATHSTAT Authority status
ATHCHCK Authority check
AUTHMAN Authority management
FTPACCS FTP access with password
SPACOMMMAP SPA communication mapping
SPATD Date and time via SPA protocol
DOSFRNT Denial of service, frame rate control for front port
DOSLANAB Denial of service, frame rate control for OEM port AB
DOSLANCD Denial of service, frame rate control for OEM port CD
DOSSCKT Denial of service, socket flow control
GBASVAL Global base values for settings
PRIMVAL Primary system values
ALTMS Time master supervision
ALTIM Time management
ALTRK Service tracking
ACTIVLOG Activity logging parameters
FSTACCS Field service tool access via SPA protocol over ethernet communication
PCMACCS IED Configuration Protocol
SECALARM Component for mapping security events on protocols such as DNP3 and IEC103
DNPGEN DNP3.0 communication general protocol
Table continues on next page

66
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 2
Available functions

IEC 61850 or function Description

name
DNPGENTCP DNP3.0 communication general TCP protocol
CHSEROPT DNP3.0 for TCP/IP and EIA-485 communication protocol
MSTSER DNP3.0 for serial communication protocol
OPTICAL103 IEC 60870-5-103 Optical serial communication
RS485103 IEC 60870-5-103 serial communication for RS485
IEC61850-8-1 Parameter setting function for IEC 61850
HORZCOMM Network variables via LON
LONSPA SPA communication protocol
LEDGEN General LED indication part for LHMI

67
Technical Manual
68
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 3
Analog inputs

Section 3 Analog inputs

3.1 Introduction

Analog input channels must be configured and set properly in order to get correct
measurement results and correct protection operations. For power measuring and
all directional and differential functions the directions of the input currents must be
defined in order to reflect the way the current transformers are installed/connected
in the field ( primary and secondary connections ). Measuring and protection
algorithms in the IED use primary system quantities. Setting values are in primary
quantities as well and it is important to set the data about the connected current and
voltage transformers properly.

A reference PhaseAngleRef can be defined to facilitate service values reading. This

analog channels phase angle will always be fixed to zero degrees and all other
angle information will be shown in relation to this analog input. During testing and
commissioning of the IED the reference channel can be changed to facilitate testing
and service values reading.

The IED has the ability to receive analog values from primary
equipment, that are sampled by Merging units (MU) connected to a
process bus, via the IEC 61850-9-2 LE protocol.

The availability of VT inputs depends on the ordered transformer

input module (TRM) type.

3.2 Function block

The function blocks are not represented in the configuration tool.

The signals appear only in the SMT tool when a TRM is included in
the configuration with the function selector tool. In the SMT tool
they can be mapped to the desired virtual input (SMAI) of the IED
and used internally in the configuration.

69
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Analog inputs

3.3 Signals

Table 3: TRM_12I Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analogue current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analogue current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analogue current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analogue current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analogue current input 6
CH7(I) STRING Analogue current input 7
CH8(I) STRING Analogue current input 8
CH9(I) STRING Analogue current input 9
CH10(I) STRING Analogue current input 10
CH11(I) STRING Analogue current input 11
CH12(I) STRING Analogue current input 12

Table 4: TRM_6I_6U Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analogue current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analogue current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analogue current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analogue current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analogue current input 6
CH7(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 7
CH8(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 8
CH9(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 9
CH10(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 10
CH11(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 11
CH12(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 12

Table 5: TRM_6I Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analogue current input 2
Table continues on next page

70
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 3
Analog inputs

Name Type Description

CH3(I) STRING Analogue current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analogue current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analogue current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analogue current input 6

Table 6: TRM_7I_5U Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analogue current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analogue current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analogue current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analogue current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analogue current input 6
CH7(I) STRING Analogue current input 7
CH8(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 8
CH9(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 9
CH10(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 10
CH11(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 11
CH12(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 12

Table 7: TRM_9I_3U Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analogue current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analogue current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analogue current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analogue current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analogue current input 6
CH7(I) STRING Analogue current input 7
CH8(I) STRING Analogue current input 8
CH9(I) STRING Analogue current input 9
CH10(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 10
CH11(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 11
CH12(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 12

71
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Analog inputs

3.4 Settings

Dependent on ordered IED type.

72
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 3
Analog inputs

Table 8: AISVBAS Non group settings (basic)

73
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Analog inputs

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

PhaseAngleRef TRM40-Ch1 - - TRM40-Ch1 Reference channel for phase angle
TRM40-Ch2 presentation
TRM40-Ch3
TRM40-Ch4
TRM40-Ch5
TRM40-Ch6
TRM40-Ch7
TRM40-Ch8
TRM40-Ch9
TRM40-Ch10
TRM40-Ch11
TRM40-Ch12
TRM41-Ch1
TRM41-Ch2
TRM41-Ch3
TRM41-Ch4
TRM41-Ch5
TRM41-Ch6
TRM41-Ch7
TRM41-Ch8
TRM41-Ch9
TRM41-Ch10
TRM41-Ch11
TRM41-Ch12
MU1-L1I
MU1-L2I
MU1-L3I
MU1-L4I
MU1-L1U
MU1-L2U
MU1-L3U
MU1-L4U
MU2-L1I
MU2-L2I
MU2-L3I
MU2-L4I
MU2-L1U
MU2-L2U
MU2-L3U
MU2-L4U
MU3-L1I
MU3-L2I
MU3-L3I
MU3-L4I
MU3-L1U
MU3-L2U
MU3-L3U
MU3-L4U
MU4-L1I
MU4-L2I
MU4-L3I
MU4-L4I
MU4-L1U
MU4-L2U
MU4-L3U
MU4-L4U
MU5-L1I
MU5-L2I
MU5-L3I
MU5-L4I
MU5-L1U
MU5-L2U
MU5-L3U
MU5-L4U
MU6-L1I
MU6-L2I
MU6-L3I
MU6-L4I
74 MU6-L1U
MU6-L2U Technical Manual
MU6-L3U
MU6-L4U
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 3
Analog inputs

Table 9: TRM_12I Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint7 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec7 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim7 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint8 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec8 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim8 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint9 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec9 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim9 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint10 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec10 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim10 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint11 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec11 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
Table continues on next page

75
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Analog inputs

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CTprim11 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint12 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec12 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim12 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current

Table 10: TRM_6I_6U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec7 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim7 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec8 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim8 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec9 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim9 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec11 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
Table continues on next page

76
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 3
Analog inputs

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

VTprim11 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec12 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim12 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage

Table 11: TRM_6I Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current

Table 12: TRM_7I_5U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
Table continues on next page

77
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Analog inputs

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint7 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec7 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim7 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec8 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim8 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec9 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim9 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec11 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim11 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec12 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim12 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage

Table 13: TRM_9I_3U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
Table continues on next page

78
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 3
Analog inputs

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint7 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec7 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim7 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint8 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec8 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim8 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint9 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec9 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim9 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec11 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim11 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec12 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim12 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage

3.5 Monitored data

Table 14: AISVBAS Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
Status INTEGER 0=Ok - Service value status
1=Error
2=AngRefLow
3=Uncorrelated

79
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Analog inputs

Table 15: TRM_12I Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module
1=Error status

Table 16: TRM_6I_6U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module
1=Error status

Table 17: TRM_6I Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module
1=Error status

Table 18: TRM_7I_5U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module
1=Error status

Table 19: TRM_9I_3U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module
1=Error status

3.6 Operation principle

The direction of a current depends on the connection of the CT. The main CTs are
typically star connected and can be connected with the star point towards the object
or away from the object. This information must be set in the IED.

The convention of the directionality is defined as follows:

Positive value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction
into the object.
Negative value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction
out from the object.

For directional functions the directional conventions are defined as follows (see
figure 2)

80
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 3
Analog inputs

Forward means the direction is into the object.

Reverse means the direction is out from the object.

Definition of direction Definition of direction

for directional functions for directional functions
Reverse Forward Forward Reverse
Protected Object
Line, transformer, etc
e.g. P, Q, I e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is Measured quantity is
positive when flowing positive when flowing
towards the object towards the object

Set parameter Set parameter

CTStarPoint CTStarPoint
Correct Setting is Correct Setting is
"ToObject" "FromObject"

en05000456.vsd
IEC05000456 V1 EN

Figure 2: Internal convention of the directionality in the IED

If the settings of the primary CT is correct, that is CTStarPoint set as FromObject

or ToObject according to the plant condition, then a positive quantity always flows
towards the protected object, and a Forward direction always looks towards the
protected object.

The settings of the IED is performed in primary values. The ratios of the main CTs
and VTs are therefore basic data for the IED. The user has to set the rated
secondary and primary currents and voltages of the CTs and VTs to provide the
IED with their rated ratios.

The CT and VT ratio and the name on respective channel is done under Main
menu/Hardware/Analog modules in the Parameter Settings tool or on the HMI.

81
Technical Manual
82
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 4
Binary input and output modules

Section 4 Binary input and output modules

4.1 Binary input

4.1.1 Binary input debounce filter

The debounce filter eliminates bounces and short disturbances on a binary input.

A time counter is used for filtering. The time counter is increased once in a
millisecond when a binary input is high, or decreased when a binary input is low. A
new debounced binary input signal is forwarded when the time counter reaches the
set DebounceTime value and the debounced input value is high or when the time
counter reaches 0 and the debounced input value is low. The default setting of
DebounceTime is 1 ms.

The binary input ON-event gets the time stamp of the first rising edge, after which
the counter does not reach 0 again. The same happens when the signal goes down
to 0 again.

4.1.2 Oscillation filter

Binary input wiring can be very long in substations and there are electromagnetic
fields from for example nearby breakers. An oscillation filter is used to reduce the
disturbance from the system when a binary input starts oscillating.

An oscillation counter counts the debounced signal state changes during 1 s. If the
counter value is greater than the set value OscBlock, the input signal is blocked.
The input signal is ignored until the oscillation counter value during 1 s is below
the set value OscRelease.

4.1.3 Settings

4.1.3.1 Setting parameters for binary input modules

Table 20: BIM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On
DebounceTime 0.001 - 0.020 s 0.001 0.001 Debounce time for binary inputs
OscBlock 1 - 40 Hz 1 40 Oscillation block limit
OscRelease 1 - 30 Hz 1 30 Oscillation release limit

83
Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Binary input and output modules

4.1.3.2 Setting parameters for binary input/output module

Table 21: IOMIN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Binary input/output module in operation
On (On) or not (Off)
DebounceTime 0.001 - 0.020 s 0.001 0.001 Debounce time for binary inputs
OscBlock 1 - 40 Hz 1 40 Oscillation block limit
OscRelease 1 - 30 Hz 1 30 Oscillation release limit

84
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Section 5 Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.1 Local HMI screen behaviour

5.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Local HMI screen behaviour SCREEN - -

5.1.2 Settings
Table 22: SCREEN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
DisplayTimeout 1 - 120 Min 1 10 Local HMI display timeout
ContrastLevel -100 - 100 % 10 0 Contrast level for display
DefaultScreen - 0 Default screen
EvListSrtOrder Latest on top - - Latest on top Sort order of event list
Oldest on top
AutoIndicationDRP Off - - Off Automatic indication of disturbance report
On
SubstIndSLD No - - No Substitute indication on single line
Yes diagram
InterlockIndSLD No - - No Interlock indication on single line diagram
Yes
BypassCommands No - - No Enable bypass of commands
Yes

5.2 Local HMI signals

5.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Local HMI signals LHMICTRL - -

5.2.2 Function block

85
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

LHMICTRL
CLRLEDS HMI-ON
RED-S
YELLOW-S
YELLOW-F
CLRPULSE
LEDSCLRD

IEC09000320-1-en.vsd
IEC09000320 V1 EN

Figure 3: LHMICTRL function block

5.2.3 Signals
Table 23: LHMICTRL Input signals
Name Type Default Description
CLRLEDS BOOLEAN 0 Input to clear the LCD-HMI LEDs

Table 24: LHMICTRL Output signals

Name Type Description
HMI-ON BOOLEAN Backlight of the LCD display is active
RED-S BOOLEAN Red LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-S BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-F BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is flashing
CLRPULSE BOOLEAN A pulse is provided when the LEDs on the LCD-
HMI are cleared
LEDSCLRD BOOLEAN Active when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are not
active

5.3 Basic part for LED indication module

5.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Basic part for LED indication module LEDGEN - -
Basic part for LED indication module GRP1_LED1 - - -
GRP1_LED15
GRP2_LED1 -
GRP2_LED15
GRP3_LED1 -
GRP3_LED15

5.3.2 Function block

86
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

LEDGEN
BLOCK NEWIND
RESET ACK

IEC09000321-1-en.vsd
IEC09000321 V1 EN

Figure 4: LEDGEN function block

GRP1_LED1
^HM1L01R
^HM1L01Y
^HM1L01G
IEC09000322 V1 EN

Figure 5: GRP1_LED1 function block

The GRP1_LED1 function block is an example, all 15 LED in each of group 1 - 3

has a similar function block.

5.3.3 Signals
Table 25: LEDGEN Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Input to block the operation of the LEDs
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input to acknowledge/reset the indication LEDs

Table 26: LEDGEN Output signals

Name Type Description
NEWIND BOOLEAN New indication signal if any LED indication input
is set
ACK BOOLEAN A pulse is provided when the LEDs are
acknowledged

Table 27: GRP1_LED1 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
HM1L01R BOOLEAN 0 Red indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1
HM1L01Y BOOLEAN 0 Yellow indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1
HM1L01G BOOLEAN 0 Green indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1

87
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.3.4 Settings
Table 28: LEDGEN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On
tRestart 0.0 - 100.0 s 0.1 0.0 Defines the disturbance length
tMax 0.1 - 100.0 s 0.1 1.0 Maximum time for the definition of a
disturbance

Table 29: GRP1_LED1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SequenceType Follow-S - - Follow-S Sequence type for LED 1, local HMI
Follow-F alarm group 1
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
LabelOff 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_OFF Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is off
LabelRed 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_RED Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is red
LabelYellow 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_YELLOW Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is yellow
LabelGreen 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_GREEN Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is green

5.3.5 Monitored data

Table 30: GRP1_LED1 Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
LEDStatus INTEGER 1=Red flash - Status of LED 1, local
2=Red steady HMI alarm group 1
3=Yellow flash
4=Yellow steady
5=Green flash
6=Green steady
0=Off

5.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
LCD part for HMI Function Keys FNKEYMD1 - - -
Control module FNKEYMD5

88
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.4.2 Function block

FNKEYMD1
^LEDCTL1 ^FKEYOUT1
IEC09000327 V1 EN

Figure 6: FNKEYMD1 function block

Only the function block for the first button is shown above. There is a similar block
for every function button.

5.4.3 Signals
Table 31: FNKEYMD1 Input signals
Name Type Default Description
LEDCTL1 BOOLEAN 0 LED control input for function key

Table 32: FNKEYMD1 Output signals

Name Type Description
FKEYOUT1 BOOLEAN Output controlled by function key

5.4.4 Settings
Table 33: FNKEYMD1 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Mode Off - - Off Output operation mode
Toggle
Pulsed
PulseTime 0.001 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Pulse time for output controlled by
LCDFn1
LabelOn 0 - 18 - 1 LCD_FN1_ON Label for LED on state
LabelOff 0 - 18 - 1 LCD_FN1_OFF Label for LED off state

Table 34: FNKEYTY1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Type Off - - Off Function key type
Menu shortcut
Control
MenuShortcut Menu shortcut for
function key

89
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.4 Operation principle

5.4.1 Local HMI

IEC13000239-1-en.vsd
IEC13000239 V1 EN

Figure 7: Local human-machine interface

The LHMI of the IED contains the following elements:

Display (LCD)
Buttons
LED indicators
Communication port for PCM600

The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling.

5.4.1.1 Display

The LHMI includes a graphical monochrome display with a resolution of 320 x

240 pixels. The character size can vary. The amount of characters and rows fitting
the view depends on the character size and the view that is shown.

90
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

The display view is divided into four basic areas.

1 2

3 IEC13000063-2-en.vsd
4
IEC13000063 V2 EN

Figure 8: Display layout

1 Path
2 Content
3 Status
4 Scroll bar (appears when needed)

The path shows the current location in the menu structure. If the path is too
long to be shown, it is truncated from the beginning, and the truncation is
indicated with three dots.
The content area shows the menu content.
The status area shows the current IED time, the user that is currently logged in
and the object identification string which is settable via the LHMI or with
PCM600.
If text, pictures or other items do not fit in the display, a vertical scroll bar
appears on the right. The text in content area is truncated from the beginning if
it does not fit in the display horizontally. Truncation is indicated with three dots.

91
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

IEC13000045-2-en.vsd
IEC13000045 V2 EN

Figure 9: Truncated path

The number after the function instance, for example ETHFRNT:1, indicates the
instance number.

The function button panel shows on request what actions are possible with the
function buttons. Each function button has a LED indication that can be used as a
feedback signal for the function button control action. The LED is connected to the
required signal with PCM600.

IEC13000281-1-en.vsd
GUID-C98D972D-D1D8-4734-B419-161DBC0DC97B V1 EN

Figure 10: Function button panel

The alarm LED panel shows on request the alarm text labels for the alarm LEDs.
Three alarm LED pages are available.

92
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

IEC13000240-1-en.vsd
GUID-5157100F-E8C0-4FAB-B979-FD4A971475E3 V1 EN

Figure 11: Alarm LED panel

The function button and alarm LED panels are not visible at the same time. Each
panel is shown by pressing one of the function buttons or the Multipage button.
Pressing the ESC button clears the panel from the display. Both the panels have
dynamic width that depends on the label string length that the panel contains.

5.4.1.2 LEDs

The LHMI includes three protection status LEDs above the display: Ready, Start
and Trip.

There are 15 programmable alarm LEDs on the front of the LHMI. Each LED can
indicate three states with the colors: green, yellow and red. The alarm texts related
to each three-color LED are divided into three pages.

There are 3 separate pages of LEDs available. The 15 physical three-color LEDs in
one LED group can indicate 45 different signals. Altogether, 135 signals can be
indicated since there are three LED groups. The LEDs are lit according to priority,
with red being the highest and green the lowest priority. For example, if on one
page there is an indication that requires the green LED to be lit, and on another
page there is an indication that requires the red LED to be lit, the red LED takes
priority and is lit. The LEDs can be configured with PCM600 and the operation
mode can be selected with the LHMI or PCM600.

Information pages for the alarm LEDs are shown by pressing the Multipage button.
Pressing that button cycles through the three pages. A lit or un-acknowledged LED
is indicated with a highlight. Such lines can be selected by using the Up / Down
arrow buttons. Pressing the Enter key shows details about the selected LED.
Pressing the ESC button exits from information pop-ups as well as from the LED
panel as such.

The Multipage button has a LED. This LED is lit whenever any LED on any page
is lit. If there are un-acknowledged alarm LEDs, then the Multipage LED blinks.

93
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

To acknowledge LEDs, press the Clear button to enter the Reset menu (refer to
description of this menu for details).

There are two additional LEDs which are next to the control buttons and
. They represent the status of the circuit breaker.

5.4.1.3 Keypad

The LHMI keypad contains push-buttons which are used to navigate in different
views or menus. The push-buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms, reset
indications, provide help and switch between local and remote control mode.

The keypad also contains programmable push-buttons that can be configured either
as menu shortcut or control buttons.

IEC13000239-1-en.vsd
GUID-0C172139-80E0-45B1-8A3F-1EAE9557A52D V2 EN

Figure 12: LHMI keypad

94
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

24

1
23
2
18

3
19

6 20

21

7 22

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

IEC13000249-1-en.vsd
GUID-77E71883-0B80-4647-8205-EE56723511D2 V2 EN

Figure 13: LHMI keypad with object control, navigation and command push-
buttons and RJ-45 communication port

1...5 Function button

6 Close
7 Open
8 Escape
9 Left
10 Down
11 Up
12 Right
13 Key
14 Enter
15 Remote/Local
16 Uplink LED
17 Not in use
18 Multipage
19 Menu
20 Clear
21 Help
22 Communication port

95
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

23 Programmable alarm LEDs

24 Protection status LEDs

5.4.2 LED

5.4.2.1 Functionality

The function blocks HMI_LED and HMI_LEDS controls and supplies information
about the status of the indication LEDs. The input and output signals of the
function blocks are configured with PCM600. The input signal for each LED is
selected individually using SMT or ACT. Each LED is controlled by a HMI_LEDS
function block, that controls the color and the operating mode.

Each indication LED on local HMI can be set individually to operate in 6 different
sequences; two as follow type and four as latch type. Two of the latching sequence
types are intended to be used as a protection indication system, either in collecting
or restarting mode, with reset functionality. The other two are intended to be used
as signalling system in collecting mode with acknowledgment functionality.

5.4.2.2 Status LEDs

There are three status LEDs above the LCD in the front of the IED, green, yellow
and red.

The green LED has a fixed function that present the healthy status of the IED. The
yellow and red LEDs are user configured. The yellow LED can be used to indicate
that a disturbance report is triggered (steady) or that the IED is in test mode
(flashing). The red LED can be used to indicate a trip command.

5.4.2.3 Indication LEDs

Operating modes
Collecting mode

LEDs, which are used in collecting mode of operation, are accumulated

continuously until the unit is acknowledged manually. This mode is suitable
when the LEDs are used as a simplified alarm system.

Re-starting mode

In the re-starting mode of operation each new start resets all previous active
LEDs and activates only those, which appear during one disturbance. Only
LEDs defined for re-starting mode with the latched sequence type 6
(LatchedReset-S) will initiate a reset and a restart at a new disturbance. A

96
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

disturbance is defined to end a settable time after the reset of the activated
input signals or when the maximum time limit has elapsed.

Acknowledgment/reset
From local HMI
The active indications can be acknowledged/reset manually. Manual
acknowledgment and manual reset have the same meaning and is a
common signal for all the operating sequences and LEDs. The function
is positive edge triggered, not level triggered. The acknowledgment/reset
is performed via the button and menus on the LHMI.

From function input

The active indications can also be acknowledged/reset from an input,
ACK_RST, to the function. This input can for example be configured to
a binary input operated from an external push button. The function is
positive edge triggered, not level triggered. This means that even if the
button is continuously pressed, the acknowledgment/reset only affects
indications active at the moment when the button is first pressed.

Automatic reset
The automatic reset can only be performed for indications defined for re-
starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S). When
the automatic reset of the LEDs has been performed, still persisting
indications will be indicated with a steady light.

Operating sequence
The sequences can be of type Follow or Latched. For the Follow type the LED
follow the input signal completely. For the Latched type each LED latches to the
corresponding input signal until it is reset.

The figures below show the function of available sequences selectable for each
LED separately. For sequence 1 and 2 Follow type, the acknowledgment/reset
function is not applicable. Sequence 3 and 4 Latched type with acknowledgement
are only working in collecting mode. Sequence 5 is working according to Latched
type and collecting mode while Sequence 6 is working according to Latched type
and re-starting mode. The letters S and F in the sequence names have the meaning
S = Steady and F = Flash.

At the activation of the input signal, the indication obtains corresponding color
corresponding to the activated input and operates according to the selected
sequence diagrams below.

In the sequence diagrams the LEDs have the following characteristics:

97
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

= No indication = Steady light = Flash

G= Green Y= Yellow R= Red

IEC09000311.vsd
IEC09000311 V1 EN

Figure 14: Symbols used in the sequence diagrams

Sequence 1 (Follow-S)
This sequence follows all the time, with a steady light, the corresponding input
signals. It does not react on acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent of
the other LEDs in its operation.

Activating
signal

LED

IEC01000228_2_en.vsd
IEC01000228 V2 EN

Figure 15: Operating Sequence 1 (Follow-S)

If inputs for two or more colors are active at the same time to one LED the priority
is as described above. An example of the operation when two colors are activated
in parallel is shown in Figure 16.

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal RED

LED G G R G

IEC09000312_1_en.vsd
IEC09000312 V1 EN

Figure 16: Operating sequence 1, two colors

Sequence 2 (Follow-F)
This sequence is the same as Sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing
instead of showing steady light.

Sequence 3 LatchedAck-F-S
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED is
independent of the other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal,
the indication starts flashing. After acknowledgment the indication disappears if

98
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

the signal is not present any more. If the signal is still present after
acknowledgment it gets a steady light.

Activating
signal

LED

Acknow.
en01000231.vsd
IEC01000231 V1 EN

Figure 17: Operating Sequence 3 LatchedAck-F-S

When an acknowledgment is performed, all indications that appear before the

indication with higher priority has been reset, will be acknowledged, independent
of if the low priority indication appeared before or after acknowledgment. In
Figure 18 it is shown the sequence when a signal of lower priority becomes
activated after acknowledgment has been performed on a higher priority signal.
The low priority signal will be shown as acknowledged when the high priority
signal resets.

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal RED

R R G
LED

Acknow
IEC09000313_1_en.vsd
IEC09000313 V1 EN

Figure 18: Operating Sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S), 2 colors involved

If all three signals are activated the order of priority is still maintained.
Acknowledgment of indications with higher priority will acknowledge also low
priority indications, which are not visible according to Figure 19.

99
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED

LED G Y R R Y

Acknow.
IEC09000314-1-en.vsd
IEC09000314 V1 EN

Figure 19: Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 1

If an indication with higher priority appears after acknowledgment of a lower

priority indication the high priority indication will be shown as not acknowledged
according to Figure 20.

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED

LED G G R R Y

Acknow.
IEC09000315-1-en.vsd
IEC09000315 V1 EN

Figure 20: Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 2

Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F)
This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing
light have been alternated.

Sequence 5 LatchedColl-S
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the
activation of the input signal, the indication will light up with a steady light. The
difference to sequence 3 and 4 is that indications that are still activated will not be
affected by the reset that is, immediately after the positive edge of the reset has
been executed a new reading and storing of active signals is performed. Every LED
is independent of the other LEDs in its operation.

100
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Activating
signal

LED

Reset

IEC01000235_2_en.vsd
IEC01000235 V2 EN

Figure 21: Operating Sequence 5 LatchedColl-S

That means if an indication with higher priority has reset while an indication with
lower priority still is active at the time of reset, the LED will change color
according to Figure 22.

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal RED

R G
LED

Reset
IEC09000316_1_en.vsd
IEC09000316 V1 EN

Figure 22: Operating sequence 5, two colors

Sequence 6 LatchedReset-S
In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), are
automatically reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other
LEDs set to Sequence 6 LatchedReset-S. Also in this case indications that are still
activated will not be affected by manual reset, that is, immediately after the
positive edge of that the manual reset has been executed a new reading and storing
of active signals is performed. LEDs set for sequence 6 are completely independent
in its operation of LEDs set for other sequences.

Timing diagram for sequence 6

Figure 23 shows the timing diagram for two indications within one disturbance.

101
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Disturbance
tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000239_2-en.vsd
IEC01000239 V2 EN

Figure 23: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within

same disturbance

Figure 24 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has
elapsed.

Disturbance Disturbance

tRestart tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000240_2_en.vsd
IEC01000240 V2 EN

Figure 24: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two different disturbances

102
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Figure 25 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first
one has reset but before tRestart has elapsed.

Disturbance

tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000241_2_en.vsd
IEC01000241 V2 EN

Figure 25: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within

same disturbance but with reset of activating signal between

Figure 26 shows the timing diagram for manual reset.

Disturbance

tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000242_2_en.vsd
IEC01000242 V2 EN

Figure 26: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), manual reset

103
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.4.3 Function keys

5.4.3.1 Functionality

Local Human-Machine-Interface (LHMI) has five function buttons, directly to the

left of the LCD, that can be configured either as menu shortcut or control buttons.
Each button has an indication LED that can be configured in the application
configuration.

When used as a menu shortcut, a function button provides a fast way to navigate
between default nodes in the menu tree. When used as a control, the button can
control a binary signal.

5.4.3.2 Operation principle

Each output on the FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function blocks can be controlled

from the LHMI function keys. By pressing a function button on the LHMI, the
output status of the actual function block will change. These binary outputs can in
turn be used to control other function blocks, for example, switch control blocks,
binary I/O outputs etc.

FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function block also has a number of settings and

parameters that control the behavior of the function block. These settings and
parameters are normally set using the PST.

Operating sequence
The operation mode is set individually for each output, either OFF, TOGGLE or
PULSED.

Setting OFF

This mode always gives the output the value..

Input value

Output value

IEC09000330-1-en.vsd
IEC09000330 V1 EN

Figure 27: Sequence diagram for setting OFF

Setting TOGGLE

In this mode the output toggles each time the function block detects that the input
has been written. Note that the input attribute is reset each time the function block
executes. The function block execution is marked with a dotted line below.

104
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Input value

Output value

IEC09000331_1_en.vsd
IEC09000331 V1 EN

Figure 28: Sequence diagram for setting TOGGLE

Setting PULSED

In this mode the output will be high for as long as the setting pulse time. After this
time the output will go back to 0. The input attribute is reset when the function
block detects it being high and there is no output pulse.

Note that the third positive edge on the input attribute does not cause a pulse, since
the edge was applied during pulse output. A new pulse can only begin when the
output is zero; else the trigger edge is lost.

Input value

Output value
tpulse tpulse
IEC09000332_1_en.vsd
IEC09000332 V1 EN

Figure 29: Sequence diagram for setting PULSED

Input function
All inputs work the same way: When the LHMI is configured so that a certain
function button is of type CONTROL, then the corresponding input on this
function block becomes active, and will light the yellow function button LED when
high. This functionality is active even if the function block operation setting is set
to off.

105
Technical Manual
106
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection

Section 6 Differential protection

6.1 Transformer differential protection T2WPDIF and

T3WPDIF

6.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Transformer differential protection, two- T2WPDIF 87T
winding
3Id/I

SYMBOL-BB V1 EN

Transformer differential protection, T3WPDIF 87T

three-winding
3Id/I

SYMBOL-BB V1 EN

6.1.2 Functionality
The Transformer differential protection, two-winding T2WPDIF and Transformer
differential protection, three-winding T3WPDIF are provided with internal CT
ratio matching, vector group compensation and settable zero sequence current
elimination.

The function can be provided with up to six three-phase sets of current inputs. All
current inputs are provided with percentage bias restraint features, making the IED
suitable for two- or three-winding transformer in multi-breaker station arrangements.

Two-winding applications
two-winding power
transformer
xx05000048.vsd
IEC05000048 V1 EN

two-winding power
transformer with
unconnected delta
xx05000049.vsd tertiary winding
IEC05000049 V1 EN

Table continues on next page

107
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Differential protection

two-winding power
transformer with two
circuit breakers and
xx05000050.vsd two CT-sets on one
IEC05000050 V1 EN
side
two-winding power
transformer with two
circuit breakers and
two CT-sets on both
sides

xx05000051.vsd
IEC05000051 V1 EN

Three-winding applications
three-winding power
transformer with all
three windings
connected

xx05000052.vsd
IEC05000052 V1 EN

three-winding power
transformer with two
circuit breakers and
two CT-sets on one
side

xx05000053.vsd
IEC05000053 V1 EN

Autotransformer with
two circuit breakers
and two CT-sets on
two out of three sides

xx05000057.vsd
IEC05000057 V1 EN

Figure 30: CT group

arrangement for
differential protection

The setting facilities cover the application of the differential protection to all types
of power transformers and auto-transformers with or without load tap changer as
well as shunt reactors and local feeders within the station. An adaptive stabilizing
feature is included for heavy through-fault currents.By introducing the load tap
changer position, the differential protection pick-up can be set to optimum
sensitivity thus covering internal faults with low fault current level.

Stabilization is included for inrush and overexcitation currents respectively, cross-

blocking is also available. Adaptive stabilization is also included for system

108
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection

recovery inrush and CT saturation during external faults. A high set unrestrained
differential current protection element is included for a very high speed tripping at
high internal fault currents.

Included is an sensitive differential protection element based on the theory of

negative sequence current component. This element offers the best possible
coverage of power transformer windings turn to turn faults.

6.1.3 Function block

T2WPDIF
I3PW1CT1* TRIP
I3PW1CT2* TRIPRES
I3PW2CT1* TRIPUNRE
I3PW2CT2* TRNSUNR
TAPOLTC1 TRNSSENS
OLTC1AL START
BLOCK STL1
BLKRES STL2
BLKUNRES STL3
BLKNSUNR BLK2H
BLKNSSEN BLK2HL1
BLK2HL2
BLK2HL3
BLK5H
BLK5HL1
BLK5HL2
BLK5HL3
BLKWAV
BLKWAVL1
BLKWAVL2
BLKWAVL3
IDALARM
OPENCT
OPENCTAL
IDL1
IDL2
IDL3
IDL1MAG
IDL2MAG
IDL3MAG
IBIAS
IDNSMAG

IEC06000249_2_en.vsd
IEC06000249 V2 EN

Figure 31: T2WPDIF function block

109
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Differential protection

T3WPDIF
I3PW1CT1* TRIP
I3PW1CT2* TRIPRES
I3PW2CT1* TRIPUNRE
I3PW2CT2* TRNSUNR
I3PW3CT1* TRNSSENS
I3PW3CT2* START
TAPOLTC1 STL1
TAPOLTC2 STL2
OLTC1AL STL3
OLTC2AL BLK2H
BLOCK BLK2HL1
BLKRES BLK2HL2
BLKUNRES BLK2HL3
BLKNSUNR BLK5H
BLKNSSEN BLK5HL1
BLK5HL2
BLK5HL3
BLKWAV
BLKWAVL1
BLKWAVL2
BLKWAVL3
IDALARM
OPENCT
OPENCTAL
IDL1
IDL2
IDL3
IDL1MAG
IDL2MAG
IDL3MAG
IBIAS
IDNSMAG

IEC06000250_2_en.vsd
IEC06000250 V2 EN

Figure 32: T3WPDIF function block

6.1.4 Signals
Table 35: T2WPDIF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3PW1CT1 GROUP - Three phase winding primary CT1
SIGNAL
I3PW1CT2 GROUP - Three phase winding primary CT2
SIGNAL
I3PW2CT1 GROUP - Three phase winding secondary CT1
SIGNAL
I3PW2CT2 GROUP - Three phase winding secondary CT2
SIGNAL
TAPOLTC1 INTEGER 1 Most recent tap position reading on OLTC 1
OLTC1AL BOOLEAN 0 OLTC1 alarm
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKRES BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for restrained differential feature
BLKUNRES BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for unrestrained differential feature
BLKNSUNR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for unrestr. neg. seq. differential
feature
BLKNSSEN BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for sensitive neg. seq. differential
feature

110
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection

Table 36: T2WPDIF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General, common trip signal
TRIPRES BOOLEAN Trip signal from restrained differential protection
TRIPUNRE BOOLEAN Trip signal from unrestrained differential protection
TRNSUNR BOOLEAN Trip signal from unrestr. neg. seq. diff. protection
TRNSSENS BOOLEAN Trip signal from sensitive neg. seq. diff. protection
START BOOLEAN Common start signal from any phase
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
BLK2H BOOLEAN Common second harmonic block signal from any
phase
BLK2HL1 BOOLEAN Second harmonic block signal, phase L1
BLK2HL2 BOOLEAN Second harmonic block signal, phase L2
BLK2HL3 BOOLEAN Second harmonic block signal, phase L3
BLK5H BOOLEAN Common fifth harmonic block signal from any
phase
BLK5HL1 BOOLEAN Fifth harmonic block signal, phase L1
BLK5HL2 BOOLEAN Fifth harmonic block signal, phase L2
BLK5HL3 BOOLEAN Fifth harmonic block signal, phase L3
BLKWAV BOOLEAN Common block signal, waveform criterion, from
any phase
BLKWAVL1 BOOLEAN Block signal, waveform criterion, phase L1
BLKWAVL2 BOOLEAN Block signal, waveform criterion, phase L2
BLKWAVL3 BOOLEAN Block signal, waveform criterion, phase L3
IDALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for sustained diff currents in all three phases
OPENCT BOOLEAN An open CT was detected
OPENCTAL BOOLEAN Open CT Alarm output signal. Issued after a
delay ...
IDL1 REAL Value of the instantaneous differential current,
phase L1
IDL2 REAL Value of the instantaneous differential current,
phase L2
IDL3 REAL Value of the instantaneous differential current,
phase L3
IDL1MAG REAL Magnitude of fundamental freq. diff. current,
phase L1
IDL2MAG REAL Magnitude of fundamental freq. diff. current,
phase L2
IDL3MAG REAL Magnitude of fundamental freq. diff. current,
phase L3
IBIAS REAL Magnitude of the bias current, which is common
to all phases
IDNSMAG REAL Magnitude of the negative sequence differential
current

111
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Differential protection

Table 37: T3WPDIF Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3PW1CT1 GROUP - Three phase winding primary CT1
SIGNAL
I3PW1CT2 GROUP - Three phase winding primary CT2
SIGNAL
I3PW2CT1 GROUP - Three phase winding secondary CT1
SIGNAL
I3PW2CT2 GROUP - Three phase winding secondary CT2
SIGNAL
I3PW3CT1 GROUP - Three phase winding tertiary CT1
SIGNAL
I3PW3CT2 GROUP - Three phase winding tertiary CT2
SIGNAL
TAPOLTC1 INTEGER 1 Most recent tap position reading on OLTC 1
TAPOLTC2 INTEGER 1 Most recent tap position reading on OLTC 2
OLTC1AL BOOLEAN 0 OLTC1 alarm
OLTC2AL BOOLEAN 0 OLTC2 alarm
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKRES BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for restrained differential feature
BLKUNRES BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for unrestrained differential feature
BLKNSUNR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for unrestr. neg. seq. differential
feature
BLKNSSEN BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for sensitive neg. seq. differential
feature

Table 38: T3WPDIF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General, common trip signal
TRIPRES BOOLEAN Trip signal from restrained differential protection
TRIPUNRE BOOLEAN Trip signal from unrestrained differential protection
TRNSUNR BOOLEAN Trip signal from unrestr. neg. seq. diff. protection
TRNSSENS BOOLEAN Trip signal from sensitive neg. seq. diff. protection
START BOOLEAN Common start signal from any phase
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
BLK2H BOOLEAN Common second harmonic block signal from any
phase
BLK2HL1 BOOLEAN Second harmonic block signal, phase L1
BLK2HL2 BOOLEAN Second harmonic block signal, phase L2
BLK2HL3 BOOLEAN Second harmonic block signal, phase L3
BLK5H BOOLEAN Common fifth harmonic block signal from any
phase
Table continues on next page

112
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection

Name Type Description

BLK5HL1 BOOLEAN Fifth harmonic block signal, phase L1
BLK5HL2 BOOLEAN Fifth harmonic block signal, phase L2
BLK5HL3 BOOLEAN Fifth harmonic block signal, phase L3
BLKWAV BOOLEAN Common block signal, waveform criterion, from
any phase
BLKWAVL1 BOOLEAN Block signal, waveform criterion, phase L1
BLKWAVL2 BOOLEAN Block signal, waveform criterion, phase L2
BLKWAVL3 BOOLEAN Block signal, waveform criterion, phase L3
IDALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for sustained diff currents in all three phases
OPENCT BOOLEAN An open CT was detected
OPENCTAL BOOLEAN Open CT Alarm output signal. Issued after a
delay ...
IDL1 REAL Value of the instantaneous differential current,
phase L1
IDL2 REAL Value of the instantaneous differential current,
phase L2
IDL3 REAL Value of the instantaneous differential current,
phase L3
IDL1MAG REAL Magnitude of fundamental freq. diff. current,
phase L1
IDL2MAG REAL Magnitude of fundamental freq. diff. current,
phase L2
IDL3MAG REAL Magnitude of fundamental freq. diff. current,
phase L3
IBIAS REAL Magnitude of the bias current, which is common
to all phases
IDNSMAG REAL Magnitude of the negative sequence differential
current

6.1.5 Settings
Table 39: T2WPDIF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
SOTFMode Off - - On Operation mode for switch onto fault
On
tAlarmDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 10.000 Time delay for diff currents alarm level
IDiffAlarm 0.05 - 1.00 IB 0.01 0.20 Dif. cur. alarm, multiple of base curr,
usually W1 curr.
IdMin 0.05 - 0.60 IB 0.01 0.30 Section1 sensitivity, multi. of base curr,
usually W1 curr.
IdUnre 1.00 - 100.00 IB 0.01 10.00 Unrestr. prot. limit, multiple of Winding 1
rated current
Table continues on next page

113
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CrossBlockEn Off - - On Operation Off/On for cross-block logic
On between phases
NegSeqDiffEn Off - - On Operation Off/On for neg. seq.
On differential protections
IMinNegSeq 0.02 - 0.20 IB 0.01 0.04 Neg. seq. curr. must be higher than this
level to be used
NegSeqROA 30.0 - 120.0 Deg 0.1 60.0 Operate Angle for int. / ext. neg. seq.
fault discriminator

Table 40: T2WPDIF Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
EndSection1 0.20 - 1.50 IB 0.01 1.25 End of section 1, multiple of Winding 1
rated current
EndSection2 1.00 - 10.00 IB 0.01 3.00 End of section 2, multiple of Winding 1
rated current
SlopeSection2 10.0 - 50.0 % 0.1 40.0 Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain
characteristic, in %
SlopeSection3 30.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 80.0 Slope in section 3 of operate-restrain
characteristic, in %
I2/I1Ratio 5.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 15.0 Max. ratio of 2nd harm. to fundamental
harm dif. curr. in %
I5/I1Ratio 5.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 25.0 Max. ratio of 5th harm. to fundamental
harm dif. curr. in %
OpenCTEnable Off - - Off Open CT detection feature. Open
On CTEnable Off/On
tOCTAlarmDelay 0.100 - 10.000 s 0.001 3.000 Open CT: time in s to alarm after an
open CT is detected
tOCTResetDelay 0.100 - 10.000 s 0.001 0.250 Reset delay in s. After delay, diff.
function is activated
tOCTUnrstDelay 0.10 - 6000.00 s 0.01 10.00 Unrestrained diff. protection blocked
after this delay, in s

Table 41: T2WPDIF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSelW1 1 - 12 - 1 1 Global base selector for winding 1
GlobalBaseSelW2 1 - 12 - 1 1 Global base selector for winding 2
ConnectTypeW1 WYE (Y) - - WYE (Y) Connection type of winding 1: Y-wye or D-
Delta (D) delta
ConnectTypeW2 WYE (Y) - - WYE (Y) Connection type of winding 2: Y-wye or D-
Delta (D) delta
Table continues on next page

114
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ClockNumberW2 0 [0 deg] - - 0 [0 deg] Phase displacement between W2 &
1 [30 deg lag] W1=HV winding, hour notation
2 [60 deg lag]
3 [90 deg lag]
4 [120 deg lag]
5 [150 deg lag]
6 [180 deg]
7 [150 deg lead]
8 [120 deg lead]
9 [90 deg lead]
10 [60 deg lead]
11 [30 deg lead]
ZSCurrSubtrW1 Off - - On Enable zer. seq. current subtraction for
On W1 side, On / Off
ZSCurrSubtrW2 Off - - On Enable zer. seq. current subtraction for
On W2 side, On / Off
TconfigForW1 No - - No Two CT inputs (T-config.) for winding 1,
Yes YES / NO
CT1RatingW1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 CT primary rating in A, T-branch 1, on
transf. W1 side
CT2RatingW1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 CT primary in A, T-branch 2, on transf.
W1 side
TconfigForW2 No - - No Two CT inputs (T-config.) for winding 2,
Yes YES / NO
CT1RatingW2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 CT primary rating in A, T-branch 1, on
transf. W2 side
CT2RatingW2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 CT primary rating in A, T-branch 2, on
transf. W2 side
LocationOLTC1 Not Used - - Not Used Transformer winding where OLTC1 is
Winding 1 (W1) located
Winding 2 (W2)
LowTapPosOLTC1 0 - 10 - 1 1 OLTC1 lowest tap position designation
(e.g. 1)
RatedTapOLTC1 1 - 100 - 1 6 OLTC1 rated tap/mid-tap position
designation (e.g. 6)
HighTapPsOLTC1 1 - 100 - 1 11 OLTC1 highest tap position designation
(e.g. 11)
TapHighVoltTC1 1 - 100 - 1 1 OLTC1 end-tap position with winding
highest no-load voltage
StepSizeOLTC1 0.01 - 30.00 % 0.01 1.00 Voltage change per OLTC1 step in
percent of rated voltage

Table 42: T3WPDIF Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
SOTFMode Off - - On Operation mode for switch onto fault
On feature
tAlarmDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 10.000 Time delay for diff currents alarm level
Table continues on next page

115
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IDiffAlarm 0.05 - 1.00 IB 0.01 0.20 Dif. cur. alarm, multiple of base curr,
usually W1 curr.
IdMin 0.05 - 0.60 IB 0.01 0.30 Section1 sensitivity, multi. of base curr,
usually W1 curr.
IdUnre 1.00 - 100.00 IB 0.01 10.00 Unrestr. prot. limit, multi. of base curr.
usually W1 curr.
CrossBlockEn Off - - On Operation Off/On for cross-block logic
On between phases
NegSeqDiffEn Off - - On Operation Off/On for neg. seq.
On differential protections
IMinNegSeq 0.02 - 0.20 IB 0.01 0.04 Neg. seq. curr. limit, mult. of base curr,
usually W1 curr.
NegSeqROA 30.0 - 120.0 Deg 0.1 60.0 Operate Angle for int. / ext. neg. seq.
fault discriminator

Table 43: T3WPDIF Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
EndSection1 0.20 - 1.50 IB 0.01 1.25 End of section 1, multi. of base current,
usually W1 curr.
EndSection2 1.00 - 10.00 IB 0.01 3.00 End of section 2, multi. of base current,
usually W1 curr.
SlopeSection2 10.0 - 50.0 % 0.1 40.0 Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain
characteristic, in %
SlopeSection3 30.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 80.0 Slope in section 3 of operate-restrain
characteristic, in %
I2/I1Ratio 5.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 15.0 Max. ratio of 2nd harm. to fundamental
harm dif. curr. in %
I5/I1Ratio 5.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 25.0 Max. ratio of 5th harm. to fundamental
harm dif. curr. in %
OpenCTEnable Off - - Off Open CT detection feature. Open
On CTEnable Off/On
tOCTAlarmDelay 0.100 - 10.000 s 0.001 3.000 Open CT: time in s to alarm after an
open CT is detected
tOCTResetDelay 0.100 - 10.000 s 0.001 0.250 Reset delay in s. After delay, diff.
function is activated
tOCTUnrstDelay 0.10 - 6000.00 s 0.01 10.00 Unrestrained diff. protection blocked
after this delay, in s

Table 44: T3WPDIF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSelW1 1 - 12 - 1 1 Global base selector for winding 1
GlobalBaseSelW2 1 - 12 - 1 1 Global base selector for winding 2
GlobalBaseSelW3 1 - 12 - 1 1 Global base selector for winding 3
ConnectTypeW1 WYE (Y) - - WYE (Y) Connection type of winding 1: Y-wye or D-
Delta (D) delta
Table continues on next page

116
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ConnectTypeW2 WYE (Y) - - WYE (Y) Connection type of winding 2: Y-wye or D-
Delta (D) delta
ConnectTypeW3 WYE (Y) - - Delta (D) Connection type of winding 3: Y-wye or D-
Delta (D) delta
ClockNumberW2 0 [0 deg] - - 0 [0 deg] Phase displacement between W2 &
1 [30 deg lag] W1=HV winding, hour notation
2 [60 deg lag]
3 [90 deg lag]
4 [120 deg lag]
5 [150 deg lag]
6 [180 deg]
7 [150 deg lead]
8 [120 deg lead]
9 [90 deg lead]
10 [60 deg lead]
11 [30 deg lead]
ClockNumberW3 0 [0 deg] - - 5 [150 deg lag] Phase displacement between W3 &
1 [30 deg lag] W1=HV winding, hour notation
2 [60 deg lag]
3 [90 deg lag]
4 [120 deg lag]
5 [150 deg lag]
6 [180 deg]
7 [150 deg lead]
8 [120 deg lead]
9 [90 deg lead]
10 [60 deg lead]
11 [30 deg lead]
ZSCurrSubtrW1 Off - - On Enable zer. seq. current subtraction for
On W1 side, On / Off
ZSCurrSubtrW2 Off - - On Enable zer. seq. current subtraction for
On W2 side, On / Off
ZSCurrSubtrW3 Off - - On Enable zer. seq. current subtraction for
On W3 side, On / Off
TconfigForW1 No - - No Two CT inputs (T-config.) for winding 1,
Yes YES / NO
CT1RatingW1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 CT primary rating in A, T-branch 1, on
transf. W1 side
CT2RatingW1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 CT primary in A, T-branch 2, on transf.
W1 side
TconfigForW2 No - - No Two CT inputs (T-config.) for winding 2,
Yes YES / NO
CT1RatingW2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 CT primary rating in A, T-branch 1, on
transf. W2 side
CT2RatingW2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 CT primary rating in A, T-branch 2, on
transf. W2 side
TconfigForW3 No - - No Two CT inputs (T-config.) for winding 3,
Yes YES / NO
CT1RatingW3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 CT primary rating in A, T-branch 1, on
transf. W3 side
CT2RatingW3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 CT primary rating in A, T-branch 2, on
transf. W3 side
Table continues on next page

117
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

LocationOLTC1 Not Used - - Not Used Transformer winding where OLTC1 is
Winding 1 (W1) located
Winding 2 (W2)
Winding 3 (W3)
LowTapPosOLTC1 0 - 10 - 1 1 OLTC1 lowest tap position designation
(e.g. 1)
RatedTapOLTC1 1 - 100 - 1 6 OLTC1 rated tap/mid-tap position
designation (e.g. 6)
HighTapPsOLTC1 1 - 100 - 1 11 OLTC1 highest tap position designation
(e.g. 11)
TapHighVoltTC1 1 - 100 - 1 1 OLTC1 end-tap position with winding
highest no-load voltage
StepSizeOLTC1 0.01 - 30.00 % 0.01 1.00 Voltage change per OLTC1 step in
percent of rated voltage
LocationOLTC2 Not Used - - Not Used Transformer winding where OLTC2 is
Winding 1 (W1) located
Winding 2 (W2)
Winding 3 (W3)
LowTapPosOLTC2 0 - 10 - 1 1 OLTC2 lowest tap position designation
(e.g. 1)
RatedTapOLTC2 1 - 100 - 1 6 OLTC2 rated tap/mid-tap position
designation (e.g. 6)
HighTapPsOLTC2 1 - 100 - 1 11 OLTC2 highest tap position designation
(e.g. 11)
TapHighVoltTC2 1 - 100 - 1 1 OLTC2 end-tap position with winding
highest no-load voltage
StepSizeOLTC2 0.01 - 30.00 % 0.01 1.00 Voltage change per OLTC2 step in
percent of rated voltage

6.1.6 Monitored data

Table 45: T2WPDIF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OCTSIDE INTEGER - - Open CT side : 1 -> W 1
(pri), 2 -> W 2 (sec)
OPENCTIN INTEGER - - Open CT on Input : 1 for
input 1, 2 for input 2
OPENCTPH INTEGER - - Open CT in Phase : 1 for
L1, 2 for L2, 3 for L3
IDL1MAG REAL - A Magnitude of
fundamental freq. diff.
current, phase L1
IDL2MAG REAL - A Magnitude of
fundamental freq. diff.
current, phase L2
Table continues on next page

118
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

IDL3MAG REAL - A Magnitude of
fundamental freq. diff.
current, phase L3
IBIAS REAL - A Magnitude of the bias
current, which is
common to all phases
IDNSMAG REAL - A Magnitude of the
negative sequence
differential current

Table 46: T3WPDIF Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OCTSIDE INTEGER - - Open CT side : 1 -> W 1
(pri), 2 -> W 2 (sec), 3 ->
W3
OPENCTIN INTEGER - - Open CT on Input : 1 for
input 1, 2 for input 2
OPENCTPH INTEGER - - Open CT in Phase : 1 for
L1, 2 for L2, 3 for L3
IDL1MAG REAL - A Magnitude of
fundamental freq. diff.
current, phase L1
IDL2MAG REAL - A Magnitude of
fundamental freq. diff.
current, phase L2
IDL3MAG REAL - A Magnitude of
fundamental freq. diff.
current, phase L3
IBIAS REAL - A Magnitude of the bias
current, which is
common to all phases
IDNSMAG REAL - A Magnitude of the
negative sequence
differential current

6.1.7 Operation principle

The task of the power transformer differential protection is to determine whether a
fault is within the protected zone, or outside of the protected zone. The protected
zone is limited by the position of current transformers (see Figure 33), and in
principle can include more objects than just a transformer. If the fault is found to be
internal, the faulty power transformer must be quickly disconnected from the system.

The main CTs are normally supposed to be star connected. The main CTs can be
earthed in anyway (that is, either "ToObject" or "FromObject"). However
internally the differential function will always use reference directions towards the
protected transformer as shown in Figure 33. Thus the IED will always internally
measure the currents on all sides of the power transformer with the same reference

119
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Differential protection

direction towards the power transformer windings as shown in Figure 33. For more
information see the Application manual.

IW1 IW2

Z1S1 Z1S2
E1S1 E1S2

IW1 IW2

IED

en05000186.vsd
IEC05000186 V1 EN

Figure 33: Typical CT location and definition of positive current direction

Even in a healthy power transformer, the currents are generally not equal when
they flow through it. This is due to the ratio of the number of turns of the windings
and the connection group of the protected transformer. Therefore the differential
protection must first correlate all currents to each other before any calculation can
be performed.

First, compensation for the protected transformer transformation ratio and

connection group is made, and only then are the currents compared phase-wise.
This makes external auxiliary (interposing) current transformers unnecessary.
Conversion of all currents to the common reference side of the power transformer
is performed by pre-programmed coefficient matrices, which depends on the
protected power transformer transformation ratio and connection group. Once the
power transformer vector group, rated currents and voltages have been entered by
the user, the differential protection is capable to calculate off-line matrix
coefficients required in order to perform the on-line current comparison by means
of a fixed equation.

The negative-sequence-current-based internal-external fault discriminator, is used

with advantage in order to determine whether a fault is internal or external. It not
only positively discriminates between internal and external faults, but can also
independently detect minor faults which may not be sensed by the "usual"
differential protection based on operate-restrain characteristic.

For all differential functions it is the common trip that is used to

initiate a trip of a breaker. The separate trip signals from the
different parts lacks the safety against maloperation. This will in
some cases result in a 6 ms time difference between, for example
restrained trip is issued and common trip is issued. The separate trip
signals are only used for information purpose of which part that has
caused the trip.

120
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection

6.1.7.1 Function calculation principles

To make a differential IED as sensitive and stable as possible, restrained

differential characteristics have been developed and is now adopted as the general
practice in the protection of power transformers. The protection should be provided
with a proportional bias, which makes the protection operate for a certain
percentage differential current related to the current through the transformer. This
stabilizes the protection under through fault conditions while still permitting the
system to have good basic sensitivity. The following chapters explain how these
quantities are derived.

Fundamental frequency differential currents

The fundamental frequency differential current is a vectorial sum (sum of
fundamental frequency phasors) of the individual phase currents from the different
sides of the protected power transformer.

Before any differential current can be calculated, the power transformer phase
shift, and its transformation ratio, must be accounted for. Conversion of all currents
to a common reference is performed in two steps:

all current phasors are phase-shifted to (referred to) the phase-reference side,
(whenever possible the first winding with star connection)
all currents magnitudes are always referred to the first winding of the power
transformer (typically transformer high-voltage side)

The two steps of conversion are made simultaneously on-line by the pre-
programmed coefficient matrices, as shown in equation 1 for a two-winding power
transformer, and in equation 2 for a three-winding power transformer.

These are the internal compensation within the differential function.

The protected power transformer data is always entered per its
nameplate. The Differential function will correlate nameplate data
and select proper reference windings.

121
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Differential protection

IDL1 IL1_ W 1 IL1_ W 2

IDL 2 = A IL 2 _ W 1 + Un _ W 2
Un _ W 1 B IL 2 _ W 2
IDL3 IL3 _ W 1 IL3 _ W 2

1 2 3
EQUATION1880 V1 EN (Equation 1)

where:
1. is the resulting Differential Currents
2. is the current contribution from the W1 side
3. is the current contribution from the W2 side

IDL1 IL1_ W 1 IL1_ W 2 IL1_ W 3

IDL 2 = A IL 2 _ W 1 + Un _ W 2 B IL 2 _ W 2 + Un _ W 3 C IL 2 _ W 3
Un _ W 1 Un _ W 1
IDL3 IL3 _ W 1 IL3 _ W 2 IL3 _ W 3
1 2 3 4
EQUATION1556 V2 EN (Equation 2)

where:
1. is the resulting Differential Currents
2. is the current contribution from the W1 side
3. is the current contribution from the W2 side
4. is the current contribution from the W3 side

and where, for equation 1 and equation 2:

IDL1 is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase L1 (in W1 side primary amperes)
IDL2 is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase L2 (in W1 side primary amperes)
IDL3 is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase L3 (in W1 side primary amperes)
IL1_W1 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L1 on the W1 side
IL2_W1 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L2 on the W1 side
IL3_W1 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L3 on the W1 side
IL1_W2 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L1 on the W2 side
IL2_W2 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L2 on the W2 side
IL3_W2 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L3 on the W2 side
IL1_W3 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L1 on the W3 side
IL2_W3 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L2 on the W3 side
Table continues on next page

122
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection

IL3_W3 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L3 on the W3 side

Ur_W1 is transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on the W1 side (setting parameter)
Ur_W2 is transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on the W2 side (setting parameter)
Ur_W3 is transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on the W3 side (setting parameter)
A, B and C are three by three matrices with numerical coefficients

Values of the matrix A, B and C coefficients depend on:

1. The Power transformer winding connection type, such as star (Y/y) or delta (D/
d)
2. The Transformer vector group such as Yd1, Dy11, YNautod5, Yy0d5 and so
on, which introduce phase displacement between individual windings currents
in multiples of 30.
3. The Settings for elimination of zero sequence currents for the individual
windings.

When the end user enters all these parameters, transformer differential function
automatically calculates the matrix coefficients. During this calculations the
following rules are used:

For the phase reference, the first winding with set star (Y) connection is always
used. For example, if the power transformer is a Yd1 power transformer, the HV
winding (Y) is taken as the phase reference winding. If the power transformer is a
Dy1, then the LV winding (y) is taken for the phase reference. If there is no star
connected winding, such as in Dd0 type of power transformers, then the HV delta
winding (D) is automatically chosen as the phase reference winding.

The fundamental frequency differential currents are in general composed of

currents of all sequences, that is, the positive-, the negative-, and the zero-sequence
currents. If the zero-sequence currents are eliminated (see section "Optional
Elimination of zero sequence currents"), then the differential currents can consist
only of the positive-, and the negative-sequence currents. When the zero-sequence
current is subtracted on one side of the power transformer, then it is subtracted
from each individual phase current.

As it can be seen from equation 1 and equation 2 the first entered winding (W1) is
always taken for ampere level reference (current magnitudes from all other sides
are always transferred to W1 side). In other words, within the differential
protection function, all differential currents and bias current are always expressed
in HV side primary Amperes.

It can be shown that the values of the matrix A, B & C coefficients (see equation 1
and equation 2) can be pre-calculated in advance depending on the relative phase
shift between the reference winding and other power transformer windings.

Table 47 summarizes the values of the matrices for all standard phase shifts
between windings.

123
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Differential protection

Table 47: Matrices for differential current calculation

Matrix with Zero Sequence Matrix with Zero Sequence
Reduction set to On Reduction set to Off
Matrix for Reference Winding
2 -1 -1 1 0 0
1
-1 2 -1 0 1 0
3
-1 -1 2 0 0 1
EQUATION1227 V1 EN (Equation 3) EQUATION1228 V1 EN (Equation 4)
Matrix for winding with 30 Not applicable. Matrix on the
lagging 1 -1 0 left used.
1
0 1 -1
3
-1 0 1
EQUATION1229 V1 EN (Equation 5)
Matrix for winding with 60
1 -2 1 0 -1 0
lagging 1
1 1 -2 0 0 -1
3
-2 1 1 -1 0 0
EQUATION1230 V1 EN (Equation 6) EQUATION1231 V1 EN (Equation 7)
Matrix for winding with 90 Not applicable. Matrix on the
lagging 0 -1 1 left used.
1
1 0 -1
3
-1 1 0
EQUATION1232 V1 EN (Equation 8)
Matrix for winding with 120
lagging -1 -1 2 0 0 1
1
2 -1 -1 1 0 0
3
-1 2 -1 0 1 0
EQUATION1233 V1 EN (Equation 9) EQUATION1234 V1 EN (Equation 10)
Matrix for winding with 150 Not applicable. Matrix on the
lagging -1 0 1 left used.
1
1 -1 0
3
0 1 -1
EQUATION1235 V1 EN (Equation 11)
Matrix for winding which is in
opposite phase -2 1 1 -1 0 0
1
1 -2 1 0 -1 0
3
1 1 -2 0 0 -1
EQUATION1236 V1 EN (Equation 12) EQUATION1237 V1 EN (Equation 13)
Matrix for winding with 150 Not applicable. Matrix on the
leading -1 1 0 left used.
1
0 -1 1
3
1 0 -1
EQUATION1238 V1 EN (Equation 14)
Table continues on next page

124
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection

Matrix with Zero Sequence Matrix with Zero Sequence

Reduction set to On Reduction set to Off
Matrix for winding with 120
leading -1 2 -1 0 1 0
1
-1 -1 2 0 0 1
3
2 -1 -1 1 0 0
EQUATION1239 V1 EN (Equation 15) EQUATION1240 V1 EN (Equation 16)

Matrix for winding with 90 Not applicable. Matrix on the

leading 0 1 -1 left used.
1
-1 0 1
3
1 -1 0
EQUATION1241 V1 EN (Equation 17)
Matrix for winding with 60
1 1 -2 0 0 -1
leading 1
-2 1 1 -1 0 0
3
1 -2 1 0 -1 0
EQUATION1242 V1 EN (Equation 18) EQUATION1243 V1 EN (Equation 19)
Matrix for winding with 30 Not applicable. Matrix on the
leading 1 0 -1 left used.
1
-1 1 0
3
0 -1 1
EQUATION1244 V1 EN (Equation 20)

By using this table complete equation for calculation of fundamental frequency

differential currents for two winding power transformer with YNd5 vector group
and enabled zero sequence current reduction on HV side will be derived. From the
given power transformer vector group the following is possible to be concluded:

1. The HV star (Y) connected winding will be used as the reference winding and
zero sequence currents shall be subtracted on that side
2. The LV winding is lagging for 150

With the help of table 47, the following matrix equation can be written for this
power transformer:

IDL1 2 -1 -1 IL1_ W1 -1 0 1 IL1_ W 2

IDL2 = 1 -1 2 -1 IL2 _ W1 + Ur _ W 2 1 1 -1 0 IL2 _ W 2
3 Ur _ W1 3
IDL3 -1 -1 2 IL3_ W1 0 1 -1 IL3_ W 2
EQUATION2015 V1 EN (Equation 21)

where:
IDL1 is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase L1 (in W1 side primary amperes)
IDL2 is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase L2 (in W1 side primary amperes)
IDL3 is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase L3 (in W1 side primary amperes)
IL1_W1 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L1 on the W1 side
Table continues on next page

125
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Differential protection

IL2_W1 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L2 on the W1 side

IL3_W1 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L3 on the W1 side
IL1_W2 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L1 on the W2 side
IL2_W2 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L2 on the W2 side
IL3_W2 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L3 on the W2 side
Ur_W1 is transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on the W1 side (setting parameter)
Ur_W2 is transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on the W2 side (setting parameter)

As marked in equation 1 and equation 2, the first term on the right hand side of the
equation, represents the total contribution from the individual phase currents from
the W1 side to the fundamental frequency differential currents, compensated for
eventual power transformer phase shift. The second term on the right hand side of
the equation, represents the total contribution from the individual phase currents
from the W2 side to the fundamental frequency differential currents, compensated
for eventual power transformer phase shift and transferred to the power transformer
W1 side. The third term on the right hand side of the equation, represents the total
contribution from the individual phase currents from the W3 side to the
fundamental frequency differential currents, compensated for eventual power
transformer phase shift and transferred to the power transformer W1 side. These
current contributions are important, because they are used for calculation of
common bias current.

The fundamental frequency differential currents are the "usual" differential

currents, the magnitudes which are applied in a phase-wise manner to the operate -
restrain characteristic of the differential protection. The magnitudes of the
differential currents can be read as service values from the function and they are
available as outputs IDL1MAG, IDL2MAG, IDL3MAG from the differential
protection function block. Thus they can be connected to the disturbance recorder
and automatically recorded during any external or internal fault condition.

On-line compensation for load tap changer movement

A load tap changer is a mechanical device, which is used to step-wise change
number of turns within one power transformer winding. Consequently the power
transformer overall turns ratio is changed. Typically the load tap changer is located
within the HV winding (that is, winding 1, W1) of the power transformer. By
operating load tap changer, it is possible to step-wise regulate voltage on the LV
side of the power transformer. However at the same time the differential protection
for power transformer becomes unbalanced. Differential function in the IED has built-
in feature to continuously monitor the load tap changer position and dynamically
compensate on-line for changes in power transformer turns ratio.

Differential currents are calculated as shown in equation 1 and equation 2. By

setting parameters, the winding location of the OLTC is defined. Also, the voltage
change of each step. Thus, if for example the load tap changer is located within
winding 1 the no-load voltage Vn_W1 will be treated as a function of the actual
load tap changer position in equation 1 and equation 2. Thus for every load tap
changer position a corresponding value for Ur_W1 will be calculated and used in

126
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection

the above mentioned equations. By doing this, complete on-line compensation for
load tap changer movement is achieved. Differential protection will be ideally
balanced for every load tap changer position and no false differential current will
appear irrespective of actual load tap changer position.

Typically the minimum differential protection pickup for power transformer with
load tap changer is set between 30% to 40%. However with this load tap changer
compensation feature it is possible to set the differential protection in the IED more
sensitive with a pickup value of 15% to 20%.

Load tap changer position is measured within the IED by Tap changer control and
supervision, (TCLYLTC). Within this function block, the load tap changer position
value is continuously monitored to insure its integrity.

When any error in the load tap changer position is detected an alarm is given. This
signal shall be connected to the OLTCxAL input of the differential function block.
While OLTCxAL input has a logical value of one the differential protection
minimum pickup, originally defined by setting parameter IdMin, will be increased
by the set range of the load tap changer. Alternatively the differential current alarm
feature can be used to alarm for any problems in the whole load tap changer
compensation chain.

It shall be noted that:

two-winding differential protection in the IED can on-line compensate for one
load tap changer within the protected power transformer
three-winding differential protection in the IED can on-line compensate for up
to two load tap changers within the protected power transformer

Differential current alarm

Fundamental frequency differential current level is monitored all the time within
the differential function. As soon as all three fundamental frequency differential
currents are above the set threshold defined by setting parameter IDiffAlarm a
delay on pickup timer is started. When the pre-set time, defined by setting
parameter tAlarmDelay, has expired the differential current alarm is generated and
output signal IDALARM is set to logical value one. This feature can be effectively
used to provide alarm when load tap changer position compensation is used and
something in the whole compensation chain goes wrong. This alarm can be as well
used with some additional IED configuration logic to desensitize the differential
function.

Bias current
The bias current is calculated as the highest current amongst all individual winding
current contributions to the total fundamental frequency differential currents, as
shown in equation 1 and equation 2. All individual winding current contributions
are already referred to the power transformer winding one side (power transformer
HV winding) and therefore they can be compared regarding their magnitudes.
There are six (or nine in the case of a three-winding transformer) contributions to
the total fundamental differential currents, which are the candidates for the

127
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Differential protection

common bias current. The highest individual current contribution is taken as a

common bias (restrain) current for all three phases. This "maximum principle"
makes the differential protection more secure, with less risk to operate for external
faults and in the same time brings more meaning to the breakpoint settings of the
operate - restrain characteristic.

It shall be noted that if the zero-sequence currents are subtracted from the separate
contributions to the total differential current, then the zero-sequence component is
automatically eliminated from the bias current as well. This ensures that for
secondary injection from just one power transformer side the bias current is always
equal to the highest differential current regardless of the fault type. During normal
through-load operation of the power transformer, the bias current is equal to the
maximum load current from two (three) -power transformer windings.

The magnitudes of the common bias (restrain) current expressed in HV side

amperes can be read as service value from the function. At the same time it is
available as an output IBIAS from the differential protection function block. It can
be connected to the disturbance recorder and automatically recorded during any
external or internal fault condition.

For application with so called "T" configuration, that is, two restraint CT inputs
from one side of the protected power transformer, such as in the case of breaker-and-
a-half schemes the primary CT ratings can be much higher than the rating of the
protected power transformer. In order to determine the bias current for such T
configuration, the two separate currents flowing in the T-side are scaled down to
the protected power transform level by means of additional settings. This is done in
order to prevent unwanted de-sensitizing of the overall differential protection. In
addition to that, the resultant currents (the sum of two currents) into the protected
power transformer winding, which is not directly measured is calculated, and
included in the common bias calculation. The rest of the bias calculation procedure
is the same as in protection schemes without breaker-and-a-half arrangements.

Optional Elimination of zero sequence currents

To avoid unwanted trips for external earth-faults, the zero sequence currents should
be subtracted on the side of the protected power transformer, where the zero
sequence currents can flow at external earth -faults.

The zero sequence currents can be explicitly eliminated from the differential
currents and common bias current calculation by special, dedicated parameter
settings, which are available for every individual winding.

Elimination of the zero sequence component of current is necessary whenever:

the protected power transformer cannot transform the zero sequence currents
to the other side.
the zero sequence currents can only flow on one side of the protected power
transformer.

In most cases, power transformers do not properly transform the zero sequence
current to the other side. A typical example is a power transformer of the star-delta

128
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection

type, for example YNd1. Transformers of this type do not transform the zero
sequence quantities, but zero sequence currents can flow in the earthed star-
connected winding. In such cases, an external earth-fault on the star-side causes
zero sequence current to flow on the star-side of the power transformer, but not on
the other side. This results in false differential currents - consisting exclusively of
the zero sequence currents. If high enough, these false differential currents can
cause an unwanted disconnection of the healthy power transformer. They must
therefore be subtracted from the fundamental frequency differential currents if an
unwanted trip is to be avoided.

For delta windings this feature shall be enabled only if an earthing transformer
exists within the differential zone on the delta side of the protected power transformer.

Removing the zero sequence current from the differential currents decreases to
some extent the sensitivity of the differential protection for internal earth -faults. In
order to counteract this effect to some degree, the zero sequence current is
subtracted not only from the three fundamental frequency differential currents, but
from the bias current as well.

Restrained and unrestrained limits of the differential protection

The power transformer differential protection function uses two limits, to which
actual magnitudes of the three fundamental frequency differential currents are
compared at each execution of the function.

The unrestrained (that is, non-stabilized, "instantaneous") part of the differential

protection is used for very high differential currents, where it should be beyond any
doubt, that the fault is internal. This settable limit is constant and not proportional
to the bias current. Neither harmonic, nor any other restrain is applied to this limit,
which is therefore allowed to trip the power transformer instantaneously.

The restrained (stabilized) part of the differential protection compares the

calculated fundamental differential (operating) currents and the bias (restrain)
current, by applying them to the operate - restrain characteristic. Practically, the
magnitudes of the individual fundamental frequency differential currents are
compared with an adaptive limit. This limit is adaptive because it is dependent on
the bias (that is, restrain) current magnitude. This limit is called the operate -
restrain characteristic. It is represented by a double-slope, double-breakpoint
characteristic, as shown in figure 34. The restrained characteristic is determined by
the following 5 settings:

1. IdMin (Sensitivity in section 1, multiple of trans. HV side rated current set

under the parameter RatedCurrentW1)
2. EndSection1 (End of section 1, as multiple of transformer HV side rated
current set under the parameter RatedCurrentW1)
3. EndSection2 (End of section 2, as multiple of transformer HV side rated
current set under the parameter RatedCurrentW1)
4. SlopeSection2 (Slope in section 2, as multiple of transformer HV side rated
current set under the parameter RatedCurrentW1)
5. SlopeSection3 (Slope in section 2, as multiple of transformer HV side rated
current set under the parameter RatedCurrentW1)

129
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Differential protection

The restrained characteristic in figure 34 is defined by the settings:

1. IdMin
2. EndSection1
3. EndSection2
4. SlopeSection2
5. SlopeSection3

operate current
[ times IBase ]
Operate
5
unconditionally

UnrestrainedLimit
4

Operate
3
conditionally

2
Section 1 Section 2 Section 3

SlopeSection3
1
IdMin
SlopeSection2 Restrain
0
0 1 2 3 4 5

EndSection1 restrain current

EndSection2 [ times IBase ]

en05000187-2.vsd
IEC05000187 V2 EN

Figure 34: Description of the restrained, and the unrestrained operate

characteristics

where:

slope = D Ioperate 100%

D Irestrain
EQUATION1246 V1 EN

The operate - restrain characteristic is tailor-made and can be designed freely by

the user after his needs. The default characteristic is recommended to be used. It
gives good results in a majority of applications. The operate - restrain characteristic
has in principle three sections with a section-wise proportionality of the operate

130
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection

value to the bias (restrain) current. The reset ratio is in all parts of the characteristic
equal to 0.95.

Section 1: This is the most sensitive part on the characteristic. In section 1, normal
currents flow through the protected circuit and its current transformers, and risk for
higher false differential currents is relatively low. An un-compensated on-load tap-
changer is a typical reason for existence of the false differential currents in this
section. The slope in section 1 is always zero percent.

Section 2: In section 2, a certain minor slope is introduced which is supposed to

cope with false differential currents proportional to higher than normal currents
through the current transformers.

Section 3: The more pronounced slope in section 3 is designed to result in a higher

tolerance to substantial current transformer saturation at high through-fault
currents, which may be expected in this section.

The operate - restrain characteristic should be designed so that it can be expected that:

for internal faults, the operate (differential) currents are always with a good
margin above the operate - restrain characteristic
for external faults, the false (spurious) operate currents are with a good margin
below the operate - restrain characteristic

Fundamental frequency negative sequence differential currents

Existence of relatively high negative sequence currents is in itself a proof of a
disturbance on the power system, possibly a fault in the protected power
transformer. The negative-sequence currents are a measurable indication of an
abnormal condition, similar to the zero sequence current. One of the several
advantages of the negative sequence currents compared to the zero sequence
currents is that they provide coverage for phase-to-phase and power transformer turn-
to-turn faults. Theoretically, the negative sequence currents do not exist during
symmetrical three-phase faults, however they do appear during initial stage of such
faults for a long enough time (in most cases) for the IED to make the proper
decision. Further, the negative sequence currents are not stopped at a power
transformer by the Yd, or Dy connection type. The negative sequence currents are
always properly transformed to the other side of any power transformer for any
external disturbance. Finally, the negative sequence currents are not affected by
symmetrical through-load currents.

For power transformer differential protection applications, the negative sequence

based differential currents are calculated by using exactly the same matrix
equations, which are used to calculate the traditional phase-wise fundamental
frequency differential currents. The same equation shall be fed by the negative
sequence currents from the two power transformer sides instead of individual phase
currents, as shown in matrix equation 23 for a case of two-winding, YNd5 power
transformer.

131
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Differential protection

IDL1 _ NS 2 -1 -1 INS _ W 1 -1 0 1 INS _ W 2

IDL 2 _ NS = 1 -1 2 -1 a INS _ W 1 +
Ur _ W 2

1
1 -1 0 a INS _ W 2
3 2 Ur _ W 1 3 2
IDL3 _ NS -1 -1 2 a INS _ W 1 0 1 a INS _ W 2
-1

1 2 3

EQUATION1247 V1 EN (Equation 23)

where:
1. is the Negative Sequence Differential Currents
2. is the Negative Sequence current contribution from the W1 side
3. is the Negative Sequence current contribution from the W2 side

and where:
IDL1_NS is the negative sequence differential current in phase L1 (in
W1 side primary amperes)
IDL2_NS is the negative sequence differential current in phase L2 (in
W1 side primary amperes)
IDL3_NS is the negative sequence differential current in phase L3 (in
W1 side primary amperes)
INS_W1 is the negative sequence current on the W1 side in primary
amperes (phase L1 reference)
INS_W2 is the negative sequence current on the W2 side in primary
amperes (phase L1 reference)
Ur_W1 is the transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on the W1
side (setting parameter)
Ur_W2 is the transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on W2
side (setting parameter)

a is the complex operator for sequence quantities,

j 120
o 1 3
a=e =- + j
2 2
EQUATION1248 V1 EN (Equation 24)

Because the negative sequence currents always form the symmetrical three phase
current system on each transformer side (that is, negative sequence currents in
every phase will always have the same magnitude and be phase displaced for 120
electrical degrees from each other), it is only necessary to calculate the first
negative sequence differential current that is, IDL1_NS.

As marked in equation 23, the first term on the right hand side of the equation,
represents the total contribution of the negative sequence current from the W1 side
compensated for eventual power transformer phase shift. The second term on the
right hand side of the equation, represents the total contribution of the negative
sequence current from the W2 side compensated for eventual power transformer

132
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection

phase shift and transferred to the power transformer W1 side. These negative
sequence current contributions are phasors, which are further used in directional
comparisons, to characterize a fault as internal or external. See section "Internal/
external fault discriminator" for more information.

The magnitudes of the negative sequence differential current expressed in the HV

side A can be read as service values from the function. In the same time it is
available as outputs IDNSMAG from the differential protection function block.
Thus, it can be connected to the disturbance recorder and automatically recorded
during any external or internal fault condition.

Internal/external fault discriminator

The internal/external fault discriminator is a very powerful and reliable
supplementary criterion to the traditional differential protection. It is recommended
that this feature shall be always used (that is, On) when protecting three-phase
power transformers. The internal/external fault discriminator detects even minor
faults, with a high sensitivity and at high speed, and at the same time discriminates
with a high degree of dependability between internal and external faults.

The internal/external fault discriminator responds to the magnitudes and the

relative phase angles of the negative-sequence fault currents at the different
windings of the protected power transformer. The negative sequence fault currents
must first be referred to the same phase reference side, and put to the same
magnitude reference. This is done by the matrix expression (see equation 23).

Operation of the internal/external fault discriminator is based on the relative

position of the two phasors representing the winding one (W1) and winding two
(W2) negative sequence current contributions, respectively, defined by expression
shown in equation 23. It performs a directional comparison between these two
phasors. First, the LV side phasor is referred to the HV side (W1 side): both the
magnitude, and the phase position are referred to the HV (W1 side). Then the
relative phase displacement between the two negative sequence current phasors is
calculated. In case of three-winding power transformers, a little more complex
algorithm is applied, with two directional tests. The overall directional
characteristic of the internal/external fault discriminator is shown in figure 35,
where the directional characteristic is defined by two setting parameters:

1. IMinNegSeq
2. NegSeqROA

133
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Differential protection

90 deg
120 deg
If one or the Internal/external
other of fault boundary
currents is too
low, then no
measurement NegSeqROA
is done, and (Relay
120 degrees Operate
is mapped Angle)

180 deg 0 deg

IMinNegSeq

External Internal
fault fault
region region

270 deg en05000188-3-en.vsd

IEC05000188 V3 EN

Figure 35: Operating characteristic of the internal/external fault discriminator

In order to perform directional comparison of the two phasors their magnitudes

must be high enough so that one can be sure that they are due to a fault. On the
other hand, in order to guarantee a good sensitivity of the internal/external fault
discriminator, the value of this minimum limit must not be too high. Therefore this
limit value, called IminNegSeq, is settable in the range of 0.02 to 0.20 times the
IBase of the power transformer winding one. The default value is 0.04. Note that,
in order to enhance stability at higher fault currents, the relatively very low
threshold value IminNegSeq is dynamically increased at currents higher than
normal currents: if the bias current is higher than 110% of IBase ,then 10% of the
bias current is added to the IminNegSeq. Only if the magnitudes of both negative
sequence current contributions are above the actual limit, the relative position
between these two phasors is checked. If either of the negative sequence current
contributions, which should be compared, is too small (less than the set value for
IminNegSeq), no directional comparison is made in order to avoid the possibility to
produce a wrong decision. This magnitude check guarantees stability of the
algorithm, when the power transformer is energized. The setting NegSeqROA
represents the Relay Operate Angle, which determines the boundary between the
internal and external fault regions. It can be selected in a range from 30 degrees to
90 degrees, with a step of 0.1 degree. The default value is 60 degrees. The
default setting 60 degree favours security in comparison to dependability.

If the above condition concerning magnitudes is fulfilled, the internal/external fault

discriminator compares the relative phase angle between the negative sequence

134
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection

current contributions from W1 and W2 sides of the power transformer using the
following two rules:

If the negative sequence current contributions from the W1 and the W2 sides
are in phase, the fault is internal (that is, both phasors are within protected zone)
If the negative sequence currents contributions from W1 and W2 sides are 180
degrees out of phase, the fault is external (that is, W1 phasors is outside
protected zone)

For example, for any unsymmetrical external fault, ideally the respective negative
sequence current contributions from the W1 and W2 power transformer sides will
be exactly 180 degrees apart and equal in magnitude, regardless the power
transformer turns ratio and phase displacement. An example is shown in figure 36,
which shows trajectories of the two separate phasors representing the negative
sequence current contributions from the HV and LV sides of an Yd5 power
transformer (after compensation of the transformer turns ratio and phase
displacement) by using equation 23) for an unsymmetrical external fault. Observe
that the relative phase angle between these two phasors is 180 electrical degrees at
any point in time. No current transformer saturation was assumed for this case.

"steady state"
for HV side 90
neg. seq. phasor
60

150 30

10
ms

180 0
0.1 kA
0.2 kA
0.3 kA
10 0.4 kA
ms
210 330

"steady state"
240 for LV side
270 neg. seq. phasor

Contribution to neg. seq. differential current from HV side

Contribution to neg. seq. differential current from LV side

en05000189.vsd
IEC05000189 V1 EN

Figure 36: Trajectories of Negative Sequence Current Contributions from HV

and LV sides of Yd5 power transformer during external fault

135
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Differential protection

Under external fault conditions, the relative angle is theoretically equal to 180
degrees. During internal faults, the angle shall ideally be 0 degrees, but due to
possible different negative sequence source impedance angles on the W1 and W2
sides of the protected power transformer, it may differ somewhat from the ideal
zero value. However, during heavy faults, CT saturation might cause the measured
phase angle to differ from 180 degrees for an external, and from 0 degrees for an
internal fault. See figure 37 for an example of a heavy internal fault with transient
CT saturation.

Dire ctiona l Compa ris on Crite rion: Inte rna l fa ult a s s e e n from the HV s ide
90
e xcurs ion
120 60
from 0 de gre e s
35 ms due to CT
s a tura tion
150 30
de finite ly
a n inte rna l
fa ult

180 0
trip c o mmand
in 12 ms
e xte rna l
fa ult Inte rna l fa ult
0.5 kA de cla re d 7 ms
re gion
210 330 a fte r inte rna l
fa ult occure d
1.0 kA

240 300
1.5 kA
270
HV s ide contribution to the tota l ne ga tive s e que nce diffe re ntia l curre nt in kA
Dire ctiona l limit (within the re gion de limite d by 60 de gre e s is inte rna l fa ult)

en05000190.vsd

IEC05000190 V1 EN

Figure 37: Operation of the internal/external fault discriminator for internal

fault with CT saturation

It shall be noted that additional security measures are implemented in the internal/
external fault discriminator algorithm in order to guarantee proper operation with
heavily saturated current transformers. The trustworthy information on whether a
fault is internal or external is typically obtained in about 10ms after the fault
inception, depending on the setting IminNegSeq, and the magnitudes of the fault
currents. During heavy faults, approximately 5ms time to full saturation of the
main CT is sufficient in order to produce a correct discrimination between internal
and external faults.

Unrestrained, and sensitive negative sequence protections

Two sub functions, which are based on the internal/external fault discriminator
with the ability to trip a faulty power transformer, are parts of the traditional power
transformer differential protection.

136
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection

The unrestrained negative sequence differential protection

The unrestrained negative sequence protection is activated if one or more start
signals have been set by the traditional differential protection algorithm. This
happens because one or more of the fundamental frequency differential currents
entered the operate region on the operate - restrain characteristic. So, this
protection is not independent of the traditional restrained differential protection - it
is activated after the first start signal has been placed.

If the same fault has been positively recognized as internal, then the unrestrained
negative sequence differential protection places its own trip request.

Any block signals by the harmonic and/or waveform criteria, which can block the
traditional differential protection are overridden, and the differential protection
operates quickly without any further delay.

This logic guarantees a fast disconnection of a faulty power transformer for any
internal fault.

If the same fault has been classified as external, then generally, but not
unconditionally, a trip command is prevented. If a fault is classified as external, the
further analysis of the fault conditions is initiated. If all the instantaneous
differential currents in phases where start signals have been issued are free of
harmonic pollution, then a (minor) internal fault, simultaneous with a predominant
external fault can be suspected. This conclusion can be drawn because at external
faults, major false differential currents can only exist when one or more current
transformers saturate. In this case, the false instantaneous differential currents are
polluted by higher harmonic components, the 2nd, the 5th etc.

Sensitive negative sequence based turn-to-turn fault protection

The sensitive, negative sequence current based turn-to-turn fault protection detects
the low level faults, which are not detected by the traditional differential protection
until they develop into more severe faults, including power transformer iron core.
The sensitive protection is independent from the traditional differential protection
and is a very good complement to it. The essential part of this sensitive protection
is the internal/external fault discriminator. In order to be activated, the sensitive
protection requires no start signal from the traditional power transformer biased
differential protection. If magnitudes of HV and LV negative sequence current
contributions are above the set limit for IminNegSeq, then their relative positions
are determined. If the disturbance is characterized as an internal fault, then a
separate trip request will be placed. Any decision on the way to the final trip
request must be confirmed several times in succession in order to cope with
eventual CT transients. This causes a short additional operating time delay due to
this security count. For very low level turn-to-turn faults the overall response time
of this protection is about 30ms.

Instantaneous differential currents

The instantaneous differential currents are calculated from the instantaneous values
of the input currents in order to perform the harmonic analysis and waveform

137
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Differential protection

analysis upon each one of them (see section "Harmonic and waveform block
criteria" for more information).

The instantaneous differential currents are calculated using the same matrix
expression as shown in equation 1 and equation 2. The same matrices A, B and C
are used for these calculations. The only difference is that the matrix algorithm is
fed by instantaneous values of currents, that is, samples.

Harmonic and waveform block criteria

The two block criteria are the harmonic restrain and the waveform restrain. These
two criteria have the power to block a trip command by the traditional differential
protection, which produces start signals by applying the differential currents, and
the bias current, to the operate - restrain characteristic.

Harmonic restrain
The harmonic restrain is the classical restrain method traditionally used with power
transformer differential protections. The goal is to prevent an unwanted trip
command due to magnetizing inrush currents at switching operations, or due to
magnetizing currents at over-voltages.

The magnetizing currents of a power transformer flow only on one side of the
power transformer and are therefore always the cause of false differential currents.
The harmonic analysis (the 2nd and the 5th harmonic) is applied to the
instantaneous differential currents. Typical instantaneous differential currents
during power transformer energizing are shown in figure 38. The harmonic
analysis is only applied in those phases, where start signals have been set. For
example, if the content of the 2nd harmonic in the instantaneous differential current
of phase L1 is above the setting I2/I1Ratio, then a block signal is set for that phase,
which can be read as BLK2HL1 output of the differential protection.

Waveform restrain
The waveform restrain criterion is a good complement to the harmonic analysis.
The waveform restrain is a pattern recognition algorithm, which looks for intervals
within each fundamental power system cycle with low instantaneous differential
current. This interval is often called current gap in protection literature. However,
within differential function this criterion actually searches for long-lasting intervals
with low rate-of-change in instantaneous differential current, which are typical for
the power transformer inrush currents. Block signals BLKWAVLx are set in those
phases where such behavior is detected. The algorithm does not require any end
user settings. The waveform algorithm is automatically adapted dependent only on
the power transformer rated data.

138
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection

IEC05000343 V1 EN

Figure 38: Inrush currents to a transformer as seen by a protective IED.

Typical is a high amount of the 2nd harmonic, and intervals of low
current, and low rate-of-change of current within each period.

Cross-blocking between phases

The basic definition of the cross-blocking is that one of the three phases can block
operation (that is, tripping) of the other two phases due to the harmonic pollution of
the differential current in that phase (that is, waveform, 2nd or 5th harmonic
content). In differential algorithm the user can control the cross-blocking between
the phases via the setting parameter CrossBlockEn=On.

When parameter CrossBlockEn=On cross blocking between phases is introduced.

There is no time settings involved, but the phase with the operating point above the
set bias characteristic (in the operate region) will be able to cross-block the other
two phases if it is itself blocked by any of the previously explained restrained
criteria. As soon as the operating point for this phase is below the set bias
characteristic (that is, in the restrain region) cross blocking from that phase will be
inhibited. In this way cross-blocking of the temporary nature is achieved. It should
be noted that this is the default setting value for this parameter.

When parameter CrossBlockEn=Off, any cross blocking between phases will be

disabled. It is recommended to use the value Off with caution in order to avoid the
unwanted tripping during initial energizing of the power transformer.

Switch onto fault feature

The transformer differential function has a built-in, advanced switch onto fault
feature. This feature can be enabled or disabled by a setting parameter SOTFMode.
When enabled this feature ensures quick differential protection tripping in cases
where a transformer is energized with an internal fault (for example, forgotten
earthing on transformer LV side). Operation of this feature is based on the fact that
a current gap (term current gap is explained under waveblock feature above) will
exist within the first power system cycle when healthy power transformer is
energized. If this is not the case the waveblock criterion will reset quickly. This

139
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Differential protection

quick reset of the waveblock criterion will temporarily disable the second harmonic
blocking feature of the differential protection function. This consequently ensures
fast operation of the transformer differential function for a switch onto a fault
condition. It shall be noted that this feature is only active during initial power
transformer energizing, under the first 50 ms. When the switch onto fault feature is
disabled by the setting parameter SOTFMode, the waveblock and second harmonic
blocking features work in parallel and are completely independent from each other.

Open CT detection feature

Transformer differential protection has a built-in, advanced open CT detection
feature.

A sudden inadvertently opened CT circuit may cause an unexpected and unwanted

operation of the Transformer differential protection under normal load conditions.
Damage of secondary equipment may occur due to high voltage from open CT
circuit outputs. It is always an advantage, from the point of view of security and
reliability, to have the open CT detection function to block the Transformer
differential protection function in case of an open CT condition, and produce an
alarm signal to the operational personnel to quickly correct the open CT condition.

The built-in open CT feature can be enabled or disabled by the setting parameter
OpenCTEnable (Off/On). When enabled, this feature tries to prevent mal-operation
when a loaded main CT connected to Transformer differential protection is by
mistake open circuited on the secondary side. Note that this feature can only detect
interruption of one CT phase current at a time. If two or even all three-phase
currents of one set of CTs are accidentally interrupted at precisely the same time,
this feature cannot operate. Transformer differential protection generates a trip
signal if the false differential current is sufficiently high. An open CT circuit is
typically detected in 1214 ms, and if the load in the protected circuit is relatively
high, about the nominal load, the unwanted trip cannot always be prevented. Still,
the information about what was the cause of the open CT secondary circuit, is vital.

The principle applied to detect an open CT is a simple pattern recognition method,

similar to the waveform check used by the Power Transformer Differential
Protection in order to detect the magnetizing inrush condition. The open CT
detection principle is based on the fact that for an open CT, the current in the phase
with the open CT suddenly drops to zero (that is, as seen by the protection), while
the currents of the other two phases continue as before.

The open CT function is supposed to detect an open CT under normal conditions,

that is, with the protected multi-terminal circuit under normal load (10...120% of
the rated load). If the load currents are very low or zero, the open CT condition
cannot be detected. In addition to load condition requirement, Open CT function
also checks the differential current on faulty phase. If the differential current is
lower than 10% of IBase, the open CT condition cannot be detected. Therefore, the
Open CT algorithm only detects an open CT if the load on the power transformer
protected object is 10...120% of rated load and the differential current is higher
than 10% of IBase on that phase. The search for an open CT starts 60 seconds (50
seconds in 60 Hz systems) after the bias current has entered the 10...120% range.

140
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection

The Open CT detection feature can also be explicitly deactivated by setting:

OpenCTEnable = 0 (Off).

If an open CT is detected and the output OPENCT set to 1, then all the differential
functions are blocked, except the unrestrained (instantaneous) differential. An
alarm signal is also produced after a settable delay (tOCTAlarmDelay) to report to
operational personnel for quick remedy actions once the open CT is detected.
When the open CT condition is removed (that is, the previously open CT is
reconnected), the functions remain blocked for a specified interval of time, which
is also defined by a setting (tOCTResetDelay). This is to prevent an eventual mal-
operation after the reconnection of the previously open CT secondary circuit.

The open CT algorithm provides detailed information about the location of the
defective CT secondary circuit. The algorithm clearly indicates the IED side, CT
input and phase in which an open CT condition has been detected. These
indications are provided via the following outputs from the Transformer
differential protection function:

1. Output OPENCT provides instant information to indicate that an open CT

circuit has been detected.
2. Output OPENCTAL provides a time-delayed alarm that the open CT circuit
has been detected. Time delay is defined by the parameter tOCTAlarmDelay.
3. Integer output OPENCTIN provides information on the local HMI regarding
which open CT circuit has been detected (1=CT input No 1; 2=CT input No 2).
4. Integer output OPENCTPH provides information on the local HMI regarding
in which phase an open CT circuit has been detected (1=Phase L1; 2= Phase
L2; 3= Phase L3).

Once the open CT condition is declared, the algorithm stops to search for further
open CT circuits. It waits until the first open CT circuit has been corrected. Note
that once the open CT condition has been detected, it can be reset automatically
within the differential function. It is not possible to externally reset an open CT
condition. To reset the open CT circuit alarm automatically, the following
conditions must be fulfilled:

Bias current is for at least one minute smaller than 120%

The open CT condition in the defective CT circuit has been corrected (for
example, current asymmetry disappears)
The above two conditions are fulfilled for a longer time than defined by the
setting parameter tOCTResetDelay

If an open CT has been detected in a separate group of three CTs, the algorithm is
reset either when the missing current returns to the normal value, or when all three
currents become zero. After the reset, the open CT detection algorithm starts again
to search for open CT circuits within the protected zone.

141
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Differential protection

6.1.7.2 Logic diagram

The simplified internal logics, for transformer differential protection are shown in
the following figures.

ADM Differential function

Trafo
Data
A/D conversion scaling with CT

Phasor calculation of individual

Open CT logic on W1 side

Instantaneous (sample based) IDL1
Phasors & samples
phase current

Differential current, phase L1

ratio

IDL2
Derive equation to calculate differential currents Instantaneous (sample based)
Differential current, phase L2

Instantaneous (sample based) IDL3

Differential current, phase L3

Negative sequence diff current IDNSMAG

& NS current contribution from
A/D conversion scaling with CT

Phasor calculation of individual

individual windings
Open CT logic on W2 side
phase current

IDL1MAG
Fundamental frequency (phasor
based) Diff current, phase L1 &
ratio

phase current contributions from

individual windings
Phasors & samples

IDL2MAG
Fundamental frequency (phasor
based) Diff current, phase L2 &
phase current contributions from
individual windings
IDL3MAG
Fundamental frequency (phasor
based) Diff current, phase L3 &
phase current contributions from
individual windings
MAX IBIAS

Settings for Zer. Seq.

Current Reduction

en06000554-3-en.vsd

IEC06000544 V3 EN

Figure 39: Treatment of measured currents within IED for transformer differential function

Figure 39 shows how internal treatment of measured currents is done in case of a two-
winding transformer.

The following currents are inputs used in the power transformer differential
protection function. They must all be expressed in power system (primary) A.

142
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection

1. Instantaneous values of currents (samples) from the HV, and LV sides for two-
winding power transformers, and from the HV, the first LV, and the second
LV side for three-winding power transformers.
2. Currents from all power transformer sides expressed as fundamental frequency
phasors with their real and imaginary parts. These currents are calculated
within the protection function by the fundamental frequency Fourier filters.
3. Negative sequence currents from all power transformer sides expressed as
phasors. These currents are calculated within the protection function by the
symmetrical components module.

The power transformer differential protection:

1. Calculates three fundamental frequency differential currents and one common

bias current. The zero-sequence component can optionally be eliminated from
each of the three fundamental frequency differential currents and at the same
time from the common bias current.
2. Calculates three instantaneous differential currents. They are used for
harmonic, and waveform analysis. Instantaneous differential currents are
useful for post-fault analysis using disturbance recording
3. Calculates negative-sequence differential current. Contributions to it from both
(all three) power transformer sides are used by the internal/external fault
discriminator to detect and classify a fault as internal or external.

BLKUNRES

IdUnre a TRIPUNREL1
b>a AND
b
IDL1MAG

IBIAS STL1
AND
BLOCK
BLKRES

TRIPRESL1
AND
OR 1

IDL1
to fault logic

2nd BLK2HL1
Switch on

Harmonic

Wave BLKWAVL1
block

5th BLK5HL1
Harmonic
Cross Block
Cross Block to L2 or L3
from L2 or L3 AND
OR
AND
OpCrossBlock=On

en06000545.vsd
IEC06000545 V1 EN

Figure 40: Transformer differential protection simplified logic diagram for

Phase L1

143
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Differential protection

Internal/ EXTFAULT
Neg.Seq. Diff External INTFAULT
Current Fault
Contributions discrimin
ator TRNSSENS
t
&
OpNegSeqDiff=On

IBIAS
a
b>a
b
Constant

TRNSUNR
STL1 &
STL2
>1
STL3

IEC05000167-2-en.vsd
IEC05000167-TIFF V2 EN

Figure 41: Transformer differential protection simplified logic diagram for

external/internal fault discriminator

TRIPRESL1
TRIPRESL2 TRIPRES
OR
TRIPRESL3

TRIPUNREL1
TRIPUNREL2 TRIPUNRE
OR
TRIPUNREL3

TRIP
TRNSSENS OR
TRNSUNR

en05000278.vsd
IEC05000278 V1 EN

Figure 42: Transformer differential protection internal grouping of tripping

signals

144
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection

STL1
STL2 START
OR
STL3

BLK2HL1
BLK2HL2 BLK2H
OR
BLK2HL3

BLK5HL1
BLK5HL2 BLK5H
OR
BLK5HL3

BLKWAVL1
BLKWAVL2 BLKWAV
OR
BLKWAVL3

IEC05000279-2-en.vsd
IEC05000279-TIFF V2 EN

Figure 43: Transformer differential protection internal grouping of logical signals

Logic in figures 40, 41, 42 and 43 can be summarized as follows:

1. The three fundamental frequency differential currents are applied in a phase-

wise manner to two limits. The first limit is the operate-restrain characteristic,
while the other is the high-set unrestrained limit. If the first limit is exceeded, a
start signal START is set. If the unrestrained limit is exceeded, an immediate
unrestrained trip TRIPUNRE and common trip TRIP are issued.
2. If a start signal is issued in a phase the harmonic and the waveform block
signals are checked. Only a start signal, which is free of all of its block signals
can result in a trip command. If the cross-block logic scheme is applied, then
only if all phases with set start signal are free of their respective block signals,
a restrained trip TRIPRES and common trip TRIP are issued
3. If a start signal is issued in a phase, and the fault has been classified as
internal, then any eventual block signals are overridden and unrestrained
negative-sequence trip TRNSUNR and common trip TRIP are issued without
any further delay. This feature is called the unrestrained negative-sequence
protection 110% bias.
4. The sensitive negative sequence differential protection is independent of any
start signals. It is meant to detect smaller internal faults such as turn-to-turn
faults, which are often not detected by the traditional differential protection.
The sensitive negative sequence differential protection starts whenever both
contributions to the total negative sequence differential current (that must be
compared by the internal/external fault discriminator) are higher than the value
of the setting IMinNegSeq. If a fault is positively recognized as internal, and
the condition is stable with no interruption for at least one fundamental
frequency cycle the sensitive negative sequence differential protection
TRNSSENS and common trip TRIP are issued. This feature is called the
sensitive negative sequence differential protection.
5. If a start signal is issued in a phase (see signal STL1), even if the fault has
been classified as an external fault, the instantaneous differential current of
that phase (see signal IDL1) is analyzed for the 2nd and the 5th harmonic

145
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Differential protection

contents (see the blocks with the text inside: 2nd Harmonic; Wave block and
5th Harmonic). If there is less harmonic pollution. than allowed by the settings
I2/I1Ratio, and I5/I1Ratio, (then the outputs from the blocks 2nd harmonic and
5th harmonic is 0) then it is assumed that a minor simultaneous internal fault
must have occurred. Only under these conditions a trip command is allowed
(the signal TRIPRESL1 is = 1). The cross-block logic scheme is automatically
applied under such circumstances. (This means that the cross block signals
from the other two phases L2 and L3 is not activated to obtain a trip on the
TRIPRESL1 output signal in figure 40)
6. All start and blocking conditions are available as phase segregated as well as
common (that is three-phase) signals.

IDL1 MAG
a
a>b
I Diff Alarm b

IDL2 MAG tAlarm Delay

a
& IDALARM
a>b t
I Diff Alarm b

IDL3 MAG
a
a>b
I Diff Alarm b

en06000546.vsd
IEC06000546 V1 EN

Figure 44: Differential current alarm logic

6.1.8 Technical data

Table 48: T2WPDIF, T3WPDIF technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic Adaptable 1.0% of Ir for I
Ir
1.0% of I for I >
Ir
Reset ratio > 90% -
Unrestrained differential current limit (100-5000)% ofIBase on high voltage 1.0% of set
winding value
Minimum pickup (5-60)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir
Second harmonic blocking (5.0-100.0)% of fundamental 1.0% of Ir
differential current Note:
fundamental
magnitude =
100% of Ir

Table continues on next page

146
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Fifth harmonic blocking (5.0-100.0)% of fundamental 5.0% of Ir
differential current Note:
fundamental
magnitude =
100% of Ir

Connection type for each of the Y or D -

windings
Phase displacement between high 011 -
voltage winding, W1 and each of the
windings, W2 and W3. Hour notation
Operate time at 0 to 2 x Id, restrained Min = 20 ms
function Max = 30 ms
Reset time at 2 to 0 x Id, restrained Min = 10 ms
function Max = 25 ms
Operate time at 0 to 5 x Id, Min = 10 ms
unrestrained function Max = 20 ms
Reset time at 5 to 0 x Id, unrestrained Min = 15 ms
function Max = 30 ms
Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 5 x Id -

6.2 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF

6.2.1 Identification
IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
Function description
identification identification device number

1Ph High impedance differential Id

HZPDIF 87
protection

SYMBOL-CC V2 EN

6.2.2 Functionality
The 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF functions can be used
when the involved CT cores have the same turns ratio and similar magnetizing
characteristics. It utilizes an external CT secondary current summation by wiring.
Actually all CT secondary circuits which are involved in the differential scheme
are connected in parallel. External series resistor, and a voltage dependent resistor
which are both mounted externally to the IED, are also required.

The external resistor unit shall be ordered under IED accessories in the Product Guide.

HZPDIF can be used to protect tee-feeders or busbars, reactors, motors, auto-

transformers, capacitor banks and so on. One such function block is used for a high-

147
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Differential protection

impedance restricted earth fault protection. Three such function blocks are used to
form three-phase, phase-segregated differential protection. Several function block
instances (for example, six) can be available in a single IED.

6.2.3 Function block

HZPDIF
ISI* TRIP
BLOCK ALARM
BLKTR MEASVOLT

IEC05000363-2-en.vsd
IEC05000363 V2 EN

Figure 45: HZPDIF function block

6.2.4 Signals
Table 49: HZPDIF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
ISI GROUP - Single phase current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip

Table 50: HZPDIF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal
MEASVOLT REAL Measured RMS voltage on CT secondary side

6.2.5 Settings
Table 51: HZPDIF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
U>Alarm 5 - 500 V 1 10 Alarm voltage level in volts on CT
secondary side
tAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay to activate alarm
U>Trip 10 - 900 V 1 100 Operate voltage level in volts on CT
secondary side
SeriesResistor 50 - 20000 Ohm 1 250 Value of series resistor in Ohms

148
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection

6.2.6 Monitored data

Table 52: HZPDIF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
MEASVOLT REAL - kV Measured RMS voltage
on CT secondary side

6.2.7 Operation principle

High impedance protection system is a simple technique which requires that all
CTs, used in the protection scheme, have relatively high knee point voltage, similar
magnetizing characteristic and the same ratio. These CTs are installed in all ends of
the protected object. In order to make a scheme all CT secondary circuits belonging
to one phase are connected in parallel. From the CT junction points a measuring
branch is connected. The measuring branch is a series connection of one variable
setting resistor (or series resistor) RS with high ohmic value and an over-current
element. Thus, the high impedance differential protection responds to the current
flowing through the measuring branch. However, this current is result of a
differential voltage caused by this parallel CT connection across the measuring
branch. Non-linear resistor (that is, metrosil) is used in order to protect entire
scheme from high peak voltages which may appear during internal faults. Typical
high impedance differential scheme is shown in Figure 46. Note that only one
phase is shown in this figure.

RS

3 U
I
1
I> (50) 5

2
GUID-5CEAF088-D92B-45E5-B98F-3083894A694C V1 EN

Figure 46: HZPDIF scheme

Where in the Figure:

1. shows one main CT secondary winding connected in parallel with all other
CTs, from the same phase, connected to this scheme.
2. shows the scheme earthing point.

149
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Differential protection

It is of utmost importance to insure that only one earthing point

exists in such protection scheme.

3. shows the setting (stabilizing) resistor RS.

4. shows the over-current measuring element.

The series connection of stabilizing resistor and over-current

element is designated as measuring branch.

5. shows the non-linear resistor (that is, metrosil).

6. U is the voltage across the CT paralleling point (for example, across the
measuring branch).
7. I is the current flowing through the measuring branch.

U and I are interrelated in accordance with the following

formula U=RS I.

Due to the parallel CT connections the high impedance differential relay can only
measure one current and that is the relay operating quantity. That means that there
is no any stabilizing quantity (that is, bias) in high-impedance differential
protection schemes. Therefore in order to guaranty the stability of the differential
relay during external faults the operating quantity must not exceed the set pickup
value. Thus, for external faults, even with severe saturation of some of the current
transformers, the voltage across the measuring branch shall not rise above the relay
set pickup value. To achieve that a suitable value for setting resistor RS is selected
in such a way that the saturated CT secondary winding provides a much lower
impedance path for the false differential current than the measuring branch. In case
of an external fault causing current transformer saturation, the non-saturated
current transformers drive most of the spill differential current through the
secondary winding of the saturated current transformer and not through the
measuring brunch of the relay. The voltage drop across the saturated current
transformer secondary winding appears also across the measuring brunch, however
it will typically be relatively small. Therefore, the pick-up value of the relay has to
be set above this false operating voltage.

See the application manual for operating voltage and sensitivity calculation.

6.2.7.1 Logic diagram

The logic diagram shows the operation principles for the 1Ph High impedance
differential protection function HZPDIF, see Figure 47.

The function utilizes the raw samples from the single phase current input connected
to it. Thus the twenty samples per fundamental power system cycle are available to
the HZPDIF function. These current samples are first multiplied with the set value

150
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection

for the used stabilizing resistor in order to get voltage waveform across the
measuring branch. The voltage waveform is then filtered in order to get its RMS
value. Note that used filtering is designed in such a way that it ensures complete
removal of the DC current component which may be present in the primary fault
current. The voltage RMS value is then compared with set Alarm and Trip
thresholds. Note that the TRIP signal is intentionally delayed on drop off for 30 ms
within the function. The measured RMS voltage is available as a service value
from the function. The function has block and trip block inputs available as well.

IEC05000301 V1 EN

Figure 47: Logic diagram for 1Ph High impedance differential protection
HZPDIF

6.2.8 Technical data

Table 53: HZPDIF technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage (10-900) V 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
I=U/R 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio >95% at (30-900) V -

Maximum U>Trip2/SeriesResistor 200 W -
continuous power
Operate time at 0 Min = 5 ms
to 10 x Ud Max = 15 ms

Reset time at 10 Min = 75 ms

to 0 x Ud Max = 95 ms

Critical impulse 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Ud -

time
Table continues on next page

151
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Differential protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate time at 0 Min = 25 ms
to 2 x Ud Max = 35 ms

Reset time at 2 Min = 50 ms

to 0 x Ud Max = 70 ms

Critical impulse 15 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Ud -

time

6.3 Low impedance restricted earth fault protection

REFPDIF

6.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Restricted earth-fault protection, low REFPDIF 87N
impedance
IdN/I

SYMBOL-AA V1 EN

6.3.2 Functionality
Restricted earth-fault protection, low-impedance function REFPDIF can be used on
all directly or low-impedance earthed windings. The REFPDIF function provides
high sensitivity and high speed tripping as it protects each winding separately and
thus does not need inrush stabilization.

The REFPDIF function is a percentage biased function with an additional zero

sequence current directional comparison criterion. This gives excellent sensitivity
and stability during through faults.

REFPDIF can also protect autotransformers. Five currents are measured at the most
complicated configuration as shown in Figure 48.

152
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection

CT CT
YNdx
CT CB CB
Y d
CB CB

Autotransformer
CT
IED

The most typical CT CB CB CT

application
The most complicated
application - autotransformer

IEC05000058-2-en.vsd
IEC05000058-2 V1 EN

Figure 48: Examples of applications of the REFPDIF

6.3.3 Function block

REFPDIF
I3P* TRIP
I3PW1CT1* START
I3PW1CT2* DIROK
I3PW2CT1* BLK2H
I3PW2CT2* IRES
BLOCK IN
IBIAS
IDIFF
ANGLE
I2RATIO

IEC06000251_2_en.vsd
IEC06000251 V2 EN

Figure 49: REFPDIF function block

6.3.4 Signals
Table 54: REFPDIF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for neutral current input
SIGNAL
I3PW1CT1 GROUP - Group signal for primary CT1 current input
SIGNAL
I3PW1CT2 GROUP - Group signal for primary CT2 current input
SIGNAL
I3PW2CT1 GROUP - Group signal for secondary CT1 current input
SIGNAL
I3PW2CT2 GROUP - Group signal for secondary CT2 current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

153
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Differential protection

Table 55: REFPDIF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip by restricted earth fault protection function
START BOOLEAN Start by restricted earth fault protection function
DIROK BOOLEAN Directional Criteria has operated for internal fault
BLK2H BOOLEAN Block due to 2-nd harmonic
IRES REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. residual current
IN REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. neutral current
IBIAS REAL Magnitude of the bias current
IDIFF REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current
ANGLE REAL Direction angle from zerosequence feature
I2RATIO REAL Second harmonic ratio

6.3.5 Settings
Table 56: REFPDIF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
IdMin 4.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 10.0 Maximum sensitivity in % of IBase
CTFactorPri1 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 CT factor for HV side CT1 (CT1rated/
HVrated current)
CTFactorPri2 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 CT factor for HV side CT2 (CT2rated/
HVrated current)
CTFactorSec1 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 CT factor for MV side CT1 (CT1rated/
MVrated current)
CTFactorSec2 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 CT factor for MV side CT2 (CT2rated/
MVrated current)

Table 57: REFPDIF Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ROA 60 - 90 Deg 1 60 Relay operate angle for zero sequence
directional feature

Table 58: REFPDIF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

154
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection

6.3.6 Monitored data

Table 59: REFPDIF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IRES REAL - A Magnitude of fund. freq.
residual current
IN REAL - A Magnitude of fund. freq.
neutral current
IBIAS REAL - A Magnitude of the bias
current
IDIFF REAL - A Magnitude of fund. freq.
differential current
ANGLE REAL - deg Direction angle from
zerosequence feature
I2RATIO REAL - - Second harmonic ratio

6.3.7 Operation principle

6.3.7.1 Fundamental principles of the restricted earth-fault protection

Restricted earth-fault protection, low impedance function (REFPDIF) detects earth

faults on earthed power transformer windings, most often an earthed star winding.
REFPDIF is a unit protection of the differential type. Since REFPDIF is based on
the zero sequence current, which theoretically only exists in case of an earth fault,
REFPDIF can be made very sensitive regardless of normal load currents. It is the
fastest protection a power transformer winding can have. The high sensitivity and
the high speed tend to make such a protection unstable. Special measures must be
taken to make it insensitive to conditions for which it should not operate, for
example, heavy through faults of phase-to-phase type or heavy external earth faults.

REFPDIF is a differential protection of the low impedance type. All three-phase

currents, and the neutral point current, must be fed separately to REFPDIF. The
fundamental frequency components of all currents are extracted from all input
currents, while other eventual zero sequence components, such as the 3rd harmonic
currents, are fully suppressed. Then the residual current phasor is calculated from
the three line current phasors. This zero sequence current phasor is added to the
neutral current vectorially, in order to obtain differential current.

The following facts may be observed from Figure 50 and Figure 51, where the
three line CTs are shown as connected together in order to measure the residual 3Io
current, for the sake of simplicity.

155
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Differential protection

These three zone of protection

zero-sequence
currents are not measured
Izs1
L1 L1

Power Izs1
L2 L2
system
Izs1 L3
L3
3Izs1

Uzs Current in the neutral

IL1+ IL2+IL3 = 3I0 (measured as IN ) serves
3I0 = 3Izs1 IN = -3Izs1 as a directional reference
Ifault (Summation in the IED) because it has the same
direction for both internal
Return path through
transformer and external faults.
Return path via
power system
External
fault
block operate Zero-sequence differential
region
IN current for external fault
3I0
Idiff = abs(3I0 + IN )
block Idiff = 3Izs1 - 3Izs1 = 0
ROA
External Internal
fault block fault
ROA = Relay Operate Angle
region region
IEC09000107-3-en.vsd
IEC09000107-3 V1 EN

Figure 50: Zero sequence currents at an external earth fault

zone of protection

Izs2 Izs1
L1 L1
Power Izs2 Izs1
L2 L2
system
Izs2 Izs1 L3
L3
3Izs1

Uzs Current in the neutral

IL1+ IL2+IL3 = 3I0 (measured as IN ) serves
IN = -3Izs1 as a directional reference
3I0 = -3Izs2 Ifault
(Summation in the IED) because it has the same
direction for both internal
and external faults.
Return path via Return path
power system through transformer
External
Zero-sequence differential
fault
block operate
region current for internal fault
3I0 Idiff = abs(3I0 + IN )
Idiff = 3Izs2 + 3Izs1 > 0
block IN (reference) Idiff = Ifault
ROA
External Internal
fault
block fault ROA = Relay Operate Angle
region region
IEC09000108-3-en.vsd
IEC09000108-3 V1 EN

Figure 51: Zero sequence currents at an internal earth fault

1. For an external earth fault (Figure 50), the residual current 3Io and the neutral
current IN have equal magnitude, but they are seen within the IED as 180
degrees out-of-phase if the current transformers are connected as in Figure 50,
which is the ABB recommended connection. The differential current becomes

156
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection

zero as both CTs ideally measure exactly the same component of the earth-
fault current.
2. For an internal fault, the total earth- fault current is composed generally of two
zero sequence currents. One zero sequence current (3IZS1) flows towards the
power transformer neutral point and into the earth, while the other zero
sequence current (3IZS2) flows into the connected power system. These two
primary currents can be expected to have approximately opposite directions
(about the same zero sequence impedance angle is assumed on both sides of
the earth fault). However, on the secondary CT sides of the current
transformers, they will be approximately in phase if the current transformers
are oriented as in Figure 48, which is the orientation recommended by ABB.
The magnitudes of the two currents may be different, dependent on the
magnitudes of zero sequence impedances of both sides. No current can flow
towards the power system, if the only point where the system is earthed, is at
the protected power transformer. Likewise, no current can flow into the power
system, if the winding is not connected to the power system (circuit breaker
open and power transformer energized from the other side).
3. For both internal and external earth faults, the current in the neutral connection
IN always has the same direction, which is towards the earth (except in case of
autotransformers where the direction can vary).
4. The two internally processed zero sequence currents are 3Io and IN. The
vectorial sum is the REFPDIF differential current, which is equal to Idiff = IN
+3Io .

The line zero sequence (residual) current is calculated from 3 line (terminal)
currents. A bias quantity must give stability against false operations due to high
through fault currents. To stabilize REFPDIF at external faults, a fixed bias
characteristic is implemented.

REFPDIF should also be stable against heavy phase-to-phase internal faults, not
including earth. These faults may also give false zero sequence currents due to
saturated line CTs. Such faults, however are without neutral current, and can thus
be eliminated as a source of danger.

As an additional measure against unwanted operation, a directional check is made

in agreement with the above points 1 and 2. Operation is only allowed if the
currents 3Io and IN (as shown in Figure 50 and Figure 51) are both within the
operating region. By taking a smaller ROA, REFPDIF can be made more stable
under heavy external fault conditions, as well as under the complex conditions,
when external faults are cleared by other protections.

6.3.7.2 Restricted earth-fault protection, low impedance differential protection

Restricted earth-fault protection, low impedance (REFPDIF) is a protection of

differential type, a unit protection, whose settings are independent of any other
protection. It has some advantages compared to the transformer differential
protection. It is less complicated, as no current phase correction or magnitude

157
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Differential protection

correction are needed, not even in the case of an eventual on-load tap changer
(OLTC). REFPDIF is not sensitive to inrush and overexcitation currents. The only
danger is an eventual current transformer saturation.

REFPDIF has only one operate-bias characteristic, which is described in the table
60 and shown in Figure 52.

Table 60: Data of the operate-bias characteristic of REFPDIF

Default sensitivity Max. base Min. base sensitivity End of zone First slope Second
Idmin (zone 1) sensitivity Idmin Idmin (zone 1) 1 slope
(zone 1)
% IBase % IBase % IBase % IBase % %
30 5 100 125 70 100

The differential protection REFPDIF calculates a differential current and a bias

current. In case of internal earth faults, the differential current is theoretically equal
to the total earth-fault current. The bias current is supposed to give stability to
REFPDIF. The bias current is a measure of how high the currents are and how
difficult the conditions are under which the CTs operate. With a high bias, difficult
conditions can be suspected, and it will be more likely that the calculated
differential current has a component of a false current, primarily due to CT
saturation. This law is formulated by the operate-bias characteristic. This
characteristic divides the Idiff - Ibias plane in two areas. The area above the operate-
bias characteristic is the operate area, while the one below is the block area, see
Figure 52.

Zero-
sequence
diff. current 5
in per unit Characteristic if
IdMin = 1.0 pu
D I operate
slope = ----------------* 100 % 4
D I restrain Operate
conditionally
3
IdMin range: 0.04 1.00 IBase
Slope 100%
Reset Ratio in all sections: 2
0.95 (a constant) Section 1 Sec. 2 Section 3

1
The characteristic
IdMin Restrain
can be moved Slope 70%
up and down 0
(vertically) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
by changing End Section 1 bias current
the setting IdMin in per unit
End Section 2
IEC98000017-5-en.vsd
IEC98000017-5 V1 EN

Figure 52: Operate - bias characteristic of the Restricted earth-fault

protection, low impedance REFPDIF

158
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection

6.3.7.3 Calculation of differential current and bias current

The differential current (operate current), as a fundamental frequency phasor, is

calculated as (with designations as in Figure 50 and Figure 51):

Idiff = IN + 3 Io
EQUATION1533 V1 EN (Equation 25)

where:

IN is current in the power transformer neutral as a fundamental frequency phasor.

3Io is residual current of the power transformer terminal currents as a phasor.

If there are two three-phase CT inputs, as in breaker-and-a-half configurations, see

figure 10, then their respective residual currents are added within the REFPDIF
function so that:

I3PW1 = I3PW1CT1 + I3PW1CT2

where the signals are defined in the input and output signal tables for REFPDIF.

The bias current is a measure (expressed internally as a true fundamental frequency

current in Amperes) of how difficult the conditions are under which the instrument
current transformers operate. Dependent on the magnitude of the bias current, the
corresponding zone (section) of the operate-bias characteristic is applied, when
deciding whether to trip, or not to trip. In general, the higher the bias current, the
higher the differential current required to produce a trip.

The bias current is the highest current of all separate input currents to REFPDIF,
that is, of current in phase L1, phase L2, phase L3, and the current in the neutral
point (designated as IN in Figure 50 and in Figure 51).

If there are two feeders included in the zone of protection of REFPDIF, as in case
of an auto-transformer with two feeders included on both sides, then the respective
bias current is found as the relatively highest of the following currents:

1
current[1] = max (I3PW1CT1)
CTFactorPri1
EQUATION1526 V1 EN (Equation 26)

1
current[2] = max (I3PW1CT2)
CTFactorPri2
EQUATION1527 V1 EN (Equation 27)

1
current[3] = max (I3PW2CT1)
CTFactorSec1
EQUATION1528 V1 EN (Equation 28)

159
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Differential protection

1
current[4] = max (I3PW2CT2)
CTFactorSec2
EQUATION1529 V1 EN (Equation 29)

current[5] = IN
EQUATION1530 V1 EN (Equation 30)

The bias current is thus generally equal to none of the input currents. If all primary
ratings of the CTs were equal to IBase, then the bias current would be equal to the
highest current in Amperes. IBase shall be set equal to the rated current of the
protected winding where REFPDIF function is applied.

6.3.7.4 Detection of external earth faults

External faults are more common than internal earth faults for which the restricted
earth-fault protection should operate. It is important that the restricted earth-fault
protection remains stable during heavy external earth and phase-to-phase faults,
and also when such a heavy external fault is cleared by some other protection such
as overcurrent, or earth-fault protection. The conditions during a heavy external
fault, and particularly immediately after the clearing of such a fault may be
complex. The circuit breakers poles may not open exactly at the same moment,
some of the CTs may still be highly saturated, and so on.

The detection of external earth faults is based on the fact that for such a fault a high
neutral current appears first, while a false differential current only appears if one or
more current transformers saturate.

An external earth fault is thus assumed to have occurred when a high neutral
current suddenly appears, while at the same time the differential current Idiff
remains low, at least for a while. This condition must be detected before a trip
request is placed within REFPDIF. Any search for external fault is aborted if a trip
request has been placed. A condition for a successful detection is that it takes not
less than 4ms for the first CT to saturate.

For an internal earth fault, a true differential current develops immediately, while
for an external fault it only develops if a CT saturates. If a trip request comes first,
before an external fault could be positively detected, then it must be an internal fault.

If an external earth fault has been detected, then the REFPDIF is temporarily
desensitized.

Directional criterion
The directional criterion is applied in order to positively distinguish between
internal and external earth faults. This check is an additional criterion, which
should prevent malfunctions at heavy external earth faults, and during the
disconnection of such faults by other protections. Earth faults on lines connecting
the power transformer occur much more often than earth faults on a power
transformer winding. It is important therefore that the Restricted earth-fault

160
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection

protection, low impedance (REFPDIF) must remain stable during an external fault,
and immediately after the fault has been cleared by some other protection.

For an external earth faults with no CT saturation, the residual current in the lines
(3Io) and the neutral current (IN in Figure 50) are theoretically equal in magnitude
and are 180 degrees out-of-phase. The current in the neutral (IN) serves as a
directional reference because it has the same direction for both internal and
external earth faults. The directional criterion in REFPDIF protection makes it a
current-polarized protection.

However, if one or more CTs saturate under external fault conditions, then the
measured currents 3Io and IN may no longer be equal, nor will their positions in the
complex plane be exactly 180 degrees apart. There is a risk that the resulting false
differential current Idiff enters the operate area of the operate-restrain characteristic
under external fault conditions. If this happens, a directional test may prevent a
malfunction.

A directional check is only executed if:

1. a trip request signal has been issued (REFPDIF function START signal set to 1)
2. the residual current in lines (3Io) is at least 3% of the IBase current.

If a directional check is either unreliable or not possible to do, due to too small
currents, then the direction is cancelled as a condition for an eventual trip.

If a directional check is executed, the REFPDIF protection operation is only

allowed if currents 3Io and IN (as seen in Figure 50 and Figure 51) are both within
the operating region determined by the set value of ROA, in degrees.

ROA = 60 to 90 degrees; where ROA stands for Relay Operate Angle.

Second harmonic analysis

When energizing a transformer a false differential current may appear in earth fault
protection, low impedance function (REFPDIF). The phase CTs may saturate due
to a high DC component with a long duration, but the current through the neutral
CT does not have either the same DC component or the same amplitude and the
risk for saturation of this CT is not as high. As a result the differential current due
to the saturation may be so high that it reaches the operate characteristic. A
calculation of the content of 2nd harmonic in the neutral current is made when the
neutral current, residual current and bias current are within some windows and
some timing criteria are fulfilled. If the ratio between second and fundamental
harmonic exceeds 40%, REFPDIF is blocked.

161
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Differential protection

6.3.7.5 Algorithm of the restricted earth-fault protection

1. Check if current in the neutral Ineutral (IN) is less than 50% of the base
sensitivity Idmin. If yes, only service values are calculated, then REFPDIF
algorithm is not used.
2. If current in the Ineutral (IN) is more than 50% of Idmin, then determine the
bias current Ibias.
3. Determine the differential (operate) current Idiff as a phasor, and calculate its
magnitude.
4. Check if the point P(Ibias, Idiff) is above the operate-bias characteristic. If yes,
increment the trip request counter by 1. If the point P(Ibias, Idiff) is found to
be below the operate-bias characteristic, then the trip request counter is reset to
zero.
5. If the trip request counter is still zero, search for an eventual heavy external
earth fault. The search is only made if the neutral current is at least 50% of the
Idmin current. If an external earth fault has been detected, a flag is set which
remains set until the external fault has been cleared. The external fault flag is
reset to zero when Ineutral falls below 50% of the base sensitivity Idmin. Any
search for an external fault is aborted if trip request counter is more than zero.
6. As long as the external fault persists, an additional temporary trip condition is
introduced. This means that REFPDIF is temporarily desensitized.
7. If point P(Ibias, Idiff) is found to be above the operate-bias characteristic), so
that trip request counter is more than zero, a directional check can be made.
The directional check is made only if Iresidual (3Io) is more than 3% of the
IBase current. If the result of the check means external fault, then the
internal trip request is reset. If the directional check cannot be executed, then
direction is no longer a condition for a trip.
8. When neutral current, residual current and bias current are within some
windows and some timing criteria are fulfilled, the ratio of 2nd to fundamental
harmonic is calculated. If it is found to be above 60% the trip request counter
is reset and TRIP remains zero.
9. Finally, a check is made if the trip request counter is equal to, or higher than 2.
If yes, and at the same instance of time tREFtrip, the actual bias current at this
instance of time tREFtrip is at least 50% of the highest bias current Ibiasmax
(Ibiasmax is the highest recording of any of the three phase currents measured
during the disturbance), then REFPDIF sets output TRIP to 1. If the counter is
less than 2, the TRIP signal remains zero.

6.3.8 Technical data

Table 61: REFPDIF technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate characteristic Adaptable 1.0% of Ir for I Ir
1.0% of I for I > Ir

Reset ratio >95% -

Minimum pickup (4.0-100.0)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir

Table continues on next page

162
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Directional characteristic Fixed 180 degrees or 60 to 2.0 degrees
90 degrees
Operate time, trip at 0 to 10 x Min = 15 ms -
IdMin Max = 30 ms
Reset time, trip at 10 to 0 x IdMin Min = 15 ms -
Max = 30 ms
Second harmonic blocking 60.0% of fundamental (hidden 1.0% of Ir
setting)

6.4 Additional security logic for differential protection

LDRGFC

6.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Additional security logic for differential LDRGFC - 11
protection

6.4.2 Functionality
Additional security logic for differential protection (LDRGFC) can help the
security of the protection especially when the communication system is in
abnormal status or for example when there is unspecified asymmetry in the
communication link. It helps to reduce the probability for mal-operation of the
protection. LDRGFC is more sensitive than the main protection logic to always
release operation for all faults detected by the differential function. LDRGFC
consists of four sub functions:

Phase-to-phase current variation

Zero sequence current criterion
Low voltage criterion
Low current criterion

Phase-to-phase current variation takes the current samples as input and it calculates
the variation using the sampling value based algorithm. Phase-to-phase current
variation function is major one to fulfill the objectives of the startup element.

Zero sequence criterion takes the zero sequence current as input. It increases the
security of protection during the high impedance fault conditions.

Low voltage criterion takes the phase voltages and phase-to-phase voltages as
inputs. It increases the security of protection when the three-phase fault occurred
on the weak end side.

163
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Differential protection

Low current criterion takes the phase currents as inputs and it increases the
dependability during the switch onto fault case of unloaded line.

The differential function can be allowed to trip as no load is fed through the line
and protection is not working correctly.

Features:

Startup element is sensitive enough to detect the abnormal status of the

protected system
Startup element does not influence the operation speed of main protection
Startup element would detect the evolving faults, high impedance faults and
three phase fault on weak side
It is possible to block the each sub function of startup element
Startup signal has a settable pulse time

6.4.3 Function block

LDRGFC
I3P* START
U3P* STCVL1L2
BLOCK STCVL2L3
BLKCV STCVL3L1
BLKUC STUC
BLK3I0 ST3I0
BLKUV STUV
REMSTUP

IEC14000015-1-en.vsd
IEC14000015 V1 EN

Figure 53: LDRGFC function block

6.4.4 Signals
Table 62: LDRGFC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKCV BOOLEAN 0 Block of ph to ph current variation criterion
BLKUC BOOLEAN 0 Block of the low current criterion
BLK3I0 BOOLEAN 0 Block of zero sequence current criterion
BLKUV BOOLEAN 0 Block of under voltage criterion
REMSTUP BOOLEAN 0 Startup signal of remote end

164
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection

Table 63: LDRGFC Output signals

Name Type Description
START BOOLEAN General startup signal
STCVL1L2 BOOLEAN Start signal for current variation criterion for
phase L1L2
STCVL2L3 BOOLEAN Start signal for current variation criterion for
phase L2L3
STCVL3L1 BOOLEAN Start signal for current variation criterion for
phase L3L1
STUC BOOLEAN Start signal for low current criterion
ST3I0 BOOLEAN Start signal for zero sequence current criterion
STUV BOOLEAN Start signal for under voltage criterion

6.4.5 Settings
Table 64: LDRGFC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
tStUpReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 7.000 Reset delay for startup signal
OperationCV Off - - On Operation current variation Off/On
On
ICV> 1 - 100 %IB 1 20 Fixed threshold for ph to ph current
variation criterion
OperationUC Off - - On Operation low current criterion Off/On
On
IUC< 1 - 100 %IB 1 5 Start value for low current operation in %
of IBase
Operation3I0 Off - - On Operation zero sequence current
On criterion Off/On
I3I0> 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Start value for zero sequence current
criterion in % of IBase
OperationUV Off - - On Operation under voltage criterion Off/On
On
UPhN< 1 - 100 %UB 1 60 Start value for phase voltage criterion in
% of UBase
UPhPh< 1 - 100 %UB 1 60 Start value for ph to ph voltage criterion
in % of UBase

165
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Differential protection

Table 65: LDRGFC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tCV 0.000 - 0.005 s 0.001 0.002 Time delay for phase to phase current
variation
tUC 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay for low current criterion
t3I0 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for zero sequence current
criterion
tUV 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for low voltage criterion

Table 66: LDRGFC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

6.4.6 Monitored data

Table 67: LDRGFC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IL1 REAL - A Current RMS value for
phase L1
IL2 REAL - A Current RMS value for
phase L2
IL3 REAL - A Current RMS value for
phase L3
3I0 REAL - A Zero sequence current
value
UL1 REAL - kV Voltage RMS value for
phase L1
UL2 REAL - kV Voltage RMS value for
phase L2
UL3 REAL - kV Voltage RMS value for
phase L3
UL12 REAL - kV Voltage RMS value for
ph to ph L1L2
UL23 REAL - kV Voltage RMS value for
ph to ph L2L3
UL31 REAL - kV Voltage RMS value for
ph to ph L3L1

6.4.7 Operation principle

Additional security logic for differential protection (LDRGFC) takes the current
samples, current RMS values, phase voltage values, phase-to-phase voltage values,
zero sequence current and remote side startup signals as inputs.

166
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection

Startup signal becomes activated when any one of the current variation startup
signal, zero sequence current startup signal, voltage startup signal, and current
startup signal is activated.

Phase-to-phase current variation takes current samples and generates the startup
signal by comparing with the start value.

If the zero sequence current value is greater than the start value of zero sequence
current then the zero sequence current startup signal will be activated.

Voltage startup signal becomes activated when the any of phase voltage and line
voltage is less than the voltage start value and the remote startup signal has to be
activated.

Current startup signal becomes activated when the current value in all phases is
less than current start value.

Phase-to-phase current variation

Phase-to-phase current variation one is main startup element. It covers most of the
abnormal status of the system. The phase-to-phase current variation fails in high
impedance faults, three-phase fault on weak side and switch onto fault on unloaded
line because of low sensitivity in these cases.

Phase-to-phase current variation takes the current samples as input and the signal is
evaluated using the sampling value based algorithm.

The phase-to-phase current variation criterion is shown below:

DiFF > 1.8DIT + DI ZD

EQUATION2255 V1 EN

Where:
i sampling value of phase-to-phase current variation

IZD setting of fixed threshold, which corresponds to setting ICV>. The default value for
the setting is 0.2IBase, where IBase is the base current.
IT float threshold

It is the full-circle integral of the phase-to-phase current variation

1 2T -1
DIT = | DiFF (t - n) |
T n =T
EQUATION2256 V1 EN

Where:
T count of sample values in one cycle

167
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Differential protection

i is calculated using the below formula:

Di (k ) = [i ( k ) - i (k - N )] - [i (k - N ) - i (k - 2 N )]
= i ( k ) - 2i ( k - N ) + i (k - 2 N )
EQUATION2257 V1 EN

N is the number of samples in one cycle.

tCV
STCVL1L2
t
cont

I3P Current variation tCV

STCVL2L3
subfunction t
i
tCV
STCVL3L1
t

OR STCV
cont

IEC10000295-1-en.vsd
IEC10000295 V1 EN

Figure 54: Current variation logic diagram

tCV is the time setting for the change of current criterion. Phase current samples
are included in input signal I3P.

Zero sequence current criterion

Zero sequence criterion is mainly for detection of remote IED high resistance faults
or some gradual faults. The criterion takes the zero sequence current as input. Zero
sequence current is compared with I3I0> for the t3I0 time to generate the zero
sequence current startup signal.

I3P a
a>b t3I0
I3IO> b ST3I0
AND t

BLK3I0
BLOCK OR

IEC09000778-2-en.vsd
IEC09000778 V2 EN

Figure 55: Zero sequence current criterion logic diagram

168
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection

Here I3I0> is the setting of the maximum possible non-faulted zero sequence
current for the protected line. The default value for this setting is 0.1 IBase where
IBase is the rated current of the CT.

t3I0 is the time setting for the zero sequence current criterion.

The zero sequence current criterion can be blocked by activating the BLK3I0 input
signal.

Low voltage criterion

Low voltage criterion is mainly for detection of the three phase faults occurring on
weak side with pre fault no load condition. The low voltage criterion takes the
voltage phase values, voltage phase-to-phase values and remote startup signals as
inputs. The logic for low voltage criterion is shown below:

U3P (UPhN) a
a<b
UPhN< b
OR
U3P (UPhPh) a
a<b
UPhPh< b
tUV STUV
REMSTUP (Recived)
AND t

BLKUV
BLOCK OR

IEC09000779-2-en.vsd
IEC09000779 V2 EN

Figure 56: Low voltage criterion logic diagram

Voltage phase value is compared with the start value of voltage phase and voltage
phase-to-phase value is compared with the start value of voltage phase-to-phase. If
any of the phase voltage or phase-to-phase voltages is below the set voltage levels
for some time duration (tUV) then the low voltage START signal becomes
activated after receiving the remote startup signal. Low voltage criterion can be
blocked by activating BLKUV input signal.

If there are more than one remote IED, all the startup signals of the remote ends are
logically OR to obtain the REMSTUP signal from the remote side as input.

Low current criterion

The current in each phase is compared to the set current level. If all currents are
below setting IUC<, the STUC output is activated after the set delay tUC.

169
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Differential protection

I3P
a
a<b tUC
IUC< b STUC
AND t

BLKUC
BLOCK OR

IEC09000780-2-en.vsd
IEC09000780 V2 EN

Figure 57: Low current criterion logic diagram

Security logic for differential protection

The configuration for the additional security logic for differential protection is
shown in Figure 58. The function will release tripping of the line differential
protection up to the end of timer tStUpReset.

Phase-phase STCV
i
current variation

Zero sequence ST3IO

I0 > tStUpReset
current criterion START Local side start-up
t
Send signal to
Low voltage
OR remote side
criterion STUV
ULOW <

Low current
criterion STUC
I0 <

REMSTUP

IEC10000296-2-en.vsd
IEC10000296 V2 EN

Figure 58: Additional security logic for differential protection. Logic diagram for
start up element.

6.4.8 Technical data

Table 68: LDRGFC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current, zero (1-100)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir
sequence current
Operate current, low current (1-100)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir
operation
Operate voltage, phase to (1-100)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur
neutral
Operate voltage, phase to (1-100)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur
phase
Table continues on next page

170
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Independent time delay, zero (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 40 ms
sequence current at 0 to 2 x Iset whichever is greater

Independent time delay, low (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 40 ms

current operation at 2 x Iset to 0 whichever is greater

Independent time delay, low (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 40 ms

voltage operation at 2 x Uset whichever is greater
to 0
Reset time delay for startup (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 40 ms
signal at 0 to 2 x Uset whichever is greater

171
Technical Manual
172
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

Section 7 Impedance protection

7.1 Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral

characteristic ZMQPDIS, ZMQAPDIS, ZDRDIR

7.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral ZMQPDIS 21
characteristic (zone 1)

S00346 V1 EN

Distance protection zone, quadrilateral ZMQAPDIS 21

characteristic (zone 2-5)

S00346 V1 EN

Directional impedance quadrilateral ZDRDIR 21D

Z<->

IEC09000167 V1 EN

7.1.2 Functionality
The line distance protection is a, up to five zone full scheme protection with three
fault loops for phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-earth faults
for each of the independent zones. Individual settings for each zone in resistive and
reactive reach gives flexibility for use as back-up protection for transformer
connected to overhead lines and cables of different types and lengths.

ZMQPDIS together with Phase selection with load encroachment FDPSPDIS has
functionality for load encroachment, which increases the possibility to detect high
resistive faults on heavily loaded lines.

The distance protection zones can operate independently of each other in

directional (forward or reverse) or non-directional mode.

173
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

7.1.3 Function block

ZMQPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRL1
BLOCK TRL2
VTSZ TRL3
BLKTR START
STCND STL1
DIRCND STL2
STL3
STND

IEC06000256-2-en.vsd
IEC06000256 V2 EN

Figure 59: ZMQPDIS function block

ZMQAPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRL1
BLOCK TRL2
VTSZ TRL3
BLKTR START
STCND STL1
DIRCND STL2
STL3
STND

IEC09000884-1-en.vsd
IEC09000884 V1 EN

Figure 60: ZMQAPDIS function block (zone 2 - 5)

The two inputs I3P Three phase group signal for current and
U3P Three phase group signal for voltage, must be connected to
non-adaptive SMAI blocks if ANY OF THE ZONES are set for
directional operation. That is, the parameter DFTReference in used
SMAI must be set to InternalDFTRef. If adaptive SMAI block is
used this might result in a wrong directional and reach evaluation.

ZDRDIR
I3P* STDIRCND
U3P*

IEC10000007-1-en.vsd
IEC10000007 V1 EN

Figure 61: ZDRDIR function block

174
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.1.4 Signals
Table 69: ZMQPDIS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
VTSZ BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all output by fuse failure signal
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all trip outputs
STCND INTEGER 0 External start condition (loop enabler)
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition

Table 70: ZMQPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
START BOOLEAN General Start, issued from any phase or loop
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
STND BOOLEAN Non-directional start, issued from any phase or
loop

Table 71: ZMQAPDIS Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
VTSZ BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all output by fuse failure signal
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all trip outputs
STCND INTEGER 0 External start condition (loop enabler)
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition

175
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

Table 72: ZMQAPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
START BOOLEAN General Start, issued from any phase or loop
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
STND BOOLEAN Non-directional start, issued from any phase or
loop

Table 73: ZDRDIR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL

Table 74: ZDRDIR Output signals

Name Type Description
STDIRCND INTEGER Binary coded directional information per
measuring loop

7.1.5 Settings

Signals and settings for ZMQPDIS are valid for zone 1 while
signals and settings for ZMQAPDIS are valid for zone 2 - 5

Table 75: ZMQPDIS Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationDir Non-directional - - Forward Operation mode of directionality NonDir /
Forward Forw / Rev
Reverse
X1 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach
R1 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle
X0 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 100.00 Zero sequence reactance reach
Table continues on next page

176
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

R0 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle
RFPP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-Ph
RFPE 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-E
OperationPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-
On Phase loops
OpModetPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-Ph
tPP 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph
OperationPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth
On loops
OpModetPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-E
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-E
IMinOpPP 10 - 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate delta current for Phase-
Phase loops
IMinOpPE 10 - 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpIN 5 - 1000 %IB 1 5 Minimum operate residual current for
Phase-Earth loops

Table 76: ZMQPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Table 77: ZMQAPDIS Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationDir Non-directional - - Forward Operation mode of directionality NonDir /
Forward Forw / Rev
Reverse
X1 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach
R1 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle
X0 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach
R0 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle
RFPP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-Ph
RFPE 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-E
OperationPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-
On Phase loops
OpModetPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-Ph
Table continues on next page

177
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tPP 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph
OperationPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth
On loops
OpModetPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-E
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-E
IMinOpPP 10 - 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate delta current for Phase-
Phase loops
IMinOpPE 10 - 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops

Table 78: ZMQAPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Table 79: ZDRDIR Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IMinOpPP 5 - 30 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase-phase current
for Phase-Phase loops
IMinOpPE 5 - 30 %IB 1 5 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
ArgNegRes 90 - 175 Deg 1 115 Angle of blinder in second quadrant for
forward direction
ArgDir 5 - 45 Deg 1 15 Angle of blinder in fourth quadrant for
forward direction

Table 80: ZDRDIR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

178
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.1.6 Monitored data

Table 81: ZDRDIR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
L1Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L1
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L2Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L2
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L3Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L3
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L1R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L1
L1X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L1
L2R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L2
L2X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L2
L3R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L3
L3X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L3

7.1.7 Operation principle

7.1.7.1 Full scheme measurement

The execution of the different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type,
which means that each fault loop for phase-to-earth faults and phase-to-phase faults
for forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel.

Figure 62 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for up to five,

impedance-measuring zones. There are 3 to 5 zones depending on product type and
variant.

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 1

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 2

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 3

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 4

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 5

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1

Zone RV

IEC05000458-2-en.vsd
IEC05000458 V2 EN

Figure 62: The different measuring loops at phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-
phase fault.

179
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched
schemes which mostly uses a start element to select correct voltages and current
depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs like one
independent distance protection IED with six measuring elements.

7.1.7.2 Impedance characteristic

The distance measuring zone includes six impedance measuring loops; three
intended for phase-to-earth faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as,
three-phase faults.

The distance measuring zone will essentially operate according to the non-
directional impedance characteristics presented in figure 63 and figure 64. The phase-
to-earth characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-to-
phase characteristic presents the per phase reach.

X (Ohm/loop)

R1+Rn

RFPE RFPE

X0-X1
Xn =
3
X1+Xn R0-R1
Rn =
3
jN jN
R (Ohm/loop)

RFPE RFPE

X1+Xn

RFPE RFPE
IEC11000427-1-en.vsd

R1+Rn
IEC11000427 V1 EN

Figure 63: Characteristic for phase-to-earth measuring, ohm/loop domain

180
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

X (Ohm/phase)

RFPP R1 RFPP
2 2
X 0 PE - X 1RVPE
XNRV =XX00PEPG--X31XRVPE
1RVPG
XNRV =
XNRV =
33
XX
X00PE
0PE
PG --1X
-X 11FWPE
XFWPE
FWPG
XNFW===
XNFW
XNFW
3
X1 3 3

j j
R (Ohm/phase)

RFPP RFPP
2 2

X1

RFPP R1 RFPP
2 2
IEC11000428-1-en.vsd
IEC11000428 V1 EN

Figure 64: Characteristic for phase-to-phase measuring

The fault loop reach with respect to each fault type may also be presented as in
figure 65. Note in particular the difference in definition regarding the (fault)
resistive reach for phase-to-phase faults and three-phase faults.

181
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

IL1 R1 + j X1
Phase-to-earth
UL1
element

Phase-to-earth
fault in phase L1 RFPE
(Arc + tower
resistance)

0
IN (R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )

IL1 R1 + j X1 Phase-to-phase
UL1 element L1-L2
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase RFPP
L1-L2 IL2
UL2 (Arc resistance)
R1 + j X1

IL1 R1 + j X1 0.5RFPP Phase-to-phase

UL1 element L1-L3
Three-phase
fault
IL3
UL3
R1 + j X1 0.5RFPP
IEC08000282-2-en.vsd
IEC08000282 V2 EN

Figure 65: Fault loop model

The R1 and jX1 in figure 65 represents the positive sequence impedance from the
measuring point to the fault location. The settings and RFPP are the eventual fault
resistances in the faulty place.

Regarding the illustration of three-phase fault in figure 65, there is of course fault
current flowing also in the third phase during a three-phase fault. The illustration
merely reflects the loop measurement, which is made phase-to-phase.

The zone can be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse direction

through the setting OperationDir. The result from respective set value is illustrated
in figure 66. The impedance reach is symmetric, in the sense that it conforms for
forward and reverse direction (there are different forward and reverse settings - Zx
and ZxRev respectively, where x = 1 - 5). Therefore, all reach settings apply to
both directions.

182
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

X X X

R R R

Non-directional Forward Reverse

en05000182.vsd
IEC05000182 V1 EN

Figure 66: Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zones

7.1.7.3 Minimum operating current

The operation of Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic

(ZMQPDIS) is blocked if the magnitude of input currents fall below certain
threshold values.

The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn < IMinOpPE.

For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all
phase-to-earth loops will be blocked when IN < IMinOpIN, regardless of the phase
currents.

ILn is the RMS value of the current in phase Ln. IN is the RMS value of the vector
sum of the three-phase currents, that is, residual current 3I0.

The phase-to-phase loop LmLn is blocked if ILmLn < IMinOpPP.

ILmLn is the RMS value of the vector difference between phase currents Lm and Ln.

All three current limits IMinOpPE, IMinOpIN and IMinOpPP are

automatically reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set
to operate in reverse direction, that is, OperationDir = Reverse.

7.1.7.4 Measuring principles

Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the
current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits. The

183
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

apparent impedances at phase-to-phase faults follow equation 31 (example for a

phase L1 to phase L2 fault).

UL1 UL2
Zapp = -------------------------
I L1 IL2
EQUATION1222 V1 EN (Equation 31)

Here U and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the
respective phase Ln (n = 1, 2, 3)

The earth return compensation applies in a conventional manner to phase-to-earth

faults (example for a phase L1 to earth fault) according to equation 32.

U L1
Z app =
I L1 + I N KN
EQUATION1223 V2 EN (Equation 32)

Where:
are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED
U L1
I L1
IN

KN
is defined as:

Z 0 - Z1
KN =
3 Z1
EQUATION-2105 V2 EN

Z 0 = R 0 + jX 0
EQUATION2106 V2 EN

Z 1 = R1 + jX 1
EQUATION2107 V2 EN

Where
R0 is setting of the resistive zero sequence reach
X0 is setting of the reactive zero sequence reach
R1 is setting of the resistive positive sequence reach
X1 is setting of the reactive positive sequence reach

184
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

Here IN is a phasor of the residual current in IED point. This results in the same
reach along the line for all types of faults.

The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and

reactance X.

The formula given in equation 32 is only valid for radial feeder application without
load. When load is considered in the case of single phase-to-earth fault,
conventional distance protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach
at importing end. The IED has an adaptive load compensation which increases the
security in such applications.

Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D
converter. The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is
distributed into memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops,
sampled values of voltage (U), current (I), and changes in current between samples
(DI) are brought from the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter.

The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related
to the loop impedance according to equation 33,

X Di
U = R i + ------ -----
w 0 Dt
EQUATION1224 V1 EN (Equation 33)

in complex notation, or:

X D Re ( I )
Re ( U ) = R Re ( I ) + ------ ------------------
w0 Dt

EQUATION354 V1 EN (Equation 34)

X DIm ( I )
Im ( U ) = R Im ( I ) + ------ -----------------
w0 Dt

EQUATION355 V1 EN (Equation 35)

with

w0 = 2 p f 0
EQUATION356 V1 EN (Equation 36)

where:
Re designates the real component of current and voltage,
Im designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and
f0 designates the rated system frequency

185
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real
value of the voltage and substitutes it in the equation for the imaginary part. The
equation for the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is
equal to:

Im ( U ) DRe ( I ) Re ( U ) D Im ( I )
R m = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DRe ( I ) Im ( I ) D Im ( I ) Re ( I )
EQUATION357 V1 EN (Equation 37)

Re ( U ) Im ( I ) Im ( U ) Re ( I )
Xm = w 0 Dt -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DRe ( I ) Im ( I ) DIm ( I ) Re ( I )
EQUATION358 V1 EN (Equation 38)

The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the
set zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive
tripping results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the
capacitive voltage transformers or by other factors.

The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and

reverse directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase
locked positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures
unlimited directional sensitivity for faults close to the IED point.

7.1.7.5 Directional impedance element for quadrilateral characteristics

The evaluation of the directionality takes place in Directional impedance

quadrilateral function ZDRDIR. Equation 39 and equation 40 are used to classify
that the fault is in forward direction for phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-phase fault.

0.8 U 1L1 + 0.2 U 1L1 M

- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1
EQUATION725 V2 EN (Equation 39)

For the L1-L2 element, the equation in forward direction is according to.

186
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

0.8 U 1L1 L 2 + 0.2 U 1L1 L 2 M

- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1 L 2
EQUATION726 V2 EN (Equation 40)

where:
ArgDir is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default
set to 15 (= -15 degrees) and
ArgNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default
set to 115 degrees, see figure 67.
is positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1
U 1L1
is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1
U 1L1M
is phase current in phase L1
I L1
is voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
U 1L1L 2
is memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
U 1L1L 2 M
is current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
I L1L 2

The setting of ArgDir and ArgNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115
degrees respectively (as shown in figure 67). It should not be changed unless
system studies have shown the necessity.

ZDRDIR gives binary coded directional information per measuring loop on the
output STDIRCND.

STDIR= STFWL1*1+STFWL2*2+STFWL3*4+STFWL1L2*8+
+STFWL2L3*16+STFWL3L1*32+STRVL1*64+STRVL2*128+
+STRVL3*256+STRVL1L2*512+STRVL2L3*1024+STRVL3L1*2048

187
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

ArgNegRes

ArgDir
R

en05000722.vsd
IEC05000722 V1 EN

Figure 67: Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault in
Directional impedance quadrilateral function ZDRDIR

The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated

by 180 degrees.

The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive sequence voltage exceeds
5% of the set base voltage UBase. So the directional element can use it for all
unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.

For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same
positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.

The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is
restored.

After 100 ms the following occurs:

If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current
(between 10 and 30% of the set IED rated current IBase), the condition seals in.
If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.
If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element
in the reverse direction remains in operation.
If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory
resets until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.

188
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.1.7.6 Simplified logic diagrams

Distance protection zones

The design of the distance protection zones are presented for all measuring loops:
phase-to-earth as well as phase-to-phase.

Phase-to-earth related signals are designated by L1N, L2N and L3N. The phase-to-
phase signals are designated by L1L2, L2L3, and L3L1.

Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one

logical signal for each separate measuring loop:

Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described

above.
Group functional input signal (STCND), as presented in figure 68.

Two types of function block, ZMQPDIS and ZMQAPDIS, are used in the IED.
ZMQPDIS is used for zone 1 and ZMQAPDIS for zone 2 - 5.

The STCND input signal represents a connection of six different integer values
from Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function
FDPSPDIS within the IED, which are converted within the zone measuring
function into corresponding boolean expressions for each condition separately.
Input signal STCND is connected to FDPSPDIS or FMPSPDIS function output
STCNDZ.

The input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the
distance measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both
forward and reverse direction. The zone measurement function filters out the
relevant signals depending on the setting of the parameter OperationDir. It must be
configured to the STDIR output on ZDRDIR function.

189
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

STZMPP
OR
STCND

AND STNDL1L2
L1L2

STNDL2L3
L2L3 AND

L3L1 AND STNDL3L1

AND STNDL1N
L1N

AND STNDL2N
L2N

STNDL3N
L3N AND

OR STPE

OR
VTSZ STND
OR AND
BLOCK
BLOCFUNC BLK

99000557-2.vsd
IEC99000557-TIFF V3 EN

Figure 68: Conditioning by a group functional input signal STCND, external

start condition

Composition of the phase start signals for a case, when the zone operates in a non-
directional mode, is presented in figure 69.

IEC00000488-TIFF V1 EN

Figure 69: Composition of starting signals in non-directional operating mode

190
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone
operates in directional (forward or reverse) mode, as shown in figure 70.

STNDL1N
AND
DIRL1N
STZMPE.
OR
STNDL2N
DIRL2N AND

STNDL3N 15 ms
OR STL1
AND t
DIRL3N AND

STNDL1L2
DIRL1L2 AND 15 ms
OR STL2
AND t
STNDL2L3
DIRL2L3 AND
15 ms
OR STL3
STNDL3L1 AND t
DIRL3L1 AND

STZMPP
OR

BLK

15 ms
OR START
AND t

IEC09000888-2-en.vsd
IEC09000888 V2 EN

Figure 70: Composition of start signals in directional operating mode

Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented
in figure 71.

191
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

Timer tPP=On
STZMPP AND tPP
AND
t

BLKFUNC
OR OR
tPE
t
AND
Timer tPE=On AND
STZMPE 15ms
BLKTR AND t
TRIP
BLK OR

STL1 AND TRL1

STL2 AND TRL2

STL3 AND TRL3

IEC09000887-2-en.vsd
IEC09000887 V2 EN

Figure 71: Tripping logic for the distance protection zone

7.1.8 Technical data

Table 82: ZMQPDIS Technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of zones Max 5 with selectable -
direction
Minimum operate residual (5-1000)% of IBase -
current, zone 1
Minimum operate current, phase- (10-1000)% of IBase -
to-phase and phase-to-earth
Positive sequence reactance (0.10-3000.00) / 2.0% static accuracy
phase 2.0 degrees static angular accuracy
Conditions:
Positive sequence resistance (0.01-1000.00) / Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
phase
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Zero sequence reactance (0.10-9000.00) / Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
phase
Zero sequence resistance (0.01-3000.00) /
phase
Fault resistance, phase-to-earth (0.10-9000.00) /loop
Fault resistance, phase-to-phase (0.10-3000.00) /loop
Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees -
measured with CVTs
and 0.5<SIR<30
Table continues on next page

192
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Definite time delay Ph-Ph and (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 40 ms whichever is greater
Ph-E operation
Operate time 25 ms typically IEC 60255-121
Reset ratio 105% typically -
Reset time at 0.1 to 2 x Zreach Min = 20 ms -
Max = 35 ms

7.2 Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with

fixed angle FDPSPDIS

7.2.1 Identification

7.2.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Phase selection with load FDPSPDIS 21
encroachment, quadrilateral
characteristic Z<phs

SYMBOL-DD V1 EN

7.2.2 Functionality
The operation of transmission networks today is in many cases close to the stability
limit. Due to environmental considerations, the rate of expansion and
reinforcement of the power system is reduced, for example, difficulties to get
permission to build new power lines. The ability to accurately and reliably classify
the different types of fault, so that single pole tripping and autoreclosing can be
used plays an important role in this matter. Phase selection, quadrilateral
characteristic with fixed angle FDPSPDIS is designed to accurately select the
proper fault loop in the distance function dependent on the fault type.

The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may make
fault resistance coverage difficult to achieve. Therefore, FDPSPDIS has a built-in
algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the
resistive setting of both the phase selection and the measuring zones without
interfering with the load.

The extensive output signals from the phase selection gives also important
information about faulty phase(s), which can be used for fault analysis.

A current-based phase selection is also included. The measuring elements

continuously measure three phase currents and the residual current and, compare
them with the set values.

193
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

7.2.3 Function block

FDPSPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* START
BLOCK STFWL1
DIRCND STFWL2
STFWL3
STFWPE
STRVL1
STRVL2
STRVL3
STRVPE
STNDL1
STNDL2
STNDL3
STNDPE
STFW1PH
STFW2PH
STFW3PH
STPE
STPP
STCNDZ
STCNDLE

IEC14000047-1-en.vsd
IEC10000047 V2 EN

Figure 72: FDPSPDIS function block

7.2.4 Signals
Table 83: FDPSPDIS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition

Table 84: FDPSPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip output
START BOOLEAN Start in any phase or loop
STFWL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1 - forward direction
STFWL2 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L2 - forward direction
STFWL3 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L3 - forward direction
STFWPE BOOLEAN Earth fault detected in forward direction
STRVL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1 - reverse direction
STRVL2 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L2 - reverse direction
STRVL3 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L3 - reverse direction
STRVPE BOOLEAN Earth fault detected in reverse direction
Table continues on next page

194
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

Name Type Description

STNDL1 BOOLEAN Non directional start in L1
STNDL2 BOOLEAN Non directional start in L2
STNDL3 BOOLEAN Non directional start in L3
STNDPE BOOLEAN Non directional start, phase-earth
STFW1PH BOOLEAN Start in forward direction for single-phase fault
STFW2PH BOOLEAN Start in forward direction for two- phase fault
STFW3PH BOOLEAN Start in forward direction for thre-phase fault
STPE BOOLEAN Current conditions release of phase-earth
measuring elements
STPP BOOLEAN Current conditions release of phase-phase
measuring elements
STCNDZ INTEGER Start condition (Z< with LE and 3I0 E/F detection)
STCNDLE INTEGER Start condition (only LE and 3I0 E/F detection)

7.2.5 Settings
Table 85: FDPSPDIS Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
INBlockPP 10 - 100 %IPh 1 40 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase
measuring loops
INReleasePE 10 - 100 %IPh 1 20 3I0 limit for releasing phase-to-earth
measuring loops
RLdFw 1.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 80.00 Forward resistive reach within the load
impedance area
RLdRv 1.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 80.00 Reverse resistive reach within the load
impedance area
ArgLd 5 - 70 Deg 1 30 Load angle determining the load
impedance area
X1 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach
X0 0.50 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach
RFFwPP 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward
RFRvPP 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse
RFFwPE 1.00 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, forward
RFRvPE 1.00 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, reverse
IMinOpPP 5 - 500 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate delta current for Phase-
Phase loops
IMinOpPE 5 - 500 %IB 1 5 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops

195
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

Table 86: FDPSPDIS Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
OperationZ< Off - - On Operation of impedance based
On measurement
OperationI> Off - - Off Operation of current based measurement
On
IPh> 10 - 2500 %IB 1 120 Start value for phase over-current
element
IN> 10 - 2500 %IB 1 20 Start value for trip from 3I0 over-current
element
TimerPP Off - - Off Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-Ph
tPP 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Time delay to trip, Ph-Ph
TimerPE Off - - Off Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-E
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Time delay to trip, Ph-E

Table 87: FDPSPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

7.2.6 Operation principle

The basic impedance algorithm for the operation of the phase selection measuring
elements is the same as for the distance zone measuring function. Phase selection
with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic FDPSPDIS includes six
impedance measuring loops; three intended for phase-to-earth faults, and three
intended for phase-to-phase faults as well as for three-phase faults.

The difference, compared to the distance zone measuring function, is in the

combination of the measuring quantities (currents and voltages) for different types
of faults.

A current-based phase selection is also included. The measuring elements

continuously measure three phase currents and the residual current, and compare
them with the set values. The current signals are filtered by Fourier's recursive
filter, and separate trip counter prevents too high overreaching of the measuring
elements.

The characteristic is basically non-directional, but FDPSPDIS uses information

from the directional function to discriminate whether the fault is in forward or
reverse direction.

The start condition STCNDZ is essentially based on the following criteria:

196
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

1. Residual current criteria, that is, separation of faults with and without earth
connection
2. Regular quadrilateral impedance characteristic
3. Load encroachment characteristics is always active but can be switched off by
selecting a high setting.

The current start condition STCNDLE is based on the following criteria:

1. Residual current criteria

2. No quadrilateral impedance characteristic. The impedance reach outside the
load area is theoretically infinite. The practical reach, however, will be
determined by the minimum operating current limits.
3. Load encroachment characteristic is always active, but can be switched off by
selecting a high setting.

The STCNDLE output is non-directional. The directionality is determined by the

distance zones directional function. There are outputs from FDPSPDIS that
indicate whether a start is in forward or reverse direction or non-directional, for
example STFWL1, STRVL1 and STNDL1.

These directional indications are based on the sector boundaries of the directional
function and the impedance setting of FDPSPDIS function. Their operating
characteristics are illustrated in figure 73.

X X X

R
R R

Non-directional (ND) Forward (FW) Reverse (RV)

en08000286.vsd
IEC08000286 V1 EN

Figure 73: Characteristics for non-directional, forward and reverse operation

of Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral
characteristic FDPSPDIS

The setting of the load encroachment function may influence the total operating
characteristic, (for more information, refer to section "Load encroachment").

The input DIRCND contains binary coded information about the directional
coming from the directional function . It shall be connected to the STDIR output on

197
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

ZDRDIR, directional measuring block. This information is also transferred to the

input DIRCND on the distance measuring zones, that is, the ZMQPDIS, distance
measuring block.

The code built up for the directionality is as follows:

STDIR= STFWL1*1+STFWL2*2+STFWL3*4+STFWL1L2*8+
+STFWL2L3*16+STFWL3L1*32+STRVL1*64+STRVL2*128+
+STRVL3*256+STRVL1L2*512+STRVL2L3*1024+STRVL3L1*2048

If the binary information is 1 then it will be considered that we have start in

forward direction in phase L1. If the binary code is 3 then we have start in forward
direction in phase L1 and L2, binary code 192 means start in reverse direction in
phase L1 and L2A and B etc.

The STCNDZ or STCNDLE output contains, in a similar way as DIRCND, binary

coded information, in this case information about the condition for opening correct
fault loop in the distance measuring element. It shall be connected to the STCND
input on the ZMQPDIS, distance measuring block.

The code built up for release of the measuring fault loops is as follows:

STCND = L1N*1 + L2N*2 + L3N*4 + L1L2*8 + L2L3*16 + L3L1*32

7.2.6.1 Phase-to-earth fault

For a phase-to-earth fault, the measured impedance by FDPSPDIS will be

according to equation 41.

Index PHS in images and equations reference settings for Phase

selection with load encroachment function FDPSPDIS.

ULn
ZPHSn =
ILn
EQUATION1255 V1 EN (Equation 41)

where:
n corresponds to the particular phase (n=1, 2 or 3)

The characteristic for FDPSPDIS function at phase-to-earth fault is according to

figure 74. The characteristic has a fixed angle for the resistive boundary in the first
quadrant of 60.

The resistance RN and reactance XN are the impedance in the earth-return path
defined according to equation 42 and equation 43.

198
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

R0 - R1
RN =
3
EQUATION1256 V1 EN (Equation 42)

X 0 - X1
XN =
3
EQUATION1257 V1 EN (Equation 43)

X (ohm/loop)
Kr(X1+XN)

RFRvPE RFFwPE

X1+XN

60 deg
RFFwPE

RFRvPE R (Ohm/loop)
60 deg
X1+XN

1
Kr =
tan(60deg)

RFRvPE RFFwPE

Kr(X1+XN)
en06000396.vsd
IEC06000396 V2 EN

Figure 74: Characteristic of FDPSPDIS for phase-to-earth fault (setting

parameters in italic), ohm/loop domain (directional lines are drawn
as "line-dot-dot-line")

Besides this, the 3I0 residual current must fulfil the conditions according to
equation 44 and equation 45.

3 I0 0.5 IMinOpPE
EQUATION2108 V1 EN (Equation 44)

199
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

3 I0 INReleasePE
------------------------------------ Iphmax
100
EQUATION766 V1 EN (Equation 45)

where:
IMinOpPE is the minimum operation current for forward zones
INReleasePE is the setting for the minimum residual current needed to enable operation in the phase-
to-earth fault loops (in %).
Iphmax is the maximum phase current in any of three phases.

7.2.6.2 Phase-to-phase fault

For a phase-to-phase fault, the measured impedance by FDPSPDIS will be

according to equation 46.

ULm - ULn
ZPHS =
-2 ILn
EQUATION1258 V1 EN (Equation 46)

ULm is the leading phase voltage, ULn the lagging phase voltage and ILn the
phase current in the lagging phase n.

The operation characteristic is shown in figure 75.

200
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

X (W / phase)
0.5RFRvPP 0.5RFFwPP

KrX1

X1
0.5RFFwPP
60 deg

R (W / phase)
60 deg
0.5RFRvPP
X1
1
Kr =
tan(60 deg)

KrX1

0.5RFRvPP 0.5RFFwPP
IEC09000047-2-en.vsd
IEC09000047 V2 EN

Figure 75: The operation characteristics for FDPSPDIS at phase-to-phase

fault (setting parameters in italic, directional lines drawn as "line-dot-
dot-line"), ohm/phase domain

In the same way as the condition for phase-to-earth fault, there are current
conditions that have to be fulfilled in order to release the phase-to-phase loop.
Those are according to equation 47 or equation 48.

3I 0 < IMinOpPE
EQUATION2109 V1 EN (Equation 47)

INBlockPP
3I 0 < Iph max
100
EQUATION2110 V1 EN (Equation 48)

where:
IMinOpPE is the minimum operation current for earth measuring loops,
INBlockPP is 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase measuring loop and
Iphmax is maximal magnitude of the phase currents.

201
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

7.2.6.3 Three-phase faults

The operation conditions for three-phase faults are the same as for phase-to-phase
fault, that is equation 46, equation 47 and equation 48 are used to release the
operation of the function.

However, the reach is expanded by a factor 2/3 (approximately 1.1547) in all

directions. At the same time the characteristic is rotated 30 degrees, counter-
clockwise. The characteristic is shown in figure 76.

X (ohm/phase)

4 X1
3

90 deg

0.5RFFwPPK3

X1K3 4 RFFwPP
6

R (ohm/phase)

0.5RFRvPPK3
2
K3 =
3 30 deg

IEC05000671-5-en.vsd
IEC05000671 V5 EN

Figure 76: The characteristic of FDPSPDIS for three-phase fault (setting

parameters in italic)

7.2.6.4 Load encroachment

Each of the six measuring loops has its own load encroachment characteristic based
on the corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality is
always active, but can be switched off by selecting a high setting.

The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 77. As illustrated, the

resistive blinders are set individually in forward and reverse direction while the
angle of the sector is the same in all four quadrants.

202
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

RLdFw
ArgLd ArgLd
R

ArgLd ArgLd
RLdRv

IEC09000042-1-en.vsd
IEC09000042 V1 EN

Figure 77: Characteristic of load encroachment function

The influence of load encroachment function on the operation characteristic is

dependent on the chosen operation mode of FDPSPDIS function. When output
signal STCNDZ is selected, the characteristic for FDPSPDIS (and also zone
measurement depending on settings) will be reduced by the load encroachment
characteristic (see figure 78, left illustration).

When output signal STCNDLE is selected, the operation characteristic will be as

the right illustration in figure 78. The reach will in this case be limit by the
minimum operation current and the distance measuring zones.

203
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

X X

R R

STCNDZ STCNDLE

IEC10000099-1-
en.vsd
IEC10000099 V1 EN

Figure 78: Difference in operating characteristic depending on operation

mode when load encroachment is activated

When FDPSPDIS is set to operate together with a distance measuring zone the
resultant operate characteristic could look like in figure 79. The figure shows a
distance measuring zone operating in forward direction. Thus, the operating area is
highlighted in black.

204
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

"Phase selection"
"quadrilateral" zone

Distance measuring zone

Load encroachment
characteristic

Directional line

en05000673.vsd
IEC05000673 V1 EN

Figure 79: Operating characteristic in forward direction when load

encroachment is activated

Figure 79 is valid for phase-to-earth. During a three-phase fault, or load, when the
quadrilateral phase-to-phase characteristic is subject to enlargement and rotation
the operate area is transformed according to figure 80. Notice in particular what
happens with the resistive blinders of the "phase selection" "quadrilateral" zone.
Due to the 30-degree rotation, the angle of the blinder in quadrant one is now 90
degrees instead of the original 60 degrees. The blinder that is nominally located to
quadrant four will at the same time tilt outwards and increase the resistive reach
around the R-axis. Consequently, it will be more or less necessary to use the load
encroachment characteristic in order to secure a margin to the load impedance.

205
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

X (W / phase)
Phase selection
Quadrilateral zone

Distance measuring zone

R (W / phase)

IEC09000049-1-en.vsd
IEC09000049 V1 EN

Figure 80: Operating characteristic for FDPSPDIS in forward direction for three-
phase fault, ohm/phase domain

The result from rotation of the load characteristic at a fault between two phases is
presented in fig 81. Since the load characteristic is based on the same measurement
as the quadrilateral characteristic, it will rotate with the quadrilateral characteristic
clockwise by 30 degrees when subject to a pure phase-to-phase fault. At the same
time the characteristic will "shrink", divided by 2/3, from the full RLdFw and
RLdRv reach, which is valid at load or three-phase fault.

206
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

IEC08000437.vsd

IEC08000437 V1 EN

Figure 81: Rotation of load characteristic for a fault between two phases

There is a gain in selectivity by using the same measurement as for the

quadrilateral characteristic since not all phase-to-phase loops will be fully affected
by a fault between two phases. It should also provide better fault resistive coverage
in quadrant one. The relative loss of fault resistive coverage in quadrant four
should not be a problem even for applications on series compensated lines.

7.2.6.5 Minimum operate currents

The operation of the Phase selection with load encroachment function (FDPSPDIS)
is blocked if the magnitude of input currents falls below certain threshold values.

The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn<IMinOpPE, where ILn is the RMS

value of the current in phase Ln.

The phase-to-phase loop LmLn is blocked if (2ILn<IMinOpPP).

7.2.6.6 Simplified logic diagrams

Figure 82 presents schematically the creation of the phase-to-phase and phase-to-

earth operating conditions. Consider only the corresponding part of measuring and

207
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

logic circuits, when only a phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase measurement is

available within the IED.

LDEblock

3I 0 0.5 IMinOpPE IRELPE

& 15 ms
t STPE
&
INReleasePE
3I 0 Iphmax
100 STCNDLE
Bool to &
BLOCK integer

15 ms
3I 0 < IMinOpPE & t STPP
10 ms 20 ms
OR & t t
IRELPP
INBlockPP
3I 0 < Iphmax
100

IEC09000149_2_en.vsd
IEC09000149 V2 EN

Figure 82: Phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth operating conditions (residual

current criteria)

A special attention is paid to correct phase selection at evolving faults. A

STCNDLE output signal is created as a combination of the load encroachment
characteristic and current criteria, refer to figure 82. This signal can be configured
to STCND functional input signals of the distance protection zone and this way
influence the operation of the phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth zone measuring
elements, residual current and the load encroachment characteristic.

Figure 83 presents schematically the composition of non-directional phase

selective signals STNDLn. Internal signals ZMLnN and ZMLmLn (m and n
change between one and three according to the phase number) represent the
fulfilled operating criteria for each separate loop measuring element, that is, within
the characteristic.

208
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

INDL1N
INDL2N
INDL3N

15 ms
STNDPE
IRELPE OR t

LDEblockL1N
AND 15 ms
ZML1N STNDL1
OR t
LDEblockL2N
AND
ZML2N
15 ms
LDEblockL3N STNDL2
OR t
AND
ZML3N

LDEblockL1L2 15 ms
STNDL3
AND OR t
ZML1L2
LDEblockL2L3
AND INDL1L2
ZML2L3
LDEblockL3L1 INDL2L3
AND
ZML3L1 INDL3L1
IRELPP 15 ms
STNDPP
OR t

IEC00000545-3-en.vsd
IEC00000545-TIFF V3 EN

Figure 83: Composition on non-directional phase selection signals

Composition of the directional (forward and reverse) phase selective signals is

presented schematically in figure 85 and figure 84. The directional criteria appears
as a condition for the correct phase selection in order to secure a high phase
selectivity for simultaneous and evolving faults on lines within the complex
network configurations. Internal signals DFWLn and DFWLnLm present the
corresponding directional signals for measuring loops with phases Ln and Lm.
Designation FW (figure 85) represents the forward direction as well as the
designation RV (figure 84) represents the reverse direction. All directional signals
are derived within the corresponding digital signal processor.

Figure 84 presents additionally a composition of a STCNDZ output signal, which

is created on the basis of the continuation of the impedance measuring conditions
and the load encroachment characteristic. This signal can be configured to STCND
functional input signals of the distance protection zone and this way influence the
operation of the phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth zone measuring elements and
their phase related starting and tripping signals.

209
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

INDL1N
AND
DRVL1N
INDL1L2 15 ms STRVL1
AND OR t
DRVL1L2
INDL3L1
AND
DRVL3L1 15 ms STRVPE
INDL2N OR t
AND
DRVL2N
INDL1L2 15 ms
STRVL2
AND OR t

INDL2L3 INDL1N
AND INDL2N
DRVL2L3
INDL3N Bool to STCNDZ
INDL3N INDL1L2 integer
AND INDL2L3
DRVL3N INDL3L1
INDL2L3 15 ms
STRVL3
AND OR t

INDL3L1
15 ms
AND STRVPP
OR t

IEC00000546_2_en.vsd
IEC00000546-TIFF V2 EN

Figure 84: Composition of phase selection signals for reverse direction

210
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

AND

INDL1N
AND 15 ms 15 ms
DFWL1N STFW1PH
AND OR t t
INDL1L2
15 ms STFWL1
AND OR t
DFWL1L2
INDL3L1
AND
AND
DFWL3L1 15 ms
STFWPE
INDL2N OR t
AND
DFWL2N
AND 15 ms
INDL1L2 STFWL2
t
AND OR
15 ms 15 ms
INDL2L3 STFW2PH
AND OR t t
AND
DFWL2L3
INDL3N
AND AND
DFWL3N 15 ms
STFWL3
t
INDL2L3
AND OR
15 ms
INDL3L1 STFW3PH
AND t
AND

15 ms
STFWPP
OR t

IEC05000201_2_en.vsd

IEC05000201 V2 EN

Figure 85: Composition of phase selection signals for forward direction

Figure 86 presents the composition of output signals TRIP and START, where
internal signals STNDPP, STFWPP and STRVPP are the equivalent to internal
signals STNDPE, STFWPE and STRVPE, but for the phase-to-phase loops.

211
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

TimerPP=Off
tPP
AND AND
t
TRIP
OR OR
tPE
TimerPE=Off
t
AND AND

STNDPP
STFWPP OR
STRVPP
START
OR
STNDPE
STFWPE OR
STRVPE

IEC08000441_2_en.vsd
IEC08000441-1 V2 EN

Figure 86: TRIP and START signal logic

212
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.2.7 Technical data

Table 88: FDPSPDIS technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Minimum operate current (5-500)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reactive reach, positive (0.503000.00) /phase 2.5% static accuracy

sequence
Resistive reach, positive
sequence
Reactive reach, zero sequence
Resistive reach, zero sequence
Fault resistance, phase-to-earth
faults, forward and reverse
Fault resistance, phase-to-
phase faults, forward and reverse
Load encroachment criteria:
Load resistance, forward and
reverse
Safety load impedance angle
Reset ratio
2.0 degrees static angular
accuracy
(0.101000.00) /phase Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
(0.509000.00) /phase Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85
(0.503000.00) /phase degrees
(1.009000.00) /loop
(0.503000.00) /loop
(1.003000.00) /phase
(5-70) degrees
105% typically -

7.3 Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral

characteristic for series compensated lines
ZMCPDIS, ZMCAPDIS, ZDSRDIR

7.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral ZMCPDIS 21
characteristic for series compensated
lines (zone 1)

S00346 V1 EN

Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral ZMCAPDIS 21

characteristic for series compensated
lines (zone 2-5)

S00346 V1 EN

Directional impedance quadrilateral, ZDSRDIR 21D

including series compensation
Z<->

IEC09000167 V1 EN

213
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

7.3.2 Functionality
The line distance protection is a, up to five zone full scheme protection with three
fault loops for phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-earth fault
for each of the independent zones. Individual settings for each zone resistive and
reactive reach give flexibility for use on overhead lines and cables of different
types and lengths.

Quadrilateral characteristic is available.

ZMCPDIS function has functionality for load encroachment which increases the
possibility to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines.

Forward
operation

Reverse
operation

en05000034.vsd
IEC05000034 V1 EN

Figure 87: Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with load

encroachment function activated

The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional
(forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together
with different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables
in complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines.

7.3.3 Function block

ZMCPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRL1
BLOCK TRL2
VTSZ TRL3
BLKTR START
STCND STL1
DIRCND STL2
STL3
STND

IEC07000036-2-en.vsd
IEC07000036 V2 EN

Figure 88: ZMCPDIS function block

214
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

ZMCAPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRL1
BLOCK TRL2
VTSZ TRL3
BLKTR START
STCND STL1
DIRCND STL2
STL3
STND

IEC09000890-1-en.vsd
IEC09000890 V1 EN

Figure 89: ZMCAPDIS function block

ZDSRDIR
I3P* STFW
U3P* STRV
STDIRCND

IEC07000035-2-en.vsd
IEC07000035 V2 EN

Figure 90: ZDSRDIR function block

7.3.4 Signals

Input and output signals is shown for zone 1, zone 2 - 5 are equal.

Table 89: ZMCPDIS Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
VTSZ BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all output by fuse failure signal
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all trip outputs
STCND INTEGER 0 External start condition (loop enabler)
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition

Table 90: ZMCPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
Table continues on next page

215
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

Name Type Description

START BOOLEAN General Start, issued from any phase or loop
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
STND BOOLEAN Non-directional start, issued from any phase or
loop

Table 91: ZMCAPDIS Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
VTSZ BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all output by fuse failure signal
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all trip outputs
STCND INTEGER 0 External start condition (loop enabler)
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition

Table 92: ZMCAPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
START BOOLEAN General Start, issued from any phase or loop
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
STND BOOLEAN Non-directional start, issued from any phase or
loop

Table 93: ZDSRDIR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL

216
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

Table 94: ZDSRDIR Output signals

Name Type Description
STFW BOOLEAN Start in forward direction
STRV BOOLEAN Start in reverse direction
STDIRCND INTEGER Binary coded directional information per
measuring loop

7.3.5 Settings

Settings for ZMCPDIS are valid for zone 1, while settings for
ZMCAPDIS are valid for zone 2 - 5

Table 95: ZMCPDIS Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationDir Non-directional - - Forward Operation mode of directionality NonDir /
Forward Forw / Rev
Reverse
OperationPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-
On Phase loops
X1FwPP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, forward
R1PP 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic
angle, Ph-Ph
RFFwPP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward
X1RvPP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, reverse
RFRvPP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse
OpModetPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-Ph
tPP 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph
OperationPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth
On loops
X1FwPE 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
E, forward
R1PE 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic
angle, Ph-E
X0PE 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 100.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E
R0PE 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 47.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle, Ph-E
RFFwPE 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, forward
X1RvPE 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
E, reverse
Table continues on next page

217
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

RFRvPE 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, reverse
OpModetPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-E
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-E
IMinOpPP 10 - 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate delta current for Phase-
Phase loops
IMinOpPE 10 - 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpIN 5 - 1000 %IB 1 5 Minimum operate residual current for
Phase-Earth loops

Table 96: ZMCPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Table 97: ZMCAPDIS Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationDir Non-directional - - Forward Operation mode of directionality NonDir /
Forward Forw / Rev
Reverse
OperationPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-
On Phase loops
X1FwPP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, forward
R1PP 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic
angle, Ph-Ph
RFFwPP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward
X1RvPP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, reverse
RFRvPP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse
OpModetPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-Ph
tPP 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph
OperationPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth
On loops
X1FwPE 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
E, forward
R1PE 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic
angle, Ph-E
X0PE 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 100.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E
R0PE 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 47.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle, Ph-E
Table continues on next page

218
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

RFFwPE 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, forward
X1RvPE 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
E, reverse
RFRvPE 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, reverse
OpModetPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-E
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-E
IMinOpPP 10 - 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate delta current for Phase-
Phase loops
IMinOpPE 10 - 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops

Table 98: ZMCAPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Table 99: ZDSRDIR Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
OperationSC NoSeriesComp - - SeriesComp Special directional criteria for voltage
SeriesComp reversal
IMinOpPE 5 - 30 %IB 1 5 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpPP 5 - 30 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase-phase current
for Phase-Phase loops
ArgNegRes 90 - 175 Deg 1 130 Angle of blinder in second quadrant for
forward direction
ArgDir 5 - 45 Deg 1 15 Angle of blinder in fourth quadrant for
forward direction
INReleasePE 10 - 100 %IPh 1 20 3I0 limit for releasing phase-to-earth
measuring loops
INBlockPP 10 - 100 %IPh 1 40 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase
measuring loops
OperationLdCh Off - - On Operation of load discrimination
On characteristic
RLdFw 1.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 80.00 Forward resistive reach within the load
impedance area
RLdRv 1.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 80.00 Reverse resistive reach within the load
impedance area
ArgLd 5 - 70 Deg 1 30 Load angle determining the load
impedance area
X1FwPP 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, forward
R1PP 0.10 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 7.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic
angle, Ph-Ph
Table continues on next page

219
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

RFFwPP 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward
X1RvPP 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, reverse
RFRvPP 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse
X1FwPE 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
E, forward
R1PE 0.10 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 7.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic
angle, Ph-E
X0FwPE 0.50 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E,
forward
R0PE 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 20.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle, Ph-E
RFFwPE 1.00 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, forward
X1RvPE 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
E, reverse
X0RvPE 0.50 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E,
reverse
RFRvPE 1.00 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, reverse

Table 100: ZDSRDIR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

7.3.6 Monitored data

Table 101: ZDSRDIR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
L1Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L1
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L2Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L2
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L3Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L3
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L1R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L1
L1X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L1
L2R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L2
L2X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L2
L3R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L3
L3X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L3

220
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.3.7 Operation principle

7.3.7.1 Full scheme measurement

The execution of the different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type,
which means that earth fault loop for phase-to-earth faults and phase-to-phase
faults for forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel.

Figure 91 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the basic five,
impedance-measuring zones.

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 1

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 2

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 3

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 4

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 5

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1

Zone RV

IEC05000458-2-en.vsd
IEC05000458 V2 EN

Figure 91: The different measuring loops at phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-
phase fault

The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched
schemes which mostly uses a start element to select correct voltages and current
depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs like one
independent distance protection IED with six measuring elements.

7.3.7.2 Impedance characteristic

Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines

(ZMCPDIS) include six impedance measuring loops; three intended for phase-to-
earth faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as, three-phase faults.

The distance measuring zone operates according to the non-directional impedance

characteristics presented in figure 92 and figure 93. The phase-to-earth
characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-to-phase
characteristic presents the per-phase reach.

221
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

X (Ohm/loop)

R1PE+RNFw
X 0 PE - X 1FwPE
RFRvPE RFFwPE XNFw =
3
PG- -
XX00PE 1RVPG 1RvPE
1XRVPE
X
XNRV XNRv
XNRV == =XXNFw
3

3 X 1FwPE
XX0 PE - X-1X
0 PG FWPE
1FWPG
XNFW==
XNFW
X1FwPE+XNFw 3 3 R0 PE - R1PE
RNFw =
jN jN 3
R (Ohm/loop)

RFRvPE RFFwPE

X1RvPE+XNRv

jN

RFRvPE RFFwPE
IEC09000625-1-en.vsd
IEC09000625 V1 EN

Figure 92: Characteristic for the phase-to-earth measuring loops, ohm/loop

domain

222
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

X (Ohm/phase)

RFRvPP R1PP RFFwPP

2 2
X 0 PE - X 1RVPE
XNRV =XX00PEPG- -X31XRVPE
1RVPG
XNRV =
XNRV =
33
XX 0 PE-
X 0 PG X
0 PE --1X 11FWPE
XFWPE
FWPG
XNFW===
XNFW
XNFW
X1FwPP 3 33

j j
jN R (Ohm/phase)

RFRvPP RFFwPP
2 2

X1RvPP

jN

RFRvPP RFFwPP
2 2
IEC09000632-1-en.vsd
IEC09000632 V1 EN

Figure 93: Characteristic for the phase-to-phase measuring loops

The fault loop reach with respect to each fault type may also be presented as in
figure 94. Note in particular the difference in definition regarding the (fault)
resistive reach for phase-to-phase faults and three-phase faults.

223
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

IL1 R1 + j X1
Phase-to-earth
UL1
element

Phase-to-earth
fault in phase L1 RFPE
(Arc + tower
resistance)

0
IN (R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )

IL1 R1 + j X1 Phase-to-phase
UL1 element L1-L2
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase RFPP
L1-L2 IL2
UL2 (Arc resistance)
R1 + j X1

IL1 R1 + j X1 0.5RFPP Phase-to-phase

UL1 element L1-L3
Three-phase
fault
IL3
UL3
R1 + j X1 0.5RFPP
IEC08000282-2-en.vsd
IEC08000282 V2 EN

Figure 94: Fault loop model

The R1 and jX1 in figure 94 represents the positive sequence impedance from the
measuring point to the fault location. The RFPE and RFPP is the eventual fault
resistance in the fault place.

Regarding the illustration of three-phase fault in figure 94, there is of course fault
current flowing also in the third phase during a three-phase fault. The illustration
merely reflects the loop measurement, which is made phase-to-phase.

The zone may be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse direction

through the setting OperationDir. The result from respective set value is illustrated
in figure 95. It may be convenient to once again mention that the impedance reach
is symmetric, forward and reverse direction. Therefore, all reach settings apply to
both directions.

224
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

X X X

R R R

Non-directional Forward Reverse

en05000182.vsd
IEC05000182 V1 EN

Figure 95: Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zone

7.3.7.3 Minimum operating current

The operation of Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series

compensated lines (ZMCPDIS,ZMCAPDIS) is blocked if the magnitude of input
currents fall below certain threshold values.

The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn < IMinOpPE.

For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all
phase-to-earth loops will be blocked when IN < IMinOpIN, regardless of the phase
currents.

ILn is the RMS value of the current in phase Ln. IN is the RMS value of the vector
sum of the three phase currents, that is, residual current 3I0.

The phase-to-phase loop LmLn is blocked if ILmLnAB (BC or CA)< IMinOpPP.

ILmLn is the RMS value of the vector difference between phase currents Lm and Ln.

All three current limits IMinOpPE, IMinOpIN and IMinOpPP are

automatically reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set
to operate in reverse direction, that is, OperationDir=Reverse.

7.3.7.4 Measuring principles

Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the
current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits. The

225
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

calculation of the apparent impedances at ph-ph faults follows equation 49

(example for a phase L1 to phase L2 fault).

UL1 UL2
Zapp = -------------------------
I L1 IL2
EQUATION1222 V1 EN (Equation 49)

Here U and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the
respective phase.

The earth return compensation applies in a conventional manner to ph-E faults

(example for a phase L1 to earth fault) according to equation 50.

U L1
Z app =
I L1 + I N KN
EQUATION1223 V2 EN (Equation 50)

Where:
UL1, IL1 and IN are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED
KN is defined as:

Z 0 - Z1
KN =
3 Z1
EQUATION-2105 V2 EN

Z 0 = R 0 + jX 0
EQUATION2106 V2 EN

Z 1 = R1 + jX 1
EQUATION2107 V2 EN

Where
R0 is setting of the resistive zero sequence reach
X0 is setting of the reactive zero sequence reach
R1 is setting of the resistive positive sequence reach
X1 is setting of the reactive positive sequence reach

Here IN is a phasor of the residual current at the IED point. This results in the same
reach along the line for all types of faults.

The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and

reactance X.

226
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

The formula given in equation 50 is only valid for no loaded radial feeder
applications. When load is considered in the case of single phase-to-earth fault,
conventional distance protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach
at importing end. IED has an adaptive load compensation which increases the
security in such applications.

Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D
converter. The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is
distributed into memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops,
sampled values of voltage (U), current (I), and changes in current between samples
(DI) are brought from the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter.

The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related
to the loop impedance according to equation 51,

X Di
U = R i + ------ -----
w 0 Dt
EQUATION1224 V1 EN (Equation 51)

in complex notation, or:

X D Re ( I )
Re ( U ) = R Re ( I ) + ------ ------------------
w0 Dt

EQUATION354 V1 EN (Equation 52)

X DIm ( I )
Im ( U ) = R Im ( I ) + ------ -----------------
w0 Dt

EQUATION355 V1 EN (Equation 53)

with

w0 = 2 p f 0
EQUATION356 V1 EN (Equation 54)

where:
Re designates the real component of current and voltage,
Im designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and
f0 designates the rated system frequency

The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real
value of the voltage and substitute it in the equation for the imaginary part. The
equation for the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is
equal to:

227
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

Im ( U ) DRe ( I ) Re ( U ) D Im ( I )
R m = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DRe ( I ) Im ( I ) D Im ( I ) Re ( I )
EQUATION357 V1 EN (Equation 55)

Re ( U ) Im ( I ) Im ( U ) Re ( I )
Xm = w 0 Dt -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DRe ( I ) Im ( I ) DIm ( I ) Re ( I )
EQUATION358 V1 EN (Equation 56)

The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the
set zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive
tripping results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the
capacitive voltage transformers or by other factors.

The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and

reverse directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase
locked positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures
unlimited directional sensitivity for faults close to the IED point.

7.3.7.5 Directionality for series compensation

In the basic distance protection function, the control of the memory for polarizing
voltage is performed by an undervoltage control. In case of series compensated
line, a voltage reversal can occur with a relatively high voltage also when the
memory must be locked. Thus, a simple undervoltage type of voltage memory
control can not be used in case of voltage reversal. In the option for series
compensated network the polarizing quantity and memory are controlled by an
impedance measurement criterion.

The polarizing voltage is a memorized positive sequence voltage. The memory is

continuously synchronized via a positive sequence filter. The memory is starting to
run freely instantaneously when a voltage change is detected in any phase. A non-
directional impedance measurement is used to detect a fault and identify the faulty
phase or phases.

At a three phase fault when no positive sequence voltage remains (all three phases
are disconnected) the memory is used for direction polarization during 100 ms.

The memory predicts the phase of the positive sequence voltage with the pre-fault
frequency. This extrapolation is made with a high accuracy and it is not the
accuracy of the memory that limits the time the memory can be used. The network
is at a three phase fault under way to a new equilibrium and the post-fault condition
can only be predicted accurately for a limited time from the pre-fault condition.

In case of a three phase fault after 100 ms the phase of the memorized voltage can
not be relied upon and the directional measurement has to be blocked. The
achieved direction criteria are sealed-in when the directional measurement is
blocked and kept until the impedance fault criteria is reset (the direction is stored
until the fault is cleared).

228
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

This memory control allows in the time domain unlimited correct directional
measurement for all unsymmetrical faults also at voltage reversal. Only at three
phase fault within the range of the set impedance reach of the criteria for control of
the polarization voltage the memory has to be used and the measurement is limited
to 100 ms and thereafter the direction is sealed-in. The special impedance
measurement to control the polarization voltage is set separately and has only to
cover (with some margin) the impedance to fault that can cause the voltage reversal.

The evaluation of the directionality takes place in Directional impedance

quadrilateral, including series compensation (ZDSRDIR) function. Equation 57 and
equation 58 are used to classify that the fault is in forward direction for phase-to-
earth fault and phase-to-phase fault.

U 1L1M
- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1
EQUATION2004 V2 EN (Equation 57)

For the L1-L2 element, the equation in forward direction is according to:

U 1L1L 2 M
- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1L 2
EQUATION2006 V2 EN (Equation 58)

where:
ArgDir is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default
set to 15 (= -15 degrees) and
ArgNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default
set to 115 degrees, see Figure 96.
U1L1M is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1

IL1 is phase current in phase L1

U1L1L2M is memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)

IL1L2 is current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)

The setting of ArgDir and ArgNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115
degrees respectively, see Figure 96, and it should not be changed unless system
studies have shown the necessity.

ZDSRDIR generates a binary coded signal on the output STDIR depending on the
evaluation where STFWL1N=1 adds 1, STRVL1N=1 adds 2, STFWL2N=1 adds 4.

229
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

ArgNegRes

ArgDir
R

en05000722.vsd
IEC05000722 V1 EN

Figure 96: Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault

The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated

by 180 degrees.

7.3.7.6 Simplified logic diagrams

Distance protection zones

The design of distance protection zones are presented for all measuring loops: phase-
to-earth as well as phase-to-phase.

Phase-to-earth related signals are designated by Ln, where n represents the

corresponding phase number (L1, L2, and L3). The phase-to-phase signals are
designated by LnLm, where n and m represent the corresponding phase numbers
(L1L2, L2L3, and L3L1).

Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one

logical signal for each separate measuring loop:

Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described

above.
Group functional input signal (STCND), as presented in figure 97.

Two types of function block, ZMCPDIS and ZMCAPDIS, are used in the IED.
ZMCPDIS is used for zone 1 and ZMCAPDIS for zone 2 - 5.

230
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

The STCND input signal represents a connection of six different integer values
from the phase selection function within the IED, which are converted within the
zone measuring function into corresponding boolean expressions for each
condition separately. It is connected to Phase selection with load enchroachment,
quadrilateral characteristic (FDPSPDIS) function output STCNDZ.

STZMPP
OR
STCND

AND STNDL1L2
L1L2

STNDL2L3
L2L3 AND

L3L1 AND STNDL3L1

AND STNDL1N
L1N

AND STNDL2N
L2N

STNDL3N
L3N AND

OR STPE

OR
VTSZ STND
OR AND
BLOCK
BLOCFUNC BLK

99000557-2.vsd
IEC99000557-TIFF V3 EN

Figure 97: Conditioning by a group functional input signal STCND

Composition of the phase starting signals for a case, when the zone operates in a non-
directional mode, is presented in figure 98.

231
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

IEC00000488-TIFF V1 EN

Figure 98: Composition of starting signals in non-directional operating mode

Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone
operates in directional (forward or reverse) mode, as shown in figure 99.

STNDL1N
AND
DIRL1N
STZMPE.
OR
STNDL2N
DIRL2N AND

STNDL3N 15 ms
OR STL1
AND t
DIRL3N AND

STNDL1L2
DIRL1L2 AND 15 ms
OR STL2
AND t
STNDL2L3
DIRL2L3 AND
15 ms
OR STL3
STNDL3L1 AND t
DIRL3L1 AND

STZMPP
OR

BLK

15 ms
OR START
AND t

IEC09000888-2-en.vsd
IEC09000888 V2 EN

Figure 99: Composition of starting signals in directional operating mode

Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented
in figure 100.

232
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

Timer tPP=On
STZMPP AND tPP
AND
t

BLKFUNC
OR OR
tPE
t
AND
Timer tPE=On AND
STZMPE 15ms
BLKTR AND t
TRIP
BLK OR

STL1 AND TRL1

STL2 AND TRL2

STL3 AND TRL3

IEC09000887-2-en.vsd
IEC09000887 V2 EN

Figure 100: Tripping logic for the distance protection zone one

7.3.8 Technical data

Table 102: ZMCPDIS, ZMCAPDIS Technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of zones Max 5 with selectable direction -
Minimum operate residual (5-1000)% of IBase -
current, zone 1
Minimum operate current, Ph-Ph (10-1000)% of IBase -
and Ph-E
Positive sequence reactance (0.10-3000.00) /phase 2.0% static accuracy
2.0 degrees static angular
Positive sequence resistance (0.10-1000.00) /phase accuracy
Zero sequence reactance (0.01-9000.00) /phase Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Zero sequence resistance (0.01-3000.00) /phase Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Fault resistance, Ph-E (0.10-9000.00) /loop Angle: at 0 degrees and 85
degrees
Fault resistance, Ph-Ph (0.10-3000.00) /loop
Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees measured -
with CCVTs and 0.5<SIR<30
Definite time delay Ph-Ph and (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever
Ph-E operation is greater
Operate time 25 ms typically IEC 60255-121
Reset ratio 105% typically -
Reset time at 0.1 to 2 x Zreach Min = 20 ms -
Max = 35 ms

233
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

7.4 Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho

characteristic ZMHPDIS

7.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE
identification C37.2 device
number
Full-scheme distance protection, mho ZMHPDIS 21
characteristic

S00346 V1 EN

7.4.2 Functionality
The numerical mho line distance protection is a, up to four zone full scheme
protection for back-up detection of short circuit and earth faults.

The full scheme technique provides back-up protection of power lines with high
sensitivity and low requirement on remote end communication.

The four zones have fully independent measuring and settings, which gives high
flexibility for all types of lines.

Built-in selectable zone timer logic is also provided in the function.

The function can be used as under impedance back-up protection for transformers
and generators.

234
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.4.3 Function block

ZMHPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRL1
CURR_INP* TRL2
VOLT_INP* TRL3
POL_VOLT* TRPE
BLOCK TRPP
BLKZ START
BLKZMTD STL1
BLKHSIR STL2
BLKTRIP STL3
BLKPE STPE
BLKPP STPP
EXTNST STTIMER
INTRNST
DIRCND
STCND*
LDCND

IEC06000423-2-en.vsd
IEC06000423 V3 EN

Figure 101: ZMHPDIS function block

7.4.4 Signals

Table 103: ZMHPDIS Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Connection for current sample signals
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Connection for voltage sample signals
SIGNAL
CURR_INP GROUP - Connection for current signals
SIGNAL
VOLT_INP GROUP - Connection for voltage signals
SIGNAL
POL_VOLT GROUP - Connection for polarizing voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKZ BOOLEAN 0 Block due to fuse failure
BLKZMTD BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for blocking of time domaine function
BLKHSIR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks time domain function at high SIR
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all operate output signals
BLKPE BOOLEAN 0 Blocks phase-to-earth operation
BLKPP BOOLEAN 0 Blocks phase-to-phase operation
EXTNST BOOLEAN 0 External start
INTRNST BOOLEAN 0 Internal start
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition
STCND INTEGER 0 External start condition (loop enabler)
LDCND INTEGER 0 External load condition (loop enabler)

235
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

Table 104: ZMHPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip General
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip phase L3
TRPE BOOLEAN Trip phase-to-earth
TRPP BOOLEAN Trip phase-to-phase
START BOOLEAN Start General
STL1 BOOLEAN Start phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start phase L3
STPE BOOLEAN Start phase-to-earth
STPP BOOLEAN Start phase-to-phase
STTIMER BOOLEAN Start timer

7.4.5 Settings

Table 105: ZMHPDIS Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
DirMode Off - - Forward Direction mode
Offset
Forward
Reverse
LoadEncMode Off - - Off Load encroachment mode Off/On
On
ReachMode Overreach - - Overreach Reach mode Over/Underreach
Underreach
ZnTimerSel Timers seperated - - Timers seperated Zone timer selection
Timers linked
Internal start
Start from PhSel
External start
OpModePE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth
On loops
ZPE 0.005 - 3000.000 Ohm/p 0.001 30.000 Positive sequence impedance setting for
Phase-Earth loop
ZAngPE 10 - 90 Deg 1 85 Angle for positive sequence line
impedance for Phase-Earth loop
KN 0.00 - 3.00 - 0.01 0.80 Magnitude of earth return compensation
factor KN
KNAng -180 - 180 Deg 1 -15 Angle for earth return compensation
factor KN
Table continues on next page

236
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ZRevPE 0.005 - 3000.000 Ohm/p 0.001 30.000 Reverse reach of the phase to earth
loop(magnitude)
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Delay time for operation of phase to
earth elements
IMinOpPE 10 - 30 %IB 1 20 Minimum operation phase to earth current
OpModePP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-
On Phase loops
ZPP 0.005 - 3000.000 Ohm/p 0.001 30.000 Impedance setting reach for phase to
phase elements
ZAngPP 10 - 90 Deg 1 85 Angle for positive sequence line
impedance for Phase-Phase elements
ZRevPP 0.005 - 3000.000 Ohm/p 0.001 30.000 Reverse reach of the phase to phase
loop(magnitude)
tPP 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Delay time for operation of phase to phase
IMinOpPP 10 - 30 %IB 1 20 Minimum operation phase to phase
current

Table 106: ZMHPDIS Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
OffsetMhoDir Non-directional - - Non-directional Direction mode for offset mho
Forward
Reverse
OpModetPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-E
OpModetPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-ph

Table 107: ZMHPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

7.4.6 Operation principle

7.4.6.1 Full scheme measurement

The execution of the different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type,
which means that each fault loop for phase-to-earth faults and phase-to-phase faults
are executed in parallel for all zones.

The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched
schemes which mostly uses a start element to select correct voltages and current
depending on fault type. So each distance protection zone performs like one
independent distance protection function with six measuring elements.

237
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

7.4.6.2 Impedance characteristic

The Mho distance function ZMHPDIS is present with four instances so that four
separate zones could be designed. Each instance can be selected to be either
forward or reverse with positive sequence polarized mho characteristic;
alternatively self polarized offset mho characteristics is also available. One
example of the operating characteristic is shown in Figure 102 A) where zone 5 is
selected offset mho.

The directional mho characteristic of Figure 102 B) has a dynamic expansion due
to the source impedance. Instead of mho characteristic crossing origin, which is
only valid where the source impedance is zero, the crossing point is moved to the
coordinates of the negative source impedance giving an expansion of the circle of
Figure 102 B).

A B
jx
X

Mho, zone4

Mho, zone3 Zs=0

Mho, zone2 R

Mho, zone1

Zs=Z1

Zs=2Z1

R
Offset mho, zone5

IEC09000143-3-en.vsd

IEC09000143 V3 EN

Figure 102: Mho, offset mho characteristic and the source impedance influence on the mho characteristic

The polarization quantities used for the mho circle are 100% memorized positive
sequence voltages. This will give a somewhat less dynamic expansion of the mho
circle during faults than a plain cross polarized characteristic. However, if the
source impedance is high, the dynamic expansion of the mho circle might lower the
security of the function too much with high loading and mild power swing conditions.

The mho distance element has a load encroachment function which cuts off a
section of the characteristic when enabled. The function is enabled by setting the
setting parameter LoadEnchMode to On. Enabling of the load encroachment
function increases the possibility to detect high resistive faults without interfering

238
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

with the load impedance. The algorithm for the load encroachment is located in the
Faulty phase identification with load encroachment for mho function FMPSPDIS,
where also the relevant settings can be found. Information about the load
encroachment from FMPSPDIS to the zone measurement is given in binary format
to the input signal LDCND.

7.4.6.3 Basic operation characteristics

Each impedance zone can be switched On and Off by the setting parameter
Operation.

Each zone can be set to Non-directional, Forward or Reverse by setting the

parameter DirMode .

The operation for phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase fault can be individually

switched On and Off by the setting parameter OpModePE and OpModePP.

For critical applications such as for lines with high SIRs as well as CVTs, it is
possible to improve the security by setting the parameter ReachMode to
Underreach. In this mode the reach for faults close to the zone reach is reduced by
20% and the filtering is also introduced to increase the accuracy in the measuring.
If the ReachMode is set to Overreach no reduction of the reach is introduced and
no extra filtering introduced. The latter setting is recommended for overreaching
pilot zone, zone 2 or zone 3 elements and reverse zone where overreaching on
transients is not a major issue either because of less likelihood of overreach with
higher settings or the fact that these elements do not initiate tripping unconditionally.

The offset Mho characteristic can be set in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse by

the setting parameter OffsetMhoDir. When Forward or Reverse is selected a
directional line is introduced. Information about the directional line is given from
the directional element and given to the measuring element as binary coded signal
to the input DIRCND.

The zone reach for phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-phase fault is set individually
in polar coordinates.

The impedance is set by the parameters ZPE and ZPP and the corresponding
arguments by the parameters ZAngPE and ZAngPP.

Compensation for earth -return path for faults involving earth is done by setting the
parameter KNMag and KNAng where KNMag is the magnitude of the earth-return
path and KNAng is the difference of angles between KNMag and ZPE .

Z0-Z1
KNMag =
3 Z1
EQUATION1579 V1 EN (Equation 59)

239
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

KNAng = arg
( Z 0 - Z1

3 Z1
)
EQUATION1580 V1 EN (Equation 60)

where
Z0 is the complex zero sequence impedance of the line in /phase
Z1 is the complex positive sequence impedance of the line in /phase

The phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase measuring loops can be time delayed

individually by setting the parameter tPE and tPP respectively. To release the time
delay, the operation mode for the timers, OpModetPE and OpModetPP, has to be
set to On. This is also the case for instantaneous operation.

The operate timers triggering input depends on the parameter ZnTimerSel setting.
The parameter ZnTimerSel can be set to:

Timers separated: Phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase timers are triggered by

the respective measuring loop start signals.
Timers linked: Start of any of the phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase loops will
trigger both the phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase timers.
Internal start: Phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase timers are triggered by the
INTRNST input.
Start from PhSel: The phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase timers are triggered
by the STCND and LDCND inputs. Each of the two inputs consist binary status
information related to the six measuring loops. Hence if any of the measuring
loop status is high in both two inputs STCND and LDCND, then the timers will
be triggered. In case when LoadEnchMode is off then only STCND enables the
timer.

It is not recommended to use this timer setting for the Zone

instance where LoadEnchMode is off.

External start: Phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase timers are triggered by the

EXTNST input.

The function can be blocked in the following ways:

activating of input BLOCK blocks the whole function

activating of the input BLKZ (fuse failure) blocks all output signals
activating of the input BLKZMTD blocks the delta based time domain algorithm
activating of the input BLKHSIR blocks the instantaneous part of the
algorithm for high SIR values

240
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

activating of the input BLKTRIP blocks all output signals

activating the input BLKPE blocks the phase-to-earth fault loop outputs
activating the input BLKPP blocks the phase-to-phase fault loop outputs

The activation of input signal BLKZ can be made by external fuse failure function
or from the loss of voltage check in the Mho supervision logic (ZSMGAPC). In
both cases the output BLKZ in the Mho supervision logic shall be connected to the
input BLKZ in the Mho distance function block (ZMHPDIS)

The input signal BLKZMTD is activated during some ms after fault has been
detected by ZSMGAPC to avoid unwanted operations due to transients. It shall be
connected to the BLKZMTD output signal of ZSMGAPC function.

At SIR values >10, the use of electronic CVT might cause overreach due to the built-
in resonance circuit in the CVT, which reduce the secondary voltage for a while.
The input BLKHSIR is connected to the output signal HSIR on ZSMGAPC for
increasing of the filtering and high SIR values. This is valid only when permissive
underreach scheme is selected by setting ReachMode=Underreach.

7.4.6.4 Theory of operation

The mho algorithm is based on the phase comparison of a operating phasor and a
polarizing phasor. When the operating phasor leads the reference polarizing phasor
by more than 90 degrees, the function operates and gives a trip output.

Phase-to-phase fault

Mho
The plain Mho circle has the characteristic as in Figure 103. The condition for
deriving the angle is according to equation 61.

b = arg(U L1 L 2 - I L1 L 2 ZPP ) - arg(U pol )

EQUATION1789 V1 EN (Equation 61)

where

U L1L2 is the voltage vector difference between phases L1 and L2

EQUATION1790 V2
EN

I L1L2 is the current vector difference between phases L1 and L2

EQUATION1791 V2
EN

ZPP is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase-to-phase fault

Upol is the polarizing voltage

241
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

The polarized voltage consists of 100% memorized positive sequence voltage

(UL1L2 for phase L1 to L2 fault). The memorized voltage will prevent collapse of
the Mho circle for close in faults.

Operation occurs if 90270

IL1L2X
Ucomp = UL1L2 - IL1L2 ZPP

IL1L2 ZPP

Upol
UL1L2

IL1L2R

en07000109.vsd
IEC07000109 V1 EN

Figure 103: Simplified mho characteristic and vector diagram for phase L1-to-
L2 fault

Offset Mho
The characteristic for offset mho is a circle where two points on the circle are the
setting parameters ZPP and ZRevPP. The vector ZPP in the impedance plane has
the settable angle AngZPP and the angle for ZRevPP is AngZPP+180.

The condition for operation at phase-to-phase fault is that the angle between the
two compensated voltages Ucomp1 and Ucomp2 is greater than or equal to 90
(figure 104). The angle will be 90 for fault location on the boundary of the circle.

The angle for L1-to-L2 fault can be defined according to equation 62.

242
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

U -IL1L2 ZPP
b = arg
U-(-IL1L2 ZRevPP)
EQUATION1792 V1 EN (Equation 62)

where

U is the UL1L2 voltage

EQUATION1800 V1 EN

ZRevPP is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase-to-phase fault in reverse direction

IL1L2jX

Ucomp1 = UL1L2 - IL1L2 ZPP

IL1L2 ZPP

U
Ucomp2 = U = IFZF=UL1L2
IL1L2R

- IL1L2 Z RevPP
en07000110.vsd
IEC07000110 V1 EN

Figure 104: Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vectors for phase
L1-to-L2 fault.

Operation occurs if 90270.

Offset mho, forward direction

When forward direction has been selected for the offset mho, an extra criteria
beside the one for offset mho (90<<270) is introduced, that is the angle between
the voltage and the current must lie between the blinders in second quadrant and
fourth quadrant. See figure 105. Operation occurs if 90270 and
ArgDirArgNegRes.

243
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

where
ArgDir is the setting parameter for directional line in fourth quadrant in the directional element,
ZDMRDIR.
ArgNegRes is the setting parameter for directional line in second quadrant in the directional element,
ZDMRDIR.
is calculated according to equation 62

The directional information is brought to the mho distance measurement from the
mho directional element as binary coded information to the input DIRCND. See
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic (ZDMRDIR) for information
about the mho directional element.

IL1L2jX

ZPP

UL1L2

ArgNegRes f

IL1L2
ArgDir

en07000111.vsd
IEC07000111 V1 EN

Figure 105: Simplified offset mho characteristic in forward direction for phase
L1-to-L2 fault

Offset mho, reverse direction

The operation area for offset mho in reverse direction is according to figure 106.
The operation area in second quadrant is ArgNegRes+180.

Operation occurs if 90270 and 180 - ArgDir ArgNegRes + 180

The is derived according to equation 62 for the mho circle and is the angle
between the voltage and current.

244
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

ZPP

ArgNegRes

IL1L2

ArgDir R

UL1L2

ZRevPP

en06000469.eps
IEC06000469 V1 EN

Figure 106: Operation characteristic for reverse phase L1-to-L2 fault

Phase-to-earth fault

Mho
The measuring of earth faults uses earth-return compensation applied in a
conventional way. The compensation voltage is derived by considering the
influence from the earth-return path.

For an earth fault in phase L1, the compensation voltage Ucomp can be derived, as
shown in Figure 107.

245
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

Ucomp = U pol - I L1 Z loop

EQUATION1793 V1 EN (Equation 63)

where
Upol is the polarizing voltage (memorized UL1 for Phase L1-to- earth fault)

Zloop is the loop impedance, which in general terms can be expressed as

(
Z1+ZN = Z 1 1 + KN )
where
Z1 is the positive sequence impedance of the line (Ohm/phase)

KN is the zero-sequence compensator factor

The angle between the Ucomp and the polarize voltage Upol for a L1-to-earth
fault is

= arg U L1 I L1 + 3I 0 KN ZPE arg (Upol )

( )

GUID-A9492CDF-D3B7-4DC5-8E06-6638BEE2540B V2 EN (Equation 64)

where
UL1 is the phase voltage in faulty phase L1

IL1 is the phase current in faulty phase L1

3I0 is the zero-sequence current in faulty phase L1

KN Z0-Z1
3 Z1
the setting parameter for the zero sequence
compensation consisting of the magnitude KN and
the angle KNAng.
Upol is the 100% of positive sequence memorized
voltage UL1

246
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

IL1X

IL1ZN
Ucomp

IL1 Zloop
IL1ZPE
Upol

f
IL1 (Ref) IL1R

en06000472_2.vsd
IEC06000472 V2 EN

Figure 107: Simplified offset mho characteristic and vector diagram for phase
L1-to-earth fault

Operation occurs if 90270.

Offset mho
The characteristic for offset mho at earth fault is a circle containing the two vectors
from the origin ZPE and ZRevPE where ZPE and ZrevPE are the setting reach for
the positive sequence impedance in forward respective reverse direction. The
vector ZPE in the impedance plane has the settable angle AngZPE and the angle for
ZRevPP is AngZPE+180.

The condition for operation at phase-to-earth fault is that the angle between the
two compensated voltages Ucomp1 and Ucomp2 is greater or equal to 90 see
figure 108. The angle will be 90 for fault location on the boundary of the circle.

The angle for L1-to-earth fault can be defined as

UL1- IL1L ZPE

b = arg
UL1-(- IL1 Z Re vPE )
EQUATION1802 V1 EN (Equation 65)

is the phase L1 voltage

U L1
EQUATION1
805 V1 EN

247
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

IL1L 2 jX

U comp1 = UL1 - I L1 ZPE

IL1 ZPE

UL1
U comp2 = UL1 - (-IL1 ZRevPE)
IL1L2 R

- I L1 Z Re vPe

en 06000465.vsd
IEC06000465 V1 EN

Figure 108: Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vector for phase L1-
to-earth fault

Operation occurs if 90270.

Offset mho, forward direction

In the same way as for phase-to-phase fault, selection of forward direction of offset
mho will introduce an extra criterion for operation. Beside the basic criteria for
offset mho according to equation 65 and 90270, also the criteria that the angle
between the voltage and the current must lie between the blinders in second and
fourth quadrant. See figure 109. Operation occurs if 90270 and
ArgDirArgNegRes.

where
ArgDir is the setting parameter for directional line in fourth quadrant in the directional element,
ZDMRDIR.
ArgNegRes is the setting parameter for directional line in second quadrant in the directional element,
ZDMRDIR.
is calculated according to equation 65

248
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

IL1 jX

UL1

ArgNegRes f

IL1 IL1R

ArgDir

en 06000466.vsd
IEC06000466 V1 EN

Figure 109: Simplified characteristic for offset mho in forward direction for L1-to-
earth fault

Offset mho, reverse direction

In the same way as for offset in forward direction, the selection of offset mho in
reverse direction will introduce an extra criterion for operation compare to the
normal offset mho. The extra is that the angle between the fault voltage and the
fault current shall lie between the blinders in second and fourth quadrant. The
operation area in second quadrant is limited by the blinder defined as 180 -ArgDir
and in fourth quadrant ArgNegRes+180, see figure 110.

The conditions for operation of offset mho in reverse direction for L1-to-earth fault
is 90270 and 180-ArgdirArgNegRes+180.

The is derived according to equation 65 for the offset mho circle and is the
angle between the voltage and current.

249
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

ZPE

ArgNegRes

IL
1
ArgDir R

UL1
ZRevPE

en06000470.eps
IEC06000470 V1 EN

Figure 110: Simplified characteristic for offset mho in reverse direction for L1-to-
earth fault

7.4.6.5 Simplified logic diagrams

Distance protection zones

The design of the distance protection zones are presented for all measuring loops:
phase-to-earth as well as phase-to-phase.

Phase-to-earth related signals are designated by L1N, L2N and L3N. The phase-to-
phase signals are designated by L1L2, L2L3, and L3L1.

Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one

logical signal for each separate measuring loop:

Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described

above.
Group functional input signal (STCND), as presented in figure 111.

The ZMHPDIS function block is used in the IED for each zone.

The STCND input signal represents a connection of six different integer values
from Phase selection with load encroachment function FMPSPDIS within the IED,

250
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

which are converted within the zone measuring function into corresponding
boolean expressions for each condition separately. Input signal STCND is
connected from FMPSPDIS function output signal STCNDPHS.

The input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the
distance measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both
forward and reverse direction. The zone measurement function filters out the
relevant signals depending on the setting of the parameter DirMode. Input signal
DIRCND must be configured to the STDIRCND output signal on ZDMRDIR
function.

OffsetMhoDir=
Non-directional
AND AND
DirMode=Offset

STCND T
AND F

AND
LoadEnchMode=
On/Off
LDCND
T
True F
AND Release

DIRCND

OffsetMhoDir=
Forward/Reverse
AND
DirMode=
Forward/Reverse

BLKZ
BLOCK OR

IEC11000216-1-en.vsd
IEC11000216 V1 EN

Figure 111: Simplified logic for release start signal

When load encroachment mode is switched on (LoadEnchMode=On), start signal

STCND is also checked against LDCND signal.

Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits when the zone
operates in directional (forward or reverse) mode, as shown in figure 111.

Composition of the phase start signals is presented in figure 69.

251
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

Release STPE
OR

AND
STL1N STL1
OR

AND
STL2N

AND
STL3N
STL2
OR
AND
STL1L2

AND
STL2L3
STL3
OR
AND
STL3L1

START
OR

STPP
OR

IEC11000217-1-en.vsd
IEC11000217 V1 EN

Figure 112: Composition of starting signals

Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented
in figure 71.

252
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

Timer tPP=On tPP

AND t
STPP
OR
Timer tPE=On tPE
AND t
STPE

15ms
AND TRIP
BLKTRIP t

STL1 AND TRL1

AND TRL2
STL2

STL3 AND TRL3

IEC11000218-1-en.vsd
IEC11000218 V1 EN

Figure 113: Tripping logic for the distance protection zone

Zone timer logic for the distance protection is symbolically presented in figure 114.

STPE

BLOCK
TRPE
&
tON
& 1 t
a
Internal a=b
start b STTIMER
&

Internal
a
a<b
start b
tON
1 t && TRPP
&

STPP
ZnTimerSel
FALSE 1 timers seperated

1 2 timers linked
internalCommonStart
3 internal start
phSelStart 4 start from phSel
externalCommonStart
5 external start

IEC12000463-3-en.vsd

IEC12000463 V2 EN

Figure 114: Zone timer logic

253
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

7.4.7 Technical data

Table 108: ZMHPDIS technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of zones, Ph-E Max 4 with selectable direction -
Minimum operate current (1030)% of IBase -
Positive sequence impedance, (0.0053000.000) W/phase 2.0% static accuracy
Ph-E loop Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Positive sequence impedance (1090) degrees
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
angle, Ph-E loop
Angle: 85 degrees
Reverse reach, Ph-E loop (0.0053000.000) /phase
(Magnitude)
Magnitude of earth return (0.003.00)
compensation factor KN
Angle for earth compensation (-180180) degrees
factor KN
Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees measured -
with CVTs and 0.5<SIR<30
Definite time delay Ph-Ph and Ph- (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 60 ms whichever is
E operation greater
Operate time 22 ms typically IEC 60255-121
Reset ratio 105% typically -
Reset time at 0.5 to 1.5 x Zreach Min = 30 ms -
Max = 45 ms

7.5 Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for

earth faults ZMMPDIS, ZMMAPDIS

7.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Fullscheme distance protection, ZMMPDIS 21
quadrilateral for earth faults (zone 1)

S00346 V1 EN

Fullscheme distance protection, ZMMAPDIS 21

quadrilateral for earth faults (zone 2-5)

S00346 V1 EN

254
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.5.2 Functionality
The distance protection is a , up to five zone protection with three fault loops for
phase-to-earth- fault for each of the independent zones. Individual settings for each
zone resistive and reactive reach give flexibility for use on overhead lines and
cables of different types and lengths.

The Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth fault functions

ZMMDPIS and ZMMAPDIS have functionality for load encroachment, which
increases the possibility to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines.

The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together with a
sensitive and reliable built in phase selection makes the function suitable in
applications with single phase auto-reclosing.

Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of zone1 at

load exporting end at phase to earth- faults on heavily loaded power lines.

The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional
(forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together
with different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables
in complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines.

7.5.3 Function block

ZMMPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRL1
BLOCK TRL2
BLKZ TRL3
BLKTR START
STCND STL1
DIRCND STL2
STL3
STND

IEC06000454-2-en.vsd
IEC06000454 V2 EN

Figure 115: ZMMPDIS function block

ZMMAPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRL1
BLOCK TRL2
BLKZ TRL3
BLKTR START
STCND STL1
DIRCND STL2
STL3
STND

IEC09000947-1-en.vsd
IEC09000947 V1 EN

Figure 116: ZMMAPDIS function block

255
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

7.5.4 Signals
Table 109: ZMMPDIS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKZ BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all output by fuse failure signal
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all trip outputs
STCND INTEGER 0 External start condition (loop enabler)
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition

Table 110: ZMMPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
START BOOLEAN General Start, issued from any phase or loop
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
STND BOOLEAN Non-directional start, issued from any phase or
loop

Table 111: ZMMAPDIS Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKZ BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all output by fuse failure signal
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all trip outputs
STCND INTEGER 0 External start condition (loop enabler)
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition

256
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

Table 112: ZMMAPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
START BOOLEAN General Start, issued from any phase or loop
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
STND BOOLEAN Non-directional start, issued from any phase or
loop

7.5.5 Settings
Table 113: ZMMPDIS Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationDir Non-directional - - Forward Operation mode of directionality NonDir /
Forward Forw / Rev
Reverse
X1 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach
R1 0.10 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle
X0 0.50 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 100.00 Zero sequence reactance reach
R0 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle
RFPE 1.00 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-E
OpModetPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-E
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-E
IMinOpPE 10 - 30 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpIN 5 - 30 %IB 1 5 Minimum operate residual current for
Phase-Earth loops

Table 114: ZMMPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

257
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

Table 115: ZMMAPDIS Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationDir Non-directional - - Forward Operation mode of directionality NonDir /
Forward Forw / Rev
Reverse
X1 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach
R1 0.10 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle
X0 0.50 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach
R0 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle
RFPE 1.00 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-E
OpModetPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-E
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-E
IMinOpPE 10 - 30 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops

Table 116: ZMMAPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

7.5.6 Operation principle

7.5.6.1 Full scheme measurement

The different fault loops within the IED are operating in parallel in the same
principle as a full scheme measurement.

Figure 117 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the basic five,
impedance-measuring zones l.

258
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

L1-N L2-N L3-N Zone 1

L1-N L2-N L3-N Zone 2

L1-N L2-N L3-N Zone 3

L1-N L2-N L3-N Zone 4

L1-N L2-N L3-N Zone 5

en07000080.vsd
IEC07000080 V1 EN

Figure 117: The different measuring loops at line-earth fault and phase-phase
fault.

7.5.6.2 Impedance characteristic

The distance measuring zone include three impedance measuring loops; one fault
loop for each phase.

The distance measuring zone will essentially operate according to the non-
directional impedance characteristics presented in Figure 118. The characteristic is
illustrated with the full loop reach.

259
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

X (Ohm/loop)

R1PE+Rn

RFPE RFPE

X0PE-X1PE
Xn =
3
X1PE+Xn R0PE-R1PE
Rn =
3
jN jN
R (Ohm/loop)

RFPE RFPE

X1PE+Xn

RFPE RFPE
en08000280-2-en.vsd

R1PE+Rn
IEC08000280 V1 EN

Figure 118: Characteristic for the phase-to-earth measuring loops, ohm/loop

domain.

The fault loop reach may also be presented as in Figure 119.

ILn R1 + j X1
Phase-to-earth
UL1
element

Phase-to-earth
fault in phase L1 RFPE
(Arc + tower
resistance)

0
IN (R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 ) en06000412.vsd
IEC06000412 V1 EN

Figure 119: Fault loop model

260
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

The R1 and jX1 in Figure 119 represent the positive sequence impedance from the
measuring point to the fault location. The RFPE is presented in order to convey
the fault resistance reach.

The zone may be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward, Off or Reverse

direction through the setting OperationDir. The result from respective set value is
illustrated in Figure 120. The impedance reach is symmetric, in the sense that it is
conform for forward and reverse direction. Therefore, all reach settings apply to
both directions.

X X X

R R R

Non-directional Forward Reverse

en05000182.vsd
IEC05000182 V1 EN

Figure 120: Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zone

7.5.6.3 Minimum operating current

The operation of the distance measuring zone is blocked if the magnitude of input
currents fall below certain threshold values.

The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn < IMinOpPE.

For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all
phase-to-earth loops will be blocked when IN < IMinOpIN, regardless of the phase
currents.

ILn is the RMS value of the current in phase Ln. IN is the RMS value of the vector
sum of the three phase currents, that is, residual current 3I0.

Both current limits IMinOpPE and IMinOpIN are automatically

reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set to operate in
reverse direction, that is, OperationDir=Reverse.

261
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

7.5.6.4 Measuring principles

Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the
current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits.

Here U and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the
respective phase Ln (n = 1, 2, 3).

The calculation of the apparant impedances at phase-to-earth fault follow equation

66

The earth return compensation applies in a conventional manner.

U L1
Z app =
I L1 + I N KN
EQUATION1223 V2 EN (Equation 66)

Where:
UL1, IL1 and IN are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED
KN is defined as:

Z 0 - Z1
KN =
3 Z1
EQUATION-2105 V2 EN

Z 0 = R 0 + jX 0
EQUATION2106 V2 EN

Z 1 = R1 + jX 1
EQUATION2107 V2 EN

Where
R0 is setting of the resistive zero sequence reach
X0 is setting of the reactive zero sequence reach
R1 is setting of the resistive positive sequence reach
X1 is setting of the reactive positive sequence reach

Here IN is a phasor of the residual current in IED point. This results in the same
reach along the line for all types of faults.

The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and

reactance X.

262
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

The formula given in equation 66 is only valid for no loaded radial feeder
applications. When load is considered in the case of single phase-to-earth fault,
conventional distance protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach
at importing end. IED has an adaptive load compensation which increases the
security in such applications.

Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D
converter. The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is
distributed into memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops,
sampled values of voltage (U), current (I), and changes in current between samples
(DI) are brought from the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter.

The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related
to the loop impedance according to equation 67,

X Di
U = R i + ------ -----
w 0 Dt
EQUATION1224 V1 EN (Equation 67)

in complex notation, or:

X D Re ( I )
Re ( U ) = R Re ( I ) + ------ ------------------
w0 Dt

EQUATION354 V1 EN (Equation 68)

X DIm ( I )
Im ( U ) = R Im ( I ) + ------ -----------------
w0 Dt

EQUATION355 V1 EN (Equation 69)

with

w0 = 2 p f 0
EQUATION356 V1 EN (Equation 70)

where:
Re designates the real component of current and voltage,
Im designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and
f0 designates the rated system frequency

The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real
value of the voltage and substitute it in the equation for the imaginary part. The
equation for the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is equal
to:

263
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

Im ( U ) DRe ( I ) Re ( U ) D Im ( I )
R m = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DRe ( I ) Im ( I ) D Im ( I ) Re ( I )
EQUATION357 V1 EN (Equation 71)

Re ( U ) Im ( I ) Im ( U ) Re ( I )
Xm = w 0 Dt -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DRe ( I ) Im ( I ) DIm ( I ) Re ( I )
EQUATION358 V1 EN (Equation 72)

The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the
set zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive
tripping results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the
capacitive voltage transformers or by other factors.

The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and

reverse directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase
locked positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures
unlimited directional sensitivity for faults close to the IED point.

7.5.6.5 Directionality

The evaluation of the directionality takes place in the Directional impedance

element for mho characteristic ZDMRDIR function. Equation 73 is used to classify
that the fault is in forward direction for line-to-earth fault.

0.85 U1L1 + 0.15 U1L1M

- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1
EQUATION1617 V1 EN (Equation 73)

where:
ArgDir is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default
set to 15 (= -15 degrees) and
ArgNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default
set to 115 degrees, see figure 121.
U1L1 is positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1

U1L1M is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1

IL1 is phase current in phase L1

The setting of ArgDir and ArgNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115
degrees respectively (see figure 121) and it should not be changed unless system
studies have shown the necessity.

ZDMRDIR gives a binary coded signal on the output STDIRCND depending on

the evaluation where STFWL1N=1 adds 1, STRVL1N=1 adds 2, STFWL2N=1
adds 4 etc.

264
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

ArgNegRes

ArgDir
R

en05000722.vsd
IEC05000722 V1 EN

Figure 121: Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault

The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated

by 180 degrees.

The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage

exceeds 5% of the set base voltage UBase. So the directional element can use it for
all unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.

For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same
positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.

The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is
restored.

After 100 ms, the following occurs:

If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current
(between 10 and 30% of the set IED rated current IBase), the condition seals in.
If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.
If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element
in the reverse direction remains in operation.
If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory
resets until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.

265
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

7.5.6.6 Simplified logic diagrams

Distance protection zones

The design of distance protection zone 1 is presented for all measuring phase-to-
earth loops.

Phase-to-earth related signals are designated by LnE, where n represents the

corresponding phase number (L1E, L2E, and L3E).

Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one

logical signal for each separate measuring loop:

Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described

above.
Group functional input signal (STCND), as presented in figure 122.

The STCND input signal represents a connection of six different integer values
from the phase selection function within the IED, which are converted within the
zone measuring function into corresponding boolean expressions for each
condition separately. It is connected to the Phase selection with load
enchroachment, quadrilateral characteristic (FDPSPDIS) function output STCNDZ.

The input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the
distance measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both
forward and reverse direction. The zone measurement function filter out the
relevant signals on the DIRCND input depending on the setting of the parameter
OperationDir. It shall be configured to the DIRCND output on the Directional
impedance element for mho characteristic (ZDMRDIR) function.

266
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

STCND

AND STNDL1N
L1N

AND STNDL2N
L2N

STNDL3N
L3N AND

OR STNDPE

OR
BLKZ STND
OR AND
BLOCK
BLK

en06000408-2.vsd
IEC06000408 V2 EN

Figure 122: Conditioning by a group functional input signal STCND

Composition of the phase starting signals for a case, when the zone operates in a non-
directional mode, is presented in figure 123.

STNDL1N 15 ms
AND t STL1

STNDL2N 15 ms
AND t STL2

STNDL3N 15 ms
AND t STL3

15 ms
AND t START
OR

BLK

en06000409.vsd
IEC06000409 V1 EN

Figure 123: Composition of starting signals in non-directional operating mode

Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone
operates in directional (forward or reverse) mode, see figure 124.

267
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

STNDL1N
DIRL1N AND
OR STZMPE.
&
STNDL2N
DIRL2N AND

STNDL3N 15 ms
STL1
& t
DIRL3N AND

15 ms
STL2
& t

15 ms
STL3
& t

BLK

15 ms
OR START
& t

en07000081.vsd
IEC07000081 V1 EN

Figure 124: Composition of starting signals in directional operating mode

Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented
in figure 125.

Timer tPE=On tPE

AND t
STZMPE
15ms
BLKTR AND t
TRIP

STL1 AND TRL1

STL2 AND TRL2

STL3 AND TRL3

en07000082.vsd
IEC07000082 V1 EN

Figure 125: Tripping logic for the distance protection zone one

268
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.5.7 Technical data

Table 117: ZMMPDIS technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of zones Max 5 with selectable direction -
Minimum operate current (10-30)% of IBase -
Positive sequence reactance (0.50-3000.00) W/phase 2.0% static accuracy
2.0 degrees static angular
Positive sequence resistance (0.10-1000.00) /phase accuracy
Zero sequence reactance (0.50-9000.00) /phase Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Zero sequence resistance (0.50-3000.00) /phase Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Fault resistance, Ph-E (1.00-9000.00) W/loop Angle: at 0 degrees and 85
degrees
Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees measured -
with CCVTs and 0.5<SIR<30
Definite time delay Ph-Ph and Ph- (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 40 ms whichever
E operation is greater
Operate time 25 ms typically IEC 60255-121
Reset ratio 105% typically -
Reset time at 0.1 to 2 x Zreach Min = 20 ms -
Max = 35 ms

7.6 Directional impedance element for mho

characteristic and additional distance protection
directional function for earth faults ZDMRDIR,
ZDARDIR

7.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Directional impedance element for mho ZDMRDIR 21D
characteristic

S00346 V1 EN

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Additional distance protection ZDARDIR -
directional function for earth faults

S00346 V1 EN

269
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

7.6.2 Functionality
The phase-to-earth impedance elements can be supervised by a phase unselective
directional function based on symmetrical components (option).

7.6.3 Function block

ZDMRDIR
I3P* DIR_CURR
U3P* DIR_VOLT
DIR_POL
STFW
STRV
STDIRCND

IEC06000422_2_en.vsd
IEC06000422 V2 EN

Figure 126: ZDMRDIR function block

ZDARDIR
I3P* STFWPE
U3P* STRVPE
I3PPOL* DIREFCND
DIRCND

IEC06000425-2-en.vsd
IEC06000425 V2 EN

Figure 127: ZDARDIR function block

7.6.4 Signals
Table 118: ZDMRDIR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL

Table 119: ZDMRDIR Output signals

Name Type Description
CURR GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for current signals to Mho function
VOLT GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for voltage signals to Mho function
POL GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for polarization voltage signals to
Mho function
STFW BOOLEAN Start in forward direction
STRV BOOLEAN Start in reverse direction
STDIRCND INTEGER Binary coded directional information per
measuring loop

270
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

Table 120: ZDARDIR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Current signals
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage signals
SIGNAL
I3PPOL GROUP - Polarisation current signals
SIGNAL
DIRCND INTEGER 0 Binary coded directional signal

Table 121: ZDARDIR Output signals

Name Type Description
STFWPE BOOLEAN Forward start signal from phase-to-ground
directional element
STRVPE BOOLEAN Reverse start signal from phase-to-ground
directional element
DIREFCND INTEGER Start direction Binary coded

7.6.5 Settings
Table 122: ZDMRDIR Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
DirEvalType Impedance - - Comparator Directional evaluation mode Impedance /
Comparator Comparator
Imp/Comp
ArgNegRes 90 - 175 Deg 1 115 Angle of blinder in second quadrant for
forward direction
ArgDir 5 - 45 Deg 1 15 Angle of blinder in fourth quadrant for
forward direction
IMinOpPE 5 - 30 %IB 1 5 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpPP 5 - 30 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase-phase current
for Phase-Phase loops

Table 123: ZDMRDIR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

271
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

Table 124: ZDARDIR Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
PolMode -3U0 - - -3U0 Polarization quantity for opt dir function
-U2 for P-E faults
IPol
Dual
-3U0Comp
-U2comp
AngleRCA -90 - 90 Deg 1 75 Characteristic relay angle (= MTA or
base angle)
I> 5 - 200 %IB 1 5 Minimum operation current in % of IBase
UPol> 4 - 100 %UB 1 4 Minimum polarizing voltage in % of UBase
IPol> 5 - 100 %IB 1 10 Minimum polarizing current in % of IBase

Table 125: ZDARDIR Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
AngleOp 90 - 180 Deg 1 160 Operation sector angle
Kmag 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm 0.01 40.00 Boost-factor in -U0comp and -U2comp
polarization

Table 126: ZDARDIR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

7.6.6 Monitored data

Table 127: ZDMRDIR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
L1Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L1
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L2Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L2
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L3Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L3
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L1R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L1
L1X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L1
L2R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L2
L2X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L2
L3R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L3
L3X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L3

272
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.6.7 Operation principle

7.6.7.1 Directional impedance element for mho characteristic ZDMRDIR

The evaluation of the directionality takes place in Directional impedance element

for mho characteristic (ZDMRDIR). Equation 74 and equation 75 are used to
classify that the fault is in the forward direction for phase-to-earth fault and phase-
to-phase fault respectively.

0.85 U1L1 + 0.15 U1L1M

- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1
EQUATION1617 V1 EN (Equation 74)

0.85 U1L1L 2 + 0.15 U1L1L 2 M

- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1L 2
EQUATION1619 V1 EN (Equation 75)

Where:
ArgDir Setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to
15 (= -15 degrees)
ArgNegRes Setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to
115 degrees, see figure 128 for mho characteristics.
U1L1 Positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1

U1L1M Positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1

IL1 Phase current in phase L1

U1L1L2 Voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)

U1L1L2M Memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)

IL1L2 Current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)

The default settings for ArgDir and ArgNegRes are 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees
respectively (see figure 128) and they should not be changed unless system studies
show the necessity.

If one sets DirEvalType to Comparator (which is recommended when using the

mho characteristic) then the directional lines are computed by means of a comparator-
type calculation, meaning that the directional lines are based on mho-circles (of
infinite radius). The default setting value Impedance otherwise means that the
directional lines are implemented based on an impedance calculation equivalent to
the one used for the quadrilateral impedance characteristics.

When Directional impedance element for mho characteristic

(ZDMRDIR) is used together with Fullscheme distance protection,
mho characteristic (ZMHPDIS) the following settings for
parameter DirEvalType is vital:
273
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

alternative Comparator is strongly recommended

alternative Imp/Comp should generally not be used
alternative Impedance should not be used. This altenative is
intended for use together with Distance protection zone,
quadrilateral characteristic (ZMQPDIS)

X
Zset reach point

ArgNegRes

-ArgDir R

-Zs
en06000416.vsd

IEC06000416 V1 EN

Figure 128: Setting angles for discrimination of forward fault

The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated

by 180 degrees.

The code built up for release of the measuring fault loops is as follows:
STDIRCND = L1N*1 + L2N*2 + L3N*4 + L1L2*8 + L2L3*16 + L3L1*32

Example: If only L1N start, the value is 1, if start in L1N and L3N are detected, the
value is 1+4=5.

The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage

exceeds 5% of the set base voltage UBase, thus the directional element can use it
for all unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.

For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same
positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.

The memory voltage is used for 100ms or until the positive sequence voltage is
restored. After 100ms, the following occurs:

If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current the
condition seals in.

274
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

If the fault has caused tripping, the trip continues.

If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element
in the reverse direction remains in operation.
If the current decreases below the minimum operate value, no directional
indications will be given until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of
its rated value.

The Directional impedance element for mho characteristic (ZDMRDIR) function

has the following output signals:

The STDIRCND output provides an integer signal that depends on the evaluation
and is derived from a binary coded signal as follows:

bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6

(2048) (1024) (512) (256) (128) (64)
STRVL3L1= STRVL2L3= STRVL1L2= STRVL3N=1 STRVL2N=1 STRVL1N=1
1 1 1
bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
(32) (16) (8) (4) (2) (1)
STFWL3L1= STFWL2L3= STFWL1L2= STFWL3N=1 STFWL2N=1 STFWL1N=1
1 1 1

The STFW output is a logical signal with value 1 or 0. It is made up as an OR-

function of all the forward starting conditions, that is, STFWL1N, STFWL2N,
STFWL3N, STFWL1L2, STFWL2L3 and STFWL3L1. The STRV output is
similar to the STFW output, the only difference being that it is made up as an OR-
function of all the reverse starting conditions, that is, STRVL1N, STRVL2N,
STRVL3N, STRVL1L2, STRVL2L3 and STRVL3L1.

Values for the following parameters are calculated, and may be viewed as service
values:

resistance phase L1
reactance phase L1
resistance phase L2
reactance phase L2
resistance phase L3
reactance phase L3
direction phase L1
direction phase L2
direction phase L3

7.6.7.2 Additional distance protection directional function for earth faults

ZDARDIR

A Mho element needs a polarizing voltage to operate. The positive-sequence memory-

polarized elements are generally preferred. The benefits include:

275
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

The greatest amount of expansion for improved resistive coverage. These

elements always expand back to the source.
Memory action for all fault types. This is very important for close-in three-
phase faults.
A common polarizing reference for all six distance-measuring loops. This is
important for single-pole tripping, during a pole-open period.

There are however some situations that can cause security problems like reverse
phase to phase faults and double phase-to-earth faults during high load periods. To
solve these, additional directional element is used.

For phase-to-earth faults, directional elements using sequence components are very
reliable for directional discrimination. The directional element can be based on one
of following types of polarization:

Zero-sequence voltage
Negative-sequence voltage
Zero-sequence current

These additional directional criteria are evaluated in the Additional distance

protection directional function for earth faults (ZDARDIR).

Zero-sequence voltage polarization is utilizing the phase relation between the zero-
sequence voltage and the zero-sequence current at the location of the protection.
The measurement principle is illustrated in figure 129.

- 3U 0

AngleOp
AngleRCA

3I 0

en06000417.vsd
IEC06000417 V1 EN

Figure 129: Principle for zero-sequence voltage polarized additional directional

element

Negative-sequence voltage polarization is utilizing the phase relation between the

negative-sequence voltage and the negative-sequence current at the location of the
protection.

276
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

Zero-sequence current polarization is utilizing the phase relation between the zero-
sequence current at the location of the protection and some reference zero-
sequence current, for example, the current in the neutral of a power transformer.

The principle of zero-sequence voltage polarization with zero-sequence current

compensation is described in figure 130. The same also applies for the negative-
sequence function.

Z0 SA I0 I0
Z0 Line Z0 SB
Charac te ris tic
ang le
U0 U0
K*I0

U0 + K*I0
IF
en06000418.vsd
IEC06000418 V1 EN

Figure 130: Principle for zero sequence compensation

Note that the sequence based additional directional element cannot give per phase
information about direction to fault. This is why it is an AND-function with the
normal directional element that works on a per phase base. The enable signals are
per phase and to enable the measuring element in a specific phase, both the
additional directional element and the normal directional element, for that phase
must indicate correct direction.

These polarization quantities, voltage and current, are stabilized against minimum
polarizing voltage (UPOL>) and current (IPOL>). That means if polarizing voltage
is greater than UPOL> setting, and if polarizing current is greater than IPol>, then
only they are used for direction determination.

Normal
directional Release of distance
element measuring element
L1N, L2N, L3N L1N, L2N, L3N
AND

Additional
directional AND per
element phase

en06000419.vsd
IEC06000419 V1 EN

Figure 131: Earth distance element directional supervision

277
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

7.7 Mho impedance supervision logic ZSMGAPC

7.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Mho Impedance supervision logic ZSMGAPC - -

7.7.2 Functionality
The Mho impedance supervision logic (ZSMGAPC) includes features for fault
inception detection and high SIR detection. It also includes the functionality for
loss of potential logic as well as for the pilot channel blocking scheme.

ZSMGAPC can mainly be decomposed in two different parts:

1. A fault inception detection logic

2. High SIR detection logic

7.7.3 Function block

ZSMGAPC
I3P* BLKZMTD
U3P* BLKCHST
BLOCK CHSTOP
REVSTART HSIR
BLOCKCS
CBOPEN

IEC06000426-2-en.vsd
IEC06000426 V2 EN

Figure 132: ZSMGAPC function block

7.7.4 Signals
Table 128: ZSMGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase current samples and DFT magnitude
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Three phase phase-neutral voltage samples and
SIGNAL DFT magnitude
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of the function
REVSTART BOOLEAN 0 Indication of reverse start
BLOCKCS BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the blocking carrier signal to remote end
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Indicates that the breaker is open

278
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

Table 129: ZSMGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
BLKZMTD BOOLEAN Block signal for blocking of time domained mho
BLKCHST BOOLEAN Blocking signal to remote end to block
overreaching zone
CHSTOP BOOLEAN Stops the blocking signal to remote end
HSIR BOOLEAN Indication of source impedance ratio above set limit

7.7.5 Settings
Table 130: ZSMGAPC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
PilotMode Off - - Off Pilot mode Off/On
On
Zreach 0.1 - 3000.0 Ohm 0.1 38.0 Line impedance
IMinOp 10 - 30 %IB 1 20 Minimum operating current for SIR
measurement

Table 131: ZSMGAPC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
DeltaI 0 - 200 %IB 1 10 Current change level in % of IBase for
fault inception detection
Delta3I0 0 - 200 %IB 1 10 Zero seq current change level in % of
IBase
DeltaU 0 - 100 %UB 1 5 Voltage change level in % of UBase for
fault inception detection
Delta3U0 0 - 100 %UB 1 5 Zero seq voltage change level in % of
UBase
SIRLevel 5 - 15 - 1 10 Settable level for source impedance ratio

Table 132: ZSMGAPC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

7.7.6 Operation principle

7.7.6.1 Fault inception detection

The aim for the fault inception detector is to detect quickly that a fault has occurred
on the system.

279
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

The fault inception detection detects instantaneous changes in any phase currents
or zero sequence current in combination with a change in the corresponding phase
voltage or zero sequence voltage. If the change of any phase current and
corresponding phase voltage or 3U0 and 3I0 exceeds the settings DeltaI and
DeltaU respectively. Delta3U0 and Delta3I0 and the input signal BLOCK is not
activated, the output signal FLTDET is activated indicating that a system fault has
occurred.

If the setting PilotMode is set to On in blocking scheme and the fault inception
function has detected a system fault, a block signal BLKCHST is issued and send to
remote end in order to block the overreaching zones. Different criteria has to be
fulfilled for sending the BLKCHST signal:

1. The setting PilotMode has to be set to On

2. The breaker has to be closed, that is, the input signal CBCLOSE has to be activated
3. A reverse fault should have been detected while the carrier send signal is not
blocked, that is, input signal REVSTART is activated and input signal
BLOCKCS is not activated

Or

A fault inception is detected

If it is later detected that it was an internal fault that made the function issue the
BLKCHST signal, the function issues a CHSTOP signal to unblock the remote end.
The criteria that have to be fulfilled for this are:

1. The function has to be in pilot mode, that is, the setting PilotMode has to be
set to On
2. The carrier send signal should be blocked, that is, input signal BLOCKCS is On
and,
3. A reverse fault should not have been detected while the carrier send signal was
not blocked, that is, input signals REVSTART and BLOCKCS are not activated.

ZSMGAPC function has a built in loss of voltage detection based on the evaluation
of the change in phase voltage or the change in zero sequence voltage (3U0). It
operates if the change in phase voltages exceeds the setting DeltaU or 3U0 exceeds
the setting Delta3U0.

If loss of voltage is detected, but not a fault inception, the distance protection
function is blocked. This is also the case if a fuse failure is detected by the external
fuse failure function and activate the input FUSEFAIL. Those blocks are generated
by activating the output BLKZ, which are connected to the input BLKZ on the
distance Mho function block.

During fault inception a lot of transients are developed which in turn might cause
the distance function to overreach. The Mho supervision logic (ZSMGAPC)
increases the filtering during the most transient period of the fault. This is done by

280
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

activating the output BLKZMD, which is connected to the input BLKZMTD on mho
distance function block.

High SIR detection

High SIR values increases the likelihood that CVT will introduce a prolonged and
distorted transient, increasing the risk for overreach of the distance function.

The SIR function calculates the SIR value as the source impedance divided by the
setting Zreach and activates the output signal HSIR if the calculated value for any
of the six basic shunt faults exceed the setting SIRLevel. The HSIR signal is
intended to block the delta based mho impedance function.

7.8 Faulty phase identification with load encroachment

FMPSPDIS

7.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Faulty phase identification with load FMPSPDIS 21
encroachment for mho

S00346 V1 EN

7.8.2 Functionality
The ability to accurately and reliably classify different types of fault so that single
phase tripping and autoreclosing can be used plays an important roll in today's
power systems.

The phase selection function is design to accurately select the proper fault loop(s)
in the distance function dependent on the fault type.

The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may in
some cases interfere with the distance protection zone reach and cause unwanted
operation. Therefore the function has a built in algorithm for load encroachment,
which gives the possibility to enlarge the resistive setting of the measuring zones
without interfering with the load.

The output signals from the phase selection function produce important
information about faulty phase(s), which can be used for fault analysis as well.

281
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

7.8.3 Function block

FMPSPDIS
I3P* STL1
U3P* STL2
BLOCK STL3
ZSTART STPE
TR3PH STCNDPHS
1POLEAR STCNDPLE
STCNDLE
START

IEC06000429-2-en.vsd
IEC06000429 V2 EN

Figure 133: FMPSPDIS function block

7.8.4 Signals
Table 133: FMPSPDIS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
ZSTART BOOLEAN 0 Start from underimpdeance function
TR3PH BOOLEAN 0 Three phase tripping initiated
1POLEAR BOOLEAN 0 Single pole autoreclosing in progress

Table 134: FMPSPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
STL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L3
STPE BOOLEAN Earth fault detected
STCNDPHS INTEGER Binary coded starts from phase selection
STCNDPLE INTEGER Binary coded starts from ph sel with load
encroachment
STCNDLE INTEGER Binary coded starts from load encroachment only
START BOOLEAN Indicates that something has started

282
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.8.5 Settings
Table 135: FMPSPDIS Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IMaxLoad 10 - 5000 %IB 1 200 Maximum load for identification of three
phase fault in % of IBase
RLd 1.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 80.00 Load encroachment resistive reach in
ohm/phase
ArgLd 5 - 70 Deg 1 20 Load encroachment inclination of load
angular sector

Table 136: FMPSPDIS Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
DeltaIMinOp 5 - 100 %IB 1 10 Delta current level in % of IBase
DeltaUMinOp 5 - 100 %UB 1 20 Delta voltage level in % of UBase
U1Level 5 - 100 %UB 1 80 Pos seq voltage limit for identification of 3-
ph fault
I1LowLevel 5 - 200 %IB 1 10 Pos seq current level for identification of
3-ph fault in % of IBase
U1MinOp 5 - 100 %UB 1 20 Minimum operate positive sequence
voltage for ph sel
U2MinOp 1 - 100 %UB 1 5 Minimum operate negative sequence
voltage for ph sel
INRelPE 10 - 100 %IB 1 20 3I0 limit for release ph-e measuring
loops in % of max phase current
INBlockPP 10 - 100 %IB 1 40 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase
measuring loops in % of max phase
current

Table 137: FMPSPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

7.8.6 Operation principle

7.8.6.1 The phase selection function

Faulty phase identification with load encroachment for mho (FMPSPDIS) function
can be decomposed into six different parts:

1. A high speed delta based current phase selector

2. A high speed delta based voltage phase selector
3. A symmetrical components based phase selector

283
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

4. Fault evaluation and selection logic

5. A load encroachment logic
6. A blinder logic

The total function can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK.

Delta based current and voltages

The delta based fault detection function uses adaptive technique and is based on
patent US4409636.

The aim of the delta based phase selector is to provide very fast and reliable phase
selection for releasing of tripping from the high speed Mho measuring element and
is essential to Directional Comparison Blocking scheme (DCB), which uses Power
Line Carrier (PLC) communication system along the protected line.

The current and voltage samples for each phase passes through a notch filter that
filters out the fundamental components. Under steady state load conditions or when
no fault is present, the output of the filter is zero or close to zero. When a fault
occurs, currents and voltages change resulting in sudden changes in the currents
and voltages resulting in non-fundamental waveforms being introduced on the line.
At this point the notch filter produces significant non-zero output. The filter output
is processed by the delta function. The algorithm uses an adaptive relationship
between phases to determine if a fault has occurred, and determines the faulty phases.

The current and voltage delta based phase selector gives a real output signal if the
following criterion is fulfilled (only phase L1 shown):

Max(UL1,UL2,UL3)>DeltaUMinOp

Max(IL1,IL2,IL3)>DeltaIMinOp

where:
UL1, UL2 and UL3 are the voltage change between sample t and sample t-1
DeltaUMinOp and DeltaIMinOp are the minimum harmonic level settings for the voltage and current
filters to decide that a fault has occurred. A slow evolving fault may not
produce sufficient harmonics to detect the fault; however, in such a
case speed is no longer the issue and the sequence components
phase selector will operate.

The delta voltages ULn and delta current ILn (n index for phase order) are the
voltage and current between sample t and sample t-1.

The delta phase selector employs adaptive techniques to determine the fault type.
The logic determines the fault type by summing up all phase values and dividing
by the largest value. Both voltages and currents are filtered out and evaluated. The
condition for fault type classification for the voltages and currents can be expressed
as:

284
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

FaulType =
( UL1, UL2, UL3)
MAX ( UL1, UL 2, UL3)
EQUATION1621 V2 EN (Equation 76)

FaulType =
( IL1, IL2, IL3)
MAX ( IL1, IL 2, IL3)
EQUATION1622 V2 EN (Equation 77)

The value of FaultType for different shunt faults are as follows:

Under ideal conditions: (Patent pending)

Single phase-to-earth; FaultType=1
Phase-to-phase fault FaultType=2
Three-phase fault; FaultType=3

The output signal is 1 for single phase-to-earth fault, 2 for phase-to-phase fault and
3 for three-phase fault. At this point the filter does not know if earth was involved
or not.

Typically there are induced harmonics in the non-faulted lines that will affect the
result. This method allows for a significant tolerance in the evaluation of FaultType
over its entire range.

When a single phase-to-earth fault has been detected, the logic determines the
largest quantity, and asserts that phase. If phase-to-phase fault is detected, the two
largest phase quantities will be detected and asserted as outputs.

The faults detected by the delta based phase selector are coordinated in a separate
block. Different phases of faults may be detected at slightly different times due to
differences in the angles of incidence of fault on the wave shape. Therefore the
output is forced to wait a certain time by means of a timer. If the timer expires, and
a fault is detected in one phase only, the fault is deemed as phase-to-earth. This
way a premature single phase-to-earth fault detection is not released for a phase-to-
phase fault. If, however, earth current is detected before the timer expires, the phase-
to-earth fault is released sooner.

If another phase picks up during the time delay, the wait time is reduced by a
certain amount. Each detection of either phase-to-earth or additional phases further
reduce the initial time delay and allow the delta phase selector output to be faster.
There is no time delay if all three phases are faulty.

The delta function is released if the input DELTAREL is activated at the same time
as input DELTABLK is not activated. Activating the DELTABLK input blocks the
delta function. The release signal has an internal pulse timer of 100 ms. When the
DELTAREL signal has disappeared the delta logic is reset. In order not to get too
abrupt change, the reset is decayed in pre-defined steps.

285
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

Symmetrical component based phase selector

The symmetrical component phase selector uses preprocessed calculated sequence
voltages and currents as inputs. It also uses sampled values of the phase currents.
All the symmetrical quantities mentioned further in this section are with reference
to phase L1.

The function is made up of four main parts:

A Detection of the presence of earth fault

B A phase-to-phase logic block based on U1/U2 angle relationship

C A phase-to-earth component based on patent US5390067 where the angle relationships

between U2/I0 and U2/U1 is evaluated to determine earth fault or phase- to-phase to earth fault

D Logic for detection of three-phase fault

Presence of earth-fault detection

This detection of earth fault is performed in two levels, first by evaluation of the
magnitude of zero sequence current, and secondly by the evaluation of the zero and
negative sequence voltage. It is a complement to the earth-fault signal built-in in
the Symmetrical component based phase selector.

The complementary based zero-sequence current function evaluates the presence of

earth fault by calculating the 3I0 and comparing the result with the setting
parameter INRelPE. The output signal is used to release the earth-fault loop. It is a
complement to the earth-fault signal built-in in the sequence based phase selector.
The condition for releasing the phase-to-earth loop is as follows:

The output from this detection is used to release the earth-fault loop.

|3I0|>maxIph INRelPE

where:
|3I0| is the magnitude of the zero sequence current 3I0

maxIph is the maximum magnitude of the phase currents

INRelPE is a setting parameter for the relation between the magnitude of 3I0 and the
maximum phase current

The earth-fault loop is also released if the evaluation of the zero sequence current
by the main sequence function meets the following conditions:

|3I0|>IBase 0.5

|3I0|>maxIph INRelPE

where:
maxIph is the maximal current magnitude found in any of the three phases
INRelPE is the setting of 3I0 limit for release of phase-to-earth measuring loop in % of IBase
IBase is the global setting of the base current (A)

286
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

In systems where the source impedance for zero sequence is high the change of
zero sequence current may not be significant and the above detection may fail. In
those cases the detection enters the second level, with evaluation of zero and
negative sequence voltage. The release of the earth-fault loops can then be
achieved if all of the following conditions are fulfilled:

|3U0|>|U2| 0.5

|3U0|>|U1| 0.2

|U1|> UBase 0.2/(3)

and

3I0<0.1 IBase

or

3I0<maxIph INRelPE

where:
3U0 is the magnitude of the zero sequence voltage

U2 is the magnitude of the negative sequence voltage at the relay measuring point

k5 is design parameter
ILmax is the maximal phase current
IMinOp is the setting of minimum operate phase current in % of IBase

Phase-to-phase fault detection

The detection of phase-to-phase fault is performed by evaluation of the angle
difference between the sequence voltages U2 and U1.

IEC06000383-2-en.vsd
IEC06000383 V2 EN

Figure 134: Definition of fault sectors for phase-to-phase fault

287
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

The phase-to-phase loop for the faulty phases will be determined if the angle
between the sequence voltages U2 and U1 lies within the sector defined according
to figure 134 and the following conditions are fulfilled:

|U1|>U1MinOP

|U2|>U2MinOp

where:
U1MinOP and U2MinOp are the setting parameters for positive sequence and negative sequence
minimum operate voltages

The positive sequence voltage U1L1 in figure 134 above is reference.

If there is a three-phase fault, there will not be any release of the individual phase
signals, even if the general conditions for U2 and U1 are fulfilled.

Phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase-to-earth-fault detection

The detection of phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase-to-earth fault (US patent
5390067) is based on two conditions:

1. Angle relationship between U2 and I0

2. Angle relationship between U2 and U1

The condition 1 determines faulty phase at single phase-to-earth fault by evaluating

the argument between U2 and I0.

80

L2-E sector L3-E sector

U2L1
(Ref)

200
L1-E sector
320

IEC06000384_2_en.vsd
IEC06000384 V3 EN

Figure 135: Condition 1: Definition of faulty phase sector as angle between U2

and I0

The angle is calculated in a directional function block and gives the angle in
radians as input to the U2 and I0 function block. The input angle is released only if

288
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

the fault is in forward direction. This is done by the directional element. The fault
is classified as forward direction if the angle between U0 and I0 lies between 20 to
200 degrees, see figure 136.

Forward 20

200 Reverse

en06000385.vsd

IEC06000385 V1 EN

Figure 136: Directional element used to release the measured angle between
Uo and I0

The input radians are summarized with an offset angle and the result evaluated. If
the angle is within the boundaries for a specific sector, the phase indication for that
sector will be active see figure 135. Only one sector signal is allowed to be
activated at the same time.

The sector function for condition 1 has an internal release signal which is active if
the main sequence function has classified the angle between U0 and I0 as valid. The
following conditions must be fulfilled for activating the release signals:

|U2|>U2MinOp

|3I0|> 0.05 IBase

|3I0|>maxIph INRelPE

where:
U2 and IN are the magnitude of the negative sequence voltage and zero-
sequence current (3I0)

U2MinOp is the setting parameter for minimum operating negative sequence

voltage
maxIph is the maximum phase current
INRelPE is the setting parameter for 3I0 limit for releasing phase-to-earth loop

The angle difference is phase shifted by 180 degrees if the fault is in reverse direction.

289
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

The condition 2 looks at the angle relationship between the negative sequence
voltage U2 and the positive sequence voltage U1. Since this is a phase-to-phase
voltage relationship, there is no need for shifting phases if the fault is in reverse
direction. A phase shift is introduced so that the fault sectors will have the same
angle boarders as for condition 1. If the calculated angle between U2 and U1 lies
within one sector, the corresponding phase for that sector will be activated. The
condition 2 is released if both the following conditions are fulfilled:

|U2|>U2MinOp

|U1|>U1MinOP

where:
|U1| and |U2| are the magnitude of the positive and negative sequence voltages.

U1MinOP and U2MinOp are the setting parameters for positive sequence and negative sequence
minimum operating voltages.

140
L3-E sector
20

U1L1
(Ref)
L1-E sector
L2-E sector

260 IEC06000413_2_en.vsd
IEC06000413 V2 EN

Figure 137: Condition 2: U2 and U1 angle relationship

If both conditions are true and there is sector match, the fault is deemed as single
phase-to-earth. If the sectors, however, do not match the fault is determined to be
the complement of the second condition, that is, a phase-to-phase-to- earth fault.

Condition 1 and Condition 2 Fault type

L3-E L3-E L3-E
L2-E L1-E L2-L3-E

The sequence phase selector is blocked when earth is not involved or if a three-
phase fault is detected.

290
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

Three-phase fault detection

Unless it has been categorized as a single or two-phase fault, the function classifies
it as a three-phase fault if the following conditions are fulfilled:

|U1|<U1Level

and

|I1|>I1LowLevel

or

|I1|>IMaxLoad

where:
|U1| and |I1| are the positive sequence voltage and current magnitude

U1Level , are the setting of limits for positive sequence voltage and current
I1LowLevel
IMaxLoad is the setting of the maximum load current

The output signal for detection of three-phase fault is only released if not earth
fault and phase-to-phase fault in the main sequence function is detected.

The conditions for not detecting earth fault are the inverse of equation 5 to 10.

The condition for not detecting phase-to-phase faults is determined by three

conditions. Each of them gives condition for not detecting phase-to-phase fault.
Those are:

1:
earth fault is detected
or
|3I0|> 0.05 IBase

and
|3I0|>maxIph INRelPE

2:
phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase faults are not fulfilled
and
maxIph<0.1 IBase
and
|I2|<0.1 maxIph

3:
|3I0|>maxIph INBlockPP

or
|I2|<maxIph I2ILmax

291
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

where:
maxIph is the maximum of the phase currents IL1, IL2 and IL3
INRelPE is the setting parameter for 3I0 limit for release of phase-to-earth fault loops
|I2| is the magnitude of the negative sequence current

I2ILmax is the setting parameter for the relation between negative sequence current
to the maximum phase current in percent of IBase
INBlockPP is the setting parameter for 3I0 limit for blocking phase to phase measuring
loops

Fault evaluation and selection logic

The phase selection logic has an evaluation procedure that can be simplified
according to figure 138. Only phase L1 is shown in the figure. If the internal signal
3 Phase fault is activated, all four outputs START, STL1, STL2 and STL3 gets
activated.

a a>b FaultPriority
DeltaIL1 then c=a c Adaptive release
b else c=b dependent on result
from Delta logic
DeltaUL1

Sequence based
function a<b
a
L1L2 fault
then c=b c
OR b else c=a OR
L1N fault

3 Phase fault

STL1
IL1Valid &

BLOCK

IEC06000386-2-en.vsd
IEC06000386 V2 EN

Figure 138: Simplified diagram for fault evaluation, phase L1

Load encroachment logic

Each of the six measuring loops has its own load (encroachment) characteristic
based on the corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality
is always activated in faulty phase identification with load encroachment for mho
(FMPSPDIS) function but the influence on the zone measurement can be switched
On/Offin the respective impedance measuring function.

The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 139. As illustrated, the

resistive reach in forward and reverse direction and the angle of the sector is the

292
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

same in all four quadrants. The reach for the phase selector will be reduced by the
load encroachment function, as shown in figure 139.

Blinder
Blinder provides a mean to discriminate high load from a fault. The operating
characteristic is illustrated in figure 139. There are six individual measuring loops
with the blinder functionality. Three phase-to-earth loops which estimate the
impedance according to

Zn = Uph / Iph

and three phase-to-phase loops according to

Zph-ph = Uph-ph / Iph-ph

The start operations from respective loop are binary coded into one word and
provides an output signal STCNDPLE.
X jX

Operation area Operation area

RLd
ArgLd ArgLd
R

ArgLd R
ArgLd
RLd

Operation area

No operation area No operation area

en06000414.vsd
IEC06000414 V1 EN

Figure 139: Influence on the characteristic by load encroachment logic

Outputs
The output of the sequence components based phase selector and the delta logic
phase selector activates the output signals STL1, STL2 and STL3. If an earth fault
is detected the signal STPE gets activated.

The phase selector also gives binary coded signals that are connected to the zone
measuring element for opening the correct measuring loop(s). This is done by the
signal STCNDPHS. If only one phase is started (L1, L2 or L3), the corresponding
phase-to-earth element is enabled. STPE is expected to be made available for two-
phase and three-phase faults for the correct output to be selected. The fault loop is
indicated by one of the decimal numbers below.

293
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

The output STCNDPHS provides release information from the phase selection part
only. STCNDLE provides release information from the load encroachment part
only. STCNDPLE provides release information from the phase selection part and
the load encroachment part combined, that is, both parts have to issue a release at
the same time (this signal is normally not used in the zone measuring element). In
these signals, each fault type has an associated value, which represents the
corresponding zone measuring loop to be released. The values are presented in
table 137.

0= no faulted phases
1= L1E
2= L2E
3= L3E
4= -L1L2E
5= -L2L3E
6= -L3L1E
7= -L1L2L3E
8= -L1L2
9= -L2L3
10= -L3L1
11= L1L2L3

An additional logic is applied to handle the cases when phase-to-earth outputs are
to be asserted when the earth input G is not asserted.

The output signal STCNDPLE is activated when the load encroachment is operating.

STCNDPLE is connected to the input STCND for selected quadrilateral impedance

measuring zones to be blocked. The signal must be connected to the input LDCND
for selected mho impedance measuring zones .

The load encroachment at the measuring zone must be activated to

release the blocking from the load encroachment function.

7.8.7 Technical data

Table 138: FMPSPDIS technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Load encroachment criteria: (1.003000.00) W/phase 2.0% static accuracy
Load resistance, forward and (570) degrees Conditions:
reverse Voltage range: (0.11.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.530) x Ir
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees

294
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.9 Distance protection zone, quadrilateral

characteristic, separate settings ZMRPDIS,
ZMRAPDIS and ZDRDIR

7.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral ZMRPDIS 21
characteristic, separate settings (zone
1)

S00346 V1 EN

Distance protection zone, quadrilateral ZMRAPDIS 21

characteristic, separate settings (zone
2-5)

S00346 V1 EN

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Directional impedance quadrilateral ZDRDIR Z<-> 21D

7.9.2 Functionality
The line distance protection is up to five zone full scheme protection with three
fault loops for phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-earth fault
for each of the independent zones. Individual settings for each zone in resistive and
reactive reach gives flexibility for use as back-up protection for transformer
connected to overhead lines and cables of different types and lengths.

Mho alternative quadrilateral characteristic is available.

ZMRPDIS together with Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable

angle FRPSPDIS has functionality for load encroachment, which increases the
possibility to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines.

The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional
(forward or reverse) or non-directional mode.

295
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

7.9.3 Function block

ZMRPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRL1
BLOCK TRL2
BLKZ TRL3
BLKTR START
STCND STL1
DIRCND STL2
STL3
STND

IEC08000248-1-en.vsd
IEC08000248 V1 EN

Figure 140: ZMRPDIS function block

ZMRAPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRL1
BLOCK TRL2
BLKZ TRL3
BLKTR START
STCND STL1
DIRCND STL2
STL3
STND

IEC08000290_1_en.vsd
IEC08000290 V1 EN

Figure 141: ZMRAPDIS function block

ZDRDIR
I3P* STDIRCND
U3P*

IEC09000639-1-en.vsd
IEC09000639 V1 EN

7.9.4 Signals
Table 139: ZMRPDIS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKZ BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all output by fuse failure signal
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all trip outputs
STCND INTEGER 0 External start condition (loop enabler)
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition

296
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

Table 140: ZMRPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
START BOOLEAN General Start, issued from any phase or loop
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
STND BOOLEAN Non-directional start, issued from any phase or
loop

Table 141: ZMRAPDIS Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKZ BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all output by fuse failure signal
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all trip outputs
STCND INTEGER 0 External start condition (loop enabler)
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition

Table 142: ZMRAPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
START BOOLEAN General Start, issued from any phase or loop
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
STND BOOLEAN Non-directional start, issued from any phase or
loop

297
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

Table 143: ZDRDIR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - group connection for current abs 2
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - group connection for voltage abs 2
SIGNAL

Table 144: ZDRDIR Output signals

Name Type Description
STDIRCND INTEGER Binary coded directional information per
measuring loop

7.9.5 Settings
Table 145: ZMRPDIS Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationDir Non-directional - - Forward Operation mode of directionality NonDir /
Forward Forw / Rev
Reverse
X1PP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach Ph-
Ph
R1PP 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic
angle, Ph-Ph
X1PE 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach Ph-E
R1PE 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic
angle, Ph-E
RFPP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-Ph
X0PE 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 100.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E
RFPE 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-E
R0PE 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle, Ph-E
OperationPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-
On Phase loops
OpModetPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-Ph
tPP 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph
OperationPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth
On loops
OpModetPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-E
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-E
Table continues on next page

298
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IMinOpPP 10 - 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate delta current for Phase-
Phase loops
IMinOpPE 10 - 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpIN 5 - 1000 %IB 1 5 Minimum operate residual current for
Phase-Earth loops

Table 146: ZMRPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Table 147: ZMRAPDIS Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationDir Non-directional - - Forward Operation mode of directionality NonDir /
Forward Forw / Rev
Reverse
X1PP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach Ph-
Ph
R1PP 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic
angle, Ph-Ph
X1PE 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach Ph-E
R1PE 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic
angle, Ph-E
RFPP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-Ph
X0PE 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 100.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E
RFPE 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-E
R0PE 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle, Ph-E
OperationPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-
On Phase loops
OpModetPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-Ph
tPP 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph
OperationPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth
On loops
OpModetPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-E
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-E
IMinOpPP 10 - 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate delta current for Phase-
Phase loops
IMinOpPE 10 - 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops

299
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

Table 148: ZMRAPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Table 149: ZDRDIR Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IMinOpPP 5 - 30 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase-phase current
for Phase-Phase loops
IMinOpPE 5 - 30 %IB 1 5 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
ArgNegRes 90 - 175 Deg 1 115 Angle of blinder in second quadrant for
forward direction
ArgDir 5 - 45 Deg 1 15 Angle of blinder in fourth quadrant for
forward direction

Table 150: ZDRDIR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

7.9.6 Operation principle

7.9.6.1 Full scheme measurement

The execution of the different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type,
which means that each fault loop for phase-to-earth faults and phase-to-phase faults
for forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel.

Figure 62 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for up to five,

impedance-measuring zones. There are 3 to 5 zones depending on product type and
variant.

300
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 1

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 2

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 3

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 4

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 5

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1

Zone RV

IEC05000458-2-en.vsd
IEC05000458 V2 EN

Figure 142: The different measuring loops at phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-
phase fault.

The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched
schemes which mostly uses a start element to select correct voltages and current
depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs like one
independent distance protection IED with six measuring elements.

7.9.6.2 Impedance characteristic

The distance measuring zone includes six impedance measuring loops; three
intended for phase-to-earth faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as,
three-phase faults.

The distance measuring zone will essentially operate according to the non-
directional impedance characteristics presented in figure 63 and figure 64. The phase-
to-earth characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-to-
phase characteristic presents the per phase reach.

301
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

X (Ohm/loop)

R1PE+Rn

RFPE RFPE

X0PE-X1PE
Xn =
3
X1PE+Xn R0PE-R1PE
Rn =
3
jN jN
R (Ohm/loop)

RFPE RFPE

X1PE+Xn

RFPE RFPE
en08000280-2-en.vsd

R1PE+Rn
IEC08000280 V1 EN

Figure 143: Characteristic for phase-to-earth measuring , ohm/loop domain

302
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

X (Ohm/phase)

RFPP R1PP RFPP

2 2
X 0 PE - X 1RVPE
XNRV =XX00PEPG- -X31XRVPE
1RVPG
XNRV =
XNRV =
33
XX 0 PE-
X 0 PG X
0 PE --1X 11FWPE
XFWPE
FWPG
XNFW===
XNFW
XNFW
X1PP 3 33

j j
R (Ohm/phase)

RFPP RFPP
2 2

X1PP

RFPP R1PP RFPP

2 2
en07000062.vsd
IEC07000062 V2 EN

Figure 144: Characteristic for phase-to-phase measuring

The fault loop reach with respect to each fault type may also be presented as in
figure 65. Note in particular the difference in definition regarding the (fault)
resistive reach for phase-to-phase faults and three-phase faults.

303
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

IL1 R1 + j X1
Phase-to-earth
UL1
element

Phase-to-earth
fault in phase L1 RFPE
(Arc + tower
resistance)

0
IN (R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )

IL1 R1 + j X1 Phase-to-phase
UL1 element L1-L2
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase RFPP
L1-L2 IL2
UL2 (Arc resistance)
R1 + j X1

IL1 R1 + j X1 0.5RFPP Phase-to-phase

UL1 element L1-L3
Three-phase
fault
IL3
UL3
R1 + j X1 0.5RFPP
IEC08000282-2-en.vsd
IEC08000282 V2 EN

Figure 145: Fault loop model

The R1 and jX1 in figure 65 represents the positive sequence impedance from the
measuring point to the fault location. The settings RFPE and RFPP are the
eventual fault resistances in the faulty place.

Regarding the illustration of three-phase fault in figure 65, there is of course fault
current flowing also in the third phase during a three-phase fault. The illustration
merely reflects the loop measurement, which is made phase-to-phase.

The zone can be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse direction

through the setting OperationDir. The result from respective set value is illustrated
in figure 66. The impedance reach is symmetric, in the sense that it conforms for
forward and reverse direction. Therefore, all reach settings apply to both directions.

304
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

X X X

R R R

Non-directional Forward Reverse

en05000182.vsd
IEC05000182 V1 EN

Figure 146: Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zones

7.9.6.3 Minimum operating current

The operation of Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic

(ZMRPDIS) is blocked if the magnitude of input currents fall below certain
threshold values.

The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn < IMinOpPE.

For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all
phase-to-earth loops can be blocked when IN < IMinOpIN, regardless of the phase
currents.

ILn is the RMS value of the current in phase Ln. IN is the RMS value of the vector
sum of the three-phase currents, that is residual current 3I0.

The phase-to-phase loop LmLn is blocked if ILmLn< IMinOpPP.

ILmLn is the RMS value of the vector difference between phase currents Lm and Ln.

All three current limits IMinOpPE, IMinOpIN and IMinOpPP are

automatically reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set
to operate in reverse direction, that is OperationDir=Reverse

7.9.6.4 Measuring principles

Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the
current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits. The

305
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

apparent impedances at phase-to-phase faults follow equation 31 (example for a

phase L1 to phase L2 fault).

UL1 UL2
Zapp = -------------------------
I L1 IL2
EQUATION1222 V1 EN (Equation 78)

Here U and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the
respective phase Ln (n = 1, 2, 3)

The earth return compensation applies in a conventional manner to phase-to-earth

faults (example for a phase L1 to earth fault) according to equation 32.

U L1
Z app =
I L1 + I N KN
EQUATION1223 V2 EN (Equation 79)

Where:
are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED
U L1
I L1
IN

KN
is defined as:

Z 0 - Z1
KN =
3 Z1
EQUATION-2105 V2 EN

Z 0 = R 0 + jX 0
EQUATION2106 V2 EN

Z 1 = R1 + jX 1
EQUATION2107 V2 EN

Where
R0 is setting of the resistive zero sequence reach
X0 is setting of the reactive zero sequence reach
R1 is setting of the resistive positive sequence reach
X1 is setting of the reactive positive sequence reach

306
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

Here IN is a phasor of the residual current in IED point. This results in the same
reach along the line for all types of faults.

The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and

reactance X.

The formula given in equation 32 is only valid for radial feeder application without
load. When load is considered in the case of single phase-to-earth fault,
conventional distance protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach
at importing end. The IED has an adaptive load compensation which increases the
security in such applications.

Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D
converter. The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is
distributed into memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops,
sampled values of voltage (U), current (I), and changes in current between samples
(DI) are brought from the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter.

The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related
to the loop impedance according to equation 33,

X Di
U = R i + ------ -----
w 0 Dt
EQUATION1224 V1 EN (Equation 80)

in complex notation, or:

X D Re ( I )
Re ( U ) = R Re ( I ) + ------ ------------------
w0 Dt

EQUATION354 V1 EN (Equation 81)

X DIm ( I )
Im ( U ) = R Im ( I ) + ------ -----------------
w0 Dt

EQUATION355 V1 EN (Equation 82)

with

w0 = 2 p f 0
EQUATION356 V1 EN (Equation 83)

where:
Re designates the real component of current and voltage,
Im designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and
f0 designates the rated system frequency

307
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real
value of the voltage and substitutes it in the equation for the imaginary part. The
equation for the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is
equal to:

Im ( U ) DRe ( I ) Re ( U ) D Im ( I )
R m = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DRe ( I ) Im ( I ) D Im ( I ) Re ( I )
EQUATION357 V1 EN (Equation 84)

Re ( U ) Im ( I ) Im ( U ) Re ( I )
Xm = w 0 Dt -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DRe ( I ) Im ( I ) DIm ( I ) Re ( I )
EQUATION358 V1 EN (Equation 85)

The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the
set zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive
tripping results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the
capacitive voltage transformers or by other factors.

The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and

reverse directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase
locked positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures
unlimited directional sensitivity for faults close to the IED point.

7.9.6.5 Directional impedance element for quadrilateral characteristics

The evaluation of the directionality takes place in Directional impedance

quadrilateral function ZDRDIR. Equation 39 and equation 40 are used to classify
that the fault is in forward direction for phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-phase fault.

0.8 U 1L1 + 0.2 U 1L1 M

- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1
EQUATION725 V2 EN (Equation 86)

For the L1-L2 element, the equation in forward direction is according to.

308
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

0.8 U 1L1 L 2 + 0.2 U 1L1 L 2 M

- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1 L 2
EQUATION726 V2 EN (Equation 87)

where:
ArgDir is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default
set to 15 (= -15 degrees) and
ArgNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default
set to 115 degrees, see figure 67.
is positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1
U 1L1
is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1
U 1L1M
is phase current in phase L1
I L1
is voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
U 1L1L 2
is memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
U 1L1L 2 M
is current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
I L1L 2

The setting of ArgDir and ArgNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115
degrees respectively (as shown in figure 67). It should not be changed unless
system studies have shown the necessity.

ZDRDIR gives binary coded directional information per measuring loop on the
output STDIRCND.

STDIR= STFWL1*1+STFWL2*2+STFWL3*4+STFWL1L2*8+
+STFWL2L3*16+STFWL3L1*32+STRVL1*64+STRVL2*128+
+STRVL3*256+STRVL1L2*512+STRVL2L3*1024+STRVL3L1*2048

309
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

ArgNegRes

ArgDir
R

en05000722.vsd
IEC05000722 V1 EN

Figure 147: Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault in
Directional impedance quadrilateral function ZDRDIR

The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated

by 180 degrees.

The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive sequence voltage exceeds
5% of the set base voltage UBase. So the directional element can use it for all
unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.

For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same
positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.

The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is
restored.

After 100 ms the following occurs:

If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current
(between 10 and 30% of the set IED rated current IBase), the condition seals in.
If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.
If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element
in the reverse direction remains in operation.
If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory
resets until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.

310
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.9.6.6 Simplified logic diagrams

Distance protection zones

The design of the distance protection zones are presented for all measuring loops:
phase-to-earth as well as phase-to-phase.

Phase-to-earth related signals are designated by L1N, L2N and L3N.. The phase-to-
phase signals are designated by L1L2, L2L3, and L3L1.

Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one

logical signal for each separate measuring loop:

Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described

above.
Group functional input signal (STCND), as presented in figure 68.

The STCND input signal represents a connection of six different integer values
from Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function
FRPSPDIS within the IED, which are converted within the zone measuring
function into corresponding boolean expressions for each condition separately.
Input signal STCND is connected to FRPSPDISfunction output STCNDZ.

The input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the
distance measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both
forward and reverse direction. The zone measurement function filter out the
relevant signals depending on the setting of the parameter OperationDir. It must be
configured to the STDIRCND output on directional function ZDRDIR function.

311
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

STZMPP
OR
STCND

AND STNDL1L2
L1L2

STNDL2L3
L2L3 AND

L3L1 AND STNDL3L1

AND STNDL1N
L1N

AND STNDL2N
L2N

STNDL3N
L3N AND

OR STPE

OR
VTSZ STND
OR AND
BLOCK
BLOCFUNC BLK

99000557-2.vsd
IEC99000557-TIFF V3 EN

Figure 148: Conditioning by a group functional input signal STCND, external

start condition

Composition of the phase start signals for a case, when the zone operates in a non-
directional mode, is presented in figure 69.

STNDL1N
OR
STNDL2N 15 ms
AND t STL1
STNDL3N
STNDL1L2 OR 15 ms
AND t STL2
STNDL2L3
15 ms
STNDL3L1 AND t STL3
OR
15 ms
AND t START
OR

BLK

IEC09000889-1-en.vsd
IEC09000889 V1 EN

Figure 149: Composition of starting signals in non-directional operating mode

312
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone
operates in directional (forward or reverse) mode, as shown in figure 70.

STNDL1N
AND
DIRL1N
STZMPE.
OR
STNDL2N
DIRL2N AND

STNDL3N 15 ms
OR STL1
AND t
DIRL3N AND

STNDL1L2
DIRL1L2 AND 15 ms
OR STL2
AND t
STNDL2L3
DIRL2L3 AND
15 ms
OR STL3
STNDL3L1 AND t
DIRL3L1 AND

STZMPP
OR

BLK

15 ms
OR START
AND t

IEC09000888-2-en.vsd
IEC09000888 V2 EN

Figure 150: Composition of start signals in directional operating mode

Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented
in figure 71.

313
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

Timer tPP=On
STZMPP AND tPP
AND
t

BLKFUNC
OR OR
tPE
t
AND
Timer tPE=On AND
STZMPE 15ms
BLKTR AND t
TRIP
BLK OR

STL1 AND TRL1

STL2 AND TRL2

STL3 AND TRL3

IEC09000887-2-en.vsd
IEC09000887 V2 EN

Figure 151: Tripping logic for the distance protection zone

7.9.7 Technical data

Table 151: ZMRPDIS, ZMRAPDIS technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of zones Max 5 with selectable -
direction
Minimum operate residual (5-1000)% of IBase -
current, zone 1
Minimum operate current, phase- (10-1000)% of IBase -
to-phase and phase-to-earth
Positive sequence reactance (0.10-3000.00) / 2.0% static accuracy
phase 2.0 degrees static angular accuracy
Conditions:
Positive sequence resistance (0.01-1000.00) / Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
phase
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Zero sequence reactance (0.10-9000.00) / Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
phase
Zero sequence resistance (0.01-3000.00) /
phase
Fault resistance, phase-to-earth (0.10-9000.00) /loop
Fault resistance, phase-to-phase (0.10-3000.00) /loop
Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees -
measured with CVTs
and 0.5<SIR<30
Table continues on next page

314
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Definite time delay phase-phase (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 40 ms whichever is greater
and phase-earth operation
Operate time 25 ms typically IEC 60255-121
Reset ratio 105% typically -
Reset time at 0.1 to 2 x Zreach Min = 20 ms -
Max = 35 ms

7.10 Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with

settable angle FRPSPDIS

7.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Phase selection, quadrilateral FRPSPDIS 21
characteristic with settable angle
Z<phs

SYMBOL-DD V1 EN

7.10.2 Functionality
The ability to accurately and reliably classify the different types of fault, so that
single pole tripping and autoreclosing can be used plays an important role in
today's power systems. Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable
angle FRPSPDIS is designed to accurately select the proper fault loop in the
distance function dependent on the fault type.

The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may make
fault resistance coverage difficult to achieve. Therefore, FRPSPDIS has a built-in
algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the
resistive setting of both the phase selection and the measuring zones without
interfering with the load.

The extensive output signals from the phase selection gives also important
information about faulty phase(s) which can be used for fault analysis.

A current-based phase selection is also included. The measuring elements

continuously measure three phase currents and the residual current and, compare
them with the set values.

315
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

7.10.3 Function block

FRPSPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* START
BLOCK STFWL1
DIRCND STFWL2
STFWL3
STFWPE
STRVL1
STRVL2
STRVL3
STRVPE
STNDL1
STNDL2
STNDL3
STNDPE
STFW1PH
STFW2PH
STFW3PH
STPE
STPP
STCNDZ
STCNDLE

IEC08000430-2-en.vsd
IEC08000430 V2 EN

Figure 152: FRPSPDIS function block

7.10.4 Signals
Table 152: FRPSPDIS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition

Table 153: FRPSPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip output
START BOOLEAN Start in any phase or loop
STFWL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1 - forward direction
STFWL2 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L2 - forward direction
STFWL3 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L3 - forward direction
STFWPE BOOLEAN Earth fault detected in forward direction
STRVL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1 - reverse direction
STRVL2 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L2 - reverse direction
STRVL3 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L3 - reverse direction
STRVPE BOOLEAN Earth fault detected in reverse direction
Table continues on next page

316
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

Name Type Description

STNDL1 BOOLEAN Non directional start in L1
STNDL2 BOOLEAN Non directional start in L2
STNDL3 BOOLEAN Non directional start in L3
STNDPE BOOLEAN Non directional start, phase-earth
STFW1PH BOOLEAN Start in forward direction for single-phase fault
STFW2PH BOOLEAN Start in forward direction for two- phase fault
STFW3PH BOOLEAN Start in forward direction for thre-phase fault
STPE BOOLEAN Current conditions release of phase-earth
measuring elements
STPP BOOLEAN Current conditions release of phase-phase
measuring elements
STCNDZ INTEGER Start condition (Z< with LE and 3I0 E/F detection)
STCNDLE INTEGER Start condition (only LE and 3I0 E/F detection)

7.10.5 Settings
Table 154: FRPSPDIS Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
INBlockPP 10 - 100 %IPh 1 40 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase
measuring loops
INReleasePE 10 - 100 %IPh 1 20 3I0 limit for releasing phase-to-earth
measuring loops
RLdFw 1.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 80.00 Forward resistive reach within the load
impedance area
RLdRv 1.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 80.00 Reverse resistive reach within the load
impedance area
ArgLd 5 - 70 Deg 1 30 Load angle determining the load
impedance area
X1 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach
R1PP 0.10 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic
angle, Ph-Ph
R1PE 0.10 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 1.50 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic
angle, Ph-E
X0 0.50 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach
R0PE 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle, Ph-E
RFFwPP 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward
RFRvPP 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse
RFFwPE 1.00 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, forward
RFRvPE 1.00 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, reverse
IMinOpPP 5 - 500 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate delta current for Phase-
Phase loops
IMinOpPE 5 - 500 %IB 1 5 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops

317
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

Table 155: FRPSPDIS Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TimerPP Off - - Off Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-Ph
tPP 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Time delay to trip, Ph-Ph
TimerPE Off - - Off Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-E
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Time delay to trip, Ph-E

Table 156: FRPSPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

7.10.6 Operation principle

The basic impedance algorithm for the operation of the phase selection measuring
elements is the same as for the distance zone measuring function. Phase selection,
quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle (FRPSPDIS) includes six impedance
measuring loops; three intended for phase-to-earth faults, and three intended for
phase-to-phase as well as for three-phase faults.

The difference, compared to the distance zone measuring function, is in the

combination of the measuring quantities (currents and voltages) for different types
of faults.

The characteristic is basically non-directional, but FRPSPDIS uses information

from the directional function ZDRDIR to discriminate whether the fault is in
forward or reverse direction.

The start condition STCNDZ is essentially based on the following criteria:

Residual current criteria, that is, separation of faults with and without earth
connection
Regular quadrilateral impedance characteristic
Load encroachment characteristics is always active but can be switched off by
selecting a high setting.

The current start condition STCNDLE is based on the following criteria:

Residual current criteria

No quadrilateral impedance characteristic. The impedance reach outside the
load area is theoretically infinite. The practical reach, however, will be
determined by the minimum operating current limits.
Load encroachment characteristic is always active, but can be switched off by
selecting a high setting.

318
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

The STCNDLE output is non-directional. The directionality is determined by the

distance zones directional function ZDRDIR.

There are output from FRPSPDIS that indicate whether a start is in forward or
reverse direction or non-directional, for example STFWL1, STRVL1 and STNDL1.

These directional indications are based on the sector boundaries of the directional
function and the impedance setting of FRPSPDIS function. Their operating
characteristics are illustrated in figure 73.

X X X

R
R R

Non-directional (ND) Forward (FW) Reverse (RV)

en08000286.vsd
IEC08000286 V1 EN

Figure 153: Characteristics for non-directional, forward and reverse operation

of Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle
(FRPSPDIS)

The setting of the load encroachment function may influence the total operating
characteristic, for more information, refer to section "Load encroachment".

The input DIRCND contains binary coded information about the directional
coming from the directional function ZDRDIR. It shall be connected to the STDIR
output on ZDRDIR. This information is also transferred to the input DIRCND on
the distance measuring zones, that is, the ZMRPDIS block.

The code built up for the directionality is as follows:

STDIR= STFWL1*1+STFWL2*2+STFWL3*4+STFWL1L2*8+
+STFWL2L3*16+STFWL3L1*32+STRVL1*64+STRVL2*128+
+STRVL3*256+STRVL1L2*512+STRVL2L3*1024+STRVL3L1*2048

If the binary information is 1 then it will be considered that we have start in

forward direction in phase L1. If the binary code is 3 then we have start in forward
direction in phase L1 and L2 etc.

319
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

The STCNDZ or STCNDLE output contains, in a similar way as DIRCND, binary

coded information, in this case information about the condition for opening correct
fault loop in the distance measuring element. It shall be connected to the STCND
input on the ZMRPDIS distance measuring zones block.

The code built up for release of the measuring fault loops is as follows:

STCNDZ = L1N*1 + L2N*2 + L3N*4 + L1L2*8 + L2L3*16 + L3L1*32

7.10.6.1 Phase-to-earth fault

For a phase-to-earth fault, the measured impedance by FRPSPDIS is according to

equation 41.

Index PHS in images and equations reference settings for Phase

selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle
(FRPSPDIS).

ULn
ZPHSn =
ILn
EQUATION1255 V1 EN (Equation 88)

where:
n corresponds to the particular phase (n=1, 2 or 3)

The characteristic for FRPSPDIS function at phase-to-earth fault is according to

figure 74. The characteristic has a settable angle for the resistive boundary in the
first quadrant of 70.

The resistance RN and reactance XN are the impedance in the earth-return path
defined according to equation 44 and equation 45.

R 0 PE - R1PE
RN =
3
EQUATION-2125 V1 EN (Equation 89)
R0 - R1
RN =
3
EQUATION1256 V1 EN (Equation 89)

X 0 - X1
XN =
3
EQUATION1257 V1 EN (Equation 90)

320
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

X (ohm/loop)
R1PE+RN

RFRvPE RFFwPE

X1+XN

RFFwPE

RFRvPE R (Ohm/loop)

X1+XN

RFRvPE RFFwPE

R1PE+RN
IEC09000633-1-en.vsd
IEC09000633 V1 EN

Figure 154: Characteristic of FRPSPDIS for phase to earth fault (directional

lines are drawn as "line-dot-dot-line")

Besides this, the 3I0 residual current must fulfil the conditions according to
equation 44 and equation 45.

3 I0 0.5 IMinOpPE
EQUATION2108 V1 EN (Equation 91)

3 I0 INReleasePE
------------------------------------ Iphmax
100
EQUATION766 V1 EN (Equation 92)

where:
IMinOpPE is the minimum operation current for forward zones
INReleasePE is the setting for the minimum residual current needed to enable operation in the phase-
to-earth fault loops (in %).
Iphmax is the maximum phase current in any of three phases.

321
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

7.10.6.2 Phase-to-phase fault

For a phase-to-phase fault, the measured impedance by FRPSPDIS is according to

equation 46.

ULm - ULn
ZPHS =
-2 ILn
EQUATION1258 V1 EN (Equation 93)

ULm is the leading phase voltage, ULn the lagging phase voltage and ILn the
phase current in the lagging phase n.

The operation characteristic is shown in figure 75.

X (ohm/phase)

0.5FRvPP
R1PP 0.5RFFwPP

X1
0.5RFFwPP

R (ohm/phase)

0.5RFRvPP
X1

R1PP
0.5RFRvPP 0.5RFFwPP
IEC09000634-1-en.vsd
IEC09000634 V1 EN

Figure 155: The operation characteristic for FRPSPDIS at phase-to-phase fault

(directional lines are drawn as "line-dot-dot-line")

In the same way as the condition for phase-to-earth fault, there are current
conditions that have to be fulfilled in order to release the phase-to-phase loop.
Those are according to equation 47 or equation 48.

322
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

3I 0 < IMinOpPE
EQUATION2109 V1 EN (Equation 94)

INBlockPP
3I 0 < Iph max
100
EQUATION2110 V1 EN (Equation 95)

where:
IMinOpPE is the minimum operation current for forward earth measuring loops,
INBlockPP is 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase measuring loop and
Iphmax is maximal magnitude of the phase currents.

7.10.6.3 Three-phase faults

The operation conditions for three-phase faults are the same as for phase-to-phase
fault, that is equation 46, equation 47 and equation 48 are used to release the
operation of the function.

However, the reach is expanded by a factor 2/3 (approximately 1.1547) in all

directions. At the same time the characteristic is rotated 30 degrees, counter-
clockwise. The characteristic is shown in figure 76.

323
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

X (ohm/phase)

4 X1PP
3

0.5RFFwPPK3

X1K3 30 deg 2
RFwPP
3

R (ohm/phase)

0.5RFRvPPK3

K3 = 2 / sqrt(3)
30 deg

IEC09000635-1-en.vsd
IEC09000635 V2 EN

Figure 156: The characteristic of FRPSPDIS for three-phase fault (set angle 70)

7.10.6.4 Load encroachment

Each of the six measuring loops has its own load encroachment characteristic based
on the corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality is
always active, but can be switched off by selecting a high setting.

The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 78. As illustrated, the

resistive blinders are set individually in forward and reverse direction while the
angle of the sector is the same in all four quadrants.

324
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

RLdFw
ArgLd ArgLd
R

ArgLd ArgLd
RLdRv

IEC09000042-1-en.vsd
IEC09000042 V1 EN

Figure 157: Characteristic of load encroachment function

The influence of load encroachment function on the operation characteristic is

dependent on the chosen operation mode of FRPSPDIS function. When output
signal STCNDZ is selected, the characteristic for FRPSPDIS (and also zone
measurement depending on settings) will be reduced by the load encroachment
characteristic, see figure 79.

When output signal STCNDI is selected, the operation characteristic will be as in

figure 78. The reach will in this case be limit by the minimum operation current
and the distance measuring zones.

325
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

X X

R R

STCNDZ STCNDLE

IEC10000099-1-
en.vsd
IEC10000099 V1 EN

Figure 158: Difference in operating characteristic depending on operation

mode when load encroachment is activated

When FRPSPDIS is set to operate together with a distance measuring zone the
resultant operate characteristic could look like in figure 79. The figure shows a
distance measuring zone operating in forward direction. Thus, the operating area of
the zone together with the load encroachment is highlighted in black.

326
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

"Phase selection"
"quadrilateral" zone

Distance measuring zone

Load encroachment
characteristic

Directional line

en05000673.vsd
IEC05000673 V1 EN

Figure 159: Operating characteristic in forward direction when load

encroachment is activated

Figure 79 is valid for phase-to-earth. During a three-phase fault, or load, when the
quadrilateral phase-to-phase characteristic is subject to enlargement and rotation
the operate area is transformed according to figure 80. Notice in particular what
happens with the resistive blinders of the "phase selection" "quadrilateral" zone.
Due to the 30-degree rotation, the angle of the blinder in quadrant one is now 100
degrees instead of the original 70 degrees (if the angle setting is 70 degrees). The
blinder that is nominally located to quadrant four will at the same time tilt outwards
and increase the resistive reach around the R-axis. Consequently, it will be more or
less necessary to use the load encroachment characteristic in order to secure a
margin to the load impedance.

327
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

X (W / phase)
Phase selection
Quadrilateral zone

Distance measuring zone

R (W / phase)

IEC09000049-1-en.vsd
IEC09000049 V1 EN

Figure 160: Operating characteristic for FRPSPDIS in forward direction for three-
phase fault, ohm/phase domain

The result from rotation of the load characteristic at a fault between two phases is
presented in fig 81. Since the load characteristic is based on the same measurement
as the quadrilateral characteristic, it will rotate with the quadrilateral characteristic
clockwise by 30 degrees when subject to a pure phase-to-phase fault. At the same
time the characteristic will "shrink" by 2/3, from the full RLdFw and RLdRv
reach, which is valid at load or three-phase fault.

328
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

IEC08000437.vsd

IEC08000437 V1 EN

Figure 161: Rotation of load characteristic for a fault between two phases

There is a gain in selectivity by using the same measurement as for the

quadrilateral characteristic since not all phase-to-phase loops will be fully affected
by a fault between two phases. It should also provide better fault resistive coverage
in quadrant one. The relative loss of fault resistive coverage in quadrant four
should not be a problem even for applications on series compensated lines.

7.10.6.5 Minimum operate currents

The operation of Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle

(FRPSPDIS) is blocked if the magnitude of input currents falls below certain
threshold values.

The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn<IMinOpPE, where ILn is the RMS

value of the current in phase Ln.

The phase-to-phase loop LmLn is blocked if (2ILn<IMinOpPP).

329
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

7.10.6.6 Simplified logic diagrams

Figure 82 presents schematically the creation of the phase-to-phase and phase-to-

earth operating conditions. Consider only the corresponding part of measuring and
logic circuits, when only a phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase measurement is
available within the IED.

LDEblock

3I 0 0.5 IMinOpPE IRELPE

& 15 ms
t STPE
&
INReleasePE
3I 0 Iphmax
100 STCNDLE
Bool to &
BLOCK integer

15 ms
3I 0 < IMinOpPE & t STPP
10 ms 20 ms
OR & t t
IRELPP
INBlockPP
3I 0 < Iphmax
100

IEC09000149_2_en.vsd
IEC09000149 V2 EN

Figure 162: Phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth operating conditions (residual

current criteria)

A special attention is paid to correct phase selection at evolving faults. A

STCNDLE output signal is created as a combination of the load encroachment
characteristic and current criteria, refer to figure 82. This signal can be configured
to STCND functional input signals of the distance protection zone and this way
influence the operation of the phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth zone measuring
elements and their phase related starting and tripping signals.

Figure 83 presents schematically the composition of non-directional phase

selective signals STNDLn. Internal signals ZMLnN and ZMLmLn (m and n
change between one and three according to the phase number) represent the
fulfilled operating criteria for each separate loop measuring element, that is within
the characteristic.

330
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

INDL1N
INDL2N
INDL3N

15 ms
STNDPE
IRELPE OR t

LDEblockL1N
AND 15 ms
ZML1N STNDL1
OR t
LDEblockL2N
AND
ZML2N
15 ms
LDEblockL3N STNDL2
OR t
AND
ZML3N

LDEblockL1L2 15 ms
STNDL3
AND OR t
ZML1L2
LDEblockL2L3
AND INDL1L2
ZML2L3
LDEblockL3L1 INDL2L3
AND
ZML3L1 INDL3L1
IRELPP 15 ms
STNDPP
OR t

IEC00000545-3-en.vsd
IEC00000545-TIFF V3 EN

Figure 163: Composition on non-directional phase selection signals

Composition of the directional (forward and reverse) phase selective signals is

presented schematically in figure 84 and figure 85. The directional criteria appears
as a condition for the correct phase selection in order to secure a high phase
selectivity for simultaneous and evolving faults on lines within the complex
network configurations. Internal signals DFWLn and DFWLnLm present the
corresponding directional signals for measuring loops with phases Ln and Lm.
Designation FW (figure 85) represents the forward direction as well as the
designation RV (figure 84) represents the reverse direction. All directional signals
are derived within the corresponding digital signal processor.

Figure 84 presents additionally a composition of a STCNDZ output signal, which

is created on the basis of impedance measuring conditions. This signal can be
configured to STCND functional input signals of the distance protection zone and
this way influence the operation of the phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth zone
measuring elements and their phase related starting and tripping signals.

331
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

INDL1N
AND
DRVL1N
INDL1L2 15 ms STRVL1
AND OR t
DRVL1L2
INDL3L1
AND
DRVL3L1 15 ms STRVPE
INDL2N OR t
AND
DRVL2N
INDL1L2 15 ms
STRVL2
AND OR t

INDL2L3 INDL1N
AND INDL2N
DRVL2L3
INDL3N Bool to STCNDZ
INDL3N INDL1L2 integer
AND INDL2L3
DRVL3N INDL3L1
INDL2L3 15 ms
STRVL3
AND OR t

INDL3L1
15 ms
AND STRVPP
OR t

IEC00000546_2_en.vsd
IEC00000546-TIFF V2 EN

Figure 164: Composition of phase selection signals for reverse direction

332
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

AND

INDL1N
AND 15 ms 15 ms
DFWL1N STFW1PH
AND OR t t
INDL1L2
15 ms STFWL1
AND OR t
DFWL1L2
INDL3L1
AND
AND
DFWL3L1 15 ms
STFWPE
INDL2N OR t
AND
DFWL2N
AND 15 ms
INDL1L2 STFWL2
t
AND OR
15 ms 15 ms
INDL2L3 STFW2PH
AND OR t t
AND
DFWL2L3
INDL3N
AND AND
DFWL3N 15 ms
STFWL3
t
INDL2L3
AND OR
15 ms
INDL3L1 STFW3PH
AND t
AND

15 ms
STFWPP
OR t

IEC05000201_2_en.vsd

IEC05000201 V2 EN

Figure 165: Composition of phase selection signals for forward direction

Figure86 presents the composition of output signals TRIP and START, where
internal signals STNDPP, STFWPP and STRVPP are the equivalent to internal
signals STNDPE, STFWPE and STRVPE, but for the phase-to-phase loops.

333
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

TimerPP=Off
tPP
AND AND
t
TRIP
OR OR
tPE
TimerPE=Off
t
AND AND

STNDPP
STFWPP OR
STRVPP
START
OR
STNDPE
STFWPE OR
STRVPE

IEC08000441_2_en.vsd
IEC08000441-1 V2 EN

Figure 166: TRIP and START signal logic

334
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.10.7 Technical data

Table 157: FRPSPDIS technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Minimum operate current (5-500)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reactive reach, positive (0.503000.00) /phase 2.0% static accuracy

sequence
Resistive reach, positive
sequence
Reactive reach, zero sequence
Resistive reach, zero sequence
Fault resistance, Ph-E faults,
forward and reverse
Fault resistance, Ph-Ph faults,
forward and reverse
Load encroachment criteria:
Load resistance, forward and
reverse
Safety load impedance angle
Reset ratio
(0.101000.00) /phase
(0.509000.00) /phase
(0.503000.00) /phase
(1.009000.00) /loop
(0.503000.00) /loop
(1.003000.00) /phase
(5-70) degrees
105% typically
2.0 degrees static angular
accuracy
Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85
degrees
-

7.11 High speed distance protection ZMFPDIS

7.11.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
High speed distance protection zone ZMFPDIS 21
(zone 1)

S00346 V1 EN

7.11.2 Functionality
The High speed distance protection (ZMFPDIS) is providing sub-cycle, down
towards half-cycle, operate time for basic faults within 60% of the line length and
up to around SIR 5. At the same time, it is specifically designed for extra care
during difficult conditions in high voltage transmission networks, like faults on
long heavily loaded lines and faults generating heavily distorted signals. These
faults are handled with outmost security and dependability, although sometimes
with reduced operating speed.

335
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

The ZMFPDIS function is a six zone full scheme protection with three fault loops
for phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-earth faults for each of
the independent zones, which makes the function suitable in applications with single-
phase autoreclosing.

The zones can operate independently of each other in directional (forward or

reverse) or non-directional mode. However, zone1 and zone2 is designed to
measure in forward direction only, while one zone (ZRV) is designed to measure in
the reverse direction. This makes them suitable, together with a communication
scheme, for protection of power lines and cables in complex network
configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines, and so on.

A new built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of the

distance zones in the load exporting end during phase-to-earth faults on heavily
loaded power lines. It also reduces underreach in the importing end.

The ZMFPDIS function-block itself incorporates a phase-selection element and a

directional element, contrary to previous designs in the 670-series, where these
elements were represented with separate function-blocks.

The operation of the phase-selection element is primarily based on current change

criteria (i.e. delta quantities), with significantly increased dependability. Naturally,
there is also a phase selection criterion operating in parallel which bases its
operation only on voltage and current phasors.

The directional element utilizes a set of well-established quantities to provide fast

and correct directional decision during various power system operating conditions,
including close-in three-phase faults, simultaneous faults and faults with only zero-
sequence in-feed.

336
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.11.3 Function block

ZMFPDIS
I3P* TRIPZ1
U3P* TRL1Z1
BLOCK TRL2Z1
VTSZ TRL3Z1
BLKZ1 TRIPZ2
BLKZ2 TRL1Z2
BLKZ3 TRL2Z2
BLKZ4 TRL3Z2
BLKZ5 TRIPZ3
BLKZRV TRIPZ4
BLKTRZ1 TRIPZ5
BLKTRZ2 TRIPZRV
BLKTRZ3 STARTZ1
BLKTRZ4 STNDZ1
BLKTRZ5 STARTZ2
BLKTRZRV STL1Z2
STL2Z2
STL3Z2
STNDZ2
STARTZ3
STNDZ3
STARTZ4
STNDZ4
STARTZ5
STNDZ5
STARTZRV
STL1ZRV
STL2ZRV
STL3ZRV
STNDZRV
STARTND
STNDL1
STNDL2
STNDL3
STFWL1
STFWL2
STFWL3
STFWPE
STRVL1
STRVL2
STRVL3
STRVPE
STFW1PH
STFW2PH
STFW3PH
STPE
STPP

IEC11000433-2-en.vsd
IEC11000433 V2 EN

Figure 167: ZMFPDIS function block

7.11.4 Signals
Table 158: ZMFPDIS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of entire
function
Table continues on next page

337
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

Name Type Default Description

VTSZ BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of entire
function
BLKZ1 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of zone 1
BLKZ2 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of zone 2
BLKZ3 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of zone 3
BLKZ4 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of zone 4
BLKZ5 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of zone 5
BLKZRV BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of reverse
zone
BLKTRZ1 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of zone 1
BLKTRZ2 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of zone 2
BLKTRZ3 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of zone 3
BLKTRZ4 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of zone 4
BLKTRZ5 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of zone 5
BLKTRZRV BOOLEAN 0 Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of
reverse zone

Table 159: ZMFPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIPZ1 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 1 -
forward direction
TRL1Z1 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L1 from zone 1 - forward direction
TRL2Z1 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L2 from zone 1 - forward direction
TRL3Z1 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L3 from zone 1 - forward direction
TRIPZ2 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 2 -
forward direction
TRL1Z2 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L1 from zone 2 - forward direction
TRL2Z2 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L2 from zone 2 - forward direction
TRL3Z2 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L3 from zone 2 - forward direction
TRIPZ3 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 3 - zone
direction
TRIPZ4 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 4 - zone
direction
TRIPZ5 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 5 - zone
direction
TRIPZRV BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone RV -
reverse dir.
STARTZ1 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 1 -
forward direction
STNDZ1 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 1 - any
direction
STARTZ2 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 2 -
forward direction
STL1Z2 BOOLEAN Start in phase L1 from zone 2 - forward direction
Table continues on next page

338
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

Name Type Description

STL2Z2 BOOLEAN Start in phase L2 from zone 2 - forward direction
STL3Z2 BOOLEAN Start in phase L3 from zone 2 - forward direction
STNDZ2 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 2 - any
direction
STARTZ3 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 3 - zone
direction
STNDZ3 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 3 - any
direction
STARTZ4 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 4 - zone
direction
STNDZ4 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 4 - any
direction
STARTZ5 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 5 - zone
direction
STNDZ5 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 5 - any
direction
STARTZRV BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone RV -
reverse dir.
STL1ZRV BOOLEAN Start in phase L1 from zone RV - reverse direction
STL2ZRV BOOLEAN Start in phase L2 from zone RV - reverse direction
STL3ZRV BOOLEAN Start in phase L3 from zone RV - reverse direction
STNDZRV BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone RV - any
direction
STARTND BOOLEAN Fault detected in any phase or phases - any
direction
STNDL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1 - any direction
STNDL2 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L2 - any direction
STNDL3 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L3 - any direction
STFWL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1 - forward direction
STFWL2 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L2 - forward direction
STFWL3 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L3 - forward direction
STFWPE BOOLEAN Fault with earth connection detected - forward
direction
STRVL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1 - reverse direction
STRVL2 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L2 - reverse direction
STRVL3 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L3 - reverse direction
STRVPE BOOLEAN Fault with earth connection detected - reverse
direction
STFW1PH BOOLEAN Single-phase fault detected - forward direction
STFW2PH BOOLEAN Two-phase fault detected - forward direction
STFW3PH BOOLEAN Three-phase fault detected - forward direction
STPE BOOLEAN Ph-E zone measurement enabled - any direction
STPP BOOLEAN Ph-Ph zone measurement enabled - any direction

339
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

7.11.5 Settings
Table 160: ZMFPDIS Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode Off / On
On
RLdFw 0.01 - 5000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 60.00 Resistance determining the load
impedance area - forward
RLdRv 0.01 - 5000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 60.00 Resistance determining the load
impedance area - reverse
XLd 0.01 - 10000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 400.00 Reactance determining the load
impedance area
ArgLd 5 - 70 Deg 1 30 Angle determining the load impedance
area
CVTtype Any - - Passive type CVT selection determining filtering of the
Passive type function
None (Magnetic)
OpModeZ1 Disable-Zone - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,
Enable Ph-E zone 1
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
X1PPZ1 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, zone 1
R1PPZ1 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, Ph-
Ph, zone 1
X1PEZ1 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
E, zone 1
R1PEZ1 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, Ph-E,
zone 1
X0Z1 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 100.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, zone 1
R0Z1 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero sequence resistive reach, zone 1
RFPPZ1 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 1
RFPEZ1 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 1
tPPZ1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 1
tPEZ1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 1
IMinOpPPZ1 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate ph-ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone 1
IMinOpPEZ1 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone 1
OpModeZ2 Disable-Zone - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,
Enable Ph-E zone 2
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
X1Z2 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach,
zone 2
R1Z2 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, zone 2
X0Z2 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, zone 2
R0Z2 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero sequence resistive reach, zone 2
Table continues on next page

340
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

RFPPZ2 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 2
RFPEZ2 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 2
tPPZ2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 2
tPEZ2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 2
IMinOpPPZ2 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate ph-ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone 2
IMinOpPEZ2 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone 2
OpModeZ3 Disable-Zone - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,
Enable Ph-E zone 3
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
DirModeZ3 Non-directional - - Forward Direction of zone 3 (which will be the Fw
Forward direction of zone 3)
Reverse
X1Z3 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach,
zone 3
R1Z3 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, zone 3
X0Z3 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, zone 3
R0Z3 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero sequence resistive reach, zone 3
RFPPZ3 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 3
RFPEZ3 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 3
tPPZ3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 3
tPEZ3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 3
IMinOpPPZ3 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate ph-ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone 3
IMinOpPEZ3 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone 3
OpModeZ4 Disable-Zone - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,
Enable Ph-E zone 4
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
DirModeZ4 Non-directional - - Forward Direction of zone 4 (which will be the Fw
Forward direction of zone 4)
Reverse
X1Z4 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach,
zone 4
R1Z4 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, zone 4
X0Z4 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, zone 4
R0Z4 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero sequence resistive reach, zone 4
RFPPZ4 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 4
RFPEZ4 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 4
tPPZ4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.200 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 4
tPEZ4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.200 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 4
IMinOpPPZ4 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate ph-ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone 4
Table continues on next page

341
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IMinOpPEZ4 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone 4
OpModeZ5 Disable-Zone - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,
Enable Ph-E zone 5
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
DirModeZ5 Non-directional - - Forward Direction of zone 5 (which will be the Fw
Forward direction of zone 5)
Reverse
X1Z5 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach,
zone 5
R1Z5 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, zone 5
X0Z5 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, zone 5
R0Z5 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero sequence resistive reach, zone 5
RFPPZ5 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 5
RFPEZ5 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 5
tPPZ5 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.600 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 5
tPEZ5 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.600 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 5
IMinOpPPZ5 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate ph-ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone 5
IMinOpPEZ5 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone 5
OpModeZRV Disable-Zone - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,
Enable Ph-E zone RV
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
X1ZRV 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach,
zone RV
R1ZRV 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, zone
RV
X0ZRV 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, zone RV
R0ZRV 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero sequence resistive reach, zone RV
RFPPZRV 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone RV
RFPEZRV 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone RV
tPPZRV 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone RV
tPEZRV 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone RV
IMinOpPPZRV 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate ph-ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone RV
IMinOpPEZRV 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone RV

342
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

Table 161: ZMFPDIS Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ZoneLinkStart Phase Selection - - Phase Selection Select. of start source for all ZoneLinked
1st starting zone trip delay timers
INReleasePE 5 - 400 %IPh 1 400 3I0 limit for releasing Phase-to-Earth
measuring loops
TimerModeZ1 Disable all - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E output, zone 1
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZ1 LoopLink (tPP-tPE) - - LoopLink (tPP- How start of trip delay timers should be
LoopLink & tPE) linked for zone 1
ZoneLink
No Links
TimerModeZ2 Disable all - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E output, zone 2
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZ2 LoopLink (tPP-tPE) - - LoopLink (tPP- How start of trip delay timers should be
LoopLink & tPE) linked for zone 2
ZoneLink
No Links
TimerModeZ3 Disable all - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E output, zone 3
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZ3 LoopLink (tPP-tPE) - - LoopLink (tPP- How start of trip delay timers should be
LoopLink & tPE) linked for zone 3
ZoneLink
No Links
TimerModeZ4 Disable all - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E output, zone 4
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZ4 LoopLink (tPP-tPE) - - LoopLink (tPP- How start of trip delay timers should be
LoopLink & tPE) linked for zone 4
ZoneLink
No Links
TimerModeZ5 Disable all - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E output, zone 5
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZ5 LoopLink (tPP-tPE) - - LoopLink (tPP- How start of trip delay timers should be
LoopLink & tPE) linked for zone 5
ZoneLink
No Links
TimerModeZRV Disable all - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E output, zone RV
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZRV LoopLink (tPP-tPE) - - LoopLink (tPP- How start of trip delay timers should be
LoopLink & tPE) linked for zone RV
ZoneLink
No Links

343
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

Table 162: ZMFPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

7.11.6 Monitored data

Table 163: ZMFPDIS Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
L1Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L1
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L2Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L2
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L3Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L3
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L1L2Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in loop L1L2
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L2L3Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in loop L2L3
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L3L1Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in loop L3L1
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L1R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L1
L1X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L1
L2R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L2
L2X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L2
L3R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L3
L3X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L3

7.11.7 Operation principle

Settings, input and output names are sometimes mentioned in the following text
without its zone suffix (i.e. BLKZx instead of BLKZ3) when the description is
equally valid for all zones.

7.11.7.1 Filtering

Practically all voltage, current and impedance quantities used within the ZMFPDIS
function are derived from fundamental frequency phasors filtered by a half cycle
filter.

344
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

The phasor filter is frequency adaptive in the sense that its coefficients are changed
based on the estimated power system frequency.

A half cycle filter will not be able to reject both even and odd harmonics. So, while
odd harmonics will be completely attenuated, accuracy will be affected by even
harmonics. Even harmonics will not cause the distance zones to overreach
however; instead there will be a slightly variable underreach, on average in the
same order as the magnitude ratio between the harmonic and fundamental component.

7.11.7.2 Distance measuring zones

The execution of the different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type,
which means that earth fault loop for phase-to-earth faults and phase-to-phase
faults for forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel.

Figure 91 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the six distance
zones.

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 1

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 2

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 3

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 4

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 5

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1

Zone RV

IEC05000458-2-en.vsd
IEC05000458 V2 EN

Figure 168: The different measuring loops at phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-
phase fault

Each distance protection zone performs like one independent distance protection
function with six measuring elements.

It is well-known that transients from CVTs may have a significant impact on the
transient overreach of a distance protection. At the same time these transients can
be very diverse in nature from one type to the other; in fact, more diverse than can
be distinguished by the algorithm itself in the course of a few milliseconds. So, a
setting (CVTtype) is introduced in order to inform the algorithm about the type of
CVT applied and thus providing the advantage of knowing how performance
should be optimized, even during the first turbulent milliseconds of the fault period.

There are basically two types of CVTs from the function point of view, the passive
and the active type, which refers to the type of ferro-resonance suppression device
that is employed. The active type requires more rigorous filtering which will have a

345
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

negative impact on operate times. However, this will be evident primarily at higher
source impedance ratios (SIRs), SIR 5 and above, or close to the reach limit.

It is worth mentioning here that the IEC 60044-5 transient classification is of little
or no use in this connection. It is not primarily the damping of transients that is
important; it is the frequency content of the transients that is decisive, i.e. how
difficult it is to filter out the specific frequency. So, even if two CVTs, one passive
and the other active type, comply with the same transient class, the active type
requires more extensive filtering in order to avoid transient overreach.

For avoiding overreach and at the same time achieving fast operate times, a
supplementary circular characteristic that includes some alternative processing
(retained from REL 531) is implemented. One such circular characteristic exists for
every measuring loop and quadrilateral characteristic. There are no specific reach
settings for this circular zone. It uses the normal quadrilateral zone settings to
determine a reach that will be appropriate. This implies that the circular
characteristic will always have somewhat shorter reach than the quadrilateral zone.

7.11.7.3 Phase-selection element

The operation of the phase-selection element is primarily based on current change

criteria (i.e. delta quantities), with significantly increased dependability. Naturally,
there is also a phase selection criterion operating in parallel which bases its
operation only on voltage and current phasors.

The phase-selection element can, owing to the current change criteria, distinguish
faults with minimum influence from load and fault impedance. In other words, it is
not restricted by a load encroachment characteristic during the current change
phase. This significantly improves performance for remote phase-to-earth faults on
heavily loaded lines. One exception however is three-phase faults, for which the
load encroachment characteristic always has to be applied, in order to distinguish
fault from load.

The continuous criteria will in the vast majority of cases operate in parallel and
carry on the fault indication after the current change phase has ended. Only in some
particularly difficult faults on heavily loaded lines the continuous criteria might not
be sufficient, for example, when the estimated fault impedance resides within the
load area defined by the load encroachment characteristic. In this case, the
indication will be restricted to a pulse lasting for one or two power system cycles.

Phase-to-phase-earth faults (also called double earth faults) will practically always
activate phase-to-phase zone measurements. This is a substantial difference
compared to the previous phase selection function in the 500- and 670-series (that
is, FDPSPDIS). Measurement in two phase-to-earth loops at the same time is
associated with so-called simultaneous faults: two earth faults at the same time, one
each on the two circuits of a double line, or when the zero sequence current is
relatively high due to a source with low Z0/Z1 ratio. In fact, in these situations
zone measurement will be released both for the related phase-to-earth loops and the
phase-to-phase loop simultaneously. On the other hand, simultaneous faults closer

346
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

to the remote bus will gradually take on the properties of a phase-to-phase-earth

fault and the function will eventually use phase-to-phase zone measurements also
here.

In cases where the fault current infeed is more or less completely of zero sequence
nature (all phase currents in phase), the measurement will be performed in the phase-
to-earth loops only for a phase-to-phase-earth fault.

However, should it be desirable to use phase-to-earth (and only phase-to-earth)

zone measurement for phase-to-phase-earth faults, there is a setting INReleasePE
that can be lowered from its excessive default value to the level above which phase-
to-earth measurement should be activated.

7.11.7.4 Directional element

Several criteria are employed when making the directional decision. The basis is
provided by comparing a sum of positive sequence voltage and memory voltage
with phase currents. This has been the standard method up to now in the 670-series
(ZDRDIR). For extra security, especially in making a very fast decision, this
method is complemented with an equivalent comparison where, instead of the
phase current, the change in phase current is used. Moreover, a basic negative
sequence directional evaluation is taken into account as a reliable reference during
high load condition. Finally, zero sequence directional evaluation is used whenever
there is more or less exclusive zero sequence in-feed.

Fundamentally, the directional sectors that represent forward direction, one per
measuring loop, are defined by the following equations.

15 < arg
( (1 k ) U1 L1 + k U 1L1M )
< 120
I L1
EQUATION2546 V2 EN (Equation 96)

15 < arg
( (1 k ) U1 L1L 2 + k U 1L1L 2 M )
< 120
I L1L 2
EQUATION2547 V2 EN (Equation 97)

Where:
U1L1 is the positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1.

U1L1M is the positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1.

IL1 is the phase current in phase L1.

U1L1L2 is the voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1).

U1L1L2M is the memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1).

IL1L2 is the current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1).

k is the factor determining the amount of memory voltage.

347
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

The corresponding reverse directional sectors range from 165 to -60 degrees. The
value of the k factor determining the amount of memory voltage used is normally
0.8. However, if the SeriesComp option is chosen (only available in ZMFCPDIS)
the value is changed to 0.95.

7.11.7.5 Fuse failure

The ZMFPDIS function has to be blocked by an additional function like the Fuse
failure supervision (SDDRFUF) or an equivalent external device. Typically, the
binary input VTSZ is used for this purpose.

A built-in supervision feature within high-speed distance protection itself, based on

phase current change, will ensure that the SDDRFUF blocking signal is received in
time. Namely, the intentional time delay will be introduced if no current magnitude
change greater than 5% of IBase has been detected for any of the three phase currents.

7.11.7.6 Power swings

There is need for external blocking of the ZMFPDIS function during power
swings, either from the Power Swing Blocking function (ZMRPSB) or an external
device.

7.11.7.7 Measuring principles

All ZMFPDIS zones operate according to the non-directional impedance

characteristics presented in Figure 169 and Figure 170. The phase-to-earth
characteristic is given in ohms-per-loop domain while the phase-to-phase
characteristic is given in ohms-per-phase domain.

348
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

X (Ohm/loop)

R1PE+Rn

RFPE RFPE

X0PE-X1PE
Xn =
3
X1PE+Xn R0PE-R1PE
Rn =
3
jN jN
R (Ohm/loop)

RFPE RFPE

X1PE+Xn

RFPE RFPE
IEC11000415-1-en.vsd

R1PE+Rn
IEC11000415 V1 EN

Figure 169: ZMFPDIS Characteristic for phase-to-earth measuring, ohm/loop

domain

349
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

X (Ohm/phase)

RFPP R1PP RFPP

2 2
X 0 PE - X 1RVPE
XNRV =XX00PEPG- -
X31XRVPE
1RVPG
XNRV =
XNRV =
33
XNFW = XX
X00
PE
0 --
PE
PG X-1X 11FWPE
XFWPE
FWPG
XNFW==
XNFW
3
X1PP 3 3

j j
R (Ohm/phase)

RFPP RFPP
2 2

X1PP

RFPP R1PP RFPP

2 2
IEC11000416-1-en.vsd
IEC11000416 V1 EN

Figure 170: ZMFPDIS Characteristic for phase-to-phase measuring

The faulty loop in relation to the fault type can be presented as in Figure 171. The
main intension with this illustration is to make clear how the fault resistive reach
should be interpreted and set. Note in particular that the setting RFPP always
represents the total fault resistance of the loop, regardless the fact that the fault
resistance (arc) may be divided into parts like for three-phase or phase-to-phase
faults. The R1 + jX1 represent the positive sequence impedance from the
measuring point to the fault location.

350
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

IL1 R1 + j X1
Phase-to-earth
UL1
element

Phase-to-earth
RFPE
fault in phase L1
(Arc + tower
resistance)

0
IN (R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )

IL1 R1 + j X1 Phase-to-phase
UL1 element L1-L2
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase RFPP
L1-L2 IL2
UL2 (Arc resistance)
R1 + j X1

IL1 R1 + j X1 0.5RFPP Phase-to-phase

UL1 element L1-L3
Three-phase
fault or Phase-to-
phase-earth fault IL3
UL3
R1 + j X1 0.5RFPP
IEC11000419-2-en.vsd
IEC11000419 V2 EN

Figure 171: Fault loop model

7.11.7.8 Load encroachment

In some cases the measured load impedance might enter the set zone characteristic
without any fault on the protected line. The phenomenon is called load
encroachment and it might occur when an external fault is cleared and high
emergency load is transferred on the protected line. The effect of load
encroachment is illustrated to the left in Figure 172. The entrance of the load
impedance inside the characteristic is of course not desirable and the way to handle
this with conventional distance protection is to consider this with the resistive reach
settings, that is, to have a security margin between the distance zone characteristic
and the minimum load impedance. Such a solution has the drawback that it will
reduce the sensitivity of the distance protection, that is, the ability to detect
resistive faults.

The IED has a built in feature which shapes the characteristic according to the
characteristic shown in Figure 172. The load encroachment algorithm will increase
the possibility to detect high fault resistances, especially for phase-to-earth faults at

351
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

remote line end. For example, for a given setting of the load angle ArgLd, the
resistive blinder for the zone measurement can be set according to Figure 172
affording higher fault resistance coverage without risk for unwanted operation due
to load encroachment. Separate resistive blinder setting is available in forward and
reverse direction.

The use of the load encroachment feature is essential for long heavily loaded lines,
where there might be a conflict between the necessary emergency load transfer and
necessary sensitivity of the distance protection. The function can also preferably be
used on heavy loaded, medium long lines. For short lines, the major concern is to
get sufficient fault resistance coverage. Load encroachment is not a major problem.
See section "".

X X

Z1 Z1

Load impedance
area in forward ArgLd ArgLd
R R
direction ArgLd ArgLd
RLdRv RLdFw

IEC09000248_1_en.vsd
IEC09000248 V1 EN

Figure 172: Load encroachment phenomena and shaped load encroachment

characteristic

7.11.7.9 Simplified logic schemes

PHSL1, PHSL2,...PHSL3L1 are internal binary logical signals from the Phase-
selection element. They correspond directly to the six loops of the distance zones
and determine which loops should be released to operate.

FWL1, FWL2,...FWL3L1 and RVL1, RVL2,...RVL3L1 are the internal binary

signals from the Directional element. An FW signal is activated if the criteria for a
forward fault or load is fulfilled for its particular loop. The equivalent applies to the
reverse (RV) signals.

The internal input 'IN present' is activated if the residual current (3I0) exceeds 10%
of the maximum phase current magnitude and at the same time is above 5% of
IBase. However, if current transformer saturation is detected, this criterion is
changed to residual voltage (3U0) exceeding 5% of UBase/sqrt(3) instead.

352
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

FW(Ln & LmLn) DIR(Ln & LmLn)Z1

FW(Ln & LmLn) DIR(Ln & LmLn)Z2

RV(Ln & LmLn) DIR(Ln & LmLn)ZRV

DirModeZ3-5
TRUE (1) Non-directional
FW(Ln & LmLn) Forward DIR(Ln & LmLn)Z3-5
RV(Ln & LmLn) Reverse

IEC12000137-2-en.vsd
IEC12000137 V2 EN

Figure 173: Connection of directional signals to Zones

PEZx
OR
ZML1Zx
PHSL1 AND
DIRL1Zx AND
ZML2Zx
PHSL2 AND
DIRL2Zx AND
ZML3Zx L1Zx
OR
PHSL3 AND
DIRL3Zx AND

ZML1L2Zx L2Zx
OR
PHSL1L2 AND
DIRL1L2Zx AND
ZML2L3Zx L3Zx
PHSL2L3 AND OR
DIRL2L3Zx AND
ZML3L1Zx
PHSL3L1 AND
DIRL3L1Zx AND

PPZx
OR

NDZx
OR

IEC12000140-1-en.vsd
IEC12000140 V1 EN

Figure 174: Intermediate logic

353
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

TimerModeZx =
Enable Ph-Ph,
Ph-E

PPZx AND tPPZx

OR AND
AND t
TZx
PEZx AND tPEZx OR
OR
AND t
AND

BLOCK
VTSZ
BLKZx OR
BLKTRZx
OR TimerLinksZx
LoopLink (tPP-tPE)
ZoneLinkStart LoopLink & ZoneLink
OR
STPHS Phase Selection No Links
1st starting zone
LNKZ1 FALSE (0)
LNKZ2
LNKZRV LNKZx
AND
LNKZ3 OR
TimerLinksZx =
LNKZ4 LoopLink & ZoneLink
LNKZ5

IEC12000139-2-en.vsd
IEC12000139 V2 EN

Figure 175: Logic for linking of timers

354
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

15 ms
TZx
t TRIPZx
AND

BLKTRZx
TRL1Zx
OR AND
BLOCK
VTSZ TRL2Zx
OR AND
BLKZx
TRL3Zx
AND
15 ms
L1Zx
t STL1Zx
AND
15 ms
L2Zx
t STL2Zx
AND
15 ms
L3Zx
t STL3Zx
AND

PPZx 15 ms
PEZx OR t STARTZx
AND

15 ms
NDZx
t STNDZx
AND

IEC12000138-1-en.vsd
IEC12000138 V1 EN

Figure 176: Start and trip outputs

355
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

15 ms
OR t STPE
AND
PHSL1
15 ms
PHSL2 OR t
AND
PHSL3
15 ms
OR t
PHSL1L2 AND

PHSL2L3 15 ms
OR t
AND
PHSL3L1
15 ms
OR t STPP
AND

BLOCK STARTND
OR
VTSZ OR
STPHS

IEC12000133-1-en.vsd
IEC12000133 V1 EN

Figure 177: Additional start outputs 1

356
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

PHSL1
FWL1 AND
PHSL2 15 ms
FWL2 AND OR t STFWL1
AND
PHSL3
FWL3 AND 15 ms
PHSL1L2 OR t STFWL2
AND
FWL1L2 AND
PHSL2L3 15 ms
FWL2L3 AND OR t STFWL3
PHSL3L1 AND
FWL3L1 AND
OR
STFWPE
IN present AND

STFW1PH
=1
BLOCK
VTSZ OR

STFW2PH
=2

STFW3PH
=3

IEC12000134-1-en.vsd
IEC12000134 V1 EN

Figure 178: Additional start outputs 2

PHSL1
RVL1 AND
PHSL2 15 ms
RVL2 AND OR t STRVL1
AND
PHSL3
RVL3 AND 15 ms
PHSL1L2 OR t STRVL2
AND
RVL1L2 AND
PHSL2L3 15 ms
RVL2L3 AND OR t STRVL3
PHSL3L1 AND
RVL3L1 AND
OR
STRVPE
IN present AND

BLOCK
VTSZ OR

IEC12000141-1-en.vsd
IEC12000141 V1 EN

Figure 179: Additional start outputs 3

357
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

7.11.8 Technical data

Table 164: ZMFPDIS, ZMFCPDIS technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of zones 3 selectable -
directions, 3 fixed
directions
Minimum operate current, Ph-Ph (5-6000)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir
and Ph-E
Positive sequence reactance (0.01 - 3000.00) ohm/
reach, Ph-E and Ph-Ph loop phase
Positive sequence resistance (0.00 - 1000.00) ohm/
reach, Ph-E and Ph-Ph loop phase
Zero sequence reactance reach (0.01 - 9000.00) ohm/p 2.0% of static accuracy
2.0 deg static angular accuracy
Zero sequence resistive reach (0.00 - 3000.00) ohm/p Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Fault resistance reach, Ph-E (0.01 -9000.00) ohm/l
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
and Ph-Ph
Angle: At 0 deg and 85 deg
Dynamic overreach < 5% at 85 deg
measured with CVTs
and 0.5 < SIR < 30
Definite time delay to trip, Ph-E (0.000-60.000) s 2.0% or 35 ms whichever is greater
and Ph-Ph operation
Operate time 16 ms typically IEC 60255-121
Reset time at 0.1 to 2 x Zreach Min = 20 ms -
Max = 35 ms
Reset ratio 105% typically -

7.12 High speed distance protection ZMFCPDIS

7.12.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
High speed distance protection zone ZMFCPDIS 21
(zone 1-6)

S00346 V1 EN

7.12.2 Functionality
High speed distance protection (ZMFCPDIS) provides sub-cycle, down towards half-
cycle, operate time for basic faults within 60% of the line length and up to around
SIR 5. At the same time, it is specifically designed for extra care during difficult
conditions in high voltage transmission networks, like faults on long heavily loaded

358
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

lines and faults generating heavily distorted signals. These faults are handled with
outmost security and dependability, although sometimes with reduced operating
speed.

High speed distance protection ZMFCPDIS is fundamentally the same function as

ZMFPDIS but provides more flexibility in zone settings to suit more complex
applications, such as series compensated lines. In operation for series compensated
networks, the parameters of the directional function are altered to handle voltage
reversal.

The ZMFCPDIS function is a six-zone full scheme protection with three fault loops
for phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-earth faults for each of
the independent zones, which makes the function suitable in applications with single-
phase autoreclosing.

The zones can operate independently of each other in directional (forward or

reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with a
communication scheme, for protection of power lines and cables in complex
network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines, and so on.

A new built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of the

distance zones in the load exporting end during phase-to-earth faults on heavily
loaded power lines. It also reduces underreach in the importing end.

The ZMFCPDIS function block incorporates a phase-selection element and a

directional element, contrary to previous designs in the 670series, where these
elements were represented with separate function blocks.

The operation of the phase-selection element is primarily based on current change

criteria, with significant increased dependability. Naturally, there is also a part
operating with continuous criteria that operates in parallel

The directional element utilizes a set of well-established quantities to provide fast

and correct directional evaluation during various conditions, including close-in three-
phase faults, simultaneous faults and faults with only zero-sequence in-feed.

359
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

7.12.3 Function block

ZMFCPDIS
I3P* TRIPZ1
U3P* TRL1Z1
BLOCK TRL2Z1
VTSZ TRL3Z1
BLKZ1 TRIPZ2
BLKZ2 TRL1Z2
BLKZ3 TRL2Z2
BLKZ4 TRL3Z2
BLKZ5 TRIPZ3
BLKZRV TRIPZ4
BLKTRZ1 TRIPZ5
BLKTRZ2 TRIPZRV
BLKTRZ3 STARTZ1
BLKTRZ4 STNDZ1
BLKTRZ5 STARTZ2
BLKTRZRV STL1Z2
STL2Z2
STL3Z2
STNDZ2
STARTZ3
STNDZ3
STARTZ4
STNDZ4
STARTZ5
STNDZ5
STARTZRV
STL1ZRV
STL2ZRV
STL3ZRV
STNDZRV
STARTND
STFWL1
STFWL2
STFWL3
STFWPE
STRVL1
STRVL2
STRVL3
STRVPE
STFW1PH
STFW2PH
STFW3PH
STPE
STPP

IEC11000422-1-en.vsd
IEC11000422 V1 EN

Figure 180: ZMFCPDIS function block

7.12.4 Signals
Table 165: ZMFCPDIS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of entire
function
VTSZ BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of entire
function
Table continues on next page

360
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

Name Type Default Description

BLKZ1 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of zone 1
BLKZ2 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of zone 2
BLKZ3 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of zone 3
BLKZ4 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of zone 4
BLKZ5 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of zone 5
BLKZRV BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of reverse
zone
BLKTRZ1 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of zone 1
BLKTRZ2 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of zone 2
BLKTRZ3 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of zone 3
BLKTRZ4 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of zone 4
BLKTRZ5 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of zone 5
BLKTRZRV BOOLEAN 0 Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of
reverse zone

Table 166: ZMFCPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIPZ1 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 1 -
forward direction
TRL1Z1 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L1 from zone 1 - forward direction
TRL2Z1 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L2 from zone 1 - forward direction
TRL3Z1 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L3 from zone 1 - forward direction
TRIPZ2 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 2 -
forward direction
TRL1Z2 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L1 from zone 2 - forward direction
TRL2Z2 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L2 from zone 2 - forward direction
TRL3Z2 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L3 from zone 2 - forward direction
TRIPZ3 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 3 - zone
direction
TRIPZ4 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 4 - zone
direction
TRIPZ5 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 5 - zone
direction
TRIPZRV BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone RV -
reverse dir.
STARTZ1 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 1 -
forward direction
STNDZ1 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 1 - any
direction
STARTZ2 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 2 -
forward direction
STL1Z2 BOOLEAN Start in phase L1 from zone 2 - forward direction
STL2Z2 BOOLEAN Start in phase L2 from zone 2 - forward direction
Table continues on next page

361
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

Name Type Description

STL3Z2 BOOLEAN Start in phase L3 from zone 2 - forward direction
STNDZ2 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 2 - any
direction
STARTZ3 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 3 - zone
direction
STNDZ3 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 3 - any
direction
STARTZ4 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 4 - zone
direction
STNDZ4 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 4 - any
direction
STARTZ5 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 5 - zone
direction
STNDZ5 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 5 - any
direction
STARTZRV BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone RV -
reverse dir.
STL1ZRV BOOLEAN Start in phase L1 from zone RV - reverse direction
STL2ZRV BOOLEAN Start in phase L2 from zone RV - reverse direction
STL3ZRV BOOLEAN Start in phase L3 from zone RV - reverse direction
STNDZRV BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone RV - any
direction
STARTND BOOLEAN Fault detected in any phase or phases - any
direction
STNDL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1 - any direction
STNDL2 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L2 - any direction
STNDL3 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L3 - any direction
STFWL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1 - forward direction
STFWL2 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L2 - forward direction
STFWL3 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L3 - forward direction
STFWPE BOOLEAN Fault with earth connection detected - forward
direction
STRVL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1 - reverse direction
STRVL2 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L2 - reverse direction
STRVL3 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L3 - reverse direction
STRVPE BOOLEAN Fault with earth connection detected - reverse
direction
STFW1PH BOOLEAN Single-phase fault detected - forward direction
STFW2PH BOOLEAN Two-phase fault detected - forward direction
STFW3PH BOOLEAN Three-phase fault detected - forward direction
STPE BOOLEAN Ph-E zone measurement enabled - any direction
STPP BOOLEAN Ph-Ph zone measurement enabled - any direction

362
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.12.5 Settings
Table 167: ZMFCPDIS Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode Off / On
On
OperationSC NoSeriesComp - - NoSeriesComp Selection of series compensation
SeriesComp operation Off / On
RLdFw 0.01 - 5000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 60.00 Resistance determining the load
impedance area - forward
RLdRv 0.01 - 5000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 60.00 Resistance determining the load
impedance area - reverse
XLd 0.01 - 10000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 400.00 Reactance determining the load
impedance area
ArgLd 5 - 70 Deg 1 30 Angle determining the load impedance
area
CVTtype Any - - Passive type CVT selection determining the filtering of
Passive type the function
None (Magnetic)
OpModeZ1 Disable-Zone - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,
Enable Ph-E zone 1
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
X1FwPPZ1 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-Ph,
zone 1, forward dir.
R1FwPPZ1 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-Ph,
zone 1, forward dir.
RFPPZ1 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 1,
forw & rev dir.
X1RvPPZ1 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-Ph, zone 1,
reverse direction
X1FwPEZ1 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-E,
zone 1, forward dir.
R1FwPEZ1 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone
1, forward dir.
X0FwPEZ1 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 100.00 Zero seq. reactance reach, Ph-E, zone
1, forward direction
R0FwPEZ1 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone 1,
forward direction
RFPEZ1 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 1,
forw & rev dir.
X1RvPEZ1 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-E, zone 1,
reverse direction
tPPZ1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 1
tPEZ1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 1
IMinOpPPZ1 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate ph-ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone 1
IMinOpPEZ1 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone 1
Table continues on next page

363
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OpModeZ2 Disable-Zone - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,
Enable Ph-E zone 2
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
X1FwPPZ2 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-Ph,
zone 2, forward dir.
R1FwPPZ2 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-Ph,
zone 2, forward dir.
RFPPZ2 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 2,
forw & rev dir.
X1RvPPZ2 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-Ph, zone 2,
reverse direction
X1FwPEZ2 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-E,
zone 2, forward dir.
R1FwPEZ2 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone
2, forward dir.
X0FwPEZ2 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero seq. reactance reach, Ph-E, zone
2, forward direction
R0FwPEZ2 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone 2,
forward direction
RFPEZ2 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 2,
forw & rev dir.
X1RvPEZ2 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-E, zone 2,
reverse direction
tPPZ2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 2
tPEZ2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 2
IMinOpPPZ2 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate ph-ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone 2
IMinOpPEZ2 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone 2
OpModeZ3 Disable-Zone - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,
Enable Ph-E zone 3
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
DirModeZ3 Non-directional - - Forward Direction of zone 3 (which will be the Fw
Forward direction of zone 3)
Reverse
X1FwPPZ3 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-Ph,
zone 3, zone direction
R1FwPPZ3 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-Ph,
zone 3, zone direction
RFFwPPZ3 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 3,
zone direction
X1RvPPZ3 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-Ph, zone 3,
opposite to zone dir
RFRvPPZ3 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 3,
opposite to zone dir.
X1FwPEZ3 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-E,
zone 3, zone direction
Table continues on next page

364
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

R1FwPEZ3 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone
3, zone direction
X0FwPEZ3 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero seq. reactance reach, Ph-E, zone
3, zone direction
R0FwPEZ3 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone 3,
zone direction
RFFwPEZ3 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 3,
zone direction
X1RvPEZ3 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-E, zone 3,
opposite to zone dir
RFRvPEZ3 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 3,
opposite to zone dir.
tPPZ3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 3
tPEZ3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 3
IMinOpPPZ3 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate ph-ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone 3
IMinOpPEZ3 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone 3
OpModeZ4 Disable-Zone - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,
Enable Ph-E zone 4
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
DirModeZ4 Non-directional - - Forward Direction of zone 4 (which will be the Fw
Forward direction of zone 4)
Reverse
X1FwPPZ4 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-Ph,
zone 4, zone direction
R1FwPPZ4 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-Ph,
zone 4, zone direction
RFFwPPZ4 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 4,
zone direction
X1RvPPZ4 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-Ph, zone 4,
opposite to zone dir
RFRvPPZ4 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 4,
opposite to zone dir.
X1FwPEZ4 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-E,
zone 4, zone direction
R1FwPEZ4 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone
4, zone direction
X0FwPEZ4 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero seq. reactance reach, Ph-E, zone
4, zone direction
R0FwPEZ4 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone 4,
zone direction
RFFwPEZ4 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 4,
zone direction
X1RvPEZ4 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-E, zone 4,
opposite to zone dir
RFRvPEZ4 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 4,
opposite to zone dir.
Table continues on next page

365
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tPPZ4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.200 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 4
tPEZ4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.200 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 4
IMinOpPPZ4 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate ph-ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone 4
IMinOpPEZ4 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone 4
OpModeZ5 Disable-Zone - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,
Enable Ph-E zone 5
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
DirModeZ5 Non-directional - - Forward Direction of zone 5 (which will be the Fw
Forward direction of zone 5)
Reverse
X1FwPPZ5 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-Ph,
zone 5, zone direction
R1FwPPZ5 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-Ph,
zone 5, zone direction
RFFwPPZ5 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 5,
zone direction
X1RvPPZ5 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-Ph, zone 5,
opposite to zone dir
RFRvPPZ5 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 5,
opposite to zone dir.
X1FwPEZ5 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-E,
zone 5, zone direction
R1FwPEZ5 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone
5, zone direction
X0FwPEZ5 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero seq. reactance reach, Ph-E, zone
5, zone direction
R0FwPEZ5 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone 5,
zone direction
RFFwPEZ5 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 5,
zone direction
X1RvPEZ5 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-E, zone 5,
opposite to zone dir
RFRvPEZ5 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 5,
opposite to zone dir.
tPPZ5 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.600 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 5
tPEZ5 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.600 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 5
IMinOpPPZ5 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate ph-ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone 5
IMinOpPEZ5 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone 5
OpModeZRV Disable-Zone - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,
Enable Ph-E zone RV
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
X1FwPPZRV 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-Ph,
zone RV, reverse dir.
Table continues on next page

366
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

R1FwPPZRV 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-Ph,
zone RV, reverse dir.
RFPPZRV 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone RV,
rev & forw dir.
X1RvPPZRV 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Pos. seq. react, reach, Ph-Ph, zone RV,
forward direction
X1FwPEZRV 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Pos. seq. react, reach, Ph-E, zone RV,
reverse direction
R1FwPEZRV 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone
RV, reverse dir.
X0FwPEZRV 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero seq. reactance reach, Ph-E, zone
RV, reverse direction
R0FwPEZRV 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone
RV, reverse direction
RFPEZRV 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone RV,
rev & forw dir.
X1RvPEZRV 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-E, zone RV,
forward direction
tPPZRV 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone RV
tPEZRV 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone RV
IMinOpPPZRV 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate ph-ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone RV
IMinOpPEZRV 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone RV

Table 168: ZMFCPDIS Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ZoneLinkStart Phase Selection - - Phase Selection Select. of start source for all ZoneLinked
1st starting zone trip delay timers
INReleasePE 5 - 400 %IPh 1 400 3I0 limit for releasing phase-to-earth
measuring loops
TimerModeZ1 Disable all - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E output, zone 1
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZ1 LoopLink (tPP-tPE) - - LoopLink (tPP- How start of trip delay timers should be
LoopLink & tPE) linked for zone 1
ZoneLink
No Links
TimerModeZ2 Disable all - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E output, zone 2
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZ2 LoopLink (tPP-tPE) - - LoopLink (tPP- How start of trip delay timers should be
LoopLink & tPE) linked for zone 2
ZoneLink
No Links
Table continues on next page

367
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TimerModeZ3 Disable all - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E output, zone 3
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZ3 LoopLink (tPP-tPE) - - LoopLink (tPP- How start of trip delay timers should be
LoopLink & tPE) linked for zone 3
ZoneLink
No Links
TimerModeZ4 Disable all - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E output, zone 4
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZ4 LoopLink (tPP-tPE) - - LoopLink (tPP- How start of trip delay timers should be
LoopLink & tPE) linked for zone 4
ZoneLink
No Links
TimerModeZ5 Disable all - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E output, zone 5
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZ5 LoopLink (tPP-tPE) - - LoopLink (tPP- How start of trip delay timers should be
LoopLink & tPE) linked for zone 5
ZoneLink
No Links
TimerModeZRV Disable all - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E output, zone RV
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZRV LoopLink (tPP-tPE) - - LoopLink (tPP- How start of trip delay timers should be
LoopLink & tPE) linked for zone RV
ZoneLink
No Links

Table 169: ZMFCPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

7.12.6 Monitored data

Table 170: ZMFCPDIS Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
L1Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L1
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L2Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L2
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L3Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L3
2=Reverse
0=No direction
Table continues on next page

368
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

L1L2Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in loop L1L2
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L2L3Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in loop L2L3
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L3L1Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in loop L3L1
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L1R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L1
L1X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L1
L2R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L2
L2X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L2
L3R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L3
L3X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L3

7.12.7 Operation principle

Settings, input and output names are sometimes mentioned in the following text
without its zone suffix (i.e. BLKZx instead of BLKZ3) when the description is
equally valid for all zones.

7.12.7.1 Filtering

Practically all voltage, current and impedance quantities used within the
ZMFCPDIS function are derived from fundamental frequency phasors filtered by a
half-cycle filter.

The phasor filter is frequency adaptive in the sense that its coefficients are changed
based on the estimated power system frequency.

A half-cycle filter will not be able to reject both even and odd harmonics. So, while
odd harmonics will be completely attenuated, accuracy will be affected by even
harmonics. Even harmonics will not cause the distance zones to overreach; instead
there will be a slightly variable underreach, on average in the same order as the
magnitude ratio between the harmonic and the fundamental component.

7.12.7.2 Distance measuring zones

The execution of the different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type,
which means that earth fault loop for phase-to-earth faults and phase-to-phase
faults for forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel.

Figure 91 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the six distance
zones.

369
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 1

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 2

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 3

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 4

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 5

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1

Zone RV

IEC05000458-2-en.vsd
IEC05000458 V2 EN

Figure 181: The different measuring loops at phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-
phase fault

The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched
schemes which mostly uses a start element to select correct voltages and current
depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs like one
independent distance protection function with six measuring elements.

It is well-known that transients from CVTs may have a significant impact on the
transient overreach of a distance protection. At the same time these transients can
be very diverse in nature from one type to the other; in fact, more diverse than can
be distinguished by the algorithm itself in the course of a few milliseconds. So, a
setting is introduced in order to inform the algorithm about the type of CVT
applied and thus providing the advantage of knowing how performance should be
optimized, even during the first turbulent milliseconds of the fault period.

There are basically two types of CVTs from the function point of view, the passive
and the active type, which refers to the type of ferro-resonance suppression device
that is employed. The active type requires more rigorous filtering which will have a
negative impact on operate times. However, this will be evident primarily at higher
source impedance ratios (SIRs), SIR 5 and above, or close to the reach limit.

It is worth mentioning here that the IEC 60044-5 transient classification is of little
or no use in this connection. It is not primarily the damping of transients that is
important; it is the frequency content of the transients that is decisive, i.e. how
difficult it is to filter out the specific frequency. So, even if two CVTs, one passive
and the other active type, comply with the same transient class, the active type
requires more extensive filtering in order to avoid transient overreach.

For avoiding overreach and at the same time achieving fast operate times, a
supplementary circular characteristic that includes some alternative processing
(retained from REL 531) is implemented. One such circular characteristic exists for
every measuring loop and quadrilateral characteristic. There are no specific reach
settings for this circular zone. It uses the normal quadrilateral zone settings to
determine a reach that will be appropriate. This implies that the circular
characteristic will always have somewhat shorter reach than the quadrilateral zone.

370
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.12.7.3 Phase-selection element

The operation of the phase-selection element is primarily based on current change

criteria. The current change criteria itself can however only be relied on for a short
period following the fault inception (during what we will call the current change
phase). Subsequent switching in the network may render the change in current
invalid. So, naturally, the phase-selection element also operates on continuous
criteria.

The phase-selection element can, owing to the current change criteria, distinguish
faults with minimum influence from load and fault impedance. In other words, it is
not restricted by a load encroachment characteristic during the current change
phase. This significantly improves performance for remote phase-to-earth faults on
heavily loaded lines. One exception, however, is three-phase faults, for which the
load encroachment characteristic always has to be applied, in order to distinguish
fault from load.

The continuous criteria will in the vast majority of cases operate in parallel and
carry on the fault indication after the current change phase has ended. Only in some
particularly difficult faults on heavily loaded lines the continuous criteria might not
be sufficient, for example, when the estimated fault impedance resides within the
load area defined by the load encroachment characteristic. In this case, the
indication will be restricted to a pulse lasting for one or two power system cycles.

Phase-to-phase-earth faults (also called double earth faults) will practically always
activate phase-to-phase zone measurements. This is a substantial difference
compared to the previous phase selection function in the 500- and 600-series (that
is, FDPSPDIS). Measurement in two phase-to-earth loops at the same time is
associated with so-called simultaneous faults: two earth faults at the same time, one
each on the two circuits of a double line, or when the zero sequence current is
relatively high due to a source with low Z0/Z1 ratio.In fact, in these situations zone
measurement will be released both for the related phase-to-earth loops and the phase-
to-phase loop simultaneously. On the other hand, simultaneous faults closer to the
remote bus will gradually take on the properties of a phase-to-phase-earth fault and
the function will eventually use phase-to-phase zone measurements also here.

In cases where the fault current infeed is more or less completely lack of zero
sequence nature (all phase currents in phase), the measurement will be performed
in the phase-to-earth loops only for a phase-to-phase-earth fault.

However, should it be desirable to use phase-to-earth (and only phase-to-earth)

zone measurement for phase-to-phase-earth faults, the setting INReleasePE can be
lowered from its excessive default value to the level above which phase-to-earth
measurement should be activated.

7.12.7.4 Directional element

Several criteria are employed when making the directional decision. The basis is
provided by comparing a sum of positive sequence voltage and memory voltage

371
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

with phase currents. This has been the standard method up to now in the 600-series
(ZDRDIR). For extra security, especially in making a very fast decision, this
method is complemented with an equivalent comparison where, instead of the
phase current, the change in phase current is used. Moreover, a basic negative
sequence directional evaluation is taken into account as a reliable reference during
high load condition. Finally, zero sequence directional evaluation is used whenever
there is more or less exclusive zero sequence in-feed.

Fundamentally, the directional sectors that represent forward direction, one per
measuring loop, are defined by the following equations (examples for L1and L1L2
only):

15 < arg
( (1 k ) U1 L1 + k U 1L1M )
< 120
I L1
EQUATION2546 V2 EN (Equation 98)

15 < arg
( (1 k ) U1 L1L 2 + k U 1L1L 2 M )
< 120
I L1L 2
EQUATION2547 V2 EN (Equation 99)

Where:
U1L1 is the positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1.

U1L1M is the positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1.

IL1 is the phase current in phase L1.

U1L1L2 is the voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1).

U1L1L2M is the memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1).

IL1L2 is the current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1).

k is the factor determining the amount of memory voltage.

The corresponding reverse directional sectors range from 165 to -60 degrees. The
value of the k factor determining the amount of memory voltage used is normally
0.8. However, if the SeriesComp option is chosen (only available in ZMFCPDIS)
the value is changed to 0.95.

7.12.7.5 Fuse failure

The ZMFCPDIS function has to be blocked by an additional function like the Fuse
failure supervision (SDDRFUF) or an equivalent external device. Typically, the
binary input VTSZ is used for this purpose.

However, to guarantee that also very fast operation is blocked in a fuse failure
situation, there is a built-in supervision based on change in current that will delay
operation before the SDDRFUF blocking signal is received. The delay will be
introduced if no (vector) magnitude change greater than 5% of IBase has been
detected in any of the phase currents.

372
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.12.7.6 Power swings

There is need for external blocking of the ZMFCPDIS function during power
swings, either from the Power Swing Blocking function (ZMRPSB) or an external
device.

7.12.7.7 Measuring principles

All ZMFCPDIS zones operate according to the non-directional impedance

characteristics presented in figure 182 and figure 183. The phase-to-earth
characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-to-phase
characteristic presents the per-phase reach.

X (Ohm/loop)

R1PE+RNFw
X 0 PE - X 1FwPE
RFRvPE RFFwPE XNFw =
3
PG- -
XX00PE 1RVPGX 1RvPE
X 1XRVPE
XNRVXNRv
XNRV == = XNFw
33 X 1FwPE
XX0 PE - X-1X
0 PG FWPE
1FWPG
XNFW==
XNFW
X1FwPE+XNFw 3 3R0 PE - R1PE
RNFw =
jN jN 3
R (Ohm/loop)

RFRvPE RFFwPE

X1RvPE+XNRv

jN

RFRvPE RFFwPE

R1PE+RNRv IEC11000417-1-en.vsd
IEC11000417 V1 EN

Figure 182: ZMFCPDIS Characteristic for phase-to-earth measuring loops, ohm/

loop domain

373
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

X (Ohm/phase)

RFRvPP R1PP RFFwPP

2 2
X 0 PE - X 1RVPE
XNRV =XX00PEPG- -
X31XRVPE
1RVPG
XNRV =
XNRV =
33
XNFW = XX
X00
PE
0 --
PE
PG X-1X 11FWPE
XFWPE
FWPG
XNFW==
XNFW
3
X1FwPP 3 3

j j
jN R (Ohm/phase)

RFRvPP RFFwPP
2 2

X1RvPP

jN

RFRvPP RFFwPP
2 2
IEC11000418-1-en.vsd
IEC11000418 V1 EN

Figure 183: ZMFCPDIS Characteristic for the phase-to-phase measuring loops

Note that for ZMFCPDIS, the reverse zone ZRV, as well as any of
zones 3-5, that are set to DirMode=Reverse will get their operating
impedances inverted (rotated 180 degrees) internally in order to
make use of the main settings, which are the settings designated
Fw. Therefore, a reverse zone will have its Fw-settings
(RFFwPPZRV, X1FwPEZ3, and so on) applied in the third
quadrant, that is, towards the busbar instead of the line.

The fault loop reach in relation to each fault type may also be presented as in figure
171. The main intension with this illustration is to make clear how the fault
resistive reach should be interpreted. Note in particular that the setting RFPP
always represents the total fault resistance of the loop, even while the fault
resistance (arc) may be divided into parts like for three-phase or phase-to-phase-to-
earth faults. The R1 and jX1 represent the positive sequence impedance from the
measuring point to the fault location.

374
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

IL1 R1 + j X1
Phase-to-earth
UL1
element

Phase-to-earth
RFPE
fault in phase L1
(Arc + tower
resistance)

0
IN (R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )

IL1 R1 + j X1 Phase-to-phase
UL1 element L1-L2
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase RFPP
L1-L2 IL2
UL2 (Arc resistance)
R1 + j X1

IL1 R1 + j X1 0.5RFPP Phase-to-phase

UL1 element L1-L3
Three-phase
fault or Phase-to-
phase-earth fault IL3
UL3
R1 + j X1 0.5RFPP
IEC11000419-2-en.vsd
IEC11000419 V2 EN

Figure 184: Fault loop model

7.12.7.8 Simplified logic schemes

PHSL1, PHSL2,...PHSL3L1 are internal binary logical signals from the Phase-
selection element. They correspond directly to the six loops of the distance zones
and determine which loops should be released to possibly issue a start or a trip.

FWL1, FWL2,...FWL3L1 and RVL1, RVL2,...RVL3L1 are the internal binary

signals from the Directional element. An FW signal is set true if the criteria for a
forward fault or load is fulfilled for its particular loop. The equivalent applies to the
reverse (RV) signals.

The internal input 'IN present' is true if the residual current (3I0) exceeds 7% of
IBase. However, if current transformer saturation is detected, this criterion is
changed to residual voltage (3U0) exceeding 5% of UBase/sqrt(3) instead.

375
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

15 ms
OR t STPE
AND
PHSL1
15 ms
PHSL2 OR t
AND
PHSL3
15 ms
OR t
PHSL1L2 AND

PHSL2L3 15 ms
OR t
AND
PHSL3L1
15 ms
OR t STPP
AND

BLOCK STARTND
OR
VTSZ OR
STPHS

IEC12000133-1-en.vsd
IEC12000133 V1 EN

Figure 185: Additional start outputs 1

376
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

PHSL1
FWL1 AND
PHSL2 15 ms
FWL2 AND OR t STFWL1
AND
PHSL3
FWL3 AND 15 ms
PHSL1L2 OR t STFWL2
AND
FWL1L2 AND
PHSL2L3 15 ms
FWL2L3 AND OR t STFWL3
PHSL3L1 AND
FWL3L1 AND
OR
STFWPE
IN present AND

STFW1PH
=1
BLOCK
VTSZ OR

STFW2PH
=2

STFW3PH
=3

IEC12000134-1-en.vsd
IEC12000134 V1 EN

Figure 186: Additional start outputs 2

FW(Ln & LmLn) DIR(Ln & LmLn)Z1

FW(Ln & LmLn) DIR(Ln & LmLn)Z2

RV(Ln & LmLn) DIR(Ln & LmLn)ZRV

DirModeZ3-5
TRUE (1) Non-directional
FW(Ln & LmLn) Forward DIR(Ln & LmLn)Z3-5
RV(Ln & LmLn) Reverse

IEC12000137-2-en.vsd
IEC12000137 V2 EN

Figure 187: Connection of directional signals to zones

377
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

15 ms
TZx
t TRIPZx
AND

BLKTRZx
TRL1Zx
OR AND
BLOCK
VTSZ TRL2Zx
OR AND
BLKZx
TRL3Zx
AND
15 ms
L1Zx
t STL1Zx
AND
15 ms
L2Zx
t STL2Zx
AND
15 ms
L3Zx
t STL3Zx
AND

PPZx 15 ms
PEZx OR t STARTZx
AND

15 ms
NDZx
t STNDZx
AND

IEC12000138-1-en.vsd
IEC12000138 V1 EN

Figure 188: Start and trip outputs

378
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

TimerModeZx =
Enable Ph-Ph,
Ph-E

PPZx AND tPPZx

OR AND
AND t
TZx
PEZx AND tPEZx OR
OR
AND t
AND

BLOCK
VTSZ
BLKZx OR
BLKTRZx
OR TimerLinksZx
LoopLink (tPP-tPE)
ZoneLinkStart LoopLink & ZoneLink
OR
STPHS Phase Selection No Links
1st starting zone
LNKZ1 FALSE (0)
LNKZ2
LNKZRV LNKZx
AND
LNKZ3 OR
TimerLinksZx =
LNKZ4 LoopLink & ZoneLink
LNKZ5

IEC12000139-2-en.vsd
IEC12000139 V2 EN

Figure 189: Logic for linking of timers

379
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

PHSL1
RVL1 AND
PHSL2 15 ms
RVL2 AND OR t STRVL1
AND
PHSL3
RVL3 AND 15 ms
PHSL1L2 OR t STRVL2
AND
RVL1L2 AND
PHSL2L3 15 ms
RVL2L3 AND OR t STRVL3
PHSL3L1 AND
RVL3L1 AND
OR
STRVPE
IN present AND

BLOCK
VTSZ OR

IEC12000141-1-en.vsd
IEC12000141 V1 EN

Figure 190: Additional start outputs 3

380
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

PEZx
OR
ZML1Zx
PHSL1 AND
DIRL1Zx AND
ZML2Zx
PHSL2 AND
DIRL2Zx AND
ZML3Zx L1Zx
OR
PHSL3 AND
DIRL3Zx AND

ZML1L2Zx L2Zx
OR
PHSL1L2 AND
DIRL1L2Zx AND
ZML2L3Zx L3Zx
PHSL2L3 AND OR
DIRL2L3Zx AND
ZML3L1Zx
PHSL3L1 AND
DIRL3L1Zx AND

PPZx
OR

NDZx
OR

IEC12000140-1-en.vsd
IEC12000140 V1 EN

Figure 191: Intermediate logic

381
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

7.12.8 Technical data

Table 171: ZMFCPDIS technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of zones 3 selectable -
directions, 3 fixed
directions
Minimum operate current, Ph-Ph (5 - 6000)% of IBase 1.0% of In
and Ph-E
Positive sequence reactance (30 - 3000) /phase
reach, Ph-E and Ph-Ph loop
Positive sequence resistance (30 - 3000) /phase
reach, Ph-E and Ph-Ph loop
" +- 2.0% static accuracy +- 2.0 deg
Zero sequence reactance reach (100.00 - 9000.00) /p static angular accuracy Conditions:
Zero sequence resistive reach (15.00 - 3000.00) /p Voltage range: (0.1 - 1.1) x Ur Current
range: (0.5 - 30) x Ir Angle: At 0 deg
Fault resistance reach, Ph-E (1.00 - 9000.00) /l and 85 deg"
and Ph-Ph
Dynamic overreach < 5% at 85 deg
measured with CVT's
and 0.5 < SIR <30
Definite time delay to trip, Ph-E (0.000 - 60.000) s
0.2% or 35 ms whichever is greater
and Ph-Ph operation
Operate time 16 ms typically IEC 60255-121
Reset time at 0.1 to 2 x Zreach Min = 20 ms
-
Max = 35 ms
Reset ratio 105% typically -

7.13 Power swing detection ZMRPSB

7.13.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Power swing detection ZMRPSB 68

Zpsb

SYMBOL-EE V1 EN

7.13.2 Functionality
Power swings may occur after disconnection of heavy loads or trip of big
generation plants.

382
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

Power swing detection function ZMRPSB is used to detect power swings and
initiate block of all distance protection zones. Occurrence of earth-fault currents
during a power swing inhibits the ZMRPSB function, to allow fault clearance.

7.13.3 Function block

ZMRPSB
I3P* START
U3P* ZOUT
BLOCK ZIN
BLKI01
BLKI02
BLK1PH
REL1PH
BLK2PH
REL2PH
I0CHECK
TRSP
EXTERNAL

IEC06000264-2-en.vsd
IEC06000264 V2 EN

Figure 192: ZMRPSB function block

7.13.4 Signals
Table 172: ZMRPSB Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKI01 BOOLEAN 0 Block inhibit of start output for slow swing condition
BLKI02 BOOLEAN 0 Block inhibit of start output for subsequent
residual current detection
BLK1PH BOOLEAN 0 Block one-out-of-three-phase operating mode
REL1PH BOOLEAN 0 Release one-out-of-three-phase operating mode
BLK2PH BOOLEAN 0 Block two-out-of-three-phase operating mode
REL2PH BOOLEAN 0 Release two-out-of-three-phase operating mode
I0CHECK BOOLEAN 0 Residual current (3I0) detection used to inhibit
start output
TRSP BOOLEAN 0 Single-pole tripping command issued by tripping
function
EXTERNAL BOOLEAN 0 Input for external detection of power swing

383
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

Table 173: ZMRPSB Output signals

Name Type Description
START BOOLEAN Power swing detected
ZOUT BOOLEAN Measured impedance within outer impedance
boundary
ZIN BOOLEAN Measured impedance within inner impedance
boundary

7.13.5 Settings
Table 174: ZMRPSB Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode On / Off
On
X1InFw 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Inner reactive boundary, forward
R1LIn 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Line resistance for inner characteristic
angle
R1FInFw 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance coverage to inner
resistive line, forward
X1InRv 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Inner reactive boundary, reverse
R1FInRv 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance line to inner resistive
boundary, reverse
OperationLdCh Off - - On Operation of load discrimination
On characteristic
RLdOutFw 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Outer resistive load boundary, forward
ArgLd 5 - 70 Deg 1 25 Load angle determining load impedance
area
RLdOutRv 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Outer resistive load boundary, reverse
kLdRFw 0.50 - 0.90 Mult 0.01 0.75 Multiplication factor for inner resistive
load boundary, forward
kLdRRv 0.50 - 0.90 Mult 0.01 0.75 Multiplication factor for inner resistive
load boundary, reverse
tEF 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Timer for overcoming single-pole
reclosing dead time
IMinOpPE 5 - 30 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate current in % of IBase

Table 175: ZMRPSB Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tP1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.045 Timer for detection of initial power swing
tP2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.015 Timer for detection of subsequent power
swings
tW 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.250 Waiting timer for activation of tP2 timer
Table continues on next page

384
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tH 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.500 Timer for holding power swing START
output
tR1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Timer giving delay to inhibit by the
residual current
tR2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Timer giving delay to inhibit at very slow
swing

Table 176: ZMRPSB Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

7.13.6 Operation principle

Power swing detection (ZMRPSB ) function comprises an inner and an outer
quadrilateral measurement characteristic with load encroachment, as shown in
figure 193.

Its principle of operation is based on the measurement of the time it takes for a
power swing transient impedance to pass through the impedance area between the
outer and the inner characteristics. Power swings are identified by transition times
longer than a transition time set on corresponding timers. The impedance
measuring principle is the same as that used for the distance protection zones. The
impedance and the characteristic passing times are measured in all three phases
separately.

One-out-of-three or two-out-of-three operating modes can be selected according to

the specific system operating conditions.

385
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

X1OutFw jX ZL R1LIn
X1InFw DFw

j
DRv
R1FInRv R1FInFw
DFw
ArgLd j

ArgLd
DRv
DFw

DFw

R
DFw
DRv

DFw
RLdInRv RLdInFw

DRv
RLdOutRv RLdOutFw

j DRv X1InRv
X1OutRv

IEC09000222_1_en.vsd
IEC09000222 V1 EN

Figure 193: Operating characteristic for ZMRPSB function (setting parameters

in italic)

The impedance measurement within ZMRPSB function is performed by solving

equation 100 and equation 101 (n = 1, 2, 3 for each corresponding phase L1, L2
and L3).

ULn
Re Rset
I Ln
EQUATION1183 V2 EN (Equation 100)

ULn
Im Xset
ILn
EQUATION1184 V2 EN (Equation 101)

The Rset and Xset are R and X boundaries.

7.13.6.1 Resistive reach in forward direction

To avoid load encroachment, the resistive reach is limited in forward direction by

setting the parameter RLdOutFw which is the outer resistive load boundary value
while the inner resistive boundary is calculated according to equation 102.

386
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

RLdInFw = kLdRFwRLdOutFw
EQUATION1185 V2 EN (Equation 102)

where:
kLdRFw is a settable multiplication factor less than 1

The slope of the load encroachment inner and outer boundary is defined by setting
the parameter ArgLd.

The load encroachment in the fourth quadrant uses the same settings as in the first
quadrant (same ArgLd and RLdOutFw and calculated value RLdInFw).

The quadrilateral characteristic in the first quadrant is tilted to get a better

adaptation to the distance measuring zones. The angle is the same as the line angle
and derived from the setting of the reactive reach inner boundary X1InFw and the
line resistance for the inner boundary R1LIn. The fault resistance coverage for the
inner boundary is set by the parameter R1FInFw.

From the setting parameter RLdOutFw and the calculated value RLdInFw a
distance between the inner and outer boundary, DFw, is calculated. This value is
valid for R direction in first and fourth quadrant and for X direction in first and
second quadrant.

7.13.6.2 Resistive reach in reverse direction

To avoid load encroachment in reverse direction, the resistive reach is limited by

setting the parameter RLdOutRv for the outer boundary of the load encroachment
zone. The distance to the inner resistive load boundary RLdInRv is determined by
using the setting parameter kLdRRv in equation 103.

RLdInRv = kLdRRvRLdOutRv
EQUATION1187 V2 EN (Equation 103)

where:
kLdRRv is a settable multiplication factor less than 1

From the setting parameter RLdOutRv and the calculated value RLdInRv, a
distance between the inner and outer boundary, DRv, is calculated. This value is
valid for R direction in second and third quadrant and for X direction in third and
fourth quadrant.

The inner resistive characteristic in the second quadrant outside the load
encroachment part corresponds to the setting parameter R1FInRv for the inner
boundary. The outer boundary is internally calculated as the sum of DRv+R1FInRv.

387
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

The inner resistive characteristic in the third quadrant outside the load
encroachment zone consist of the sum of the settings R1FInRv and the line
resistance R1LIn. The argument of the tilted lines outside the load encroachment is
the same as the tilted lines in the first quadrant. The distance between the inner and
outer boundary is the same as for the load encroachment in reverse direction, that is
DRv.

7.13.6.3 Reactive reach in forward and reverse direction

The inner characteristic for the reactive reach in forward direction correspond to
the setting parameter X1InFw and the outer boundary is defined as X1InFw + DFw,

where:
DFw = RLdOutFw - KLdRFw RLdOutFw

The inner characteristic for the reactive reach in reverse direction correspond to the
setting parameter X1InRv for the inner boundary and the outer boundary is defined
as X1InRv + DRv.

where:
DRv = RLdOutRv - KLdRRv RLdOutRv

7.13.6.4 Basic detection logic

The operation of the Power swing detection ZMRPSB is only released if the
magnitude of the current is above the setting of the min operating current,
IMinOpPE.

ZMRPSB function can operate in two operating modes:

The 1 out of 3 operating mode is based on detection of power swing in any of

the three phases. Figure 194 presents a composition of an internal detection
signal DET-L1 in this particular phase.
The 2 out of 3 operating mode is based on detection of power swing in at least
two out of three phases. Figure 195 presents a composition of the detection
signals DET1of3 and DET2of3.

Signals ZOUTLn (outer boundary) and ZINLn (inner boundary) in figure 194 are
related to the operation of the impedance measuring elements in each phase
separately (n represents the corresponding L1, L2 and L3). They are internal
signals, calculated by ZMRPSB function.

The tP1 timer in figure 194 serve as detection of initial power swings, which are
usually not as fast as the later swings are. The tP2 timer become activated for the
detection of the consecutive swings, if the measured impedance exit the operate
area and returns within the time delay, set on the tW waiting timer. The upper part

388
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

of figure 194 (internal input signal ZOUTL1, ZINL1, AND-gates and tP-timers)
are duplicated for phase L2 and L3. All tP1 and tP2 timers in the figure have the
same settings.

ZOUTL1 AND
0-tP1
ZINL1 0 OR
-loop
0-tP2
-loop
AND
0
OR DET-L1
AND AND

ZOUTL2 OR
ZOUTL3

detected 0
0-tW

IEC05000113-2-en.vsd
IEC05000113 V2 EN

Figure 194: Detection of power swing in phase L1

DET-L1
DET-L2 DET1of3 - int.
>1
DET-L3

&

DET2of3 - int.
& >1

&

IEC01000057-2-en.vsd
IEC01000057-TIFF V2 EN

Figure 195: Detection of power swing for 1-of-3 and 2-of-3 operating mode

389
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

ZOUTL1 ZOUT
OR
ZOUTL2 ZINL1
ZIN
ZOUTL3 AND ZINL2 OR

ZINL3
tEF
TRSP
t AND

I0CHECK

10 ms
AND t
BLKI02 OR

tR1
AND t INHIBIT
OR
-loop
tR2
BLKI01 AND t
BLOCK
-loop
DET1of3 - int.
REL1PH
AND
BLK1PH
tH
DET2of3 - int. OR t
REL2PH
AND
BLK2PH OR START
AND
EXTERNAL

en05000114.vsd
IEC05000114 V1 EN

Figure 196: Simplified block diagram for ZMRPSB function

7.13.6.5 Operating and inhibit conditions

Figure 196 presents a simplified logic diagram for the Power swing detection
function ZMRPSB. The internal signals DET1of3 and DET2of3 relate to the
detailed logic diagrams in figure 194 and figure 195 respectively.

Selection of the operating mode is possible by the proper configuration of the

functional input signals REL1PH, BLK1PH, REL2PH, and BLK2PH.

The load encroachment characteristic can be switched off by setting the parameter
OperationLdCh = Off, but notice that the DFw and DRv will still be calculated from
RLdOutFw and RLdOutRv. The characteristic will in this case be only quadrilateral.

There are four different ways to form the internal INHIBIT signal:

390
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

Logical 1 on functional input BLOCK inhibits the output START signal

instantaneously.
The INHIBIT internal signal is activated, if the power swing has been detected
and the measured impedance remains within its operate characteristic for the
time, which is longer than the time delay set on tR2 timer. It is possible to
disable this condition by connecting the logical 1 signal to the BLKI01
functional input.
The INHIBIT internal signal is activated after the time delay, set on tR1 timer,
if an earth-fault appears during the power swing (input IOCHECK is high) and
the power swing has been detected before the earth-fault (activation of the
signal I0CHECK). It is possible to disable this condition by connecting the
logical 1 signal to the BLKI02 functional input.
The INHIBIT logical signals becomes logical 1, if the functional input
I0CHECK appears within the time delay, set on tEF timer and the impedance
has been seen within the outer characteristic of ZMRPSB operate
characteristic in all three phases. This function prevents the operation of
ZMRPSB function in cases, when the circuit breaker closes onto persistent
single-phase fault after single-phase autoreclosing dead time, if the initial single-
phase fault and single-phase opening of the circuit breaker causes the power
swing in the remaining two phases.

7.13.7 Technical data

Table 177: ZMRPSB technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Reactive reach (0.10-3000.00) W/phase 2.0% static accuracy
Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Resistive reach (0.101000.00) W/loop Angle: at 0 degrees and 85
degrees
Power swing detection operate (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 10 ms whichever
time is greater
Second swing reclaim operate (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 20 ms whichever
time is greater
Minimum operate current (5-30)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir

7.14 Power swing logic PSLPSCH

7.14.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Power swing logic PSLPSCH - -

391
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

7.14.2 Functionality
Power Swing Logic (PSLPSCH) is a complementary function to Power Swing
Detection (ZMRPSB) function. It provides possibility for selective tripping of
faults on power lines during system oscillations (power swings or pole slips), when
the distance protection function should normally be blocked. The complete logic
consists of two different parts:

Communication and tripping part: provides selective tripping on the basis of

special distance protection zones and a scheme communication logic, which
are not blocked during the system oscillations.
Blocking part: blocks unwanted operation of instantaneous distance protection
zone 1 for oscillations, which are initiated by faults and their clearing on the
adjacent power lines and other primary elements.

7.14.3 Function block

PSLPSCH
BLOCK TRIP
STZMUR STZMURPS
STZMOR BLKZMUR
STPSD BLKZMOR
STDEF CS
STZMPSD
CACC
AR1P1
CSUR
CR

IEC07000026-3-en.vsd
IEC07000026 V3 EN

Figure 197: PSLPSCH function block

7.14.4 Signals
Table 178: PSLPSCH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
STZMUR BOOLEAN 0 Start of the underreaching zone
STZMOR BOOLEAN 0 Start of the overreaching zone
STPSD BOOLEAN 0 Power swing detected
STDEF BOOLEAN 0 Start from Earth Fault Protection in forward or
reverse direction
STZMPSD BOOLEAN 0 Operation of Power Swing Detection external
characteristic
CACC BOOLEAN 0 Overreaching ZM zone to be accelerated
AR1P1 BOOLEAN 0 Single pole auto-reclosing in progress
CSUR BOOLEAN 0 Carrier send by the underreaching power-swing
zone
CR BOOLEAN 0 Carrier receive signal during power swing
detection operation

392
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

Table 179: PSLPSCH Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip through Power Swing Logic
STZMURPS BOOLEAN Start of Underreaching zone controlled by PSL to
be used in configuration
BLKZMUR BOOLEAN Block trip of underreaching impedance zone
BLKZMOR BOOLEAN Block trip of overreaching distance protection
zones
CS BOOLEAN Carrier send signal controlled by the power swing

7.14.5 Settings
Table 180: PSLPSCH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
tDZ 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.050 Permitted max oper time diff between
higher and lower zone
tDZMUR 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Delay for oper of underreach zone with
detected diff in oper time
tCS 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Conditional timer for sending the CS at
power swings
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Conditional timer for tripping at power
swings
tBlkTr 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Timer for blocking the overreaching
zones trip

7.14.6 Operation principle

7.14.6.1 Communication and tripping logic

Communication and tripping logic as used by the power swing distance protection
zones is schematically presented in figure 198.

393
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

STDEF
AR1P1 &

STPSD tCS
CS
BLOCK & t &

CSUR
BLKZMPS
tBlkTr &
tTrip t
t

CACC TRIP
>1
CR &

en06000236.vsd
IEC06000236 V1 EN

Figure 198: Simplified logic diagram power swing communication and tripping
logic

The complete logic remains blocked as long as there is a logical one on the
BLOCK functional input signal. Presence of the logical one on the STDEF
functional input signal also blocks the logic as long as this block is not released by
the logical one on the AR1P1 functional input signal. The functional output signal
BLKZMPS remains logical one as long as the function is not blocked externally
(BLOCK is logical zero) and the earth-fault is detected on protected line (STDEF
is logical one), which is connected in three-phase mode (AR1P1 is logical zero).
Timer tBlkTr prolongs the duration of this blocking condition, if the measured
impedance remains within the operate area of the Power Swing Detection
(ZMRPSB) function (STPSD input active). The BLKZMPS can be used to block
the operation of the power-swing zones.

Logical one on functional input CSUR, which is normally connected to the TRIP
functional output of a power swing carrier sending zone, activates functional output
CS, if the function is not blocked by one of the above conditions. It also activates
the TRIP functional output.

Initiation of the CS functional output is possible only, if the STPSD input has been
active longer than the time delay set on the security timer tCS.

Simultaneous presence of the functional input signals PLTR_CRD and CR (local

trip condition) also activates the TRIP functional output, if the function is not
blocked by one of the above conditions and the STPSD signal has been present
longer then the time delay set on the trip timer tTrip.

7.14.6.2 Blocking logic

Figure 199 presents the logical circuits, which control the operation of the
underreaching zone (zone 1) at power swings, caused by the faults and their
clearance on the remote power lines.

394
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

&

BLKZMH
&
STZML tZL
STZMLL
BLOCK & t >1
&
STMZH tDZ
STZMPSD & t
>1
STPSD

&
-loop

en06000237.vsd
IEC06000237 V1 EN

Figure 199: Control of underreaching distance protection (Zone 1) at power

swings caused by the faults and their clearance on adjacent lines
and other system elements

The logic is disabled by a logical one on functional input BLOCK. It can start only
if the following conditions are simultaneously fulfilled:

STPSD functional input signal must be a logical zero. This means, that Power
swing detection (ZMRPSB) function must not detect power swinging over the
protected power line.
STZMPSD functional input must be a logical one. This means that the
impedance must be detected within the external boundary of ZMRPSB function.
STZMOR functional input must be a logical one. This means that the fault
must be detected by the overreaching distance protection zone, for example
zone 2.

The STZMURPS functional output, which can be used in complete terminal logic
instead of a normal distance protection zone 1, becomes active under the following
conditions:

If the STZMUR signal appears at the same time as the STZMOR or if it

appears with a time delay, which is shorter than the time delay set on timer
tDZ.
If the STZMUR signal appears after the STZMOR signal with a time delay
longer than the delay set on the tDZ timer, and remains active longer than the
time delay set on the tZL timer.

The BLKZMOR functional output signal can be used to block the operation of the
higher distance protection zone, if the fault has moved into the zone 1 operate area
after tDZ time delay.

395
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

Table 181: PSLPSCH technical data

Function
Permitted maximum
operating time difference
between higher and lower
zone
Delay for operation of
underreach zone with
detected difference in
operating time
Conditional timer for sending
the CS at power swings
Conditional timer for tripping
at power swings
Timer for blocking the
overreaching zones trip
Range or value Accuracy
(0.000 60.0000) s 0,2% or 15 ms
whichever is greater
(0.000 60.0000) s 0,2% or 15 ms
whichever is greater
(0.000 60.0000) s 0,2% or 15 ms
whichever is greater
(0.000 60.0000) s 0,2% or 15 ms
whichever is greater
(0.000 60.0000) s 0,2% or 15 ms
whichever is greater

7.15 Pole slip protection PSPPPAM

7.15.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Pole slip protection PSPPPAM Ucos 78

7.15.2 Functionality
Sudden events in an electric power system such as large changes in load, fault
occurrence or fault clearance, can cause power oscillations referred to as power
swings. In a non-recoverable situation, the power swings become so severe that the
synchronism is lost, a condition referred to as pole slipping. The main purpose of
the pole slip protection (PSPPPAM) is to detect, evaluate, and take the required
action for pole slipping occurrences in the power system.

396
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.15.3 Function block

PSPPPAM
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRIP1
BLOCK TRIP2
BLKGEN START
BLKMOTOR ZONE1
EXTZONE1 ZONE2
GEN
MOTOR
SFREQ
SLIPZOHM
SLIPZPER
UCOS
UCOSPER

IEC10000045-1-en.vsd
IEC10000045 V1 EN

Figure 200: PSPPPAM function block

7.15.4 Signals
Table 182: PSPPPAM Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Current group connection
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage group connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKGEN BOOLEAN 0 Block operation in generating direction
BLKMOTOR BOOLEAN 0 Block operation in motor direction
EXTZONE1 BOOLEAN 0 Extension of zone1 with zone2 region

Table 183: PSPPPAM Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRIP1 BOOLEAN Trip1 after the N1Limit slip in zone1
TRIP2 BOOLEAN Trip2 after the N2Limit slip in zone2
START BOOLEAN Common start signal
ZONE1 BOOLEAN First slip in zone1 region
ZONE2 BOOLEAN First slip in zone2 region
GEN BOOLEAN Generator is faster than the system
MOTOR BOOLEAN Generator is slower than the system
SFREQ REAL Slip frequency
SLIPZOHM REAL Slip impedance in ohms
SLIPZPER REAL Slip impedance in percent of ZBase
UCOS REAL UCosPhi voltage
UCOSPER REAL UCosPhi voltage in percent of UBase

397
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

7.15.5 Settings
Table 184: PSPPPAM Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation On / Off
On
OperationZ1 Off - - On Operation Zone1 On / Off
On
OperationZ2 Off - - On Operation Zone2 On / Off
On
ImpedanceZA 0.00 - 1000.00 % 0.01 10.00 Forward impedance in % of Zbase
ImpedanceZB 0.00 - 1000.00 % 0.01 10.00 Reverse impedance in % of Zbase
ImpedanceZC 0.00 - 1000.00 % 0.01 10.00 Impedance of zone1 limit in % of Zbase
AnglePhi 72.00 - 90.00 Deg 0.01 85.00 Angle of the slip impedance line
StartAngle 0.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 110.0 Rotor angle for the start signal
TripAngle 0.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 90.0 Rotor angle for the trip1 and trip2 signals
N1Limit 1 - 20 - 1 1 Count limit for the trip1 signal
N2Limit 1 - 20 - 1 3 Count limit for the trip2 signal

Table 185: PSPPPAM Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ResetTime 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time without slip to reset all signals

Table 186: PSPPPAM Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MeasureMode PosSeq - - PosSeq Measuring mode (PosSeq, L1L2, L2L3,
L1L2 L3L1)
L2L3
L3L1
InvertCTcurr No - - No Invert current direction
Yes
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

398
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.15.6 Monitored data

Table 187: PSPPPAM Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
SFREQ REAL - Hz Slip frequency
SLIPZOHM REAL - Ohm Slip impedance in ohms
SLIPZPER REAL - % Slip impedance in
percent of ZBase
UCOS REAL - kV UCosPhi voltage
UCOSPER REAL - % UCosPhi voltage in
percent of UBase

7.15.7 Operation principle

If the generator is faster than the power system, the rotor movement in the
impedance and voltage diagram is from right to left and generating is signaled. If
the generator is slower than the power system, the rotor movement is from left to
right and motoring is signaled (the power system drives the generator as if it were a
motor).

The movements in the impedance plane can be seen in Figure 201. The transient
behavior is described by the transient EMF's EA and EB, and by X'd, XT and the
transient system impedance ZS.

399
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

Zone 1 Zone 2

EB Xd XT XS EA

IED
B A

jX

XS

Pole slip
impedance XT
d Apparent generator
movement impedance R

Xd

IEC06000437_2_en.vsd
IEC06000437 V2 EN

Figure 201: Movements in the impedance plain

where:
X'd = transient reactance of the generator

XT = short-circuit reactance of the step-up transformer

ZS = impedance of the power system A

The detection of rotor angle is enabled when:

the minimum current exceeds 0.10 IN (IN is IBase parameter set under general
setting).
the maximum voltage falls below 0.92 UBase
the voltage Ucos (the voltage in phase with the generator current) has an
angular velocity of 0.2...8 Hz and
the corresponding direction is not blocked.

400
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

en07000004.vsd
IEC07000004 V1 EN

Figure 202: Different generator quantities as function of the angle between the
equivalent generators

An alarm is given when movement of the rotor is detected and the rotor angle
exceeds the angle set for 'WarnAngle'.

Slipping is detected when:

a change of rotor angle of min. 50 ms is recognized

the slip line is crossed between ZA and ZB.

When the impedance crosses the slip line between ZB and ZC it counts as being in
zone 1 and between ZC and ZA in zone 2. The entire distance ZA-ZB becomes zone
1 when signal EXTZONE1 is high (external device detects the direction of the
centre of slipping).

After the first slip, the signals ZONE1 or ZONE2 and depending on the direction
of slip - either GEN or MOTOR are issued.

Every time pole slipping is detected, the impedance of the point where the slip line
is crossed and the instantaneous slip frequency are displayed as measurements.

Further slips are only detected, if they are in the same direction and if the rate of
rotor movement has reduced in relation to the preceding slip or the slip line is
crossed in the opposite direction outside ZA-ZB. A further slip in the opposite
direction within ZA-ZB resets all the signals and is then signalled itself as a first slip.

401
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

The TRIP1 tripping command and signal are generated after N1 slips in zone 1,
providing the rotor angle is less than TripAngle. The TRIP2 signal is generated
after N2 slips in zone 2, providing the rotor angle is less than TripAngle.

All signals are reset if:

the direction of movement reverses

the rotor angle detector resets without a slip being counted or
no rotor relative movement was detected during the time ResetTime.

Imin > 0.10 IBase

Ucosj < 0.92 UBase AND

START
AND
0.2 Slip.Freq. 8 Hz

d startAngle

ZONE1
AND
Z cross line ZA - ZC

ZONE2
AND
Z cross line ZC - ZB

Counter
a
ab
N1Limit b TRIP1
AND

d tripAngle TRIP
OR

Counter
a
N2Limit b ab TRIP2
AND

en07000005.vsd

IEC07000005 V1 EN

Figure 203: Simplified logic diagram for pole slip protection PSPPPAM

7.15.8 Technical data

Table 188: PSPPPAM technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Impedance reach (0.00 - 1000.00)% of Zbase 2.0% of Ur/Ir

Zone 1 and Zone 2 trip counters (1 - 20) -

402
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.16 Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM

7.16.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM 78

<

7.16.2 Functionality
The out-of-step protection OOSPPAM function in the IED can be used for both
generator protection and as well for line protection applications.

The main purpose of the OOSPPAM function is to detect, evaluate, and take the
required action during pole slipping occurrences in the power system.

The OOSPPAM function detects pole slip conditions and trips the generator as fast
as possible, after the first pole-slip if the center of oscillation is found to be in zone
1, which normally includes the generator and its step-up power transformer. If the
center of oscillation is found to be further out in the power system, in zone 2, more
than one pole-slip is usually allowed before the generator-transformer unit is
disconnected. A parameter setting is available to take into account the circuit
breaker opening time. If there are several out-of-step relays in the power system,
then the one which finds the center of oscillation in its zone 1 should operate first.

Two current channels I3P1 and I3P2 are available in OOSPPAM function to allow
the direct connection of two groups of three-phase currents; that may be needed for
very powerful generators, with stator windings split into two groups per phase,
when each group is equipped with current transformers. The protection function
performs a simple summation of the currents of the two channels I3P1 and I3P2.

7.16.3 Function block

OOSPPAM
I3P1* TRIP
I3P2* TRIPZ1
U3P* TRIPZ2
BLOCK START
BLKGEN GENMODE
BLKMOT MOTMODE
EXTZ1 R
X
SLIPFREQ
ROTORANG
UCOSPHI

IEC12000188-3-en.vsd
IEC12000188 V3 EN

Figure 204: OOSPPAM function block

403
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

7.16.4 Signals
Table 189: OOSPPAM Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P1 GROUP - Group connection for three-phase current input 1
SIGNAL
I3P2 GROUP - Group connection for three-phase current input 2
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group connection for three-phase voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKGEN BOOLEAN 0 Block operation in generating direction
BLKMOT BOOLEAN 0 Block operation in motor direction
EXTZ1 BOOLEAN 0 Extension of zone1 reach to zone2 settings

Table 190: OOSPPAM Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip, issued when either zone 1 or zone
2 give trip
TRIPZ1 BOOLEAN Zone 1 trip
TRIPZ2 BOOLEAN Zone 2 trip
START BOOLEAN Set when measured impedance enters lens
characteristic
GENMODE BOOLEAN Generator rotates faster than the system during
pole slip
MOTMODE BOOLEAN Generator rotates slower than the system during
pole slip
R REAL Real part of measured positive-sequence
impedance % of UBase/(sqrt(3)*IBase)
X REAL Imaginary part of measured positive-seq
impedance % of UBase/(sqrt(3)*IBase)
SLIPFREQ REAL Slip frequency in Hz
ROTORANG REAL Rotor angle as estimated by the out-of-step
function
UCOSPHI REAL Estimated Ucos(Phi) voltage during pole slip, in V

404
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.16.5 Settings
Table 191: OOSPPAM Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationZ1 Off - - On Operation Zone1 Off / On
On
ReachZ1 1.00 - 100.00 % ZFw 0.01 50.00 Percentage part of total forward
impedance; defines Z1 reach
OperationZ2 Off - - On Operation Zone2 Off / On
On
tBreaker 0.000 - 1.000 s 0.001 0.040 Breaker opening time; use default 0s
value if it is unknown

Table 192: OOSPPAM Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
NoOfSlipsZ1 1 - 20 - 1 1 Number of pole-slips in zone 1 required
to get zone 1 trip
NoOfSlipsZ2 1 - 60 - 1 3 Number of pole-slips in zone 2 required
to get zone 2 trip
tReset 1.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 6.000 Time without any slip required to
completely reset function

Table 193: OOSPPAM Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
ForwardR 0.00 - 1000.00 %ZB 0.01 1.00 Real part of total forward impedance for
Z2, in % of UBase/(sqrt(3)*IBase)
ForwardX 0.00 - 1000.00 %ZB 0.01 10.00 Imag. part of total forward impedance for
Z2, in % of UBase/(sqrt(3)*IBase)
ReverseR 0.00 - 1000.00 %ZB 0.01 1.00 Real part of source impedance behind
relay, in % of UBase/(sqrt(3)*IBase)
ReverseX 0.00 - 1000.00 %ZB 0.01 10.00 Imag. part of source impedance behind
relay, in % of UBase/(sqrt(3)*IBase)
InvertCTCurr No - - No Invert current direction
Yes

Table 194: OOSPPAM Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
StartAngle 90.0 - 130.0 Deg 0.1 110.0 Angle between two rotors to get the start
signal, in deg
TripAngle 15.0 - 90.0 Deg 0.1 60.0 Maximum rotor angle to allow trip
signals, in deg

405
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

7.16.6 Monitored data

Table 195: OOSPPAM Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CURRENT REAL - A Magnitude of the
measured positive-
sequence current, in A
VOLTAGE REAL - kV Magnitude of the
measured positive-
sequence voltage, in V
R REAL - % Real part of measured
positive-sequence
impedance % of UBase/
(sqrt(3)*IBase)
X REAL - % Imaginary part of
measured positive-seq
impedance % of UBase/
(sqrt(3)*IBase)
SLIPFREQ REAL - Hz Slip frequency in Hz
ROTORANG REAL - deg Rotor angle as estimated
by the out-of-step
function
UCOSPHI REAL - kV Estimated Ucos(Phi)
voltage during pole slip,
in V

7.16.7 Operation principle

General
Under balanced and stable conditions, a generator operates with a constant rotor
angle (power angle), delivering active electrical power to the power system, which
is approximately equal to the input mechanical power on the generator axis.The
currents and voltages are constant and stable. An out-of-step condition is
characterized by periodic changes in the rotor angle, that leads to a wild flow of the
synchronizing power; so there are also periodic changes of rotational speed,
currents and voltages. When displayed in the complex impedance plane, these
changes are characterized by a cyclic change in the complex load impedance Z(R,
X) as measured at the terminals of the generator, or at the location of the
instrument transformers of a power line connecting two power subsystems. This is
shown in Figure 205.

406
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

1.5 trajectory
of Z(R, X)

to the 3rd
The 2nd pole-slip

Imaginary part (X) of Z in Ohms

1 The 1st X in Ohms
pole slip
pole slip
occurred Pre-disturbance
occurred
RE normal load
- - - - -
- - - - ----------- - - - - Z(R, X)
0.5 - ---
3 ----
---- --
Zone 2 -- - 1 ---- - 0
- - 2 -- -
- --- -
^ --^ ^ ^ ^ --^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ---- -
-
- -- ^ ^-- ^ ^ ^ -^
Zone 1
0 -
- ---- --- -
-
- -
-- relay --
- -
- --- -- - R in Ohms
limit of reach -- -- -- -
-
-- --- -- -
--
lens determined - - ----- ------ 0- - - pre-disturbance Z(R, X)
- -
------
- -- - - - --- -
-0.5 by the setting - 1 Z(R, X) under 3-phase fault
StartAngle = 120 SE 2 Z(R, X) when fault cleared
3 Z when pole-slip declared

-1
-1.5 -1 -0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5
Real part (R) of Z in Ohms
IEC10000109-1-en.vsd
IEC10000109 V1 EN

Figure 205: Loci of the complex impedance Z(R, X) for a typical case of
generator losing step after a short circuit that was not cleared fast
enough

Under typical, normal load conditions, when the protected generator supplies the
active and the reactive power to the power system, the complex impedance Z(R, X)
is in the 1st quadrant, point 0 in Figure 205. One can see that under a three-phase
fault conditions, the centre of oscillation is at the point of fault, point 1, which is
logical, as all three voltages are zero or near zero at that point. Under the fault
conditions the generator accelerated and when the fault was finally cleared, the
complex impedance Z(R, X) jumped to the point 2. By that time, the generator has
already lost its step, Z(R, X) continues its way from the right-hand side to the left-
hand side, and the 1st pole-slip cannot be avoided. If the generator is not
immediately disconnected, it will continue pole-slipping see Figure 205, where
two pole-slips (two pole-slip cycles) are shown. Under out-of-step conditions, the
centre of oscillation is where the locus of the complex impedance Z(R, X) crosses
the (impedance) line connecting the points SE (Sending End), and RE (Receiving
End). The point on the SE RE line where the trajectory of Z(R, X) crosses the
impedance line can change with time and is mainly a function of the internal
induced voltages at both ends of the equivalent two-machine system, that is, at
points SE and RE.

Measurement of the magnitude, direction and rate-of-change of load impedance

relative to a generators terminals provides a convenient and generally reliable
means of detecting whether machines are out-of-step and pole-slipping is taking
place. Measurement of the rotor (power) angle is important as well.

Rotor (power) angle can be thought of as the angle between the two lines,
connecting point 0 in Figure 205, that is, Z(R, X) under normal load, with the

407
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

points SE and RE, respectively. These two lines are not shown in Figure 205.
Normal values of the power angle, that is, under stable, steady-state, load
conditions, are from 30 to 60 electrical degrees. It can be observed in Figure 206
that the angle reaches 180 degrees when the complex impedance Z(R, X) crosses
the impedance line SE RE. It then changes the sign, and continues from -180
degrees to 0 degrees, and so on. Figure 206 shows the rotor (power) angle and the
magnitude of Z(R, X) against time for the case from Figure 205.

4
|Z| in Ohms
rotor (power)
3 normal angle in rad
angle
Impe dance Z in Ohm and rotor a ngle in radian

load
Z(R, X) unde r fa ult lies |Z|
2
on the impe dance line
or nea r (for 3-ph faults )
1
0
0
fault 500 ms
-1 fa ult
occ urrs
Unde r 3-pha s e fa ult
condition rotor a ngle 3
-2
of a pp. 180 de gre e s
is m e a s ure d ...
2
-3 Z(R,X) cros s e d
1 1 the im pe da nce line , Z-line ,
conne cting points S E - RE
-4
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400
Time in millis econds

IEC10000110-2-en.vsd
IEC10000110 V2 EN

Figure 206: Rotor (power) angle and magnitude of the complex impedance
Z(R, X) against the time

In order to be able to fully understand the principles of OOSPPAM, a stable case,

that is, a case where the disturbance does not make a generator to go out-of-step,
must be shown.

408
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

1
SE RE
G X [Ohm]
0.8 Z(R,X) 20 ms
fault
relay after line out
- - - RE - - -
0.6 - - -- -
-- ---- ----- 4 - - pre-fault

Imaginary part (X) of Z in Ohms

- -- ---
zone 2 - - - - -
-- --- - Z(R,X)
0.4 - ---- --- 2 -
- -
- -- -1 5
- ---- fault --- -
0.2 X-line ^ -^ ^ ^ ^ ---^ ^ 3 -- -
- ^ ^ -
^ ^ ^ ^ ^-- ^ ^ ^ -^
-
--
- --- Z-line -- - 0
- --- --- - 6
0 - -- -- -
- --
- --- - R
limit of - -
-- relay lens - -- -
-- -
-0.2 reach - -- 110 ---- -
zone 1- - --- - -
--- --- -
- --- --- -
-0.4 -- --- ------ -
-- -- -- --
- - -- - - -- - -
-0.6 SE
0 pre-fault Z(R, X)
this circle forms 3 Z(R, X) under fault
-0.8 the right-hand side 5 Z 20 ms after line out
edge of the lens 6 pow er line reclosed
-1
-1 -0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5
Real part (R) of Z in Ohms IEC10000111-1-en.vsd
IEC10000111 V1 EN

Figure 207: A stable case where the disturbance does not make the generator
to go out-of-step

It shall be observed that for a stable case, as shown in Figure 207, where the
disturbance does not cause the generator to lose step, the complex impedance Z(R,
X) exits the lens characteristic on the same side (point 4) it entered it (point 2), and
never re-enters the lens. In a stable case, where the protected generator remains in
synchronism, the complex impedance returns to quadrant 1, and, after the
oscillations fade, it returns to the initial normal load position (point 0), or near.

7.16.7.1 Lens characteristic

A precondition in order to be able to construct a suitable lens characteristic is that

the power system in which OOSPPAM is installed, is modeled as a two-machine
equivalent system, or as a single machine infinite bus equivalent power system.
Then the impedances from the position of OOSPPAM in the direction of the
normal load flow (that is from the measurement point to the remote system) can be
taken as forward. The lens characteristic, as shown in Figure205 and Figure207, is
obtained so that two equal in size but differently offset Mho characteristics are set
to overlap. The resultant lens characteristic is the loci of complex impedance Z(R,
X) for which the rotor (power) angle is constant, for example 110 degrees or 120
degrees; if the rotor (power) angle approaches this value, then there is a high risk to
have an out of step condition. The limit-of- reach circle is constructed
automatically by the algorithm; it is about 10% wider than the the circle that has
the line SE-RE as diameter (that is the out-of-step characteristic which corresponds
to the rotor (power) angle of 90 degrees). Figure 208 illustrates construction of the
lens characteristic for a power system.

409
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

X
Position of the OOS
- - - RE- - -
0.6 - - - - relay is the origin of
- - --
- -- ----
- -- -the R - X plane
- - --- Ze --
---
-
- Zone 2 -- -
0.4 X-line - - - - -

Imaginary part (X) of Z in Ohms

--
- --
- -
-- -
determined -- Zline
- - -- -
by the ^ ^- ^ -
- --
0.2 ^ ^ ^-- ^ - -
setting - - ^ ^ ^ ^ - -
--- ^ ^ ^ --- ^
ReachZ1 - -- -- ^ ^ ^-
Ztr
- --- -- - R
0 - Zone 1 -- --
- -
-- relay -
- -- 120 -- Z(R,X) -
- -- -- -
- Z-line ---
-0.2 - -- Zgen -
-- --
limit-of-reach -
-
-- --- -
-- Lens is the - locus
--
--
circle depends on - --
-- -- of constant
-
rotor (power)
-0.4 - -- --- -
the position of the -
- - -- - --- angle,
-
- e.g. 120.
-
points SE and RE - - -- - - - - - -Lens' width determined
SE
-0.6 by the setting StartAngle

-0.8 -0.6 -0.4 -0.2 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1

Real part (R) of Z in Ohms
IEC10000112-1-en.vsd
IEC10000112 V1 EN

Figure 208: Construction of the lens characteristic for a power system

ReverseZ
ReverseZ(ReverseR, ReverseX)) ForwardZ(ForwardR, ForwardX)

Zgen(Rgen , Xgen) Ztr(Rtr, Xtr) Zline(Rline, Xline) Zeq(Req, Xeq)

Generator Transformer Infinite power

13.8 kV 13.8 / 220 kV system
Power line System
13.8 kV 220 kV equivalent
G d Y

SE RE

Out-Of-Step ReverseR = Rg ForwardR = Rtr + Rline + Req

REG ReverseX = Xd ForwardX = Xtr + Xline + Xeq
protection
OOSPPAM
All impedances must be referred to the generator voltage 13.8 kV

IEC10000113-2-en.vsd
IEC10000113 V2 EN

Figure 209: Example of an actual power system

To be able to automatically construct the lens characteristic for a system shown in

Figure 209, the actual power system must be modeled as a two-machine equivalent
system, or as a single machine infinite bus equivalent system, the following
information is necessary: Zgen(Rgen, Xgen), Ztr(Rtr, Xtr), Zline(Rline, Xline),
Zeq(Req, Xeq), and the setting StartAngle , for example 120 degrees. All
impedances must be referred to the voltage level where the out-of-step protection
relay is placed; in the case shown in Figure 209 the relay is connected to the
terminals of the generator and, therefore, the previous quantities shall be referred to

410
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

the generator nominal voltage and nominal current. The impedances from the
position of the out-of-step protection in the direction of the normal load flow can
be taken as forward.

The out-of-step relay, as in Figure 209 looks into the system and the impedances in
that direction are forward impedances:
ForwardX = Xtr + Xline + Xeq (All values referred to generator voltage)
ForwardR = Rtr + Rline + Req (All values referred to generator voltage)

The impedances that can be measured in the reverse direction are:

ReverseX = Xd' (Generator transient reactance suitable for this protection)
ReverseR = Rg (Relatively very small, can often be neglected)

Resistances are much smaller than reactances, but in general can not be neglected.
The ratio (ForwardX + ReverseX) / (ForwardR + ReverseR) determines the
inclination of the Z-line, connecting the point SE (Sending End) and RE
(Receiving End), and is typically approximately 85 degrees. While the length of the
Z-line depends on the values of ForwardX, ReverseX, ForwardR, and ReverseR,
the width of the lens is a function of the setting StartAngle .The lens is broader for
smaller values of the StartAngle , and becomes a circle for StartAngle = 90 degrees.

When the complex impedance Z(R, X) enters the lens, pole slipping is imminent,
and a start signal is issued. The angle recommended to form the lens is 110 or 120
degrees, because it is this rotor (power) angle where problems with dynamic
stability usually begin. Rotor (power) angle 120 degrees is sometimes called the
angle of no return because if this angle is reached under generator power swings,
the generator is most likely to lose step.

7.16.7.2 Detecting an out-of-step condition

An out-of-step condition is characterized by periodic changes of the rotor angle,

that leads to a wild flow of the synchronizing power; so there are also periodic
changes of rotational speed, currents and voltages. When displayed in the complex
impedance plane, these changes are characterized by a cyclic change in the
complex load impedance Z(R, X) as measured at the terminals of the generator, or
at the location of the instrument transformers of a power line connecting two power
sub-systems. This was shown in Figure 205. When a synchronous machine is out-of-
step, pole-slips occur. To recognize a pole-slip, the complex impedance Z(R,X)
must traverse the lens from right to left in case of a generator and in the opposite
direction in case of a motor. Another requirement is that the travel across the lens
takes no less than a specific minimum traverse time, typically 40...60 milliseconds.
The above timing is used to discriminate a fault from an out-of-step condition. In
Figure 205, some important points on the trajectory of Z(R, X) are designated.
Point 0: the pre-fault, normal load Z(R, X). Point 1: impedance Z under a three-
phase fault with low fault resistance: Z lies practically on, or very near, the Z-line.
Transition of the measured Z from point 0 to point 1 takes app. 20 ms, due to
Fourier filters. Point 2: Z immediately after the fault has been cleared. Transition of

411
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

the measured Z from point 1 to point 2 takes approximately 20 ms, due to Fourier
filters. The complex impedance then travels in the direction from the right to the
left, and exits the lens on the opposite side. When the complex impedance exits the
lens on the side opposite to its entrance, the 1st pole-slip has already occurred and
more pole-slips can be expected if the generator is not disconnected. Figure 205
shows two pole-slips. Figures like Figure 205 and Figure 207 are always possible
to draw by means of the analog output data from the pole-slip function, and are of
great help with eventual investigations of the performance of the out-of-step function.

7.16.7.3 Maximum slip frequency

A pole-slip may be detected if it has a slip frequency lower than a maximum value
fsMax. The specific value of fsMax depends on the setting (parameter) StartAngle
(which determines the width of the lens characteristic). A parameter in this
calculation routine is the value of the minimum traverse time, traverseTimeMin.
The minimum traverse time is the minimum time that the travel of the complex
impedance Z(R, X) through the lens, from one side to the other, must last in order
to recognize that a pole-slip has occurred. The value of the internal constant
traverseTimeMin is a function of the set StartAngle.For values of StartAngle <=
110, traverseTimeMin = 50 ms. For values StartAngle > 110, traverseTimeMin =
40 ms. The expression which relates the maximum slip frequency fsMax and the
traverseTimeMin is as follows:

1000 StartAngle []
fsMax [ Hz ] 1.000 -
traverseTimeMin [ ms ] 180 []
IECEQUATION2319 V1 EN (Equation 104)

The maximum slip frequency fsMax for traverseTimeMin = 50 ms is:

StartAngle = 90 fsMax = 20 0.500 = 10.000 Hz

StartAngle = 100 fsMax = 20 0.444 = 8.888 Hz
StartAngle = 110 fsMax = 20 0.388 = 7.777 Hz (default 110)

The maximum slip frequency fsMax for traverseTimeMin = 40 ms is:

StartAngle = 120 fsMax = 25 0.333 = 8.333 Hz

StartAngle = 130 fsMax = 25 0.277 = 6.944 Hz

The minimum value of fsMax is 6.994 Hz. When StartAngle = 110 degrees, fsMax
= 7.777 Hz. This implies, that the default StartAngle = 110 degrees covers 90% of
cases as, the typical final slip frequency is between 2 - 5Hz. In practice, however,
before the slip frequency, for example 7.777 Hz, is reached, at least three pole-slips
have occurred. In other words, if we consider a linear increase of frequency from
50 Hz to 57.777 Hz, at least three pole-slips will occur (in fact: (57.777 - 50) / 2 =
3.889). The exact instantaneous slip-frequency expressed in Hz (corresponding to
number of pole slips per second) is difficult to calculate. The easiest and most

412
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

exact method is to measure time between two successive pole slips. This means
that, the instantaneous slip-frequency is measured only after the second pole-slip, if
the protected machine is not already disconnected after the first pole-slip. The
measured value of slipsPerSecond (SLIPFREQ) is equal to the average slip-
frequency of the machine between the last two successive pole-slips.

7.16.7.4 Taking care of the circuit breaker

Although out-of-step events are relatively rare, the out-of-step protection should
take care of the circuit breaker health. The electromechanical stress to which the
breaker is exposed shall be minimized. The maximum currents flowing under out-of-
step conditions can be even greater that those for a three-phase short circuit on
generator terminals; see Figure 211. The currents flowing are highest at rotor angle
180 degrees, and smallest at 0 degrees, where relatively small currents flow. To
open the circuit breaker at 180 degrees, when not only the currents are highest, but
the two internal (that is, induced) voltages at both ends are in opposition, could be
fatal for the circuit breaker. There are two methods available in order to minimize
the stress; the second method is more advanced than the first one.

The first method

The circuit breaker is only allowed to break the current when the rotor angle has
become less than the set value TripAngle, on its way to 0 electrical degrees. A
recommended value for the setting TripAngle is 90 degrees or less, for example 60
degrees. Figure 210 illustrates the case with TripAngle = 90 degrees. The offset
Mho circle represents loci of the complex impedance Z(R, X) for which the rotor
(power) angle is 90 degrees. If the circuit breaker must not open before the rotor
angle has reached 90 degrees on its way towards 0 degrees, then it is clear that the
circle delimits the R X plane into a no trip and a trip region. For TripAngle =
90 degrees, the trip command will be issued at point 3 when the complex
impedance Z(R, X) exits the circle. By that time the relay logic had already
ascertained the loss of step, and the general decision to trip the generator has
already been taken.

The second method

This method is more exact. If the break-time of the circuit breaker is known, (and
specified as the setting tBreaker) than it is possible to initiate a trip (break)
command almost exactly tBreaker milliseconds before the rotor (power) angle
reaches 0 degrees, where the currents are at their minimum possible values. The
breaker contacts open at almost exactly 0 degrees, as illustrated in Figure 211 for
tBreaker = 0.060 s. The point in time when the breaker opening process must be
initiated is estimated by solving on-line the so called synchronizer differential
equation. Note that if tBreaker is left on the initial (default) value, which is zero
(0), then the alternative setting TripAngle decides when the trip command is given.
If specified tBreaker > 0, for example tBreaker = 0.040 second, then automatically,
the TripAngle is ignored and the second, more exact method applied.

413
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

X[Ohm]
0.6 trip RE - Receiving End (infinite bus)
region
loci of Z(R, X)
0.4 3

Imaginary part (X) of Z in Ohms

no trip
region 1
here rotor here
0.2 2
angle rotor angle
is -90 no trip is +90
rotor angle
region
= 180
0 no trip
relay
region R[Ohm]
inside Z - line connects
points SE & RE
-0.2 circle
this circle
is loci of
outside the
the rotor
-0.4 circle is the trip
angle = 90
region for
TripAngle <= 90 SE - Sending End (generator)

-0.6 -0.4 -0.2 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8

Real part (R) of Z in Ohms
IEC10000114-1-en.vsd
IEC10000114 V1 EN

Figure 210: The imaginary offset Mho circle represents loci of the impedance
Z(R, X) for which the rotor angle is 90 degrees

35
very high currents due
Current in kA, trip command to CB, rotor angle in rad

pos. seq. current in kA

to out-of-step condition
30 trip command to CB
rotor angle in radian
after 1st
fault cleared pole slip
25
2nd

20 current increases under

fault conditions
current decreases
15
fault
occurs
10 min. current
trip command
issued here
normal load current tBreaker = 60 ms
5

rotor angle
0
angle towards 0

-5
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200
Time in milliseconds
IEC10000115-1-en.vsd
IEC10000115 V1 EN

Figure 211: Trip initiation when the break-time of the circuit breaker is known

414
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.16.7.5 Design

At every execution of the function the following is calculated: active power P,

reactive power Q, rotor angle ROTORANG, quantity UCOSPHI, the positive-
sequence current CURRENT and voltage VOLTAGE. All other quantities, that can as
well be read as outputs, are only calculated if the Z(R, X) enters the limit of reach
zone, which is a circle in the complex (R X) plane. When the complex impedance
Z(R, X) enters the limit-of-reach region, the algorithm:
determines in which direction the impedance Z moves, that is, the direction the
lens is traversed
measures the time taken to traverse the lens from one side to the other one

If the traverse time is more than the limit 40 or 50 ms, a pole-slip is declared. If the
complex impedance Z(R, X) exits the lens on the same side it entered, then it is a
stable case and the protected machine is still in synchronism. If a pole-slip has been
detected, then it is determined in which zone the centre of oscillation is located. If
the number of actual pole-slips exceeds the maximum number of allowed pole-
slips in either of the zones, a trip command is issued taking care of the circuit
breaker safety.

R R
UPSRE Calculation of X X
UPSIM R and X parts
of the complex Z(R,X)
UPSMAG
positive-
IPSRE
sequence Z(R,X) NO
IPSIM
impedance within limit of Return
Z(R, X) reach?

YES UCOSPHI

Z(R,X) ROTORANG
within lens NO
Function alert
characteristic?
SLIPFREQ

YES GENMODE

Z(R,X) MOTMODE
LEFT Z(R,X) RIGHT NO
exited lens
entered lens
on the left- hand
from?
Motor losing Generator losing side?
step ? step ?
YES

Was
traverse time NO
more than
Calculation of 50 ms?
P
positive- sequence YES (pole- slip!)
active power P, Q TRIP
>= 1
reactive power Q, Number
ZONE 2 NO
rotor angle UCOSPHI
of pole- slips
ROTORANG exceeded in TRIPZ1
a zone? Open
and
ROTORANG circuit
UCOSPHI ZONE 1 TRIPZ2
breaker
safely

IEC10000116-3-en.vsd
IEC10000116 V3 EN

Figure 212: OOSPPAM Simplified function block

415
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

7.16.8 Technical data

Table 196: OOSPPAM technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Impedance reach (0.00 - 1000.00)% of Zbase 2.0% of Ur/(3 Ir)

Rotor start angle (90.0 - 130.0) degrees 5.0 degrees

Rotor trip angle (15.0 - 90.0) degrees 5.0 degrees
Zone 1 and Zone 2 trip counters (1 - 20) -

7.17 Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ

7.17.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ - -

7.17.2 Functionality
Phase preference logic function PPLPHIZ is intended to be used in isolated or high
impedance earthed networks where there is a requirement to trip only one of the
faulty lines at cross-country fault.

Phase preference logic inhibits tripping for single phase-to-earth faults in isolated
and high impedance earthed networks, where such faults are not to be cleared by
distance protection. For cross-country faults, the logic selects either the leading or
the lagging phase-earth loop for measurement and initiates tripping of the preferred
fault based on the selected phase preference. A number of different phase
preference combinations are available for selection.

7.17.3 Function block

PPLPHIZ
I3P* START
U3P* ZREL
BLOCK
RELL1N
RELL2N
RELL3N
STCND

IEC07000029-2-en.vsd
IEC07000029 V2 EN

Figure 213: PPLPHIZ function block

7.17.4 Signals

416
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

Table 197: PPLPHIZ Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
RELL1N BOOLEAN 0 Release condition for the L1 to earth loop
RELL2N BOOLEAN 0 Release condition for the L2 to earth loop
RELL3N BOOLEAN 0 Release condition for the L3 to earth loop
STCND INTEGER 0 Integer coded external release signals

Table 198: PPLPHIZ Output signals

Name Type Description
START BOOLEAN Indicates start for earth fault(s), regardless of
direction
ZREL INTEGER Integer coded output release signal

7.17.5 Settings

Table 199: PPLPHIZ Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
OperMode No Filter - - No Filter Operating mode (c=cyclic,a=acyclic)
NoPref
1231c
1321c
123a
132a
213a
231a
312a
321a
UPN< 0 - 100 %UB 1 70 Operate value of phase undervoltage in
% of UBase/sqrt(3)
UPP< 0 - 100 %UB 1 50 Operate value of line to line
undervoltage (% of UBase)
3U0> 5 - 300 %UB 1 20 Operate value of residual voltage in % of
UBase/sqrt(3)
IN> 10 - 200 %IB 1 20 Operate value of residual current (% of
IBase)
tUN 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Pickup-delay for residual voltage
tOffUN 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Dropoff-delay for residual voltage
tIN 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Pickup-delay for residual current

417
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

Table 200: PPLPHIZ Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

7.17.6 Operation principle

Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ has 10 operation modes, which can be set by the
parameter OperMode. The different modes and their explanation are shown in
table 201 below. The difference between cyclic and acyclic operation can be
explained by the following example. Assume a L1 fault on one line and a L3 fault
on another line. For OperMode = 1231c the line with L3 fault will be tripped (L3
before L1) while for OperMode = 123a the line with L1 1 fault will be tripped (L1
before L3).

Table 201: Operation modes for Phase preference logic

OperMode Description
No filter No filter, phase-to-phase measuring loops are not blocked during single phase-to-
earth faults. Tripping is allowed without any particular phase preference at cross-
country faults
No pref No preference, trip is blocked during single phase-to-earth faults, trip is allowed
without any particular phase preference at cross-country fault
1231 c Cyclic 1231c; L1 before L2 before L3 before L1
1321 c Cyclic 1321c; L1 before L3 before L2 before L1
123 a Acyclic 123a; L1 before L2before L3
132 a Acyclic 132a; L1 before L3 before L2
213 a Acyclic 213a; L2 before L1 before L3
231 a Acyclic 231a; L2 before L3 before L1
312 a Acyclic 312a; L3 before L1 before L2
321 a Acyclic 321a; L3 before L2 before L1

The function can be divided into two parts; one labeled voltage and current
discrimination and the second one labeled phase preference evaluation, see
figure 214.

The aim with the voltage and current discrimination part is to discriminate faulty
phases and to determine if there is a cross-country fault. If cross-country fault is
detected, an internal signal Detected cross-country fault is created and sent to the
phase preference part to be used in the evaluation process for determining the
condition for trip.

The voltage and current discrimination part gives phase segregated start signals if
the respective measured phase voltage is below the setting parameter UPN< at the
same time as the zero sequence voltage is above the setting parameter 3U0>. If
there is a start in any phase the START output signal will be activated.

418
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

The internal signal for detection of cross-country fault, DetectCrossCountry, that

come from the voltage and current discrimination part of the function can be
achieved in three different ways:

1. The magnitude of 3I0 has been above the setting parameter IN> for a time
longer than the setting of pick-up timer tIN.
2. The magnitude of 3I0 has been above the setting parameter IN> at the same
time as the magnitude of 3U0 has been above the setting parameter 3U0>
during a time longer than the setting of pick-up timer tUN.
3. The magnitude of 3I0 has been above the setting parameter IN> at the same
time as one of the following conditions are fulfilled:
the measured phase-to-phase voltage in at least one of the phase
combinations has been below the setting parameter UPP< for more than
20 ms.
At least two of the phase voltages are below the setting parameter UPN<
for more than 20 ms.

The second part, phase preference evaluation, uses the internal signal
DetectCrossCountry from the voltage and current evaluation together with the
input signal STCND together with phase selection start condition (from phase
selection functions) connected to input STCND, and the information from the
setting parameter OperMode are used to determine the condition for trip. To
release the Phase preference logic, at least two out of three phases must be faulty.
The fault classification whether it is a single phase-to-earth, two-phase or cross-
country fault and which phase to be tripped at cross-country fault is converted into
a binary coded signal and sent to the distance protection measuring zone to release
the correct measuring zone according to the setting of OperMode. This is done by
activating the output ZREL and it shall be connected to the input STCND on the
distance zone measuring element.

The code built up for release of the measuring fault loops is as follows: STCND =
L1N*1 + L2N*2 + L3N*4 + L1L2*8 + L2L3*16 + L3L1*32. Example: if only
L1N start the value is 1, if start L1N and L3N are choosen, the value is 1+4=5.

The release signals from phase selection will only be gated with the cross-country
check from IN and UN but without time delay. If no phase selection start has
occurred, the release is based on current and voltage discriminating part only.

The input signal STCND consist of binary information of fault type and is
connected to the output STCND on phase selection function. The fault must be
activated in at least two phases to be classified as a cross-country fault in the phase
preference part of the logic.

The input signals RELxxx are additional fault release signals that can be connected
to external protection functions through binary input.

The output START and trip signals can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK

419
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

UL1
UL2
UL3
UL1UL2
UL2UL3
UL3UL1
IN Voltage and START
AND
UN Current
Discrimination
UPN<

UPP<

IN>
Detect Cross-
UN0> Country fault

OperMode
RELL1N ZREL
Phase Preference AND
RELL2N Evaluation
RELL3N
STCND

BLOCK

IEC09000220_1_en.vsd
IEC09000220 V2 EN

Figure 214: Simplified block diagram for Phase preference logic

Table 202: PPLPHIZ technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, phase-to-phase (1 - 100)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur
and phase-to-neutral
undervoltage
Reset ratio, undervoltage < 105% -
Operate value, residual voltage (5 - 300)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur for U
Ur
0.5% of U for U
> Ur

Reset ratio, residual voltage > 95% -

Operate value, residual current (10 - 200)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir for I
Ir
1.0% of I for I >
Ir

Reset ratio, residual current > 95% -

Independent time delay for (0.000 - 60.000) s 0.2% or 25 ms
residual current at 0 to 2 x Iset whichever is
greater
Table continues on next page

420
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Independent time delay for (0.000 - 60.000) s 0.2% or 25 ms
residual voltage at 0.8 to 1.2 x whichever is
Uset greater

Independent dropoff-delay for (0.000 - 60.000) s 0.2% or 25 ms

residual voltage at 1.2 to 0.8 x whichever is
Uset greater

Operating mode No Filter, NoPref

Cyclic: 1231c, 1321c
Acyclic: 123a, 132a, 213a, 231a, 312a, 321a

7.18 Under impedance protection for generators and

transformers ZGVPDIS

7.18.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/
identification identification IEEEidentification
Under impedance function for ZGVPDIS 21G
generators and transformers

S00346 V1 EN

7.18.2 Functionality
The under impedance protection is a three zone full scheme impedance protection
using offset mho characteristics for detecting faults in the generator, generator-
transformer and transmission system. The three zones have fully independent
measuring loops and settings. The functionality also comprises an under voltage seal-
in feature to ensure issuing of a trip even if the current transformer goes into
saturation and, in addition, the positive-sequence-based load encroachment feature
for the second and the third impedance zone. Built-in compensation for the step-up
transformer vector group connection is available.

421
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

7.18.3 Function block

ZGVPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRZ1
BLOCK TRZ2
BLKZ TRZ3
BLKUV TRUV
START
STZ1
STZ2
STZ3
STUV

IEC14000018-1-en.vsd
IEC14000018 V1 EN

Figure 215: ZGVPDIS function block

7.18.4 Signals
Table 203: ZGVPDIS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Connection for current sample signals
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Connection for voltage sample signals
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of the function
BLKZ BOOLEAN 0 Block due to fuse failure
BLKUV BOOLEAN 0 Block of the under voltage seal in

Table 204: ZGVPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General Trip
TRZ1 BOOLEAN Trip signal Zone 1
TRZ2 BOOLEAN Trip signal Zone 2
TRZ3 BOOLEAN Trip signal Zone 3
TRUV BOOLEAN Trip from Under voltage seal in
START BOOLEAN General start
STZ1 BOOLEAN Start signal Zone 1
STZ2 BOOLEAN Start signal Zone 2
STZ3 BOOLEAN Start signal Zone 3
STUV BOOLEAN Start of under voltage seal in

422
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.18.5 Settings
Table 205: ZGVPDIS Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
ImpedanceAng 5 - 90 Deg 1 80 Impedance angle in degrees, common
for all zones
IMinOp 5 - 80 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current
OpModeZ1 Off - - PP Loops Operation mode of Zone 1: Off/Ph-Ph
PP Loops loops
Z1Fwd 3.0 - 100.0 % Zb 0.1 8.0 Zone 1 forward reach in % of rated
impedance, 100%=full load
Z1Rev 3.0 - 100.0 % Zb 0.1 8.0 Zone 1 reverse reach in % of rated
impedance, 100%=full load
tZ1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to operate for Zone 1
OpModeZ2 Off - - EnhancedReach Operation mode of Zone 2: Off/Ph-Ph/
PP Loops EnhancedReach
EnhancedReach
Z2Fwd 3.0 - 200.0 % Zb 0.1 15.0 Zone 2 forward reach in % of rated
impedance, 100%=full load
Z2Rev 3.0 - 200.0 % Zb 0.1 8.0 Zone 2 reverse reach in % of rated
impedance, 100%=full load
tZ2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.500 Time delay to operate for Zone 2
OpModeZ3 Off - - EnhancedReach Operation mode of Zone 3: Off/Ph-Ph/
PP Loops EnhancedReach
EnhancedReach
Z3Fwd 3.0 - 200.0 % Zb 0.1 75.0 Zone 3 forward reach in % of rated
impedance, 100%=full load
Z3Rev 3.0 - 200.0 % Zb 0.1 8.0 Zone 3 reverse reach in % of rated
impedance, 100%=full load
tZ3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.500 Time delay to operate for Zone 3
OpModeU< Off - - Off Enable under voltage seal in (Off/Z2Start/
Z2Start Z3Start)
Z3Start
U< 5 - 90 %UB 1 70 Start value of under voltage seal in
tU< 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay to operate for under voltage
seal in

Table 206: ZGVPDIS Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
RLd 5 - 120 % Zb 1 50 Resistive reach in % for load
encroachment charateristics
ArgLd 5 - 85 Deg 1 38 Load encroachment inclination of load
angular sector
LoadEnchModZ2 Off - - Off Enable load encroachement for Zone 2
On Off/On
LoadEnchModZ3 Off - - On Enable load encroachement for Zone 3
On Off/On

423
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

Table 207: ZGVPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

7.18.6 Monitored data

Table 208: ZGVPDIS Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UL1 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L1
UL2 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L2
UL3 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L3
IL1 REAL - A Current in phase L1
IL2 REAL - A Current in phase L2
IL3 REAL - A Current in phase L3

7.18.7 Operation principle

The full scheme backup distance element constitutes of three operating zones.
Zone1 has only the phase-to-phase loops enabled. Zone2 and zone3 can be selected
for phase to-phase or Enhanced reach loop. Each measuring loop use the offset
mho characteristic

The base value of impedance can be calculated according to equation 105.

UBase
ZBase =
3 IBase
IECEQUATION1400024 V1 EN (Equation 105)

Where,
ZBase is the base value of impedance
UBase is the line-to-line voltage rating at the generator terminal
IBase is the line current rating at the generator terminal

The minimum operating current is provided using the setting IMinOp.

All the outputs will be blocked by activation of the BLOCK or BLKZ input.

Offset mho characteristic

ZGVPDIS consists of three distance elements operated for three zones separately.
Each zone consists of measuring loops which uses self-polarized offset mho
characteristics with both forward and reverse reach settings for the detection of the

424
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

fault in the respective zone. The operating characteristics of all the three zones are
shown in Figure 216. The ImpedanceAngle setting is common to all three zones.

jX

Offset Mho, Zone3

Offset Mho, Zone2

Offset Mho, Zone1

ImpedanceAng

IEC11000294-2-en.vsd
IEC11000294 V2 EN

Figure 216: Offset mho characteristics of three zones

The complete functionality is shown in figure 217.

425
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

U3P STZ1
I3P ZONE 1 TRZ1
BLKZ OpModeZ1
Z1Fwd
BLOCK Z1Rev
tZ1 START
1

ZONE 2 STZ2
OpModeZ2
Z2Fwd TRZ2
Z2Rev
tZ2
LoadEnchModZ2

OPERATE
1
1

ZONE 3 STZ3

OpModeZ3
Z3Fwd
Z3Rev
tZ3 TRZ3
LoadEnchModZ3

LoadEnch

RLd
ArgLd

UVSealIn TRUV

OpModeU< STUV
U<
tU<
BLCKUV

IEC11000295-3-en.vsd
IEC11000295 V2 EN

Figure 217: Block diagram of ZGVPDIS

7.18.7.1 Operation principle of zone 1

In general, the zone 1 must cover the generator winding, the cables or busbars and
step up transformer.

Under impedance functionality is provided as selective protection for the phase-to-

phase faults in zone 1. Hence the functionality of zone 1 includes only phase-to-
phase measuring loops.

Zone 1 functionality can be set to PP Loops or Off using the setting OpModeZ1.

Figure 218 shows the functionality of zone 1.

426
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

BLOCK

BLKZ

U3P Comparator
ZL1L2 <
I3P
OpModeZ1
Z1Fwd STZ1
Z1Rev
ImpedanceAng

tZ1
Comparator
1 t TRZ1
ZL2L3 <

OPModeZ1
Z1Fwd
Z1Rev
ImpedanceAng

Comparator
ZL3L1 <
OpModeZ1
Z1Fwd
Z1Rev
ImpedanceAng

IEC11000297-3-en.vsd
IEC11000297 V3 EN

Figure 218: Block diagram of zone 1

The functionality included in zone 1:

Comparator to detect, if the operating impedance has entered inside zone 1

offset mho characteristic.
All three phase-to-phase loops are implemented separately.
Forward and reverse reach values are provided in percentage of impedance
base value at generator.
Operate time delay is provided.

Comparator characteristics
The comparator consists of offset mho characteristics. Three individual
comparators are provided in the three phase-to-phase loops. The offset mho
characteristic is as shown in figure 219.

427
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

IL1L2 jX
IL1L2 Z 1Fwd
Ucomp1=UL1L2 - I L1L2 Z1Fwd

Ucomp2=UL1L2 + IL1L2 Z1REV

IL1L2 R

- IL1L2 Z1REV
IEC11000296-2-en.vsd
IEC11000296 V2 EN

Figure 219: Simplified offset mho characteristics for L1-L2 fault in zone 1

Criteria: Operation occurs if 90 270.

In the above characteristics, Z1Fwd and Z1Rev are the forward and reverse reach
percentage values and ImpedanceAng is the characteristic angle provided for the
zone 1 operation region.

Z 1Fwd = Z 1Fwd ImpedanceAng

IECEQUATION14000025 V2 EN (Equation 106)

Z 1Rev = Z 1rev ImpedanceAng

IECEQUATION14000026 V2 EN (Equation 107)

Voltage and current phasors selected for phase-to-phase loops are:

Sl.No Phase-to-phase loop Voltage phasor Current phasor
L1-L2
1 UL1L 2 IL1L 2
L2-L3
2 UL2 L3 IL 2 L3
L3-L1
3 UL3L1 IL3L1

Operate time
The operate time delay for zone 1 can be provided using the setting tZ1.

7.18.7.2 Operation principle of zone 2

Figure 220 shows the function block diagram describing the functionality of zone 2.

428
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

Zero
sequence
Voltage
Compensation
U3P
Measuring Loop
EnhancedReach
I3P

OpModeZ2
Z2Fwd
Z2Rev
BLKZ ImpedanceAng

Measuring Loop
phase-to-phase STZ2
(ZL1L2<,ZL2L3<,ZL3L1<) &

OpModeZ2
tZ2
Z2Fwd
t TRZ2
Z2Rev
ImpedanceAng

LoadEnchModZ2
Load
Encroachment T
1 F
RLd
ArgLd

IEC11000298-2-en.vsd

IEC11000298 V2 EN

Figure 220: Block diagram of zone 2

Zone 2 can be used to cover up to the HV side of the transformer and the HV bus
bar. It also covers to some degree, the stator winding. The time to trip is provided
in order to coordinate with the zone 1 element on the shortest outgoing line from
the bus.

Zone 2 coverage provides backup for the phase-to-phase and three-phase faults in
generator. It also protects LV winding of generator transformer and phase-to-earth,
phase-to-phase and three-phase faults in the HV side of transformer and the bus. A
separate maximum current feature is provided in phase-to-earth loop selection
which gives correct reach measurement for phase-to-phase fault on HV side. Zero
sequence compensation for the phase voltages is given in phase-to-earth measuring
loops in order to prevent operation for the stator earth faults.

Zone 2 can be selected for different measuring loops using the setting OpModeZ2.
The OpModeZ2 can be selected as Off or PP Loops or EnhancedReach. If the
OpModeZ2 is selected as EnhancedReach the phase-to-earth measuring loop (L1E,
L2E and L3E with maximum phase current) is used for the measurement.

Figure 221 shows the logic to detect the phase to earth loop with maximum phase
current.

429
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

A startPh1 &
i1Mag a
a==b
b
startPh2 & 1 start
&

B
i2Mag a
a==b
b startPh3 &
&
1
C
i3Mag a
a==b
b

MAX

IEC11000307_1_en.vsd

IEC11000307 V1 EN

Figure 221: Logic diagram for the selection of the maximum current loop

The phase-to-earth voltage is compensated with zero sequence voltage in order to

avoid the function operating for earth faults in zone 1, that is, complete generator
stator winding and LV winding of the power transformer.

The reach settings for zone 2 can be provided using the Z2Fwd, Z2Rev and
ImpedanceAng settings. The Z2Fwd is forward reach setting and Z2Rev is reverse
reach setting. The offset mho characteristic for phase-to-earth loop is shown in
Figure 222. The offset mho characteristics for phase-to-phase loop is shown in
Figure 223.

IL1 jX
IL1 Z 2 Fwd
Ucomp1 UL1E U 0 IL1 Z 2 Fwd

Ucomp 2 U L1E U 0 IL1 Z 2 REV

IL1 R

IL1 Z 2 REV

IEC11000299-2-en.vsd
IEC11000299 V2 EN

Figure 222: Simplified offset mho characteristics for L1-to-E fault in zone 2

430
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

IL1L 2 jX
IL1L2 Z 2 Fwd
Ucomp1 UL1L2 IL1L2 Z 2 Fwd

Ucomp 2 UL1L 2 IL1L 2 Z 2 REV

IL1L 2 R

IL1L 2 Z 2 REV

IEC11000300-2-en.vsd
IEC11000300 V2 EN

Figure 223: Simplified offset mho characteristics for L1-to-L2 fault in zone 2

Operation occurs if 90 270.

Impedance defined in the Figure 222 and 223 is described in equation 108.

Z 2 Fwd = Z 2 Fwd ImpedanceAng

Z 2 Rev = Z 2 Rev ImpedanceAng

GUID-007D6357-B7CF-4C21-B772-2245F06C83A2 V2 EN (Equation 108)

Voltage and current phasors selected for different measuring loops:

Phase Phase:
Sl.No Measuring Loop Voltage Phasor Current Phasor
L1-L2
1 UL1L 2 IL1L 2
L2-L3
2 UL2 L3 IL 2 L3
L3-L1
3 UL3L1 IL3L1

Enhanced Reach:

431
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

Sl.No Measuring Loop Voltage Phasor Current Phasor

IL1
1 UL1E - U 0 IL1

IL2
2 UL 2 E - U 0 IL2

IL3
3 UL3E - U 0 IL3

Operate time
The operate time delay for zone 2 can be provided using the setting tZ2.

Zone 2 is provided load encroachment detection feature based on positive sequence

components measurements.. This feature avoids the function from operating due to
load encroachment. The load encroachment feature for zone 2 can be set using
LoadEnchModZ2 to On or Off.

7.18.7.3 Operation principle of zone 3

Zone 3 is used to cover up to the HV side of the transformer, interconnecting bus

network and outgoing lines. The time to trip should be provided in order to
coordinate with the transmission line protection.

The zone 3 will provide protection from phase-to-earth, phase-phase and three-
phase faults on the HV side of the system. The zone 3 functionality is same as zone
2 hence the explanation of zone 2 applies except the zone 3 has separate reach
(Z3Fwd, Z3Rev), operate timer (tZ3) and load encroachment enable
(LoadEnchModZ3) settings.

7.18.7.4 Load encroachment

The load encroachment characteristics can be set for zone2 and zone3. Load
encroachment can be enabled for zone 2 by setting LoadEnchModZ2 to On.
Similarly the load encroachment for zone 3 can be enabled by setting
LoadEnchModZ3 to On.

The load encroachment characteristic is based on positive sequence quantities and

can be set using the settings RLd and ArgLd.

RLd is the positive sequence resistive reach value in percentage. ArgLd is angle in
degrees from the origin to the resistive axis as shown in Figure 224.

432
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 7
Impedance protection

Load encroachment characteristic

jX

ArgLd ArgLd

-RLd RLd R
ArgLd ArgLd

IEC11000304_1_en
IEC11000304 V1 EN

Figure 224: Load encroachment characteristics

7.18.7.5 Under voltage seal-in

The under voltage seal-in logic ensures the trip under fault condition, where as
under impedance function will reset due to CT saturation. The start signal of zone 2
and zone 3 elements trigger the under voltage seal-in. This can be selected using
the setting OpModeU< . The setting OpModeU< can be selected as Off or Z2Start
or Z3Start. Select Z2Start to choose zone 2 for triggering the seal-in logic.
Similarly, select Z3Start to choose zone 3 for triggering the seal-in logic.

Under voltage seal-in is activated from the criterion based on line-to-line voltage
magnitude. The voltage criteria checks by comparing all three line-to-line voltage
levels with the level given by the setting parameter U<. If any loop detects lower
voltage, the under voltage seal-in logic gets triggered, provided the respective
selected zone start is also high. Once the under voltage seal-in logic is triggered,
the pick-up signal STUV becomes high. If it is constantly high for a time longer
than the setting tU<, the tripping signal TRUV is issued as a pulse signal with a
duration of one second.

Figure 225 shows the functionality of under voltage seal-in for zone 2 and zone 3.

433
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Impedance protection

- STUV
q1
BLOCK
BLKUV 1 tU<
TRUV
Zone 2 Start & t
tPulse =1sec
&
OpModeU< =
10 ms -
0 = Off b0 1 q1
int 1 t
1 = Z2Start
2 = Z3Start b1
Drop-Off
& timer
Zone 3 Start

uP1P2 a
a<b
U< b

uP2P3 a
a<b 1
U< b

uP3P1 a
a<b
U< b

IEC11000306.vsd

IEC11000306 V2 EN

Figure 225: Under voltage seal-in for zone 2 and zone 3

7.18.8 Technical data

Table 209: ZGVPDIS Technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of zones 3 -
5.0% of set impedance
(3.0 - 200.0)% of Zr Conditions:
Forward reach Voltage range: (0.1 - 1.1) x Ur
where Zr=UBase/3IBase
Current range: (0.5 - 30) x Ir

5.0% of set impedance

(3.0 - 200.0)% of Zr Conditions:
Reverse reach Voltage range: (0.1 - 1.1) x Ur
where Zr=UBase/3IBase
Current range: (0.5 - 30) x Ir

Impedance angle (5 - 90) degrees -

Reset ratio 105% typically -

Start time at 1.2 to 0.8 x set Min = 15 ms

-
impedance Max = 35 ms
Independent time delay to
0.2% or 40 ms whichever is
operate at 1.2 to 0.8 x set (0.000 60.000) s
greater
impedance

434
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

Section 8 Current protection

8.1 Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-

phase output PHPIOC

8.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Instantaneous phase overcurrent PHPIOC 50
protection 3-phase output
3I>>

SYMBOL-Z V1 EN

8.1.2 Functionality
The instantaneous three phase overcurrent function has a low transient overreach
and short tripping time to allow use as a high set short-circuit protection function.

8.1.3 Function block

PHPIOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK TRL1
ENMULT TRL2
TRL3

IEC04000391-2-en.vsd
IEC04000391 V2 EN

Figure 226: PHPIOC function block

8.1.4 Signals

Table 210: PHPIOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase current
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
ENMULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable current start value multiplier

435
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

Table 211: PHPIOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal from any phase
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3

8.1.5 Settings

Table 212: PHPIOC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OpMode 2 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Select operation mode 2-out of 3 / 1-out
1 out of 3 of 3
IP>> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 200 Operate phase current level in % of IBase

Table 213: PHPIOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
StValMult 0.5 - 5.0 - 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for operate current level

Table 214: PHPIOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

8.1.6 Monitored data

Table 215: PHPIOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IL1 REAL - A Current in phase L1
IL2 REAL - A Current in phase L2
IL3 REAL - A Current in phase L3

8.1.7 Operation principle

The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter
(DFT) block. The RMS value of each phase current is derived from the
fundamental frequency components, as well as sampled values of each phase
current. These phase current values are fed to the instantaneous phase overcurrent

436
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

protection 3-phase output function PHPIOC. In a comparator the RMS values are
compared to the set operation current value of the function (IP>>). If a phase
current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator for this
phase is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal TRLn
(n=1,2,3) for this phase and the TRIP signal that is common for all three phases.

There is an operation mode (OpMode) setting: 1 out of 3 or 2 out of 3. If the

parameter is set to 1 out of 3 any phase trip signal will be activated. If the
parameter is set to 2 out of 3 at least two phase signals must be activated for trip.

There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current
(StValMult) via a binary input (ENMULT). In some applications the operation
value needs to be changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents.

PHPIOC can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK.

8.1.8 Technical data

Table 216: PHPIOC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (5-2500)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (502500)% of -

IBase
Operate time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Reset time at 2 to 0 x Iset Min. = 15ms -
Max. = 25ms
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Operate time at 0 to 10 x Iset Min. = 5ms -

Max. = 15 ms
Reset time at 10 to 0 x Iset Min. = 25ms -
Max. = 40 ms
Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset -

Dynamic overreach < 5% at t = 100 ms -

8.2 Four step phase overcurrent protection 3-phase

output OC4PTOC

437
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

8.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC 51/67
3I>
3-phase output
4
alt
4
TOC-REVA V1 EN

8.2.2 Functionality
The four step three-phase overcurrent protection function OC4PTOC has an
inverse or definite time delay independent for step 1 to 4 separately.

All IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristics are available together with an
optional user defined time characteristic.

The directional function needs voltage as it is voltage polarized with memory. The
function can be set to be directional or non-directional independently for each of
the steps.

Second harmonic blocking level can be set for the function and can be used to
block each step individually

438
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

8.2.3 Function block

OC4PTOC
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TR1
BLOCK TR2
BLKTR TR3
BLKST1 TR4
BLKST2 TRL1
BLKST3 TRL2
BLKST4 TRL3
ENMULT1 TR1L1
ENMULT2 TR1L2
ENMULT3 TR1L3
ENMULT4 TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
TR3L1
TR3L2
TR3L3
TR4L1
TR4L2
TR4L3
START
ST1
ST2
ST3
ST4
STL1
STL2
STL3
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3
ST3L1
ST3L2
ST3L3
ST4L1
ST4L2
ST4L3
2NDHARM
DIRL1
DIRL2
DIRL3

IEC06000187-2-en.vsd
IEC06000187 V2 EN

Figure 227: OC4PTOC function block

8.2.4 Signals
Table 217: OC4PTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step1
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step2
Table continues on next page

439
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

Name Type Default Description

BLKST3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step3
BLKST4 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step4
ENMULT1 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step1
ENMULT2 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step2
ENMULT3 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step3
ENMULT4 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step4

Table 218: OC4PTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
TR1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1
TR2 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step2
TR3 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step3
TR4 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step4
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
TR1L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L1
TR1L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L2
TR1L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L3
TR2L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L1
TR2L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L2
TR2L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L3
TR3L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step3 phase L1
TR3L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step3 phase L2
TR3L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step3 phase L3
TR4L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step4 phase L1
TR4L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step4 phase L2
TR4L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step4 phase L3
START BOOLEAN General start signal
ST1 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step1
ST2 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step2
ST3 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step3
ST4 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step4
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
Table continues on next page

440
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

Name Type Description

STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
ST1L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L1
ST1L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L2
ST1L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L3
ST2L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L1
ST2L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L2
ST2L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L3
ST3L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step3 phase L1
ST3L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step3 phase L2
ST3L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step3 phase L3
ST4L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step4 phase L1
ST4L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step4 phase L2
ST4L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step4 phase L3
ST2NDHRM BOOLEAN Second harmonic detected
DIRL1 INTEGER Direction for phase1
DIRL2 INTEGER Direction for phase2
DIRL3 INTEGER Direction for phase3

8.2.5 Settings
Table 219: OC4PTOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
AngleRCA 40 - 65 Deg 1 55 Relay characteristic angle (RCA)
AngleROA 40 - 89 Deg 1 80 Relay operation angle (ROA)
StartPhSel 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1 of
2 out of 3 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3)
3 out of 3
DirMode1 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Table continues on next page

441
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for
ANSI Very inv. step 1
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I1> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 1000 Operating phase current level for step 1
in % of IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Independent (definite) time delay of step
1
k1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 1
IMin1 1 - 10000 %IB 1 100 Minimum operate current for step1 in %
of IBase
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 1
I1Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for current operate level for
step 1
DirMode2 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 2 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist2 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for
ANSI Very inv. step 2
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I2> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 500 Operating phase current level for step 2
in % of IBase
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Independent (definite) time delay of step
2
Table continues on next page

442
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

k2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 2
IMin2 1 - 10000 %IB 1 50 Minimum operate current for step2 in %
of IBase
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 2
I2Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for current operate level for
step 2
DirMode3 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 3 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist3 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for
ANSI Very inv. step 3
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I3> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 250 Operating phase current level for step 3
in % of IBase
t3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Independent (definite) time delay of step
3
k3 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 3
IMin3 1 - 10000 %IB 1 33 Minimum operate current for step3 in %
of IBase
t3Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 3
I3Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for current operate level for
step 3
DirMode4 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 4 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Table continues on next page

443
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Characterist4 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for
ANSI Very inv. step 4
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I4> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 175 Operating phase current level for step 4
in % of IBase
t4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Independent (definite) time delay of step
4
k4 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 4
IMin4 1 - 10000 %IB 1 17 Minimum operate current for step4 in %
of IBase
t4Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 4
I4Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for current operate level for
step 4

Table 220: OC4PTOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IMinOpPhSel 1 - 100 %IB 1 7 Minimum current for phase selection in
% of IBase
2ndHarmStab 5 - 100 %IB 1 20 Operate level of 2nd harmonic curr in %
of fundamental curr
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step 1
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Constant reset time for step 1
tPCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 1
tACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 1
tBCrv1 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 1
tCCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 1
tPRCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer
programmable curve for step 1
Table continues on next page

444
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tTRCrv1 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer
programmable curve for step 1
tCRCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer
programmable curve for step 1
HarmBlock1 Off - - Off Enable block of step 1 from harmonic
On restrain
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step 2
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Constant reset time for step 2
tPCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 2
tACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 2
tBCrv2 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 2
tCCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 2
tPRCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer
programmable curve for step 2
tTRCrv2 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer
programmable curve for step 2
tCRCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer
programmable curve for step 2
HarmBlock2 Off - - Off Enable block of step 2 from harmonic
On restrain
ResetTypeCrv3 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step 3
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tReset3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Constant reset time for step 3
tPCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 3
tACrv3 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 3
tBCrv3 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 3
tCCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 3
tPRCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer
programmable curve for step 3
tTRCrv3 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer
programmable curve for step 3
tCRCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer
programmable curve for step 3
HarmBlock3 Off - - Off Enable block of step 3 from harmonic
On restrain
ResetTypeCrv4 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step 4
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Table continues on next page

445
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tReset4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Constant reset time for step 4
tPCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 4
tACrv4 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 4
tBCrv4 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 4
tCCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 4
tPRCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer
programmable curve for step 4
tTRCrv4 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer
programmable curve for step 4
tCRCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer
programmable curve for step 4
HarmBlock4 Off - - Off Enable block of step 4 from harmonic
On restrain

Table 221: OC4PTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MeasType DFT - - DFT Selection between DFT and RMS
RMS measurement
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

8.2.6 Monitored data

Table 222: OC4PTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
DIRL1 INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction for phase1
2=Reverse
0=No direction
DIRL2 INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction for phase2
2=Reverse
0=No direction
DIRL3 INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction for phase3
2=Reverse
0=No direction
IL1 REAL - A Current in phase L1
IL2 REAL - A Current in phase L2
IL3 REAL - A Current in phase L3

446
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

8.2.7 Operation principle

The Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC is divided into four
different sub-functions, one for each step. For each step x , where x is step 1, 2, 3
and 4, an operation mode is set by DirModex: Off/Non-directional/Forward/
Reverse.

The protection design can be divided in four parts:

The direction element

The harmonic Restraint Blocking function
The four step over current function
The mode selection

If VT inputs are not available or not connected, setting parameter

DirModex shall be left to default value, Non-directional.

4 step over current

Direction dirPh1Flt element faultState
faultState
Element One element for each
dirPh2Flt step
I3P dirPh3Flt START

U3P

TRIP

Harmonic harmRestrBlock
Restraint
Element

enableDir
Mode Selection
enableStep1-4
DirectionalMode1-4

en05000740-2-en.vsd

IEC05000740 V2 EN

Figure 228: Functional overview of OC4PTOC

447
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

A common setting for all steps, StartPhSel, is used to specify the number of phase
currents to be high to enable operation. The settings can be chosen: 1 out of 3, 2 out
of 3 or 3 out of 3.

The sampled analogue phase currents are processed in a pre-processing function

block. Using a parameter setting MeasType within the general settings for the four
step phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output function OC4PTOC, it is possible
to select the type of the measurement used for all overcurrent stages. It is possible
to select either discrete Fourier filter (DFT) or true RMS filter (RMS).

If DFT option is selected then only the RMS value of the fundamental frequency
components of each phase current is derived. Influence of DC current component
and higher harmonic current components are almost completely suppressed. If
RMS option is selected then the true RMS values is used. The true RMS value in
addition to the fundamental frequency component includes the contribution from
the current DC component as well as from higher current harmonic. The selected
current values are fed to OC4PTOC.

In a comparator, for each phase current, the DFT or RMS values are compared to
the set operation current value of the function (I1>, I2>, I3> or I4>). If a phase
current is larger than the set operation current, outputs START, STx, STL1, STL2
and STL3 are, without delay, activated. Output signals STL1, STL2 and STL3 are
common for all steps. This means that the lowest set step will initiate the
activation. The START signal is common for all three phases and all steps. It shall
be noted that the selection of measured value (DFT or RMS) do not influence the
operation of directional part of OC4PTOC.

Service value for individually measured phase currents are also available on the
local HMI for OC4PTOC function, which simplifies testing, commissioning and in
service operational checking of the function.

A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. A set 2nd harmonic current in
relation to the fundamental current is used. The 2nd harmonic current is taken from
the pre-processing of the phase currents and the relation is compared to a set
restrain current level.

The function can be directional. The direction of the fault current is given as
current angle in relation to the voltage angle. The fault current and fault voltage for
the directional function is dependent of the fault type. To enable directional
measurement at close in faults, causing low measured voltage, the polarization
voltage is a combination of the apparent voltage (85%) and a memory voltage
(15%). The following combinations are used.

Phase-phase short circuit:

U refL1L 2 = U L1 - U L 2 I dirL1L 2 = I L1 - I L 2
EQUATION1449 V1 EN (Equation 109)

U refL 2 L 3 = U L 2 - U L 3 I dirL 2 L 3 = I L 2 - I L 3
EQUATION1450 V1 EN (Equation 110)
Table continues on next page

448
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

U refL 3 L1 = U L 3 - U L1 I dirL 3 L1 = I L 3 - I L1
EQUATION1451 V1 EN (Equation 111)

Phase-earth short circuit:

U refL1 = U L1 I dirL1 = I L1
EQUATION1452 V1 EN (Equation 112)

U refL 2 = U L 2 I dirL 2 = I L 2
EQUATION1453 V1 EN (Equation 113)

U refL 3 = U L 3 I dirL 3 = I L 3
EQUATION1454 V1 EN (Equation 114)

The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage

exceeds 4% of the set base voltage UBase. So the directional element can use it for
all unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.

For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same
positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.

The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is
restored.

After 100 ms, the following occurs:

If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current
(between 10 and 30% of the set terminal rated current IBase), the condition
seals in.
If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.
If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element
in the reverse direction remains in operation.
If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory
resets until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.

The directional setting is given as a characteristic angle AngleRCA for the function
and an angle window AngleROA.

449
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

Reverse

Uref

RCA
ROA

ROA Forward

Idir

en05000745.vsd
IEC05000745 V1 EN

Figure 229: Directional characteristic of the phase overcurrent protection

The default value of AngleRCA is 65. The parameters AngleROA gives the angle
sector from AngleRCA for directional borders.

A minimum current for directional phase start current signal can be set:
IminOpPhSel.

If no blockings are given the start signals will start the timers of the step. The time
characteristic for each step can be chosen as definite time delay or inverse time
characteristic. A wide range of standardized inverse time characteristics is
available. It is also possible to create a tailor made time characteristic. The
possibilities for inverse time characteristics are described in section "Inverse
characteristics".

All four steps in OC4PTOC can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The
binary input BLKSTx (x=1, 2, 3 or 4) blocks the operation of respective step.

450
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

Characteristx=DefTime
|IOP| AND
tx TRx
a OR
a>b
Ix> b

AND
STx

txmin
BLKSTx AND
BLOCK
Inverse

Characteristx=Inverse

DirModex=Off OR STAGEx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Non-directional
DirModex=Forward
AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModex=Reverse

AND
REVERSE_Int

IEC12000008-1-en.vsd
IEC12000008-1-en.vsd

IEC12000008 V1 EN

Figure 230: Simplified logic diagram for OC4PTOC

Different types of reset time can be selected as described in section "Inverse

characteristics".

There is also a possibility to activate a preset change (IxMult x= 1, 2, 3 or 4) of the

set operation current via a binary input (enable multiplier). In some applications the
operation value needs to be changed, for example due to changed network
switching state. The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The
start signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKST. The
trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.

8.2.8 Second harmonic blocking element

A harmonic restrain of the Four step overcurrent protection function OC4PTOC
can be chosen. If the ratio of the 2nd harmonic component in relation to the
fundamental frequency component in the residual current exceeds the preset level
defined by parameter 2ndHarmStab setting, any of the four overcurrent stages can
be selectively blocked by parameter HarmRestrainx setting. When 2nd harmonic
restraint feature is active, the OC4PTOC function output signal 2NDHARMD will
be set to logical value one.

451
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

BLOCK

a
a>b
0.07*IBase b

a
a>b
b
Extract second 2NDHARMD
IOP AND
harmonic current a
a>b
component b

2ndH_BLOCK_Int
Extract
fundamental
current component
X
2ndHarmStab

IEC13000014-1-en.vsd
IEC13000014 V1 EN

Figure 231: Second harmonic blocking

8.2.9 Technical data

Table 223: OC4PTOC technical data
Function Setting range Accuracy
Operate current (5-2500)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (502500)% -

of lBase
Min. operating current (1-10000)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Relay characteristic angle (RCA) (40.065.0) degrees 2.0 degrees

Relay operating angle (ROA) (40.089.0) degrees 2.0 degrees
2nd harmonic blocking (5100)% of 2.0% of Ir
fundamental
Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x (0.000-60.000) s 0.2 % or 35 ms whichever is
Iset greater

Minimum operate time (0.000-60.000) s 2.0 % or 40 ms whichever is

greater
Inverse characteristics, see 16 curve types See table 1038, table 1039 and table
table 1038, table 1039 and table 1040
1040
Operate time, start non-directional Min. = 15 ms
at 0 to 2 x Iset
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start non-directional Min. = 15 ms
at 2 to 0 x Iset
Max. = 30 ms
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 -
x Iset

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

452
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

8.3 Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection

EFPIOC

8.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Instantaneous residual overcurrent EFPIOC 50N
protection
IN>>

IEF V1 EN

8.3.2 Functionality
The Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC has a low transient
overreach and short tripping times to allow use for instantaneous earth-fault
protection, with the reach limited to less than typical eighty percent of the
transformer impedance at minimum source impedance. EFPIOC can be configured
to measure the residual current from the three-phase current inputs or the current
from a separate current input.

8.3.3 Function block

EFPIOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK
BLKAR
MULTEN

IEC06000269-2-en.vsd
IEC06000269 V2 EN

Figure 232: EFPIOC function block

8.3.4 Signals

Table 224: EFPIOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase currents
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKAR BOOLEAN 0 Block input for auto reclose
ENMULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable current multiplier

453
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

Table 225: EFPIOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal

8.3.5 Settings

Table 226: EFPIOC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
IN>> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 200 Operate residual current level in % of
IBase

Table 227: EFPIOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
StValMult 0.5 - 5.0 - 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for operate current level

Table 228: EFPIOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

8.3.6 Monitored data

Table 229: EFPIOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IN REAL - A Residual current

8.3.7 Operation principle

The sampled analog residual currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter
(DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of the residual current,
as well as from the sample values the equivalent RMS value is derived. This
current value is fed to the Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (EFPIOC).
In a comparator the RMS value is compared to the set operation current value of
the function (IN>>). If the residual current is larger than the set operation current a
signal from the comparator is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate
the output signal TRIP.

454
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current
via a binary input (enable multiplier MULTEN). In some applications the operation
value needs to be changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents.

EFPIOC function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The trip signals
from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKAR, that can be
activated during single pole trip and autoreclosing sequences.

8.3.8 Technical data

Table 230: EFPIOC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (5-2500)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (502500)% of -

lBase
Operate time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Reset time at 2 to 0 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 -
x Iset

Operate time at 0 to 10 x Iset Min. = 5 ms -

Max. = 15 ms
Reset time at 10 to 0 x Iset Min. = 25 ms -
Max. = 35 ms
Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 -
x Iset

Dynamic overreach < 5% at t = 100 ms -

8.4 Four step residual overcurrent protection, (Zero

sequence or negative sequence directionality)
EF4PTOC

8.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Four step residual overcurrent EF4PTOC IN 51N/67N
protection
4
alt
4
TEF-REVA V1 EN

455
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

8.4.2 Functionality
The four step residual overcurrent protection EF4PTOC has an inverse or definite
time delay independent for each step.

All IEC and ANSI time-delayed characteristics are available together with an
optional user defined characteristic.

EF4PTOC can be set directional or non-directional independently for each of the

steps.

IDir, UPol and IPol can be independently selected to be either zero sequence or
negative sequence.

Second harmonic blocking can be set individually for each step.

Residual current can be calculated by summing the three phase currents or taking
the input from neutral CT

8.4.3 Function block

EF4PTOC
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRIN1
I3PPOL* TRIN2
I3PDIR* TRIN3
BLOCK TRIN4
BLKTR TRSOTF
BLKST1 START
BLKST2 STIN1
BLKST3 STIN2
BLKST4 STIN3
ENMULT1 STIN4
ENMULT2 STSOTF
ENMULT3 STFW
ENMULT4 STRV
CBPOS 2NDHARMD
CLOSECB
OPENCB

IEC06000424-2-en.vsd
IEC06000424 V3 EN

Figure 233: EF4PTOC function block

8.4.4 Signals

Table 231: EF4PTOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group connection for operate current
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group connection for polarizing voltage
SIGNAL
I3PPOL GROUP - Group connection for polarizing current
SIGNAL
Table continues on next page

456
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

Name Type Default Description

I3PDIR GROUP - Group connection for directional current
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 General block
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1 (Start and trip)
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2 (Start and trip)
BLKST3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 3 (Start and trip)
BLKST4 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 4 (Start and trip)
ENMULT1 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step1
ENMULT2 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step2
ENMULT3 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step3
ENMULT4 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step4
CBPOS BOOLEAN 0 Breaker position
CLOSECB BOOLEAN 0 Breaker close command
OPENCB BOOLEAN 0 Breaker open command

Table 232: EF4PTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TRIN1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
TRIN2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2
TRIN3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 3
TRIN4 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 4
TRSOTF BOOLEAN Trip signal from earth fault switch onto fault function
START BOOLEAN General start signal
STIN1 BOOLEAN Start signal step 1
STIN2 BOOLEAN Start signal step 2
STIN3 BOOLEAN Start signal step 3
STIN4 BOOLEAN Start signal step 4
STSOTF BOOLEAN Start signal from earth fault switch onto fault
function
STFW BOOLEAN Start signal forward direction
STRV BOOLEAN Start signal reverse direction
2NDHARMD BOOLEAN 2nd harmonic block signal

8.4.5 Settings

457
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

Table 233: EF4PTOC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
EnDir Disable - - Enable Enabling the Directional calculation
Enable
AngleRCA -180 - 180 Deg 1 65 Relay Characteristic Angle (RCA)
polMethod Voltage - - Voltage Type of polarization
Current
Dual
UPolMin 1 - 100 %UB 1 1 Minimum voltage level for polarization in
% of UBase
IPolMin 2 - 100 %IB 1 5 Minimum current level for polarization in
% of IBase
RNPol 0.50 - 1000.00 Ohm 0.01 5.00 Real part of source impedance used for
current polarisation
XNPol 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm 0.01 40.00 Imaginary part of source imp. used for
current polarisation
IN>Dir 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Residual current level in % of IBase for
Direction release
2ndHarmStab 5 - 100 % 1 20 Operate level of 2nd harmonic curr in %
of fundamental curr
BlkParTransf Off - - Off Enable blocking at energizing of parallel
On transformers
UseStartValue IN1> - - IN4> Current level blk at parallel transf (step1,
IN2> 2, 3 or 4)
IN3>
IN4>
SOTF Off - - Off SOTF operation mode (Off/SOTF/
SOTF Undertime/SOTF&Undertime)
UnderTime
SOTF&UnderTime
ActivationSOTF Open - - Open Select signal to activate SOTF: CB-
Closed Open/ -Closed/ -Close cmd
CloseCommand
StepForSOTF Step 2 - - Step 2 Select start from step 2 or 3 to start SOTF
Step 3
HarmBlkSOTF Off - - Off Enable harmonic restrain function in
On SOTF
tSOTF 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay for SOTF
t4U 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Switch-onto-fault active time
ActUnderTime CB position - - CB position Select signal to activate under time (CB
CB command Pos / CB Command)
tUnderTime 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Time delay for under time
DirMode1 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 (Off, Non-dir,
Non-directional Forward, Reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Table continues on next page

458
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 1
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
IN1> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 100 Residual current operate level for step 1
in % of IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of step 1 when definite time
char. is selected
k1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 1 selected
time characteristic
IMin1 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 100.00 Minimum operate residual current for
step 1 in % of IBase
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 1
IN1Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for the residual current setting
value for step 1
HarmBlock1 Off - - On Enable block of step 1 from harmonic
On restrain
DirMode2 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 2 (Off, Non-dir,
Non-directional Forward, Reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist2 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 2
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
IN2> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 50 Residual current operate level for step 2
in % of IBase
Table continues on next page

459
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Time delay of step 2 when definite time
char. is selected
k2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 2 selected
time characteristic
IMin2 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 50 Minimum operate residual current for
step 2 in % of IBase
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 2
IN2Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for the residual current setting
value for step 2
HarmBlock2 Off - - On Enable block of step 2 from harmonic
On restrain
DirMode3 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 3 (Off, Non-dir,
Non-directional Forward, Reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist3 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 3
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
IN3> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 33 Residual current operate level for step 3
in % of IBase
t3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Time delay of step 3 when definite time
char. is selected
k3 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 3 selected
time characteristic
IMin3 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 33 Minimum operate residual current for
step 3 in % of IBase
t3Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 3
IN3Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for the residual current setting
value for step 3
HarmBlock3 Off - - On Enable block of step 3 from harmonic
On restrain
DirMode4 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 4 (Off, Non-dir,
Non-directional Forward, Reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Table continues on next page

460
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Characterist4 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 4
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
IN4> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 17 Residual current operate level for step 4
in % of IBase
t4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.200 Time delay of step 4 when definite time
char. is selected
k4 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 4 selected
time characteristic
IMin4 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 17 Minimum operate residual current for
step 4 in % of IBase
t4Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 4
IN4Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for the residual current setting
value for step 4
HarmBlock4 Off - - On Enable block of step 4 from harmonic
On restrain

Table 234: EF4PTOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step1
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 1
tPCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tBCrv1 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tCCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tPRCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 1
tTRCrv1 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 1
Table continues on next page

461
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tCRCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 1
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step2
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 2
tPCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 2
tACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 2
tBCrv2 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 2
tCCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 2
tPRCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 2
tTRCrv2 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 2
tCRCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 2
ResetTypeCrv3 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step3
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 3
tPCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 3
tACrv3 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 3
tBCrv3 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 3
tCCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 3
tPRCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 3
tTRCrv3 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 3
tCRCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 3
ResetTypeCrv4 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step4
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 4
tPCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 4
tACrv4 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 4
tBCrv4 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 4
Table continues on next page

462
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tCCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 4
tPRCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 4
tTRCrv4 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 4
tCRCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 4

Table 235: EF4PTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
SeqTypeIDir Zero seq - - Zero seq Choice of measurand for directional
Neg seq current
SeqTypeIPol Zero seq - - Zero seq Choice of measurand for polarizing
Neg seq current
SeqTypeUPol Zero seq - - Zero seq Choice of measurand for polarizing
Neg seq voltage

8.4.6 Monitored data

Table 236: EF4PTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IOp REAL - A Operating current level
UPol REAL - kV Polarizing voltage level
IPol REAL - A Polarizing current level
UPOLIANG REAL - deg Polarizing angle
between voltage and
current
IPOLIANG REAL - deg Polarizing current angle

8.4.7 Operation principle

This function has the following three Analog Inputs on its function block in the
configuration tool:

463
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

1. I3P, input used for Operating Quantity. Supply the zero-sequence magnitude
measuring functionality.
2. U3P, input used for Voltage Polarizing Quantity. Supply either zero or
negative sequence voltage to the directional functionality
3. I3PPOL, input used for Current Polarizing Quantity. Provide polarizing
current to the directional functionality. This current is normally taken from the
grounding of a power transformer.
4. I3PDIR, input used for Directional detection. Supply either zero or negative
sequence current to the directional functionality.

These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks
in the Configuration Tool within PCM600.

8.4.7.1 Operating quantity within the function

The function always uses Residual Current (3I0) for its operating quantity. The
residual current can be:

1. directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in

PCM600 to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to
EF4PTOC function input I3P). This dedicated IED CT input can be for
example, connected to:
parallel connection of current instrument transformers in all three phases
(Holm-Green connection).
one single core balance, current instrument transformer (cable CT).
one single current instrument transformer located between power system
star point and earth (that is, current transformer located in the star point
of a star connected transformer winding).
one single current instrument transformer located between two parts of a
protected object (that is, current transformer located between two star
points of double star shunt capacitor bank).
2. calculated from three-phase current input within the IED (when the fourth
analog input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC function
Analog Input I3P is not connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in
PCM600). In such case the pre-processing block will calculate 3I0 from the
first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula
(will take I2 from SMAI AI3P connected to I3PDIR input which was
connected to I3P input also):

If zero sequence current is selected,

Iop = 3I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3

EQUATION1874 V2 EN (Equation 115)

where:
IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.

464
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the phasor of
the fundamental frequency component of the residual current is derived. The
phasor magnitude is used within the EF4PTOC protection to compare it with the
set operation current value of the four steps (IN1>, IN2>, IN3> or IN4>). If the
residual current is larger than the set operation current and the step is used in non-
directional mode a signal from the comparator for this step is set to true. This
signal will, without delay, activate the output signal STINx (x=step 1-4) for this
step and a common START signal.

8.4.7.2 Internal polarizing

A polarizing quantity is used within the protection in order to determine the

direction to the earth fault (Forward/Reverse).

The function can be set to use voltage polarizing, current polarizing or dual polarizing.

Current polarizing
When current polarizing is selected the function will use an external residual
current (3I0) as polarizing quantity IPol. This current can be:

1. directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in

PCM600 to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to
EF4PTOC function input I3PPOL). This dedicated IED CT input is then
typically connected to one single current transformer located between power
system star point and earth (current transformer located in the star point of a
star connected transformer winding).
For some special line protection applications this dedicated IED CT
input can be connected to parallel connection of current transformers in
all three phases (Holm-Green connection).
2. calculated from three phase current input within the IED (when the fourth
analog input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC function
analog input I3PPOL is NOT connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in
PCM600). In such case the pre-processing block will calculate 3I0 from the
first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:

IPol = 3I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3

EQUATION2018 V2 EN (Equation 117)

where:
IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.

The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus the phasor of
the fundamental frequency component of the polarizing current is derived. This
phasor is then multiplied with pre-set equivalent zero-sequence source Impedance
in order to calculate equivalent polarizing voltage UIPol in accordance with the
following formula:

465
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

UIPol = Z 0s IPol = (RNPol + j XNPol) IPol

EQUATION1877 V2 EN (Equation 118)

which will be then used, together with the phasor of the operating current, in order
to determine the direction to the earth fault (Forward/Reverse).

In order to enable current polarizing the magnitude of polarizing current shall be

bigger than a minimum level defined by setting parameter IPolMin.

Dual polarizing
When dual polarizing is selected the function will use the vectorial sum of the
voltage based and current based polarizing in accordance with the following formula:

UTotPol=UUPol + UIPol=UPol + Z 0s IPol = UPol + ( RNPol + jXNPol ) Ipol

IECEQUATION2408 V1 EN (Equation 119)

UPol and IPol can be either zero sequence component or negative sequence
component depending upon the user selection.

Then the phasor of the total polarizing voltage UTotPol will be used, together with
the phasor of the operating current, to determine the direction of the earth fault
(Forward/Reverse).

8.4.7.3 External polarizing for earth-fault function

The individual steps within the protection can be set as non-directional. When this
setting is selected it is then possible via function binary input BLKSTx to provide
external directional control (that is, torque control) by for example using one of the
following functions if available in the IED:

1. Distance protection directional function.

2. Negative sequence polarized General current and voltage multi purpose
protection function.

8.4.7.4 Directional detection for earth fault function

Zero sequence components will be used for detecting directionality for earth fault
function. In some cases zero sequence quantities might detect directionality wrong.
Negative sequence quantities will be used in such scenario. The user can select
either zero sequence components or negative sequence components for detecting
directionality with the parameter SeqTypeIPol. I3PDIR input always connected to
the same source as I3P input.

8.4.7.5 Base quantities within the protection

The base quantities are entered as global settings for all functions in the IED. Base
current (IBase) shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in

466
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

primary amperes. Base voltage (UBase) shall be entered as rated phase-to-phase

voltage of the protected object in primary kV.

8.4.7.6 Internal earth-fault protection structure

The protection is internally divided into the following parts:

1. Four residual overcurrent steps.

2. Directional supervision element for residual overcurrent steps with integrated
directional comparison step for communication based earth-fault protection
schemes (permissive or blocking).
3. Second harmonic blocking element with additional feature for sealed-in
blocking during switching of parallel transformers.
4. Switch on to fault feature with integrated Under-Time logic for detection of
breaker problems during breaker opening or closing sequence.

Each part is described separately in the following sections.

8.4.7.7 Four residual overcurrent steps

Each overcurrent step uses operating quantity Iop (residual current) as measuring
quantity. Each of the four residual overcurrent steps has the following built-in
facilities:

Directional mode can be set to Off/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse. By this

parameter setting the directional mode of the step is selected. It shall be noted
that the directional decision (Forward/Reverse) is not made within the residual
overcurrent step itself. The direction of the fault is determined in common
directional supervision element.
Residual current start value.
Type of operating characteristic (inverse or definite time). By this parameter
setting it is possible to select inverse or definite time delay for the earth-fault
protection. Most of the standard IEC and ANSI inverse characteristics are
available. For the complete list of available inverse curves please refer to
section "Inverse characteristics".
Type of reset characteristic (Instantaneous / IEC Reset / ANSI Reset). By this
parameter setting it is possible to select the reset characteristic of the step. For
the complete list of available reset curves please refer to section "".
Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like
definite time delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time
delay and parameters to define user programmable inverse curve are defined.
Supervision by second harmonic blocking feature (On/Off). By this parameter
setting it is possible to prevent operation of the step if the second harmonic
content in the residual current exceeds the preset level.
Multiplier for scaling of the set residual current pickup value by external
binary signal. By this parameter setting it is possible to increase residual
current pickup value when function binary input ENMULTx has logical value
1.

467
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

Simplified logic diagram for one residual overcurrent step is shown in figure 234.

BLKTR
EMULTX

IMinx Characteristx=DefTime
X T b
a>b
F a
tx TRINx
AND AND
|IOP|
a OR t
a>b
b

STINx
INxMult AND
X T
INx> F
AND Inverse
BLKSTx
AND
BLOCK Characteristx=Inverse
txmin
2ndHarm_BLOCK_Int t
OR
HarmRestrainx=Off

DirModex=Off OR STEPx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Non-directional
DirModex=Forward
AND OR
DirModex=Reverse FORWARD_Int

AND
REVERSE_Int

IEC10000008-4-en.vsd

IEC10000008 V4 EN

Figure 234: Simplified logic diagram for residual overcurrent step x, where x =
step 1, 2, 3 or 4

The protection can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. Output
signals for respective step, and STINx and TRINx, can be blocked from the binary
input BLKSTx. The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary
input BLKTR.

8.4.7.8 Directional supervision element with integrated directional

comparison function

It shall be noted that at least one of the four residual overcurrent

steps shall be set as directional in order to enable execution of the
directional supervision element and the integrated directional
comparison function.

The protection has integrated directional feature. As the operating quantity current
lop is always used. The polarizing method is determined by the parameter setting
polMethod. The polarizing quantity will be selected by the function in one of the
following three ways:

1. When polMethod = Voltage, UPol will be used as polarizing quantity.

2. When polMethod = Current, IPol will be used as polarizing quantity.
3. WhenpolMethod = Dual, UPol + IPol ZNPol will be used as polarizing quantity.

The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element,
as shown in figure 235, in order to determine the direction of the earth fault.

468
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

Operating area

STRV
0.6 * IN>DIR
Characteristic for reverse
release of measuring steps
-RCA -85 deg
Characteristic
for STRV 40% of
IN>DIR RCA +85 deg

RCA
65 Upol = -3U 0

-RCA +85 deg

RCA -85 deg

Characteristic for forward
release of measuring steps
IN>DIR

STFW

I op = 3I0

Operating area
Characteristic
for STFW IEC11000243-1-en.ai
IEC11000243 V1 EN

Figure 235: Operating characteristic for earth-fault directional element using

the zero sequence components

Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are:

Directional element will be internally enabled to operate as soon as Iop is

bigger than 40% of I>Dir and directional condition is fulfilled in set direction.
Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA, which defines the position of forward
and reverse areas in the operating characteristic.

Directional comparison step, built-in within directional supervision element, will

set EF4PTOC function output binary signals:

1. STFW=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos( - AngleRCA) is

bigger than setting parameter I>Dir and directional supervision element
detects fault in forward direction.
2. STRV=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos( - AngleRCA) is
bigger than 60% of setting parameter I>Dir and directional supervision
element detects fault in reverse direction.

469
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

These signals shall be used for communication based earth-fault teleprotection

communication schemes (permissive or blocking).

Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated

directional comparison step is shown in figure 236:

| IopDir |
a
a>b STRV
b AND
REVERSE_Int
0.6
X
a
a>b
AND STFW
I>Dir b
FORWARD_Int

X
0.4

FWD
AND FORWARD_Int
AngleRCA
polMethod=Voltage
OR
UPolMin

Characteristic
Directional
polMethod=Dual UPol IPolMin
T
I3PDIR
polMethod=Current 0.0 F
OR
UTotPol
IPol AND REVERSE_Int
T RVS
0.0 F

UIPol STAGE1_DIR_Int
RNPol Complex X T STAGE2_DIR_Int
XNPol Number 0.0 F STAGE3_DIR_Int OR
STAGE4_DIR_Int
BLOCK AND

IEC07000067-5-en.vsd

IEC07000067 V5 EN

Figure 236: Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison step

8.4.7.9 Second harmonic blocking element

A harmonic restrain of four step residual overcurrent protection function EF4PTOC

can be chosen for each step by a parameter setting HarmRestrainx. If the ratio of
the 2nd harmonic component in relation to the fundamental frequency component
in the residual current exceeds the preset level (defined by parameter
2ndHarmStab) then 2NDHARMD function output signal is set to logical value one
and harmonic restraining feature to the function block will be applicable.

Blocking from 2nd harmonic element activates if all three criteria are satisfied:

470
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

1. Current fundamental frequency component > IMinOpHarmBlk

2. Current second harmonic component > IMinOpHarmBlk
3. Ratio of the 2nd harmoinc component in relation to the fundamental frequency
component in the residual current exceeds the preset level defined parameter
2ndHarmStab setting

If all the above three conditions are fulfilled then 2NDHARMD function output
signal is set to logical value one and harmonic restraining feature to the function
block is applicable.

In addition to the basic functionality explained above the 2nd harmonic blocking
can be set in such way to seal-in until residual current disappears. This feature
might be required to stabilize EF4PTOC during switching of parallel transformers
in the station. In case of parallel transformers there is a risk of sympathetic inrush
current. If one of the transformers is in operation, and the parallel transformer is
switched in, the asymmetric inrush current of the switched in transformer will
cause partial saturation of the transformer already in service. This is called
transferred saturation. The 2nd harmonic of the inrush currents of the two
transformers is in phase opposition. The summation of the two currents thus gives a
small 2nd harmonic current. The residual fundamental current is however
significant. The inrush current of the transformer in service before the parallel
transformer energizing, is a little delayed compared to the first transformer.
Therefore we have high 2nd harmonic current component initially. After a short
period this current is however small and the normal 2nd harmonic blocking resets.
If the BlkParTransf function is activated the 2nd harmonic restrain signal is latched
as long as the residual current measured by the relay is larger than a selected step
current level by using setting UseStartValue.

This feature has been called Block for Parallel Transformers. This 2nd harmonic seal-
in feature is activated when all of the following three conditions are simultaneously
fulfilled:

1. Feature is enabled by entering setting parameter BlkParTransf = On.

2. Basic 2nd harmonic restraint feature has been active for at least 70ms.
3. Residual current magnitude is higher than the set start value for one of the four
residual overcurrent stages. By a parameter setting UseStartValue it is possible
to select which one of the four start values that will be used (IN1> or IN2> or
IN3> or IN4>).

Once Block for Parallel Transformers is activated the basic 2nd harmonic blocking
signal is sealed-in until the residual current magnitude falls below a value defined
by parameter setting UseStartValue (see condition 3 above).

Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature is shown in figure 237.

471
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

BLOCK

a
a>b
0.07*IBase b

a
a>b
b
Extract second 2NDHARMD
IOP AND
harmonic current a
a>b
component b

Extract
fundamental
current component
X
2ndHarmStab

q-1

t=70ms OR
t AND OR 2ndH_BLOCK_Int

BlkParTransf=On
|IOP|
a
a>b
b
UseStartValue
IN1>
IN2>
IN3>
IN4>

q-1 = unit delay

IEC13000015-2-en.vsd

IEC13000015 V2 EN

Figure 237: Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature and Block for Parallel Transformers
feature

8.4.7.10 Switch on to fault feature

Integrated in the four step residual overcurrent protection are Switch on to fault
logic (SOTF) and Under-Time logic. The setting parameter SOTF is set to activate
either SOTF or Under-Time logic or both. When the circuit breaker is closing there
is a risk to close it onto a permanent fault, for example during an autoreclosing
sequence. The SOTF logic will enable fast fault clearance during such situations.
The time during which SOTF and Under-Time logics will be active after activation
is defined by the setting parameter t4U.

The SOTF logic uses the start signal from step 2 or step 3 for its operation, selected
by setting parameter StepForSOTF. The SOTF logic can be activated either from
change in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker close command pulse.
The setting parameter ActivationSOTF can be set for activation of CB position
open change, CB position closed change or CB close command. In case of a

472
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

residual current start from step 2 or 3 (dependent on setting) the function will give
a trip after a set delay tSOTF. This delay is normally set to a short time (default 200
ms).

The Under-Time logic always uses the start signal from the step 4. The Under-
Time logic will normally be set to operate for a lower current level than the SOTF
function. The Under-Time logic can also be blocked by the 2nd harmonic restraint
feature. This enables high sensitivity even if power transformer inrush currents can
occur at breaker closing. This logic is typically used to detect asymmetry of CB
poles immediately after switching of the circuit breaker. The Under-Time logic is
activated either from change in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker
close and open command pulses. This selection is done by setting parameter
ActUnderTime. In case of a start from step 4 this logic will give a trip after a set
delay tUnderTime. This delay is normally set to a relatively short time (default 300
ms). Practically the Under-Time logic acts as circuit breaker pole-discordance
protection, but it is only active immediately after breaker switching. The Under-
Time logic can only be used in solidly or low impedance grounded systems.

SOTF

Open
t4U
Closed
ActivationSOTF
Close command
tSOTF
AND
AND t
STIN2

StepForSOTF
STIN3

OperationMode
BLOCK
OFF
SOTF
UNDERTIME TRIP
UnderTime

tUnderTime
SOTF or
2nd Harmonic AND
HarmResSOFT t UnderTime

OR

Open
Close OR

t4U

Close command
ActUnderTime
AND

STIN4

IEC06000643-3-en.vsd

IEC06000643 V3 EN

Figure 238: Simplified logic diagram for SOTF and Under-Time features

EF4PTOC Logic Diagram Simplified logic diagram for the complete EF4PTOC
function is shown in figure 239:

473
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

signal to
communication
scheme
Directional Check
Element

4 step over current

INPol Direction
operatingCurrent element TRIP
Element
3U0 One element for each
earthFaultDirection step
3I0
angleValid
I3PDIR
DirMode
enableDir

harmRestrBlock
3I0 Harmonic
Restraint 1
Element

start step 2, 3 and 4

Blocking at parallel
transformers
SwitchOnToFault
TRIP

CB
DirMode pos
or cmd
enableDir
Mode
Selection enableStep1-4

DirectionalMode1-4

IEC06000376-2-en.vsd
IEC06000376 V2 EN

Figure 239: Functional overview of EF4PTOC

8.4.8 Technical data

Table 237: EF4PTOC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (1-2500)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (10-2500)% of lBase -

Relay characteristic angle (-180 to 180) degrees 2.0 degrees
Operate current for directional (1100)% of lBase For RCA 60 degrees:
comparison 2.5% of Ir at I Ir
2.5% of I at I > Ir

Independent time delay for step (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is

1, 2, 3, and 4 at 0 to 2 x Iset greater

Inverse characteristics, see 16 curve types See table 1038, table 1039 and
table 1038, table 1039 and table table 1040
1040
Second harmonic restrain (5100)% of fundamental 2.0% of Ir
operation
Minimum polarizing voltage (1100)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Table continues on next page

474
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Minimum polarizing current (2-100)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir

Real part of source Z used for (0.50-1000.00) W/phase -

current polarization
Imaginary part of source Z used (0.503000.00) W/phase -
for current polarization
Operate time, start function at 0 Min = 15 ms -
to 2 x Iset Max = 30 ms

Reset time, start function at 2 to Min = 15 ms -

0 x Iset Max = 30 ms

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

8.5 Four step directional negative phase sequence

overcurrent protection NS4PTOC

8.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification device number
Four step negative sequence NS4PTOC 46I2
I2
overcurrent protection
4
alt
4

IEC10000053 V1 EN

8.5.2 Functionality
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection (NS4PTOC) has an inverse or
definite time delay independent for each step separately.

All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an
optional user defined characteristic.

The directional function is voltage polarized.

NS4PTOC can be set directional or non-directional independently for each of the

steps.

475
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

8.5.3 Function block

NS4PTOC
I3P* TRIP
I3PDIR* TR1
U3P* TR2
BLOCK TR3
BLKTR TR4
BLKST1 START
BLKST2 ST1
BLKST3 ST2
BLKST4 ST3
ENMULT1 ST4
ENMULT2 STFW
ENMULT3 STRV
ENMULT4

IEC10000054-2-en.vsd
IEC10000054 V2 EN

Figure 240: NS4PTOC function block

8.5.4 Signals
Table 238: NS4PTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group connection for operate current
SIGNAL
I3PDIR GROUP - Group connection for directional current
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group connection for polarizing voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 General block
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1 (Start and trip)
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2 (Start and trip)
BLKST3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 3 (Start and trip)
BLKST4 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 4 (Start and trip)
ENMULT1 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step1
ENMULT2 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step2
ENMULT3 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step3
ENMULT4 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step4

476
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

Table 239: NS4PTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TR1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
TR2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2
TR3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 3
TR4 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 4
START BOOLEAN General start signal
ST1 BOOLEAN Start signal step 1
ST2 BOOLEAN Start signal step 2
ST3 BOOLEAN Start signal step 3
ST4 BOOLEAN Start signal step 4
STFW BOOLEAN Forward directional start signal
STRV BOOLEAN Reverse directional start signal

8.5.5 Settings
Table 240: NS4PTOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
EnDir Disable - - Enable Enabling the Directional calculation
Enable
AngleRCA -180 - 180 Deg 1 65 Relay characteristic angle (RCA)
UPolMin 1 - 100 %UB 1 5 Minimum voltage level for polarization in
% of UBase
I2>Dir 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Residual current level in % of IBase for
Direction release
DirMode1 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Table continues on next page

477
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 1
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I2-1> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 100 Negative sequence current op level for
step 1 in % of IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of step 1 when definite time
char. is selected
k1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 1 selected
time characteristic
IMin1 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 100.00 Minimum current for step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 1
I1Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting
value for step 1
DirMode2 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 2 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist2 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 2
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I2-2> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 50 Negative sequence current op level for
step 2 in % of IBase
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Time delay of step 2 when definite time
char. is selected
Table continues on next page

478
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

k2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 2 selected
time characteristic
IMin2 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 50 Minimum current for step 2
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 2
I2Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting
value for step 2
DirMode3 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 3 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist3 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 3
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I2-3> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 33 Negative sequence current op level for
step 3 in % of IBase
t3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Time delay of step 3 when definite time
char. is selected
k3 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 3 selected
time characteristic
IMin3 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 33 Minimum current for step 3
t3Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 3
I3Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting
value for step 3
DirMode4 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 4 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Table continues on next page

479
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Characterist4 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 4
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I2-4> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 17 Negative sequence current op level for
step 4 in % of IBase
t4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.200 Time delay of step 4 when definite time
char. is selected
k4 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 4 selected
time characteristic
IMin4 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 17 Minimum current for step 4
t4Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 4
I4Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting
value for step 4

Table 241: NS4PTOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step1
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 1
tPCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tBCrv1 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tCCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tPRCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 1
tTRCrv1 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step
tCRCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 1
Table continues on next page

480
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step2
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 2
tPCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 2
tACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 2
tBCrv2 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 2
tCCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 2
tPRCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 2
tTRCrv2 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 2
tCRCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 2
ResetTypeCrv3 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step3
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 3
tPCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 3
tACrv3 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 3
tBCrv3 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 3
tCCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 3
tPRCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 3
tTRCrv3 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 3
tCRCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 3
ResetTypeCrv4 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step4
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 4
tPCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 4
tACrv4 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 4
tBCrv4 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 4
tCCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 4
Table continues on next page

481
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tPRCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 4
tTRCrv4 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 4
tCRCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 4

Table 242: NS4PTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

8.5.6 Monitored data

Table 243: NS4PTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IOp REAL - A Operating current level
UPol REAL - kV Polarizing voltage level
UPOLIANG REAL - deg Polarizing angle
between voltage and
current

8.5.7 Operation principle

Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function has the
following three Analog Inputs on its function block in the configuration tool:

1. I3P, input used for Operating Quantity.

2. U3P, input used for Polarizing Quantity.
3. I3PDIR, input used for "Directional finding"

These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks
in the Configuration Tool within PCM600.

8.5.7.1 Operating quantity within the function

Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function always

uses negative sequence current (I2) for its operating quantity. The negative
sequence current is calculated from three-phase current input within the IED. The
pre-processing block calculates I2 from the first three inputs into the pre-
processing block by using the following formula:

482
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

1
I2 = (
IL1 + a IL 2 + a IL 3
2
)
3
EQUATION2266 V2 EN (Equation 120)

where:
IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.
a is so called operator which gives a phase shift of 120 deg, that is, a = 1120 deg

a2 similarly gives a phase shift of 240 deg, that is, a2 = 1240 deg

The phasor magnitude is used within the NS4PTOC protection to compare it with
the set operation current value of the four steps (I1>, I2>, I3> or I4>). If the
negative sequence current is larger than the set operation current and the step is
used in non-directional mode a signal from the comparator for this step is set to
true. This signal, without delay, activates the output signal STx (x=1 - 4) for this
step and a common START signal.

8.5.7.2 Internal polarizing facility of the function

A polarizing quantity is used within the protection to determine the direction to the
fault (Forward/Reverse).

Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function uses the
voltage polarizing method.

NS4PTOC uses the negative sequence voltage -U2 as polarizing quantity U3P.
This voltage is calculated from three phase voltage input within the IED. The pre-
processing block calculates -U2 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing
block by using the following formula:

1
UPol = -U 2 = - (UL1 + a 2 UL 2 + a UL3 )
3
EQUATION2267 V2 EN

where:
UL1, UL2 and UL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages.

To use this all three phase-to-earth voltages must be connected to three IED VT inputs.

This phasor is used together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to
determine the direction to the fault (Forward/Reverse).To enable voltage polarizing

483
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

the magnitude of polarizing voltage must be bigger than a minimum level defined
by setting UpolMin.

Note that U2 is used to determine the location of the fault. This ensures the
required inversion of the polarizing voltage within the function.

8.5.7.3 External polarizing for negative sequence function

The individual steps within the protection can be set as non-directional. When this
setting is selected it is then possible via function binary input BLKSTx (where x
indicates the relevant step within the protection) to provide external directional
control (that is, torque control) by for example using one of the following functions
if available in the IED:

Distance protection directional function

Negative sequence polarized general current and voltage multi purpose
protection function

8.5.7.4 Internal negative sequence protection structure

The protection is internally divided into the following parts:

Four negative sequence overcurrent steps

Directional supervision element for negative sequence overcurrent steps with
integrated directional comparison step for communication based negative
sequence protection schemes (permissive or blocking)

Each part is described separately in the following sections.

8.5.7.5 Four negative sequence overcurrent stages

Each overcurrent stage uses Operating Quantity I2 (negative sequence current) as

measuring quantity. Every of the four overcurrent stage has the following built-in
facilities:

Operating mode (Off/ Non-directional /Forward / Reverse). By this parameter

setting the operating mode of the stage is selected. Note that the directional
decision (Forward/Reverse) is not made within the overcurrent stage itself.
The direction of the fault is determined in common Directional Supervision
Element described in the next paragraph.
Negative sequence current pickup value.
Type of operating characteristic (Inverse or Definite Time). By this parameter
setting it is possible to select Inverse or definite time delay for negative
sequence overcurrent function. Most of the standard IEC and ANSI inverse
characteristics are available. For the complete list of available inverse curves,
refer to Chapter ""

484
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

Type of reset characteristic (Instantaneous / IEC Reset /ANSI reset).By this

parameter setting it is possible to select the reset characteristic of the stage. For
the complete list of available reset curves, refer to Chapter ""
Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like
definite time delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time
delay and parameters to define user programmable inverse curve are defined.
Multiplier for scaling of the set negative sequence current pickup value by
external binary signal. By this parameter setting it is possible to increase
negative sequence current pickup value when function binary input
ENMULTx has logical value 1.

Simplified logic diagram for one negative sequence overcurrent stage is shown in
the following figure:

BLKTR

Characteristx=DefTime TRx
|IOP| AND AND
a OR tx
a>b
ENMULTx b

STx
IxMult AND
X T
Ix> F
txmin
BLKSTx AND
BLOCK
Inverse

Characteristx=Inverse

DirModex=Off OR STAGEx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Non-directional
DirModex=Forward
AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModex=Reverse

AND
REVERSE_Int

IEC09000683-3-en.vsd
IEC09000683 V2 EN

Figure 241: Simplified logic diagram for negative sequence overcurrent stage x , where x=1, 2, 3 or 4

NS4PTOC can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The start
signals from NS4PTOC for each stage can be blocked from the binary input
BLKSTx. The trip signals from NS4PTOC can be blocked from the binary input
BLKTR.

8.5.7.6 Directional supervision element with integrated directional

comparison function

At least one of the four negative sequence overcurrent steps must

be set as directional in order to enable execution of the directional

485
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

supervision element and the integrated directional comparison

function.

The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element,
as shown in figure 235, to determine the direction of the fault.

Reverse
Area

AngleRCA Upol=-U2

Forward
Area
Iop = I2

IEC10000031-1-en.vsd
IEC10000031 V1 EN

Figure 242: Operating characteristic for fault directional element

Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are:

Directional element is internally enable to operate as soon as Iop is bigger than

40% of I>Dir and the directional condition is fulfilled in set direction.
Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA which defines the position of forward
and reverse areas in the operating characteristic.

Directional comparison step, built-in within directional supervision element, set

NS4PTOC output binary signals:

486
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

1. STFW=1 when tip of I2 phasor (operating quantity magnitude) is in forward

area, see fig 235 (Operating quantity magnitude is bigger than setting I>Dir)
2. STRV=1 when tip of I2 phasor (operating quantity magnitude) is in the reverse
area, see fig 235. (Operating quantity magnitude is bigger than 60% of setting
I>Dir)

These signals must be used for communication based fault teleprotection

communication schemes (permissive or blocking).

Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated

directional comparison step is shown in figure 236:

|Iop|
a a>
STRV
b b AND
REVERSE_Int
0.6
X
a a>
STFW
I>Dir b b FORWARD_Int
AND

X
0.4

FWD
AND FORWARD_Int
AngleRCA
C h a r a c e ri s ti c
D i r e c ti o n a l

UPolMin

IPolMin
t

Iop

UPol
AND REVERSE_Int
RVS

STAGE1_DIR_Int
STAGE2_DIR_Int
STAGE3_DIR_Int OR
STAGE4_DIR_Int
BLOCK AND

IEC07000067-4.vsd

IEC07000067-4 V2 EN

Figure 243: Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison step

487
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

8.5.8 Technical data

Table 244: NS4PTOC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, negative (1-2500)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
sequence current, step 1-4 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (10-2500)% of IBase -

Independent time delay for (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
step 1, 2, 3, and 4 at 0 to 2 x greater
Iset

Inverse characteristics, see
table 1038, table 1039 and
table 1040
Minimum operate current for
steps 1 - 4
16 curve types See table 1038, table 1039 and
table 1040
(1.00 - 10000.00)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Relay characteristic angle (-180 to 180) degrees 2.0 degrees

Operate value, negative (1100)% of IBase For RCA 60 degrees:
current for directional release 2.5% of Ir at I Ir
2.5% of I at I > Ir

Minimum polarizing voltage (1100)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Minimum polarizing current (2-100)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir

Real part of negative (0.50-1000.00) W/phase -

sequence source impedance
used for current polarization
Imaginary part of negative (0.503000.00) W/phase -
sequence source impedance
used for current polarization
Operate time, start function at Min = 15 ms -
0 to 2 x Iset Max = 30 ms

Reset time, start function at 2 Min = 15 ms -

to 0 x Iset Max = 30 ms

Critical impulse time, start 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

function
Impulse margin time, start 15 ms typically -
function
Transient overreach <10% at = 100 ms -

8.6 Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power

protection SDEPSDE

488
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

8.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Sensitive directional residual over SDEPSDE - 67N
current and power protection

8.6.2 Functionality
In networks with high impedance earthing, the phase-to-earth fault current is
significantly smaller than the short circuit currents. Another difficulty for earth
fault protection is that the magnitude of the phase-to-earth fault current is almost
independent of the fault location in the network.

Directional residual current can be used to detect and give selective trip of phase-to-
earth faults in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the residual
current component 3I0 cos , where is the angle between the residual current
and the residual voltage (-3U0), compensated with a characteristic angle.
Alternatively, the function can be set to strict 3I0 level with a check of angle .

Directional residual power can also be used to detect and give selective trip of phase-
to-earth faults in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the
residual power component 3I0 3U0 cos , where is the angle between the
residual current and the reference residual voltage, compensated with a
characteristic angle.

A normal non-directional residual current function can also be used with definite or
inverse time delay.

A backup neutral point voltage function is also available for non-directional

residual overvoltage protection.

In an isolated network, that is, the network is only coupled to earth via the
capacitances between the phase conductors and earth, the residual current always
has -90 phase shift compared to the residual voltage ( 3U0). The characteristic
angle is chosen to -90 in such a network.

In resistance earthed networks or in Petersen coil earthed, with a parallel resistor,

the active residual current component (in phase with the residual voltage) should be
used for the earth fault detection. In such networks, the characteristic angle is
chosen to 0.

As the amplitude of the residual current is independent of the fault location, the
selectivity of the earth fault protection is achieved by time selectivity.

When should the sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection be used and
when should the sensitive directional residual power protection be used? Consider
the following:

489
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection gives possibility for better

sensitivity. The setting possibilities of this function are down to 0.25 % of
IBase, 1 A or 5 A. This sensitivity is in most cases sufficient in high
impedance network applications, if the measuring CT ratio is not too high.
Sensitive directional residual power protection gives possibility to use inverse
time characteristics. This is applicable in large high impedance earthed
networks, with large capacitive earth fault currents. In such networks, the
active fault current would be small and by using sensitive directional residual
power protection, the operating quantity is elevated. Therefore, better
possibility to detect earth faults. In addition, in low impedance earthed
networks, the inverse time characteristic gives better time-selectivity in case of
high zero-resistive fault currents.

Phase
currents
IN

Phase-
ground
voltages
UN

IEC13000013-1-en.vsd
IEC13000013 V1 EN

Figure 244: Connection of SDEPSDE to analog preprocessing function block

Overcurrent functionality uses true 3I0, i.e. sum of GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and
GRPxL3. For 3I0 to be calculated, connection is needed to all three phase inputs.

Directional and power functionality uses IN and UN. If a connection is made to

GRPxN this signal is used, else if connection is made to all inputs GRPxL1,
GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 the internally calculated sum of these inputs (3I0 and 3U0)
will be used.

490
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

8.6.3 Function block

SDEPSDE
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRDIRIN
BLOCK TRNDIN
BLKTR TRUN
BLKTRDIR START
BLKNDN STDIRIN
BLKUN STNDIN
STUN
STFW
STRV
STDIR
UNREL

IEC07000032-2-en.vsd
IEC07000032 V2 EN

Figure 245: SDEPSDE function block

8.6.4 Signals
Table 245: SDEPSDE Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all the outputs of the function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the trip outputs of the function
BLKTRDIR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the directional operate outputs of the
function
BLKNDN BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the Non directional current residual outputs
BLKUN BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the Non directional voltage residual outputs

Table 246: SDEPSDE Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip of the function
TRDIRIN BOOLEAN Trip of the directional residual over current function
TRNDIN BOOLEAN Trip of non directional residual over current
TRUN BOOLEAN Trip of non directional residual over voltage
START BOOLEAN General start of the function
STDIRIN BOOLEAN Start of the directional residual over current
function
STNDIN BOOLEAN Start of non directional residual over current
STUN BOOLEAN Start of non directional residual over voltage
STFW BOOLEAN Start of directional function for a fault in forward
direction
Table continues on next page

491
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

Name Type Description

STRV BOOLEAN Start of directional function for a fault in reverse
direction
STDIR INTEGER Direction of fault. A general signal common to all
three mode of residual over current protection
UNREL BOOLEAN Residual voltage release of operation of all
directional modes

8.6.5 Settings
Table 247: SDEPSDE Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OpMode 3I0Cosfi - - 3I0Cosfi Selection of operation mode for protection
3I03U0Cosfi
3I0 and fi
DirMode Forward - - Forward Direction of operation forward or reverse
Reverse
RCADir -179 - 180 Deg 1 -90 Relay characteristic angle RCA, in deg
RCAComp -10.0 - 10.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Relay characteristic angle compensation
ROADir 0 - 90 Deg 1 90 Relay open angle ROA used as release
in phase mode, in deg
INCosPhi> 0.25 - 200.00 %IB 0.01 1.00 Set level for 3I0cosFi, directional res
over current in % of IBase
SN> 0.25 - 200.00 %SB 0.01 10.00 Set level for 3I03U0cosFi, starting inv
time count in % of SBase
INDir> 0.25 - 200.00 %IB 0.01 5.00 Set level for directional residual over
current prot in % of IBase
tDef 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Definite time delay directional residual
overcurrent, in sec
SRef 0.03 - 200.00 %SB 0.01 10.00 Reference value of res power for inverse
time count in % of SBase
kSN 0.00 - 2.00 - 0.01 0.10 Time multiplier setting for directional
residual power mode
OpINNonDir> Off - - Off Operation of non-directional residual
On overcurrent protection
INNonDir> 1.00 - 400.00 %IB 0.01 10.00 Set level for non directional residual over
current in % of IBase
tINNonDir 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Time delay for non-directional residual
over current, in sec
Table continues on next page

492
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TimeChar ANSI Ext. inv. - - IEC Norm. inv. Operation curve selection for IDMT
ANSI Very inv. operation
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
tMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.040 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT
curves, in sec
kIN 0.05 - 2.00 - 0.01 1.00 IDMT time mult for non-dir res over
current protection
OpUN> Off - - Off Operation of non-directional residual
On overvoltage protection
UN> 1.00 - 200.00 %UB 0.01 20.00 Set level for non-directional residual over
voltage in % of UBase
tUN 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay for non-directional residual
over voltage, in sec
INRel> 0.25 - 200.00 %IB 0.01 1.00 Residual release current for all
directional modes in % of IBase
UNRel> 1.00 - 300.00 %UB 0.01 3.00 Residual release voltage for all direction
modes in % of UBase

Table 248: SDEPSDE Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.040 Time delay used for reset of definite
timers, in sec
tPCrv 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Setting P for customer programmable
curve
tACrv 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Setting A for customer programmable
curve
tBCrv 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Setting B for customer programmable
curve
tCCrv 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Setting C for customer programmable
curve
ResetTypeCrv Immediate - - IEC Reset Reset mode when current drops off.
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Table continues on next page

493
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tPRCrv 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Setting PR for customer programmable
curve
tTRCrv 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Setting TR for customer programmable
curve
tCRCrv 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Setting CR for customer programmable
curve

Table 249: SDEPSDE Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Global base selection for function groups

Table 250: SDEPSDE Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
RotResU 0 deg - - 180 deg Setting for rotating polarizing quantity if
180 deg necessary

8.6.6 Monitored data

Table 251: SDEPSDE Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
INCOSPHI REAL - A Magnitude of residual
current along the
polarizing quantity
3I0cos(Fi-RCA)
IN REAL - A Measured magnitude of
the residual current 3I0
UN REAL - kV Measured magnitude of
the residual voltage 3U0
SN REAL - MVA Measured magnitude of
residual power
3I03U0cos(Fi-RCA)
ANG FI-RCA REAL - deg Angle between 3U0 and
3I0 minus RCA (Fi-RCA)

8.6.7 Operation principle

8.6.7.1 Function inputs

The function is using phasors of the residual current and voltage. Group signals I3P
and U3P containing phasors of residual current and voltage are taken from pre-
processor blocks.

The sensitive directional earth fault protection has the following sub-functions
included:

494
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0cos

is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage (|
=ang(3I0)-ang(Uref)|). The reference voltage (Uref) is the polarizing quantity
which is used for directionality and is defined as Uref = -3U0 ejRCADir, that is
-3U0 inversely rotated by the set characteristic angle RCADir. RCADir is normally
set equal to 0 in a high impedance earthed network with a neutral point resistor as
the active current component is appearing out on the faulted feeder only. RCADir is
set equal to -90 in an isolated network as all currents are mainly capacitive. The
function operates when 3I0cos gets larger than the set value.

RCADir = 0o,ROADir = 90o

3I0

j = ang(3I0 ) - ang(3Uref )
-3U0 = Uref
3I0 cosj

IEC06000648-4-en.vsd
IEC06000648 V4 EN

Figure 246: RCADir set to 0

Uref
RCADir = 90 , ROADir = 90

3I0

3I0 cos

= ang (3I0 ) ang (Uref )

3U0

IEC06000649_3_en.vsd
IEC06000649 V3 EN

Figure 247: RCADir set to -90

495
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

For trip, the operating quantity 3I0 cos , the residual current 3I0, and the residual
voltage 3U0 must be larger than the set levels : INCosPhi>, INRel> and UNRel>.
Refer to the simplified logical diagram in Figure 251.

Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.

When the function picks up, binary output signals START and STDIRIN are
activated. If the output signals START and STDIRIN remain active for the set
delay tDef the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN get activated. The trip
from this sub-function has definite time delay.

ROADir is Relay Operating Angle. ROADir is identifying a window around the

reference direction in order to detect directionality. Figure 248 shows the
restrictions made by the ROADir.

RCADir = 0o

3I0
Operate area

j
-3U0 = Uref
3I0 cos j

ROADir

IEC06000650_2_en.vsd
IEC06000650 V2 EN

Figure 248: Characteristic with ROADir restriction

The function indicates forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is

defined as 3I0cos ( + 180) the set value.

It is also possible to tilt the characteristic to compensate for current transformer

angle error with a setting RCAComp as shown in the Figure 249:

496
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

RCADir = 0

Operate area

-3U0 =Uref

Instrument
transformer a
RCAcomp
angle error
Characteristic after
angle compensation

3I0 (to prot)

3I0 (prim)

en06000651.vsd
IEC06000651 V2 EN

Figure 249: Explanation of RCAComp

Directional residual power protection measuring 3I0 3U0 cos

is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage
(Uref = -3U0 e-jRCA) compensated with the set characteristic angle RCADir (|
=ang(3I0)ang(Uref)|). The function operates when 3I0 3U0 cos gets larger
than the set value SN>. Refer to the simplified logical diagram in Figure 251.

For trip, the residual power 3I0 3U0 cos , the residual current 3I0 and the
release voltage 3U0, shall be larger than the set levels (SN>, INRel> and UNRel>).

Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.

When the function picks up, binary output signals START and STDIRIN are
activated. If the output signals START and STDIRIN remain active for the set
delay tDef or after the inverse time delay (setting kSN) the binary output signals
TRIP and TRDIRIN get activated.

The function shall indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction
is defined as 3I0 3U0cos ( + 180) the set value.

497
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

This variant has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse
time delay.

The inverse time delay is defined as:

kSN (3I0 3U 0 cos j(reference))

t inv =
3I0 3U 0 cos j(measured)
EQUATION1942 V2 EN (Equation 121)

Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0 and

The function will operate if the residual current is larger than the set value and the
angle | = ang(3I0)-ang(Uref)| is within the sector RCADir ROADir

RCADir = 0

ROADir = 80

Operate area

3I0

-3U0

IEC06000652-3-en.vsd
IEC06000652 V3 EN

Figure 250: Example of characteristic

For trip, Residual current 3I0 shall be larger than both INRel> and INDir>, and
residual voltage 3U0 shall be larger than the UNRel>. In addition, the angle shall
be in the set area defined by ROADir and RCADir. Refer to the simplified logical
diagram in Figure 251.

Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.

When the function picks up, binary output signals START and STDIRIN are
activated. If the output signals START and STDIRIN remain active for the set
delay tDef the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN get activated.

The function indicates forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is

defined as is within the angle sector: RCADir + 180 ROADir

498
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

This variant has definite time delay.

Directional functions
For all the directional functions there are directional start signals STFW: fault in
the forward direction, and STRV: fault in the reverse direction. Even if the
directional function is set to operate for faults in the forward direction, a fault in the
reverse direction will give the start signal STRV. Also if the directional function is
set to operate for faults in the reverse direction, a fault in the forward direction will
give the start signal STFW.

Non-directional earth fault current protection

This function will measure the residual current without checking the phase angle.
The function will be used to detect cross-country faults. This function can serve as
alternative or backup to distance protection with phase preference logic. To assure
selectivity the distance protection can block the non-directional earth fault current
function via the input BLKNDN.

The non-directional function is using the calculated residual current, derived as

sum of the phase currents. This will give a better ability to detect cross-country
faults with high residual current, also when dedicated core balance CT for the
sensitive earth fault protection will saturate.

This variant has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse
time delay (TimeChar parameter). The inverse time delay shall be according to IEC
60255-3.

For trip, the residual current 3I0 shall be larger than the set level (INNonDir>).

Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKNDN.

When the function picks up, binary output signal STNDIN is activated. If the
output signal STNDIN remains active for the set delay tINNonDir or after the
inverse time delay the binary output signals TRIP and TRNDIN get activated.

Residual overvoltage release and protection

All the directional functions shall be released when the residual voltage gets higher
than a set level UNRel>.

In addition, there is also a separate non-directional residual over voltage protection,

with its own definite time delay tUN and set level UN>.

For trip, the residual voltage 3U0 shall be larger than the set level (UN>).

Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKUN.

When the function picks up, binary output signal STUN is activated. If the output
signal STUN is active for the set delay tUNNonDir, the binary output signals TRIP
and TRUN get activated. A simplified logical diagram of the total function is
shown in Figure 251.

499
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

OpINNonDir> = On
STNDIN
&
INNonDir>
t
TRNDIN
TimeChar IN
OpUN> = On
STUN
&
UN>
tUN TRUN
t

OpMode = 3I0Cosfi
INRel>

UNRel>
& &
tDef
INCosPhi> t

OpMode = 3I0 and fi

& STDIRIN
INDir> &
1

tDef TRDIRIN
t 1
OpMode = 3I03U0Cosfi
& &
SN>
t
S
1 N
STFW
RCADir Direction &
Detection
RCAComp Logic STRV
&
ROADir

DirMode = Forward

DirMode = Reverse
IEC06000653.vsd

IEC06000653 V4 EN

Figure 251: Simplified logical diagram of the sensitive earth fault current protection

8.6.8 Technical data

Table 252: SDEPSDE technical data
Function
Operate level for 3I0cosj
directional residual
overcurrent
Operate level for 3I03U0
cosj directional residual
power
Operate level for 3I0 and j
residual overcurrent
Range or value Accuracy
(0.25-200.00)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
(0.25-200.00)% of SBase 1.0% of Sr at S Sr
1.0% of S at S > Sr
(0.25-200.00)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Table continues on next page

500
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate level for non- (1.00-400.00)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
directional overcurrent 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Operate level for non- (1.00-200.00)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur at U Ur

directional residual 0.5% of U at U > Ur
overvoltage
Residual release current for (0.25-200.00)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
all directional modes 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Residual release voltage for (1.00-300.00)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur at U Ur

all directional modes 0.5% of U at U > Ur

Operate time for non- Min = 40 ms

directional residual
overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset Max = 65 ms

Reset time for non-directional Min = 40 ms

residual overcurrent at 2 to 0
x Iset Max = 65 ms

Operate time for directional Min = 115 ms

residual overcurrent at 0 to 2
x Iset Max = 165 ms

Reset time for directional Min = 25 ms

residual overcurrent at 2 to 0
x Iset Max = 65 ms

Independent time delay for (0.000 60.000) sec 0.2% or 80 ms whichever is

non-directional residual greater
overvoltage at 0.8 to 1.2 x
Uset
Independent time delay for (0.000 60.000) sec 0.2% or 80 ms whichever is
non-directional residual greater
overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset
Independent time delay for (0.000 60.000) sec 0.2% or 180 ms whichever is
directional residual greater
overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset
Inverse characteristics 16 curve types See table 1038, table 1039 and table
1040
Relay characteristic angle (-179 to 180) degrees 2.0 degrees
RCA
Relay Open angle ROA (0 to 90) degrees 2.0 degrees

8.7 Thermal overload protection, one time constant,

Celsius/Fahrenheit LCPTTR/LFPTTR

501
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

8.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Thermal overload protection, one time LCPTTR 26
constant, Celsius

Thermal overload protection, one time LFPTTR 26

constant, Fahrenheit

8.7.2 Functionality
The increasing utilization of the power system closer to the thermal limits has
generated a need of a thermal overload protection for power lines.

A thermal overload will often not be detected by other protection functions and the
introduction of the thermal overload protection can allow the protected circuit to
operate closer to the thermal limits.

The three-phase current measuring protection has an I2t characteristic with settable
time constant and a thermal memory. The temperature is displayed in either Celsius
or Fahrenheit, depending on whether the function used is LCPTTR (Celsius) or
LFPTTR (Fahrenheit).

An alarm level gives early warning to allow operators to take action well before the
line is tripped.

Estimated time to trip before operation, and estimated time to reclose after
operation are presented.

502
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

8.7.3 Function block

LCPTTR
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR ALARM
ENMULT LOCKOUT
AMBTEMP
SENSFLT
RESET

IEC13000199-1-en.vsd
IEC13000199 V1 EN

LFPTTR
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR ALARM
ENMULT LOCKOUT
AMBTEMP
SENSFLT
RESET

IEC13000301-1-en.vsd
IEC13000301 V1 EN

Figure 252: LCPTTR/LFPTTR function bloc

8.7.4 Signals
Table 253: LCPTTR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
ENMULT BOOLEAN 0 Current multiplyer used when THOL is for two or
more lines
AMBTEMP REAL 0 Ambient temperature from external temperature
sensor
SENSFLT BOOLEAN 0 Validity status of ambient temperature sensor
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of internal thermal load counter

Table 254: LFPTTR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
ENMULT BOOLEAN 0 Current multiplyer used when THOL is for two or
more lines
AMBTEMP REAL 0 Ambient temperature from external temperature
sensor
SENSFLT BOOLEAN 0 Validity status of ambient temperature sensor
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of internal thermal load counter

503
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

Table 255: LCPTTR Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
START BOOLEAN Start Signal
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal
LOCKOUT BOOLEAN Lockout signal

Table 256: LFPTTR Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
START BOOLEAN Start Signal
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal
LOCKOUT BOOLEAN Lockout signal

8.7.5 Settings
Table 257: LCPTTR Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
TRef 0 - 300 Deg C 1 90 End temperature rise above ambient of
the line when loaded with IRef
IRef 0 - 400 %IB 1 100 The load current (in % of IBase) leading
to TRef temperature
IMult 1-5 - 1 1 Current multiplier when function is used
for two or more lines
Tau 1 - 1000 Min 1 45 Time constant of the line in minutes.
AlarmTemp 0 - 200 Deg C 1 80 Temperature level for start (alarm)
TripTemp 0 - 300 Deg C 1 90 Temperature level for trip
ReclTemp 0 - 300 Deg C 1 75 Temperature for reset of lockout after trip
tPulse 0.05 - 0.30 s 0.01 0.10 Operate pulse length. Minimum one
execution cycle
AmbiSens Off - - Off External temperature sensor available
On
DefaultAmbTemp -50 - 100 Deg C 1 20 Ambient temperature used when
AmbiSens is set to Off.
DefaultTemp -50 - 300 Deg C 1 50 Temperature raise above ambient
temperature at startup

Table 258: LCPTTR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

504
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

Table 259: LFPTTR Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
TRef 0 - 600 Deg F 1 160 End temperature rise above ambient of
the line when loaded with IRef
IRef 0 - 400 %IB 1 100 The load current (in % of IBase) leading
to TRef temperature
IMult 1-5 - 1 1 Current multiplier when function is used
for two or more lines
Tau 1 - 1000 Min 1 45 Time constant of the line in minutes.
AlarmTemp 0 - 400 Deg F 1 175 Temperature level for start (alarm)
TripTemp 0 - 600 Deg F 1 195 Temperature level for trip
ReclTemp 0 - 600 Deg F 1 170 Temperature for reset of lockout after trip
tPulse 0.05 - 0.30 s 0.01 0.10 Operate pulse length. Minimum one
execution cycle
AmbiSens Off - - Off External temperature sensor available
On
DefaultAmbTemp -50 - 250 Deg F 1 60 Ambient temperature used when
AmbiSens is set to Off.
DefaultTemp -50 - 600 Deg F 1 100 Temperature raise above ambient
temperature at startup

Table 260: LFPTTR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

8.7.6 Monitored data

Table 261: LCPTTR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TTRIP INTEGER - - Estimated time to trip (in
min)
TENRECL REAL - - Estimated time to reset
of lockout (in min)
TEMP REAL - deg Calculated temperature
of the device
TEMPAMB REAL - deg Ambient temperature
used in the calculations
TERMLOAD REAL - - Temperature relative to
operate temperature

505
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

Table 262: LFPTTR Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TTRIP INTEGER - - Estimated time to trip (in
min)
TENRECL REAL - - Estimated time to reset
of lockout (in min)
TEMP REAL - Temperature Calculated temperature
Fahrenheit of the device
TEMPAMB REAL - Temperature Ambient temperature
Fahrenheit used in the calculations
TERMLOAD REAL - - Temperature relative to
operate temperature

8.7.7 Operation principle

The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed and for each phase current
the RMS value is derived. These phase current values are fed to the thermal
overload protection, one time constant LCPTTR/LFPTTR function. The
temperature is displayed either in Celsius or Fahrenheit, depending on whether
LCPTTR/LFPTTR function is selected.

From the largest of the three-phase currents a final temperature is calculated

according to the expression:

2
I
Q final = Tref
I ref

EQUATION1167 V1 EN (Equation 122)

where:
I is the largest phase current,
Iref is a given reference current and

Tref is steady state temperature rise corresponding to Iref

The ambient temperature is added to the calculated final temperature. If this

temperature is larger than the set operate temperature level, TripTemp, a START
output signal is activated.

The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as:

506
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

Dt

Qn = Qn -1 + ( Q final - Q n-1 ) 1 - e t
-

EQUATION1168 V1 EN (Equation 123)

where:
Qn is the calculated present temperature,

Qn-1 is the calculated temperature at the previous time step,

Qfinal is the calculated final temperature with the actual current,

Dt is the time step between calculation of the actual temperature and

t is the set thermal time constant for the protected device (line or cable)

The actual temperature of the protected component (line or cable) is calculated by

adding the ambient temperature to the calculated temperature, as shown above. The
ambient temperature can be taken from a separate sensor or can be given a constant
value. The calculated component temperature is available as a real figure signal,
TEMP.

When the component temperature reaches the set alarm level AlarmTemp the
output signal ALARM is set. When the component temperature reaches the set trip
level TripTemp the output signal TRIP is set.

There is also a calculation of the present time to operate with the present current.
This calculation is only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above
the operation temperature:

Q - Qoperate
toperate = -t ln final
Q final - Q n

EQUATION1169 V1 EN (Equation 124)

The calculated time to trip is available as a real figure signal, TTRIP.

After a trip, caused by the thermal overload protection, there can be a lockout to
reconnect the tripped circuit. The output lockout signal LOCKOUT is activated
when the device temperature is above the set lockout release temperature setting
ReclTemp.

The time to lockout release is calculated by the following cooling time calculation.
The thermal content of the function can be reset with input RESET.

Q - Qlockout _ release
tlockout _ release = -t ln final
Q - Q
final n
EQUATION1170 V1 EN (Equation 125)

507
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

In the above equation, the final temperature is equal to the set or measured ambient
temperature. The calculated time to reset of lockout is available as a real figure
signal, TENRECL. This signal is enabled when the LOCKOUT output is activated.

In some applications the measured current can involve a number of parallel lines.
This is often used where one bay connects several parallel cables. By setting the
parameter IMult to the number of parallel lines (cables) the actual current on one
line is used in the protection algorithm by dividing the measured current by the
total number of cables. To activate this option the input ENMULT must be activated.

The protection has a reset input: RESET. By activating this input the calculated
temperature is reset to its default initial value. This is useful during testing when
secondary injected current has given a calculated false temperature level.

508
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

START
Final Temp > Trip Temp

TEMP
Calculation of actual
temperature

AMBTEMP ALARM
Actual Temp > Alarm Temp

I3P

Calculation of final
temperature
ENMULT TRIP

Actual Temp > Trip Temp

SENSFLT

LOCKOUT
Lockout logic

Actual Temp < Recl Temp

BLOCK

TTRIP
Calculation of time to trip
BLKTR

TENRECL
Calculation of time to reset
of lockout

IEC09000637-2-en.vsd
IEC09000637 V2 EN

Figure 253: Functional overview of LCPTTR/LFPTTR

509
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

8.7.8 Technical data

Table 263: LCPTTR/LFPTTR technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Reference current (2-400)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir

Reference temperature (0-300)C, (0 - 600)F 1.0C, 2.0F

Operate time: Time constant t = (11000) IEC 60255-8,
minutes 5.0% or 200
ms whichever is
greater
I - Ip
2 2
t = t ln
2 2 TTrip - TAmb 2
I - Ip - T I ref

ref
EQUATION13000039 V2 EN (Equation 126)

TTrip= set operate temperature

TAmb = ambient temperature
Tref = temperature rise above ambient at Iref
Iref = reference load current
I = actual measured current
Ip = load current before overload occurs

Alarm temperature (0-200)C, (0-400)F 2.0C, 4.0F

Operate temperature (0-300)C, (0-600)F 2.0C, 4.0F
Reset level temperature (0-300)C, (0-600)F 2.0C, 4.0F

8.8 Thermal overload protection, two time constants

TRPTTR

8.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Thermal overload protection, two time TRPTTR 49
constants

SYMBOL-A V1 EN

8.8.2 Functionality
If a power transformer reaches very high temperatures the equipment might be
damaged. The insulation within the transformer will experience forced ageing. As a
consequence of this the risk of internal phase-to-phase or phase-to-earth faults will
increase.

510
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

The thermal overload protection estimates the internal heat content of the
transformer (temperature) continuously. This estimation is made by using a thermal
model of the transformer with two time constants, which is based on current
measurement.

Two warning levels are available. This enables actions in the power system to be
done before dangerous temperatures are reached. If the temperature continues to
increase to the trip value, the protection initiates a trip of the protected transformer.

The estimated time to trip before operation is presented.

8.8.3 Function block

TRPTTR
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
COOLING ALARM1
ENMULT ALARM2
RESET LOCKOUT
WARNING

IEC06000272_2_en.vsd
IEC06000272 V2 EN

Figure 254: TRPTTR function block

8.8.4 Signals
Table 264: TRPTTR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
COOLING BOOLEAN 0 Cooling input Off / On. Changes Ib setting and
time constant
ENMULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable Multiplier for currentReference setting
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of function

Table 265: TRPTTR Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip Signal
START BOOLEAN Start signal
ALARM1 BOOLEAN First level alarm signal
ALARM2 BOOLEAN Second level alarm signal
LOCKOUT BOOLEAN Lockout signal
WARNING BOOLEAN Warning signal: Trip within set warning time

511
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

8.8.5 Settings
Table 266: TRPTTR Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
IRef 10.0 - 1000.0 %IB 1.0 100.0 Reference current in % of IBase
IRefMult 0.01 - 10.00 - 0.01 1.00 Multiplication Factor for reference current
IBase1 30.0 - 250.0 %IB 1.0 100.0 Base current,IBase1 without Cooling
input in % of IBase
IBase2 30.0 - 250.0 %IB 1.0 100.0 Base Current,IBase2, with Cooling input
ON in % of IBase
Tau1 1.0 - 500.0 Min 1.0 60.0 Time constant without cooling input in
min, with IBase1
Tau2 1.0 - 500.0 Min 1.0 60.0 Time constant with cooling input in min,
with IBase2
IHighTau1 30.0 - 250.0 %IB1 1.0 100.0 Current Sett, in % of IBase1 for rescaling
TC1 by TC1-IHIGH
Tau1High 5 - 2000 %tC1 1 100 Multiplier in % to TC1 when current is >
IHIGH-TC1
ILowTau1 30.0 - 250.0 %IB1 1.0 100.0 Current Set, in % of IBase1 for rescaling
TC1 by TC1-ILOW
Tau1Low 5 - 2000 %tC1 1 100 Multiplier in % to TC1 when current is <
ILOW-TC1
IHighTau2 30.0 - 250.0 %IB2 1.0 100.0 Current Set, in % of IBase2 for rescaling
TC2 by TC2-IHIGH
Tau2High 5 - 2000 %tC2 1 100 Multiplier in % to TC2 when current is
>IHIGH-TC2
ILowTau2 30.0 - 250.0 %IB2 1.0 100.0 Current Set, in % of IBase2 for rescaling
TC2 by TC2-ILOW
Tau2Low 5 - 2000 %tC2 1 100 Multiplier in % to TC2 when current is <
ILOW-TC2
ITrip 50.0 - 250.0 %IBx 1.0 110.0 Steady state operate current level in %
of IBasex
Alarm1 50.0 - 99.0 %Itr 1.0 80.0 First alarm level in % of heat content trip
value
Alarm2 50.0 - 99.0 %Itr 1.0 90.0 Second alarm level in % of heat content
trip value
ResLo 10.0 - 95.0 %Itr 1.0 60.0 Lockout reset level in % of heat content
trip value
ThetaInit 0.0 - 95.0 % 1.0 50.0 Initial Heat content, in % of heat content
trip value
Warning 1.0 - 500.0 Min 0.1 30.0 Time setting, below which warning would
be set (in min)
tPulse 0.01 - 0.30 s 0.01 0.10 Length of the pulse for trip signal (in sec).

512
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

Table 267: TRPTTR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

8.8.6 Monitored data

Table 268: TRPTTR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
HEATCONT REAL - % Percentage of the heat
content of the
transformer
I-MEASUR REAL - % Current measured by the
function in % of the rated
current
TTRIP INTEGER - - Estimated time to trip (in
min)
TRESLO INTEGER - - Estimated time to reset
of the function (in min)
TTRIPCAL INTEGER 0=Not Active - Calculated time status to
1=Long Time trip: not active/long time/
2=Active active
TRESCAL INTEGER 0=Not Active - Calculated time status to
1=Long Time reset: not active/long
2=Active time/active

8.8.7 Operation principle

The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed and for each phase current
the true RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values
are fed to the protection function.

From the largest of the three phase currents a relative final temperature (heat
content) is calculated according to the expression:

2
I
Q final =
I ref

EQUATION1171 V1 EN (Equation 127)

where:
I is the largest phase current
Iref is a given reference current

513
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

If this calculated relative temperature is larger than the relative temperature level
corresponding to the set operate (trip) current, then the start output signal START
will be activated.

The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as:

If Q final > Q n
EQUATION1172 V1 EN (Equation 128)

Dt

Qn = Qn -1 + ( Q final - Q n-1 ) 1 - e t
-

EQUATION1173 V1 EN (Equation 129)

If Q final < Qn
EQUATION1174 V1 EN (Equation 130)

Dt
Qn = Q final - ( Q final - Q n -1 ) e
-
t

EQUATION1175 V1 EN (Equation 131)

where:
Qn is the calculated present temperature

Qn-1 is the calculated temperature at the previous time step

Qfinal is the calculated final (steady state) temperature with the actual current

Dt is the time step between calculation of the actual and final temperature
t is the set thermal time constant Tau1 or Tau2 for the protected transformer

The calculated transformer relative temperature can be monitored and it is exported

from the function as a real figure HEATCONT.

When the transformer temperature reaches any of the set alarm levels Alarm1 or
Alarm2 the corresponding output signal ALARM1 or ALARM2 is activated. When
the temperature of the object reaches the set trip level which corresponds to
continuous current equal to ITrip the output signal TRIP is activated.

There is also a calculation of the time to operation with the present current. This
calculation is only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above the
operation temperature:

Q - Qoperate
toperate = -t ln final
Q final - Q n

EQUATION1176 V1 EN (Equation 132)

514
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

The calculated time to trip can be monitored and it is exported from the function as
an integer output TTRIP.

After a trip there can be a lockout to inhibit reconnecting the tripped circuit. The
output lockout signal LOCKOUT is activated when the temperature of the object is
above the set lockout release temperature setting ResLo.

The time to lockout release is calculated by the following cooling time calculation.

Q - Qlockout _ release
tlockout _ release = -t ln final
Q final - Q n

EQUATION1177 V1 EN (Equation 133)

In the above equation, the final temperature is calculated according to equation

127. The calculated component temperature can be monitored as it is exported
from the function as a real figure, TRESLO.

When the current is so high that it has given a start signal START, the estimated
time to trip is continuously calculated and given as analogue output TTRIP. If this
calculated time get less than the setting time Warning, set in minutes, the output
WARNING is activated.

In case of trip a pulse with a set duration tPulse is activated.

515
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

Final Temp START

> TripTemp

RESET HEATCONT
Calculation
of heat
content

I3P
Calculation
ENMULT of final
temperature
ALARM1
Actual Temp >
Alarm1,Alarm2
ALARM2
Temp

Current base used

TRIP
Actual Temp
> TripTemp

S LOCKOUT
Management of R
COOLING setting
parameters: Tau,
Actual Temp
IBase Tau used
< Recl
Temp

TTRIP
Calculation
of time to
WARNING
trip

Calculation
of time to TRESCAL
reset of
lockout

IEC05000833-2-en.vsd

IEC05000833 V2 EN

Figure 255: Functional overview of TRPTTR

516
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

8.8.8 Technical data

Table 269: TRPTTR technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Base current 1 and 2 (30250)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir

Operate time: Ip = load current before overload 5.0% or 200 ms whichever

occurs is greater
I 2 - I p2 Time constant = (1500)
t = t ln minutes
I 2 - I ref 2

EQUATION1356 V2 EN (Equation 134)

I = actual measured current

Ip = load current before overload
occurs
Iref = reference load current
Alarm level 1 and 2 (5099)% of heat content 2.0% of heat content trip
operate value
Operate current (50250)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir

Reset level temperature (1095)% of heat content trip 2.0% of heat content trip

8.9 Breaker failure protection 3-phase activation and

output CCRBRF

8.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Breaker failure protection, 3-phase CCRBRF 50BF
activation and output
3I>BF

SYMBOL-U V1 EN

8.9.2 Functionality
Breaker failure protection (CCRBRF) ensures a fast backup tripping of surrounding
breakers in case the own breaker fails to open. CCRBRF can be current-based,
contact-based or an adaptive combination of these two conditions.

Current check with extremely short reset time is used as check criterion to achieve
high security against inadvertent operation.

Contact check criteria can be used where the fault current through the breaker is small.

517
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

CCRBRF can be single- or three-phase initiated to allow use with single phase
tripping applications. For the three-phase version of CCRBRF the current criteria
can be set to operate only if two out of four for example, two phases or one phase
plus the residual current start. This gives a higher security to the back-up trip
command.

CCRBRF function can be programmed to give a single- or three-phase re-trip of

the own breaker to avoid unnecessary tripping of surrounding breakers at an
incorrect initiation due to mistakes during testing.

8.9.3 Function block

CCRBRF
I3P* TRBU
BLOCK TRBU2
START TRRET
STL1 TRRETL1
STL2 TRRETL2
STL3 TRRETL3
CBCLDL1 CBALARM
CBCLDL2
CBCLDL3
CBFLT

IEC06000188-2-en.vsd
IEC06000188 V2 EN

Figure 256: CCRBRF function block

8.9.4 Signals
Table 270: CCRBRF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
START BOOLEAN 0 Three phase start of breaker failure protection
function
STL1 BOOLEAN 0 Start signal of phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN 0 Start signal of phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN 0 Start signal of phase L3
CBCLDL1 BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker closed in phase L1
CBCLDL2 BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker closed in phase L2
CBCLDL3 BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker closed in phase L3
CBFLT BOOLEAN 0 CB faulty, unable to trip. Back-up trip
instantaneously

518
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

Table 271: CCRBRF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRBU BOOLEAN Back-up trip by breaker failure protection function
TRBU2 BOOLEAN Second back-up trip by breaker failure protection
function
TRRET BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function
TRRETL1 BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function
phase L1
TRRETL2 BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function
phase L2
TRRETL3 BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function
phase L3
CBALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for faulty circuit breaker

8.9.5 Settings
Table 272: CCRBRF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
FunctionMode Current - - Current Detection for trip based on Current/
Contact Contact/Current&Contact
Current/Contact
BuTripMode 2 out of 4 - - 1 out of 3 Back-up trip modes: 2 out of 4 or 1 out of
1 out of 3 3 or 1 out of 4
1 out of 4
RetripMode Retrip Off - - Retrip Off Oper mode of re-trip logic: OFF/CB Pos
CB Pos Check Check/No CB Pos Check
No CBPos Check
IP> 5 - 200 %IB 1 10 Operate phase current level in % of IBase
IN> 2 - 200 %IB 1 10 Operate residual current level in % of
IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of re-trip
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Time delay of back-up trip
t2MPh 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Time delay of back-up trip at multi-phase
start
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Trip pulse duration

Table 273: CCRBRF Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
I>BlkCont 5 - 200 %IB 1 20 I> in % of IBase block operation using
Function Mode Contact
t3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.030 Additional time delay to t2 for a second
back-up trip
tCBAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay for alarm when faulty circuit
breaker indicated

519
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

Table 274: CCRBRF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

8.9.6 Monitored data

Table 275: CCRBRF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IL1 REAL - A Measured current in
phase L1
IL2 REAL - A Measured current in
phase L2
IL3 REAL - A Measured current in
phase L3
IN REAL - A Measured residual
current

8.9.7 Operation principle

Breaker failure protection CCRBRF is initiated from protection trip command,
either from protection functions within the IED or from external protection devices.

The start signal can be phase selective or general (for all three phases). Phase
selective start signals enable single pole re-trip function. This means that a second
attempt to open the breaker is done. The re-trip attempt can be made after a set
time delay. For transmission lines single pole trip and autoreclosing is often used.
The re-trip function can be phase selective if it is initiated from phase selective line
protection. The re-trip function can be done with or without current check. With
the current check the re-trip is only performed if the current through the circuit
breaker is larger than the operate current level.

The start signal can be an internal or external protection trip signal. This signal will
start the back-up trip timer. If the opening of the breaker is successful this is
detected by the function, by detection of either low current through RMS
evaluation and a special adapted current algorithm or by open contact indication.
The special algorithm enables a very fast detection of successful breaker opening,
that is, fast resetting of the current measurement. If the current and/or contact
detection has not detected breaker opening before the back-up timer has run its
time a back-up trip is initiated.

Further the following possibilities are available:

The minimum length of the re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-
up trip pulse 2 are settable. The re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-

520
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

up trip pulse 2 will however sustain as long as there is an indication of closed

breaker.
In the current detection it is possible to use three different options: 1 out of 3
where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole, 1 out
of 4 where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole or
high residual current and 2 out of 4 where at least two current (phase current and/
or residual current) shall be high for breaker failure detection.
The current detection level for the residual current can be set different from the
setting of phase current detection.
It is possible to have different back-up time delays for single-phase faults and
for multi-phase faults.
The back-up trip can be made without current check. It is possible to have this
option activated for small load currents only.
It is possible to have instantaneous back-up trip function if a signal is high if
the circuit breaker is insufficient to clear faults, for example at low gas pressure.

START 30 ms

STL1 OR BFP Started L1

150 ms
AND S
SR Q t
Time out L1
R AND
BLOCK
OR
Reset L1
Retrip Time Out L1
BackupTrip L1 OR

IEC09000976-1-en.vsd
IEC09000976 V1 EN

Figure 257: Simplified logic scheme of the CCRBRF starting logic

IP>
a
a>b
b
FunctionMode Current
OR AND Reset L1
OR
Contact
1 Time out L1
Current and Contact OR
AND
Current High L1

IL1 CB Closed L1
AND
OR
BFP Started L1

a AND AND
a>b OR AND
I>BlkCont b

CBCLDL1 Contact Closed L1

AND

IEC09000977-1-en.vsd

IEC09000977 V1 EN

Figure 258: Simplified logic scheme of the CCRBRF, CB position evaluation

521
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

t1 TRRETL3
BFP Started L1 From other
t Retrip Time Out L1 TRRETL2 TRRET
phases OR

tPulse
RetripMode No CBPos Check AND
OR TRRETL1
OR

1
OR AND

CB Pos Check
AND
CB Closed L1
CBFLT

IEC09000978-3-en.vsd
IEC09000978 V3 EN

Figure 259: Simplified logic scheme of the retrip logic function

BFP Started L1
BFP Started L2 AND

BFP Started L3

AND
IN
a
a>b
IN> b

BUTripMode Contact Closed L1

2 out of 4
1 out of 4 OR
1
1 out of 3 OR
Current High L2
From other
Current High L3
phases
Current High L1 AND

CBFLT
AND

t2
BFP Started L1 Backup Trip L1
t AND
OR
t2MPh

AND t

AND
OR OR
tPulse
From other Backup Trip L2 OR TRBU
OR
phases Backup Trip L3
From other BFP Started L2 2 of 3
phases BFP Started L3 tPulse
t3
OR
TRBU2
S Q t
R SR
AND

IEC09000979-3-en.vsd
IEC09000979 V3 EN

Figure 260: Simplified logic scheme of the back-up trip logic function

Internal logical signals Current High L1, Current High L2, Current High L3 have
logical value 1 when current in respective phase has magnitude larger than setting
parameter IP>.

522
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

8.9.8 Technical data

Table 276: CCRBRF technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate phase (5-200)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
current 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, phase > 95% -

current
Operate residual (2-200)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
current 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, residual > 95% -

current
Phase current level (5-200)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
for blocking of 1.0% of I at I > Ir
contact function
Reset ratio > 95% -
Operate time for 10 ms typically -
current detection
Reset time for 15 ms maximum -
current detection
Time delay for re-trip (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms whichever is
at 0 to 2 x Iset greater

Time delay for back- (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms whichever is

up trip at 0 to 2 x Iset greater

Time delay for back- (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 20 ms whichever is

up trip at multi-phase greater
start at 0 to 2 x Iset

Additional time delay (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 20 ms whichever is

for a second back-up greater
trip at 0 to 2 x Iset

Time delay for alarm (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms whichever is

for faulty circuit greater
breaker

8.10 Pole discordance protection CCPDSC

8.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Pole discordance protection CCPDSC 52PD

PD

SYMBOL-S V1 EN

523
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

8.10.2 Functionality
An open phase can cause negative and zero sequence currents which cause thermal
stress on rotating machines and can cause unwanted operation of zero sequence or
negative sequence current functions.

Normally the own breaker is tripped to correct such a situation. If the situation
persists the surrounding breakers should be tripped to clear the unsymmetrical load
situation.

The Pole discordance protection function CCPDSC operates based on information

from auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker for the three phases with additional
criteria from unsymmetrical phase currents when required.

8.10.3 Function block

CCPDSC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKDBYAR
CLOSECMD
OPENCMD
EXTPDIND
POLE1OPN
POLE1CL
POLE2OPN
POLE2CL
POLE3OPN
POLE3CL

IEC13000305-1-en.vsd
IEC13000305 V1 EN

Figure 261: CCPDSC function block

8.10.4 Signals
Table 277: CCPDSC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase currents
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKDBYAR BOOLEAN 0 Block of function at CB single phase auto re-
closing cycle
CLOSECMD BOOLEAN 0 Close order to CB
OPENCMD BOOLEAN 0 Open order to CB
EXTPDIND BOOLEAN 0 Pole discordance signal from CB logic
POLE1OPN BOOLEAN 1 Pole one opened indication from CB
POLE1CL BOOLEAN 0 Pole one closed indication from CB
POLE2OPN BOOLEAN 1 Pole two opened indication from CB
POLE2CL BOOLEAN 0 Pole two closed indication from CB
POLE3OPN BOOLEAN 1 Pole three opened indication from CB
POLE3CL BOOLEAN 0 Pole three closed indication from CB

524
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

Table 278: CCPDSC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal to CB
START BOOLEAN Trip condition TRUE, waiting for time delay

8.10.5 Settings
Table 279: CCPDSC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Time delay between trip condition and
trip signal
ContSel Off - - Off Contact function selection
PD signal from CB
Pole pos aux cont.
CurrSel Off - - Off Current function selection
CB oper monitor
Continuous monitor
CurrUnsymLevel 0 - 100 % 1 80 Unsym magn of lowest phase current
compared to the highest.
CurrRelLevel 0 - 100 %IB 1 10 Current magnitude for release of the
function in % of IBase

Table 280: CCPDSC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

8.10.6 Monitored data

Table 281: CCPDSC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IMin REAL - A Lowest phase current
IMax REAL - A Highest phase current

8.10.7 Operation principle

The detection of pole discordance can be made in two different ways. If the contact
based function is used an external logic can be made by connecting the auxiliary
contacts of the circuit breaker so that a pole discordance is indicated, see figure 262.

525
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

circuit breaker

Pole discordance signal from circuit breaker

en05000287.vsd

IEC05000287 V2 EN

Figure 262: Pole discordance external detection logic

This binary signal is connected to a binary input of the IED. The appearance of this
signal will start a timer that will give a trip signal after the set time delay.

There is also a possibility to connect all phase selective auxiliary contacts (phase
contact open and phase contact closed) to binary inputs of the IED, see figure 263.

C.B.

poleOneClosed from C.B.

poleTwoClosed from C.B.

poleThreeClosed from C.B.

+
poleOneOpened from C.B.

poleTwoOpened from C.B.

poleThreeOpened from C.B.

en05000288.vsd
IEC05000288 V1 EN

Figure 263: Pole discordance signals for internal logic

In this case the logic is realized within the function. If the inputs are indicating pole
discordance the trip timer is started. This timer will give a trip signal after the set
delay.

Pole discordance can also be detected by means of phase selective current

measurement. The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete
Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each
phase current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. The smallest and the
largest phase current are derived. If the smallest phase current is lower than the
setting CurrUnsymLevel times the largest phase current the settable trip timer
(tTrip) is started. The tTrip timer gives a trip signal after the set delay. The TRIP
signal is a pulse 150 ms long. The current based pole discordance function can be

526
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

set to be active either continuously or only directly in connection to breaker open

or close command.

The function also has a binary input that can be configured from the autoreclosing
function, so that the pole discordance function can be blocked during sequences
with a single pole open if single pole autoreclosing is used.

The simplified block diagram of the current and contact based Pole discordance
protection function CCPDSC is shown in figure 264.

BLOCK
OR
BLKDBYAR

PolPosAuxCont

AND
POLE1OPN
POLE1CL
POLE2OPN
Discordance
POLE2CL
detection
POLE3OPN
POLE3CL t 150 ms
t TRIP
AND
OR

PD Signal from CB
AND
EXTPDIND

CLOSECMD t+200 ms
OR
OPENCMD

AND

Unsymmetry current
detection

en05000747.vsd
IEC05000747 V1 EN

Figure 264: Simplified block diagram of pole discordance function CCPDSC -

contact and current based

CCPDSC is blocked if:

The IED is in TEST mode and CCPDSC has been blocked from the local HMI
The input signal BLOCK is high
The input signal BLKDBYAR is high

The BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the pole discordance
protection. It can be connected to a binary input in the IED in order to receive a
block command from external devices or can be software connected to other
internal functions in the IED itself in order to receive a block command from
internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and
internal function outputs.

The BLKDBYAR signal blocks the pole discordance operation when a single
phase autoreclosing cycle is in progress. It can be connected to the output signal
1PT1 on SMBRRECfunction block. If the autoreclosing function is an external
device, then BLKDBYAR has to be connected to a binary input in the IED and this

527
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

binary input is connected to a signalization 1phase autoreclosing in progress

from the external autoreclosing device.

If the pole discordance protection is enabled, then two different criteria can
generate a trip signal TRIP:

Pole discordance signaling from the circuit breaker.

Unsymmetrical current detection.

8.10.7.1 Pole discordance signaling from circuit breaker

If one or two poles of the circuit breaker have failed to open or to close the pole
discordance status, then the function input EXTPDIND is activated from the pole
discordance signal derived from the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts (one NO
contact for each phase connected in parallel, and in series with one NC contact for
each phase connected in parallel) and, after a settable time interval tTrip (0-60 s), a
150 ms trip pulse command TRIP is generated by the Polediscordance function.

8.10.7.2 Unsymmetrical current detection

Unsymmetrical current indicated if:

any phase current is lower than CurrUnsymLevel of the highest current in the
three phases.
the highest phase current is greater than CurrRelLevel of IBase.

If these conditions are true, an unsymmetrical condition is detected and the internal
signal INPS is turned high. This detection is enabled to generate a trip after a set
time delay tTrip if the detection occurs in the next 200 ms after the circuit breaker
has received a command to open trip or close and if the unbalance persists. The 200
ms limitation is for avoiding unwanted operation during unsymmetrical load
conditions.

The pole discordance protection is informed that a trip or close command has been
given to the circuit breaker through the inputs CLOSECMD (for closing command
information) and OPENCMD (for opening command information). These inputs
can be connected to terminal binary inputs if the information are generated from
the field (that is from auxiliary contacts of the close and open push buttons) or may
be software connected to the outputs of other integrated functions (that is close
command from a control function or a general trip from integrated protections).

528
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

8.10.8 Technical data

Table 282: CCPDSC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (0100)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir

Independent time delay (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 25 ms whichever

between trip condition and trip is greater
signal

8.11 Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP

8.11.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP 37
P<
2
SYMBOL-LL V2 EN

8.11.2 Functionality
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available
as a torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.

Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that
it does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous
generator becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the
rest of the power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous
machines operate as motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator
under consideration is very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may
be desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the rest of the power system.

Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous
state. The task of the low forward power protection is to protect the turbine and not
to protect the generator itself.

Figure 265 illustrates the low forward power and reverse power protection with
underpower and overpower functions respectively. The underpower IED gives a
higher margin and should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk
for unwanted operation immediately after synchronization may be higher. One
should set the underpower IED to trip if the active power from the generator is less
than about 2%. One should set the overpower IED to trip if the power flow from
the network to the generator is higher than 1% depending on the type of turbine.

529
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

When IED with a metering class input CTs is used pickup can be set to more
sensitive value (e.g.0,5% or even to 0,2%).

Underpower IED Overpower IED

Operate
Q Q
Operate
Line Line

Margin Margin
P P

Operating point Operating point

without without
turbine torque turbine torque

IEC06000315-2-en.vsd
IEC06000315 V2 EN

Figure 265: Protection with underpower IED and overpower IED

8.11.3 Function block

GUPPDUP
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRIP1
BLOCK TRIP2
BLOCK1 START
BLOCK2 START1
START2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT

IEC07000027-2-en.vsd
IEC07000027 V2 EN

Figure 266: GUPPDUP function block

8.11.4 Signals
Table 283: GUPPDUP Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Current group connection
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage group connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLOCK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 1
BLOCK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 2

530
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

Table 284: GUPPDUP Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRIP1 BOOLEAN Trip of stage 1
TRIP2 BOOLEAN Trip of stage 2
START BOOLEAN Common start
START1 BOOLEAN Start of stage 1
START2 BOOLEAN Start of stage 2
P REAL Active Power in MW
PPERCENT REAL Active power in % of SBase
Q REAL Reactive power in MVAr
QPERCENT REAL Reactive power in % of SBase

8.11.5 Settings
Table 285: GUPPDUP Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OpMode1 Off - - UnderPower Operation mode for stage 1 Off / On
UnderPower
Power1 0.0 - 500.0 %SB 0.1 1.0 Stage 1 underpower setting in Angle1
direction in % of SBase
Angle1 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for max power
senistivity stage 1
TripDelay1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Trip delay for stage 1
DropDelay1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.06 Drop-off delay for stage 1
OpMode2 Off - - UnderPower Operation mode for stage 2 Off / On
UnderPower
Power2 0.0 - 500.0 %SB 0.1 1.0 Power setting for stage 2 in % of SBase
Angle2 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for max power
senistivity stage 2
TripDelay2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Trip delay for stage 2
DropDelay2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.06 Drop-off delay for stage 2

Table 286: GUPPDUP Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
k 0.000 - 0.999 - 0.001 0.000 Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement, P and Q
Hysteresis1 0.2 - 5.0 %SB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 in % SBase
Hysteresis2 0.2 - 5.0 %SB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 in % SBase
IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
current error at 5% of Ir
Table continues on next page

531
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
current error at 30% of Ir
IAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
current error at 100% of Ir
UAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
voltage error at 5% of Ur
UAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
voltage error at 30% of Ur
UAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
voltage error at 100% of Ur
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Corr of error betw current and voltage
angles at 5% of Ir
IAngComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Corr of error betw current and voltage
angles at 30% of Ir
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Corr of error betw current and voltage
angles at 100% of Ir

Table 287: GUPPDUP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
Mode L1, L2, L3 - - Pos Seq Selection of measured current and
Arone voltage
Pos Seq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3

8.11.6 Monitored data

Table 288: GUPPDUP Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
P REAL - MW Active Power in MW
PPERCENT REAL - % Active power in % of
SBase
Q REAL - MVAr Reactive power in MVAr
QPERCENT REAL - % Reactive power in % of
SBase

8.11.7 Operation principle

A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is
shown in figure 267. The function has two stages with individual settings.

532
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

Chosen current
phasors P

Complex Derivation of S(angle)

S(angle) < t TRIP1
power S(composant)
Chosen voltage Power1
calculation in Char angle
phasors Q
START1

S(angle) < t TRIP2

Power2
START2

P = POWRE

Q = POWIM

IEC09000018-2-en.vsd
IEC09000018 V2 EN

Figure 267: Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function

The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing
blocks. The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as
shown in table 289.

Table 289: Complex power calculation

Set value: Mode Formula used for complex power calculation
L1, L2, L3
S = U L1 I L1* + U L 2 I L 2* + U L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1697 V1 EN (Equation 135)
Arone
S = U L1L 2 I L1* - U L 2 L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1698 V1 EN (Equation 136)
PosSeq
S = 3 U PosSeq I PosSeq *
EQUATION1699 V1 EN (Equation 137)
L1L2
S = U L1L 2 ( I L1* - I L 2* )
EQUATION1700 V1 EN (Equation 138)
L2L3
S = U L 2 L 3 ( I L 2* - I L 3* )
EQUATION1701 V1 EN (Equation 139)
L3L1
S = U L 3 L1 ( I L 3* - I L1* )
EQUATION1702 V1 EN (Equation 140)
Table continues on next page

533
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

Set value: Mode Formula used for complex power calculation

L1
S = 3 U L1 I L1*
EQUATION1703 V1 EN (Equation 141)
L2
S = 3 U L 2 I L 2*
EQUATION1704 V1 EN (Equation 142)
L3
S = 3 U L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1705 V1 EN (Equation 143)

The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for
monitoring and fault recording.

The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is

calculated. If this angle is 0 the active power component P is calculated. If this
angle is 90 the reactive power component Q is calculated.

The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting

Power1(2). For directional underpower protection, a start signal START1(2) is
activated if the calculated power component is smaller than the pick up value. For
directional overpower protection, a start signal START1(2) is activated if the
calculated power component is larger than the pick up value. After a set time delay
TripDelay1(2) a trip TRIP1(2) signal is activated if the start signal is still active. At
activation of any of the two stages a common signal START will be activated. At
trip from any of the two stages also a common signal TRIP will be activated.

To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The

absolute hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) + drop-
power1(2)). For generator low forward power protection the power setting is very
low, normally down to 0.02 p.u. of rated generator power. The hysteresis should
therefore be set to a smaller value. The drop-power value of stage1 can be
calculated with the Power1(2), Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) = Power1(2) +
Hysteresis1(2)

For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the drop-
power1(2) would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5
Power1(2)) is corrected to the minimal value.

If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value, the function will
reset after a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the start signal will drop
out and that the timer of the stage will reset.

8.11.7.1 Low pass filtering

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is

possible to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S
(P, Q). This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the

534
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following

recursive formula:

S = k SOld + (1 - k ) SCalculated
EQUATION1959 V1 EN (Equation 144)

Where
S is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle

SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties
TD

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is without any additional delay).
When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for
k=0.92 in case of slow operating functions.

8.11.7.2 Calibration of analog inputs

Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get
class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle
compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation
below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure
268.

535
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

IEC05000652 V2 EN

Figure 268: Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference
and the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.

Analog outputs (Monitored data) from the function can be used for service values
or in the disturbance report. The active power is provided as MW value: P, or in
percent of base power: PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as Mvar value:
Q, or in percent of base power: QPERCENT.

8.11.8 Technical data

Table 290: GUPPDUP technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Power level (0.0500.0)% of SBase 1.0% of Sr at S Sr
for Step 1 and Step 2 1.0% of S at S > Sr
where
Characteristic angle (-180.0180.0) degrees 2.0 degrees
for Step 1 and Step 2
Independent time delay to operate for (0.01-6000.00) s 0.2% or 40 ms
Step 1 and Step 2 at 2 to 0.5 x Sr and whichever is greater
k=0.000

536
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

8.12 Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP

8.12.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP 32
P>
2
DOCUMENT172362-IMG158942
V2 EN

8.12.2 Functionality
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available
as a torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.

Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that
it does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous
generator becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the
rest of the power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous
machines operate as motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator
under consideration is very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may
be desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the rest of the power system.

Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous
state. The task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to
protect the generator itself.

Figure 269 illustrates the low forward power and reverse power protection with
underpower and overpower functions respectively. The underpower IED gives a
higher margin and should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk
for unwanted operation immediately after synchronization may be higher. One
should set the underpower IED to trip if the active power from the generator is less
than about 2%. One should set the overpower IED to trip if the power flow from
the network to the generator is higher than 1%.

When IED with a metering class input CTs is used pickup can be set to more
sensitive value (e.g.0,5% or even to 0,2%).

537
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

Underpower IED Overpower IED

Operate
Q Q
Operate
Line Line

Margin Margin
P P

Operating point Operating point

without without
turbine torque turbine torque

IEC06000315-2-en.vsd
IEC06000315 V2 EN

Figure 269: Reverse power protection with underpower IED and overpower IED

8.12.3 Function block

GOPPDOP
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRIP1
BLOCK TRIP2
BLOCK1 START
BLOCK2 START1
START2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT

IEC07000028-2-en.vsd
IEC07000028 V2 EN

Figure 270: GOPPDOP function block

8.12.4 Signals
Table 291: GOPPDOP Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Current group connection
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage group connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLOCK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 1
BLOCK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 2

538
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

Table 292: GOPPDOP Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRIP1 BOOLEAN Trip of stage 1
TRIP2 BOOLEAN Trip of stage 2
START BOOLEAN Common start
START1 BOOLEAN Start of stage 1
START2 BOOLEAN Start of stage 2
P REAL Active power P in MW
PPERCENT REAL Active power P in % of SBase
Q REAL Reactive power Q in MVAr
QPERCENT REAL Reactive power Q in % of SBase

8.12.5 Settings
Table 293: GOPPDOP Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OpMode1 Off - - OverPower Operation mode for stage 1 Off / On
OverPower
Power1 0.0 - 500.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 Stage 1 overpower setting in Angle1
direction in % of SBase
Angle1 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for max power
senistivity stage 1
TripDelay1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Trip delay for stage 1
DropDelay1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.06 Drop-off delay for stage 1
OpMode2 Off - - OverPower Operation mode for stage 2 Off / On
OverPower
Power2 0.0 - 500.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 Stage 2 overpower setting in Angle2
direction in % of SBase
Angle2 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for max power
senistivity stage 2
TripDelay2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Trip delay for stage 2
DropDelay2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.06 Drop-off delay for stage 2

539
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

Table 294: GOPPDOP Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
k 0.000 - 0.999 - 0.001 0.000 Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement, P and Q
Hysteresis1 0.2 - 5.0 %SB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 in % of
SBase
Hysteresis2 0.2 - 5.0 %SB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 in % of
SBase
IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
current error at 5% of Ir
IAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
current error at 30% of Ir
IAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
current error at 100% of Ir
UAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
voltage error at 5% of Ur
UAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
voltage error at 30% of Ur
UAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
voltage error at 100% of Ur
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Corr of error betw current and voltage
angles at 5% of Ir
IAngComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Corr of error betw current and voltage
angles at 30% of Ir
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Corr of error betw current and voltage
angles at 100% of Ir

Table 295: GOPPDOP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
Mode L1, L2, L3 - - Pos Seq Selection of measured current and
Arone voltage
Pos Seq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3

540
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

8.12.6 Monitored data

Table 296: GOPPDOP Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
P REAL - MW Active power P in MW
PPERCENT REAL - % Active power P in % of
SBase
Q REAL - MVAr Reactive power Q in
MVAr
QPERCENT REAL - % Reactive power Q in %
of SBase

8.12.7 Operation principle

A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is
shown in figure 271. The function has two stages with individual settings.

Chosen current
phasors P

Complex Derivation of S(angle)

S(angle) > t TRIP1
power S(composant)
Chosen voltage Power1
calculation in Char angle
phasors Q
START1

S(angle) > t TRIP2

Power2
START2

P = POWRE

Q = POWIM

IEC06000567-2-en.vsd
IEC06000567 V2 EN

Figure 271: Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function

The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing
blocks. The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as
shown in table 297.

541
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

Table 297: Complex power calculation

Set value: Mode Formula used for complex power calculation
L1, L2, L3
S = U L1 I L1* + U L 2 I L 2* + U L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1697 V1 EN (Equation 145)
Arone
S = U L1L 2 I L1* - U L 2 L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1698 V1 EN (Equation 146)
PosSeq
S = 3 U PosSeq I PosSeq *
EQUATION1699 V1 EN (Equation 147)
L1L2
S = U L1L 2 ( I L1* - I L 2* )
EQUATION1700 V1 EN (Equation 148)
L2L3
S = U L 2 L 3 ( I L 2* - I L 3* )
EQUATION1701 V1 EN (Equation 149)
L3L1
S = U L 3 L1 ( I L 3* - I L1* )
EQUATION1702 V1 EN (Equation 150)
L1
S = 3 U L1 I L1*
EQUATION1703 V1 EN (Equation 151)
L2
S = 3 U L 2 I L 2*
EQUATION1704 V1 EN (Equation 152)
L3
S = 3 U L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1705 V1 EN (Equation 153)

The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for
monitoring and fault recording.

The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is

calculated. If this angle is 0 the active power component P is calculated. If this
angle is 90 the reactive power component Q is calculated.

The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting

Power1(2). A start signal START1(2) is activated if the calculated power
component is larger than the pick up value. After a set time delay TripDelay1(2) a
trip TRIP1(2) signal is activated if the start signal is still active. At activation of
any of the two stages a common signal START will be activated. At trip from any
of the two stages also a common signal TRIP will be activated.

To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The

absolute hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) drop-
power1(2)). For generator reverse power protection the power setting is very low,
normally down to 0.02 p.u. of rated generator power. The hysteresis should
therefore be set to a smaller value. The drop-power value of stage1 can be

542
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

calculated with the Power1(2), Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) = Power1(2)

Hysteresis1(2)

For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the drop-
power1(2) would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5
Power1(2)) is corrected to the minimal value.

If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value the function will reset
after a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the start signal will drop out
ant that the timer of the stage will reset.

8.12.7.1 Low pass filtering

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is

possible to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S
(P, Q). This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the
measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following
recursive formula:

S = k SOld + (1 - k ) SCalculated
EQUATION1959 V1 EN (Equation 154)

Where
S is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle

SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay).
When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for k =
0.92 in case of slow operating functions.

8.12.7.2 Calibration of analog inputs

Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get
class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle
compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation
below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure
272.

543
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

IEC05000652 V2 EN

Figure 272: Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference
and the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.

Analog outputs from the function can be used for service values or in the
disturbance report. The active power is provided as MW value: P, or in percent of
base power: PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as Mvar value: Q, or in
percent of base power: QPERCENT.

544
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

8.12.8 Technical data

Table 298: GOPPDOP technical data
Function Range or value Accurac
y
Power level (0.0500.0)% of SBase
for Step 1 and Step 2 1.0%
of Sr
at S
Sr

1.0%
of S at
S > Sr

Characteristic angle (-180.0180.0) degrees 2.0

for Step 1 and Step 2 degree
s
Operate time, start at 0.5 to 2 x Sr and k=0.000 Min =10 ms
Max = 25 ms
Reset time, start at 2 to 0.5 x Sr and k=0.000 Min = 35 ms
Max = 55 ms
Independent time delay to operate for Step 1 and (0.01-6000.00) s
Step 2 at 0.5 to 2 x Sr and k=0.000 0.2%
or
40 ms
whiche
ver is
greate
r

8.13 Broken conductor check BRCPTOC

8.13.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC - 46

8.13.2 Functionality
Conventional protection functions cannot detect the broken conductor condition.
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC function, consisting of continuous phase
selective current unsymmetrical check on the line where the IED is connected,
gives an alarm or trip at detecting broken conductors.

545
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

8.13.3 Function block

BRCPTOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR

IEC07000034-2-en.vsd
IEC07000034 V2 EN

Figure 273: BRCPTOC function block

8.13.4 Signals
Table 299: BRCPTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip

Table 300: BRCPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Operate signal of the protection logic
START BOOLEAN Start signal of the protection logic

8.13.5 Settings
Table 301: BRCPTOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
Iub> 50 - 90 %IM 1 50 Highest and lowest phase currents
difference in % of highest phase current
IP> 5 - 100 %IB 1 20 Minimum phase current for operation of
Iub> in % of IBase
tOper 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Operate time delay

Table 302: BRCPTOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tReset 0.010 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay in reset

546
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

Table 303: BRCPTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

8.13.6 Monitored data

Table 304: BRCPTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IUNBAL REAL - - Measured unbalance of
phase currents

8.13.7 Operation principle

Broken conductor check (BRCPTOC) detects a broken conductor condition by
detecting the asymmetry between currents in the three phases. The current-
measuring elements continuously measure the three-phase currents.

The current asymmetry signal output START is set on if:

The difference in currents between the phase with the lowest current and the
phase with the highest current is greater than set percentage Iub> of the
highest phase current
The highest phase current is greater than the minimum setting value IP>.
The lowest phase current is below 50% of the minimum setting value IP>

The third condition is included to avoid problems in systems involving parallel

lines. If a conductor breaks in one phase on one line, the parallel line will
experience an increase in current in the same phase. This might result in the first
two conditions being satisfied. If the unsymmetrical detection lasts for a period
longer than the set time tOper the TRIP output is activated.

The simplified logic diagram of the broken conductor check function is shown in
figure 274

BRCPTOC is disabled (blocked) if:

The IED is in TEST status and the function has been blocked from the local
HMI test menu (BlockBRC=Yes).
The input signal BLOCK is high.

The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive
a block command from external devices, or can be software connected to other
internal functions of the IED itself to receive a block command from internal
functions.

547
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

The output trip signal TRIP is a three-phase trip. It can be used to command a trip
to the circuit breaker or for alarm purpose only.

TEST

TEST-ACTIVE
and
Block BRCPTOC=Yes
START

Function Enable
BLOCK or
tOper
TRIP
and t
Unsymmetrical
Current Detection
STI

IL1<50%IP>

IL2<50%IP> or

IL3<50%IP>

IEC09000158-3-en.vsd
IEC09000158 V3 EN

Figure 274: Simplified logic diagram for Broken conductor check BRCPTOC

8.13.8 Technical data

Table 305: BRCPTOC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Minimum phase current for operation (5100)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir

Unbalance current operation (5090)% of maximum current 1.0% of Ir

Independent operate time delay (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 45 ms

whichever is greater
Independent reset time delay (0.010-60.000) s 0.2% or 30 ms
whichever is greater
Start time at current change from Ir to 0 Min = 25 ms -
Max = 35 ms
Reset time at current change from 0 to Ir Min = 5 ms -
Max = 20 ms

8.14 Capacitor bank protection CBPGAPC

548
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

8.14.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Capacitor bank protection CBPGAPC - -

8.14.2 Functionality
Shunt Capacitor Banks (SCB) are used in a power system to provide reactive
power compensation and power factor correction. They are as well used as integral
parts of Static Var Compensators (SVC) or Harmonic Filters installations.
Capacitor bank protection (CBPGAPC) function is specially designed to provide
protection and supervision features for SCBs.

8.14.3 Function block

CBPGAPC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK TROC
BLKTR TRUC
BLKOC TRQOL
BLKUC TRHOL
BLKUCCUT START
BLKQOL STOC
BLKHOL STUC
STQOL
STHOL
STOCL1
STOCL2
STOCL3
STUCL1
STUCL2
STUCL3
STQOLL1
STQOLL2
STQOLL3
STHDTL1
STHDTL2
STHDTL3
STHIDML1
STHIDML2
STHIDML3
RECNINH

IEC14000046-1-en.vsd
IEC08000500 V2 EN

Figure 275: CBPGAPC function block

8.14.4 Signals
Table 306: CBPGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three Phase Current Input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block the complete function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block all trip output signals
Table continues on next page

549
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

Name Type Default Description

BLKOC BOOLEAN 0 Block over current functionality
BLKUC BOOLEAN 0 Block under current functionality
BLKUCCUT BOOLEAN 0 Block UC function when the capacitor bank is
disconnected
BLKQOL BOOLEAN 0 Block reactive power over load functionality
BLKHOL BOOLEAN 0 Block harmonic over load functionality

Table 307: CBPGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TROC BOOLEAN Trip signal for over current
TRUC BOOLEAN Trip signal for under current
TRQOL BOOLEAN Trip signal for reactive power over load
TRHOL BOOLEAN Trip signal for harmonic over load
START BOOLEAN General start signal
STOC BOOLEAN Start signals for over current
STUC BOOLEAN Start signal for under current
STQOL BOOLEAN Start signal for reactive power over load
STHOL BOOLEAN Start signal for harmonic over load
STOCL1 BOOLEAN Start signal for over current of phase L1
STOCL2 BOOLEAN Start signal for over current of phase L2
STOCL3 BOOLEAN Start signal for over current of phase L3
STUCL1 BOOLEAN Start signal for under current of phase L1
STUCL2 BOOLEAN Start signal for under current of phase L2
STUCL3 BOOLEAN Start signal for under current of phase L3
STQOLL1 BOOLEAN Start signal for reactive power over load of phase
L1
STQOLL2 BOOLEAN Start signal for reactive power over load of phase
L2
STQOLL3 BOOLEAN Start signal for reactive power over load of phase
L3
STHDTL1 BOOLEAN Start signal harmonic over load Definite Time
stage phase L1
STHDTL2 BOOLEAN Start signal harmonic over load Definite Time
stage phase L2
STHDTL3 BOOLEAN Start signal harmonic over load Definite Time
stage phase L3
STHIDML1 BOOLEAN Start signal for harmonic over load IDMT stage of
phase L1
STHIDML2 BOOLEAN Start signal for harmonic over load IDMT stage of
phase L2
STHIDML3 BOOLEAN Start signal for harmonic over load IDMT stage of
phase L3
RECNINH BOOLEAN Capacitor bank reconnection inhibit signal

550
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

8.14.5 Settings
Table 308: CBPGAPC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
OperationRecIn Off - - On Inhibit reconnection for operation Off/On
On
IRecnInhibit< 4 - 1000 %IB 1 10 Current in % of IBase below which the
SCB is disconnected
tReconnInhibit 1.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 300.00 Time delay for Capacitor Bank voltage to
discharge to <5%
OperationOC Off - - On Operation over current Off/On
On
IOC> 10 - 900 %IB 1 135 Start level for over current operation, %
of IBase
tOC 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Time delay for over current operation
OperationUC Off - - Off Operation under current Off/On
On
IUC< 5 - 100 %IB 1 70 Start level for under current operation in
% of IBase
tUC 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Time delay for under current operation
OperationQOL Off - - On Operation reactive power over load Off/
On On
QOL> 10 - 900 % 1 130 Start level for reactive power over load in
%
tQOL 1.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 60.00 Time delay for reactive power overload
operation
OperationHOL Off - - On Operation harmonic over load Off/On
On
HOLDTU> 10 - 500 % 1 200 Start value of voltage in % for DT
harmonic voltage overload
tHOLDT 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 10.00 Time delay for operation of harmonic
voltage overload
HOLIDMTU> 80 - 200 % 1 110 Start value of voltage in % for IDMT
harm. voltage overload
kHOLIDMT 0.50 - 1.50 - 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier for harmonic voltage
overload IDMT curve
tMaxHOLIDMT 0.05 - 6000.00 s 0.01 2000.00 Maximum trip delay for harmonic voltage
overload
tMinHOLIDMT 0.05 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.10 Minimum trip delay for harmonic voltage
overload

Table 309: CBPGAPC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

551
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

8.14.6 Monitored data

Table 310: CBPGAPC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CAPDISC BOOLEAN - - Capcitor bank
disconnected
IPEAKL1 REAL - A Equivalant RMS current
for phase L1
IPEAKL2 REAL - A Equivalant RMS current
for phase L2
IPEAKL3 REAL - A Equivalant RMS current
for phase L3
URMSL1 REAL - % Calculated voltage RMS
for phase L1
URMSL2 REAL - % Calculated voltage RMS
for phase L2
URMSL3 REAL - % Calculated voltage RMS
for phase L3
QL1 REAL - % Reactive power value for
phase L1
QL2 REAL - % Reactive power value for
phase L2
QL3 REAL - % Reactive power value for
phase L3

8.14.7 Operation principle

Capacitor bank protection (CBPGAPC) function measures the SCB three-phase
current. CBPGAPC has several built-in features:
Overcurrent stage
Undercurrent stage
Reconnection inhibit
Harmonic overload
Reactive power overload

8.14.7.1 Measured quantities

Three-phase input current from the SCB is connected via the preprocessing block
to CBPGAPC function. From this preprocessing block CBPGAPC function obtains
the following quantities for every phase:

Current sample values with sampling rate of 1 kHz in 50 Hz power system and
1.2 kHz in 60 Hz power system (that is, 20 samples in fundamental power
system cycle). These samples correspond to the instantaneous current

552
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

waveform of the protected SCB and in further text will be marked with symbol
i~
Equivalent RMS current value based on Peak Current measurement. This
value is obtained as maximum absolute current sample value over last power
system cycle divided by 2 and in further text will be marked with symbol
IpeakRMS
Equivalent true RMS current value based on the following formula:

i 2
~m

I TRMS = m =1

N
EQUATION2232 V1 EN (Equation 155)

where N is used number of samples in one power system cycle (that is, 20) and i~m
are last N samples of the current waveform. In further text this equivalent true rms
current quantity will be marked with symbol ITRMS.

Note that the measured IpeakRMS value is available as a service value in primary
amperes for every phase from the function.

From the measured SCB currents, voltage value across every SCB phase is
calculated. This is done by continuous integration of the measured current
waveform by using the following principal equation:

1
u (t ) = i ( t ) t

C
EQUATION2233 V1 EN (Equation 156)

Where:
u(t) is voltage waveform across capacitor
i(t) is capacitor current waveform
C is capacitance in Farads

By using this integration procedure and subsequent filtering the following

quantities for every phase are calculated within the function:

Voltage sample values with rate of 1 kHz in 50 Hz power system and 1.2 kHz
in 60 Hz power system (that is, 20 samples in fundamental power system
cycle). These samples correspond to the instantaneous voltage waveform
across the protected SCB and in further text will be marked with symbol u~
Equivalent rms voltage value based on Peak Voltage measurement. This value
is obtained as maximum absolute voltage sample value over last power system
cycle divided by 2 and in further text will be marked with symbol UpeakRMS
Equivalent true RMS voltage value based on the following formula:

553
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

u 2
~m

U TRMS = m =1

N
EQUATION2234 V1 EN (Equation 157)

Where:
N is used number of samples in one power system cycle (for example, 20)
u~m are last N samples of the voltage waveform

In further text this equivalent true RMS voltage quantity will be marked with
symbol UTRMS

Some additional filtering of the calculated voltage quantities is additionally

performed within the function in order to avoid equivalent RMS voltage values
overshooting during capacitor switching.

In order to avoid dependence of the current integration on exact value of the

protected capacitor bank capacitance the whole integration process is done in per
unit system. In order to convert measured current in primary amperes into per unit
value the base current for the protected capacitor bank shall be known. This value
is set as parameter IBase and it represents the rated SCB current in primary
amperes at fundamental frequency. This value is calculated for a three-phase SCB
as follows:

1000 Q [ MVAr ]
IBase =
3 U [ kV ]
EQUATION2235 V1 EN (Equation 158)

Where:
IBase is base current for the function in primary amperes
Q[MVAr] is shunt capacitor bank MVAr rating
U[kV] is shunt capacitor bank rated phase-to-phase voltage in kV

Once the base current is known the internal voltage calculations can be performed.
Note that the calculated UpeakRMS value is available as a service value in percent
for every phase from the function.

Generated reactive power (Q) by the capacitor bank is calculated within the
function for every phase as given by the following equation:

Q =U TRMS I TRMS

EQUATION2236 V1 EN (Equation 159)

554
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

Where:
Q is generated reactive power in per-unit
UTRMS is capacitor equivalent true RMS voltage in per-unit

ITRMS is capacitor equivalent true RMS current in per-unit

Additional filtering of the calculated Q quantity is performed within the function in

order to avoid overshooting during capacitor switching. Note that the calculated Q
value is available as a service value in percent for every phase from the function.

Simplified logic diagram about used analog quantities within one phase of the
capacitor bank protection function are shown in figure 276.

I3P I PeakRMS [A]

Overcurrent

Undercurrent

I TRMS[A]
Reconnection Inhibit

TRMS UTRMS[pu] Reactive Power Overload

FILTER
i~ [A]
IBase
u~ [pu] PEAK UPeakRMS[pu]
Harmonic Overload
FILTER

IEC09000746.vsd
IEC09000746 V1 EN

Figure 276: Simplified logic diagram about used analog quantities within one
phase

8.14.7.2 Reconnection inhibit feature

This feature determines that capacitor banks are disconnected from the power
system and is used to prevent reconnection of a charged capacitor bank to a live
network. The IRMS values of the three phase currents are compared with the
IRecnInhibit< parameter in order to determine when the capacitor bank is
energized or disconnected. The simplified logic diagram is shown in fig 277.

555
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

currentRMS a 0.02 s
CapBank Energised
a>b t
b
IRecnInhibit<

CAPDISC
Phx
NOT

IEC08000345-1-en.vsd
IEC08000345 V1 EN

Figure 277: Capacitor bank energization check for one phase. Similar for all
three phases

When SCB is disconnected in all three phases, the reconnection inhibit signal will
be given. This signal will be active until the preset time elapsed and is used to
inhibit the reconnection of charged capacitor bank to live network. The internal
logic diagram for the inhibit feature is shown in figure 278.

CAPDISC

CAPDISC
_ Ph1

CAPDISC Ph2 tReconnInhibit

AND
AND RECNINH
CAPDISC Ph3
-2 AND
Z

Z-2

en08000346.vsd
IEC08000346 V1 EN

Figure 278: Capacitor bank reconnection inhibit

8.14.7.3 Overcurrent feature

The overcurrent protection feature protects the capacitor bank from excessive
current conditions. The sub function takes the current peakRMS value from the
preprocessing block in the IED as input. The peakRMS value of the current is
compared with the setting of parameter IOC>. Whenever the peakRMS value of
the current crosses the set level the function sends a START signal as output. The
signal is passed through the definite timer for giving the TRIP signal. Each phase
will have its own START and TRIP signals for overcurrent. The internal logic for
the overcurrent feature is shown in fig 279.

556
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

IPeakRMS a
a>b tOC
IOC> b TROC
AND t AND

OperationOC=On
STOC

BLKTR

BLKOC

BLOCK OR

IEC08000350-1-en.vsd
IEC08000350 V1 EN

Figure 279: Capacitor bank overcurrent protection

8.14.7.4 Undercurrent feature

Undercurrent protection feature is used to disconnect the capacitor bank from the
rest of the power system when the voltage at the capacitor bank terminals is too
low for too long period of time. This sub function uses the current peakRMS value
from the preprocessing block in the IED as input. The peakRMS value of the
current is compared to the set value of the parameter IUC<. Whenever the
peakRMS value of the current falls below the set undercurrent level, the function
will send a START signal as output. The function can be blocked when the current
falls below the cut off level. The capacitor bank disconnected signals are used for
this blocking. This feature will help to prevent trip operation when the capacitor
bank is disconnected from the power system. The TRIP output signal is delayed by
a definite timer. Each phase will have its own START and TRIP signals for
undercurrent. The internal logic for the undercurrent feature is shown in fig 280.

IPeakRMS
a
b>a
IUC< b
tUC

AND t
AND TRUC
OperationUC=On

BLKUC
STUC
BLOCK
OR
CAPDISC

BLKTR

en08000351.vsd
IEC08000351 V1 EN

Figure 280: Capacitor bank undercurrent protection

8.14.7.5 Capacitor harmonic overload feature

Harmonic overload protection feature will protect the capacitor from over load
conditions caused by harmonics. The sub-function protects the capacitor in two

557
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

stages, first stage is Inverse time delay (IDMT) based and a second stage is based
on Definite Time (DT) delay.

IDMT curve has adjustable k factor and inverse time characteristic is shown in
figure 281, where k = 1. The IDMT curve starts only when the equivalent RMS
voltage value is higher than set value of parameter HOLIDMTU> and stays active
until the value falls below the reset value.

2.3
Voltage Peak RMS [pu]

2.1

1.9

1.7

1.5

1.3

1.1
0.1 1 10 100 1000 10000
Operate Time [s]
IEC08000352-1-en.vsd
IEC08000352 V1 EN

Figure 281: IDMT curve for harmonic overload (kHOLIDMT=1.0)

Main seven operating points for this IDMT curve are defined by IEC/ANSI
standards and they are shown in above figure and summarized in the following table:

Table 311: Main operating points for IDMT curve

UpeakRMS 1.15 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.7 2.0 2.2

[pu]
Time [s] 1800 300 60 15 1.0 0.3 0.12

Note the following regarding this IDMT curve:

1. When parameter kHOLIDMT has different value from 1.0 operating time is
proportionally changed (for example, when kHOLIDMT =0.9 operating times
will be 90% of the values shown in above figure 281 and table 311)
2. Between the seven main points in table 311, the operate time is calculate by
using linear interpolation in the logarithmic scale
3. Integration process is used to calculate the operate time for varying voltage
condition
4. By setting parameter tMinHOLIDMT =0.1s standard requirements for
minimum operating time of 100ms for harmonic overload IDMT curve can be
fluffed
5. By setting parameter tMaxHOLIDMT =2000s operation for small harmonics
overload condition when UpeakRMS is in-between 1.1pu and 1.2pu is assured

558
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

Harmonic overload definite time curve has settings facilities for independent
pickup and time delay. It can be used as separate tripping stage or as an alarm stage.

Both of these two harmonic overload stages are active during capacitor bank
energizing and are capable to properly measure and operate up to and including 9th
harmonic.

The internal logic for harmonic overload feature is shown in figure 282:

STHDTLx
UPeakRMS [pu]
a
a>b
HOLDTU> b

tHOLDT
t
OperationHOL=On AND
OR TRHOL
AND

BLKHOL

BLOCK
OR OR STHOL

BLKTR

OperationHOL=On AND
TR
UPeakRMS [pu]
a
a>b kHOLIDMT IDMT
HOLIDMTU> b
tMaxHOLIDMT
STHIDMLx
tMinHOLIDMT ST

UPeakRMS [pu]

IEC09000752-1-en.vsd
IEC09000752 V1 EN

Figure 282: Simplified logic diagram for harmonic overload

8.14.7.6 Capacitor reactive power overload feature

Reactive power overload protection feature will protect the capacitor bank from
reactive power overload conditions.

The sub-function will use the reactive power values as input. The reactive power
input values are calculated from the true RMS value of voltage and current. The
reactive power value is compared with the QOL> setting. When the reactive power
value exceeds the QOL> setting the STQOL signal will be activated. The start
signal is delayed by the definite timer before activating the TRQOL signal. The
internal logic diagram for this feature is shown in figure 283.

559
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

Q [pu]
a
a>b
QOL> b

tQOL
t
OperationQOL=On AND
TRQOL
AND
BLKTR

BLKQOL
STQOL
BLOCK
OR

en08000353.vsd
IEC08000353 V1 EN

Figure 283: Capacitor bank reactive power overload protection

8.14.8 Technical data

Table 312: CBPGAPC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, overcurrent (10-900)% of lBase 2.0% of Ir at I Ir
2.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, overcurrent >95% at (100-900)% of IBase -

Start time, overcurrent, at 0 Min = 5 ms -
to 2 x Iset Max = 20 ms
Reset time, overcurrent, at Min = 25 ms -
2 x Iset to 0 Max = 40 ms
Critical impulse time, 2 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -
overcurrent protection start 1 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset
Impulse margin time, 10 ms typically
overcurrent protection start
Operate value, (5-100)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir
undercurrent
Reset ratio, undercurrent <105% at (30-100)% of IBase -
Operate value, (4-1000)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
reconnection inhibit 1.0% of I at I > Ir
function
Operate value, reactive (10-900)% 1.0% of Sr at S Sr
power overload function 1.0% of S at S > Sr

Operate value, voltage (10-500)% 0.5% of Ur at U Ur

protection function for 0.5% of U at U > Ur
harmonic overload
(Definite time)
Operate value, voltage (80-200)% 0.5% of Ur at U Ur
protection function for 0.5% of U at U > Ur
harmonic overload (Inverse
time)
Inverse time characteristic According to IEC 60871-1 (2005) and 20% or 200 ms
IEEE/ANSI C37.99 (2000) whichever is greater
Table continues on next page

560
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Maximum trip delay,
harmonic overload IDMT
Minimum trip delay,
harmonic overload IDMT
Independent time delay,
overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset
Independent time delay,
undercurrent at 2 x Iset to 0
Independent time delay,
reactive power overload
function at 0 to 2 x QOL>
Independent time delay,
harmonic overload at 0 to 2
x HOL>
(0.05-6000.00) s 20% or 200 ms
whichever is greater
(0.05-60.00) s 20% or 200 ms
whichever is greater
(0.00-6000.00) s 0.2% or 30 ms
whichever is greater
(0.00-6000.00) s 0.2% or 60 ms
whichever is greater
(1.00-6000.00) s 0.2% or 60 ms
whichever is greater
(0.00-6000.00) s 0.2% or 35 ms
whichever is greater

8.15 Negativ sequence time overcurrent protection for

machines NS2PTOC

8.15.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Negative sequence time overcurrent NS2PTOC 2I2> 46I2
protection for machines

8.15.2 Functionality
Negative-sequence time overcurrent protection for machines NS2PTOC is intended
primarily for the protection of generators against possible overheating of the rotor
caused by negative sequence current in the stator current.

The negative sequence currents in a generator may, among others, be caused by:

Unbalanced loads
Line to line faults
Line to earth faults
Broken conductors
Malfunction of one or more poles of a circuit breaker or a disconnector

NS2PTOC can also be used as a backup protection, that is, to protect the generator
in case line protections or circuit breakers fail to clear unbalanced system faults.

To provide an effective protection for the generator for external unbalanced

conditions, NS2PTOC is able to directly measure the negative sequence current.

561
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

NS2PTOC also has a time delay characteristic which matches the heating
2
characteristic of the generator I 2 t = K as defined in standard IEEE C50.13.

where:
I2 is negative sequence current expressed in per unit of the rated
generator current
t is operating time in seconds
K is a constant which depends of the generators size and design

NS2PTOC has a wide range of K settings and the sensitivity and capability of
detecting and tripping for negative sequence currents down to the continuous
capability of a generator.

In order to match the heating characteristics of the generator a reset time parameter
can be set.

A separate definite time delayed output is available as an alarm feature to warn the
operator of a potentially dangerous situation.

8.15.3 Function block

NS2PTOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK TR1
BLKST1 TR2
BLKST2 START
ST1
ST2
ALARM
NSCURR

IEC08000359-2-en.vsd
IEC08000359-1-EN V2 EN

Figure 284: NS2PTOC function block

8.15.4 Signals
Table 313: NS2PTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group connection for neg seq.
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip signals

562
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

Table 314: NS2PTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TR1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
TR2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2
START BOOLEAN Common start signal
ST1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 1
ST2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 2
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal
NSCURR REAL Negative sequence current in primary amps

8.15.5 Settings
Table 315: NS2PTOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
tAlarm 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 3.00 Time delay for Alarm (operated by
START signal), in sec
OpStep1 Off - - On Enable execution of step 1
On
I2-1> 3 - 500 %IB 1 10 Negative sequence current level for step
1 in % of IBase
CurveType1 Definite - - Definite Selection of definite or inverse time-
Inverse characteri. for step 1
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 10.00 Definite time delay for trip of step 1, in sec
tResetDef1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for reset of definite timer of
step 1, in sec
K1 1.0 - 99.0 s 0.1 10.0 Neg. seq. capability value of generator
for step 1, in sec
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 1
t1Max 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1000.00 Maximum trip delay for step 1, in sec
ResetMultip1 0.01 - 20.00 - 0.01 1.00 Reset multiplier for K1, defines reset
time of inverse curve
OpStep2 Off - - On Enable execution of step 2
On
I2-2> 3 - 500 %IB 1 10 Negative sequence current level for step
2 in % of IBase
CurveType2 Definite - - Definite Selection of definite or inverse time-
Inverse characteri. for step 2
t2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 10.00 Definite time delay for trip of step 2, in sec
tResetDef2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for reset of definite timer of
step 2, in sec
Table continues on next page

563
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

K2 1.0 - 99.0 s 0.1 10.0 Neg. seq. capability value of generator
for step 2, in sec
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 2
t2Max 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1000.00 Maximum trip delay for step 2, in sec
ResetMultip2 0.01 - 20.00 - 0.01 1.00 Reset multiplier for K2, defines reset
time of inverse curve

Table 316: NS2PTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

8.15.6 Monitored data

Table 317: NS2PTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
NSCURR REAL - A Negative sequence
current in primary amps

8.15.7 Operation principle

The negative sequence time overcurrent protection for machines (NS2PTOC)
function directly measures the amplitude of the negative phase sequence
component of the measured current. NS2PTOC sets the START, ST1 or ST2
outputs active and starts to count trip time only when the measured negative
sequence current value rises above the set value of parameters I2-1> or I2-2>
respectively.

To avoid oscillation in the output signals, a certain hysteresis has been included.
For both steps, the reset ratio is 0.97.

Step 1 of NS2PTOC can operate in the Definite Time (DT) or Inverse Time
(IDMT) mode depending on the selected value for the CurveType1 parameter. If
CurveType1= Definite, NS2PTOC operates with a Definite Time Delay
characteristic and if CurveType1 = Inverse, NS2PTOC operates with an Inverse
Time Delay characteristic. Step 2 is operating in an analogous way as Step 1.

Definite time delay is not dependent on the magnitude of measured negative

sequence current. Once the measured negative sequence current exceeds the set
level, the settable definite timer t1 or t2 respectively, starts to count and the
corresponding trip signal gets activated after the pre-set definite time delay has
elapsed. Reset time in definite time mode is determined by the setting parameters
tResetDef1 or tResetDef2 respectively. If NS2PTOC has already started but not

564
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

tripped and measured negative sequence current drops below the start value, the
start outputs remains active for the time defined by the resetting parameters.

A BLOCK input signal resets NS2PTOC momentarily.

When the parameter CurveType1 is set to Inverse, an inverse curve is selected

according to selected value for parameter K1. The minimum trip time setting of
parameter t1Min and reset time parameter ResetMultip1 also influence step
operation. However, to match the heating characteristics of the generator, the reset
time is depending on the setting of parameter K1, which must be set according to
the generators negative sequence current capacity.

K = I 2 2t
EQUATION2112 V1 EN

Where:
I2 is negative sequence current expressed in per unit of the rated generator current

t is operating time in seconds

K is a constant [s], which depends on generator size and design

Operate
time

t1Max
(Default= 1000 s)

t1Min
(Default= 5 s)

K1

Current I2-1>
IEC09000691-2-en.vsd
IEC09000691 V2 EN

Figure 285: Inverse time characteristic with t1Min and t1Max

For a detailed description of inverse time characteristic, see chapter "Inverse

characteristics".

The reset time is exponential and is given by the following expression:

565
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

ResetMultip
ResetTime [ s ] = K
I 2
NS 1
I Start
EQUATION2111 V4 EN (Equation 160)

Where
INS is the measured negative sequence current

IStart is the desired start level in pu of rated generator current

ResetMultip is multiplier of the generator capability constant K equal to setting K1 and thus
defines reset time of inverse time characteristic

8.15.7.1 Start sensitivity

The trip start levels Current I2-1> and I2-2> of NS2PTOC are freely settable over
a range of 3 to 500 % of rated generator current IBase. The wide range of start
setting is required in order to be able to protect generators of different types and sizes.

After start, a certain hysteresis is used before resetting start levels. For both steps
the reset ratio is 0.97.

8.15.7.2 Alarm function

The alarm function is operated by START signal and used to warn the operator for
an abnormal situation, for example, when generator continuous negative sequence
current capability is exceeded, thereby allowing corrective action to be taken
before removing the generator from service. A settable time delay tAlarm is
provided for the alarm function to avoid false alarms during short-time unbalanced
conditions.

566
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

8.15.7.3 Logic diagram

CurveType1=Definite
t1
TR1
Negative sequence current OR
a
a>b
b
I2-1> ST1
AND

txMin
Inverse
Operation=ON AND

BLKST1

BLOCK

CurveType1=Inverse

IEC08000466-3-en.vsd
IEC08000466-1-EN V3 EN

Figure 286: Simplified logic diagram for step 1 of Negative sequence time
overcurrent protection for machines (NS2PTOC)

Step 2 for Negative sequence time overcurrent protection for machines

(NS2PTOC) is similar to step 1 above except that it lacks the inverse characteristic.

ST1
START
ST2 OR

tAlarm ALARM

TR1
TRIP
TR2 OR

IEC09000690-2-en.vsd
IEC09000690 V2 EN

Figure 287: Simplified logic diagram for the START, ALARM and TRIP signals
for NS2PTOC

8.15.8 Technical data

Table 318: NS2PTOC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value (3-500)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
negative sequence 1.0% of I at I > Ir
overcurrent
Reset ratio >95% -
Operate time, start at Min. = 15 ms -
0 to 2 x Iset Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, start at 2 Min. = 15 ms -

to 0 x Iset Max. = 30 ms

Time characteristics Definite or Inverse -

Table continues on next page

567
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Inverse time K=1.0-99.0 5.0% or 40 ms whichever is
characteristic greater

I 22t = K

Reset time, inverse Reset Multiplier = 0.01-20.00 10.0% or 40 ms whichever

characteristic is greater

I 22t = K

Minimum trip delay (0.000-60.000) s 5.0% or 40 ms whichever is

IDMT greater
Maximum trip delay (0.00-6000.00) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
IDMT at 0.5 to 2 x Iset greater

Independent time (0.00-6000.00) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is

delay at 0.5 to 2 x Iset greater

Independent time (0.00-6000.00) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is

delay for Alarm at 0.5 greater
to 2 x Iset

8.16 Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection

VRPVOC

8.16.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent VRPVOC I>/U< 51V
protection

8.16.2 Functionality
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection (VRPVOC) function can be used as
generator backup protection against short-circuits.

The overcurrent protection feature has a settable current level that can be used
either with definite time or inverse time characteristic. Additionally, it can be
voltage controlled/restrained.

One undervoltage step with definite time characteristic is also available within the
function in order to provide functionality for overcurrent protection with
undervoltage seal-in.

568
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

8.16.3 Function block

VRPVOC
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TROC
BLOCK TRUV
BLKOC START
BLKUV STOC
STUV

IEC12000184-1-en.vsd
IEC12000184 V1 EN

Figure 288: VRPVOC function block

8.16.4 Signals
Table 319: VRPVOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function both stages
BLKOC BOOLEAN 0 Block of voltage restraint overcurrent stage (ANSI
51V)
BLKUV BOOLEAN 0 Block of under voltage function

Table 320: VRPVOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TROC BOOLEAN Trip signal from voltage restrained overcurrent
stage
TRUV BOOLEAN Trip signal from undervoltage function
START BOOLEAN General start signal
STOC BOOLEAN Start signal from voltage restrained overcurrent
stage
STUV BOOLEAN Start signal from undervoltage function

569
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

8.16.5 Settings
Table 321: VRPVOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
StartCurr 2.0 - 5000.0 %IB 1.0 120.0 Start current level in % of IBase
Characterist ANSI Ext. inv. - - IEC Norm. inv. Time delay curve type for 51V Voltage
ANSI Very inv. restrained overcurrent
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
tDef_OC 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Definite time delay for Over Current
k 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier for Inverse Definite
Minimum Time curves
tMin 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for Inverse
Definite Minimum Time curve
Operation_UV Off - - Off Operation of under-voltage stage (ANSI
On 27) Off / On
StartVolt 2.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Voltage for start of under-voltage stage
in % of UBase
tDef_UV 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Definite time time delay when used for
Under-Voltage
EnBlkLowV Off - - Off Enable internal low voltage level
On blocking for Under-Voltage
BlkLowVolt 0.0 - 5.0 %UB 0.1 3.0 Internal low voltage level for blocking of
UV in % of UBase

Table 322: VRPVOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
VDepMode Step - - Slope Voltage dependent mode OC (step,
Slope slope)
VDepFact 5.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 25.0 Start current level in % of pickup when
U< 25% of UBase
UHighLimit 30.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 100.0 Voltage high limit setting in % of UBase

Table 323: VRPVOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

570
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

8.16.6 Monitored data

Table 324: VRPVOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IMAX REAL - A Maximum phase current
magnitude
UUMIN REAL - kV Minimum ph-to-ph
voltage magnitude

8.16.7 Operation principle

8.16.7.1 Measured quantities

The voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection VRPVOC function is always

connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration
tool (ACT), but it will always measure the maximum of the three-phase currents
and the minimum of the three phase-to-phase voltages. If frequency tracking mode
for preprocessing blocks is used, then the function operates properly in wide
frequency range (e.g. 10-90 Hz).

8.16.7.2 Base quantities

GlobalBaseSel defines the particular Global Base Values Group where the base
quantities of the function are set. In that Global Base Values Group:

IBase shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in primary
amperes.

UBase shall be entered as rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in

primary kV.

8.16.7.3 Overcurrent protection

The overcurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current
quantity with the set start level. The overcurrent step starts if the magnitude of the
measured current quantity is higher than the set level.

Voltage restraint/control feature

The overcurrent protection operation is made dependent of a measured voltage
quantity. This means that the start level of the overcurrent step is not constant but
decreases with the decrease in magnitude of the measured voltage quantity. This
feature affects the start current value of both definite time and inverse time IDMT
overcurrent protection; in particular the overcurrent with IDMT curve operates
faster during low voltage conditions. Two different types of dependencies are
available:

Voltage restrained overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode = Slope);

the start level of the overcurrent stage changes according to the Figure 289.

571
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

The voltage restrained characteristic is defined by the two points:

(0.25*UBase ; VDepFact *StartCurr/100*IBase) and (UHighLimit/
100*UBase; StartCurr/100*IBase). In the first point the factor 0.25 that
multiply UBase cannot be changed.

Start level of the current

StartCurr

VDepFact * StartCurr

0,25 UHighLimit
UBase
IEC10000123-2-en.vsd
IEC10000123 V2 EN

Figure 289: Example for start level of the current variation as function of
measured voltage magnitude in Slope mode of operation

Voltage controlled overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode = Step);

the start level of the overcurrent stage changes according to the Figure 290.

Start level of the current

StartCurr

VDepFact * StartCurr

UHighLimit UBase

IEC10000124-2-en.vsd
IEC10000124 V2 EN

Figure 290: Example for start level of the current variation as function of
measured voltage magnitude in Step mode of operation

572
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

8.16.7.4 Logic diagram

DEF time
selected
TROC
OR

MaxPhCurr
a STOC
a>b
b

StartCurr
X Inverse

Inverse
Voltage time
control or selected
restraint
feature

MinPh-PhVoltage

IEC10000214-1-en.vsd

IEC10000214 V1 EN

Figure 291: Simplified internal logic diagram for overcurrent function

DEF time
selected TRUV

MinPh-phVoltage a
b>a
b STUV
AND
StartVolt

Operation_UV=On

BLKUV

IEC10000213-1-en.vsd

IEC10000213 V1 EN

Figure 292: Simplified internal logic diagram for undervoltage function

8.16.7.5 Undervoltage protection

The undervoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage
quantity with the set start level. The undervoltage step starts if the magnitude of the
measured voltage quantity is lower than the set level.

573
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Current protection

The start signal starts a definite time delay. If the value of the start signal is logical
TRUE for longer than the set time delay, the undervoltage step sets its trip signal to
logical TRUE.

This undervoltage functionality together with additional ACT logic can be used to
provide functionality for overcurrent protection with undervoltage seal-in.

8.16.8 Technical data

Table 325: VRPVOC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Start overcurrent (2.0 - 5000.0)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir at IIr
1.0% of I at I>Ir

Reset ratio, > 95%

overcurrent
Operate time, start Min = 15 ms
overcurrent at 0 to 2 x
Iset Max = 30 ms

Reset time, start Min = 15 ms

overcurrent at 0 to 2 x
Iset Max = 30 ms

Independent time (0.00 - 6000.00) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is

delay to operate at 0 greater
to 2 x Iset

Inverse time 13 curve types ANSI/IEEE C37.112

characteristics IEC 60255151
5.0% or 40 ms whichever is
greater
0.10 k 3.00
1.5 x Iset I 20 x Iset
See Table and Table
Minimum operate (0.00 - 60.00) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
time for inverse time greater
characteristics
High voltage limit, (30.0 - 100.0)% of UBase 1.0% of Ur
voltage dependent
operation
Start undervoltage (2.0 - 100.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Reset ratio, < 105%

undervoltage
Operate time start Min = 15 ms -
undervoltage at 2 to 0
x Uset Max = 30 ms

Reset time start Min = 15 ms -

undervoltage at 0 to 2
x Uset Max = 30 ms

Independent time (0.00 - 6000.00) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is

delay to operate, greater
undervoltage at 2 to 0
x Uset

Table continues on next page

574
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 8
Current protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Internal low voltage (0.0 - 5.0)% of UBase 0.25% of Ur
blocking
Overcurrent: -
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically
Undervoltage: -
Critical impulse time 10ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically

575
Technical Manual
576
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 9
Voltage protection

Section 9 Voltage protection

9.1 Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV

9.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV 27

3U<

SYMBOL-R-2U-GREATER-THAN
V2 EN

9.1.2 Functionality
Undervoltages can occur in the power system during faults or abnormal conditions.
Two step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV) function can be used to open circuit
breakers to prepare for system restoration at power outages or as long-time delayed
back-up to primary protection.

UV2PTUV has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.

UV2PTUV has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to system service voltage.

577
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Voltage protection

9.1.3 Function block

UV2PTUV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK TR1
BLKTR1 TR1L1
BLKST1 TR1L2
BLKTR2 TR1L3
BLKST2 TR2
TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
START
ST1
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3

IEC06000276-2-en.vsd
IEC06000276 V2 EN

Figure 293: UV2PTUV function block

9.1.4 Signals
Table 326: UV2PTUV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase voltages
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 1
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLKTR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 2
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2

Table 327: UV2PTUV Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
TR1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1
TR1L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L1
TR1L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L2
TR1L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L3
TR2 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step2
TR2L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L1
TR2L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L2
TR2L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L3
START BOOLEAN General start signal
Table continues on next page

578
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 9
Voltage protection

Name Type Description

ST1 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step1
ST1L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L1
ST1L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L2
ST1L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L3
ST2 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step2
ST2L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L1
ST2L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L2
ST2L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L3

9.1.5 Settings
Table 328: UV2PTUV Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationStep1 Off - - On Enable execution of step 1
On
Characterist1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A step 1
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
OpMode1 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1 of
2 out of 3 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1
3 out of 3
U1< 1.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 70.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in
% of UBase, step 1
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definitive time delay of step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 1
k1 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 1
IntBlkSel1 Off - - Off Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 1
Block of trip
Block all
IntBlkStVal1 1 - 50 %UB 1 20 Voltage setting for internal blocking in %
of UBase, step 1
tBlkUV1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of internal (low level)
blocking for step 1
HystAbs1 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 1
OperationStep2 Off - - On Enable execution of step 2
On
Characterist2 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A step 2
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
Table continues on next page

579
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Voltage protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OpMode2 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1 of
2 out of 3 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 2
3 out of 3
U2< 1.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in
% of UBase, step 2
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Definitive time delay of step 2
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 2
k2 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 2
IntBlkSel2 Off - - Off Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 2
Block of trip
Block all
IntBlkStVal2 1 - 50 %UB 1 20 Voltage setting for internal blocking in %
of UBase, step 2
tBlkUV2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of internal (low level)
blocking for step 2
HystAbs2 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 2

Table 329: UV2PTUV Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve type
Frozen timer for step 1
Linearly decreased
tIReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1
ACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 1
BCrv1 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 1
CCrv1 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 1
DCrv1 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for step 1
PCrv1 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 1
CrvSat1 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. under voltage
IDMT curve, step 1
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve step 2
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve type
Frozen timer for step 2
Linearly decreased
tIReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 2
ACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 2
Table continues on next page

580
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 9
Voltage protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

BCrv2 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 2
CCrv2 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 2
DCrv2 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for step 2
PCrv2 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 2
CrvSat2 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. under voltage
IDMT curve, step 2

Table 330: UV2PTUV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ConnType PhN DFT - - PhN DFT Group selector for connection type
PhPh RMS
PhN RMS
PhPh DFT
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

9.1.6 Monitored data

Table 331: UV2PTUV Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UL1 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L1
UL2 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L2
UL3 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L3

9.1.7 Operation principle

Two-step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV) is used to detect low power system
voltage. UV2PTUV has two voltage measuring steps with separate time delays. If
one, two or three phase voltages decrease below the set value, a corresponding
START signal is generated. UV2PTUV can be set to START/TRIP based on 1 out
of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 of the measured voltages, being below the set point. If
the voltage remains below the set value for a time period corresponding to the
chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted
trip due to disconnection of the related high voltage equipment, a voltage
controlled blocking of the function is available, that is, if the voltage is lower than
the set blocking level the function is blocked and no START or TRIP signal is
generated.The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for each step and can
be either definite time delay or inverse time delay.

581
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Voltage protection

UV2PTUV can be set to measure phase-to-earth fundamental value, phase-to-phase

fundamental value, phase-to-earth true RMS value or phase-to-phase true RMS
value. The choice of the measuring is done by the parameter ConnType. The
voltage related settings are made in percent of base voltage which is set in kV phase-
to-phase voltage. This means operation for phase-to-earth voltage under:

U < (%) UBase(kV )

3
EQUATION1429 V2 EN (Equation 161)

and operation for phase-to-phase voltage under:

U < (%) UBase(kV)

EQUATION1990 V1 EN (Equation 162)

When phase-to-earth voltage measurement is selected the function

automatically introduces division of the base value by the square
root of three.

9.1.7.1 Measurement principle

Depending on the set ConnType value, UV2PTUV measures phase-to-earth or phase-

to-phase voltages and compare against set values, U1< and U2<. The parameters
OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the START
outputs. Either 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3, or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have to be
lower than the corresponding set point to issue the corresponding START signal.

To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.

9.1.7.2 Time delay

The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse
time delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay three different modes are available:
inverse curve A
inverse curve B
customer programmable inverse curve

The type A curve is described as:

k
t=
Un < -U

Un <
EQUATION1431 V2 EN (Equation 163)

582
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 9
Voltage protection

where:
Un< Set value for step 1 and step 2
U Measured voltage

The type B curve is described as:

k 480
t= 2.0
+ 0.055
Un < - U
32 - 0.5
Un <
EQUATION1432 V2 EN (Equation 164)

The customer programmable curve can be created as:

kA
t= p
+D
Un < - U
B -C
Un <
EQUATION1433 V2 EN (Equation 165)

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be
infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter
CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Un<
down to Un< (1.0 CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Un< (1.0 CrvSatn/
100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn
B -C > 0
100
EQUATION1435 V1 EN (Equation 166)

The lowest voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration. The
details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section 26.3
"Inverse characteristics".

583
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Voltage protection

Voltage

UL1
UL2
UL3

IDMT Voltage

Time

IEC12000186-1-en.vsd

IEC12000186 V1 EN

Figure 294: Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration

Trip signal issuing requires that the undervoltage condition continues for at least
the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite
time mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the
inverse time mode (IDMT). If the start condition, with respect to the measured
voltage ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined
reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and
tIReset2pickup for the inverse time) the corresponding start output is reset. Here it
should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be
fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the
hysteresis area. Note that for the undervoltage function the IDMT reset time is
constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off
period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset
instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer
value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 295 and figure 296.

584
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 9
Voltage protection

tIReset1
tIReset1
Voltage Measured
START Voltage
HystAbs1
TRIP

U1<

Time

START t

TRIP

Time
Integrator Frozen Timer

Time
Linearly
Instantaneous
decreased IEC05000010-4-en.vsd

IEC05000010 V4 EN

Figure 295: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at
different reset types

585
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Voltage protection

tIReset1
Voltage
tIReset1
START
START
HystAbs1 Measured Voltage
TRIP

U1<

Time

START t

TRIP

Time
Integrator Frozen Timer

Time
Instantaneous Linearly decreased
IEC05000011-en-3.vsd

IEC05000011 V3 EN

Figure 296: Voltage profile causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at
different reset types

Definite timer delay

When definite time delay is selected the function will operate as shown in figure
297. Detailed information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown
in figure 298 and figure 299 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s,
instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed stage is ensured.

586
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 9
Voltage protection

ST1

U t1
a tReset1
TR1
t
a<b t
U1< R
b
AND

IEC09000785-3-en.vsd
IEC09000785 V3 EN

Figure 297: Detailed logic diagram for step 1, DT operation

U1<

ST1

TR1

tReset1

t1

IEC10000039-3-en.vsd
IEC10000039 V3 EN

Figure 298: Example for Definite Time Delay stage1 reset

587
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Voltage protection

U1<

ST1

TR1

tReset1

t1

IEC10000040-3-en.vsd
IEC10000040 V3 EN

Figure 299: Example for Definite Time Delay stage1 operation

9.1.7.3 Blocking

It is possible to block Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV partially or

completely, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTR1: blocks all trip outputs of step 1
BLKST1: blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1
BLKTR2: blocks all trip outputs of step 2
BLKST2: blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 2

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal1, either the
trip output of step 1, or both the trip and the START outputs of step 1, are blocked.
The characteristic of the blocking is set by the IntBlkSel1 parameter. This internal
blocking can also be set to Off resulting in no voltage based blocking.
Corresponding settings and functionality are valid also for step 2.

In case of disconnection of the high voltage component the measured voltage will
get very low. The event will START both the under voltage function and the
blocking function, as seen in figure 300. The delay of the blocking function must
be set less than the time delay of under voltage function.

588
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 9
Voltage protection

U Disconnection

Normal voltage

U1<

U2<

tBlkUV1 <
t1,t1Min
IntBlkStVal1
tBlkUV2 <
t2,t2Min
IntBlkStVal2

Time

Block step 1

Block step 2
en05000466.vsd

IEC05000466 V1 EN

Figure 300: Blocking function

9.1.7.4 Design

The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-neutral

voltages or the three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive fourier filters or true RMS
filters of input voltage signals are used. The voltages are individually compared to
the set value, and the lowest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic
integration. A special logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 and 3
out of 3 criteria to fulfill the START condition. The design of Two step
undervoltage protection UV2PTUV is schematically shown in Figure 301.

589
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Voltage protection

UL1 Comparator ST1L1

UL1 < U1< Voltage Phase Phase 1
Selector
OpMode1 ST1L2
UL2 Comparator Phase 2
1 out of 3
UL2 < U1< 2 out of 3 ST1L3
3 out of 3 Phase 3 Start t1
UL3 Comparator t1Reset
UL3 < U1< IntBlkStVal1 &
OR ST1
Trip
Output
START Logic TR1L1

Step 1 TR1L2
Time integrator TRIP
MinVoltSelector tIReset1
ResetTypeCrv1 TR1L3

TR1
OR

Comparator ST2L1
UL1 < U2< Voltage Phase Phase 1
Selector
OpMode2 ST2L2
Comparator Phase 2
UL2 < U2< 1 out of 3
2 out of 3 Start t2 ST2L3
3 out of 3 Phase 3 t2Reset
Comparator IntBlkStVal2 &
UL3 < U2< Trip ST2
Output OR
Logic
START TR2L1

Step 2
TR2L2
Time integrator TRIP
MinVoltSelector tIReset2
ResetTypeCrv2 TR2L3

TR2
OR
START
OR

TRIP
OR

IEC05000834-2-en.vsd
IEC05000834 V2 EN

Figure 301: Schematic design of Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV

590
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 9
Voltage protection

9.1.8 Technical data

Table 332: UV2PTUV technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, low (1.0100.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur
and high step
Absolute hysteresis (0.050.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Internal blocking (150)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

level, step 1 and
step 2
Inverse time - See table 1050
characteristics for
step 1 and step 2,
see table 1050
Definite time delay, (0.00-6000.00) s 0.2% or 40ms whichever is
step 1 at 1.2 to 0 x greater
Uset

Definite time delay, (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 40ms whichever is

step 2 at 1.2 to 0 x greater
Uset

Minimum operate (0.00060.000) s 0.2% or 40ms whichever is

time, inverse greater
characteristics
Operate time, start at Min= 15 ms -
2 to 0 x Uset Max= 30 ms

Reset time, start at 0 Min= 15 ms -

to 2 x Uset Max= 30 ms

Operate time, start at Min= 5 ms -

1.2 to 0 x Uset Max= 25 ms

Reset time, start at 0 Min= 15 ms -

to 1.2 x Uset Max= 35 ms

Critical impulse time 5 ms typically at 1.2 to 0 x Uset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

9.2 Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV

9.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV 59

3U>

SYMBOL-C-2U-SMALLER-THAN
V2 EN

591
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Voltage protection

9.2.2 Functionality
Overvoltages may occur in the power system during abnormal conditions such as
sudden power loss, tap changer regulating failures, and open line ends on long lines.

OV2PTOV has two voltage steps, each of them with inverse or definite time delayed.

OV2PTOV has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to system service voltage.

9.2.3 Function block

OV2PTOV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK TR1
BLKTR1 TR1L1
BLKST1 TR1L2
BLKTR2 TR1L3
BLKST2 TR2
TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
START
ST1
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3

IEC06000277-2-en.vsd
IEC06000277 V2 EN

Figure 302: OV2PTOV function block

9.2.4 Signals
Table 333: OV2PTOV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Group signal for three phase voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 1
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLKTR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 2
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2

Table 334: OV2PTOV Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
TR1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1
TR1L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L1
Table continues on next page

592
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 9
Voltage protection

Name Type Description

TR1L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L2
TR1L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L3
TR2 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step2
TR2L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L1
TR2L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L2
TR2L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L3
START BOOLEAN General start signal
ST1 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step1
ST1L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L1
ST1L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L2
ST1L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L3
ST2 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step2
ST2L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L1
ST2L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L2
ST2L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L3

9.2.5 Settings
Table 335: OV2PTOV Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationStep1 Off - - On Enable execution of step 1
On
Characterist1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A step 1
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
OpMode1 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1 of
2 out of 3 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1
3 out of 3
U1> 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in
% of UBase, step 1
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definitive time delay of step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 1
k1 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 1
HystAbs1 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 1
OperationStep2 Off - - On Enable execution of step 2
On
Table continues on next page

593
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Voltage protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Characterist2 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A step 2
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
OpMode2 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1 of
2 out of 3 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 2
3 out of 3
U2> 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in
% of UBase, step 2
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Definitive time delay of step 2
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 2
k2 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 2
HystAbs2 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 2

Table 336: OV2PTOV Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve type
Frozen timer for step 1
Linearly decreased
tIReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1
ACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 1
BCrv1 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 1
CCrv1 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 1
DCrv1 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for step 1
PCrv1 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 1
CrvSat1 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. over voltage
IDMT curve, step 1
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve step 2
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve type
Frozen timer for step 2
Linearly decreased
tIReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 2
ACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 2
BCrv2 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 2
Table continues on next page

594
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 9
Voltage protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CCrv2 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 2
DCrv2 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for step 2
PCrv2 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 2
CrvSat2 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. over voltage
IDMT curve, step 2

Table 337: OV2PTOV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ConnType PhN DFT - - PhN DFT Group selector for connection type
PhPh DFT
PhN RMS
PhPh RMS
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

9.2.6 Monitored data

Table 338: OV2PTOV Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UL1 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L1
UL2 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L2
UL3 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L3

9.2.7 Operation principle

Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV is used to detect high power system
voltage. OV2PTOV has two steps with separate time delays. If one-, two- or three-
phase voltages increase above the set value, a corresponding START signal is
issued. OV2PTOV can be set to START/TRIP, based on 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3
out of 3 of the measured voltages, being above the set point. If the voltage remains
above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the
corresponding trip signal is issued.

The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be
either, definite time delay or inverse time delay.

The voltage related settings are made in percent of the global set base voltage
UBase, which is set in kV, phase-to-phase.

OV2PTOV can be set to measure phase-to-earth fundamental value, phase-to-phase

fundamental value, phase-to-earth RMS value or phase-to-phase RMS value. The
choice of measuring is done by the parameter ConnType.

595
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Voltage protection

The setting of the analog inputs are given as primary phase-to-earth or phase-to-
phase voltage. OV2PTOV will operate if the voltage gets higher than the set
percentage of the set base voltage UBase. This means operation for phase-to-earth
voltage over:

U > (%) UBase( kV )

3
EQUATION1434 V1 EN (Equation 167)

and operation for phase-to-phase voltage over:

U > (%) UBase(kV)

EQUATION1993 V1 EN (Equation 168)

When phase-to-earth voltage measurement is selected the function

automatically introduces division of the base value by the square
root of three.

9.2.7.1 Measurement principle

All the three voltages are measured continuously, and compared with the set
values, U1> for Step 1 and U2> for Step 2. The parameters OpMode1 and
OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the START outputs. Either 1 out
of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have to be higher than the
corresponding set point to issue the corresponding START signal.

To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis is included.

9.2.7.2 Time delay

The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse
time delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available:
inverse curve A
inverse curve B
inverse curve C
customer programmable inverse curve

The type A curve is described as:

k
t=
U - Un >

Un >
IECEQUATION2422 V1 EN (Equation 169)

596
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 9
Voltage protection

where:
Un> Set value for step 1 and step 2
U Measured voltage

The type B curve is described as:

k 480
t= 2.0
- 0.035
U - Un >
32 - 0.5
U n >
IECEQUATION2423 V1 EN (Equation 170)

The type C curve is described as:

k 480
t= 3.0
+ 0.035
U - Un >
32 - 0.5
Un >
IECEQUATION2425 V1 EN (Equation 171)

The customer programmable curve is defined by the below equation, where A, B,

C, D, k and p are settings:

kA
t= p
+D
U -Un >
B -C
Un >
EQUATION1439 V2 EN (Equation 172)

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be
infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore, a tuning parameter
CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Un> up
to Un> (1.0 + CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Un> (1.0 + CrvSatn/100).
If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn
B -C > 0
100
EQUATION1435 V1 EN (Equation 173)

The highest phase (or phase-to-phase) voltage is always used for the inverse time
delay integration, see figure 303. The details of the different inverse time
characteristics are shown in section "Inverse characteristics".

597
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Voltage protection

Voltage
IDMT Voltage

UL1
UL2
UL3

Time

IEC05000016-2-en.vsd

IEC05000016 V2 EN

Figure 303: Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration

Operation of the trip signal requires that the overvoltage condition continues for at
least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for
definite time mode (DT) and by selected voltage level dependent time curves for
the inverse time mode (IDMT). If the START condition, with respect to the
measured voltage ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a
user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and
tIReset2 for the inverse time) the corresponding START output is reset, after that
the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the
hysteresis area, the START condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient
for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. The hysteresis value for
each step is settable HystAbsn (where n means either 1 or 2 respectively) to allow a
high and accurate reset of the function. For OV2PTOV the IDMT reset time is
constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off
period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer: either the timer is reset
instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer
value is linearly decreased during the reset time.

598
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 9
Voltage protection

tIReset1

tIReset1
Voltage
START
TRIP

U1>

HystAbs1 Measured
Voltage

Time

START t

TRIP

Time
Integrator Linearly decreased
Frozen Timer
t

Instantaneous Time
IEC09000055-2-en.vsd
IEC09000055 V2 EN

Figure 304: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at
different reset types

599
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Voltage protection

tIReset1
Voltage tIReset1
START TRIP
START HystAbs1

U1>

Measured
Voltage

Time

START t

TRIP

Time
Integrator Frozen Timer

Time
Linearly
Instantaneous decreased IEC05000020-3-en.vsd

IEC05000020 V3 EN

Figure 305: Voltage profile causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at
different reset types

Definite time delay

When definite time delay is selected, the function will operate as shown in figure
306. Detailed information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown
in figure 298 and figure 299 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s
(where n means either 1 or 2 respectively), instantaneous reset of the definite time
delayed stage is ensured.

600
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 9
Voltage protection

ST1

U tReset1 t1
a
a>b t t
TR1
U1>
b AND
OFF ON
Delay Delay

IEC10000100-2-en.vsd
IEC10000100 V2 EN

Figure 306: Detailed logic diagram for step 1, definite time delay, DT operation

U1>

START

TRIP

tReset1

t1

IEC10000037-2-en.vsd
IEC10000037 V2 EN

Figure 307: Example for step 1, Definite Time Delay stage 1 reset

601
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Voltage protection

U1>

START

TRIP

tReset1

t1

IEC10000038-2-en.vsd
IEC10000038 V2 EN

Figure 308: Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 operation

9.2.7.3 Blocking

It is possible to block Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV partially or

completely, by binary input signals where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTR1: blocks all trip outputs of step 1
BLKST1: blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1
BLKTR2: blocks all trip outputs of step 2
BLKST2: blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 2

9.2.7.4 Design

The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-earth

voltages or the three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive Fourier filters or true RMS
filters of input voltage signals are used. The phase voltages are individually
compared to the set value, and the highest voltage is used for the inverse time
characteristic integration. A special logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out
of 3 or 3 out of 3 criteria to fulfill the START condition. The design of Two step
overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV) is schematically described in figure 309.

602
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 9
Voltage protection

UL1 Comparator ST1L1

UL1 > U1> Phase 1
Voltage Phase
Selector ST1L2
UL2 Comparator OpMode1 Phase 2
UL2 > U1> 1 out of 3
Start ST1L3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3 Phase 3 t1
UL3 Comparator t1Reset
UL3 > U1> & ST1
OR
Trip
START Output TR1L1
Logic

Time integrator Step 1 TR1L2

TRIP
MaxVoltSelect tIreset1
ResetTypeCrv1 TR1L3

OR TR1

Comparator ST2L1
UL1 > U2> Phase 1
Voltage Phase
Selector ST2L2
Comparator OpMode2 Phase 2
UL2 > U2> 1 out of 3
Start ST2L3
2 out of 3
Phase 3 t2
3 out of 3
Comparator t2Reset
UL3 > U2> & ST2
OR
Trip
START Output TR2L1
Logic

Time integrator Step 2 TR2L2

MaxVoltSelect tIreset2 TRIP
ResetTypeCrv2 TR2L3

TR2
OR

START
OR

TRIP
OR

IEC05000013-2-en.vsd

IEC05000013-WMF V2 EN

Figure 309: Schematic design of Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV

603
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Voltage protection

9.2.8 Technical data

Table 339: OV2PTOV technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate (1.0-200.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur at U Ur
voltage, step 1 0.5% of U at U > Ur
and 2
Absolute (0.050.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur at U Ur
hysteresis 0.5% of U at U > Ur

Inverse time - See table 1049

characteristics
for steps 1 and
2, see
table 1049
Definite time (0.00 - 6000.00) s 0.2% or 45 ms whichever is
delay, low step greater
(step 1) at 0 to
1.2 x Uset

Definite time (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 45 ms whichever is

delay, high step greater
(step 2) at 0 to
1.2 x Uset

Minimum (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 45 ms whichever is greater

operate time,
Inverse
characteristics
Operate time, Min. = 15 ms -
start at 0 to 2 x Max. = 30 ms
Uset

Reset time, Min. = 15 ms -

start at 2 to 0 x Max. = 30 ms
Uset

Operate time, Min. = 20 ms -

start at 0 to 1.2 Max. = 35 ms
x Uset

Reset time, Min. = 5 ms -

start at 1.2 to 0 Max. = 25 ms
x Uset

Critical impulse 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -

time
Impulse margin 15 ms typically -
time

604
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 9
Voltage protection

9.3 Two step residual overvoltage protection

ROV2PTOV

9.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Two step residual overvoltage ROV2PTOV 59N
protection
3U0
TRV V1 EN

9.3.2 Functionality
Residual voltages may occur in the power system during earth faults.

Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV function calculates the

residual voltage from the three-phase voltage input transformers or measures it
from a single voltage input transformer fed from an open delta or neutral point
voltage transformer.

ROV2PTOV has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.

Reset delay ensures operation for intermittent earth faults.

9.3.3 Function block

ROV2PTOV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK TR1
BLKTR1 TR2
BLKST1 START
BLKTR2 ST1
BLKST2 ST2

IEC06000278-2-en.vsd
IEC06000278 V2 EN

Figure 310: ROV2PTOV function block

9.3.4 Signals
Table 340: ROV2PTOV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase voltages
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 1
Table continues on next page

605
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Voltage protection

Name Type Default Description

BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLKTR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 2
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2

Table 341: ROV2PTOV Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
TR1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1
TR2 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step2
START BOOLEAN General start signal
ST1 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step1
ST2 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step2

9.3.5 Settings
Table 342: ROV2PTOV Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationStep1 Off - - On Enable execution of step 1
On
Characterist1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A step 1
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
U1> 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 30.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT),
step 1 in % of UBase
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definitive time delay of step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 1
k1 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 1
HystAbs1 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 1
OperationStep2 Off - - On Enable execution of step 2
On
Characterist2 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A step 2
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
U2> 1.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 45.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT),
step 2 in % of UBase
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Definitive time delay of step 2
Table continues on next page

606
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 9
Voltage protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 2
k2 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 2
HystAbs2 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 2

Table 343: ROV2PTOV Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve type
Frozen timer for step 1
Linearly decreased
tIReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1
ACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 1
BCrv1 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 1
CCrv1 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 1
DCrv1 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for step 1
PCrv1 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 1
CrvSat1 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. over voltage
IDMT curve, step 1
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in DT reset (s), step 2
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve type
Frozen timer for step 2
Linearly decreased
tIReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 2
ACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 2
BCrv2 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 2
CCrv2 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 2
DCrv2 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for step 2
PCrv2 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 2
CrvSat2 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. over voltage
IDMT curve, step 2

607
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Voltage protection

Table 344: ROV2PTOV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

9.3.6 Monitored data

Table 345: ROV2PTOV Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
ULevel REAL - kV Magnitude of measured
voltage

9.3.7 Operation principle

Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV is used to detect high single-
phase voltage, such as high residual voltage, also called 3U0. The residual voltage
can be measured directly from a voltage transformer in the neutral of a power
transformer or from a three-phase voltage transformer, where the secondary
windings are connected in an open delta. Another possibility is to measure the three-
phase voltages and internally in the IED calculate the corresponding residual
voltage and connect this calculated residual voltage to ROV2PTOV. ROV2PTOV
has two steps with separate time delays. If the single-phase (residual) voltage
remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time
delay, the corresponding TRIP signal is issued.

The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be
either, definite time delay or inverse time delay.

The voltage related settings are made in percent of the base voltage, which is set in
kV, phase-phase.

9.3.7.1 Measurement principle

The residual voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set values,
U1> and U2>.

To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.

9.3.7.2 Time delay

The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse
time delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available:

608
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 9
Voltage protection

inverse curve A
inverse curve B
inverse curve C
customer programmable inverse curve

The type A curve is described as:

k
t=
U - Un >

Un >
IECEQUATION2422 V1 EN (Equation 174)

where:
Un> Set value for step 1 and step 2
U Measured voltage

The type B curve is described as:

k 480
t= 2.0
- 0.035
U - Un >
32 - 0.5
U n >
IECEQUATION2423 V1 EN (Equation 175)

The type C curve is described as:

k 480
t= 3.0
+ 0.035
U - Un >
32 - 0.5
U>
IECEQUATION2421 V1 EN (Equation 176)

The customer programmable curve can be created as:

kA
t= p
+D
U -Un >
B -C
Un >
EQUATION1439 V2 EN (Equation 177)

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be
infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter
CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Un> up
to Un> (1.0 + CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Un> (1.0 + CrvSatn/100).
If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn
B -C > 0
100
EQUATION1440 V1 EN (Equation 178)

609
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Voltage protection

The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section
"Inverse characteristics".

TRIP signal issuing requires that the residual overvoltage condition continues for at
least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for
definite time mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves
for the inverse time mode (IDMT).

If the START condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the
delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and
tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse time) the
corresponding START output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed.

Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the START condition
must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to
the hysteresis area. Also notice that for the overvoltage function IDMT reset time is
constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off
period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset
instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer
value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 304 and figure 305.

610
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 9
Voltage protection

tIReset1

tIReset1
Voltage
START
TRIP

U1>

HystAbs1 Measured
Voltage

Time

START t

TRIP

Time
Integrator Linearly decreased
Frozen Timer
t

Instantaneous Time
IEC09000055-2-en.vsd

IEC09000055 V2 EN

Figure 311: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay

611
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Voltage protection

tIReset1
Voltage tIReset1
START TRIP
START HystAbs1

U1>

Measured
Voltage

Time

START t

TRIP

Time
Integrator Frozen Timer

Time
Linearly
Instantaneous decreased IEC05000020-3-en.vsd

IEC05000020 V3 EN

Figure 312: Voltage profile causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay

Definite timer delay

When definite time delay is selected, the function will operate as shown in figure
313. Detailed information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown
in figure 298 and figure 299 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s,
instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed stage is ensured.

612
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 9
Voltage protection

ST1

U tReset1 t1
a
a>b t t
TR1
U1>
b AND
OFF ON
Delay Delay

IEC10000100-2-en.vsd
IEC10000100 V2 EN

Figure 313: Detailed logic diagram for step 1, Definite time delay, DT operation

U1<

ST1

TR1

tReset1

t1

IEC10000039-3-en.vsd
IEC10000039 V3 EN

Figure 314: Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 reset

613
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Voltage protection

U1<

ST1

TR1

tReset1

t1

IEC10000040-3-en.vsd
IEC10000040 V3 EN

Figure 315: Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 operation

9.3.7.3 Blocking

It is possible to block Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV

partially or completely, by binary input signals where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTR1: blocks all trip outputs of step 1
BLKST1: blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1
BLKTR2: blocks all trip outputs of step 2
BLKST2: blocks all START and trip inputs related to step 2

9.3.7.4 Design

The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the residual voltage.

Recursive Fourier filters filter the input voltage signal. The single input voltage is
compared to the set value, and is also used for the inverse time characteristic
integration. The design of Two step residual overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV)
is schematically described in figure 316.

614
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 9
Voltage protection

UN Comparator Phase 1 ST1

UN > U1>
Start TR1
START t1
tReset1
&
Trip
Time integrator Output
tIReset1 TRIP
Logic
ResetTypeCrv1
Step 1

ST2
Comparator Phase 1
UN > U2> TR2
Start
t2
START tReset2
& START
Trip OR
Time integrator Output
TRIP Logic
tIReset2
ResetTypeCrv2 TRIP
Step 2 OR

IEC05000748_2_en.vsd
IEC05000748 V2 EN

Figure 316: Schematic design of Two step residual overvoltage protection

ROV2PTOV

9.3.8 Technical data

Table 346: ROV2PTOV technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, (1.0-200.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur at U Ur
step 1 and step 2 0.5% of U at U > Ur

Absolute (0.050.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur at U Ur

hysteresis 0.5% of U at U > Ur

Inverse time - See table 1051

characteristics for
low and high step,
see table 1051
Definite time (0.006000.00) s 0.2% or 45 ms whichever is
delay low step greater
(step 1) at 0 to 1.2
x Uset

Table continues on next page

615
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Voltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Definite time (0.00060.000) s 0.2% or 45 ms whichever is
delay high step greater
(step 2) at 0 to 1.2
x Uset

Minimum operate (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 45 ms whichever is

time greater
Operate time, Min. = 15 ms -
start at 0 to 2 x Uset Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, start Min. = 15 ms -

at 2 to 0 x Uset Max. = 30 ms

Operate time, Min. = 20 ms -

start at 0 to 1.2 x Max. = 35 ms
Uset

Reset time, start Min. = 5 ms -

at 1.2 to 0 x Uset Max. = 25 ms

Critical impulse 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -

time
Impulse margin 15 ms typically -
time

9.4 Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH

9.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH 24

U/f >

SYMBOL-Q V1 EN

9.4.2 Functionality
When the laminated core of a power transformer or generator is subjected to a
magnetic flux density beyond its design limits, stray flux will flow into non-
laminated components that are not designed to carry flux. This will cause eddy
currents to flow. These eddy currents can cause excessive heating and severe
damage to insulation and adjacent parts in a relatively short time. The function has
settable inverse operating curves and independent alarm stages.

616
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 9
Voltage protection

9.4.3 Function block

OEXPVPH
I3P* TRIP
U3P* START
BLOCK ALARM
RESET

IEC05000329-2-en.vsd
IEC05000329 V3 EN

Figure 317: OEXPVPH function block

9.4.4 Signals
Table 347: OEXPVPH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Current connection
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset operation

Table 348: OEXPVPH Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip from overexcitation function
START BOOLEAN Overexcitation above set operate level
(instantaneous)
ALARM BOOLEAN Overexcitation above set alarm level (delayed)

9.4.5 Settings
Table 349: OEXPVPH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
V/Hz> 100.0 - 180.0 %UB/f 0.1 110.0 Operate level of V/Hz at no load and
rated freq in % of (UBase/frated)
V/Hz>> 100.0 - 200.0 %UB/f 0.1 140.0 High level of V/Hz above which tMin is
used, in % of (UBase/frated)
XLeak 0.000 - 200.000 Ohm 0.001 0.000 Winding leakage reactance in primary
ohms
TrPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Length of the pulse for trip signal (in sec)
tMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 7.000 Minimum trip delay for V/Hz inverse
curve, in sec
Table continues on next page

617
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Voltage protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tMax 0.00 - 9000.00 s 0.01 1800.00 Maximum trip delay for V/Hz inverse
curve, in sec
tCooling 0.10 - 9000.00 s 0.01 1200.00 Transformer magnetic core cooling time
constant, in sec
CurveType IEEE - - IEEE Inverse time curve selection, IEEE/Tailor
Tailor made made
kForIEEE 1 - 60 - 1 1 Time multiplier for IEEE inverse type
curve
AlarmLevel 50.0 - 120.0 % 0.1 100.0 Alarm operate level as % of operate level
tAlarm 0.00 - 9000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Alarm time delay, in sec

Table 350: OEXPVPH Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
t1Tailor 0.00 - 9000.00 s 0.01 7200.00 Time delay t1 (longest) for tailor made
curve, in sec
t2Tailor 0.00 - 9000.00 s 0.01 3600.00 Time delay t2 for tailor made curve, in sec
t3Tailor 0.00 - 9000.00 s 0.01 1800.00 Time delay t3 for tailor made curve, in sec
t4Tailor 0.00 - 9000.00 s 0.01 900.00 Time delay t4 for tailor made curve, in sec
t5Tailor 0.00 - 9000.00 s 0.01 450.00 Time delay t5 for tailor made curve, in sec
t6Tailor 0.00 - 9000.00 s 0.01 225.00 Time delay t6 (shortest) for tailor made
curve, in sec

Table 351: OEXPVPH Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MeasuredU PosSeq - - L1L2 Selection of measured voltage
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
MeasuredI L1L2 - - L1L2 Selection of measured current
L2L3
L3L1
PosSeq
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

9.4.6 Monitored data

Table 352: OEXPVPH Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TMTOTRIP REAL - s Calculated time to trip for
overexcitation, in sec
VPERHZ REAL - V/Hz Voltage to frequency
ratio in per-unit
THERMSTA REAL - % Overexcitation thermal
status in % of trip level

618
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 9
Voltage protection

9.4.7 Operation principle

The importance of Overexcitation protection (OEXPVPH) function is growing as
the power transformers as well as other power system elements today operate near
their designated limits most of the time.

Modern design transformers are more sensitive to overexcitation than earlier types.
This is a result of the more efficient designs and designs which rely on the
improvement in the uniformity of the excitation level of modern systems. If an
emergency that causes overexcitation does occur, transformers may be damaged
unless corrective action is taken. Transformer manufacturers recommend an
overexcitation protection as a part of the transformer protection system.

Overexcitation results from excessive applied voltage, possibly in combination

with below-normal frequency. Such conditions may occur when a transformer unit
is loaded, but are more likely to arise when the transformer is unloaded, or when
loss of load occurs. Transformers directly connected to generators are in particular
danger to experience overexcitation conditions. It follows from the fundamental
transformer equation, see equation 179, that the peak flux density Bmax is directly
proportional to induced voltage E, and inversely proportional to frequency f and
turns n.

E = 4.44 f n Bmax A
EQUATION898 V2 EN (Equation 179)

The relative excitation M is therefore according to equation 180.

E f
M ( p.u.) =
( Ur ) ( fr )
IECEQUATION2296 V1 EN (Equation 180)

Disproportional variations in quantities E and f may give rise to core overfluxing.

If the core flux density Bmax increases to a point above saturation level (typically
1.9 Tesla), the flux will no longer be contained within the core, but will extend into
other (non-laminated) parts of the power transformer and give rise to eddy current
circulations.

Overexcitation will result in:

overheating of the non-laminated metal parts

a large increase in magnetizing currents
an increase in core and winding temperature
an increase in transformer vibration and noise

Protection against overexcitation is based on calculation of the relative volt per

hertz (V/Hz) ratio. Protection initiates a reduction of excitation, and if this fails, or
if this is not possible, the TRIP signal will disconnect the transformer from the
source after a delay ranging from seconds to minutes, typically 5-10 seconds.

619
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Voltage protection

Overexcitation protection may be of particular concern on directly connected

generator unit transformers. Directly connected generator-transformers are
subjected to a wide range of frequencies during the acceleration and deceleration of
the turbine. In such cases, OEXPVPH (24) may trip the field breaker during a start-
up of a machine, by means of the overexcitation ALARM signal. If this is not
possible, the power transformer can be disconnected from the source, after a delay,
by the TRIP signal.

The IEC 60076 - 1 standard requires that transformers operate continuously at not
more than 10% above rated voltage at no load, and rated frequency. At no load, the
ratio of the actual generator terminal voltage to the actual frequency should not
exceed 1.1 times the ratio of transformer rated voltage to the rated frequency on a
sustained basis, see equation 181.

---- 1.1 Ur
E ------
f fr
EQUATION900 V1 EN (Equation 181)

or equivalently, with 1.1 Ur = V/Hz> according to equation 182.

E V Hz >

f fr
IECEQUATION2297 V2 EN (Equation 182)

where:
V/Hz> is the maximum continuously allowed voltage at no load, and rated frequency.

V/Hz> is a setting parameter. The setting range is 100% to 180%. If the user does
not know exactly what to set, then the default value for V/Hz> = 110 % given by
the IEC 60076-1 standard shall be used.

In OEXPVPH, the relative excitation M is expressed according to equation 183.

E f
M ( p.u. ) =
Ur fr
IECEQUATION2299 V1 EN (Equation 183)

It is clear from the above formula that, for an unloaded power transformer, M = 1
for any E and f, where the ratio E/f is equal to Ur/fr. A power transformer is not
overexcited as long as the relative excitation is M V/Hz>, V/Hz> expressed in %
of Ur/fr.

The overexcitation protection algorithm is fed with an input voltage U which is in

general not the induced voltage E from the fundamental transformer equation. For
no load condition, these two voltages are the same, but for a loaded power
transformer the internally induced voltage E may be lower or higher than the

620
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 9
Voltage protection

voltage U which is measured and fed to OEXPVPH , depending on the direction of

the power flow through the power transformer, the power transformer side where
OEXPVPH is applied, and the power transformer leakage reactance of the winding.
It is important to specify in the application configuration on which side of the
power transformer OEXPVPH is placed.

As an example, at a transformer with a 15% short circuit impedance Xsc, the full
load, 0.8 power factor, 105% voltage on the load side, the actual flux level in the
transformer core, will not be significantly different from that at the 110% voltage,
no load, rated frequency, provided that the short circuit impedance X can be
equally divided between the primary and the secondary winding: Xleak = Xleak1 =
Xleak2 = Xsc / 2 = 0.075 pu.

OEXPVPH calculates the internal induced voltage E if Xleak (meaning the leakage
reactance of the winding where OEXPVPH is connected) is known to the user. The
assumption taken for two-winding power transformers that Xleak = Xsc / 2 is
unfortunately most often not true. For a two-winding power transformer the
leakage reactances of the two windings depend on how the windings are located on
the core with respect to each other. In the case of three-winding power transformers
the situation is still more complex. If a user has the knowledge on the leakage
reactance, then it should applied. If a user has no idea about it, Xleak can be set to
Xc/2. OEXPVPH protection will then take the given measured voltage U, as the
induced voltage E.

It is assumed that overexcitation is a symmetrical phenomenon, caused by events

such as loss-of-load, etc. A high phase-to-earth voltage does not mean
overexcitation. For example, in an unearthed power system, a single phase-to-earth
fault means high voltages of the healthy two phases-to-earth, but no
overexcitation on any winding. The phase-to-phase voltages will remain essentially
unchanged. The important voltage is the voltage between the two ends of each
winding.

9.4.7.1 Measured voltage

If one phase-to-phase voltage is available from the side where overexcitation

protection is applied, then Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH shall be set to
measure this voltage, MeasuredU. The particular voltage which is used determines
the two currents that must be used. This must be chosen with the setting MeasuredI.

It is extremely important that MeasuredU and MeasuredI are set to

same value.

If, for example, voltage UL1L2 is fed to OEXPVPH, then currents IL1, and IL2
must be applied. From these two input currents, current IL1L2 = IL1 - IL2 is
calculated internally by the OEXPVPH algorithm. The phase-to-phase voltage
must be higher than 70% of the rated value, otherwise the protection algorithm
exits without calculating the excitation. ERROR output is set to 1, and the
displayed value of relative excitation V/Hz shows 0.000.

621
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Voltage protection

If three phase-to-earth voltages are available from the side where overexcitation is
connected, then OEXPVPH shall be set to measure positive sequence voltage and
current. In this case the positive sequence voltage and the positive sequence current
are used by OEXPVPH. A check is made if the positive sequence voltage is higher
than 70% of rated phase-to-earth voltage, when below this value, OEXPVPH exits
immediately, and no excitation is calculated. ERROR output is set to 1, and the
displayed value of relative excitation V/Hz shows 0.000.

OEXPVPH can be connected to any power transformer side, independent from

the power flow.
The side with a possible load tap changer must not be used.

9.4.7.2 Operate time of the overexcitation protection

The operate time of OEXPVPH is a function of the relative overexcitation.

Basically there are two different delay laws available to choose between:

the so called IEEE law, and

a tailor-made law.

The so called IEEE law approximates a square law and has been chosen based on
analysis of the various transformers overexcitation capability characteristics. They
can match the transformer core capability well.

The square law is according to equation 184.

0.18 k 0.18 k
top = 2
= 2
M overexcitation
V Hz> - 1

IECEQUATION2298 V2 EN (Equation 184)

where:
M the relative excitation
V/Hz> is maximum continuously allowed voltage at no load, and rated frequency, in pu and
k is time multiplier for inverse time functions, see figure 319.
Parameter k (time multiplier setting) selects one delay curve from the family of curves.

The relative excitation M is calculated using equation185

622
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 9
Voltage protection

Umeasured
Umeasured frated
=
fmeasured
M =
UBase UBase fmeasured

frated
IECEQUATION2404 V1 EN (Equation 185)

An analog overexcitation relay would have to evaluate the following integral

expression, which means to look for the instant of time t = top according to
equation 186.

top

(M (t) - V Hz > ) dt 0.18 k

2

IECEQUATION2300 V1 EN (Equation 186)

A digital, numerical relay will instead look for the lowest j (that is, j = n) where it
becomes true that:

n
2
Dt ( M(j) V/Hz> ) 0.18 k
j=k
EQUATION906 V1 EN (Equation 187)

where:
Dt is the time interval between two successive executions of OEXPVPH and
M(j) - V/Hz> is the relative excitation at (time j) in excess of the normal (rated) excitation which is
given as Ur/fr.

As long as M > V/Hz> (that is, overexcitation condition), the above sum can only
be larger with time, and if the overexcitation persists, the protected transformer will
be tripped at j = n.

Inverse delays as per figure 319, can be modified (limited) by two special definite
delay settings, namely tMax and tMin, see figure 318.

623
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Voltage protection

delay in s

tMax

under - inverse delay law

excitation

overexcitation
tMin
0 Mmax - V/Hz> Overexcitation M-V/Hz>

M=V/Hz> Mmax Excitation M

V/Hz> Emax E (only if f = fr = const)

99001067.vsd
IEC99001067 V1 EN

Figure 318: Restrictions imposed on inverse delays by tMax and tMin

A definite maximum time, tMax, can be used to limit the operate time at low
degrees of overexcitation. Inverse delays longer than tMax will not be allowed. In
case the inverse delay is longer than tMax, OEXPVPH trips after tMax seconds.

A definite minimum time, tMin, can be used to limit the operate time at high
degrees of overexcitation. In case the inverse delay is shorter than tMin,
OEXPVPH function trips after tMin seconds. The inverse delay law is not valid for
values exceeding Mmax. The delay will be tMin, irrespective of the overexcitation
level, when values exceed Mmax (that is, M>V/Hz>).

624
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 9
Voltage protection

Time (s) IEEE OVEREXCITATION CURVES

1000

100

k = 60

k = 20

k = 10
10 k=9
k=8
k=7
k=6
k=5
k=4
k=3

k=2

k=1
1
1 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 40

OVEREXCITATION IN % (M-Emaxcont)*100)

en01000373.vsd

IEC01000373 V1 EN

Figure 319: Delays inversely proportional to the square of the overexcitation

The critical value of excitation M is determined indirectly via OEXPVPH setting V/

Hz>>. V/Hz>> can be thought of as a no-load voltage at rated frequency, where
the inverse law should be replaced by a short definite delay, tMin. If, for example,
V/Hz>> = 140 %, then M is according to equation 188.

(V Hz>> ) / f
M= = 1.40
Ur/fr
IECEQUATION2286 V1 EN (Equation 188)

The Tailor-Made law allows a user to design an arbitrary delay characteristic. In

this case the interval between M = V/Hz>, and M = Mmax is automatically divided
into five equal subintervals, with six delays. (settings t1, t2, t3, t4, t5 and t6) as
shown in figure 320. These times should be set so that t1 => t2 => t3 => t4 => t5
=> t6.

625
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Voltage protection

delay in s

tMax

under- tMin
excitation Overexcitation M-Emaxcont
0 Mmax - Emaxcont Excitation M

Emaxcont Mmax
99001068.vsd
IEC99001068 V1 EN

Figure 320: An example of a Tailor-Made delay characteristic

Delays between two consecutive points, for example t3 and t4, are obtained by
linear interpolation.

Should it happen that tMax be lower than, for example, delays t1, and t2, the actual
delay would be tMax. Above Mmax, the delay can only be tMin.

9.4.7.3 Cooling

Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH is basically a thermal protection; therefore a

cooling process has been introduced. Exponential cooling process is applied.
Parameter Setting tool is an OEXPVPH setting, with a default time constant
tCooling of 20 minutes. This means that if the voltage and frequency return to their
previous normal values (no more overexcitation), the normal temperature is
assumed to be reached not before approximately 5 times tCooling minutes. If an
overexcitation condition would return before that, the time to trip will be shorter
than it would be otherwise.

9.4.7.4 Overexcitation protection function measurands

A monitored data value, TMTOTRIP, is available on the local HMI and in

PCM600. This value is an estimation of the remaining time to trip (in seconds), if
the overexcitation remained on the level it had when the estimation was done. This
information can be useful during small or moderate overexcitation situations.

If the overexcitation is so low that the valid delay is tMax, then the estimation of
the remaining time to trip is done against tMax.

The relative excitation M, shown on the local HMI and in PCM600 has a
monitored data value VPERHZ and is calculated from the expression:

E f
M ( p.u. ) =
Ur fr
IECEQUATION2299 V1 EN (Equation 189)

626
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 9
Voltage protection

If VPERHZ value is less than setting V/Hz> (in %), the power transformer is
underexcited. If VPERHZ is equal to V/Hz> (in %), the excitation is exactly equal
to the power transformer continuous capability. If VPERHZ is higher than V/Hz>,
the protected power transformer is overexcited. For example, if VPERHZ = 1.100,
while V/Hz> = 110 %, then the power transformer is exactly on its maximum
continuous excitation limit.

The monitored data value THERMSTA shows the thermal status of the protected
power transformer iron core. THERMSTA gives the thermal status in % of the trip
value which corresponds to 100%. THERMSTA should reach 100% at the same
time, as TMTOTRIP reaches 0 seconds. If the protected power transformer is then
for some reason not switched off, THERMSTA shall go over 100%.

If the delay as per IEEE law, or Tailor-made Law, is limited by tMax, and/or tMin,
then the Thermal status will generally not reach 100% at the same time, when
tTRIP reaches 0 seconds. For example, if, at low degrees of overexcitation, the
very long delay is limited by tMax, then the OEXPVPH TRIP output signal will be
set to 1 before the Thermal status reaches 100%.

9.4.7.5 Overexcitation alarm

A separate step, AlarmLevel, is provided for alarming purpose. It is normally set

2% lower than (V/Hz>) and has a definite time delay, tAlarm. This will give the
operator an early warning.

9.4.7.6 Logic diagram

BLOCK
AlarmLevel
tAlarm ALARM
&
t

M>V/Hz>
TRIP
&
V/Hz>
U3P Calculation
Ei k
M
of internal M=
I3P induced (Ei / f) IEEE law &
voltage Ei (Ur / fr) tMax 1
M t
Tailor-made law
M>V/Hz>>
tMin
Xleak
t
V/Hz>>

M = relative V/Hz as service value

IEC05000162-3-en.vsd
IEC05000162 V3 EN

Figure 321: A simplified logic diagram of the Overexcitation protection

OEXPVPH

627
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Voltage protection

Simplification of the diagram is in the way the IEEE and Tailor-made delays are
calculated. The cooling process is not shown. It is not shown that voltage and
frequency are separately checked against their respective limit values.

9.4.8 Technical data

Table 353: OEXPVPH technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, start (100180)% of (UBase/frated) 0.5% of U

Operate value, alarm (50120)% of start level 0.5% of Ur at U Ur

0.5% of U at U > Ur

Operate value, high level (100200)% of (UBase/frated) 0.5% of U

Curve type IEEE or customer defined 5.0 % or 45 ms,

whichever is greater
(0.18 k )
IEEE : t =
( M - 1) 2

EQUATION1319 V1 EN (Equation 190)

where M = (E/f)/(Ur/fr)
Minimum time delay for inverse (0.00060.000) s 1.0% or 45 ms,
function whichever is greater
Maximum time delay for inverse (0.009000.00) s 1.0% or 45 ms,
function whichever is greater
Alarm time delay (0.009000.00) 1.0% or 45 ms,
whichever is greater

9.5 Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV

9.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV - 60

9.5.2 Functionality
A voltage differential monitoring function is available. It compares the voltages
from two three phase sets of voltage transformers and has one sensitive alarm step
and one trip step.

628
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 9
Voltage protection

9.5.3 Function block

VDCPTOV
U3P1* TRIP
U3P2* START
BLOCK ALARM
U1LOW
U2LOW
UL1DIFF
UL2DIFF
UL3DIFF

IEC06000528-2-en.vsd
IEC06000528 V2 EN

Figure 322: VDCPTOV function block

9.5.4 Signals
Table 354: VDCPTOV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P1 GROUP - Bus voltage
SIGNAL
U3P2 GROUP - Capacitor voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 355: VDCPTOV Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Voltage differential protection operated
START BOOLEAN Start of voltage differential protection
ALARM BOOLEAN Voltage differential protection alarm
U1LOW BOOLEAN Loss of U1 voltage
U2LOW BOOLEAN Loss of U2 voltage
UL1DIFF REAL Differential Voltage phase L1
UL2DIFF REAL Differential Voltage phase L2
UL3DIFF REAL Differential Voltage phase L3

9.5.5 Settings
Table 356: VDCPTOV Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
BlkDiffAtULow No - - Yes Block operation at low voltage
Yes
UDTrip 2.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 5.0 Operate level, in % of UBase
Table continues on next page

629
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Voltage protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Time delay for voltage differential
operate, in seconds
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for voltage differential reset,
in seconds
UDAlarm 2.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 2.0 Alarm level, in % of UBase
tAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Time delay for voltage differential alarm,
in seconds
U1Low 1.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 70.0 Input 1 undervoltage level, in % of UBase
U2Low 1.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 70.0 Input 2 undervoltage level, in % of UBase
tBlock 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time for undervoltage block

Table 357: VDCPTOV Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
RFL1 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Ratio compensation factor phase L1
U2L1*RFL1=U1L1
RFL2 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Ratio compensation factor phase L2
U2L2*RFL2=U1L2
RFL3 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Ratio compensation factor phase L3
U2L3*RFL3=U1L3

Table 358: VDCPTOV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

9.5.6 Monitored data

Table 359: VDCPTOV Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UL1DIFF REAL - kV Differential Voltage
phase L1
UL2DIFF REAL - kV Differential Voltage
phase L2
UL3DIFF REAL - kV Differential Voltage
phase L3

9.5.7 Operation principle

The Voltage differential protection function VDCPTOV (60) is based on
comparison of the amplitudes of the two voltages connected in each phase.
Possible differences between the ratios of the two Voltage/Capacitive voltage
transformers can be compensated for with a ratio correction factors RFLx. The

630
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 9
Voltage protection

voltage difference is evaluated and if it exceeds the alarm level UDAlarm or trip
level UDATrip signals for alarm (ALARM output) or trip (TRIP output) is given
after definite time delay tAlarm respectively tTrip. The two three phase voltage
supplies are also supervised with undervoltage settings U1Low and U2Low. The
outputs for loss of voltage U1LOW resp U2LOW will be activated. The U1 voltage
is supervised for loss of individual phases whereas the U2 voltage is supervised for
loss of all three phases.

Loss of all U1or all U2 voltages will block the differential measurement. This
blocking can be switched off with setting BlkDiffAtULow = No.

VDCPTOV function can be blocked from an external condition with the binary
BLOCK input. It can for example, be activated from Fuse failure supervision
function SDDRFUF.

To allow easy commissioning the measured differential voltage is available as

service value. This allows simple setting of the ratio correction factor to achieve
full balance in normal service.

The principle logic diagram is shown in figure 323.

631
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Voltage protection

UDTripL1>
AND

UDTripL2> O tReset tTrip

AND
R t t
AND TRIP

UDTripL3>
AND
AND START

UDAlarmL1>
AND

UDAlarmL2> O tAlarm
AND
R t AND ALARM

UDAlarmL3>
AND

U1<L1
tAlarm
U1<L2 AND t U1LOW
AND

U1<L3 AND

OR
BlkDiffAtULow

U2<L1
t1
U2<L2 AND t U2LOW
AND

U2<L3

BLOCK

en06000382-2.vsd

IEC06000382 V3 EN

Figure 323: Principle logic for Voltage differential function VDCPTOV

9.5.8 Technical data

Table 360: VDCPTOV technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Voltage difference for alarm and (2.0100.0) % of UBase 0.5% of Ur
trip
Under voltage level (1.0100.0) % of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Independent time delay for (0.00060.000)s 0.2% or 40 ms whichever

voltage differential alarm at 0.8 is greater
to 1.2 x UDAlarm
Independent time delay for (0.00060.000)s 0.2% or 40 ms whichever
voltage differential trip at 0.8 to is greater
1.2 x UDTrip
Independent time delay for (0.00060.000)s 0.2% or 40 ms whichever
voltage differential reset at 1.2 to is greater
0.8 x UDTrip

632
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 9
Voltage protection

9.6 Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV

9.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV - 27

9.6.2 Functionality
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV is suitable for use in networks with an automatic
system restoration function. LOVPTUV issues a three-pole trip command to the
circuit breaker, if all three phase voltages fall below the set value for a time longer
than the set time and the circuit breaker remains closed.

The operation of LOVPTUV is supervised by the fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC.

9.6.3 Function block

LOVPTUV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
CBOPEN
VTSU

IEC07000039-2-en.vsd
IEC07000039 V2 EN

Figure 324: LOVPTUV function block

9.6.4 Signals
Table 361: LOVPTUV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Voltage connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block the all outputs
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker open
VTSU BOOLEAN 0 Block from voltage circuit supervision

Table 362: LOVPTUV Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal
START BOOLEAN Start signal

633
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Voltage protection

9.6.5 Settings
Table 363: LOVPTUV Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
UPE 1 - 100 %UB 1 70 Operate voltage in % of base voltage
UBase
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 7.000 Operate time delay

Table 364: LOVPTUV Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tPulse 0.050 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Duration of TRIP pulse
tBlock 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay to block when all 3ph
voltages are not low
tRestore 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Time delay for enable the function after
restoration

Table 365: LOVPTUV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

9.6.6 Operation principle

The operation of Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV is based on line voltage
measurement. LOVPTUV is provided with a logic, which automatically recognizes
if the line was restored for at least tRestore before starting the tTrip timer. All three
phases are required to be low before the output TRIP is activated. The START
output signal indicates start.

Additionally, LOVPTUV is automatically blocked if only one or two phase

voltages have been detected low for more than tBlock.

LOVPTUV operates again only if the line has been restored to full voltage for at
least tRestore. Operation of the function is also inhibited by fuse failure and open
circuit breaker information signals, by their connection to dedicated inputs of the
function block.

Due to undervoltage conditions being continuous the trip pulse is limited to a

length set by setting tPulse.

The operation of LOVPTUV is supervised by the fuse-failure function (BLKU

input) and the information about the open position (CBOPEN) of the associated
circuit breaker.

634
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 9
Voltage protection

The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive
a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other
internal functions of the IED itself in order to receive a block command from
internal functions. LOVPTUV is also blocked when the IED is in TEST status and
the function has been blocked from the HMI test menu. (Blocked=Yes).

TEST

TEST-ACTIVE
&
Blocked = Yes

START
BLOCK >1
Function Enable tTrip tPulse TRIP
STUL1N & t

STUL2N &
only 1 or 2 phases are low for
Latched at least 10 s (not three)
STUL3N Enable
&

tBlock
>1 t

CBOPEN Reset Enable

>1
&
VTSU
tRestore
>1 Set Enable
t
>1
Line restored for
at least 3 s

IEC07000089_2_en.vsd

IEC07000089 V2 EN

Figure 325: Simplified diagram of Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV

635
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Voltage protection

9.6.7 Technical data

Table 366: LOVPTUV technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage (1100)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Pulse timer when disconnecting (0.05060.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms whichever

all three phases is greater
Time delay for enabling the (0.00060.000) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever
functions after restoration is greater
Operate time delay when (0.00060.000) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever
disconnecting all three phases is greater
Time delay to block when all (0.00060.000) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever
three phase voltages are not low is greater

636
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 10
Frequency protection

Section 10 Frequency protection

10.1 Underfrequency protection SAPTUF

10.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF 81

f<

SYMBOL-P V1 EN

10.1.2 Functionality
Underfrequency occurs as a result of a lack of generation in the network.

Underfrequency protection SAPTUF measures frequency with high accuracy, and

is used for load shedding systems, remedial action schemes, gas turbine startup and
so on. Separate definite time delays are provided for operate and restore.

SAPTUF is provided with undervoltage blocking.

The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two
phase-phase or three phase-neutral voltages to be connected. For information about
how to connect analog inputs, refer to Application manual/IED application/
Analog inputs/Setting guidelines

10.1.3 Function block

SAPTUF
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTRIP RESTORE
BLKREST BLKDMAGN
FREQ

IEC06000279_2_en.vsd
IEC06000279 V2 EN

Figure 326: SAPTUF function block

637
Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Frequency protection

10.1.4 Signals
Table 367: SAPTUF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocking operate output
BLKREST BOOLEAN 0 Blocking restore output

Table 368: SAPTUF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
START BOOLEAN General start signal
RESTORE BOOLEAN Restore signal for load restoring purposes
BLKDMAGN BOOLEAN Measurement blocked due to low voltage
amplitude
FREQ REAL Measured frequency

10.1.5 Settings
Table 369: SAPTUF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
StartFrequency 35.00 - 75.00 Hz 0.01 48.80 Frequency set value
tDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate time delay
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for reset
tRestore 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Restore time delay
RestoreFreq 45.00 - 65.00 Hz 0.01 50.10 Restore frequency value
TimerMode Definite timer - - Definite timer Setting for choosing timer mode
Volt based timer
UNom 50.0 - 150.0 %UB 1.0 100.0 Nominal voltage for voltage based timer
in % of UBase
UMin 50.0 - 150.0 %UB 1.0 90.0 Lower operation limit for voltage based
timer in % of UBase
Exponent 0.0 - 5.0 - 0.1 1.0 For calculation of the curve form for
voltage based timer
tMax 0.010 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Maximum time operation limit for voltage
based timer
tMin 0.010 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Minimum time operation limit for voltage
based timer

638
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 10
Frequency protection

Table 370: SAPTUF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

10.1.6 Monitored data

Table 371: SAPTUF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
ULevel REAL - kV Level of measured
voltage
FREQ REAL - Hz Measured frequency

10.1.7 Operation principle

Underfrequency protection SAPTUF is used to detect low power system frequency.
SAPTUF can either have a definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent
time delay. If the voltage magnitude dependent time delay is applied, the time
delay will be longer if the voltage is higher, and the delay will be shorter if the
voltage is lower. If the frequency remains below the set value for a time period
corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To
avoid an unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage
magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available, that is, if the
voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage IntBlockLevel the function is blocked
and no START or TRIP signal is issued.

10.1.7.1 Measurement principle

The fundamental frequency of the measured input voltage is measured

continuously, and compared with the set value, StartFrequency. The frequency
function is dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases
the setting IntBlockLevel, SAPTUF gets blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is
issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the setting UBase, which should
be set as a phase-phase voltage in kV.

To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.

10.1.7.2 Time delay

The time delay for underfrequency protection SAPTUF can be either a settable
definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent time delay, where the time
delay depends on the voltage level; a high voltage level gives a longer time delay
and a low voltage level causes a short time delay. For the definite time delay, the
setting TimeDlyOperate sets the time delay.

639
Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Frequency protection

For the voltage dependent time delay the measured voltage level and the settings
UNom, UMin, Exponent, tMax and tMin set the time delay according to figure 327
and equation 191. The setting TimerOperation is used to decide what type of time
delay to apply.

Trip signal issuing requires that the underfrequency condition continues for at least
the user set time delay TimeDlyOperate. If the START condition, with respect to
the measured frequency ceases during this user set delay time, and is not fulfilled
again within a user defined reset time, TimeDlyReset, the START output is reset,
after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after
leaving the hysteresis area, the START condition must be fulfilled again and it is
not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area.

On the output of SAPTUF a 100ms pulse is issued, after a time delay

corresponding to the setting of TimeDlyRestore, when the measured frequency
returns to the level corresponding to the setting RestoreFreq.

10.1.7.3 Voltage dependent time delay

Since the fundamental frequency in a power system is the same all over the system,
except some deviations during power oscillations, another criterion is needed to
decide, where to take actions, based on low frequency. In many applications the
voltage level is very suitable, and in most cases is load shedding preferable in areas
with low voltage. Therefore, a voltage dependent time delay has been introduced,
to make sure that load shedding, or other actions, take place at the right location. At
constant voltage, U, the voltage dependent time delay is calculated according to
equation 191. At non-constant voltage, the actual time delay is integrated in a
similar way as for the inverse time characteristic for the undervoltage and
overvoltage functions.
Exponent
U - UMin
t= ( tMax - tMin ) + tMin
UNom - UMin

EQUATION1182 V1 EN (Equation 191)

where:
t is the voltage dependent time delay (at constant voltage),
U is the measured voltage
Exponent is a setting,
UMin, UNom are voltage settings corresponding to
tMax, tMin are time settings.

The inverse time characteristics are shown in figure 327, for:

640
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 10
Frequency protection

UMin = 90%
UNom = 100%
tMax = 1.0 s
tMin = 0.0 s
Exponent = 0, 1, 2, 3 and 4

1
0
1
Exponenent
TimeDlyOperate [s]

2
3
0.5 4

0
90 95 100

U [% of UBase]
en05000075.vsd
IEC05000075 V1 EN

Figure 327: Voltage dependent inverse time characteristics for underfrequency

protection SAPTUF. The time delay to operate is plotted as a
function of the measured voltage, for the Exponent = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4
respectively.

10.1.7.4 Blocking

It is possible to block underfrequency protection SAPTUF partially or completely,

by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTRIP: blocks the TRIP output
BLKREST: blocks the RESTORE output

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlockLevel, both the
START and the TRIP outputs, are blocked.

10.1.7.5 Design

The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the

positive sequence voltage and compares it to the setting StartFrequency. The
frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults. The
time integrator can operate either due to a definite delay time or to the special
voltage dependent delay time. When the frequency has returned back to the setting

641
Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Frequency protection

of RestoreFreq, the RESTORE output is issued after the time delay

TimeDlyRestore. The design of underfrequency protection SAPTUF is
schematically described in figure 328.

Block

BLOCK BLKDMAGN
OR
Comparator
U < IntBlockLevel

Voltage Time integrator

Start
TimerOperation Mode & START
Selector START
Frequency Comparator Trip
f < StartFrequency Output
TimeDlyOperate TRIP Logic

TimeDlyReset TRIP

100 ms

Comparator RESTORE
TimeDlyRestore
f > RestoreFreq

en05000726.vsd

IEC05000726 V1 EN

Figure 328: Simplified logic diagram for SAPTUF

10.1.8 Technical data

Table 372: SAPTUF technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, start function, at symmetrical three (35.00-75.00) Hz 2.0 mHz
phase voltage
Operate time, start at fset + 0.02 Hz to fset - 0.02 Hz Min. = 80 ms
fn = 50 Hz
Max. = 95 ms
-
Min. = 65 ms
fn = 60 Hz
Max. = 80 ms
Reset time, start at fset - 0.02 Hz to fset + 0.02 Hz Min. = 15 ms
-
Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, definite time function at fset + 0.02 Hz (0.000-60.000)s 0.2% or
to fset - 0.02 Hz 100 ms
whichever
is greater
Table continues on next page

642
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 10
Frequency protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Reset time, definite time function at fset - 0.02 Hz to (0.000-60.000)s 0.2% or
fset + 0.02 Hz 120 ms
whichever
is greater
Voltage dependent time delay Settings: 1.0% or
UNom=(50-150)% of Ubase 120 ms
UMin=(50-150)% of Ubase whichever
Exponent=0.0-5.0 is greater
tMax=(0.01060.000)s
tMin=(0.01060.000)s
Exponent
U - UMin
t= ( tMax - tMin ) + tMin
UNom - UMin
EQUATION1182 V1 EN (Equation 192)

U=Umeasured

10.2 Overfrequency protection SAPTOF

10.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF 81

f>

SYMBOL-O V1 EN

10.2.2 Functionality
Overfrequency protection function SAPTOF is applicable in all situations, where
reliable detection of high fundamental power system frequency is needed.

Overfrequency occurs because of sudden load drops or shunt faults in the power
network. Close to the generating plant, generator governor problems can also cause
over frequency.

SAPTOF measures frequency with high accuracy, and is used mainly for
generation shedding and remedial action schemes. It is also used as a frequency
stage initiating load restoring. A definite time delay is provided for operate.

SAPTOF is provided with an undervoltage blocking.

The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two
phase-phase or three phase-neutral voltages to be connected. For information about
how to connect analog inputs, refer to Application manual/IED application/
Analog inputs/Setting guidelines

643
Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Frequency protection

10.2.3 Function block

SAPTOF
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTRIP BLKDMAGN
FREQ

IEC06000280_2_en.vsd
IEC06000280 V2 EN

Figure 329: SAPTOF function block

10.2.4 Signals
Table 373: SAPTOF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocking operate output

Table 374: SAPTOF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
START BOOLEAN General start signal
BLKDMAGN BOOLEAN Measurement blocked due to low amplitude
FREQ REAL Measured frequency

10.2.5 Settings
Table 375: SAPTOF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
StartFrequency 35.00 - 90.00 Hz 0.01 51.20 Frequency set value
tDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Operate time delay
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for reset

Table 376: SAPTOF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

644
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 10
Frequency protection

10.2.6 Monitored data

Table 377: SAPTOF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
ULevel REAL - kV Level of measured
voltage
FREQ REAL - Hz Measured frequency

10.2.7 Operation principle

Overfrequency protection SAPTOF is used to detect high power system frequency.
SAPTOF has a settable definite time delay. If the frequency remains above the set
value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding
TRIP signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted TRIP due to uncertain frequency
measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the
function is available from the preprocessing function, that is, if the voltage is lower
than the set blocking voltage in the preprocessing function, the function is blocked
and no START or TRIP signal is issued.

10.2.7.1 Measurement principle

The fundamental frequency of the positive sequence voltage is measured

continuously, and compared with the set value, StartFrequency. Overfrequency
protection SAPTOF is dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage
magnitude decreases below the setting IntBlockLevel, SAPTOF is blocked, and the
output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the
UBase, which should be set as a phase-phase voltage in kV. To avoid oscillations
of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.

10.2.7.2 Time delay

The time delay for Overfrequency protection SAPTOF is a settable definite time
delay, specified by the setting TimeDlyOperate.

TRIP signal issuing requires that the overfrequency condition continues for at least
the user set time delay, TimeDlyReset. If the START condition, with respect to the
measured frequency ceases during this user set delay time, and is not fulfilled again
within a user defined reset time, TimeDlyReset, the START output is reset, after
that the defined reset time has elapsed. It is to be noted that after leaving the
hysteresis area, the START condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient
for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area.

The total time delay consists of the set value for time delay plus
minimum operate time of the start function (80 - 90 ms).

645
Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Frequency protection

10.2.7.3 Blocking

It is possible to block overfrequency protection SAPTOF partially or completely,

by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTRIP: blocks the TRIP output

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlockLevel, both the
START and the TRIP outputs, are blocked.

10.2.7.4 Design

The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the

positive sequence voltage and compares it to the setting StartFrequency. The
frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults in the
power system. The time integrator operates due to a definite delay time. The design
of overfrequency protection SAPTOF is schematically described in figure 330.

BLOCK
BLKTRIP BLOCK
OR BLKDMAGN
Comparator
U < IntBlockLevel

Start
&
Trip
Voltage Time integrator Output
Logic
Definite Time Delay START START
Frequency Comparator
f > StartFrequency TimeDlyOperate
TRIP
TimeDlyReset
TRIP

en05000735.vsd

IEC05000735 V1 EN

Figure 330: Schematic design of overfrequency protection SAPTOF

646
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 10
Frequency protection

10.2.8 Technical data

Table 378: SAPTOF technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, start function (35.00-90.00) Hz 2.0 mHz
at symmetrical three-phase
voltage
Operate time, start at fset - Min. = 80 ms -
fn = 50Hz
0.02 Hz to fset + 0.02 Hz Max. = 95 ms
Min. = 65 ms
fn = 60 Hz
Max. = 80 ms
Reset time, start at fset + Min. = 15 ms -
0.02 Hz to fset - 0.02 Hz Max. = 30 ms

Operate time, definite time (0.000-60.000)s 0.2% 100 ms

function at fset -0.02 Hz to fset whichever is greater
+ 0.02 Hz
Reset time, definite time (0.000-60.000)s 0.2% 120 ms,
function at fset + 0.02 Hz to whichever is greater
fset - 0.02 Hz

10.3 Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC

10.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC 81

df/dt >
<

SYMBOL-N V1 EN

10.3.2 Functionality
The rate-of-change frequency protection function SAPFRC gives an early
indication of a main disturbance in the system. SAPFRC measures frequency with
high accuracy, and can be used for generation shedding, load shedding and
remedial action schemes. SAPFRC can discriminate between a positive or negative
change of frequency. A definite time delay is provided for operate.

SAPFRC is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The operation is based on

positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two phase-phase or three phase-
neutral voltages to be connected. For information about how to connect analog
inputs, refer to Application manual/IED application/Analog inputs/Setting
guidelines.

647
Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Frequency protection

10.3.3 Function block

SAPFRC
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTRIP RESTORE
BLKREST BLKDMAGN

IEC06000281-2-en.vsd
IEC06000281 V2 EN

Figure 331: SAPFRC function block

10.3.4 Signals
Table 379: SAPFRC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocking operate output
BLKREST BOOLEAN 0 Blocking restore output

Table 380: SAPFRC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Operate/trip signal for frequency gradient
START BOOLEAN Start/pick-up signal for frequency gradient
RESTORE BOOLEAN Restore signal for load restoring purposes
BLKDMAGN BOOLEAN Blocking indication due to low amplitude

10.3.5 Settings
Table 381: SAPFRC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
StartFreqGrad -10.00 - 10.00 Hz/s 0.01 0.50 Frequency gradient start value, the sign
defines direction
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate time delay in positive / negative
frequency gradient mode
RestoreFreq 45.00 - 65.00 Hz 0.01 49.90 Restore frequency value
tRestore 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Restore time delay
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for reset

648
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 10
Frequency protection

10.3.6 Monitored data

Table 382: SAPFRC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STARTDUR REAL - % Start duration in
percents of the total
operation time

10.3.7 Operation principle

Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC is used to detect fast power system
frequency changes, increase as well as, decrease at an early stage. SAPFRC has a
settable definite time delay. If the rate-of-change of frequency remains below the
set value, for negative rate-of-change, for a time period equal to the chosen time
delay, the TRIP signal is issued. If the rate-of-change of frequency remains above
the set value, for positive rate-of-change, for a time period equal to the chosen time
delay, the TRIP signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted TRIP due to uncertain
frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of
the function is available, that is if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage
IntBlockLevel, the function is blocked and no START or TRIP signal is issued. If
the frequency recovers, after a frequency decrease, a restore signal is issued.

10.3.7.1 Measurement principle

The rate-of-change of the fundamental frequency of the selected voltage is

measured continuously, and compared with the set value, StartFreqGrad. Rate-of-
change frequency protection SAPFRC is also dependent on the voltage magnitude.
If the voltage magnitude decreases below the setting IntBlockLevel, SAPFRC is
blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. The sign of the setting
StartFreqGrad, controls if SAPFRC reacts on a positive or on a negative change in
frequency. If SAPFRC is used for decreasing frequency that is, the setting
StartFreqGrad has been given a negative value, and a trip signal has been issued,
then a 100 ms pulse is issued on the RESTORE output, when the frequency
recovers to a value higher than the setting RestoreFreq. A positive setting of
StartFreqGrad, sets SAPFRC to START and TRIP for frequency increases.

To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.

10.3.7.2 Time delay

Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC has a settable definite time delay,

tTrip. .

Trip signal issuing requires that the rate-of-change of frequency condition

continues for at least the user set time delay, tTrip. If the START condition, with
respect to the measured frequency ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled
again within a user defined reset time, tReset, the START output is reset, after that

649
Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Frequency protection

the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the
hysteresis area, the START condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient
for the signal to only return back into the hysteresis area.

The RESTORE output of SAPFRC is set, after a time delay equal to the setting of
tRestore, when the measured frequency has returned to the level corresponding to
RestoreFreq, after an issue of the TRIP output signal. If tRestore is set to 0.000 s
the restore functionality is disabled, and no output will be given. The restore
functionality is only active for lowering frequency conditions and the restore
sequence is disabled if a new negative frequency gradient is detected during the
restore period, defined by the settings RestoreFreq and tRestore.

10.3.7.3 Blocking

Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC) can be partially or totally blocked,

by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTRIP: blocks the TRIP output
BLKREST: blocks the RESTORE output

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlockLevel, both the
START and the TRIP outputs, are blocked.

10.3.7.4 Design

Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC) measuring element continuously

measures the frequency of the selected voltage and compares it to the setting
StartFreqGrad. The frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to power
system switchings and faults. The time integrator operates with a definite delay
time. When the frequency has returned back to the setting of RestoreFreq, the
RESTORE output is issued after the time delay tRestore, if the TRIP signal has
earlier been issued. The sign of the setting StartFreqGrad is essential, and controls
if the function is used for raising or lowering frequency conditions. The design of
SAPFRC is schematically described in figure 332.

650
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 10
Frequency protection

BLOCK
BLKTRIP

BLKRESET BLOCK
OR

Voltage Comparator BLKDMAGN

U < IntBlockLevel

Start
Rate-of-Change Time integrator &
Comparator
of Frequency Trip
If
Definite Time Delay Output
[StartFreqGrad<0 START START
Logic
AND
TimeDlyOperate
df/dt < StartFreqGrad]
OR
TimeDlyReset
[StartFreqGrad>0
AND
TRIP
df/dt > StartFreqGrad]
Then
START
100 ms

Frequency Comparator RESTORE

TimeDlyRestore
f > RestoreFreq

en05000835.vsd

IEC05000835 V1 EN

Figure 332: Schematic design of Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC

10.3.8 Technical data

Table 383: SAPFRC Technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, start function (-10.00-10.00) Hz/s 10.0 mHz/s
Operate value, restore (45.00-65.00) Hz 2.0 mHz
enable frequency
Definite restore time delay (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 100 ms whichever is
greater
Definite time delay for (0.200-60.000) s 0.2% or 120 ms whichever is
frequency gradient trip greater
Definite reset time delay (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250 ms whichever is
greater

651
Technical Manual
652
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 11
Multipurpose protection

Section 11 Multipurpose protection

11.1 General current and voltage protection CVGAPC

11.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
General current and voltage protection CVGAPC 2(I>/U<) -

11.1.2 Functionality
The protection module is recommended as a general backup protection with many
possible application areas due to its flexible measuring and setting facilities.

The built-in overcurrent protection feature has two settable current levels. Both of
them can be used either with definite time or inverse time characteristic. The
overcurrent protection steps can be made directional with selectable voltage
polarizing quantity. Additionally they can be voltage and/or current controlled/
restrained. 2nd harmonic restraining facility is available as well. At too low
polarizing voltage the overcurrent feature can be either blocked, made non
directional or ordered to use voltage memory in accordance with a parameter setting.

Additionally two overvoltage and two undervoltage steps, either with definite time
or inverse time characteristic, are available within each function.

The general function suits applications with underimpedance and voltage

controlled overcurrent solutions. The general function can also be utilized for
generator transformer protection applications where positive, negative or zero
sequence components of current and voltage quantities are typically required.

653
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Multipurpose protection

11.1.3 Function block

CVGAPC
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TROC1
BLOCK TROC2
BLKOC1 TRUC1
BLKOC1TR TRUC2
ENMLTOC1 TROV1
BLKOC2 TROV2
BLKOC2TR TRUV1
ENMLTOC2 TRUV2
BLKUC1 START
BLKUC1TR STOC1
BLKUC2 STOC2
BLKUC2TR STUC1
BLKOV1 STUC2
BLKOV1TR STOV1
BLKOV2 STOV2
BLKOV2TR STUV1
BLKUV1 STUV2
BLKUV1TR BLK2ND
BLKUV2 DIROC1
BLKUV2TR DIROC2
UDIRLOW
CURRENT
ICOSFI
VOLTAGE
UIANGLE

IEC05000372-2-en.vsd
IEC05000372 V2 EN

Figure 333: CVGAPC function block

11.1.4 Signals
Table 384: CVGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKOC1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over current function OC1
BLKOC1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over current function OC1
ENMLTOC1 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
OC1
BLKOC2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over current function OC2
BLKOC2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over current function OC2
ENMLTOC2 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
OC2
BLKUC1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under current function UC1
BLKUC1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under current function UC1
BLKUC2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under current function UC2
BLKUC2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under current function UC2
BLKOV1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over voltage function OV1
Table continues on next page

654
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 11
Multipurpose protection

Name Type Default Description

BLKOV1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over voltage function OV1
BLKOV2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over voltage function OV2
BLKOV2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over voltage function OV2
BLKUV1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under voltage function UV1
BLKUV1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under voltage function UV1
BLKUV2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under voltage function UV2
BLKUV2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under voltage function UV2

Table 385: CVGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TROC1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overcurrent function OC1
TROC2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overcurrent function OC2
TRUC1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undercurrent function UC1
TRUC2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undercurrent function UC2
TROV1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overvoltage function OV1
TROV2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overvoltage function OV2
TRUV1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undervoltage function UV1
TRUV2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undervoltage function UV2
START BOOLEAN General start signal
STOC1 BOOLEAN Start signal from overcurrent function OC1
STOC2 BOOLEAN Start signal from overcurrent function OC2
STUC1 BOOLEAN Start signal from undercurrent function UC1
STUC2 BOOLEAN Start signal from undercurrent function UC2
STOV1 BOOLEAN Start signal from overvoltage function OV1
STOV2 BOOLEAN Start signal from overvoltage function OV2
STUV1 BOOLEAN Start signal from undervoltage function UV1
STUV2 BOOLEAN Start signal from undervoltage function UV2
BLK2ND BOOLEAN Block from second harmonic detection
DIROC1 INTEGER Directional mode of OC1 (nondir, forward,reverse)
DIROC2 INTEGER Directional mode of OC2 (nondir, forward,reverse)
UDIRLOW BOOLEAN Low voltage for directional polarization
CURRENT REAL Measured current value
ICOSFI REAL Measured current multiplied with cos (Phi)
VOLTAGE REAL Measured voltage value
UIANGLE REAL Angle between voltage and current

655
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Multipurpose protection

11.1.5 Settings
Table 386: CVGAPC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
CurrentInput phase1 - - MaxPh Select current signal which will be
phase2 measured inside function
phase3
PosSeq
NegSeq
3*ZeroSeq
MaxPh
MinPh
UnbalancePh
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
MaxPh-Ph
MinPh-Ph
UnbalancePh-Ph
VoltageInput phase1 - - MaxPh Select voltage signal which will be
phase2 measured inside function
phase3
PosSeq
-NegSeq
-3*ZeroSeq
MaxPh
MinPh
UnbalancePh
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
MaxPh-Ph
MinPh-Ph
UnbalancePh-Ph
OperHarmRestr Off - - Off Operation of 2nd harmonic restrain Off /
On On
l_2nd/l_fund 10.0 - 50.0 % 1.0 20.0 Ratio of second to fundamental current
harmonic in %
EnRestrainCurr Off - - Off Enable current restrain function On / Off
On
RestrCurrInput PosSeq - - PosSeq Select current signal which will be used
NegSeq for curr restrain
3*ZeroSeq
Max
RestrCurrCoeff 0.00 - 5.00 - 0.01 0.00 Restraining current coefficient
RCADir -180 - 180 Deg 1 -75 Relay Characteristic Angle
ROADir 1 - 90 Deg 1 75 Relay Operate Angle
LowVolt_VM 0.0 - 5.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Below this level in % of UBase setting
ActLowVolt takes over
Operation_OC1 Off - - Off Operation OC1 Off / On
On
StartCurr_OC1 2.0 - 5000.0 %IB 1.0 120.0 Operate current level for OC1 in % of
IBase
Table continues on next page

656
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 11
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CurveType_OC1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for OC1
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
tDef_OC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Independent (definite) time delay of OC1
k_OC1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time
delay for OC1
IMin1 1 - 10000 %IB 1 100 Minimum operate current for step1 in %
of IBase
tMin_OC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT
curves for OC1
VCntrlMode_OC1 Voltage control - - Off Control mode for voltage controlled OC1
Off function
VDepMode_OC1 Step - - Step Voltage dependent mode OC1 (step,
Slope slope)
VDepFact_OC1 0.02 - 5.00 - 0.01 1.00 Multiplying factor for I pickup when OC1
is U dependent
ULowLimit_OC1 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Voltage low limit setting OC1 in % of
UBase
UHighLimit_OC1 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 100.0 Voltage high limit setting OC1 in % of
UBase
HarmRestr_OC1 Off - - Off Enable block of OC1 by 2nd harmonic
On restrain
DirMode_OC1 Non-directional - - Non-directional Directional mode of OC1 (nondir,
Forward forward, reverse)
Reverse
DirPrinc_OC1 I&U - - I&U Measuring on IandU or IcosPhiandU for
IcosPhi&U OC1
ActLowVolt1_VM Non-directional - - Non-directional Low voltage level action for Dir_OC1
Block (Nodir, Blk, Mem)
Memory
Operation_OC2 Off - - Off Operation OC2 Off / On
On
StartCurr_OC2 2.0 - 5000.0 %IB 1.0 120.0 Operate current level for OC2 in % of
IBase
Table continues on next page

657
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CurveType_OC2 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for OC2
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
tDef_OC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Independent (definite) time delay of OC2
k_OC2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time
delay for OC2
IMin2 1 - 10000 %IB 1 50 Minimum operate current for step2 in %
of IBase
tMin_OC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT
curves for OC2
VCntrlMode_OC2 Voltage control - - Off Control mode for voltage controlled OC2
Off function
VDepMode_OC2 Step - - Step Voltage dependent mode OC2 (step,
Slope slope)
VDepFact_OC2 0.02 - 5.00 - 0.01 1.00 Multiplying factor for I pickup when OC2
is U dependent
ULowLimit_OC2 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Voltage low limit setting OC2 in % of
UBase
UHighLimit_OC2 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 100.0 Voltage high limit setting OC2 in % of
UBase
HarmRestr_OC2 Off - - Off Enable block of OC2 by 2nd harmonic
On restrain
DirMode_OC2 Non-directional - - Non-directional Directional mode of OC2 (nondir,
Forward forward, reverse)
Reverse
DirPrinc_OC2 I&U - - I&U Measuring on IandU or IcosPhiandU for
IcosPhi&U OC2
ActLowVolt2_VM Non-directional - - Non-directional Low voltage level action for Dir_OC2
Block (Nodir, Blk, Mem)
Memory
Operation_UC1 Off - - Off Operation UC1 Off / On
On
EnBlkLowI_UC1 Off - - Off Enable internal low current level blocking
On for UC1
BlkLowCurr_UC1 0 - 150 %IB 1 20 Internal low current blocking level for
UC1 in % of IBase
StartCurr_UC1 2.0 - 150.0 %IB 1.0 70.0 Operate undercurrent level for UC1 in %
of IBase
Table continues on next page

658
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 11
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tDef_UC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Independent (definite) time delay of UC1
tResetDef_UC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve UC1
HarmRestr_UC1 Off - - Off Enable block of UC1 by 2nd harmonic
On restrain
Operation_UC2 Off - - Off Operation UC2 Off / On
On
EnBlkLowI_UC2 Off - - Off Enable internal low current level blocking
On for UC2
BlkLowCurr_UC2 0 - 150 %IB 1 20 Internal low current blocking level for
UC2 in % of IBase
StartCurr_UC2 2.0 - 150.0 %IB 1.0 70.0 Operate undercurrent level for UC2 in %
of IBase
tDef_UC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Independent (definite) time delay of UC2
HarmRestr_UC2 Off - - Off Enable block of UC2 by 2nd harmonic
On restrain
Operation_OV1 Off - - Off Operation OV1 Off / On
On
StartVolt_OV1 2.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 Operate voltage level for OV1 in % of
UBase
CurveType_OV1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for OV1
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
tDef_OV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Operate time delay in sec for definite
time use of OV1
tMin_OV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
for OV1
k_OV1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time
delay for OV1
Operation_OV2 Off - - Off Operation OV2 Off / On
On
StartVolt_OV2 2.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 Operate voltage level for OV2 in % of
UBase
CurveType_OV2 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for OV2
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
tDef_OV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Operate time delay in sec for definite
time use of OV2
tMin_OV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
for OV2
k_OV2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time
delay for OV2
Operation_UV1 Off - - Off Operation UV1 Off / On
On
StartVolt_UV1 2.0 - 150.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Operate undervoltage level for UV1 in %
of UBase
Table continues on next page

659
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CurveType_UV1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for UV1
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
tDef_UV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Operate time delay in sec for definite
time use of UV1
tMin_UV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
for UV1
k_UV1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time
delay for UV1
EnBlkLowV_UV1 Off - - On Enable internal low voltage level
On blocking for UV1
BlkLowVolt_UV1 0.0 - 5.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Internal low voltage blocking level for
UV1 in % of UBase
Operation_UV2 Off - - Off Operation UV2 Off / On
On
StartVolt_UV2 2.0 - 150.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Operate undervoltage level for UV2 in %
of UBase
CurveType_UV2 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for UV2
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
tDef_UV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Operate time delay in sec for definite
time use of UV2
tMin_UV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
for UV2
k_UV2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time
delay for UV2
EnBlkLowV_UV2 Off - - On Enable internal low voltage level
On blocking for UV2
BlkLowVolt_UV2 0.0 - 5.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Internal low voltage blocking level for
UV2 in % of UBase

Table 387: CVGAPC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CurrMult_OC1 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting
value for OC1
ResCrvType_OC1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OC1
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tResetDef_OC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve OC1
P_OC1 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for OC1
A_OC1 0.000 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for OC1
B_OC1 0.000 - 99.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for OC1
Table continues on next page

660
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 11
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

C_OC1 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for OC1
PR_OC1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer
programmable curve for OC1
TR_OC1 0.005 - 600.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer
programmable curve for OC1
CR_OC1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer
programmable curve for OC1
CurrMult_OC2 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting
value for OC2
ResCrvType_OC2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OC2
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tResetDef_OC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve OC2
P_OC2 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for OC2
A_OC2 0.000 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for OC2
B_OC2 0.000 - 99.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for OC2
C_OC2 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for OC2
PR_OC2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer
programmable curve for OC2
TR_OC2 0.005 - 600.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer
programmable curve for OC2
CR_OC2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer
programmable curve for OC2
tResetDef_UC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve UC2
ResCrvType_OV1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OV1
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
tResetDef_OV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for definite time
use of OV1
tResetIDMT_OV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves
for OV1
A_OV1 0.005 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for OV1
B_OV1 0.500 - 99.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for OV1
C_OV1 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for OV1
D_OV1 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for OV1
P_OV1 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for OV1
Table continues on next page

661
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ResCrvType_OV2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OV2
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
tResetDef_OV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for definite time
use of OV2
tResetIDMT_OV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves
for OV2
A_OV2 0.005 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for OV2
B_OV2 0.500 - 99.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for OV2
C_OV2 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for OV2
D_OV2 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for OV2
P_OV2 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for OV2
ResCrvType_UV1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for UV1
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
tResetDef_UV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for definite time
use of UV1
tResetIDMT_UV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves
for UV1
A_UV1 0.005 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for UV1
B_UV1 0.500 - 99.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for UV1
C_UV1 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for UV1
D_UV1 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for UV1
P_UV1 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for UV1
ResCrvType_UV2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for UV2
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
tResetDef_UV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for definite time
use of UV2
tResetIDMT_UV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves
for UV2
A_UV2 0.005 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for UV2
B_UV2 0.500 - 99.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for UV2
Table continues on next page

662
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 11
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

C_UV2 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for UV2
D_UV2 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for UV2
P_UV2 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for UV2

Table 388: CVGAPC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

11.1.6 Monitored data

Table 389: CVGAPC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
DIROC1 INTEGER 1=Forward - Directional mode of OC1
0=Non- (nondir, forward,reverse)
directional
2=Reverse
DIROC2 INTEGER 1=Forward - Directional mode of OC2
0=Non- (nondir, forward,reverse)
directional
2=Reverse
CURRENT REAL - A Measured current value
ICOSFI REAL - A Measured current
multiplied with cos (Phi)
VOLTAGE REAL - kV Measured voltage value
UIANGLE REAL - deg Angle between voltage
and current

11.1.7 Operation principle

11.1.7.1 Measured quantities within CVGAPC

General current and voltage protection (CVGAPC) function is always connected to

three-phase current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool, but it
will always measure only one current and one voltage quantity selected by the end
user in the setting tool.

The user can select to measure one of the current quantities shown in table 390.

663
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Multipurpose protection

Table 390: Current selection for CVGAPC function

Set value for the
parameter Comment
CurrentInput
1 Phase1 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L1 current phasor
2 Phase2 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L2 current phasor
3 Phase3 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L3 current phasor
4 PosSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence
current phasor
5 NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative
sequence current phasor
6 3ZeroSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence
current phasor multiplied by factor 3
7 MaxPh CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with
maximum magnitude
8 MinPh CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with
minimum magnitude
9 UnbalancePh CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which
is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between
the current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and current
phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set
to 0 all the time
10 Phase1-Phase2 CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated
as the vector difference between the phase L1 current phasor and
phase L2 current phasor (IL1-IL2)

11 Phase2-Phase3 CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated
as the vector difference between the phase L2 current phasor and
phase L3 current phasor (IL2-IL3)

12 Phase3-Phase1 CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated
as the vector difference between the phase L3 current phasor and
phase L1 current phasor ( IL3-IL1)

13 MaxPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the
maximum magnitude
14 MinPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the
minimum magnitude
15 UnbalancePh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which
is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between
the ph-ph current phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph current
phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the
time

The user can select to measure one of the voltage quantities shown in table 391:

Table 391: Voltage selection for CVGAPC function

Set value for the
parameter Comment
VoltageInput
1 Phase1 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L1 voltage phasor
2 Phase2 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L2 voltage phasor
3 Phase3 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L3 voltage phasor
Table continues on next page

664
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 11
Multipurpose protection

Set value for the

parameter Comment
VoltageInput
4 PosSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence
voltage phasor
5 -NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative
sequence voltage phasor. This voltage phasor will be intentionally
rotated for 180 in order to enable easier settings for the directional
feature when used.
6 -3ZeroSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence
voltage phasor multiplied by factor 3. This voltage phasor will be
intentionally rotated for 180 in order to enable easier settings for the
directional feature when used.
7 MaxPh CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with
maximum magnitude
8 MinPh CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with
minimum magnitude
9 UnbalancePh CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage,
which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference
between the voltage phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude
and voltage phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase
angle will be set to 0 all the time
10 Phase1-Phase2 CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally
calculated as the vector difference between the phase L1 voltage
phasor and phase L2 voltage phasor (UL1-UL2)

11 Phase2-Phase3 CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally

calculated as the vector difference between the phase L2 voltage
phasor and phase L3 voltage phasor (UL2-UL3)

12 Phase3-Phase1 CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally

calculated as the vector difference between the phase L3 voltage
phasor and phase L1 voltage phasor ( UL3-UL1)

13 MaxPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the
maximum magnitude
14 MinPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the
minimum magnitude
15 UnbalancePh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage,
which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference
between the ph-ph voltage phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-
ph voltage phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to
0 all the time

It is important to notice that the voltage selection from table 391 is always
applicable regardless the actual external VT connections. The three-phase VT
inputs can be connected to IED as either three phase-to-ground voltages UL1, UL2
& UL3 or three phase-to-phase voltages UL1L2, UL2L3 & UL3L1). This information
about actual VT connection is entered as a setting parameter for the pre-processing
block, which will then take automatic care about it.

The user can select one of the current quantities shown in table 392 for built-in
current restraint feature:

665
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Multipurpose protection

Table 392: Restraint current selection for CVGAPC function

Set value for the
parameter RestrCurr Comment
1 PosSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence
current phasor
2 NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative
sequence current phasor
3 3ZeroSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence
current phasor multiplied by factor 3
4 MaxPh CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with
maximum magnitude

11.1.7.2 Base quantities for CVGAPC function

The parameter settings for the base quantities, which represent the base (100%) for
pickup levels of all measuring stages, shall be entered as setting parameters for
every CVGAPC function.

Base current shall be entered as:

1. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes, when the
measured Current Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 390.
2. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes multiplied by
3 (1.732*Iphase), when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 10 to
15, as shown in table 390.

Base voltage shall be entered as:

1. rated phase-to-earth voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the
measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 391.
2. rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the
measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in table 391.

11.1.7.3 Built-in overcurrent protection steps

Two overcurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here.

Overcurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current quantity
(see table 390) with the set pickup level. Non-directional overcurrent step will
pickup if the magnitude of the measured current quantity is bigger than this set
level. However depending on other enabled built-in features this overcurrent
pickup might not cause the overcurrent step start signal. Start signal will only come
if all of the enabled built-in features in the overcurrent step are fulfilled at the same
time.

666
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 11
Multipurpose protection

Second harmonic feature

The overcurrent protection step can be restrained by a second harmonic component
in the measured current quantity (see table 390). However it shall be noted that this
feature is not applicable when one of the following measured currents is selected:

PosSeq (positive sequence current)

NegSeq (negative sequence current)
UnbalancePh (unbalance phase current)
UnbalancePh-Ph (unbalance ph-ph current)

This feature will simple prevent overcurrent step start if the second-to-first
harmonic ratio in the measured current exceeds the set level.

Directional feature
The overcurrent protection step operation can be made dependent on the relevant
phase angle between measured current phasor (see table 390) and measured voltage
phasor (see table 391). In protection terminology it means that the General currrent
and voltage protection (CVGAPC) function can be made directional by enabling
this built-in feature. In that case overcurrent protection step will only operate if the
current flow is in accordance with the set direction (Forward, which means
towards the protected object, or Reverse, which means from the protected object).
For this feature it is of the outmost importance to understand that the measured
voltage phasor (see table 391) and measured current phasor (see table 390) will be
used for directional decision. Therefore it is the sole responsibility of the end user
to select the appropriate current and voltage signals in order to get a proper
directional decision. CVGAPC function will NOT do this automatically. It will
simply use the current and voltage phasors selected by the end user to check for the
directional criteria.

Table 393 gives an overview of the typical choices (but not the only possible ones)
for these two quantities from traditional directional relays.

Table 393: Typical current and voltage choices for directional feature
Set value for the Set value for the
parameter parameter Comment
CurrentInput VoltageInput
PosSeq PosSeq Directional positive sequence overcurrent function is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45 to
-90 depending on the power system voltage level (X/
R ratio)
NegSeq -NegSeq Directional negative sequence overcurrent function is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45 to
-90 depending on the power system voltage level (X/
R ratio)
3ZeroSeq -3ZeroSeq Directional zero sequence overcurrent function is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from 0 to
-90 depending on the power system earthing (that
is, solidly earthed, earthed via resistor)
Table continues on next page

667
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Multipurpose protection

Set value for the Set value for the

parameter parameter Comment
CurrentInput VoltageInput
Phase1 Phase2-Phase3 Directional overcurrent function for the first phase is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45
Phase2 Phase3-Phase1 Directional overcurrent function for the second phase
is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45
Phase3 Phase1-Phase2 Directional overcurrent function for the third phase is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45

Unbalance current or voltage measurement shall not be used when the directional
feature is enabled.

Two types of directional measurement principles are available, I & U and

IcosPhi&U. The first principle, referred to as "I & U" in the parameter setting tool,
checks that:

the magnitude of the measured current is bigger than the set pick-up level
the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by
the relay operate angle, ROADir parameter setting; see figure 334).

U=-3U0
RCADir

Ipickup ROADir I=3Io

Operate region
mta line

en05000252.vsd
IEC05000252 V1 EN

Figure 334: I & U directional operating principle for CVGAPC function

where:
RCADir is -75
ROADir is 50

The second principle, referred to as "IcosPhi&U" in the parameter setting tool,

checks that:

668
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 11
Multipurpose protection

that the product Icos() is bigger than the set pick-up level, where is angle
between the current phasor and the mta line
that the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined
by the Icos() straight line and the relay operate angle, ROADir parameter
setting; see figure 334).

U=-3U0
RCADir

Ipickup ROADir F I=3Io

Operate region
mta line

en05000253.vsd
IEC05000253 V1 EN

Figure 335: CVGAPC, IcosPhi&U directional operating principle

where:
RCADir is -75
ROADir is 50

Note that it is possible to decide by a parameter setting how the directional feature
shall behave when the magnitude of the measured voltage phasor falls below the pre-
set value. User can select one of the following three options:

Non-directional (operation allowed for low magnitude of the reference voltage)

Block (operation prevented for low magnitude of the reference voltage)
Memory (memory voltage shall be used to determine direction of the current)

It shall also be noted that the memory duration is limited in the algorithm to 100
ms. After that time the current direction will be locked to the one determined
during memory time and it will re-set only if the current fails below set pickup
level or voltage goes above set voltage memory limit.

Voltage restraint/control feature

The overcurrent protection step operation can be made dependent of a measured
voltage quantity (see table 391). Practically then the pickup level of the overcurrent
step is not constant but instead decreases with the decrease in the magnitude of the
measured voltage quantity. Two different types of dependencies are available:

Voltage restraint overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode_OC1=Slope)

669
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Multipurpose protection

OC1 Stage Pickup Level

StartCurr_OC1

VDepFact_OC1 * StartCurr_OC1

ULowLimit_OC1 UHighLimit_OC1
Selected Voltage
Magnitude
en05000324.vsd
IEC05000324 V1 EN

Figure 336: Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of
measured voltage magnitude in Slope mode of operation

Voltage controlled overcurrent (when setting parameter

VDepMode_OC1=Step)

OC1 Stage Pickup Level

StartCurr_OC1

VDepFact_OC1 * StartCurr_OC1

UHighLimit_OC1 Selected Voltage Magnitude

en05000323.vsd
IEC05000323 V1 EN

Figure 337: Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of
measured voltage magnitude in Step mode of operation

This feature will simply change the set overcurrent pickup level in accordance with
magnitude variations of the measured voltage. It shall be noted that this feature will
as well affect the pickup current value for calculation of operate times for IDMT

670
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 11
Multipurpose protection

curves (overcurrent with IDMT curve will operate faster during low voltage
conditions).

Current restraint feature

The overcurrent protection step operation can be made dependent of a restraining
current quantity (see table 392). Practically then the pickup level of the overcurrent
step is not constant but instead increases with the increase in the magnitude of the
restraining current.

IMeasured
ea ain
ar tr
te es
ra ff *I r
pe e
O Co
es tr
I>R
IsetHigh

IsetLow

atan(RestrCoeff)

Restraint
en05000255.vsd
IEC05000255 V1 EN

Figure 338: Current pickup variation with restraint current magnitude

This feature will simply prevent overcurrent step to start if the magnitude of the
measured current quantity is smaller than the set percentage of the restrain current
magnitude. However this feature will not affect the pickup current value for
calculation of operate times for IDMT curves. This means that the IDMT curve
operate time will not be influenced by the restrain current magnitude.

When set, the start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time
delay in accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for
longer time than the set time delay, the overcurrent step will set its trip signal to
one. Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in
accordance with the end user setting.

11.1.7.4 Built-in undercurrent protection steps

Two undercurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here. Undercurrent step simply compares the
magnitude of the measured current quantity (see table 390) with the set pickup
level. The undercurrent step will pickup and set its start signal to one if the
magnitude of the measured current quantity is smaller than this set level. The start
signal will start definite time delay with set time delay. If the start signal has value
one for longer time than the set time delay the undercurrent step will set its trip

671
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Multipurpose protection

signal to one. Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in
accordance with the setting.

11.1.7.5 Built-in overvoltage protection steps

Two overvoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here.

Overvoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity
(see table 391) with the set pickup level. The overvoltage step will pickup if the
magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is bigger than this set level.

The start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay in
accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer
time than the set time delay, the overvoltage step will set its trip signal to one.
Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance
with the end user setting.

11.1.7.6 Built-in undervoltage protection steps

Two undervoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here.

Undervoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage

quantity (see table 391) with the set pickup level. The undervoltage step will
pickup if the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is smaller than this set level.

The start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay in
accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer
time than the set time delay, the undervoltage step will set its trip signal to one.
Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance
with the end user setting.

11.1.7.7 Logic diagram

The simplified internal logics, for CVGAPC function are shown in the following
figures.

672
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 11
Multipurpose protection

IED
ADM CVGAPC function

Current and voltage selection

settings

Phasor calculation of
scaling with CT ratio

individual currents
A/D conversion
Selection of which current Selected current
and voltage shall be given to

Phasors &
samples
the built-in protection Selected voltage
elements

Restraint current selection

Selected restraint current

A/D conversion scaling

Selection of restraint current

Phasor calculation of
individual voltages
with CT ratio

Phasors &
samples

IEC05000169_2_en.vsd

IEC05000169 V2 EN

Figure 339: Treatment of measured currents and voltages within IED for CVGAPC function

Figure 339 shows how internal treatment of measured currents is done for
multipurpose protection function

The following currents and voltages are inputs to the multipurpose protection
function. They must all be expressed in true power system (primary) Amperes and
kilovolts.

1. Instantaneous values (samples) of currents & voltages from one three-phase

current and one three-phase voltage input.
2. Fundamental frequency phasors from one three-phase current and one three-
phase voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules.
3. Sequence currents & voltages from one three-phase current and one three-
phase voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules.

The multipurpose protection function:

1. Selects one current from the three-phase input system (see table 390) for
internally measured current.
2. Selects one voltage from the three-phase input system (see table 391) for
internally measured voltage.
3. Selects one current from the three-phase input system (see table 392) for
internally measured restraint current.

673
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Multipurpose protection

CURRENT

UC1
nd TRUC1
2 Harmonic
Selected current restraint
STUC2
UC2
TRUC2
2nd Harmonic
restraint

STOC1
OC1 TROC1

2nd Harmonic BLK2ND

restraint 1
Selected restraint current
Current restraint
DIROC1
Directionality
Voltage control /
restraint

STOC2
OC2 TROC2

2nd Harmonic
restraint
Current restraint 1
UDIRLOW

Directionality DIROC2

Voltage control /
restraint

STOV1
OV1 TROV1

STOV2
OV2 TROV2

STUV1
Selected voltage
UV1 TRUV1

STUV2
UV2 TRUV2

VOLTAGE

en05000170.vsd
IEC05000170 V1 EN

Figure 340: CVGAPC function main logic diagram for built-in protection elements

674
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 11
Multipurpose protection

Logic in figure 340 can be summarized as follows:

1. The selected currents and voltage are given to built-in protection elements.
Each protection element and step makes independent decision about status of
its START and TRIP output signals.
2. More detailed internal logic for every protection element is given in the
following four figures
3. Common START and TRIP signals from all built-in protection elements &
steps (internal OR logic) are available from multipurpose function as well.

Enable
second
harmonic Second
harmonic check
1 DEF time BLKTROC
selected DEF 1 TROC1
AND
OR
Selected current a
a>b
b
OC1=On STOC1
AND
StartCurr_OC1 BLKOC1
X
Inverse

Voltage Directionality DIR_OK Inverse

control or time
check selected
restraint
feature

Selected voltage
Current
Restraint
Feature
Selected restrain current Imeasured > k Irestraint

en05000831.vsd

IEC05000831 V1 EN

Figure 341: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overcurrent step that is, OC1 (step OC2 has the
same internal logic)

675
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Multipurpose protection

Bin input: BLKUC1TR

Selected current a TRUC1

b>a
DEF AND
b
StartCurr_UC1
AND

Operation_UC1=On
STUC1

Bin input: BLKUC1

en05000750.vsd

IEC05000750 V1 EN

Figure 342: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undercurrent step that is, UC1 (step UC2 has
the same internal logic)

DEF time BLKTROV1

selected DEF TROV1
AND
OR
Selected voltage a
a>b
b STOV1
StartVolt_OV1
AND

Inverse
Operation_OV1=On
Inverse time
BLKOV1 selected

en05000751.vsd

IEC05000751 V1 EN

Figure 343: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overvoltage step OV1 (step OV2 has the same
internal logic)

676
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 11
Multipurpose protection

DEF time BLKTRUV

selected DEF 1 TRUV1
AND
OR
Selected voltage a
b>a
b STUV1
AND
StartVolt_UV1

Inverse
Operation_UV1=On
Inverse time
BLKUV1 selected

en05000752.vsd

IEC05000752 V1 EN

Figure 344: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undervoltage step UV1 (step UV2 has the same
internal logic)

11.1.8 Technical data

Table 394: CVGAPC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Measuring current phase1, phase2, phase3, PosSeq, - -
input NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh,
UnbalancePh, phase1-phase2, phase2-
phase3, phase3-phase1, MaxPh-Ph,
MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-Ph
Base current (1 - 99999) A -
Measuring voltage phase1, phase2, phase3, PosSeq, - -
input NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh,
UnbalancePh, phase1-phase2, phase2-
phase3, phase3-phase1, MaxPh-Ph,
MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-Ph
Base voltage (0.05 - 2000.00) kV -
Start overcurrent, (2 - 5000)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir for IIr
step 1 and 2 1.0% of I for I>Ir

Start undercurrent, (2 - 150)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir for IIr

step 1 and 2 1.0% of I for I>Ir

Independent time (0.00 - 6000.00) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is

delay, overcurrent at greater
0 to 2 x Iset

Independent time (0.00 - 6000.00) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is

delay, undercurrent greater
at 2 to 0 x Iset

Overcurrent:
Start time at 0 to 2 x Min = 15 ms -
Iset Max = 30 ms

Table continues on next page

677
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Multipurpose protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Reset time at 2 to 0 x Min = 15 ms -
Iset Max = 30 ms

Undercurrent:
Start time at 2 to 0 x Min = 15 ms -
Iset Max = 30 ms

Reset time at 0 to 2 x Min = 15 ms -

Iset Max = 30 ms

See table 1038 and Parameter ranges for customer defined See table 1038 and table 1039
table 1039 characteristic no 17:
k: 0.05 - 999.00
A: 0.0000 - 999.0000
B: 0.0000 - 99.0000
C: 0.0000 - 1.0000
P: 0.0001 - 10.0000
PR: 0.005 - 3.000
TR: 0.005 - 600.000
CR: 0.1 - 10.0
Voltage level where (0.0 - 5.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur
voltage memory
takes over
Start overvoltage, (2.0 - 200.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur for U Ur
step 1 and 2 0.5% of U for U > Ur

Start undervoltage, (2.0 - 150.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur for U Ur

step 1 and 2 0.5% of U for U > Ur

Independent time (0.00 - 6000.00) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is

delay, overvoltage at greater
0.8 to 1.2 x Uset

Independent time (0.00 - 6000.00) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is

delay, undervoltage greater
at 1.2 to 0.8 x Uset

Overvoltage:
Start time at 0.8 to Min = 15 ms -
1.2 x Uset Max = 30 ms

Reset time at 1.2 to Min = 15 ms -

0.8 x Uset Max = 30 ms

Undervoltage:
Start time at 1.2 to Min = 15 ms -
0.8 x Uset Max = 30 ms

Reset time at 1.2 to Min = 15 ms -

0.8 x Uset Max = 30 ms

High and low voltage (1.0 - 200.0)% of UBase 1.0% of Ur for UUr
limit, voltage 1.0% of U for U>Ur
dependent operation
Directional function Settable: NonDir, forward and reverse -
Relay characteristic (-180 to +180) degrees 2.0 degrees
angle
Relay operate angle (1 to 90) degrees 2.0 degrees
Reset ratio, > 95% -
overcurrent
Table continues on next page

678
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 11
Multipurpose protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Reset ratio, < 105% -
undercurrent
Reset ratio, > 95% -
overvoltage
Reset ratio, < 105% -
undervoltage
Overcurrent:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Undercurrent:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Overvoltage:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0.8 to 1.2 x Uset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Undervoltage:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 1.2 to 0.8 x Uset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

679
Technical Manual
680
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 12
System protection and control

Section 12 System protection and control

12.1 Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC

12.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC - -

12.1.2 Functionality
The multi-purpose filter function block, SMAIHPAC, is arranged as a three-phase
filter. It has very much the same user interface (e.g. inputs and outputs) as the
standard pre-processing function block SMAI. However the main difference is that
it can be used to extract any frequency component from the input signal. Thus it
can, for example, be used to build sub-synchronous resonance protection for
synchronous generator.

12.1.3 Function block

SMAIHPAC
BLOCK AI3P
G3P* AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4

IEC13000180-1-en.vsd
IEC13000180 V1 EN

12.1.4 Signals

Table 395: SMAIHPAC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
G3P GROUP - Analog input group from SMAI
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

681
Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
System protection and control

Table 396: SMAIHPAC Output signals

Name Type Description
AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Analog input 3-phase group
AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Analog input 1
AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Analog input 2
AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Analog input 3
AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Analog input 4

12.1.5 Settings

Table 397: SMAIHPAC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ConnectionType Ph - Ph - - Ph - N Analogue input connection type
Ph - N
SetFrequency 2.0 - 500.0 Hz 0.1 50.0 Desired frequency to be extracted by the
filter
FreqBandWidth 0.0 - 60.0 Hz 0.1 0.0 Extra added frequency band around the
set frequency
FilterLength 0.1 s - - 1.0 s Approximate length of the filtering
0.2 s window in seconds
0.5 s
1.0 s
2.0 s
4.0 s
OverLap 0 - 95 % 5 20 Filtering window overlap between two
calculations in percent

12.1.6 Operation principle

For all four analogue input signals into this filter (i.e. three phases and the residual
quantity) the input samples from the TRM module which are coming at rate of 20
samples per fundamental system cycle are first stored. When enough samples are
available in the internal memory, the phasor values at set frequency defined by the
setting parameter SetFrequency are calculated. The following values are internally
available for each of the calculated phasors:
Magnitude
Phase angle
Exact frequency of the extracted signal

Note that the special filtering algorithm is used to extract these phasors. This
algorithm is different from the standard one-cycle Digital Fourier Filter typically
used by the numerical IEDs. This filter provides extremely good accuracy of
measurement and excellent noise rejection, but at the same time it has much slower
response time. It is capable to extract phasor (i.e. magnitude, phase angle and

682
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 12
System protection and control

actual frequency) of any signal (e.g. 37,2Hz) present in the waveforms of the
connected CTs and/or VTs. The magnitude and the phase angle of this phasor are
calculated with very high precision. For example the magnitude and phase angle of
the phasor can be estimated even if it has magnitude of one per mille (i.e. 1 ) in
comparison to the dominating signal (e.g. the fundamental frequency component).
Several instances of this function block are provided. These instances are fully
synchronized between each-other in respect of phase angle calculation. Thus if two
multi-purpose filters are used for some application, one for current and the second
one for the voltage signals, the power values (i.e. P & Q) at the set frequency can
be calculated from them by the over-/under-power function or CVMMXN
measurement function block.

In addition to these phasors the following quantities are internally calculated as well:
Phasors for the individual phases as well as phase-to-phase phasors
True RMS value of the input signal over all samples available in the memory
Positive sequence phasor
Negative sequence phasor
Zero sequence phasor
etc.

In order to properly calculate phase-to-phase phasors from the individual phase

phasors or vice versa, the setting parameters ConnectionType is provided. It
defines what quantities (i.e. individual phases or phase-to-phase quantities) are
physically connected to the IED analogue inputs by wiring. Then the IED knows
which one of them are the measured quantities and the other one is then internally
calculated. This setting is only important for the VT inputs, because the CTs are
typically star connected all the time.

Thus when this filter is used in conjunction with multi-purpose protection function
or overcurrent function or over-voltage function or over-power function many
different protection applications can be arranged. For example the following
protection, monitoring or measurement features can be realized:
Sub-synchronous resonance protection for turbo generators
Sub-synchronous protection for wind turbines/wind farms
Detection of sub-synchronous oscillation between HVDC links and
synchronous generators
Super-synchronous protection
Detection of presence of the geo-magnetic induced currents
Overcurrent or overvoltage protection at specific frequency harmonic, sub-
harmonic, inter-harmonic etc.
Presence of special railway frequencies (e.g. 16.7Hz or 25Hz) in the three-
phase power system
Sensitive reverse power protection
Stator or rotor earth fault protection for special injection frequencies (e.g. 25Hz)
etc.

683
Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
System protection and control

The filter output can also be connected to the measurement function blocks such as
CVMMXN (Measurements), CMMXU (Phase current measurement), VMMXU
(Phase-phase voltage measurement), etc.

The filter has as well additional capability to report the exact frequency of the
extracted signal. Thus the user can check the actual frequency of some
phenomenon in the power system (e.g. frequency of the sub-synchronous currents)
and compare it with expected value obtained previously by either calculation or
simulation. For the whole three-phase filter group the frequency of the signal
connected to the first input (i.e. phase L1) is reported. This value can be then used
either by over-/under-frequency protections or reported to the built-in HMI or any
other external client via the measurement blocks such is the CVMMXN.

How many samples in the memory are used for the phasor calculation depends on
the setting parameter FilterLength. Table 398 gives overview of the used number
of samples for phasor calculation by the filter. Note that the used number of
samples is always a power of number two.

Table 398: Length of the filtering window

Value for parameter Used No of samples for Corresponding length of Corresponding length of
FilterLength calculation (fixed, the input waveform in the input waveform in
independent from rated miliseconds for 50Hz miliseconds for 60Hz
frequency) power system power system
0.1 s 128 = 27 128 ms 107 ms

0.2 s 256 = 28 256 ms 213 ms

0.5 s 512 = 29 512 ms 427 ms

1.0 s 1024 = 210 1024 ms 853 ms

2.0 s 2048 = 211 2048 ms 1707 ms

4.0 s 4096 = 212 4096 ms 3413 ms

Note that the selected value for the parameter FilterLength automatically defines
certain filter properties as described below:

First in order to secure proper filter operation the selected length of the filter shall
always be longer than three complete periods of the signal which shall be extracted.
Actually the best results are obtained if at least five complete periods are available
within the filtering window. Thus, this filter feature will limit which filter lengths
can be used to extract low frequency signals. For example if 16,7 Hz signal shall be
extracted the minimum filter length in milliseconds shall be:

1000
3 = 180ms
16.7
EQUATION000028 V1 EN (Equation 193)

Thus based on the data from Table 398 the minimum acceptable value for this
parameter would be FilterLength = 0.2 s but more accurate results will be
obtained by using FilterLength = 0.5 s

684
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 12
System protection and control

Second feature which is determined by the selected value for parameter

FilterLength is the capability of the filter to separate the desired signal from the
other disturbing signals which may have similar frequency value. Note that the
filter output will be the phasor with the highest magnitude within certain pass
frequency band around the SetFrequency. Table 399 defines the natural size of
this pass frequency band for the filter, depending on the selected value for
parameter FilterLength.

Table 399: Pass frequency band due to FilterLength

Value for parameter FilterLength For 50Hz power system For 60Hz power system
0.1 s 22.5 Hz 27.0 Hz
0.2 s 11.5 Hz 14.0 Hz
0.5 s 6.0 Hz 7.2 Hz
1.0 s 3.0 Hz 3.6 Hz
2.0 s 1.5 Hz 1.8 Hz
4.0 s 0.8 Hz 1.0 Hz

Thus the longer length of the filter the better capability it has to reject the
disturbing signals close to the required frequency component and any other noise
present in the input signal waveform. For example if 46 Hz signal wants to be
extracted in 50Hz power system, then from Table 399 it can be concluded that
FilterLength=1,0 s shall be selected as a minimum value. However if frequency
deviation of the fundamental frequency signal in the power system are taken into
account it may be advisable to select FilterLength=2,0 s for such application.

Note that in case when no clear magnitude peak exist in the set pass frequency
band the filter will return zero values for the phasor magnitude and angle while the
signal frequency will have value minus one. Finally the set value for parameter
FilterLength also defines the response time of the filter after a step change of the
measured signal. The filter will correctly estimate the new signal magnitude once
75% of the filter length has been filed with the new signal value (i.e. after the change).

If for any reason this natural frequency band shall be extended (e.g. to get accurate
but wider filter) it is possible to increase the pass band by entering the value
different from zero for parameter FreqBandWidth. In such case the total filter pass
band can be defined as:

(value given in Table 399 + one-half of the set FreqBandWidth value)

Example if in 60Hz system the selected values are FilterLength =1.0 s and
FreqBandWidth = 5.0 the total filter pass band will be (3.6+5.0/2)= 6.1 Hz.

It shall be noted that the phasor calculation is relatively computation demanding

(required certain amount of the CPU processing time). In order to control the CPU
usage for this filter, the setting parameter OverLap is used. This setting parameter
defines how often the new phasor value is calculated during time period defined by
the set value for the parameter FilterLength (see Table 398). The following list

685
Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
System protection and control

gives some examples how this parameter influence the calculation rate for the
extracted phasor:
when OverLap=0% the new phasor value is calculated only once per
FilterLength
when OverLap=50% the new phasor value is calculated two times per
FilterLength
when OverLap=75% the new phasor value is calculated four times per
FilterLength
when OverLap=90% the new phasor value is calculated ten times per
FilterLength

12.1.7 Filter calculation example

In the following Figure an example from an installation of this filter on a large, 50
Hz turbo generator with a rating in excess of 1000 MVA is presented. In this
installation filter is used to measure the stator sub-synchronous resonance currents.
For this particular installation the following settings were used for the filter:
SetFrequency= 31.0 Hz
FilterLength= 1.0 s
OverLap = 75%
FreqBandWidth= 0.0 Hz

IEC13000178-2-en.vsd
IEC13000178 V2 EN

Figure 345: Example of filter calculation

The data shown in the Figure comes from the comtrade file captured by the IED.
The following traces are presented in this Figure.

a) Waveforms of the stator three-phase currents given in primary kA.

686
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 12
System protection and control

b) RMS value of the sub-synchronous resonance current extracted by the filter in

primary amperes.

c) Frequency of the extracted sub-synchronous resonance current provided by the

filter in Hz.

Note the very narrow scale on the y-axle for b) and c). Such small scale as well
indicates with which precision and consistency the filter calculates the phasor
magnitude and frequency of the extracted stator sub-synchronous current component.

The following can be observed in the Figure:

The stator total RMS current value is around 33 kA primary.
The measured magnitude of the sub-synchronous current is around 173 A
primary (that is, 0.5% of the fundamental 50 Hz component).
The frequency of this sub-synchronous current component is 31.24 Hz.

With above given settings the sub-synchronous current magnitude and frequency
are calculated approximately four times per second (that is, correct value is four
times per 1024 ms).

687
Technical Manual
688
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 13
Secondary system supervision

Section 13 Secondary system supervision

13.1 Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC

13.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC - 87

13.1.2 Functionality
Open or short circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted operation of
many protection functions such as differential, earth-fault current and negative-
sequence current functions.

It must be remembered that a blocking of protection functions at an occurrence of

open CT circuit will mean that the situation will remain and extremely high
voltages will stress the secondary circuit.

Current circuit supervision (CCSSPVC) compares the residual current from a three
phase set of current transformer cores with the neutral point current on a separate
input taken from another set of cores on the current transformer.

A detection of a difference indicates a fault in the circuit and is used as alarm or to

block protection functions expected to give inadvertent tripping.

13.1.3 Function block

CCSSPVC
I3P* FAIL
IREF* ALARM
BLOCK
IEC13000304-1-en.vsd
IEC13000304 V1 EN

Figure 346: CCSSPVC function block

689
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Secondary system supervision

13.1.4 Signals
Table 400: CCSSPVC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for three phase current input
SIGNAL
IREF GROUP - Residual reference current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 401: CCSSPVC Output signals

Name Type Description
FAIL BOOLEAN Detection of current circuit failure
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for current circuit failure

13.1.5 Settings
Table 402: CCSSPVC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
IMinOp 10 - 200 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate current differential
level in % of IBase

Table 403: CCSSPVC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Ip>Block 20 - 500 %IB 1 150 Block of the function at high phase
current, in % of IBase

Table 404: CCSSPVC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

13.1.6 Operation principle

Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC compares the absolute value of the vectorial
sum of the three phase currents |Iphase| and the numerical value of the residual
current |Iref| from another current transformer set, see figure 347.

The FAIL output will be set to a logical one when the following criteria are fulfilled:

690
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 13
Secondary system supervision

The numerical value of the difference |Iphase| |Iref| is higher than 80% of
the numerical value of the sum |Iphase| + |Iref|.
The numerical value of the current |Iphase| |Iref| is equal to or higher than
the set operate value IMinOp.
No phase current has exceeded Ip>Block during the last 10 ms.
CCSSPVC is enabled by setting Operation = On.

The FAIL output remains activated 100 ms after the AND-gate resets when being
activated for more than 20 ms. If the FAIL lasts for more than 150 ms an ALARM
will be issued. In this case the FAIL and ALARM will remain activated 1 s after
the AND-gate resets. This prevents unwanted resetting of the blocking function
when phase current supervision element(s) operate, for example, during a fault.

I>Ip>Block
BLOCK
IL1 IL1 I>IMinOp
IL2 +
IL2
IL3 -
IL3
+ +
I ref Iref + x -
0,8
1,5 x Ir
AND OR FAIL
10 ms

20 ms 100 ms

150 ms 1s ALARM
OPERATION
BLOCK

en05000463.tif
IEC05000463 V2 EN

Figure 347: Simplified logic diagram for Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC

The operate characteristic is percentage restrained, see figure 348.

691
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Secondary system supervision

| I phase | - | I ref |

Slope = 1

Operation
Slope = 0.8
area
I MinOp

| I phase | + | I ref |
99000068.vsd

IEC99000068 V1 EN

Figure 348: Operate characteristics

Due to the formulas for the axis compared, |SIphase | - |I ref | and |S
I phase | + | I ref | respectively, the slope can not be above 2.

13.1.7 Technical data

Table 405: CCSSPVCtechnical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (10-200)% of IBase 10.0% of Ir at I Ir
10.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, Operate current >90%

Block current (20-500)% of IBase 5.0% of Ir at I Ir
5.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, Block current >90% at (50-500)% of IBase

13.2 Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC

13.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC - -

692
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 13
Secondary system supervision

13.2.2 Functionality
The aim of the fuse failure supervision function FUFSPVC is to block voltage
measuring functions at failures in the secondary circuits between the voltage
transformer and the IED in order to avoid inadvertent operations that otherwise
might occur.

The fuse failure supervision function basically has three different detection
methods, negative sequence and zero sequence based detection and an additional
delta voltage and delta current detection.

The negative sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in

isolated or high-impedance earthed networks. It is based on the negative-sequence
quantities.

The zero sequence detection is recommended for IEDs used in directly or low
impedance earthed networks. It is based on the zero sequence measuring quantities.

The selection of different operation modes is possible by a setting parameter in

order to take into account the particular earthing of the network.

A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to
the fuse failure supervision function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure,
which in practice is more associated with voltage transformer switching during
station operations.

13.2.3 Function block

FUFSPVC
I3P* BLKZ
U3P* BLKU
BLOCK 3PH
CBCLOSED DLD1PH
MCBOP DLD3PH
DISCPOS STDI
BLKTRIP STDIL1
STDIL2
STDIL3
STDU
STDUL1
STDUL2
STDUL3

IEC14000065-1-en.vsd
IEC14000065 V1 EN

Figure 349: FUFSPVC function block

693
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Secondary system supervision

13.2.4 Signals
Table 406: FUFSPVC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Current connection
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
CBCLOSED BOOLEAN 0 Active when circuit breaker is closed
MCBOP BOOLEAN 0 Active when external MCB opens protected
voltage circuit
DISCPOS BOOLEAN 0 Active when line disconnector is open
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocks operation of function when active

Table 407: FUFSPVC Output signals

Name Type Description
BLKZ BOOLEAN Start of current and voltage controlled function
BLKU BOOLEAN General start of function
3PH BOOLEAN Three-phase start of function
DLD1PH BOOLEAN Dead line condition in at least one phase
DLD3PH BOOLEAN Dead line condition in all three phases
STDI BOOLEAN Common start signal of sudden change in current
STDIL1 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in current, phase L1
STDIL2 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in current, phase L2
STDIL3 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in current, phase L3
STDU BOOLEAN Common start signal of sudden change in voltage
STDUL1 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in voltage, phase L1
STDUL2 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in voltage, phase L2
STDUL3 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in voltage, phase L3

694
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 13
Secondary system supervision

13.2.5 Settings
Table 408: FUFSPVC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OpMode Off - - UZsIZs Operating mode selection
UNsINs
UZsIZs
UZsIZs OR UNsINs
UZsIZs AND
UNsINs
OptimZsNs
3U0> 1 - 100 %UB 1 30 Operate level of residual overvoltage
element in % of UBase
3I0< 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Operate level of residual undercurrent
element in % of IBase
3U2> 1 - 100 %UB 1 30 Operate level of neg seq overvoltage
element in % of UBase
3I2< 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Operate level of neg seq undercurrent
element in % of IBase
OpDUDI Off - - Off Operation of change based function Off/
On On
DU> 1 - 100 %UB 1 60 Operate level of change in phase voltage
in % of UBase
DI< 1 - 100 %IB 1 15 Operate level of change in phase current
in % of IBase
UPh> 1 - 100 %UB 1 70 Operate level of phase voltage in % of
UBase
IPh> 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Operate level of phase current in % of
IBase
SealIn Off - - On Seal in functionality Off/On
On
USealln< 1 - 100 %UB 1 70 Operate level of seal-in phase voltage in
% of UBase
IDLD< 1 - 100 %IB 1 5 Operate level for open phase current
detection in % of IBase
UDLD< 1 - 100 %UB 1 60 Operate level for open phase voltage
detection in % of UBase

Table 409: FUFSPVC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

695
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Secondary system supervision

13.2.6 Monitored data

Table 410: FUFSPVC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
3I0 REAL - A Magnitude of zero
sequence current
3I2 REAL - A Magnitude of negative
sequence current
3U0 REAL - kV Magnitude of zero
sequence voltage
3U2 REAL - kV Magnitude of negative
sequence voltage

13.2.7 Operation principle

13.2.7.1 Zero and negative sequence detection

The zero and negative sequence function continuously measures the currents and
voltages in all three phases and calculates, see figure 350:

the zero-sequence voltage 3U0

the zero-sequence current 3I0
the negative sequence current 3I2
the negative sequence voltage 3U2

The measured signals are compared with their respective set values 3U0> and
3I0<, 3U2> and 3I2<.

The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetZeroSeq if the measured zero-
sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3U0> and the measured zero-
sequence current is below the set value 3I0<.

The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetNegSeq if the measured

negative sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3U2> and the measured
negative sequence current is below the set value 3I2<.

A drop out delay of 100 ms for the measured zero-sequence and negative sequence
current will prevent a false fuse failure detection at un-equal breaker opening at the
two line ends.

696
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 13
Secondary system supervision

Sequence Detection
3I0< CurrZeroSeq
IL1
Zero 3I0
sequence
filter 100 ms CurrNegSeq
a
IL2 a>b t
b
Negative 3I2
sequence
IL3 filter FuseFailDetZeroSeq
AND
100 ms
a
a>b t
3I2< b
FuseFailDetNegSeq
AND
3U0>
VoltZeroSeq
UL1
Zero
sequence
a 3U0
a>b
b
filter
UL2 VoltNegSeq

Negative
sequence a 3U2
a>b
UL3 filter b

3U2>

IEC10000036-2-en.vsd
IEC10000036 V2 EN

Figure 350: Simplified logic diagram for sequence detection part

The calculated values 3U0, 3I0, 3I2 and 3U2 are available as service values on
local HMI and monitoring tool in PCM600.

Input and output signals

The output signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ as well as the signals DLD1PH and
DLD3PH from dead line detections are blocked if any of the following conditions
occur:

The input BLOCK is activated

The input BLKTRIP is activated and the internal signal FuseFailStarted is not
present
The operation mode selector OpMode is set to Off
The IED is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been
blocked from the HMI (BlockFUSE=Yes)

The input BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the fuse failure
supervision function. It can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to
receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to
other internal functions of the IED itself in order to receive a block command from
internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and
internal function outputs.

The input BLKTRIP is intended to be connected to the trip output from any of the
protection functions included in the IED. When activated for more than 20 ms, the
operation of the fuse failure is blocked; a fixed drop-out timer prolongs the block
for 100 ms. The aim is to increase the security against unwanted operations during

697
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Secondary system supervision

the opening of the breaker, which might cause unbalance conditions for which the
fuse failure might operate.

The output signal BLKZ will also be blocked if the internal dead line detection is
activated. The dead line detection signal has a 200 ms drop-out time delay.

The input signal MCBOP is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input
to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT
secondary circuit. The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKU and BLKZ in
order to block all the voltage related functions when the MCB is open independent
of the setting of OpMode selector. The additional drop-out timer of 150 ms
prolongs the presence of MCBOP signal to prevent the unwanted operation of
voltage dependent function due to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts of
the miniature circuit breaker.

The input signal DISCPOS is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input
to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The DISCPOS signal sets the
output signal BLKU in order to block the voltage related functions when the line
disconnector is open. The impedance protection function is not affected by the
position of the line disconnector since there will be no line currents that can cause
malfunction of the distance protection. If DISCPOS=0 it signifies that the line is
connected to the system and when the DISCPOS=1 it signifies that the line is
disconnected from the system and the block signal BLKU is generated.

The output BLKU can be used for blocking the voltage related measuring functions
(undervoltage protection, energizing check and so on) except for the impedance
protection.

The function output BLKZ shall be used for blocking the impedance protection
function.

13.2.7.2 Delta current and delta voltage detection

A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 351. The calculation of
the changes of currents and voltages is based on a sample analysis algorithm. The
calculated delta quantities are compared with their respective set values DI< and
DU>. The algorithm detects a fuse failure if a sufficient change in voltage without
a sufficient change in current is detected in each phase separately. The following
quantities are calculated in all three phases:

The change in voltage DU

The change in current DI

The internal FuseFailDetDUDI signal is activated if the following conditions are

fulfilled for a phase:

The magnitude of the phase-ground voltage has been above UPh> for more
than 1.5 cycles (i.e. 30 ms in a 50 Hz system)
The magnitude of DU is higher than the corresponding setting DU>
The magnitude of DI is below the setting DI<

698
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 13
Secondary system supervision

In addition to the above conditions, at least one of the following conditions shall be
fulfilled in order to activate the internal FuseFailDetDUDI signal:

The magnitude of the phase current in the same phase is higher than the setting
IPh>
The circuit breaker is closed (CBCLOSED = True)

The first criterion means that detection of failure in at least one phase together with
high current for the same phase will set the output. The measured phase current is
used to reduce the risk of false fuse failure detection. If the current on the protected
line is low, a voltage drop in the system (not caused by fuse failure) may be
followed by current change lower than the setting DI<, and therefore a false fuse
failure might occur.

The second criterion requires that the delta condition shall be fulfilled for at least
one phase at the same time as circuit breaker is closed. If CBCLOSED input is
connected to FALSE , then only the first criterion can enable the delta function.If
the DUDI detection of one phase sets the internal signal FuseFailDetDUDI at the
level high, then the signal FuseFailDetDUDI will remain high as long as the
voltage of that phase is lower then the setting Uph>.

In addition to fuse failure detection, two internal signals DeltaU and DeltaI are also
generated by the delta current and delta voltage DUDI detection algorithm. The
internal signals DelatU and DeltaI are activated when a sudden change of voltage,
or respectively current, is detected. The detection of the sudden change is based on
a sample analysis algorithm. In particular DelatU is activated if at least three
consecutive voltage samples are higher then the setting DU>. In a similar way
DelatI is activated if at least three consecutive current samples are higher then the
setting DI<. When DeltaU or DeltaI are active, the output signals STDUL1,
STDUL2, STDUL3 and respectively STDIL1, STDIL2, STDIL3, based on a
sudden change of voltage or current detection, are activated with a 20 ms time off
delay. The common start output signals STDU or STDI are activated with a 60 ms
time off delay, if any sudden change of voltage or current is detected.

The delta function (except the sudden change of voltage and current
detection) is deactivated by setting the parameter OpDUDI to Off.

699
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Secondary system supervision

DUDI Detection
DUDI detection Phase 1
IL1

DI detection based on sample analysis

DI< DeltaIL1

UL1

DU detection based on sample analysis

AND
DU>
1.5 cycle 20 ms DeltaUL1
a
a>b t t
UPh> b

IL2 DeltaIL2
DUDI detection Phase 2
UL2 DeltaUL2

Same logic as for phase 1

IL3 DeltaIL3
DUDI detection Phase 3
UL3 DeltaUL3

Same logic as for phase 1

UL1
a
a<b
b

IL1
a
a>b
IPh> b AND

OR AND
CBCLOSED AND OR

UL2
a
a<b
b

IL2
a
a>b
b AND

OR AND
AND OR

UL3
a
a<b
b

IL3
a
a>b
b AND

OR AND
AND OR FuseFailDetDUDI
OR

IEC12000166-2-en.vsd

IEC12000166 V2 EN

Figure 351: Simplified logic diagram for the DU/DI detection part

700
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 13
Secondary system supervision

intBlock
STDI
AND

20 ms
DeltaIL1 STDIL1
t AND
OR
20 ms
DeltaIL2
t STDIL2
AND
20 ms
DeltaIL3
t
STDIL3
AND

STDU
AND

20 ms
DeltaUL1 STDUL1
t AND
OR
20 ms
DeltaUL2
t STDUL2
AND
20 ms
DeltaUL3
t
STDUL3
AND

IEC12000165-1-en.vsd
IEC12000165 V1 EN

Figure 352: Internal signals DeltaU or DeltaI and the corresponding output
signals

13.2.7.3 Dead line detection

A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 353. A dead phase
condition is indicated if both the voltage and the current in one phase is below their
respective setting values UDLD< and IDLD<. If at least one phase is considered to
be dead the output DLD1PH and the internal signal DeadLineDet1Ph is activated.
If all three phases are considered to be dead the output DLD3PH is activated

701
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Secondary system supervision

Dead Line Detection

IL1
a
a<b AllCurrLow
b
AND
IL2
a
a<b
b

IL3
a
a<b
b

IDLD<
DeadLineDet1Ph
UL1
a AND
a<b
b OR DLD1PH
AND
UL2
a AND
a<b
b
AND DLD3PH
UL3 AND
a AND
a<b
b

UDLD<

intBlock

IEC10000035-1-en.vsd
IEC10000035 V2 EN

Figure 353: Simplified logic diagram for Dead Line detection part

13.2.7.4 Main logic

A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 354. The fuse failure
supervision function (FUFSPVC) can be switched on or off by the setting
parameter Operation to On or Off.

For increased flexibility and adaptation to system requirements an operation mode

selector, OpMode, has been introduced to make it possible to select different
operating modes for the negative and zero sequence based algorithms. The
different operation modes are:

Off. The negative and zero sequence function is switched off.

UNsINs. Negative sequence is selected.
UZsIZs. Zero sequence is selected.
UZsIZs OR UNsINs. Both negative and zero sequence are activated and work
in parallel (OR-condition for operation).
UZsIZs AND UNsINs. Both negative and zero sequence are activated and work
in series (AND-condition for operation).
OptimZsNs. Optimum of negative and zero sequence current (the function that
has the highest magnitude of measured negative and zero sequence current will
be activated).

The delta function can be activated by setting the parameter OpDUDI to On. When
selected it operates in parallel with the sequence based algorithms.

702
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 13
Secondary system supervision

As soon as any fuse failure situation is detected, signals FuseFailDetZeroSeq,

FuseFailDetNegSeq or FuseFailDetDUDI, and the specific functionality is
released, the function will activate the output signal BLKU. The output signal
BLKZ will be activated as well if the internal dead phase detection,
DeadLineDet1Ph, is not activated at the same time. The output BLKU can be used
for blocking voltage related measuring functions (under voltage protection,
energizing check, and so on). The output BLKZ shall be used to block the
impedance protection functions.

If the fuse failure situation is present for more than 5 seconds and the setting
parameter SealIn is set to On it will be sealed in as long as at least one phase
voltages is below the set value USealIn<. This will keep the BLKU and BLKZ
signals activated as long as any phase voltage is below the set value USealIn<. If
all three phase voltages drop below the set value USealIn< and the setting
parameter SealIn is set to On the output signal 3PH will also be activated. The
signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ will now be active as long as any phase voltage is
below the set value USealIn<.

If SealIn is set to On the fuse failure condition lasting more then 5 seconds is stored
in the non-volatile memory in the IED. At start-up of the IED (due to auxiliary
power interruption or re-start due to configuration change) it uses the stored value
in its non-volatile memory and re-establishes the conditions that were present
before the shut down. All phase voltages must be restored above USealIn< before
fuse failure is de-activated and resets the signals BLKU, BLKZ and 3PH.

The output signal BLKU will also be active if all phase voltages have been above
the setting USealIn< for more than 60 seconds, the zero or negative sequence
voltage has been above the set value 3U0> and 3U2> for more than 5 seconds, all
phase currents are below the setting IDLD< (criteria for open phase detection) and
the circuit breaker is closed (input CBCLOSED is activated).

If a MCB is used then the input signal MCBOP is to be connected via a binary
input to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the
VT secondary circuit. The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKU and BLKZ
in order to block all the voltage related functions when the MCB is open
independent of the setting of OpMode or OpDUDI. An additional drop-out timer of
150 ms prolongs the presence of MCBOP signal to prevent the unwanted operation
of voltage dependent function due to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts
of the miniature circuit breaker.

The input signal DISCPOS is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input
to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The DISCPOS signal sets the
output signal BLKU in order to block the voltage related functions when the line
disconnector is open. The impedance protection function does not have to be
affected since there will be no line currents that can cause malfunction of the
distance protection.

703
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Secondary system supervision

Fuse failure detection

Main logic
TEST

TEST ACTIVE
AND
BlocFuse = Yes

BLOCK intBlock
OR
BLKTRIP 20 ms 100 ms
AND t t
FusefailStarted

All UL < USealIn<

OR
AND
3PH
AND
SealIn = On AND

AND
Any UL < UsealIn<

FuseFailDetDUDI
AND 5s
OpDUDI = On
OR t
FuseFailDetZeroSeq
AND

AND

FuseFailDetNegSeq
AND

UNsINs OR
UZsIZs OR
UZsIZs OR UNsINs
OpMode
UZsIZs AND UNsINs
OptimZsNs
OR
CurrZeroSeq
a AND
CurrNegSeq a>b
b

AND

DeadLineDet1Ph 200 ms
AND BLKZ
t OR AND
150 ms
MCBOP t

AND BLKU
60 s
t OR OR
All UL > UsealIn<
AND

VoltZeroSeq 5s
VoltNegSeq OR t

AllCurrLow
CBCLOSED

DISCPOS IEC10000033-2-en.vsd

IEC10000033 V2 EN

Figure 354: Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervision function, Main
logic

704
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 13
Secondary system supervision

13.2.8 Technical data

Table 411: FUFSPVCtechnical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, zero sequence (1-100)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Operate current, zero sequence (1100)% of IBase 0.5% of Ir

Operate voltage, negative sequence (1-100)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Operate current, negative sequence (1100)% of IBase 0.5% of Ir

Operate voltage change level (1-100)% of UBase 10.0% of Ur

Operate current change level (1100)% of IBase 10.0% of Ir

Operate phase voltage (1-100)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Operate phase current (1100)% of IBase 0.5% of Ir

Operate phase dead line voltage (1-100)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Operate phase dead line current (1100)% of IBase 0.5% of Ir

Operate time, start, 1 ph, at 1 to 0 x Ur Min. = 10 ms -

Max. = 25 ms
Reset time, start, 1 ph, at 0 to 1 x Ur Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms

13.3 Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC

13.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC VTS 60

13.3.2 Functionality
Different protection functions within the protection IED operates on the basis of
measured voltage at the relay point. Some example of protection functions are:

Distance protection function.

Undervoltage function.
Energisation function and voltage check for the weak infeed logic.

These functions can operate unintentionally, if a fault occurs in the secondary

circuits between voltage instrument transformers and the IED. These unintentional
operations can be prevented by VDSPVC.

705
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Secondary system supervision

VDSPVC is designed to detect fuse failures or faults in voltage measurement

circuit, based on phase wise comparison of voltages of main and pilot fused
circuits. VDSPVC blocking output can be configured to block functions that need
to be blocked in case of faults in the voltage circuit.

13.3.3 Function block

VDSPVC
U3P1* MAINFUF
U3P2* PILOTFUF
BLOCK U1L1FAIL
U1L2FAIL
U1L3FAIL
U2L1FAIL
U2L2FAIL
U2L3FAIL

IEC14000048-1-en.vsd
IEC12000142 V2 EN

Figure 355: VDSPVC function block

13.3.4 Signals
Table 412: VDRFUF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P1 GROUP - Main fuse voltage
SIGNAL
U3P2 GROUP - Pilot fuse voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 413: VDRFUF Output signals

Name Type Description
MAINFUF BOOLEAN Block of main fuse failure
PILOTFUF BOOLEAN Alarm of pilot fuse failure
U1L1FAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Main fuse group phase L1
U1L2FAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Main fuse group phase L2
U1L3FAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Main fuse group phase L3
U2L1FAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Pilot fuse group phase L1
U2L2FAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Pilot fuse group phase L2
U2L3FAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Pilot fuse group phase L3

706
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 13
Secondary system supervision

13.3.5 Settings
Table 414: VDRFUF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode Off / On
On
Ud>MainBlock 10.0 - 80.0 %UB 0.1 20.0 Blocking picked up voltage level in % of
UBase when main fuse fails
Ud>PilotAlarm 10.0 - 80.0 %UB 0.1 30.0 Alarm picked up voltage level in % of
UBase when pilot fuse fails
SealIn Off - - On Seal in functionality Off/On
On
USealIn 0.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 70.0 Operate level of seal-in voltage in % of
UBase

Table 415: VDRFUF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Table 416: VDRFUF Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ConTypeMain Ph-N - - Ph-N Selection of connection type for main
Ph-Ph fuse group
ConTypePilot Ph-N - - Ph-N Selection of connection type for pilot
Ph-Ph fuse group

13.3.6 Monitored data

Table 417: VDRFUF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UL1DIF_A REAL - kV Differential voltage
phase L1 for alarm
functionality
UL2DIF_A REAL - kV Differential voltage
phase L2 for alarm
functionality
UL3DIF_A REAL - kV Differential voltage
phase L3 for alarm
functionality
Table continues on next page

707
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Secondary system supervision

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

UL1DIF_B REAL - kV Differential voltage
phase L1 for block
functionality
UL2DIF_B REAL - kV Differential voltage
phase L2 for block
functionality
UL3DIF_B REAL - kV Differential voltage
phase L3 for block
functionality

13.3.7 Operation principle

VDSPVC requires six voltage inputs, which are the three phase voltages on main
and pilot fuse groups. The initial voltage difference between the two groups is
theoretical zero in the healthy condition. Any subsequent voltage difference will be
due to a fuse failure.

If the main fuse voltage becomes smaller than the pilot fuse voltage (vMainL1 <
vPilotL1 or vMainL2 < vPilotL2 or vMainL3 < vPilotL3) and the voltage
difference exceeds the operation level (Ud>MainBlock), a blocking signal will be
initiated to indicate the main fuse failure and block the voltage-dependent
functions. In addition, the function also indicates the phase in which the voltage
reduction has occurred.

If the pilot fuse voltage becomes smaller than the main fuse voltage (vPilotL1 <
vMainL1 or vPilotL2 < vMainL2 or vPilotL3 < vMainL3) and the voltage
difference exceeds the operation level (Ud>PilotAlarm), an alarm signal will be
initiated to indicate the pilot fuse failure and also the faulty phase where the
voltage reduction occurred.

When SealIn is set to On and the fuse failure has last for more than 5 seconds, the
blocked protection functions will remain blocked until normal voltage conditions
are restored above the USealIn setting. Fuse failure outputs are deactivated when
normal voltage conditions are restored.

708
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 13
Secondary system supervision

5s
a
a<b AND OR t
USealIn b

SealIn=0

vPilotL1
+
vMainL1 -
MAX a U1L1FAIL
OR
a>b AND
Ud>MainBlock b MAINFAIL
OR
0

MIN ABS a
a>b AND U2L1FAIL
Ud> PilotAlarm b
BLOCK
OR PILOTFAIL

vPilotL2 U1L2FAIL
vMainL2 Phase L2, same as Phase L1 U2L2FAIL

vPilotL3 U1L3FAIL
vMainL3 Phase L3, same as Phase L1 U2L3FAIL

IEC12000144-1-en.vsd

IEC12000144 V1 EN

Figure 356: Simplified logic diagram VDSPVC

13.3.8 Technical data

Table 418: VDSPVC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, block of main (10.0-80.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur
fuse failure
Reset ratio <110%
Operate time, block of main fuse Min = 5 ms
failure at 1 to 0 x Ur
Max = 15 ms
Reset time, block of main fuse Min = 15 ms
failure at 0 to 1 x Ur
Max = 30 ms
Operate value, alarm for pilot (10.0-80.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur
fuse failure
Reset ratio <110%
Operate time, alarm for pilot Min = 5 ms
fuse failure at 1 to 0 x Ur
Max = 15 ms
Reset time, alarm for pilot fuse Min = 15 ms
failure at 0 to 1 x Ur
Max = 30 ms

709
Technical Manual
710
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Section 14 Control

14.1 Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing

SESRSYN

14.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and SESRSYN 25
synchronizing
sc/vc

SYMBOL-M V1 EN

14.1.2 Functionality
The Synchronizing function allows closing of asynchronous networks at the correct
moment including the breaker closing time, which improves the network stability.

Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing SESRSYN function checks

that the voltages on both sides of the circuit breaker are in synchronism, or with at
least one side dead to ensure that closing can be done safely.

SESRSYN function includes a built-in voltage selection scheme for double bus and
1 breaker or ring busbar arrangements.

Manual closing as well as automatic reclosing can be checked by the function and
can have different settings.

For systems, which are running asynchronous, a synchronizing function is

provided. The main purpose of the synchronizing function is to provide controlled
closing of circuit breakers when two asynchronous systems are going to be
connected. The synchronizing function evaluates voltage difference, phase angle
difference, slip frequency and frequency rate of change before issuing a controlled
closing of the circuit breaker. Breaker closing time is a parameter setting.

711
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

14.1.3 Function block

SESRSYN
U3PBB1* SYNOK
U3PBB2* AUTOSYOK
U3PLN1* AUTOENOK
U3PLN2* MANSYOK
BLOCK MANENOK
BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK
BLKSC TSTAUTSY
BLKENERG TSTMANSY
B1QOPEN TSTENOK
B1QCLD USELFAIL
B2QOPEN B1SEL
B2QCLD B2SEL
LN1QOPEN LN1SEL
LN1QCLD LN2SEL
LN2QOPEN SYNPROGR
LN2QCLD SYNFAIL
UB1OK UOKSYN
UB1FF UDIFFSYN
UB2OK FRDIFSYN
UB2FF FRDIFFOK
ULN1OK FRDERIVA
ULN1FF UOKSC
ULN2OK UDIFFSC
ULN2FF FRDIFFA
STARTSYN PHDIFFA
TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM
TSTSC PHDIFFM
TSTENERG INADVCLS
AENMODE UDIFFME
MENMODE FRDIFFME
PHDIFFME
UBUS
ULINE
MODEAEN
MODEMEN

IEC10000046-1-en.vsd
IEC10000046 V1 EN

Figure 357: SESRSYN function block

14.1.4 Signals
Table 419: SESRSYN Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3PBB1 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1,
SIGNAL busbar 1
U3PBB2 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1,
SIGNAL busbar 2
U3PLN1 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1,
SIGNAL line 1
U3PLN2 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1,
SIGNAL line 2
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 General block
BLKSYNCH BOOLEAN 0 Block synchronizing
BLKSC BOOLEAN 0 Block synchro check
BLKENERG BOOLEAN 0 Block energizing check
B1QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to
bus1
Table continues on next page

712
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Name Type Default Description

B1QCLD BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to
bus1
B2QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to
bus2
B2QCLD BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to
bus2
LN1QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to
line1
LN1QCLD BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to
line1
LN2QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to
line2
LN2QCLD BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to
line2
UB1OK BOOLEAN 0 Bus1 voltage transformer OK
UB1FF BOOLEAN 0 Bus1 voltage transformer fuse failure
UB2OK BOOLEAN 0 Bus2 voltage transformer OK
UB2FF BOOLEAN 0 Bus2 voltage transformer fuse failure
ULN1OK BOOLEAN 0 Line1 voltage transformer OK
ULN1FF BOOLEAN 0 Line1 voltage transformer fuse failure
ULN2OK BOOLEAN 0 Line2 voltage transformer OK
ULN2FF BOOLEAN 0 Line2 voltage transformer fuse failure
STARTSYN BOOLEAN 0 Start synchronizing
TSTSYNCH BOOLEAN 0 Set synchronizing in test mode
TSTSC BOOLEAN 0 Set synchro check in test mode
TSTENERG BOOLEAN 0 Set energizing check in test mode
AENMODE INTEGER 0 Input for setting of automatic energizing mode
MENMODE INTEGER 0 Input for setting of manual energizing mode

Table 420: SESRSYN Output signals

Name Type Description
SYNOK BOOLEAN Synchronizing OK output
AUTOSYOK BOOLEAN Auto synchro check OK
AUTOENOK BOOLEAN Automatic energizing check OK
MANSYOK BOOLEAN Manual synchro check OK
MANENOK BOOLEAN Manual energizing check OK
TSTSYNOK BOOLEAN Synchronizing OK test output
TSTAUTSY BOOLEAN Auto synchro check OK test output
TSTMANSY BOOLEAN Manual synchro check OK test output
TSTENOK BOOLEAN Energizing check OK test output
USELFAIL BOOLEAN Selected voltage transformer fuse failed
B1SEL BOOLEAN Bus1 selected
Table continues on next page

713
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Name Type Description

B2SEL BOOLEAN Bus2 selected
LN1SEL BOOLEAN Line1 selected
LN2SEL BOOLEAN Line2 selected
SYNPROGR BOOLEAN Synchronizing in progress
SYNFAIL BOOLEAN Synchronizing failed
UOKSYN BOOLEAN Voltage amplitudes for synchronizing above set
limits
UDIFFSYN BOOLEAN Voltage difference out of limit for synchronizing
FRDIFSYN BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for synchronizing
FRDIFFOK BOOLEAN Frequency difference in band for synchronizing
FRDERIVA BOOLEAN Frequency derivative out of limit for synchronizing
UOKSC BOOLEAN Voltage amplitudes above set limits
UDIFFSC BOOLEAN Voltage difference out of limit
FRDIFFA BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for Auto operation
PHDIFFA BOOLEAN Phase angle difference out of limit for Auto
operation
FRDIFFM BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for Manual
operation
PHDIFFM BOOLEAN Phase angle difference out of limit for Manual
Operation
INADVCLS BOOLEAN Inadvertent circuit breaker closing
UDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of voltage in p.u of set
voltage base value
FRDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of frequency
PHDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of phase angle
UBUS REAL Bus voltage
ULINE REAL Line voltage
MODEAEN INTEGER Selected mode for automatic energizing
MODEMEN INTEGER Selected mode for manual energizing

14.1.5 Settings
Table 421: SESRSYN Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationSynch Off - - Off Operation for synchronizing function Off/
On On
UHighBusSynch 50.0 - 120.0 %UBB 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit bus for synchronizing
in % of UBaseBus
UHighLineSynch 50.0 - 120.0 %UBL 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit line for synchronizing
in % of UBaseLine
Table continues on next page

714
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

UDiffSynch 0.02 - 0.50 pu 0.01 0.10 Voltage difference limit for synchronizing
in p.u of set voltage base value
FreqDiffMin 0.003 - 0.250 Hz 0.001 0.010 Minimum frequency difference limit for
synchronizing
FreqDiffMax 0.050 - 0.500 Hz 0.001 0.200 Maximum frequency difference limit for
synchronizing
FreqRateChange 0.000 - 0.500 Hz/s 0.001 0.300 Maximum allowed frequency rate of
change
tBreaker 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.080 Closing time of the breaker
tClosePulse 0.050 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Breaker closing pulse duration
tMaxSynch 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 600.00 Resets synch if no close has been made
before set time
tMinSynch 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Minimum time to accept synchronizing
conditions
OperationSC Off - - On Operation for synchronism check
On function Off/On
UHighBusSC 50.0 - 120.0 %UBB 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit bus for synchrocheck
in % of UBaseBus
UHighLineSC 50.0 - 120.0 %UBL 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit line for synchrocheck
in % of UBaseLine
UDiffSC 0.02 - 0.50 pu 0.01 0.15 Voltage difference limit for synchrocheck
in p.u of set voltage base value
FreqDiffA 0.003 - 1.000 Hz 0.001 0.010 Frequency difference limit between bus
and line Auto
FreqDiffM 0.003 - 1.000 Hz 0.001 0.010 Frequency difference limit between bus
and line Manual
PhaseDiffA 5.0 - 90.0 Deg 1.0 25.0 Phase angle difference limit between
bus and line Auto
PhaseDiffM 5.0 - 90.0 Deg 1.0 25.0 Phase angle difference limit between
bus and line Manual
tSCA 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay output for synchrocheck Auto
tSCM 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay output for synchrocheck
Manual
AutoEnerg Off - - DLLB Automatic energizing check mode
DLLB
DBLL
Both
ManEnerg Off - - Both Manual energizing check mode
DLLB
DBLL
Both
ManEnergDBDL Off - - Off Manual dead bus, dead line energizing
On
UHighBusEnerg 50.0 - 120.0 %UBB 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit bus for energizing
check in % of UBaseBus
UHighLineEnerg 50.0 - 120.0 %UBL 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit line for energizing
check in % of UBaseLine
ULowBusEnerg 10.0 - 80.0 %UBB 1.0 40.0 Voltage low limit bus for energizing
check in % of UBaseBus
Table continues on next page

715
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ULowLineEnerg 10.0 - 80.0 %UBL 1.0 40.0 Voltage low limit line for energizing
check in % of UBaseLine
UMaxEnerg 50.0 - 180.0 %UB 1.0 115.0 Maximum voltage for energizing in % of
UBase, Line and/or Bus
tAutoEnerg 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay for automatic energizing
check
tManEnerg 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay for manual energizing check

Table 422: SESRSYN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SelPhaseBus1 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for busbar1
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
GblBaseSelBus 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups, Bus
GblBaseSelLine 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups, Line
SelPhaseBus2 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for busbar2
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
SelPhaseLine1 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for line1
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
SelPhaseLine2 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for line2
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
CBConfig No voltage sel. - - No voltage sel. Select CB configuration
Double bus
1 1/2 bus CB
1 1/2 bus alt. CB
Tie CB

Table 423: SESRSYN Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
PhaseShift -180 - 180 Deg 1 0 Additional phase angle for selected line
voltage

716
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

14.1.6 Monitored data

Table 424: SESRSYN Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UDIFFME REAL - - Calculated difference of
voltage in p.u of set
voltage base value
FRDIFFME REAL - Hz Calculated difference of
frequency
PHDIFFME REAL - deg Calculated difference of
phase angle
UBUS REAL - kV Bus voltage
ULINE REAL - kV Line voltage

14.1.7 Operation principle

14.1.7.1 Basic functionality

The synchrocheck function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and
compares them to set limits. The output is only given when all measured quantities
are simultaneously within their set limits.

The energizing check function measures the bus and line voltages and compares
them to both high and low threshold detectors. The output is given only when the
actual measured quantities match the set conditions.

The synchronizing function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker, and
also determines the angle change occurring during the closing delay of the circuit
breaker, from the measured slip frequency. The output is given only when all
measured conditions are simultaneously within their set limits. The issue of the
output is timed to give closure at the optimal time including the time for the circuit
breaker and the closing circuit.

For double bus single circuit breaker and 1 circuit breaker arrangements, the
SESRSYN function blocks have the capability to make the necessary voltage
selection. For double bus single circuit breaker arrangements, selection of the
correct voltage is made using auxiliary contacts of the bus disconnectors. For 1
circuit breaker arrangements, correct voltage selection is made using auxiliary
contacts of the bus disconnectors as well as the circuit breakers.

The internal logic for each function block as well as, the input and outputs, and the
setting parameters with default setting and setting ranges is described in this
document. For application related information, please refer to the application manual.

717
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

14.1.7.2 Logic diagrams

Logic diagrams
The logic diagrams that follow illustrate the main principles of the SESRSYN
function components such as Synchrocheck, Synchronizing, Energizing check and
Voltage selection, and are intended to simplify the understanding of the function.

Synchrocheck
The voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference values are
measured in the IED centrally and are available for the synchrocheck function for
evaluation. By setting the phases used for SESRSYN, with the settings
SelPhaseBus1, SelPhaseBus2, SelPhaseLine1 and SelPhaseLine2, a compensation
is made automatically for the voltage amplitude difference and the phase angle
difference caused if different setting values are selected for both sides of the
breaker. If needed an additional phase angle adjustment can be done for selected
line voltage with the PhaseShift setting.

When the function is set to OperationSC = On, the measuring will start.

The function will compare the bus and line voltage values with the set values for
UHighBusSC and UHighLineSC.

If both sides are higher than the set values, the measured values are compared with
the set values for acceptable frequency, phase angle and voltage difference:
FreqDiffA, FreqDiffM, PhaseDiffA, PhaseDiffM and UDiffSC. If additional phase
angle adjustment is done with the PhaseShift setting, the adjustment factor is
deducted from the line voltage before the comparison of the phase angle values.

The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The
frequencies must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz. The
frequency difference between the bus frequency and the line frequency is measured
and may not exceed the set value FreqDiff.

Two sets of settings for frequency difference and phase angle difference are
available and used for the manual closing and autoreclose functions respectively, as
required.

The inputs BLOCK and BLKSC are available for total block of the complete
SESRSYN function and selective block of the Synchrocheck function respectively.
Input TSTSC will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are
connected to a separate test output.

The outputs MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK are activated when the actual measured
conditions match the set conditions for the respective output. The output signal can
be delayed independently for MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK conditions.

A number of outputs are available as information about fulfilled checking

conditions. UOKSC shows that the voltages are high, UDIFFSC, FRDIFFA,
FRDIFFM, PHDIFFA, PHDIFFM shows when the voltage difference, frequency
difference and phase angle difference conditions are out of limits.

718
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Output INADVCLS, inadvertent circuit breaker closing, indicates that the circuit
breaker has been closed at wrong phase angle by mistake. The output is activated,
if the voltage conditions are fulfilled at the same time the phase angle difference
between bus and line is suddenly changed from being larger than 60 degrees to
smaller than 5 degrees.

Note! Similar logic for Manual Synchrocheck.

OperationSC = On
AND TSTAUTSY
AND

TSTSC

InvalidSelection AND
BLKSC
OR AUTOSYOK
BLOCK AND
BLOCK
0-60 s
AND t
tSCA

UDiffSC 50 ms
AND t
UHighBusSC
UOKSC
AND
UHighLineSC
UDIFFSC
1
FRDIFFA
FreqDiffA 1

PHDIFFA
PhaseDiffA 1

UDIFFME
voltageDifferenceValue
FRDIFFME
frequencyDifferenceValue
PHDIFFME
phaseAngleDifferenceValue

32 ms 100 ms
AND t INADVCLS
PhDiff > 60 AND

PhDiff < 5

IEC07000114-5-en.vsd
IEC07000114 V5 EN

Figure 358: Simplified logic diagram for the Auto Synchrocheck function

Synchronizing
When the function is set to OperationSynch = On the measuring will be performed.

The function will compare the values for the bus and line voltage with the set
values for UHighBusSynch and UHighLineSynch, which is a supervision that the
voltages are both live. Also the voltage difference is checked to be smaller than the
set value for UDiffSynch, which is a p.u value of set voltage base values. If both

719
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

sides are higher than the set values and the voltage difference between bus and line
is acceptable, the measured values are compared with the set values for acceptable
frequency FreqDiffMax and FreqDiffMin, rate of change of frequency
FreqRateChange and phase angle, which has to be smaller than the internally
preset value of 15 degrees.

Measured frequencies between the settings for the maximum and minimum
frequency will initiate the measuring and the evaluation of the angle change to
allow operation to be sent in the right moment including the set tBreaker time.
There is a phase angle release internally to block any incorrect closing pulses. At
operation the SYNOK output will be activated with a pulse tClosePulse and the
function resets. The function will also reset if the synchronizing conditions are not
fulfilled within the set tMaxSynch time. This prevents that the function is, by
mistake, maintained in operation for a long time, waiting for conditions to be fulfilled.

The inputs BLOCK and BLKSYNCH are available for total block of the complete
SESRSYN function and block of the Synchronizing function respectively.
TSTSYNCH will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are
connected to a separate output.

OperationSynch=On

TSTSYNCH

STARTSYN

InvalidSelection
SYNPROGR
AND
Block AND
S
OR
R
BLKSYNCH

UDiffSynch
50 ms SYNOK
AND
UHighBusSynch AND t

UHighLineSynch OR

FreqDiffMax TSTSYNOK
AND
FreqDiffMin

tClose
FreqRateChange Pulse
AND

fBus&fLine 5Hz tMax

Phase Diff < 15 deg Synch
SYNFAIL
AND
PhaseDiff=closing angle

FreqDiff
Close pulse
in advance
tBreaker

IEC06000636-4-en.vsd
IEC06000636 V4 EN

Figure 359: Simplified logic diagram for the synchronizing function

720
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Energizing check
Voltage values are measured in the IED and are available for evaluation by the
Energizing check function.

The function measures voltages on the busbar and the line to verify whether they
are live or dead. This is done by comparing with the set values UHighBusEnerg
and ULowBusEnerg for bus energizing and UHighLineEnerg and ULowLineEnerg
for line energizing.

The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The
frequencies must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz.

The Energizing direction can be selected individually for the Manual and the
Automatic functions respectively. When the conditions are met the outputs
AUTOENOK and MANENOK respectively will be activated if the fuse
supervision conditions are fulfilled. The output signal can be delayed
independently for MANENOK and AUTOENOK conditions. The Energizing
direction can also be selected by an integer input AENMODE respective
MENMODE, which for example, can be connected to a Binary to Integer function
block (B16I). Integers supplied shall be 1=Off, 2=DLLB, 3=DBLL and 4= Both.
Not connected input will mean that the setting is done from Parameter Setting tool.
The active position can be read on outputs MODEAEN resp MODEMEN. The
modes are 0=OFF, 1=DLLB, 2=DBLL and 3=Both.

The inputs BLOCK and BLKENERG are available for total block of the complete
SESRSYN function respective block of the Energizing check function.
TSTENERG will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are
connected to a separate test output.

721
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

manEnergOpenBays
MANENOK
OR

TSTENERG

BLKENERG
OR
BLOCK

selectedFuseOK

UHighBusEnerg
DLLB tManEnerg
AND
OR t
AND
OR
ULowLineEnerg AND

ManEnerg BOTH

ULowBusEnerg
DBLL
AND

UHighLineEnerg

TSTENOK
ManEnergDBDL AND AND

UMaxEnerg
fBus and fLine 5 Hz

IEC14000031-1-en.vsd
IEC14000031 V1 EN

Figure 360: Manual energizing

TSTENERG

BLKENERG
OR
BLOCK

selectedFuseOK

UHighBusEnerg
DLLB tAutoEnerg
AND
OR t
AND OR
AUTOENOK
ULowLineEnerg AND

AutoEnerg BOTH

ULowBusEnerg
DBLL
AND

UHighLineEnerg

TSTENOK
UMaxEnerg AND

fBus and fLine 5 Hz

IEC14000030-1-en.vsd
IEC14000030 V1 EN

Figure 361: Automatic energizing

722
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

BLKENERG
BLOCK OR manEnergOpenBays
AND

ManEnerg

1 bus CB
CBConfig AND

B1QOPEN
LN1QOPEN AND
OR
B1QCLD
B2QOPEN
AND

LN2QOPEN

1 bus alt. CB AND OR

AND
OR

B2QCLD
AND

Tie CB
AND
AND
OR

AND

IEC14000032-1-en.vsd
IEC14000032 V1 EN

Figure 362: Open bays

Fuse failure supervision

External fuse failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are
connected to binary inputs that are configured to the inputs of SESRSYN function
in the IED. Alternatively, the internal signals from fuse failure supervision can be
used when available. There are two alternative connection possibilities. Inputs
labelled OK must be connected if the available contact indicates that the voltage
circuit is healthy. Inputs labelled FF must be connected if the available contact
indicates that the voltage circuit is faulty.

The UB1OK/UB2OK and UB1FF/UB2FF inputs are related to the busbar voltage
and the ULN1OK/ULN2OK and ULN1FF/ULN2FF inputs are related to the line
voltage. Configure them to the binary input or function outputs that indicate the
status of the external fuse failure of the busbar and line voltages. In the event of a
fuse failure, the energizing check function is blocked. The synchronizing and the
synchrocheck function requires full voltage on both sides, thus no blocking at fuse
failure is needed.

Voltage selection
The voltage selection module including supervision of included voltage
transformers for the different arrangements is a basic part of the SESRSYN
function and determines the voltages fed to the Synchronizing, Synchrocheck and

723
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Energizing check functions. This includes the selection of the appropriate Line and
Bus voltages and MCB supervision.

The voltage selection type to be used is set with the parameter CBConfig.

If No voltage sel. is set the voltages used will be U-Line1 and U-Bus1. This setting
is also used in the case when external voltage selection is provided. Fuse failure
supervision for the used inputs must also be connected.

The voltage selection function, selected voltages, and fuse conditions are used for
the Synchronizing, Synchrocheck and Energizing check inputs.

For the disconnector positions it is advisable to use (NO) a and (NC) b type
contacts to supply Disconnector Open and Closed positions but, it is also possible
to use an inverter for one of the positions.

If breaker or disconnector positions not are available for deciding if energizing is

allowed, it is considered to be allowed to manually energize. This is only allowed
for manual energizing in 1 breaker and Tie breaker arrangements. Manual
energization of a completely open diameter in 1 1/2 CB switchgear is allowed by
internal logic.

Voltage selection for a single circuit breaker with double busbars

The setting CBConfig selected for Double Bus activates the voltage selection for
single CB and double busbars. This function uses the binary input from the
disconnectors auxiliary contacts B1QOPEN-B1QCLD for Bus 1, and B2QOPEN-
B2QCLD for Bus 2 to select between bus 1 and bus 2 voltages. If the disconnector
connected to bus 1 is closed and the disconnector connected to bus 2 is opened the
bus 1 voltage is used. All other combinations use the bus 2 voltage. The outputs
B1SEL and B2SEL respectively indicate the selected Bus voltage.

The function checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2 and line voltage
transformers. Inputs UB1OK-UB1FF supervise the MCB for Bus 1 and UB2OK-
UB2FF supervises the MCB for Bus 2. ULN1OK and ULN1FF supervises the
MCB for the Line voltage transformer. The inputs fail (FF) or healthy (OK) can
alternatively be used dependent on the available signal. If a VT failure is detected
in the selected voltage source an output signal USELFAIL is set. This output signal
is true if the selected bus or line voltages have a VT failure. This output as well as
the function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK. The function logic
diagram is shown in figure 363.

724
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

B1QOPEN
B1SEL
B1QCLD AND

B2QOPEN B2SEL
AND
1
B2QCLD
invalidSelection
AND

bus1Voltage busVoltage

bus2Voltage

UB1OK AND
UB1FF OR
OR selectedFuseOK
AND
UB2OK AND
UB2FF OR USELFAIL
AND

ULN1OK
ULN1FF OR

BLOCK

en05000779-2.vsd
IEC05000779 V2 EN

Figure 363: Logic diagram for the voltage selection function of a single circuit breaker with double busbars

Voltage selection for a 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangement

Note that with 1 breaker schemes three Synchrocheck functions must be used for
the complete diameter. Below, the scheme for one Bus breaker and the Tie breaker
is described.

With the setting parameter CBConfig the selection of actual CB location in the 1
1/2 circuit breaker switchgear is done. The settings are: 1 1/2 Bus CB, 1 1/2 alt.
Bus CB or Tie CB.

This voltage selection function uses the binary inputs from the disconnectors and
circuit breakers auxiliary contacts to select the right voltage for the SESRSYN
function. For the bus circuit breaker one side of the circuit breaker is connected to
the busbar and the other side is connected either to line 1, line 2 or the other busbar
depending on the best selection of voltage circuit.

Inputs LN1QOPEN-LN1QCLD, B1QOPEN-B1QCLD, B2QOPEN-B2QCLD,

LN2QOPEN-LN2QCLD are inputs for the position of the Line disconnectors
respectively the Bus and Tie breakers. The outputs LN1SEL, LN2SEL and B2SEL

725
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

will give indication of the selected Line voltage as a reference to the fixed Bus 1
voltage, which indicates B1SEL.

The fuse supervision is connected to ULN1OK-ULN1FF, ULN2OK-ULN2FF and

with alternative Healthy or Failing fuse signals depending on what is available
from each fuse (MCB).

The tie circuit breaker is connected either to bus 1 or line 1 voltage on one side and
the other side is connected either to bus 2 or line 2 voltage. Four different output
combinations are possible, bus to bus, bus to line, line to bus and line to line.

The line 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is closed.

The bus 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is open and the bus 1
circuit breaker is closed.
The line 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is closed.
The bus 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is open and the bus 2
circuit breaker is closed.

The function also checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2, line 1 and line 2.
If a VT failure is detected in the selected voltage an output signal USELFAIL is
set. This output signal is true if the selected bus or line voltages have a MCB trip.
This output as well as the function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK.
The function block diagram for the voltage selection of a bus circuit breaker is
shown in figure 364 and for the tie circuit breaker in figure 365.

726
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

LN1QOPEN
AND
LN1SEL
LN1QCLD

B1QOPEN
LN2SEL
B1QCLD AND AND

OR
B2SEL
LN2QOPEN
AND invalidSelection
LN2QCLD AND
AND
B2QOPEN
B2QCLD AND

line1Voltage lineVoltage

line2Voltage

bus2Voltage

UB1OK
UB1FF OR

OR selectedFuseOK
UB2OK AND
AND
UB2FF OR

USELFAIL
ULN1OK AND
AND
ULN1FF OR

ULN2OK
AND
ULN2FF OR

BLOCK

en05000780-2.vsd

IEC05000780 V2 EN

Figure 364: Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for a bus circuit breaker in a 1 1/2
breaker arrangement

727
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

LN1QOPEN
AND
LN1SEL
LN1QCLD
B1SEL
1

B1QOPEN AND
AND
B1QCLD AND

line1Voltage busVoltage

bus1Voltage
LN2QOPEN
LN2SEL
LN2QCLD AND
B2SEL
1
invalidSelection
OR
B2QOPEN AND
AND
B2QCLD AND

line2Voltage lineVoltage

bus2Voltage

UB1OK AND
UB1FF OR

OR selectedFuseOK
UB2OK AND
AND
UB2FF OR

USELFAIL
ULN1OK AND
AND
ULN1FF OR

ULN2OK
AND
ULN2FF OR

BLOCK

en05000781-2.vsd

IEC05000781 V2 EN

Figure 365: Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for the tie circuit breaker in 1 1/2
breaker arrangement.

728
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

14.1.8 Technical data

Table 425: SESRSYN technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Phase shift, jline - jbus (-180 to 180) degrees -

Voltage high limit for (50.0-120.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur at U Ur

synchronizing and 0.5% of U at U > Ur
synchrocheck
Reset ratio, synchrocheck > 95% -
Frequency difference limit (0.003-1.000) Hz 2.5 mHz
between bus and line for
synchrocheck
Phase angle difference limit (5.0-90.0) degrees 2.0 degrees
between bus and line for
synchrocheck
Voltage difference limit (0.02-0.5) p.u 0.5% of Ur
between bus and line for
synchronizing and
synchrocheck
Time delay output for (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
synchrocheck when angle greater
difference between bus and
line jumps from PhaseDiff +
2 degrees to PhaseDiff - 2
degrees
Frequency difference (0.003-0.250) Hz 2.5 mHz
minimum limit for
synchronizing
Frequency difference (0.050-0.500) Hz 2.5 mHz
maximum limit for
synchronizing
Maximum allowed frequency (0.000-0.500) Hz/s 10.0 mHz/s
rate of change
Breaker closing pulse (0.050-60.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms whichever is
duration greater
tMaxSynch, which resets (0.000-6000.00) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
synchronizing function if no greater
close has been made before
set time
Minimum time to accept (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
synchronizing conditions greater
Voltage high limit for (50.0-120.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur at U Ur
energizing check 0.5% of U at U > Ur

Reset ratio, voltage high limit > 95% -

Voltage low limit for
energizing check
Reset ratio, voltage low limit
Maximum voltage for
energizing
(10.0-80.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur
< 105% -
(50.0-180.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur at U Ur
0.5% of U at U > Ur

Table continues on next page

729
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Function Range or value Accuracy

Time delay for energizing (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 100 ms whichever is
check when voltage jumps greater
from 0 to 90% of Urated
Operate time for Min = 15 ms
synchrocheck function when Max = 30 ms
angle difference between
bus and line jumps from
PhaseDiff + 2 degrees to
PhaseDiff - 2 degrees
Operate time for energizing Min = 70 ms
function when voltage jumps Max = 90 ms
from 0 to 90% of Urated

14.2 Interlocking

14.2.1 Functionality
The interlocking functionality blocks the possibility to operate high-voltage
switching devices, for instance when a disconnector is under load, in order to
prevent material damage and/or accidental human injury.

Each control IED has interlocking functions for different switchyard arrangements,
each handling the interlocking of one bay. The interlocking functionality in each
IED is not dependent on any central function. For the station-wide interlocking, the
IEDs communicate via the station bus or by using hard wired binary inputs/outputs.

The interlocking conditions depend on the circuit configuration and status of the
system at any given time.

14.2.2 Operation principle

The interlocking function consists of software modules located in each control
IED. The function is distributed and not dependent on any central function.
Communication between modules in different bays is performed via the station bus.

The reservation function (see section "Functionality") is used to ensure that HV

apparatuses that might affect the interlock are blocked during the time gap, which
arises between position updates. This can be done by means of the communication
system, reserving all HV apparatuses that might influence the interlocking
condition of the intended operation. The reservation is maintained until the
operation is performed.

After the selection and reservation of an apparatus, the function has complete data
on the status of all apparatuses in the switchyard that are affected by the selection.
Other operators cannot interfere with the reserved apparatus or the status of
switching devices that may affect it.

730
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

The open or closed positions of the HV apparatuses are inputs to software modules
distributed in the control IEDs. Each module contains the interlocking logic for a
bay. The interlocking logic in a module is different, depending on the bay function
and the switchyard arrangements, that is, double-breaker or 1 1/2 breaker bays have
different modules. Specific interlocking conditions and connections between
standard interlocking modules are performed with an engineering tool. Bay-level
interlocking signals can include the following kind of information:

Positions of HV apparatuses (sometimes per phase)

Valid positions (if evaluated in the control module)
External release (to add special conditions for release)
Line voltage (to block operation of line earthing switch)
Output signals to release the HV apparatus

The interlocking module is connected to the surrounding functions within a bay as

shown in figure 366.

Apparatus control
Interlocking
modules
modules in
SCILO SCSWI
other bays SXSWI

Apparatus control
modules
Interlocking SCILO SCSWI SXCBR
module

Apparatus control
modules
en04000526.vsd SCILO SCSWI SXSWI

IEC04000526 V1 EN

Figure 366: Interlocking module on bay level

Bays communicate via the station bus and can convey information regarding the
following:

Unearthed busbars
Busbars connected together
Other bays connected to a busbar
Received data from other bays is valid

Figure 367 illustrates the data exchange principle.

731
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Station bus

Bay 1 Bay n Bus coupler

Disc QB1 and QB2 closed Disc QB1 and QB2 closed WA1 unearthed
WA1 unearthed
WA1 and WA2 interconn

...
WA1 not earthed WA1 not earthed
WA2 not earthed WA2 not earthed WA1 and WA2 interconn
WA1 and WA2 interconn WA1 and WA2 interconn in other bay

..
WA1

WA2
QB1 QB2 QB1 QB2 QB1 QB2 QC1 QC2

QA1 QA1 QA1

QB9 QB9

en05000494.vsd
IEC05000494 V1 EN

Figure 367: Data exchange between interlocking modules

When invalid data such as intermediate position, loss of a control IED, or input
board error are used as conditions for the interlocking condition in a bay, a release
for execution of the function will not be given.

On the local HMI an override function exists, which can be used to bypass the
interlocking function in cases where not all the data required for the condition is valid.

For all interlocking modules these general rules apply:

The interlocking conditions for opening or closing of disconnectors and

earthing switches are always identical.
Earthing switches on the line feeder end, for example, rapid earthing switches,
are normally interlocked only with reference to the conditions in the bay where
they are located, not with reference to switches on the other side of the line. So
a line voltage indication may be included into line interlocking modules. If
there is no line voltage supervision within the bay, then the appropriate inputs
must be set to no voltage, and the operator must consider this when operating.
Earthing switches can only be operated on isolated sections for example,
without load/voltage. Circuit breaker contacts cannot be used to isolate a
section, that is, the status of the circuit breaker is irrelevant as far as the
earthing switch operation is concerned.
Disconnectors cannot break power current or connect different voltage
systems. Disconnectors in series with a circuit breaker can only be operated if
the circuit breaker is open, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel with other
closed connections. Other disconnectors can be operated if one side is
completely isolated, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel to other closed
connections, or if they are earthed on both sides.
Circuit breaker closing is only interlocked against running disconnectors in its
bay or additionally in a transformer bay against the disconnectors and earthing

732
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

switch on the other side of the transformer, if there is no disconnector between

CB and transformer.
Circuit breaker opening is only interlocked in a bus-coupler bay, if a bus bar
transfer is in progress.

To make the implementation of the interlocking function easier, a number of

standardized and tested software interlocking modules containing logic for the
interlocking conditions are available:

Line for double and transfer busbars, ABC_LINE

Bus for double and transfer busbars, ABC_BC
Transformer bay for double busbars, AB_TRAFO
Bus-section breaker for double busbars, A1A2_BS
Bus-section disconnector for double busbars, A1A2_DC
Busbar earthing switch, BB_ES
Double CB Bay, DB_BUS_A, DB_LINE, DB_BUS_B
1 1/2-CB diameter, BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN, BH_LINE_B

The interlocking conditions can be altered, to meet the customer specific

requirements, by adding configurable logic by means of the graphical configuration
tool PCM600. The inputs Qx_EXy on the interlocking modules are used to add
these specific conditions.

The input signals EXDU_xx shall be set to true if there is no transmission error at
the transfer of information from other bays. Required signals with designations
ending in TR are intended for transfer to other bays.

14.2.3 Logical node for interlocking SCILO

14.2.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Logical node for interlocking SCILO - 3

14.2.3.2 Functionality

The Logical node for interlocking SCILO function is used to enable a switching
operation if the interlocking conditions permit. SCILO function itself does not
provide any interlocking functionality. The interlocking conditions are generated in
separate function blocks containing the interlocking logic.

733
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

14.2.3.3 Function block

SCILO
POSOPEN EN_OPEN
POSCLOSE EN_CLOSE
OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN

IEC05000359-2-en.vsd
IEC05000359 V2 EN

Figure 368: SCILO function block

14.2.3.4 Signals
Table 426: SCILO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open position of switch device
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Closed position of switch device
OPEN_EN BOOLEAN 0 Open operation from interlocking logic is enabled
CLOSE_EN BOOLEAN 0 Close operation from interlocking logic is enabled

Table 427: SCILO Output signals

Name Type Description
EN_OPEN BOOLEAN Open operation at closed or interm. or bad pos. is
enabled
EN_CLOSE BOOLEAN Close operation at open or interm. or bad pos. is
enabled

14.2.3.5 Logic diagram

The function contains logic to enable the open and close commands respectively if
the interlocking conditions are fulfilled. That means also, if the switch has a
defined end position for example, open, then the appropriate enable signal (in this
case EN_OPEN) is false. The enable signals EN_OPEN and EN_CLOSE can be
true at the same time only in the intermediate and bad position state and if they are
enabled by the interlocking function. The position inputs come from the logical
nodes Circuit breaker/Circuit switch (SXCBR/SXSWI) and the enable signals
come from the interlocking logic. The outputs are connected to the logical node
Switch controller (SCSWI). One instance per switching device is needed.

734
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

POSOPEN SCILO
POSCLOSE =1 1
EN_OPEN
&
>1
&

OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN & EN_CLOSE
>1
&
en04000525.vsd

IEC04000525 V1 EN

Figure 369: SCILO function logic diagram

14.2.4 Interlocking for busbar earthing switch BB_ES

14.2.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for busbar earthing switch BB_ES - 3

14.2.4.2 Functionality

The interlocking for busbar earthing switch (BB_ES) function is used for one
busbar earthing switch on any busbar parts according to figure 370.

QC

en04000504.vsd
IEC04000504 V1 EN

Figure 370: Switchyard layout BB_ES

14.2.4.3 Function block

BB_ES
QC_OP QCREL
QC_CL QCITL
BB_DC_OP BBESOPTR
VP_BB_DC BBESCLTR
EXDU_BB

IEC05000347-2-en.vsd
IEC05000347 V2 EN

Figure 371: BB_ES function block

735
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

14.2.4.4 Logic diagram

BB_ES
VP_BB_DC QCREL
BB_DC_OP QCITL
EXDU_BB & 1

QC_OP BBESOPTR
QC_CL BBESCLTR
en04000546.vsd

IEC04000546 V1 EN

14.2.4.5 Signals
Table 428: BB_ES Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QC_OP BOOLEAN 0 Busbar earthing switch QC is in open position
QC_CL BOOLEAN 0 Busbar earthing switch QC is in closed position
BB_DC_OP BOOLEAN 0 All disconnectors on this busbar part are open
VP_BB_DC BOOLEAN 0 Status for all disconnectors on this busbar part
are valid
EXDU_BB BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bays with disc on this
busbar part

Table 429: BB_ES Output signals

Name Type Description
QCREL BOOLEAN Switching of QC is allowed
QCITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC is forbidden
BBESOPTR BOOLEAN QC on this busbar part is in open position
BBESCLTR BOOLEAN QC on this busbar part is in closed position

14.2.5 Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS

14.2.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS - 3

14.2.5.2 Functionality

The interlocking for bus-section breaker (A1A2_BS) function is used for one bus-
section circuit breaker between section 1 and 2 according to figure 372. The
function can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section circuit
breaker.

736
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)

QC1 QB1 QB2 QC2

QA1

QC3 QC4

en04000516.vsd
A1A2_BS
IEC04000516 V1 EN

Figure 372: Switchyard layout A1A2_BS

14.2.5.3 Function block

A1A2_BS
QA1_OP QA1OPREL
QA1_CL QA1OPITL
QB1_OP QA1CLREL
QB1_CL QA1CLITL
QB2_OP QB1REL
QB2_CL QB1ITL
QC3_OP QB2REL
QC3_CL QB2ITL
QC4_OP QC3REL
QC4_CL QC3ITL
S1QC1_OP QC4REL
S1QC1_CL QC4ITL
S2QC2_OP S1S2OPTR
S2QC2_CL S1S2CLTR
BBTR_OP QB1OPTR
VP_BBTR QB1CLTR
EXDU_12 QB2OPTR
EXDU_ES QB2CLTR
QA1O_EX1 VPS1S2TR
QA1O_EX2 VPQB1TR
QA1O_EX3 VPQB2TR
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2

IEC05000348-2-en.vsd
IEC05000348 V2 EN

Figure 373: A1A2_BS function block

737
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

14.2.5.4 Logic diagram

A1A2_BS
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC4_OP
QC4_CL =1 VPQC4
S1QC1_OP
S1QC1_CL =1 VPS1QC1
S2QC2_OP
S2QC2_CL =1 VPS2QC2
VPQB1
QB1_OP QA1OPREL
& >1
QA1O_EX1 QA1OPITL
1
VPQB2
QB2_OP
&
QA1O_EX2
VP_BBTR
BBTR_OP
&
EXDU_12
QA1O_EX3

VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB2 & QA1CLITL
1
VPQA1
VPQC3 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC4 QB1ITL
1
VPS1QC1
QA1_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
S1QC1_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1

VPQC3
VPS1QC1
&
QC3_CL
S1QC1_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2

en04000542.vsd

IEC04000542 V1 EN

738
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

VPQA1
VPQC3 QB2REL
VPQC4 & >1
QB2ITL
VPS2QC2 1
QA1_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
S2QC2_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQC4
VPS2QC2
&
QC4_CL
S2QC2_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2

VPQB1 QC3REL
VPQB2 QC3ITL
QB1_OP & 1
QC4REL
QB2_OP
QC4ITL
1

QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR

QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
QB1_OP S1S2OPTR
QB2_OP >1 S1S2CLTR
QA1_OP 1
VPQB1
VPS1S2TR
VPQB2 &
VPQA1
en04000543.vsd

IEC04000543 V1 EN

14.2.5.5 Signals
Table 430: A1A2_BS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QC4_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in open position
QC4_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in closed position
S1QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 on bus section 1 is in open position
S1QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 on bus section 1 is in closed position
S2QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 on bus section 2 is in open position
S2QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 on bus section 2 is in closed position
BBTR_OP BOOLEAN 0 No busbar transfer is in progress
VP_BBTR BOOLEAN 0 Status are valid for app. involved in the busbar
transfer
Table continues on next page

739
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Name Type Default Description

EXDU_12 BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay connected to
busbar 1 and 2
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bays containing earth. sw.
QC1 or QC2
QA1O_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QA1O_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QA1O_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2

Table 431: A1A2_BS Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1OPREL BOOLEAN Opening of QA1 is allowed
QA1OPITL BOOLEAN Opening of QA1 is forbidden
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QC3REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is allowed
QC3ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is forbidden
QC4REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC4 is allowed
QC4ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC4 is forbidden
S1S2OPTR BOOLEAN No bus section connection between bus section 1
and 2
S1S2CLTR BOOLEAN Bus coupler connection between bus section 1
and 2 exists
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position
QB2OPTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in closed position
VPS1S2TR BOOLEAN Status of the app. between bus section 1 and 2
are valid
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB2TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)

14.2.6 Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC

740
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

14.2.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for bus-section A1A2_DC - 3
disconnector

14.2.6.2 Functionality

The interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC) function is used for one
bus-section disconnector between section 1 and 2 according to figure 374.
A1A2_DC function can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section
disconnector.

QB
WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)

QC1 QC2

A1A2_DC en04000492.vsd

IEC04000492 V1 EN

Figure 374: Switchyard layout A1A2_DC

14.2.6.3 Function block

A1A2_DC
QB_OP QBOPREL
QB_CL QBOPITL
S1QC1_OP QBCLREL
S1QC1_CL QBCLITL
S2QC2_OP DCOPTR
S2QC2_CL DCCLTR
S1DC_OP VPDCTR
S2DC_OP
VPS1_DC
VPS2_DC
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BB
QBCL_EX1
QBCL_EX2
QBOP_EX1
QBOP_EX2
QBOP_EX3

IEC05000349-2-en.vsd
IEC05000349 V2 EN

Figure 375: A1A2_DC function block

741
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

14.2.6.4 Logic diagram

A1A2_DC
QB_OP
VPQB VPDCTR
QB_CL =1
DCOPTR
DCCLTR
S1QC1_OP
VPS1QC1
S1QC1_CL =1
S2QC2_OP
VPS2QC2
S2QC2_CL =1
VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
VPS1_DC & >1 QBOPREL
S1QC1_OP QBOPITL
1
S2QC2_OP
S1DC_OP
EXDU_ES

EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX1

VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
VPS2_DC &
S1QC1_OP
S2QC2_OP
S2DC_OP
EXDU_ES

EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX2

VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
S1QC1_CL &
S2QC2_CL
EXDU_ES
QBOP_EX3

en04000544.vsd

IEC04000544 V1 EN

IEC04000545 V1 EN

14.2.6.5 Signals
Table 432: A1A2_DC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QB_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB is in open position
QB_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB is in closed position
S1QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 on bus section 1 is in open position
S1QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 on bus section 1 is in closed position
Table continues on next page

742
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Name Type Default Description

S2QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 on bus section 2 is in open position
S2QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 on bus section 2 is in closed position
S1DC_OP BOOLEAN 0 All disconnectors on bus section 1 are in open
position
S2DC_OP BOOLEAN 0 All disconnectors on bus section 2 are in open
position
VPS1_DC BOOLEAN 0 Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 1
are valid
VPS2_DC BOOLEAN 0 Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 2
are valid
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bays containing earth. sw.
QC1 or QC2
EXDU_BB BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bays with disc conn to
section 1 and 2
QBCL_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External close condition for section disconnector
QB
QBCL_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External close condition for section disconnector
QB
QBOP_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for section disconnector
QB
QBOP_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for section disconnector
QB
QBOP_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for section disconnector
QB

Table 433: A1A2_DC Output signals

Name Type Description
QBOPREL BOOLEAN Opening of QB is allowed
QBOPITL BOOLEAN Opening of QB is forbidden
QBCLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QB is allowed
QBCLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QB is forbidden
DCOPTR BOOLEAN The bus section disconnector is in open position
DCCLTR BOOLEAN The bus section disconnector is in closed position
VPDCTR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB is valid (open or closed)

14.2.7 Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC

14.2.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC - 3

743
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

14.2.7.2 Functionality

The interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) function is used for a bus-coupler
bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 376. The
function can also be used for a single busbar arrangement with transfer busbar or
double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
QB1 QB2 QB20 QB7
QC1

QA1

QC2

en04000514.vsd
IEC04000514 V1 EN

Figure 376: Switchyard layout ABC_BC

744
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

14.2.7.3 Function block

ABC_BC
QA1_OP QA1OPREL
QA1_CL QA1OPITL
QB1_OP QA1CLREL
QB1_CL QA1CLITL
QB2_OP QB1REL
QB2_CL QB1ITL
QB7_OP QB2REL
QB7_CL QB2ITL
QB20_OP QB7REL
QB20_CL QB7ITL
QC1_OP QB20REL
QC1_CL QB20ITL
QC2_OP QC1REL
QC2_CL QC1ITL
QC11_OP QC2REL
QC11_CL QC2ITL
QC21_OP QB1OPTR
QC21_CL QB1CLTR
QC71_OP QB220OTR
QC71_CL QB220CTR
BBTR_OP QB7OPTR
BC_12_CL QB7CLTR
VP_BBTR QB12OPTR
VP_BC_12 QB12CLTR
EXDU_ES BC12OPTR
EXDU_12 BC12CLTR
EXDU_BC BC17OPTR
QA1O_EX1 BC17CLTR
QA1O_EX2 BC27OPTR
QA1O_EX3 BC27CLTR
QB1_EX1 VPQB1TR
QB1_EX2 VQB220TR
QB1_EX3 VPQB7TR
QB2_EX1 VPQB12TR
QB2_EX2 VPBC12TR
QB2_EX3 VPBC17TR
QB20_EX1 VPBC27TR
QB20_EX2
QB7_EX1
QB7_EX2

IEC05000350-2-en.vsd
IEC05000350 V2 EN

Figure 377: ABC_BC function block

745
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

14.2.7.4 Logic diagram

ABC_BC
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB20_OP
QB20_CL =1 VPQB20
QB7_OP
QB7_CL =1 VPQB7
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
QC71_OP
QC71_CL =1 VPQC71
VPQB1
QB1_OP QA1OPREL
& >1 QA1OPITL
QA1O_EX1 1
VPQB20
QB20_OP &
QA1O_EX2
VP_BBTR
BBTR_OP &
EXDU_12
QA1O_EX3
VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB2 QA1CLITL
VPQB7 & 1
VPQB20
en04000533.vsd

IEC04000533 V1 EN

VPQA1
VPQB2 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB1ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQB2
VP_BC_12
&
QB2_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB1_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC11
&
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX3

en04000534.vsd

IEC04000534 V1 EN

746
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

VPQA1
VPQB1 QB2REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB2ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQB1
VP_BC_12
&
QB1_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB2_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC21
&
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX3

en04000535.vsd

IEC04000535 V1 EN

VPQA1
VPQB20 QB7REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB7ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC71
QA1_OP
QB20_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC71
&
QC2_CL
QC71_CL
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX2
VPQA1
VPQB7 QB20REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB20ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB7_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB20_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC21
&
QC2_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB20_EX2

en04000536.vsd

IEC04000536 V1 EN

747
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB20 QC1ITL
& 1
VPQB7
QC2REL
VPQB2
QB1_OP QC2ITL
1
QB20_OP
QB7_OP
QB2_OP
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
QB20_OP QB220OTR
QB2_OP & QB220CTR
VPQB20 1
VQB220TR
VPQB2 &
QB7_OP QB7OPTR
QB7_CL QB7CLTR
VPQB7 VPQB7TR
QB1_OP QB12OPTR
QB2_OP >1 QB12CLTR
VPQB1 1
VPQB12TR
VPQB2 &
QA1_OP BC12OPTR
QB1_OP >1 BC12CLTR
QB20_OP 1
VPQA1
VPBC12TR
VPQB1 &
VPQB20
QA1_OP BC17OPTR
QB1_OP >1 BC17CLTR
QB7_OP 1
VPQA1
VPBC17TR
VPQB1 &
VPQB7
QA1_OP BC27OPTR
QB2_OP >1 BC27CLTR
QB7_OP 1
VPQA1
VPBC27TR
VPQB2 &
VPQB7
en04000537.vsd

IEC04000537 V1 EN

14.2.7.5 Signals
Table 434: ABC_BC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QB7_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB7 is in open position
QB7_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB7 is in closed position
QB20_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB20 is in open position
QB20_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB20 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open
position
Table continues on next page

748
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Name Type Default Description

QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed
position
QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open
position
QC21_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed
position
QC71_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in open
position
QC71_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in closed
position
BBTR_OP BOOLEAN 0 No busbar transfer is in progress
BC_12_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar
WA1 and WA2
VP_BBTR BOOLEAN 0 Status are valid for app. involved in the busbar
transfer
VP_BC_12 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and
WA2 are valid
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay containing earthing
switches
EXDU_12 BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay connected to WA1/
WA2 busbars
EXDU_BC BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any other bus coupler
bay
QA1O_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QA1O_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QA1O_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB20_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB20
QB20_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB20
QB7_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB7
QB7_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB7

Table 435: ABC_BC Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1OPREL BOOLEAN Opening of QA1 is allowed
QA1OPITL BOOLEAN Opening of QA1 is forbidden
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
Table continues on next page

749
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Name Type Description

QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QB7REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB7 is allowed
QB7ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB7 is forbidden
QB20REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB20 is allowed
QB20ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB20 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position
QB220OTR BOOLEAN QB2 and QB20 are in open position
QB220CTR BOOLEAN QB2 or QB20 or both are not in open position
QB7OPTR BOOLEAN QB7 is in open position
QB7CLTR BOOLEAN QB7 is in closed position
QB12OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position
QB12CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 and QB2 are not in open position
BC12OPTR BOOLEAN No connection via the own bus coupler between
WA1 and WA2
BC12CLTR BOOLEAN Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between
WA1 and WA2
BC17OPTR BOOLEAN No connection via the own bus coupler between
WA1 and WA7
BC17CLTR BOOLEAN Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between
WA1 and WA7
BC27OPTR BOOLEAN No connection via the own bus coupler between
WA2 and WA7
BC27CLTR BOOLEAN Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between
WA2 and WA7
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
VQB220TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 and QB20 are valid (open
or closed)
VPQB7TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB7 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB12TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or
closed)
VPBC12TR BOOLEAN Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and
WA2 are valid
VPBC17TR BOOLEAN Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and
WA7 are valid
VPBC27TR BOOLEAN Status of the bus coupler app. between WA2 and
WA7 are valid

750
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

14.2.8 Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB BH

14.2.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter BH_CONN - 3
Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter BH_LINE_A - 3
Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter BH_LINE_B - 3

14.2.8.2 Functionality

The interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter (BH_CONN, BH_LINE_A,

BH_LINE_B) functions are used for lines connected to a 1 1/2 breaker diameter
according to figure 378.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1 QB2
QC1 QC1

QA1 QA1

QC2 QC2

QB6 QB6

QC3 QC3
BH_LINE_A BH_LINE_B

QB61 QA1 QB62

QB9 QB9
QC1 QC2
QC9 QC9

BH_CONN
en04000513.vsd

IEC04000513 V1 EN

Figure 378: Switchyard layout 1 1/2 breaker

Three types of interlocking modules per diameter are defined. BH_LINE_A and
BH_LINE_B are the connections from a line to a busbar. BH_CONN is the
connection between the two lines of the diameter in the 1 1/2 breaker switchyard
layout.

751
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

14.2.8.3 Function blocks

BH_LINE_A
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB6_OP QB6REL
QB6_CL QB6ITL
QB1_OP QB1REL
QB1_CL QB1ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QC3_OP QC3REL
QC3_CL QC3ITL
QB9_OP QB9REL
QB9_CL QB9ITL
QC9_OP QC9REL
QC9_CL QC9ITL
CQA1_OP QB1OPTR
CQA1_CL QB1CLTR
CQB61_OP VPQB1TR
CQB61_CL
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL
QC11_OP
QC11_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
EXDU_ES
QB6_EX1
QB6_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5
QB9_EX6
QB9_EX7

IEC05000352-2-en.vsd
IEC05000352 V2 EN

Figure 379: BH_LINE_A function block

752
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

BH_LINE_B
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB6_OP QB6REL
QB6_CL QB6ITL
QB2_OP QB2REL
QB2_CL QB2ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QC3_OP QC3REL
QC3_CL QC3ITL
QB9_OP QB9REL
QB9_CL QB9ITL
QC9_OP QC9REL
QC9_CL QC9ITL
CQA1_OP QB2OPTR
CQA1_CL QB2CLTR
CQB62_OP VPQB2TR
CQB62_CL
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL
QC21_OP
QC21_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
EXDU_ES
QB6_EX1
QB6_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5
QB9_EX6
QB9_EX7

IEC05000353-2-en.vsd
IEC05000353 V2 EN

Figure 380: BH_LINE_B function block

BH_CONN
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB61_OP QB61REL
QB61_CL QB61ITL
QB62_OP QB62REL
QB62_CL QB62ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
1QC3_OP
1QC3_CL
2QC3_OP
2QC3_CL
QB61_EX1
QB61_EX2
QB62_EX1
QB62_EX2

IEC05000351-2-en.vsd
IEC05000351 V2 EN

Figure 381: BH_CONN function block

753
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

14.2.8.4 Logic diagrams

BH_CONN
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB61_OP
QB61_CL =1 VPQB61
QB62_OP
QB62_CL =1 VPQB62
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
1QC3_OP
1QC3_CL =1 VP1QC3
2QC3_OP
2QC3_CL =1 VP2QC3
VPQB61 QA1CLREL
VPQB62 & QA1CLITL
1
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB61REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB61ITL
1
VP1QC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
1QC3_OP
QB61_EX1
VPQC1
VP1QC3
&
QC1_CL
1QC3_CL
QB61_EX2
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB62REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB62ITL
1
VP2QC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
2QC3_OP
QB62_EX1
VPQC2
VP2QC3
&
QC2_CL
2QC3_CL
QB62_EX2
VPQB61 QC1REL
VPQB62 QC1ITL
& 1
QB61_OP QC2REL
QB62_OP QC2ITL
1
en04000560.vsd

IEC04000560 V1 EN

754
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

BH_LINE_A
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB6_OP
QB6_CL =1 VPQB6
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
CQA1_OP
CQA1_CL =1 VPCQA1
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL =1 VPCQC1
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL =1 VPCQC2
CQB61_OP
CQB61_CL =1 VPCQB61
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB6 QA1CLITL
& 1
VPQB9
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB6REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB6ITL
1
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB6_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
&
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB6_EX2
en04000554.vsd

IEC04000554 V1 EN

755
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

VPQA1
VPQC1 QB1REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB1ITL
1
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1

VPQC1
VPQC11
&
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2

VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB6 QC1ITL
QB1_OP & 1
QC2REL
QB6_OP QC2ITL
VPQB6 1
VPQB9 QC3REL
VPCQB61 &
QC3ITL
1
QB6_OP
QB9_OP
CQB61_OP
VPQA1 QB9REL
VPQB6 QB9ITL
VPQC9 & >1 1

VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPCQA1
VPCQB61
VPCQC1
VPCQC2
QB9_EX1
QB6_OP
QB9_EX2
>1
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP &
QB9_EX3

en04000555.vsd

IEC04000555 V1 EN

CQB61_OP
QB9_EX4
>1 & >1
CQA1_OP
CQC1_OP
CQC2_OP &
QB9_EX5
QC9_OP
QC3_OP
QB9_EX6
VPQC9
VPQC3
&
QC9_CL
QC3_CL
QB9_EX7
VPQB9 QC9REL
VPVOLT QC9ITL
QB9_OP & 1

VOLT_OFF
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
en04000556.vsd

IEC04000556 V1 EN

756
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

BH_LINE_B
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QB6_OP
QB6_CL =1 VPQB6
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
CQA1_OP
CQA1_CL =1 VPCQA1
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL =1 VPCQC1
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL =1 VPCQC2
CQB62_OP
CQB62_CL =1 VPCQB62
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQB2 QA1CLREL
VPQB6 QA1CLITL
& 1
VPQB9
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB6REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB6ITL
1
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB6_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
&
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB6_EX2
en04000557.vsd

IEC04000557 V1 EN

757
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

VPQA1
VPQC1 QB2REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB2ITL
1
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1

VPQC1
VPQC21
&
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2

VPQB2 QC1REL
VPQB6 QC1ITL
QB2_OP & 1
QC2REL
QB6_OP QC2ITL
VPQB6 1
VPQB9 QC3REL
VPCQB62 &
QC3ITL
1
QB6_OP
QB9_OP
CQB62_OP
VPQA1 QB9REL
VPQB6 QB9ITL
VPQC9 & >1 1

VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPCQA1
VPCQB62
VPCQC1
VPCQC2
QB9_EX1
QB6_OP
QB9_EX2
>1
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP &
QB9_EX3

en04000558.vsd

IEC04000558 V1 EN

CQB62_OP
QB9_EX4
>1 & >1
CQA1_OP
CQC1_OP
CQC2_OP &
QB9_EX5
QC9_OP
QC3_OP
QB9_EX6
VPQC9
VPQC3
&
QC9_CL
QC3_CL
QB9_EX7
VPQB9 QC9REL
VPVOLT QC9ITL
QB9_OP & 1

VOLT_OFF
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
en04000559.vsd

IEC04000559 V1 EN

758
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

14.2.8.5 Signals
Table 436: BH_LINE_A Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB6_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB6 is in open position
QB6_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB6 is in close position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QB9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in open position
QB9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in closed position
QC9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in open position
QC9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in closed position
CQA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQB61_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB61 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQB61_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB61 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open
position
QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed
position
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse)
failure
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bay containing earthing
switch QC11
QB6_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB6
QB6_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB6
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB9_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
Table continues on next page

759
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Name Type Default Description

QB9_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX4 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX5 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX6 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX7 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9

Table 437: BH_LINE_A Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB6REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB6 is allowed
QB6ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB6 is forbidden
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QC3REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is allowed
QC3ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is forbidden
QB9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is allowed
QB9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is forbidden
QC9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is allowed
QC9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is forbidden
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)

Table 438: BH_LINE_B Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB6_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB6 is in open position
QB6_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB6 is in close position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
Table continues on next page

760
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Name Type Default Description

QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QB9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in open position
QB9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in closed position
QC9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in open position
QC9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in closed position
CQA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQB62_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB62 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQB62_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB62 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open
position
QC21_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed
position
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse)
failure
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bay containing earthing
switch QC21
QB6_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB6
QB6_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB6
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB9_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX4 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX5 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX6 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX7 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9

761
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Table 439: BH_LINE_B Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB6REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB6 is allowed
QB6ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB6 is forbidden
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QC3REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is allowed
QC3ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is forbidden
QB9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is allowed
QB9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is forbidden
QC9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is allowed
QC9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is forbidden
QB2OPTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in closed position
VPQB2TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)

Table 440: BH_CONN Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB61_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB61 is in open position
QB61_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB61 is in closed position
QB62_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB62 is in open position
QB62_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB62 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
1QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 on line 1 is in open position
1QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 on line 1 is in closed position
2QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 on line 2 is in open position
2QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 on line 2 is in closed position
QB61_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB61
Table continues on next page

762
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Name Type Default Description

QB61_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB61
QB62_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB62
QB62_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB62

Table 441: BH_CONN Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB61REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB61 is allowed
QB61ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB61 is forbidden
QB62REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB62 is allowed
QB62ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB62 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden

14.2.9 Interlocking for double CB bay DB

14.2.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for double CB bay DB_BUS_A - 3
Interlocking for double CB bay DB_BUS_B - 3
Interlocking for double CB bay DB_LINE - 3

14.2.9.2 Functionality

The interlocking for a double busbar double circuit breaker bay including
DB_BUS_A, DB_BUS_B and DB_LINE functions are used for a line connected to
a double busbar arrangement according to figure 382.

763
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1 QB2
QC1 QC4

QA1 QA2

DB_BUS_A DB_BUS_B
QC2 QC5

QB61 QB62

QC3

QB9
DB_LINE

QC9

en04000518.vsd
IEC04000518 V1 EN

Figure 382: Switchyard layout double circuit breaker

Three types of interlocking modules per double circuit breaker bay are defined.
DB_BUS_A handles the circuit breaker QA1 that is connected to busbar WA1 and
the disconnectors and earthing switches of this section. DB_BUS_B handles the
circuit breaker QA2 that is connected to busbar WA2 and the disconnectors and
earthing switches of this section.

764
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

14.2.9.3 Logic diagrams

DB_BUS_A
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB61_OP
QB61_CL =1 VPQB61
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
VPQB61 QA1CLREL
VPQB1 & QA1CLITL
1
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB61REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB61ITL
1
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB61_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
&
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB61_EX2
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB1ITL
1
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1

VPQC1
VPQC11
&
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2

en04000547.vsd

IEC04000547 V1 EN

VPQB61 QC1REL
VPQB1 QC1ITL
& 1
QB61_OP QC2REL
QB1_OP QC2ITL
1
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
en04000548.vsd

IEC04000548 V1 EN

765
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

DB_BUS_B
QA2_OP
QA2_CL =1 VPQA2
QB62_OP
QB62_CL =1 VPQB62
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC4_OP
QC4_CL =1 VPQC4
QC5_OP
QC5_CL =1 VPQC5
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
VPQB62 QA2CLREL
VPQB2 & QA2CLITL
1
VPQA2
VPQC4 QB62REL
& >1
VPQC5 QB62ITL
1
VPQC3
QA2_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC3_OP
QB62_EX1
VPQC5
VPQC3
&
QC5_CL
QC3_CL
QB62_EX2
VPQA2
VPQC4 QB2REL
& >1
VPQC5 QB2ITL
1
VPQC21
QA2_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1

VPQC4
VPQC21
&
QC4_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2

en04000552.vsd

IEC04000552 V1 EN

VPQB62 QC4REL
VPQB2 QC4ITL
& 1
QB62_OP QC5REL
QB2_OP QC5ITL
1
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
en04000553.vsd

IEC04000553 V1 EN

766
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

DB_LINE
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QA2_OP
QA2_CL =1 VPQA2
QB61_OP
QB61_CL =1 VPQB61
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QB62_OP
QB62_CL =1 VPQB62
QC4_OP
QC4_CL =1 VPQC4
QC5_OP
QC5_CL =1 VPQC5
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQA1
VPQA2 QB9REL
VPQC1 & >1
QB9ITL
1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPQC4
VPQC5
VPQC9
QA1_OP
QA2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX1

& en04000549.vsd

IEC04000549 V1 EN

VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2 & >1
VPQC3
VPQC9
VPQB62
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC9_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_EX2
VPQA2
VPQB61
&
VPQC3
VPQC4
VPQC5
VPQC9
QA2_OP
QB61_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX3
VPQC3
VPQC9
&
VPQB61
VPQB62
QC3_OP
QC9_OP
QB61_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_EX4
VPQC3
VPQC9
&
QC3_CL
QC9_CL
QB9_EX5
en04000550.vsd

IEC04000550 V1 EN

767
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

VPQB61
VPQB62 QC3REL
VPQB9 &
QC3ITL
1
QB61_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_OP
VPQB9
VPVOLT QC9REL
QB9_OP &
QC9ITL
1
VOLT_OFF
en04000551.vsd

IEC04000551 V1 EN

14.2.9.4 Function block

DB_BUS_A
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB1_OP QB61REL
QB1_CL QB61ITL
QB61_OP QB1REL
QB61_CL QB1ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QC3_OP QB1OPTR
QC3_CL QB1CLTR
QC11_OP VPQB1TR
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB61_EX1
QB61_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2

IEC05000354-2-en.vsd
IEC05000354 V2 EN

Figure 383: DB_BUS_A function block

768
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

DB_LINE
QA1_OP QB9REL
QA1_CL QB9ITL
QA2_OP QC3REL
QA2_CL QC3ITL
QB61_OP QC9REL
QB61_CL QC9ITL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QB62_OP
QB62_CL
QC4_OP
QC4_CL
QC5_OP
QC5_CL
QB9_OP
QB9_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QC9_OP
QC9_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5

IEC05000356-2-en.vsd
IEC05000356 V2 EN

Figure 384: DB_LINE function block

DB_BUS_B
QA2_OP QA2CLREL
QA2_CL QA2CLITL
QB2_OP QB62REL
QB2_CL QB62ITL
QB62_OP QB2REL
QB62_CL QB2ITL
QC4_OP QC4REL
QC4_CL QC4ITL
QC5_OP QC5REL
QC5_CL QC5ITL
QC3_OP QB2OPTR
QC3_CL QB2CLTR
QC21_OP VPQB2TR
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB62_EX1
QB62_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2

IEC05000355-2-en.vsd
IEC05000355 V2 EN

Figure 385: DB_BUS_B function block

14.2.9.5 Signals
Table 442: DB_BUS_A Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
Table continues on next page

769
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Name Type Default Description

QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QB61_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB61 is in open position
QB61_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB61 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open
position
QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed
position
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bay containing earthing
switch QC11
QB61_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB61
QB61_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB61
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1

Table 443: DB_BUS_A Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB61REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB61 is allowed
QB61ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB61 is forbidden
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)

770
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Table 444: DB_BUS_B Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QA2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA2 is in open position
QA2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA2 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QB62_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB62 is in open position
QB62_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB62 is in closed position
QC4_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in open position
QC4_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in closed position
QC5_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC5 is in open position
QC5_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC5 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open
position
QC21_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed
position
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bay containing earthing
switch QC21
QB62_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB62
QB62_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB62
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2

Table 445: DB_BUS_B Output signals

Name Type Description
QA2CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA2 is allowed
QA2CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA2 is forbidden
QB62REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB62 is allowed
QB62ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB62 is forbidden
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QC4REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC4 is allowed
QC4ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC4 is forbidden
QC5REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC5 is allowed
QC5ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC5 is forbidden
QB2OPTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in closed position
VPQB2TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)

771
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Table 446: DB_LINE Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QA2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA2 is in open position
QA2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA2 is in closed position
QB61_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB61 is in open position
QB61_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB61 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QB62_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB62 is in open position
QB62_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB62 is in closed position
QC4_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in open position
QC4_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in closed position
QC5_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC5 is in open position
QC5_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC5 is in closed position
QB9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in open position
QB9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QC9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in open position
QC9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in closed position
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse)
failure
VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse)
failure
QB9_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX4 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX5 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9

Table 447: DB_LINE Output signals

Name Type Description
QB9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is allowed
QB9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is forbidden
QC3REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is allowed
QC3ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is forbidden
QC9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is allowed
QC9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is forbidden

772
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

14.2.10 Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE

14.2.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE - 3

14.2.10.2 Functionality

The interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE) function is used for a line connected to
a double busbar arrangement with a transfer busbar according to figure 386. The
function can also be used for a double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar
or a single busbar arrangement with/without transfer busbar.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
QB1 QB2 QB7
QC1

QA1

QC2

QB9
QC9

en04000478.vsd
IEC04000478 V1 EN

Figure 386: Switchyard layout ABC_LINE

773
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

14.2.10.3 Function block

ABC_LINE
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB9_OP QB9REL
QB9_CL QB9ITL
QB1_OP QB1REL
QB1_CL QB1ITL
QB2_OP QB2REL
QB2_CL QB2ITL
QB7_OP QB7REL
QB7_CL QB7ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QC9_OP QC9REL
QC9_CL QC9ITL
QC11_OP QB1OPTR
QC11_CL QB1CLTR
QC21_OP QB2OPTR
QC21_CL QB2CLTR
QC71_OP QB7OPTR
QC71_CL QB7CLTR
BB7_D_OP QB12OPTR
BC_12_CL QB12CLTR
BC_17_OP VPQB1TR
BC_17_CL VPQB2TR
BC_27_OP VPQB7TR
BC_27_CL VPQB12TR
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_12
VP_BC_17
VP_BC_27
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BPB
EXDU_BC
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB1_EX3
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB2_EX3
QB7_EX1
QB7_EX2
QB7_EX3
QB7_EX4

IEC05000357-2-en.vsd
IEC05000357 V2 EN

Figure 387: ABC_LINE function block

774
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

14.2.10.4 Logic diagram

ABC_LINE
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QA1CLREL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1 QA1CLITL
& 1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QB7_OP
QB7_CL =1 VPQB7
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
QC71_OP
QC71_CL =1 VPQC71
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB9REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB9ITL
1
VPQC9
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC9
&
QC2_CL
QC9_CL
QB9_EX2

en04000527.vsd

IEC04000527 V1 EN

775
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

VPQA1 QB1REL
& 1
VPQB2
VPQC1 1 QB1ITL
VPQC2
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES

QB1_EX1

VPQB2 &
VP_BC_12
QB2_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC

QB1_EX2

VPQC1 &
VPQC11
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES

QB1EX3

en04000528.vsd

IEC04000528 V1 EN

776
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

VPQA1 QB2REL
& 1
VPQB1
VPQC1 1 QB2ITL
VPQC2
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES

QB2_EX1

VPQB1 &
VP_BC_12
QB1_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC

QB2_EX2

VPQC1 &
VPQC21
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES

QB2_EX3

en04000529.vsd

IEC04000529 V1 EN

777
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

VPQC9 QB7REL
& >1
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D 1 QB7ITL
VP_BC_17
VP_BC_27
QC9_OP
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES

BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB

BC_17_OP
BC_27_OP
EXDU_BC
QB7_EX1

VPQA1
VPQB1
VPQC9
&
VPQB9
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_17
QA1_CL
QB1_CL
QC9_OP
QB9_CL
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES

BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_17_CL

EXDU_BC

QB7_EX2

IEC04000530 V1 EN

778
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

VPQA1
VPQB2
& >1
VPQC9
VPQB9
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_27
QA1_CL
QB2_CL
QC9_OP
QB9_CL
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES

BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_27_CL
EXDU_BC
QB7_EX3
VPQC9
VPQC71
&
QC9_CL
QC71_CL
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX4
VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB2 QC1ITL
VPQB9 & 1
QC2REL
QB1_OP
QB2_OP QC2ITL
1
QB9_OP
VPQB7
VPQB9 QC9REL
VPVOLT &
QC9ITL
QB7_OP 1
QB9_OP
VOLT_OFF
en04000531.vsd

IEC04000531 V1 EN

779
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
QB7_OP QB7OPTR
QB7_CL QB7CLTR
VPQB7 VPQB7TR
QB1_OP QB12OPTR
QB2_OP >1 QB12CLTR
VPQB1 1
VPQB12TR
VPQB2 &
en04000532.vsd

IEC04000532 V1 EN

14.2.10.5 Signals
Table 448: ABC_LINE Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in open position
QB9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QB7_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB7 is in open position
QB7_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB7 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QC9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in open position
QC9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in closed position
QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open
position
QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed
position
QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open
position
Table continues on next page

780
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Name Type Default Description

QC21_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed
position
QC71_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in open
position
QC71_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in closed
position
BB7_D_OP BOOLEAN 0 Disconnectors on busbar WA7 except in the own
bay are open
BC_12_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar
WA1 and WA2
BC_17_OP BOOLEAN 0 No bus coupler connection exists between busbar
WA1 and WA7
BC_17_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar
WA1 and WA7
BC_27_OP BOOLEAN 0 No bus coupler connection exists between busbar
WA2 and WA7
BC_27_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar
WA2 and WA7
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse)
failure
VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse)
failure
VP_BB7_D BOOLEAN 0 Switch status of the disconnectors on busbar
WA7 are valid
VP_BC_12 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and
WA2 are valid
VP_BC_17 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and
WA7 are valid
VP_BC_27 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA2 and
WA7 are valid
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay containing earthing
switches
EXDU_BPB BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay with disconnectors
on WA7
EXDU_BC BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bus coupler bay
QB9_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB7_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB7
Table continues on next page

781
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Name Type Default Description

QB7_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB7
QB7_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB7
QB7_EX4 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB7

Table 449: ABC_LINE Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is allowed
QB9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is forbidden
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QB7REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB7 is allowed
QB7ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB7 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QC9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is allowed
QC9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is forbidden
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position
QB2OPTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in closed position
QB7OPTR BOOLEAN QB7 is in open position
QB7CLTR BOOLEAN QB7 is in closed position
QB12OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position
QB12CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 and QB2 are not in open position
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB2TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB7TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB7 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB12TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or
closed)

14.2.11 Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO

782
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

14.2.11.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO - 3

14.2.11.2 Functionality

The interlocking for transformer bay (AB_TRAFO) function is used for a

transformer bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 388.
The function is used when there is no disconnector between circuit breaker and
transformer. Otherwise, the interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE) function can be
used. This function can also be used in single busbar arrangements.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1 QB2
QC1

QA1
AB_TRAFO
QC2

QC3

QA2
QA2 and QC4 are not
QC4 used in this interlocking

QB3 QB4

en04000515.vsd
IEC04000515 V1 EN

Figure 388: Switchyard layout AB_TRAFO

783
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

14.2.11.3 Function block

AB_TRAFO
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB1_OP QB1REL
QB1_CL QB1ITL
QB2_OP QB2REL
QB2_CL QB2ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QB3_OP QB1OPTR
QB3_CL QB1CLTR
QB4_OP QB2OPTR
QB4_CL QB2CLTR
QC3_OP QB12OPTR
QC3_CL QB12CLTR
QC11_OP VPQB1TR
QC11_CL VPQB2TR
QC21_OP VPQB12TR
QC21_CL
BC_12_CL
VP_BC_12
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BC
QA1_EX1
QA1_EX2
QA1_EX3
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB1_EX3
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB2_EX3

IEC05000358-2-en.vsd
IEC05000358 V2 EN

Figure 389: AB_TRAFO function block

784
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

14.2.11.4 Logic diagram

AB_TRAFO
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QB3_OP
QB3_CL =1 VPQB3
QB4_OP
QB4_CL =1 VPQB4
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB2 QA1CLITL
VPQC1 & 1

VPQC2
VPQB3
VPQB4
VPQC3
QA1_EX2
QC3_OP
QA1_EX3
QC1_CL >1
QC2_CL
QC3_CL &
QA1_EX1

en04000538.vsd

IEC04000538 V1 EN

VPQA1
VPQB2 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB1ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC3
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQB2
VPQC3
&
VP_BC_12
QB2_CL
QC3_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB1_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC2
&
VPQC3
VPQC11
QC1_CL
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX3

en04000539.vsd

IEC04000539 V1 EN

785
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

VPQA1
VPQB1 QB2REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB2ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC3
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQB1
VPQC3
&
VP_BC_12
QB1_CL
QC3_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB2_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC2
&
VPQC3
VPQC21
QC1_CL
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX3

en04000540.vsd

IEC04000540 V1 EN

VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB2 QC1ITL
& 1
VPQB3
QC2REL
VPQB4
QB1_OP QC2ITL
1
QB2_OP
QB3_OP
QB4_OP
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
QB1_OP QB12OPTR
QB2_OP >1 QB12CLTR
VPQB1 1
VPQB12TR
VPQB2 &
en04000541.vsd

IEC04000541 V1 EN

14.2.11.5 Signals
Table 450: AB_TRAFO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
Table continues on next page

786
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Name Type Default Description

QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QB3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB3 is in open position
QB3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB3 is in closed position
QB4_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB4 is in open position
QB4_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB4 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position
QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position
QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position
QC21_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position
BC_12_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar
WA1 and WA2
VP_BC_12 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and
WA2 are valid
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay containing earthing
switches
EXDU_BC BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bus coupler bay
QA1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QA1
QA1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QA1
QA1_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QA1
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2

Table 451: AB_TRAFO Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
Table continues on next page

787
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Name Type Description

QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position
QB2OPTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in closed position
QB12OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position
QB12CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 and QB2 are not in open position
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB2TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB12TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or
closed)

14.2.12 Position evaluation POS_EVAL

14.2.12.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Position evaluation POS_EVAL - -

14.2.12.2 Functionality

Position evaluation (POS_EVAL) function converts the input position data signal
POSITION, consisting of value, time and signal status, to binary signals
OPENPOS or CLOSEPOS.

The output signals are used by other functions in the interlocking scheme.

14.2.12.3 Function block

POS_EVAL
POSITION OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS

IEC09000079_1_en.vsd
IEC09000079 V1 EN

Figure 390: POS_EVAL function block

788
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

14.2.12.4 Logic diagram

POS_EVAL
Position including quality POSITION OPENPOS
Open/close position of
CLOSEPOS switch device

IEC08000469-1-en.vsd
IEC08000469-1-EN V1 EN

Only the value, open/close, and status is used in this function. Time information is
not used.
Input position (Value) Signal quality Output OPENPOS Output CLOSEPOS
0 (Breaker Good 0 0
intermediate)
1 (Breaker open) Good 1 0
2 (Breaker closed) Good 0 1
3 (Breaker faulty) Good 0 0
Any Invalid 0 0
Any Oscillatory 0 0

14.2.12.5 Signals
Table 452: POS_EVAL Input signals
Name Type Default Description
POSITION INTEGER 0 Position status including quality

Table 453: POS_EVAL Output signals

Name Type Description
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Close position

14.3 Apparatus control APC

14.3.1 Functionality
The apparatus control functions are used for control and supervision of circuit
breakers, disconnectors and earthing switches within a bay. Permission to operate
is given after evaluation of conditions from other functions such as interlocking,
synchrocheck, operator place selection and external or internal blockings.

Apparatus control features:

789
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Select-Execute principle to give high reliability

Selection function to prevent simultaneous operation
Selection and supervision of operator place
Command supervision
Block/deblock of operation
Block/deblock of updating of position indications
Substitution of position and quality indications
Overriding of interlocking functions
Overriding of synchrocheck
Operation counter
Suppression of mid position

Two types of command models can be used:

Direct with normal security
SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security

Normal security means that only the command is evaluated and the resulting
position is not supervised. Enhanced security means that the command is evaluated
with an additional supervision of the status value of the control object. The
command sequence with enhanced security is always terminated by a
CommandTermination service primitive and an AddCause telling if the command
was successful or if something went wrong.

Control operation can be performed from the local HMI with authority control if so
defined.

14.3.2 Error handling

Depending on the error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal
will be set with a value. Table 454 describes the cause values given on local HMI.
The translation to AddCause values specified in IEC 61850-8-1 is shown in Table
455. For IEC 61850-8-1 edition 2 only addcauses defined in the standard are used,
for edition 1 also a number of vendor specific causes are used. The values are
available in the command response to commands from IEC61850-8-1 clients. An
output L_CAUSE on the function block for Switch controller (SCSWI), Circuit
breaker (SXCBR) and Circuit switch (SXSWI) indicates the latest value of the
cause during the latest command.

Table 454: Values for "cause" signal

Cause Name Description Supported
number
0 None Control action successfully executed X
1 Not-supported Given for Cancel request with Direct Control in Ready X
state
2 Blocked-by- Not successful since one of the downstream Loc X
switching-hierarchy switches like in CSWI has the value TRUE
Table continues on next page

790
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Cause Name Description Supported

number
3 Select-failed Cancelled due to an unsuccessful selection (select X
service)
4 Invalid-position Control action is aborted due to invalid switch position X
(Pos in XCBR or XSWI)
5 Position-reached Switch is already in the intended position (Pos in X
XCBR or XSWI)
6 Parameter-change- Control action is blocked due to running parameter X
in-execution change
7 Step-limit Control action is blocked, because tap changer has X
reached the limit (EndPosR or EndPosL in YLTC)
8 Blocked-by-Mode Control action is blocked, because the LN (CSWI or X
XCBR/XSWI)is in a mode (Mod) which doesnt allow
any switching
9 Blocked-by-process Control action is blocked due to some external event at X
process level that prevents a successful operation, for
example blocking indication (EEHealth in XCBR or
XSWI)
10 Blocked-by- Control action is blocked due to interlocking of X
interlocking switching devices (in CILO attribute
EnaOpn.stVal=FALSE or EnaCls.stVal=FALSE
11 Blocked-by- Control action with synchrocheck is aborted due to X
synchrocheck exceed of time limit and missing synchronism condition
12 Command-already- Control, select or cancel service is rejected, because X
in-execution control action is already running
13 Blocked-by-health Control action is blocked due to some internal event X
that prevents a successful operation (Health)
14 1-of-n-control Control action is blocked, because another control X
action in a domain (for example substation) is already
running (in any XCBR or XSWI of that domain, the
DPC.stSeld=TRUE)
15 Abortion-by-cancel Control action is aborted due to cancel service X
16 Time-limit-over Control action is terminated due to exceed of some X
time limit
17 Abortion-by-trip Control action is aborted due to a trip (PTRC with X
ACT.general=TRUE)
18 Object-not-selected Control action is rejected, because control object was X
not selected
19 Object-already- Select action is not executed, because the addressed X
selected object is already selected
20 No-access-authority Control action is blocked due to lack of access authority X
21 Ended-with- Control action executed but the end position has
overshoot overshoot
22 Abortion-due-to- Control action is aborted due to deviation between the
deviation command value and the measured value
23 Abortion-by- Control action is aborted due to the loss of connection
communication-loss with the client that issued the control
24 Blocked-by- Control action is blocked due to the data attribute X
command CmdBlk.stVal is TRUE
Table continues on next page

791
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Cause Name Description Supported

number
26 Inconsistent- The parameters between successive control services X
parameters are not consistent, for example the ctlNum of Select
and Operate service are different
27 Locked-by-other- Another client has already reserved the object X
client
-22 Wrong_CTL_Model Command from client uses wrong control model X
-24 Blocked_for_Open_ Blocked for Open command X
Cmd
-25 Blocked_For_Close Blocked for Close Command X
_Cmd
-30 longOperationTime Operation time too long X
-31 switchNotStartMovi Switch did not start moving X
ng
-32 persistantIntermedi Switch stopped in intermediate state X
ateState
-33 switchReturnedToIn Switch returned to the initial position X
itPos
-34 switchInBadState Switch is in a bad position state X
-35 notExpectedFinalPo Switch did not reach the expected final position X
sition

Table 455: Translation of cause values for IEC61850 edition 2 and edition 1
Internal Cause AddCause in IEC61850-8-1 Name
Number
Ed 2 Ed 1
0 25 0 None
1 1 1 Not-supported
2 2 2 Blocked-by-switching-hierarchy
3 3 3 Select-failed
4 4 4 Invalid-position
5 5 5 Position-reached
6 6 6 Parameter-change-in-execution
7 7 7 Step-limit
8 8 8 Blocked-by-Mode
9 9 9 Blocked-by-process
10 10 10 Blocked-by-interlocking
11 11 11 Blocked-by-synchrocheck
12 12 12 Command-already-in-execution
13 13 13 Blocked-by-health
14 14 14 1-of-n-control
15 15 1 Abortion-by-cancel
16 16 16 Time-limit-over
17 17 17 Abortion-by-trip
Table continues on next page

792
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Internal Cause AddCause in IEC61850-8-1 Name

Number
Ed 2 Ed 1
18 18 18 Object-not-selected
19 19 3 Object-already-selected
20 20 3 No-access-authority
21 21 - Ended-with-overshoot
22 22 - Abortion-due-to-deviation
23 23 - Abortion-by-communication-loss
24 24 -23 Blocked-by-command
26 26 6 Inconsistent-parameters
27 27 12 Locked-by-other-client
-22 0 -22 Wrong_CTL_Model
-24 24 -24 Blocked_for_Open_Cmd
-25 24 -25 Blocked_For_Close_Cmd
-30 24 -30 longOperationTime
-31 16 -31 switchNotStartMoving
-32 16 -32 persistantIntermediateState
-33 22 -33 switchReturnedToInitPos
-34 4 -34 switchInBadState
-35 22 -35 notExpectedFinalPosition

14.3.3 Bay control QCBAY

14.3.3.1 Functionality

The Bay control QCBAY function is used together with Local remote and local
remote control functions to handle the selection of the operator place per bay.
QCBAY also provides blocking functions that can be distributed to different
apparatuses within the bay.

14.3.3.2 Function block

QCBAY
LR_OFF PSTO
LR_LOC UPD_BLKD
LR_REM CMD_BLKD
LR_VALID LOC
BL_UPD STA
BL_CMD REM

IEC10000048-2-en.vsd
IEC10000048 V2 EN

Figure 391: QCBAY function block

793
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

14.3.3.3 Signals
Table 456: QCBAY Input signals
Name Type Default Description
LR_OFF BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Off position
LR_LOC BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Local position
LR_REM BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Remote
position
LR_VALID BOOLEAN 0 Data representing the L/R switch position is valid
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal to block the position updates
BL_CMD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal to block the command

Table 457: QCBAY Output signals

Name Type Description
PSTO INTEGER Value for the operator place allocation
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position is blocked
CMD_BLKD BOOLEAN Function is blocked for commands
LOC BOOLEAN Local operation allowed
STA BOOLEAN Station operation allowed
REM BOOLEAN Remote operation allowed

14.3.3.4 Settings
Table 458: QCBAY Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
AllPSTOValid Priority - - Priority Override Priority of originators,
No priority commands from both local, station and
remote are allowed
RemoteIncStation No - - No Both Station and Remote control are
Yes allowed but not Local when local remote
switch is in remote

14.3.3.5 Operation principle

The function sends information about the Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO)
and blocking conditions to other functions within the bay for example, switch
control functions and voltage control functions. The functionality of the Bay
control (QCBAY) function is mainly described by the LLN0 node in the
IEC61850-8-1 edition 2 standard, applied to one bay. In IEC61850 edition 1 the
functionality is not described by the LLN0 node or any other node, therefore the
Bay control function is represented as a vendor specific node in edition 1.

794
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Local panel switch

The local panel switch is a switch that defines the operator place selection. The
switch connected to this function can have three positions (remote/local/off). The
positions are here defined so that remote means that operation is allowed from
station and/or remote level and local means that operation is allowed from the IED
level. The local/remote switch is also on the control/protection IED itself, which
means that the position of the switch and its validity information are connected
internally, not via I/O boards. When the switch is mounted separately from the IED
the signals are connected to the function via I/O boards.

When the local panel switch (or LHMI selection, depending on the set source to
select this) is in Off position, all commands from remote and local level will be
ignored. If the position for the local/remote switch is not valid the PSTO output
will always be set to faulty state (3), which means no possibility to operate.

To adapt the signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch,
the function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL are needed and connected to
QCBAY.

Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO)

The actual state of the operator place is presented by the value of the Permitted
Source To Operate, PSTO signal. The PSTO value is evaluated from the local/
remote switch position according to Table 459. In addition, there are two
parameters that affect the value of the PSTO signal.

If the parameter AllPSTOValid is set and LR-switch position is in Local or Remote

state, the PSTO value is set to 5 (all), that is, it is permitted to operate from both
local and remote level without any priority. When the external panel switch is in
Off position the PSTO value shows the actual state of the switch that is, 0. In this
case it is not possible to control anything

If the parameter RemoteIncStation is set and the LR-switch position is in Remote

state, the PSTO value is set to 2 (Station or Remote), that is, it is permitted to
operate from both station and remote level without any priority.

Table 459: PSTO values for different Local panel switch positions
Local panel PSTO AllPSTOValid RemoteInc LocSta.CtlVal Possible
switch positions value (setting Station (command) locations that
parameter) (setting shall be able to
parameter) operate
0 = Off 0 - - - Not possible
to operate
1 = Local 1 Priority - - Local Panel
1 = Local 5 No priority - - Local or
Remote level
without any
priority
2 = Remote 6 Priority No TRUE Station level
2 = Remote 7 No priority No FALSE Remote level
Table continues on next page

795
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Local panel PSTO AllPSTOValid RemoteInc LocSta.CtlVal Possible

switch positions value (setting Station (command) locations that
parameter) (setting shall be able to
parameter) operate
2 = Remote 2 Priority Yes - Station or
Remote level
2 = Remote 5 No priority - - Local, Station
or Remote
level without
any priority
3 = Faulty 3 - - - Not possible
to operate

Blockings
The blocking states for position indications and commands are intended to provide
the possibility for the user to make common blockings for the functions configured
within a complete bay.

The blocking facilities provided by the bay control function are the following:

Blocking of position indications, BL_UPD. This input will block all inputs
related to apparatus positions for all configured functions within the bay.
Blocking of commands, BL_CMD. This input will block all commands for all
configured functions within the bay.
Blocking of function, BLOCK. If the BLOCK signal is set, it means that the
function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control
commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.

The switching of the Local/Remote switch requires at least system operator level.
The password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have
been defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can
handle the control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined with the
IED Users tool in PCM600.

14.3.4 Local/Remote switch

The signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch are
connected via the function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL to the Bay
control QCBAY function block. The parameter ControlMode in function block
LOCREM is set to choose if the switch signals are coming from the local HMI or
from an external hardware switch connected via binary inputs.

796
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

14.3.4.1 Function block

LOCREM
CTRLOFF OFF
LOCCTRL LOCAL
REMCTRL REMOTE
LHMICTRL VALID

IEC05000360-2-en.vsd
IEC05000360 V2 EN

Figure 392: LOCREM function block

LOCREMCTRL
PSTO1 HMICTR1
PSTO2 HMICTR2
PSTO3 HMICTR3
PSTO4 HMICTR4
PSTO5 HMICTR5
PSTO6 HMICTR6
PSTO7 HMICTR7
PSTO8 HMICTR8
PSTO9 HMICTR9
PSTO10 HMICTR10
PSTO11 HMICTR11
PSTO12 HMICTR12

IEC05000361-2-en.vsd
IEC05000361 V2 EN

Figure 393: LOCREMCTRL function block

14.3.4.2 Signals
Table 460: LOCREM Input signals
Name Type Default Description
CTRLOFF BOOLEAN 0 Disable control
LOCCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Local in control
REMCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Remote in control
LHMICTRL INTEGER 0 LHMI control

Table 461: LOCREM Output signals

Name Type Description
OFF BOOLEAN Control is disabled
LOCAL BOOLEAN Local control is activated
REMOTE BOOLEAN Remote control is activated
VALID BOOLEAN Outputs are valid

797
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Table 462: LOCREMCTRL Input signals

Name Type Default Description
PSTO1 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 1
PSTO2 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 2
PSTO3 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 3
PSTO4 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 4
PSTO5 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 5
PSTO6 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 6
PSTO7 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 7
PSTO8 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 8
PSTO9 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 9
PSTO10 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 10
PSTO11 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 11
PSTO12 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 12

Table 463: LOCREMCTRL Output signals

Name Type Description
HMICTR1 INTEGER Bitmask output 1 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR2 INTEGER Bitmask output 2 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR3 INTEGER Bitmask output 3 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR4 INTEGER Bitmask output 4 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR5 INTEGER Bitmask output 5 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR6 INTEGER Bitmask output 6 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR7 INTEGER Bitmask output 7 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR8 INTEGER Bitmask output 8 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR9 INTEGER Bitmask output 9 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR10 INTEGER Bitmask output 10 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR11 INTEGER Bitmask output 11 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR12 INTEGER Bitmask output 12 to local remote LHMI input

14.3.4.3 Settings
Table 464: LOCREM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ControlMode Internal LR-switch - - Internal LR-switch Control mode for internal/external LR-
External LR-switch switch

798
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

14.3.4.4 Operation principle

The function block Local remote (LOCREM) handles the signals coming from the
local/remote switch. The connections are seen in Figure 394, where the inputs on
function block LOCREM are connected to binary inputs if an external switch is
used. When the local HMI is used, the inputs are not used. The switching between
external and local HMI source is done through the parameter ControlMode. The
outputs from the LOCREM function block control the output PSTO (Permitted
Source To Operate) on Bay control (QCBAY).
LOCREM QCBAY
CTRLOFF OFF LR_ OFF PSTO
LOCCTRL LOCAL LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD
REMCTRL REMOTE LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD
LHMICTRL VALID LR_ VALID LOC
BL_ UPD STA
BL_ CMD REM

LOCREM QCBAY
CTRLOFF OFF LR_ OFF PSTO
LOCCTRL LOCAL LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD
REMCTRL REMOTE LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD
LHMICTRL VALID LR_ VALID LOC
BL_ UPD STA
BL_ CMD REM

LOCREMCTRL
PSTO1 HMICTR1
PSTO2 HMICTR2
PSTO3 HMICTR3
PSTO4 HMICTR4
PSTO5 HMICTR5
PSTO6 HMICTR6
PSTO7 HMICTR7
PSTO8 HMICTR8
PSTO9 HMICTR9
PSTO 10 HMICTR 10
PSTO 11 HMICTR 11
PSTO 12 HMICTR 12

IEC10000052-1-en.vsd
IEC10000052 V2 EN

Figure 394: Configuration for the local/remote handling for a local HMI with two
bays and two screen pages

If the IED contains control functions for several bays, the local/remote position can
be different for the included bays. When the local HMI is used the position of the
local/remote switch can be different depending on which single line diagram screen
page that is presented on the local HMI. The function block Local remote control
(LOCREMCTRL) controls the presentation of the LEDs for the local/remote
position to applicable bay and screen page.

The switching of the local/remote switch requires at least system operator level.
The password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have

799
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

been defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can
handle the control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined with the
IED Users tool in PCM600.

14.3.5 Switch controller SCSWI

14.3.5.1 Functionality

The Switch controller (SCSWI) initializes and supervises all functions to properly
select and operate switching primary apparatuses. The Switch controller may
handle and operate on one three-phase device or up to three one-phase devices.

14.3.5.2 Function block

SCSWI
BLOCK EXE_OP
PSTO EXE_CL
L_SEL SEL_OP
L_OPEN SEL_CL
L_CLOSE SELECTED
AU_OPEN RES_RQ
AU_CLOSE START_SY
BL_CMD CANC_SY
RES_GRT POSITION
RES_EXT OPENPOS
SY_INPRO CLOSEPOS
SYNC_OK POLEDISC
EN_OPEN CMD_BLK
EN_CLOSE L_CAUSE
XPOS1 POS_INTR
XPOS2 XOUT
XPOS3

IEC05000337-3-en.vsd
IEC05000337 V3 EN

Figure 395: SCSWI function block

14.3.5.3 Signals
Table 465: SCSWI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 2 Operator place selection
L_SEL BOOLEAN 0 Select signal from local panel
L_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open signal from local panel
L_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close signal from local panel
AU_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Used for local automation function
AU_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Used for local automation function
BL_CMD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the command
RES_GRT BOOLEAN 0 Positive acknowledge that all reservations are
made
Table continues on next page

800
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Name Type Default Description

RES_EXT BOOLEAN 0 Reservation is made externally
SY_INPRO BOOLEAN 0 Synchronizing function in progress
SYNC_OK BOOLEAN 0 Closing is permitted at set to true by the
synchrocheck
EN_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Enables open operation
EN_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Enables close operation
XPOSL1 GROUP - Group signal from XCBR/XSWI per phase
SIGNAL
XPOSL2 GROUP - Group signal from XCBR/XSWI per phase
SIGNAL
XPOSL3 GROUP - Group signal from XCBR/XSWI per phase
SIGNAL

Table 466: SCSWI Output signals

Name Type Description
EXE_OP BOOLEAN Execute command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Execute command for close direction
SEL_OP BOOLEAN Selected for open command
SEL_CL BOOLEAN Selected for close command
SELECTED BOOLEAN Select conditions are fulfilled
RES_RQ BOOLEAN Request signal to the reservation function
START_SY BOOLEAN Starts the external synchronizing function
CANC_SY BOOLEAN Cancels the external synchronizing function,
started through START_SY
POSITION INTEGER Position indication
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Open position indication
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Closed position indication
POLEDISC BOOLEAN The positions for poles L1-L3 are not equal after
a set time
CMD_BLK BOOLEAN Commands are blocked
L_CAUSE INTEGER Latest value of the error indication during command
POS_INTR BOOLEAN Stopped in intermediate position
XOUT BOOLEAN Execution information to XCBR/XSWI

AU_OPEN and AU_CLOSE are used to issue automated

commands as e.g. for load shedding for opening respectively
closing to the SCSWI function. They work without regard to how
the operator place selector, PSTO, is set. In order to have effect on
the outputs EXE_OP and EXE_CL, the corresponding enable input,

801
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

EN_OPEN respectively EN_CLOSE must be set, and that no

interlocking is active.

L_SEL, L_OPEN and L_CLOSE are used for local command

sequence connected to binary inputs. In order to have effect, the
operator place selector, PSTO, must be set to local or to remote
with no priority. If the control model used is Select before operate,
Also the corresponding enable input must be set, and no
interlocking is active. The L_SEL input must be set before
L_OPEN or L_CLOSE is operated, if the control model is Select
before operate.

14.3.5.4 Settings
Table 467: SCSWI Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CtlModel Dir Norm - - SBO Enh Specifies control model type
SBO Enh
PosDependent Always permitted - - Always permitted Permission to operate depending on the
Not perm at 00/11 position
tSelect 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 30.00 Maximum time between select and
execute signals
tResResponse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Allowed time from reservation request to
reservation granted
tSynchrocheck 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 10.00 Allowed time for synchrocheck to fulfil
close conditions
tSynchronizing 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 0.00 Supervision time to get the signal
synchronizing in progress
tExecutionFB 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 30.00 Maximum time from command execution
to termination
tPoleDiscord 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Allowed time to have discrepancy
between the poles
SuppressMidPos Off - - On Mid-position is suppressed during the
On time tIntermediate
InterlockChk Sel & Op phase - - Sel & Op phase Selection if interlock check should be
Op phase done in select phase

14.3.5.5 Operation principle

The Switch controller (SCSWI) is provided with verification checks for the select -
execute sequence, that is, checks the conditions prior each step of the operation are
fulfilled. The involved functions for these condition verifications are interlocking,
reservation, blockings and synchrocheck.

Control handling
.

802
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Two types of control models can be used. The two control models are "direct with
normal security" and "SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security". The
parameter CtlModel defines which one of the two control models is used. The
control model "direct with normal security" does not require a select whereas, the
"SBO with enhanced security" command model requires a select before execution.

Normal security means that only the command is evaluated and the resulting
position is not supervised. Enhanced security means that the command sequence is
supervised in three steps, the selection, command evaluation and the supervision of
position. Each step ends up with a pulsed signal to indicate that the respective step
in the command sequence is finished. If an error occurs in one of the steps in the
command sequence, the sequence is terminated. The last error (L_CAUSE) can be
read from the function block and used for example at commissioning.

There is no relation between the command direction and the actual

position. For example, if the switch is in close position it is possible
to execute a close command.

Before an execution command, an evaluation of the position is done. If the

parameter PosDependent is true and the position is in intermediate state or in bad
state no execution command is sent. If the parameter is false the execution
command is sent independent of the position value.

Evaluation of position
The position output from the switches (SXCBR or SXSWI) is connected to the
switch controller SCSWI. The XPOS1, XPOS2 and XPOS3 input signals receive
the position, time stamps and quality attributes of the position which is used for
further evaluation.

In the case when there are three one-phase switches connected to the switch control
function, the switch control will "merge" the position of the three switches to the
resulting three-phase position. In the case when the position differ between the one-
phase switches, following principles will be applied:

All switches in open position: switch control position = open

All switches in close position:
One switch =open, two switches= close (or
inversely):
Any switch in intermediate position:
Any switch in bad state:
switch control position = close
switch control position = intermediate
switch control position = intermediate
switch control position = bad state

The time stamp of the output three-phase position from switch control will have the
time stamp of the last changed phase when it reaches the end position. When it
goes to intermediate position or bad state, it will get the time stamp of the first
changed phase.

803
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

In addition, there is also the possibility that one of the one-phase switches will
change position at any time due to a trip. Such situation is here called pole
discordance and is supervised by this function. In case of a pole discordance
situation, that is, the positions of the one-phase switches are not equal positions for
a time longer than the setting tPoleDiscord, an error signal POLEDISC will be set.

In the supervision phase, the switch controller function evaluates the "cause"
values from the switch modules Circuit breaker (SXCBR)/ Circuit switch
(SXSWI). At error the "cause" value with highest priority is shown.

Blocking principles
The blocking signals are normally coming from the bay control function (QCBAY)
and via the IEC 61850 communication from the operator place.

The different blocking possibilities are:

Block/deblock of command. It is used to block command for operation of

position.
Blocking of function, BLOCK. If the BLOCK signal is set, it means that the
function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control
commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.

The different block conditions will only affect the operation of this
function, that is, no blocking signals will be "forwarded" to other
functions. The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile
memory.

Dependence on Operator place

For commands from communication protocol, such as IEC61850-8-1 and DNP,
and through the inputs L_SEL, L_OPEN and L_CLOSE, the operator place is
evaluated, and only commands from enabled operator places are accepted, see
Table 459. Commands through the inputs L_SEL, L_OPEN and L_CLOSE are
always from the local operator place. For commands through the inputs AU_OPEN
and AU_CLOSE, the operator place is not evaluated, thus also accepted when the
operator place selector is set to Faulty or Off.

Interaction with synchrocheck and synchronizing functions

The Switch controller (SCSWI) works in conjunction with the synchrocheck and
the synchronizing function (SESRSYN). It is assumed that the synchrocheck
function is continuously in operation and gives the result to SCSWI. The result
from the synchrocheck function is evaluated during the close execution. If the
operator performs an override of the synchrocheck, the evaluation of the
synchrocheck state is omitted. When there is a positive confirmation from the
synchrocheck function, SCSWI will send the close signal EXE_CL to the switch
function Circuit breaker (SXCBR).

804
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

When there is no positive confirmation from the synchrocheck function, SCSWI

will send a start signal START_SY to the synchronizing function, which will send
the closing command to SXCBR when the synchronizing conditions are fulfilled,
see Figure 396. If no synchronizing function is included, the timer for supervision
of the "synchronizing in progress signal" is set to 0, which means no start of the
synchronizing function. SCSWI will then set the attribute "blocked-by-
synchrocheck" in the "cause" signal. See also the time diagram in Figure 400.

SCSWI SXCBR
EXE_CL
OR CLOSE

SYNC_OK
START_SY
CANC_SY
SY_INPRO
SESRSYN

CLOSECB
Synchro Synchronizing
check function

IEC09000209-2-en.vsd
IEC09000209 V2 EN

Figure 396: Example of interaction between SCSWI, SESRSYN (synchrocheck

and synchronizing function) and SXCBR function

Time diagrams
The Switch controller (SCSWI) function has timers for evaluating different time
supervision conditions. These timers are explained here.

The timer tSelect is used for supervising the time between the select and the
execute command signal, that is, the time the operator has to perform the command
execution after the selection of the object to operate.

805
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

select
execute command
tSelect
timer t1 t1>tSelect, then long-
operation-time in 'cause'
is set

en05000092.vsd
IEC05000092 V1 EN

Figure 397: tSelect

The parameter tResResponse is used to set the maximum allowed time to make the
reservation, that is, the time between reservation request and the feedback
reservation granted from all bays involved in the reservation function.

select

reservation request RES_RQ

reservation granted RES_GRT

command termination
tResResponse t1>tResResponse, then
timer 1-of-n-control in 'cause'
t1 is set
en05000093.vsd

IEC05000093 V1 EN

Figure 398: tResResponse

The timer tExecutionFB supervises the time between the execute command and the
command termination, see Figure 399.

806
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

execute command

position L1 open

close

position L2 open

close

position L3 open

close

cmd termination L1

cmd termination L2

cmd termination L3

cmd termination *

position open

close

t1>tExecutionFB, then
tExecutionFB timer long-operation-time in
t1 'cause' is set

* The cmd termination will be delayed one execution sample . APCtExecutionFB=IEC0

5000094=2=en=Original
.vsd
IEC05000094 V2 EN

Figure 399: tExecutionFB

The parameter tSynchrocheck is used to define the maximum allowed time between
the execute command and the input SYNC_OK to become true. If SYNC_OK=true
at the time the execute command signal is received, the timer "tSynchrocheck" will
not start. The start signal for the synchronizing is obtained if the synchrocheck
conditions are not fulfilled.

The parameter tSynchronizing is used to define the maximum allowed time

between the start signal for synchronizing and the confirmation that synchronizing
is in progress.

807
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

execute command

SYNC_OK

tSynchrocheck
t1
START_SY

SY_INPRO

tSynchronizing t2>tSynchronizing, then

t2 blocked-by-synchrocheck in
'cause' is set

en05000095.vsd

IEC05000095 V1 EN

Figure 400: tSynchroCheck and tSynchronizing

14.3.6 Circuit breaker SXCBR

14.3.6.1 Functionality

The purpose of Circuit breaker (SXCBR) is to provide the actual status of positions
and to perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to primary
apparatuses in the form of circuit breakers via binary output boards and to
supervise the switching operation and position.

14.3.6.2 Function block

SXCBR
BLOCK XPOS
LR_SWI EXE_OP
OPEN EXE_CL
CLOSE SUBSTED
BL_OPEN OP_BLKD
BL_CLOSE CL_BLKD
BL_UPD UPD_BLKD
POSOPEN POSITION
POSCLOSE OPENPOS
CBOPCAP CLOSEPOS
TR_OPEN TR_POS
TR_CLOSE CNT_VAL
RS_CNT L_CAUSE
EEH_WARN EEHEALTH
EEH_ALM CBOPCAP
XIN

IEC05000338-3-en.vsd
IEC05000338 V3 EN

Figure 401: SXCBR function block

808
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

14.3.6.3 Signals
Table 468: SXCBR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
LR_SWI BOOLEAN 0 Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch
BL_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the open command
BL_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the close command
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the position updating
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
CBOPCAP INTEGER 3 Breaker operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 =
CO, 4 = OCO, 5 = COCO, 6+ = More
TR_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of truck from I/O
TR_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of truck from I/O
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
EEH_WARN BOOLEAN 0 Warning from external equipment
EEH_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Alarm from external equipment
XIN BOOLEAN 0 Execution information from CSWI

Table 469: SXCBR Output signals

Name Type Description
XPOS GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to CSWI for CB
EXE_OP BOOLEAN Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Executes the command for close direction
OP_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for open
commands
CL_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for close
commands
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position indication is blocked
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus closed position
TR_POS INTEGER Truck position indication
CNT_VAL INTEGER Operation counter value
L_CAUSE INTEGER Latest value of the error indication during command
EEHEALTH INTEGER External equipment health. 1=No warning or
alarm, 2=Warning, 3=Alarm
CBOPCAP INTEGER Breaker operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 =
CO, 4 = OCO, 5 = COCO, 6+ = More

809
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

14.3.6.4 Settings
Table 470: SXCBR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tStartMove 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Supervision time for the apparatus to
move after a command
tIntermediate 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Allowed time for intermediate position
AdaptivePulse Not adaptive - - Not adaptive Output resets when a new correct end
Adaptive position is reached
tOpenPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for open command
tClosePulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for close command
InitialCount 0 - 20000 - 1 0 Initial number of operations (Initial count
value)

14.3.6.5 Operation principle

The Circuit breaker function (SXCBR) is used by other functions such as for
example, switch controller, protection functions, autorecloser function or an IEC
61850 client residing in another IED or the operator place. This switch function
executes commands, evaluates block conditions and evaluates different time
supervision conditions. Only if all conditions indicate a switch operation to be
allowed, the function performs the execution command. In case of erroneous
conditions, the function indicates an appropriate "cause" value, see Table 454.

SXCBR has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter
value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from local
HMI, a binary input or remotely from the operator place by configuring a signal
from the Single Point Generic Control 8 signals (SPC8GAPC) for example. The
health of the external equipment, the switch, can be monitored according to
IEC61850-8-1. The operation counter functionality and the external equipment
health supervision are independent sub-functions of the circuit breaker function.

Local/Remote switch
One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in SXCBR to indicate the local/
remote switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is
set to TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard
level. If the signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher
level is permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of
position) are rejected, even trip commands from protection functions are rejected.
The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in Figure 402.

810
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Local= Operation at
UE switch yard level
TR

From I/O switchLR

FAL
SE
Remote= Operation at
IED or higher level

en05000096.vsd
IEC05000096 V1 EN

Figure 402: Local/Remote switch

Blocking principles
SXCBR includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking
signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients for example, switch
controller, protection functions and autoreclosure.

The blocking possibilities are:

Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open

command.
Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close
command.
Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position
values. Other signals related to the position will be reset.
Blocking of function, BLOCK. If BLOCK signal is set, it means that the
function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control
commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.

The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Substitution
The substitution part in SXCBR is used for manual set of the position and quality
of the switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual
value because that the real process value is erroneous for some reason. SXCBR
will then use the manually entered value instead of the value for positions
determined by the process.

It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the

position indication and the status information of the I/O board.
When substitution is enabled, the position values are blocked for
updating and other signals related to the position are reset. The
substituted values are stored in a non-volatile memory.

When the position of the SXCBR is substituted, its IEC61850-8-1

data object is marked as substituted and old data, but the position of
the connected SCSWI is only marked as old data.

811
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Time diagrams
There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and
tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the
execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for
intermediate position. Figure 403 explains these two timers during the execute phase.

EXE_CL AdaptivePulse = TRUE

Close pulse duration

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

if t1 > tStartMove then

tStartMove timer "switch-not-start-moving"
t1 attribute in 'cause' is set
tStartMove

if t2 > tIntermediate then

tIntermediate timer "persisting-intermediate-state"
t2 attribute in 'cause' is set
tIntermediate

en05000097.vsd

IEC05000097 V1 EN

Figure 403: The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate

The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses
to be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close
command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be
adaptive with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 404 shows the
principle of the execute output pulse. The AdaptivePulse parameter will have effect
on both execute output pulses.

812
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse

AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
en05000098.vsd
IEC05000098 V1 EN

Figure 404: Execute output pulse

If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed
tOpenPulse or tClosePulse.

The execute output pulses are reset when:

the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to true
the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, that is, tStartMove has
elapsed.

If the breaker reaches the final position before the execution pulse
time has elapsed, and AdaptivePulse is not true, the function waits
for the end of the execution pulse before telling the activating
function that the command is completed.

There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open
position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in closed
position and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional
condition that the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output
pulse is always activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the
configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains
active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed.

If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and

CLOSEPOS =1) when a command is executed the execute output
pulse resets only when timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed.

An example of when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is

shown in Figure 405 .

813
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=FALSE

tOpenPulse

EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=TRUE

tOpenPulse

tStartMove timer

en05000099.vsd
IEC05000099 V1 EN

Figure 405: Open command with open position indication

14.3.7 Circuit switch SXSWI

14.3.7.1 Functionality

The purpose of Circuit switch (SXSWI) function is to provide the actual status of
positions and to perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to
primary apparatuses in the form of disconnectors or earthing switches via binary
output boards and to supervise the switching operation and position.

14.3.7.2 Function block

SXSWI
BLOCK XPOS
LR_SWI EXE_OP
OPEN EXE_CL
CLOSE OP_BLKD
BL_OPEN CL_BLKD
BL_CLOSE UPD_BLKD
BL_UPD OPENPOS
POSOPEN CLOSEPOS
POSCLOSE CNT_VAL
SWOPCAP L_CAUSE
RS_CNT EEHEALTH
EEH_WARN SWOPCAP
EEH_ALM
XIN

IEC05000339-3-en.vsd
IEC05000339 V3 EN

Figure 406: SXSWI function block

814
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

14.3.7.3 Signals
Table 471: SXSWI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
LR_SWI BOOLEAN 0 Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch
BL_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the open command
BL_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the close command
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the position updating
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
SWOPCAP INTEGER 4 Switch operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 =
C, 4 = O and C
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
EEH_WARN BOOLEAN 0 Warning from external equipment
EEH_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Alarm from external equipment
XIN BOOLEAN 0 Execution information from CSWI

Table 472: SXSWI Output signals

Name Type Description
XPOS GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to CSWI for DIS
EXE_OP BOOLEAN Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Executes the command for close direction
OP_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for open
commands
CL_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for close
commands
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position indication is blocked
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus closed position
CNT_VAL INTEGER Operation counter value
L_CAUSE INTEGER Latest value of the error indication during command
EEHEALTH INTEGER External equipment health. 1=No warning or
alarm, 2=Warning, 3=Alarm
SWOPCAP INTEGER Switch operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 =
C, 4 = O and C

815
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

14.3.7.4 Settings
Table 473: SXSWI Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tStartMove 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Supervision time for the apparatus to
move after a command
tIntermediate 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 15.000 Allowed time for intermediate position
AdaptivePulse Not adaptive - - Not adaptive Output resets when a new correct end
Adaptive position is reached
tOpenPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for open command
tClosePulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for close command
SwitchType Load Break - - Disconnector 1=LoadBreak,2=Disconnector,
Disconnector 3=EarthSw,4=HighSpeedEarthSw
Earthing Switch
HS Earthing Switch
InitialCount 0 - 20000 - 1 0 Initial number of operations (Initial count
value)

14.3.7.5 Operation principle

The users of the Circuit switch (SXSWI) are other functions such as for example,
switch controller, protection functions, autorecloser function, or a 61850 client
residing in another IED or the operator place. SXSWI executes commands,
evaluates block conditions and evaluates different time supervision conditions.
Only if all conditions indicate a switch operation to be allowed, SXSWI performs
the execution command. In case of erroneous conditions, the function indicates an
appropriate "cause" value, see Table 454.

SXSWI has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter
value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from a
binary input or remotely from the operator place by configuring a signal from the
Single Point Generic Control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO) for example.

Also, the health of the external equipment, the switch, can be monitored according
to IEC61850-8-1.

Local/Remote switch
One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in SXSWI to indicate the local/remote
switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to
TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level. If
the signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher level is
permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of position)
from internal IED clients are rejected, even trip commands from protection
functions are rejected. The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in
Figure 407.

816
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Local= Operation at
UE switch yard level
TR

From I/O switchLR

FAL
SE
Remote= Operation at
IED or higher level

en05000096.vsd
IEC05000096 V1 EN

Figure 407: Local/Remote switch

Blocking principles
SXSWI includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking
signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients for example, switch
controller, protection functions and autorecloser.

The blocking possibilities are:

Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open

command.
Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close
command.
Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position
values. Other signals related to the position will be reset.
Blocking of function, BLOCK. If BLOCK signal is set, it means that the
function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control
commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.

The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Substitution
The substitution part in SXSWI is used for manual set of the position and quality of
the switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value
because the real process value is erroneous of some reason. SXSWI will then use
the manually entered value instead of the value for positions determined by the
process.

It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the

position indication and the status information of the I/O board.
When substitution is enabled, the position values are blocked for
updating and other signals related to the position are reset. The
substituted values are stored in a non-volatile memory.

When the position of the SXSWI is substituted, its IEC61850-8-1

data object is marked as substituted and old data, but the position
of the connected SCSWI is only marked as old data.

817
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Time diagrams
There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and
tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the
execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for
intermediate position. Figure 408 explains these two timers during the execute phase.

EXE_CL AdaptivePulse = TRUE

Close pulse duration

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

if t1 > tStartMove then

tStartMove timer "switch-not-start-moving"
t1 attribute in 'cause' is set
tStartMove

if t2 > tIntermediate then

tIntermediate timer "persisting-intermediate-state"
t2 attribute in 'cause' is set
tIntermediate

en05000097.vsd

IEC05000097 V1 EN

Figure 408: The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate

The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses
to be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close
command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be
adaptive with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 409 shows the
principle of the execute output pulse. The AdaptivePulse parameter will have effect
on both execute output pulses.

818
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse

AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
en05000098.vsd
IEC05000098 V1 EN

Figure 409: Execute output pulse

If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed
tOpenPulse or tClosePulse.

The execute output pulses are reset when:

the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to true
the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, that is, tStartMove has
elapsed.

If the controlled primary device reaches the final position before the
execution pulse time has elapsed, and AdaptivePulse is not true, the
function waits for the end of the execution pulse before telling the
activating function that the command is completed.

There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open
position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in close
position and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional
condition that the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output
pulse is always activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the
configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains
active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed.

If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and

CLOSEPOS =1) when a command is executed the execute output
pulse resets only when timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed.

An example when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is

shown in Figure 410.

819
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=FALSE

tOpenPulse

EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=TRUE

tOpenPulse

tStartMove timer

en05000099.vsd
IEC05000099 V1 EN

Figure 410: Open command with open position indication

14.3.8 Bay reserve QCRSV

14.3.8.1 Functionality

The purpose of the reservation function is primarily to transfer interlocking

information between IEDs in a safe way and to prevent double operation in a bay,
switchyard part, or complete substation.

14.3.8.2 Function block

QCRSV
EXCH_IN RES_GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2
RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3
RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6
RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7
RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS
BLK_RES ACK_TO_B
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_DATA EXCH_OUT

IEC05000340-2-en.vsd
IEC05000340 V2 EN

Figure 411: QCRSV function block

820
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

14.3.8.3 Signals
Table 474: QCRSV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
EXCH_IN INTEGER 0 Used for exchange signals between different
BayRes blocks
RES_RQ1 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 1 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ2 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 2 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ3 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 3 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ4 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 4 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ5 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 5 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ6 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 6 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ7 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 7 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ8 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 8 that requests to do a reservation
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Reservation is not possible and the output signals
are reset
OVERRIDE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to override the reservation
RES_DATA INTEGER 0 Reservation data coming from function block ResIn

Table 475: QCRSV Output signals

Name Type Description
RES_GRT1 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the app. 1 is allowed to
operate
RES_GRT2 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the app. 2 is allowed to
operate
RES_GRT3 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the app. 3 is allowed to
operate
RES_GRT4 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the app. 4 is allowed to
operate
RES_GRT5 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the app. 5 is allowed to
operate
RES_GRT6 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the app. 6 is allowed to
operate
RES_GRT7 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the app. 7 is allowed to
operate
RES_GRT8 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the app. 8 is allowed to
operate
RES_BAYS BOOLEAN Request for reservation of other bays
ACK_TO_B BOOLEAN Acknowledge to other bays that this bay is reserved
RESERVED BOOLEAN Indicates that the bay is reserved
EXCH_OUT INTEGER Used for exchange signals between different
BayRes blocks

821
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

14.3.8.4 Settings
Table 476: QCRSV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tCancelRes 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 10.000 Supervision time for canceling the
reservation
ParamRequest1 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 1
ParamRequest2 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 2
ParamRequest3 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 3
ParamRequest4 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 4
ParamRequest5 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 5
ParamRequest6 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 6
ParamRequest7 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 7
ParamRequest8 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 8

14.3.8.5 Operation principle

The Bay reserve (QCRSV) function handles the reservation. QCRSV function
starts to operate in two ways. It starts when there is a request for reservation of the
own bay or if there is a request for reservation from another bay. It is only possible
to reserve the function if it is not currently reserved. The signal that can reserve the
own bay is the input signal RES_RQx (x=1-8) coming from switch controller
(SCWI). The signals for request from another bay are the outputs RE_RQ_B and
V_RE_RQ from function block RESIN. These signals are included in signal
EXCH_OUT from RESIN and are connected to RES_DATA in QCRSV.

The parameters ParamRequestx (x=1-8) are chosen at reservation of the own bay
only (TRUE) or other bays (FALSE). To reserve the own bay only means that no
reservation request RES_BAYS is created.

Reservation request of own bay

If the reservation request comes from the own bay, the function QCRSV has to
know which apparatus the request comes from. This information is available with
the input signal RES_RQx and parameter ParamRequestx (where x=1-8 is the
number of the requesting apparatus). In order to decide if a reservation request of
the current bay can be permitted QCRSV has to know whether the own bay already
is reserved by itself or another bay. This information is available in the output
signal RESERVED.

822
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

If the RESERVED output is not set, the selection is made with the output
RES_GRTx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus), which is
connected to switch controller SCSWI. If the bay already is reserved the command
sequence will be reset and the SCSWI will set the attribute "1-of-n-control" in the
"cause" signal.

Reservation of other bays

When the function QCRSV receives a request from an apparatus in the own bay
that requires other bays to be reserved as well, it checks if it already is reserved. If
not, it will send a request to the other bays that are predefined (to be reserved) and
wait for their response (acknowledge). The request of reserving other bays is done
by activating the output RES_BAYS.

When it receives acknowledge from the bays via the input RES_DATA, it sets the
output RES_GRTx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus). If not
acknowledgement from all bays is received within a certain time defined in SCSWI
(tResResponse), the SCSWI will reset the reservation and set the attribute "1-of-n-
control" in the "cause" signal.

Reservation request from another bay

When another bay requests for reservation, the input BAY_RES in corresponding
function block RESIN is activated. The signal for reservation request is grouped
into the output signal EXCH_OUT in RESIN, which is connected to input
RES_DATA in QCRSV. If the bay is not reserved, the bay will be reserved and the
acknowledgment from output ACK_T_B is sent back to the requested bay. If the
bay already is reserved the reservation is kept and no acknowledgment is sent.

Blocking and overriding of reservation

If QCRSV function is blocked (input BLK_RES is set to true) the reservation is
blocked. That is, no reservation can be made from the own bay or any other bay.
This can be set, for example, via a binary input from an external device to prevent
operations from another operator place at the same time.

The reservation function can also be overridden in the own bay with the
OVERRIDE input signal, that is, reserving the own bay without waiting for the
external acknowledge.

Bay with more than eight apparatuses

If only one instance of QCRSV is used for a bay that is, use of up to eight
apparatuses, the input EXCH_IN must be set to FALSE.

If there are more than eight apparatuses in the bay there has to be one additional
QCRSV. The two QCRSV functions have to communicate and this is done through
the input EXCH_IN and EXCH_OUT according to Figure 412. If more than one
QCRSV are used, the execution order is very important. The execution order must
be in the way that the first QCRSV has a lower number than the next one.

823
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

QCRSV
EXCH_IN RES_GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2
RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3
RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6
RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7
RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS
BLK_RES ACK_TO_B
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_DATA EXCH_OUT

QCRSV
EXCH_IN RES_GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2
RES_BAYS
RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3 1
RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6 ACK_TO_B
RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7 1
RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS
BLK_RES ACK_TO_B RESERVED
1
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_DATA EXCH_OUT

IEC05000088_2_en.vsd
IEC05000088 V2 EN

Figure 412: Connection of two QCRSV function blocks

14.3.9 Reservation input RESIN

14.3.9.1 Functionality

The Reservation input (RESIN) function receives the reservation information from
other bays. The number of instances is the same as the number of involved bays
(up to 60 instances are available).

14.3.9.2 Function block

RESIN1
BAY_ACK ACK_F_B
BAY_VAL ANY_ACK
BAY_RES VALID_TX
RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT

IEC05000341-2-en.vsd
IEC05000341 V2 EN

Figure 413: RESIN1 function block

824
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

RESIN2
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
IEC09000807_1_en.vsd
IEC09000807 V1 EN

Figure 414: RESIN2 function block

14.3.9.3 Signals
Table 477: RESIN1 Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BAY_ACK BOOLEAN 0 Another bay has acknow. the reservation req.
from this bay
BAY_VAL BOOLEAN 0 The reserv. and acknow. signals from another
bay are valid
BAY_RES BOOLEAN 0 Request from other bay to reserve this bay

Table 478: RESIN1 Output signals

Name Type Description
ACK_F_B BOOLEAN All other bays have acknow. the reserv. req. from
this bay
ANY_ACK BOOLEAN Any other bay has acknow. the reserv. req. from
this bay
VALID_TX BOOLEAN The reserv. and acknow. signals from other bays
are valid
RE_RQ_B BOOLEAN Request from other bay to reserve this bay
V_RE_RQ BOOLEAN Check if the request of reserving this bay is valid
EXCH_OUT INTEGER Used for exchange signals between different
ResIn blocks

Table 479: RESIN2 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
EXCH_IN INTEGER 5 Used for exchange signals between different
ResIn blocks
BAY_ACK BOOLEAN 0 Another bay has acknow. the reservation req.
from this bay
BAY_VAL BOOLEAN 0 The reserv. and acknow. signals from another
bay are valid
BAY_RES BOOLEAN 0 Request from other bay to reserve this bay

825
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Table 480: RESIN2 Output signals

Name Type Description
ACK_F_B BOOLEAN All other bays have acknow. the reserv. req. from
this bay
ANY_ACK BOOLEAN Any other bay has acknow. the reserv. req. from
this bay
VALID_TX BOOLEAN The reserv. and acknow. signals from other bays
are valid
RE_RQ_B BOOLEAN Request from other bay to reserve this bay
V_RE_RQ BOOLEAN Check if the request of reserving this bay is valid
EXCH_OUT INTEGER Used for exchange signals between different
ResIn blocks

14.3.9.4 Settings
Table 481: RESIN1 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FutureUse Bay in use - - Bay in use The bay for this ResIn block is for future
Bay future use use

Table 482: RESIN2 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FutureUse Bay in use - - Bay in use The bay for this ResIn block is for future
Bay future use use

14.3.9.5 Operation principle

The reservation input (RESIN) function is based purely on Boolean logic

conditions. The logic diagram in Figure 415 shows how the output signals are
created. The inputs of the function block are connected to a receive function block
representing signals transferred over the station bus from another bay.

826
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

EXCH_IN INT

BIN

ACK_F_B
&
FutureUse
1

ANY_ACK
BAY_ACK 1

VALID_TX
&

BAY_VAL 1

RE_RQ_B
1

BAY_RES &
V _RE_RQ
1

BIN
EXCH_OUT
INT

en05000089.vsd
IEC05000089 V1 EN

Figure 415: Logic diagram for RESIN

Figure 416 describes the principle of the data exchange between all RESIN
modules in the current bay. There is one RESIN function block per "other bay"
used in the reservation mechanism. The output signal EXCH_OUT in the last
RESIN functions are connected to the module bay reserve (QCRSV) that handles
the reservation function in the own bay.

827
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

RESIN
BAY_ACK ACK_F_B
Bay 1 BAY_VAL ANY_ACK
BAY_RES VALID_TX
RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT

RESIN
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
Bay 2 BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT

RESIN
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
Bay n BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B QCRSV
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT RES_DATA

en05000090.vsd
IEC05000090 V2 EN

Figure 416: Diagram of the chaining principle for RESIN

14.4 Voltage control

14.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Automatic voltage control for tap TR1ATCC 90
changer, single control
U

IEC10000165 V1 EN

Automatic voltage control for tap TR8ATCC 90

changer, parallel control
U

IEC10000166 V1 EN

Tap changer control and supervision, 6 TCMYLTC - 84

binary inputs
Tap changer control and supervision, TCLYLTC - 84
32 binary inputs

828
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

14.4.2 Functionality
The voltage control functions, Automatic voltage control for tap changer, single
control TR1ATCC, Automatic voltage control for tap changer, parallel control
TR8ATCC and Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC
as well as Tap changer control and supervision, 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC are
used for control of power transformers with a on-load tap changer. The functions
provide automatic regulation of the voltage on the secondary side of transformers
or alternatively on a load point further out in the network.

Control of a single transformer, as well as control of up to eight transformers in

parallel is possible. For parallel control of power transformers, three alternative
methods are available, the master-follower method, the circulating current method
and the reverse reactance method. The first two methods require exchange of
information between the parallel transformers and this is provided for within IEC
61850-8-1.

Voltage control includes many extra features such as possibility of to avoid

simultaneous tapping of parallel transformers, hot stand by regulation of a
transformer in a group which regulates it to a correct tap position even though the
LV CB is open, compensation for a possible capacitor bank on the LV side bay of a
transformer, extensive tap changer monitoring including contact wear and hunting
detection, monitoring of the power flow in the transformer so that for example, the
voltage control can be blocked if the power reverses etc.

14.4.3 Automatic voltage control for tap changer TR1ATCC and

TR8ATCC

The Automatic voltage control for tap changer TR1ATCC for single control and
TR8ATCC for parallel control function controls the voltage on the LV side of a
transformer either automatically or manually. The automatic control can be either
for a single transformer, or for a group of parallel transformers.

14.4.3.1 Operation principle

The LV-side of the transformer is used as the voltage measuring point. If

necessary, the LV side current is used as load current to calculate the line-voltage
drop to the regulation point. This current is also used when parallel control with the
circulating current method is used.

In addition, all three-phase currents from the HV-winding (usually the winding
where the tap changer is situated) are used by the Automatic voltage control for tap
changer TR1ATCC for single control and TR8ATCC for parallel control function
for over current blocking.

The setting MeasMode is a selection of single-phase, or phase-phase, or positive

sequence quantity. It is to be used for voltage and current measurement on the LV-

829
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

side. The involved phases are also selected. Thus, single-phases as well as phase-
phase or three-phase feeding on the LV-side is possible but it is commonly selected
for current and voltage.

The analog input signals are normally common for other functions in the IED for
example, protection functions.

The LV-busbar voltage is designated UB, load current IL and for

load point voltage UL will be used in the text to follow.

Automatic voltage control for tap changer, single control TR1ATCC

Automatic voltage control for tap changer, single control TR1ATCC measures the
magnitude of the busbar voltage UB. If no other additional features are enabled
(line voltage drop compensation), this voltage is further used for voltage regulation.

TR1ATCC then compares this voltage with the set voltage, USet and decides
which action should be taken. To avoid unnecessary switching around the setpoint,
a deadband (degree of insensitivity) is introduced. The deadband is symmetrical
around USet, see figure 417, and it is arranged in such a way that there is an outer
and an inner deadband. Measured voltages outside the outer deadband start the
timer to initiate tap commands, whilst the sequence resets when the measured
voltage is once again back inside the inner deadband. One half of the outer
deadband is denoted U. The setting of U, setting Udeadband should be set to a
value near to the power transformers tap changer voltage step (typically 75125%
of the tap changer step).

Security Range

*) *) *)
Raise Cmd DU DU Lower Cmd
DUin DUin

0 Ublock Umin U1 Uset U2 Umax Voltage Magnitude

*) Action in accordance with setting

IEC06000489_2_en.vsd
IEC06000489 V2 EN

Figure 417: Control actions on a voltage scale

During normal operating conditions the busbar voltage UB, stays within the outer
deadband (interval between U1 and U2 in figure 417). In that case no actions will
be taken by the TR1ATCC. However, if UB becomes smaller than U1, or greater
than U2, an appropriate lower or raise timer will start. The timer will run as long as
the measured voltage stays outside the inner deadband. If this condition persists
longer than the preset time delay, TR1ATCC will initiate that the appropriate
ULOWER or URAISE command will be sent from Tap changer control and
supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC, or 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC to the
transformer load tap changer. If necessary, the procedure will be repeated until the
magnitude of the busbar voltage again falls within the inner deadband. One half of

830
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

the inner deadband is denoted Uin. The inner deadband Uin, setting
UDeadbandInner should be set to a value smaller than U. It is recommended to
set the inner deadband to 25-70% of the U value.

This way of working is used by TR1ATCC while the busbar voltage is within the
security range defined by settings Umin and Umax

A situation where UB falls outside this range will be regarded as an abnormal

situation.

Instead of controlling the voltage at the LV busbar in the same substation as the
transformer itself, it is possible to control the voltage at a load point out in the
network, downstream from the transformer. The Line Voltage Drop Compensation
(LDC) can be selected by a setting parameter, and it works such that the voltage
drop from the transformer location to the load point is calculated based on the
measured load current and the known line impedance.

In order to prevent unnecessary load tap changer operations caused by temporary

voltage fluctuations and to coordinate load tap changer operations in radial
networks, a time delay is used for the tapping command to the load tap changer.
The time delay can be either definite time or inverse time and two time settings are
used, the first (t1) for the initial delay of a tap command, and the second (t2) for
consecutive tap commands.

Automatic control for tap changer, parallel control TR8ATCC

Parallel control of power transformers means control of two or more power
transformers connected to the same busbar on the LV side and in most cases also
on the HV side. Special measures must be taken in order to avoid a runaway
situation where the tap changers on the parallel transformers gradually diverge and
end up in opposite end positions.

Three alternative methods can be used for parallel control with Automatic control
for tap changer, parallel control TR8ATCC:
master-follower method
reverse reactance method
circulating current method.

Parallel control with the master-follower method

In the master-follower method, one of the transformers is selected to be master, and
will regulate the voltage in accordance with the principles Automatic voltage
control for a tap changer. Selection of the master is made by activating the binary
input FORCMAST in the TR8ATCC function block for one of the transformers in
the group.

The followers can act in one of two alternative ways selected by a setting parameter:

1. Raise and lower commands (URAISE and ULOWER) generated by the

master, initiates the corresponding command in all follower TR8ATCCs

831
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

simultaneously, and consequently they will blindly follow the master

commands irrespective of their individual tap positions.
2. The followers read the tap position of the master and adapt to the same tap
position or to a tap position with an offset relative to the master. In this mode,
the followers can also be time delayed relative to the master.

Parallel control with the reverse reactance method

In the reverse reactance method, the LDC (Line voltage drop compensation) is
used. The purpose of which is normally to control the voltage at a load point
further out in the network. The very same function can also be used here but with a
completely different objective. Whereas the LDC, when used to control the voltage
at a load point, gives a voltage drop along a line from the busbar voltage UB to a
load point voltage UL, the LDC, when used in the reverse reactance parallel control
of transformers, gives a voltage increase (actually, by adjusting the ratio XL/RL
with respect to the power factor, the length of the vector UL will be approximately
equal to the length of UB) from UB up towards the transformer itself.

When the voltage at a load point is controlled by using LDC, the line impedance
from the transformer to the load point is defined by the setting Xline. If a negative
reactance is entered instead of the normal positive line reactance, parallel
transformers will act in such a way that the transformer with a higher tap position
will be the first to tap down when the busbar voltage increases, and the transformer
with a lower tap position will be the first to tap up when the busbar voltage
decreases. The overall performance will then be that a runaway tap situation will be
avoided and that the circulating current will be minimized.

Parallel control with the circulating current method

This method requires extensive exchange of data between the TR8ATCC function
blocks (one TR8ATCC function for each transformer in the parallel group). The
TR8ATCC function block can either be located in the same IED, where they are
configured in PCM600 to co-operate, or in different IEDs. If the functions are
located in different IEDs they must communicate via GOOSE interbay
communication on the IEC 61850 communication protocol.

If the functions are located in different IEDs they must communicate via GOOSE
interbay communication on the IEC 61850 communication protocol. Complete
exchange of TR8ATCC data, analog as well as binary, via GOOSE is made
cyclically every 300 ms.

The main objectives of the circulating current method for parallel voltage control are:

1. Regulate the busbar or load voltage to the preset target value.

2. Minimize the circulating current in order to achieve optimal sharing of the
reactive load between parallel transformers.

The busbar voltage UB is measured individually for each transformer in the

parallel group by its associated TR8ATCC function. These measured values will
then be exchanged between the transformers, and in each TR8ATCC block, the

832
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

mean value of all UB values will be calculated. The resulting value UBmean will
then be used in each IED instead of UB for the voltage regulation, thus assuring
that the same value is used by all TR8ATCC functions, and thereby avoiding that
one erroneous measurement in one transformer could upset the voltage regulation.
At the same time, supervision of the VT mismatch is also performed.

Figure 418 shows an example with two transformers connected in parallel. If

transformer T1 has higher no load voltage it will drive a circulating current which
adds to the load current in T1 and subtracts from the load current in T2.

UT1 ICC...T2 UT2

ICC...T2
+ +
T1 T2 ZT1 IT1 IT2 ZT2
ICC...T1 ICC...T1

IT1 IT2
UB
IL IL

UL Load UL Load

IEC06000484_2_en.vsd
IEC06000484 V2 EN

Figure 418: Circulating current in a parallel group of two transformers

It can be shown that the magnitude of the circulating current in this case can be
approximately calculated with the formula:

UT1 - UT 2
I cc _ T 1 = I cc _ T 2 =
ZT 1 + ZT 2
EQUATION1866 V1 EN (Equation 194)

Because the transformer impedance is dominantly inductive, it is possible to use

just the transformer reactances in the above formula. At the same time this means
that T1 circulating current lags the busbar voltage by almost 90, while T2
circulating current leads the busbar voltage by almost 90.

See figure 419.

833
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

UT1 CT1*ICC_T1*ZT1

UB
CT2*ICC_T2*ZT2

UT2

IL

IT2 IT1

2*Udeadband

ICC_T2 ICC_T1
T2 Receives Cir_Curr T1 Produces Cir_Curr

IL = IT1+ IT2
Icc_T1 = Imag {IT1- (ZT2/(ZT1+ZT2)) * IL}
Icc_T2 = Imag {IT2- (ZT1/(ZT1+ZT2)) * IL}
en06000525.vsd
IEC06000525 V1 EN

Figure 419: Vector diagram for two power transformers working in parallel

Thus, by minimizing the circulating current flow through transformers, the total
reactive power flow is optimized as well. In the same time, at this optimum state
the apparent power flow is distributed among the transformers in the group in
proportion to their rated power.

In order to calculate the circulating current, measured current values for the
individual transformers must be communicated between the participating
TR8ATCC functions. It should be noted that the Fourier filters in different IEDs
run asynchronously, which means that current and voltage phasors cannot be
exchanged and used for calculation directly between the IEDs. In order to
synchronize measurements within all IEDs in the parallel group, a common
reference must be chosen. The most suitable reference quantity for all transformers,
belonging to the same parallel group, is the busbar voltage. This means that the
measured busbar voltage is used as a reference phasor in all IEDs, and the position
of the current phasors in a complex plane is calculated in respect to this reference.
This is a simple and effective solution, which eliminates any additional need for
synchronization between the IEDs regarding TR8ATCC function.

At each transformer bay, the real and imaginary parts of the current on the
secondary side of the transformer are calculated from measured values, and
distributed to the TR8ATCC functions belonging to the same parallel group.

As mentioned before, only the imaginary part (reactive current component) of the
individual transformer current is needed for the circulating current calculations.

834
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

The real part of the current will, however, be used to calculate the total through
load current and will be used for the line voltage drop compensation.

The total load current is defined as the sum of all individual transformer currents:

k
I L = Ii
i =1

EQUATION1867 V1 EN (Equation 195)

where the subscript i signifies the transformer bay number and k the number of
parallel transformers in the group (k 8). Next step is to extract the circulating
current Icc_i that flows in bay i. It is possible to identify a term in the bay current
which represents the circulating current. The magnitude of the circulating current
in bay i, Icc_i , can be calculated as:

I cc _ i = - Im( I i - K i I L )
EQUATION1868 V1 EN (Equation 196)

where Im signifies the imaginary part of the expression in brackets and Ki is a

constant which depends on the number of transformers in the parallel group and
their short-circuit reactances. The TR8ATCC function automatically calculates this
constant based on the transformer reactances which are setting parameters, and
shall be given in primary ohms calculated from each transformer rating plate. The
minus sign is added in the above equation in order to get a positive value of the
circulating current for the transformer that generates it.

In this way each TR8ATCC function calculates the circulating current of its own bay.

A plus sign means that the transformer produces circulating current while, a minus
sign means that the transformer receives circulating current.

As a next step, it is necessary to estimate the value of the no-load voltage in each
transformer. To do that the magnitude of the circulating current in each bay is first
converted to a voltage deviation, Udi, with the following formula:

U di = Ci I cc _ i X i
EQUATION1869 V1 EN (Equation 197)

where Xi is the short-circuit reactance for transformer i and Ci, is a setting

parameter named Comp which serves the purpose of alternatively increasing or
decreasing the impact of the circulating current in the TR8ATCC control
calculations. It should be noted that Udi will have positive values for transformers
that produce circulating current and negative values for transformers that receive
circulating current.

Now the magnitude of the no-load voltage for each transformer can be
approximated with:

835
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

U i = U Bmean + U di
EQUATION1870 V1 EN (Equation 198)

Generally speaking, this value for the no-load voltage can then be put into the
voltage control function in a similar way as for the single transformer described
previously. Ui would then be regarded similarly to the single transformer measured
busbar voltage, and further control actions taken.

For the transformer producing/receiving the circulating current, the calculated no-
load voltage will be greater/smaller than the measured voltage UBmean. The
calculated no-load voltage will thereafter be compared with the set voltage USet. A
steady deviation which is outside the outer deadband will result in ULOWER or
URAISE being initiated alternatively. In this way the overall control action will
always be correct since the position of a tap changer is directly related to the
transformer no-load voltage. The sequence resets when UBmean is inside the inner
deadband at the same time as the calculated no-load voltages for all transformers in
the parallel group are inside the outer deadband. The example in figure 420,is a
fabricated case and not very realistic, but it illustrates some details on how the
described regulation works.

T1 T2 T3 T4

UBmean
T1 No-load voltage

DB1

DB2
USet

DB2

DB1

IEC06000526_2_en.vsd
IEC06000526 V2 EN

Figure 420: Selection of transformer to tap

In the figure 420, voltage is considered as increasing above the line denoted USet,
and decreasing below that line.

In the TR8ATCC function for T1 and T4, the calculated no-load voltage for T1 and
T4 respectively, is above the upper limit of DB1 and thus outside the deadband.

836
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

In the TR8ATCC function for T2, the calculated no-load voltage for T2, viewed
from the upper DB1, is not outside (above) the deadband, but as viewed from the
lower DB1 it is outside (below) the deadband. However, there is a restriction in a
situation like this, when the measured busbar voltage, UBmean, is on the opposite
side of the USet line (in figure 420), then UBmean must be inside DB1 if the
calculated no-load voltage for that transformer shall qualify as a candidate for
tapping. Thus in the example above, the calculated no-load voltage for T2,
although below DB1, would not be considered for tapping in this case.

In the TR8ATCC function for T3, the calculated no-load voltage for T3, is above
the upper limit of DB1 and thus outside the deadband. However, viewed from the
upper limit DB1, transformers with negative voltage deviation, Udi, are disregarded
and similarly, viewed from the lower limit DB1, transformers with positive voltage
deviation, Udi, are disregarded. Thus in the example above, the calculated no-load
voltage for T3, although above DB1, would not be considered in this case. Thus in
the example above, the calculated no-load voltage for T3, although above DB1,
would not be considered for tapping in this case.

It is possible to avoid simultaneous tapping, and to distribute tapping actions

evenly among the parallel transformers in a busbar group. This is a selected by a
setting parameter, and the algorithm in the TR8ATCC function will then select the
transformer with the greatest voltage deviation Udi to tap first that is, after time
delay t1. Thereafter, the transformer with the then greatest value of Udi amongst the
remaining transformers in the group will tap after a further time delay t2, and so
on. This is made possible as the calculation of Icc is updated every time the
measured values are exchanged on the horizontal communication (every 300 ms).
If two transformers have equal magnitude of Udi, then there is a predetermined
order governing which one is going to tap first.

837
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Logic diagrams

AUTO

UL a
a<b
< &
U1 INNER DB b &

a
a>b
>
U2 INNER DB b &

a
a<b
>1 URAISE
<
U1 DB b

a
a>b
>1
> >1 ULOWER
U2 DB b

UB a
a>b
>
U MAX b &

FSD &

en06000509.vsd
IEC06000509 V1 EN

Figure 421: Simplified logic for automatic control in single mode operation

838
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

AUTO

PARALLEL START
&
OPERSIMTAP

UL a
a<b
< &
U1 INNER DB b &
&
a
a>b
>
U2 INNER DB b &
U CIRCCOMP
&
MIN a
a<b
>1 URAISE
<
U1 DB b >1
U CIRCCOMP
MAX a
a>b
>1
> >1 ULOWER
U2 DB b >1

UB a
a>b
>
U MAX b &

FSD &

en06000511.vsd
IEC06000511 V1 EN

Figure 422: Simplified logic for parallel control in the circulating current mode

839
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

UCCT4 a
a=b
b &
T4PG &
T4
UCCT3 a 1
a=b & 1
b & & &
T3PG T3 SIMLOWER
1
UCCT2 a
a=b
1 &
b & &
T2
T2PG

UCCT1 a &
a=b
1 &
& T1
b

MAX
T1PG

a
a=b
b &
&
T1
a 1
a=b & 1
b & & &
T2PG T2 SIMRAISE
1
a
a=b
1 &
b & &
T3
T3PG

a &
a=b
1 &
T4
b &
T4PG

MIN

ADAPT

a
1
a=b
ActualUser S b

1 1
1
Udeadband S a
a=b
b
LoadVoltage

HOMING

OperSimTap
1
en06000521.vsd
IEC06000521 V1 EN

Figure 423: Simplified logic for simultaneous tapping prevention

840
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

From the Master via

horizontal comm.

relativePosition a
a<b
<
raiseVoltageOut
b &
&
lowerVoltageOut
a
a>b
> =
b & URAISE
& 1
Follow Tap

&
& = ULOWER
1 1
YLTCOUT ATCCIN

tapPosition &
&
tapInHighVoltPos

tapInLowVoltPos

en06000510.vsd
IEC06000510 V1 EN

Figure 424: Simplified logic for parallel control in Master-Follower mode

14.4.4 Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs

TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC

The Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs (TCMYLTC) and 32
binary inputs TCLYLTC gives the tap commands to the tap changer, and
supervises that commands are carried through correctly. It has built-in extensive
possibilities for tap changer position measurement, as well as supervisory and
monitoring features. This is used in the voltage control and can also give
information about tap position to the transformer differential protection.

14.4.4.1 Operation principle

Reading of tap changer position

The tap changer position can be received to the tap changer control and
supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC or 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC function
block in the following ways:

1. Via binary input signals, one per tap position (max. 6 or 32 positions).
2. Via coded binary (Binary), binary coded decimal (BCD) signals, or Gray
coded binary signals.
3. Via a mA input signal.

841
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Via binary input signals, one per tap position

In this option, each tap position has a separate contact that is hard wired to a binary
input in the IED. Via the Signal Matrix tool in PCM600, the contacts on the binary
input card are then directly connected to the
inputs B1 B6 on TCMYLTC function
or inputs B1 B32 on TCLYLTC function.

Via coded binary (Binary), binary coded decimal (BCD) signals or Gray
coded binary signals
The Tap changer control and supervision, (TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC) decodes
binary data from up to six binary inputs to an integer value. The input pattern may
be decoded either as BIN, BCD or GRAY format depending on the setting of the
parameter CodeType.

It is also possible to use even parity check of the input binary signal. Whether the
parity check shall be used or not is set with the setting parameter UseParity.

The input BIERR on (TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC) can be used as supervisory input

for indication of any external error ( Binary Input Module) in the system for
reading of tap changer position. Likewise, the input OUTERR can be used as a
supervisory of the Binary Input Module.

The truth table (see table 483) shows the conversion for Binary, Binary Coded
Decimal, and Gray coded signals.

842
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Table 483: Binary, BCD and Gray conversion

IEC06000522 V1 EN

The Gray code conversion above is not complete and therefore the conversion from
decimal numbers to Gray code is given below.

843
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Table 484: Gray code conversion

IEC06000523 V1 EN

Via a mA input signal

Any of the six inputs on the mA card (MIM) can be used for the purpose of tap
changer position reading connected to the Tap changer control and supervision, 6
binary inputs TCMYLTC or 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC.

844
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

The measurement of the tap changer position via MIM module is based on the
principle that the specified mA input signal range (usually 4-20 mA) is divided into
N intervals corresponding to the number of positions available on the tap changer.
All mA values within one interval are then associated with one tap changer
position value.

The number of available tap changer positions N is defined by the setting

parameters LowVoltTap and HighVoltTap, which define the tap position for lowest
voltage and highest voltage respectively.

14.4.5 Connection between TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC and

TCMYLTCor TCLYLTC
The two function blocks Automatic voltage control for tap changer, single control
TR1ATCC and parallel control TR8ATCC and Tap changer control and
supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC and 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC are
connected to each other according to figure 425 below.

845
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

(Rmk. In case of
parallel control,
this signal shall
TR8ATCC TCLYLTC also be connected
I3P1 ATCCOUT YLTCIN URAISE to HORIZx input of
I3P2 MAN TCINPROG ULOWER the parallel
U3P2 AUTO INERR HIPOSAL transformer
BLOCK IBLK RESETERR LOPOSAL TR8ATCC function
MANCTRL PGTFWD OUTERR POSERRAL
block)
AUTOCTRL PLTREV RS_CLCNT CMDERRAL
PSTO QGTFWD RS_OPCNT TCERRAL
RAISEV QLTREV PARITY POSOUT
LOWERV REVACBLK BIERR CONVERR
EAUTOBLK UHIGH B1 NEWPOS
DEBLKAUT ULOW B2 HIDIFPOS
LVA1 UBLK B3 INVALPOS
LVA2 HOURHUNT B4 YLTCOUT
LVA3 DAYHUNT B5
LVA4 HUNTING B6
LVARESET SINGLE B7
RSTERR PARALLEL B8
DISC HOMING B9
Q1ON ADAPT B10
Q2ON TOTBLK B11
Q3ON AUTOBLK B12
SNGLMODE MASTER B13
T1INCLD FOLLOWER B14
T2INCLD MFERR B15
T3INCLD OUTOFPOS B16
T4INCLD COMMERR B17
T5INCLD ICIRC B18
T6INCLD TRFDISC B19
T7INCLD VTALARM B20
T8INCLD T1PG B21
FORCMAST T2PG B22
RSTMAST T3PG B23
ATCCIN T4PG B24
HORIZ1 T5PG B25
HORIZ2 T6PG B26
HORIZ3 T7PG B27
HORIZ4 T8PG B28
HORIZ5 B29
HORIZ6 B30
HORIZ7 B31
HORIZ8 B32
MA

IEC06000507_2_en.vsd

IEC06000507 V2 EN

Figure 425: Connection between TR8ATCC and TCLYLTC

The TR8ATCC and TR1ATCC function blocks have an output signal ATCCOUT,
which is connected to input YLTCIN on TCMYLTC. The data set sent from
ATCCOUT to YLTCIN contains 5 binary signals, one word containing 10 binary
signals and 1 analog signal. For TR8ATCC data is also sent from output
ATCCOUT to other TR8ATCC function input HORIZx, when the master-follower
or circulating current mode is used.

846
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Table 485: Binary signals: ATCCOUT / YLTCIN

Signal Description
raiseVolt Order to TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC to make a raise command
lowerVolt Order to TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC to make a lower command
automaticCtrl The regulation is in automatic control
extRaiseBlock Block raise commands
extLowerBlock Block lower commands

Table 486: Binary signals contained in word enableBlockSignals: ATCCOUT / YLTCIN

Signal Description
CircCurrBl Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of high circulating current
CmdErrBl Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of command error
OCBl Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of over current
MFPosDiffBl Alarm/Block tap changer operation because the tap difference between a
follower and the master is greater than the set value
OVPartBl Alarm/Block raise commands because the busbar voltage is above Umax
RevActPartBl Alarm/Block raise commands because reverse action is activated
TapChgBl Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of tap changer error
TapPosBl Alarm/Block commands in one direction because the tap changer has
reached an end position, or Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of
tap changer error
UVBl Alarm/Block tap changer operation because the busbar voltage is below Ublock
UVPartBl Alarm/Block lower commands because the busbar voltage is between Umin
and Ublock

Table 487: Analog signal: ATCCOUT / YLTCIN

Signal Description
currAver Value of current in the phase with the highest current value

In case of parallel control of transformers, the data set sent from output signal
ATCCOUT to other TR8ATCC blocks input HORIZx contains one "word"
containing 10 binary signals and 6 analog signals:

Table 488: Binary signals contained in word status: ATCCOUT / HORIZx

Signal Description
TimerOn This signal is activated by the transformer that has started its timer and is
going to tap when the set time has expired.
automaticCTRL Activated when the transformer is set in automatic control
mutualBlock Activated when the automatic control is blocked
disc Activated when the transformer is disconnected from the busbar
receiveStat Signal used for the horizontal communication
Table continues on next page

847
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Signal Description
TermIsForcedMaster Activated when the transformer is selected Master in the master-follower
parallel control mode
TermIsMaster Activated for the transformer that is master in the master-follower parallel
control mode
termReadyForMSF Activated when the transformer is ready for master-follower parallel control
mode
raiseVoltageOut Order from the master to the followers to tap up
lowerVoltageOut Order from the master to the followers to tap down

Table 489: Analog signals: ATCCOUT / HORIZx

Signal Description
voltageBusbar Measured busbar voltage for this transformer
ownLoad Currim Measured load current imaginary part for this transformer
ownLoadCurrre Measured load current real part for this transformer
reacSec Transformer reactance in primary ohms referred to the LV side
relativePosition The transformer's actual tap position
voltage Setpoint The transformer's set voltage (USet) for automatic control

The TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC function blocks have an output YLTCOUT. As

shown in figure 425, this output shall be connected to the input ATCCIN and it
contains 10 binary signals and 4 integer signals:

Table 490: Binary signals: YLTCOUT / ATCCIN

Signal Description
tapInOperation Tap changer in operation, changing tap position
direction Direction, raise or lower, for the most recent tap changer operation
tapInHighVoltPos Tap changer in high end position
tapInLowVoltPos Tap changer in low end position
tapPositionError Error in reading of tap position ( tap position out of range, more than one
step change, BCD code error (unaccepted combination), parity fault, mA out
of range, hardware fault for example, BIM etc.)
tapChgError This is set high when the tap changer has not carried through a raise/lower
command within the expected max. time, or if the tap changer starts tapping
without a given command.
cmdError This is set high if a given raise/lower command is not followed by a tap
position change within the expected max. time
raiseVoltageFb Feedback to TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC that a raise command shall be executed
lowerVoltageFb Feedback to TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC that a lower command shall be executed
timeOutTC Setting value of tTCTimeout that tTCTimeout has timed out.

848
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Table 491: Integer signals: YLTCOUT / ATCCIN

Signal
tapPosition
numberOfOperations
tapPositionMaxVolt
tapPositionMinVolt
Description
Actual tap position as reported from the load tap changer
Accumulated number of tap changer operations
Tap position for highest voltage
Tap position for lowest voltage

14.4.6 Function block

TR1ATCC
I3P1* ATCCOUT
I3P2* MAN
U3P2* AUTO
BLOCK IBLK
MANCTRL PGTFWD
AUTOCTRL PLTREV
PSTO QGTFWD
RAISEV QLTREV
LOWERV REVACBLK
EAUTOBLK UHIGH
DEBLKAUT ULOW
LVA1 UBLK
LVA2 HOURHUNT
LVA3 DAYHUNT
LVA4 HUNTING
LVARESET TIMERON
RSTERR TOTBLK
ATCCIN AUTOBLK
UGTUPPDB
ULTLOWDB

IEC07000041_2_en.vsd
IEC07000041 V2 EN

Figure 426: TR1ATCC function block

849
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

TR8ATCC
I3P1* ATCCOUT
I3P2* MAN
U3P2* AUTO
BLOCK IBLK
MANCTRL PGTFWD
AUTOCTRL PLTREV
PSTO QGTFWD
RAISEV QLTREV
LOWERV REVACBLK
EAUTOBLK UHIGH
DEBLKAUT ULOW
LVA1 UBLK
LVA2 HOURHUNT
LVA3 DAYHUNT
LVA4 HUNTING
LVARESET SINGLE
RSTERR PARALLEL
DISC TIMERON
Q1ON HOMING
Q2ON ADAPT
Q3ON TOTBLK
SNGLMODE AUTOBLK
T1INCLD MASTER
T2INCLD FOLLOWER
T3INCLD MFERR
T4INCLD OUTOFPOS
T5INCLD UGTUPPDB
T6INCLD ULTLOWDB
T7INCLD COMMERR
T8INCLD ICIRC
FORCMAST TRFDISC
RSTMAST VTALARM
ATCCIN T1PG
HORIZ1 T2PG
HORIZ2 T3PG
HORIZ3 T4PG
HORIZ4 T5PG
HORIZ5 T6PG
HORIZ6 T7PG
HORIZ7 T8PG
HORIZ8

IEC07000040_2_en.vsd
IEC07000040 V2 EN

Figure 427: TR8ATCC function block

TCMYLTC
YLTCIN* URAISE
TCINPROG ULOWER
INERR HIPOSAL
RESETERR LOPOSAL
OUTERR POSERRAL
RS_CLCNT CMDERRAL
RS_OPCNT TCERRAL
PARITY POSOUT
BIERR CONVERR
B1 NEWPOS
B2 HIDIFPOS
B3 INVALPOS
B4 TCPOS
B5 YLTCOUT
B6
MA

IEC07000038_2_en.vsd
IEC07000038 V2 EN

Figure 428: TCMYLTC function block

850
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

TCLYLTC
YLTCIN* URAISE
TCINPROG ULOWER
INERR HIPOSAL
RESETERR LOPOSAL
OUTERR POSERRAL
RS_CLCNT CMDERRAL
RS_OPCNT TCERRAL
PARITY POSOUT
BIERR CONVERR
B1 NEWPOS
B2 HIDIFPOS
B3 INVALPOS
B4 TCPOS
B5 YLTCOUT
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
B31
B32
MA

IEC07000037_2_en.vsd
IEC07000037 V2 EN

Figure 429: TCLYLTC function block

VCTRRCV
BLOCK VCTR_REC
COMVALID
DATVALID

IEC07000045-2-en.vsd
IEC07000045 V2 EN

Figure 430: VCTRRCV function block

851
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

14.4.7 Signals
Table 492: TR1ATCC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P1 GROUP - Input group for current on HV side
SIGNAL
I3P2 GROUP - Input group for current on LV side
SIGNAL
U3P2 GROUP - Input group for voltage on LV side
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
MANCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Binary "MAN" command
AUTOCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Binary "AUTO" command
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection
RAISEV BOOLEAN 0 Binary "UP" command
LOWERV BOOLEAN 0 Binary "DOWN" command
EAUTOBLK BOOLEAN 0 Block the voltage control in automatic control mode
DEBLKAUT BOOLEAN 0 Binary "Deblock Auto" command
LVA1 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 1
LVA2 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 2
LVA3 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 3
LVA4 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 4
LVARESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset LVA adjustment to 0
RSTERR BOOLEAN 0 Resets the automatic control commands raise
and lower
ATCCIN GROUP - Group connection from YLTCOUT
SIGNAL

Table 493: TR1ATCC Output signals

Name Type Description
ATCCOUT GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to horizontal communication
and YLTCIN
MAN BOOLEAN The control is in manual mode
AUTO BOOLEAN Automatic control mode is active
IBLK BOOLEAN One phase current is above the settable limit
PGTFWD BOOLEAN Active power above the settable limit
powerActiveForw
PLTREV BOOLEAN Active power below the settable limit
powerActiveRev
QGTFWD BOOLEAN Reactive power above the settable limit
powerReactiveForw
QLTREV BOOLEAN Reactive power below the settable limit
powerReactiveRev
REVACBLK BOOLEAN Block caused by reversed action
Table continues on next page

852
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Name Type Description

UHIGH BOOLEAN Busbar voltage above the settable limit
voltBusbMaxLimit
ULOW BOOLEAN Busbar voltage below the settable limit
voltBusbMinLimit
UBLK BOOLEAN Busbar voltage below the settable limit
voltBusbBlockLimit
HOURHUNT BOOLEAN Alarm for too many tap changer operations during
the last hour
DAYHUNT BOOLEAN Alarm for too many tap changer operations during
the last 24 hours
HUNTING BOOLEAN Alarm for too many contradictory tap changer
operations within the time sliding window
TIMERON BOOLEAN Raise or lower command to the tap activated
TOTBLK BOOLEAN Block of auto and manual commands
AUTOBLK BOOLEAN Block of auto commands
UGTUPPDB BOOLEAN Voltage greater than deadband-high, ULOWER
command to come
ULTLOWDB BOOLEAN Voltage lower than deadband-low, URAISE
command to come
RAISE BOOLEAN Raise voltage order to tapchanger
LOWER BOOLEAN Lower voltage order to tapchanger
USETOUT REAL Voltage setpoint used in single mode (service
value)
IPRIM REAL Max of 3 phase currents (service value)

Table 494: TR8ATCC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P1 GROUP - Input group for current on HV side
SIGNAL
I3P2 GROUP - Input group for current on LV side
SIGNAL
U3P2 GROUP - Input group for voltage on LV side
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
MANCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Binary "MAN" command
AUTOCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Binary "AUTO" command
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection
RAISEV BOOLEAN 0 Binary "UP" command
LOWERV BOOLEAN 0 Binary "DOWN" command
EAUTOBLK BOOLEAN 0 Block the voltage control in automatic control mode
DEBLKAUT BOOLEAN 0 Binary "Deblock Auto" command
LVA1 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 1
LVA2 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 2
LVA3 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 3
Table continues on next page

853
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Name Type Default Description

LVA4 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 4
LVARESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset LVA adjustment to 0
RSTERR BOOLEAN 0 Resets the automatic control commands raise
and lower
DISC BOOLEAN 0 Disconnected transformer
Q1ON BOOLEAN 0 Capacitor or reactor bank 1 connected
Q2ON BOOLEAN 0 Capacitor or reactor bank 2 connected
Q3ON BOOLEAN 0 Capacitor or reactor bank 3 connected
SNGLMODE BOOLEAN 0 The voltage control in single control
T1INCLD BOOLEAN 0 Transformer1 included in parallel group
T2INCLD BOOLEAN 0 Transformer2 included in parallel group
T3INCLD BOOLEAN 0 Transformer3 included in parallel group
T4INCLD BOOLEAN 0 Transformer4 included in parallel group
T5INCLD BOOLEAN 0 Transformer5 included in parallel group
T6INCLD BOOLEAN 0 Transformer6 included in parallel group
T7INCLD BOOLEAN 0 Transformer7 included in parallel group
T8INCLD BOOLEAN 0 Transformer8 included in parallel group
FORCMAST BOOLEAN 0 Force transformer to master
RSTMAST BOOLEAN 0 Reset forced master transformer to default
ATCCIN GROUP - Group connection from YLTCOUT
SIGNAL
HORIZ1 GROUP - Group connection for horizontal communication
SIGNAL from T1
HORIZ2 GROUP - Group connection for horizontal communication
SIGNAL from T2
HORIZ3 GROUP - Group connection for horizontal communication
SIGNAL from T3
HORIZ4 GROUP - Group connection for horizontal communication
SIGNAL from T4
HORIZ5 GROUP - Group connection for horizontal communication
SIGNAL from T5
HORIZ6 GROUP - Group connection for horizontal communication
SIGNAL from T6
HORIZ7 GROUP - Group connection for horizontal communication
SIGNAL from T7
HORIZ8 GROUP - Group connection for horizontal communication
SIGNAL from T8

854
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Table 495: TR8ATCC Output signals

Name Type Description
ATCCOUT GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to horizontal communication
and YLTCIN
MAN BOOLEAN The control is in manual mode
AUTO BOOLEAN Automatic control mode is active
IBLK BOOLEAN One phase current is above the settable limit
PGTFWD BOOLEAN Active power above the settable limit
powerActiveForw
PLTREV BOOLEAN Active power below the settable limit
powerActiveRev
QGTFWD BOOLEAN Reactive power above the settable limit
powerReactiveForw
QLTREV BOOLEAN Reactive power below the settable limit
powerReactiveRev
REVACBLK BOOLEAN Block caused by reversed action
UHIGH BOOLEAN Busbar voltage above the settable limit
voltBusbMaxLimit
ULOW BOOLEAN Busbar voltage below the settable limit
voltBusbMinLimit
UBLK BOOLEAN Busbar voltage below the settable limit
voltBusbBlockLimit
HOURHUNT BOOLEAN Alarm for too many tap changer operations during
the last hour
DAYHUNT BOOLEAN Alarm for too many tap changer operations during
the last 24 hours
HUNTING BOOLEAN Alarm for too many contradictory tap changer
operations within the time sliding window
SINGLE BOOLEAN The transformer operates in single mode
PARALLEL BOOLEAN The transformer operates in parallel mode
TIMERON BOOLEAN Raise or lower command to the tap activated
HOMING BOOLEAN Transformer is in homing conditions
ADAPT BOOLEAN The transformer is adapting
TOTBLK BOOLEAN Block of auto and manual commands
AUTOBLK BOOLEAN Block of auto commands
MASTER BOOLEAN The transformer is master
FOLLOWER BOOLEAN This transformer is a follower
MFERR BOOLEAN The number of masters is different from one
OUTOFPOS BOOLEAN To high difference in tap positions
UGTUPPDB BOOLEAN Voltage greater than deadband-high, ULOWER
command to come
ULTLOWDB BOOLEAN Voltage lower than deadband-low, URAISE
command to come
COMMERR BOOLEAN Communication error
ICIRC BOOLEAN Block from high circulating current
Table continues on next page

855
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Name Type Description

TRFDISC BOOLEAN The transformer is disconnected
VTALARM BOOLEAN VT supervision alarm
T1PG BOOLEAN Transformer1 included in parallel group
T2PG BOOLEAN Transformer2 included in parallel group
T3PG BOOLEAN Transformer3 included in parallel group
T4PG BOOLEAN Transformer4 included in parallel group
T5PG BOOLEAN Transformer5 included in parallel group
T6PG BOOLEAN Transformer6 included in parallel group
T7PG BOOLEAN Transformer7 included in parallel group
T8PG BOOLEAN Transformer8 included in parallel group
RAISE BOOLEAN Raise voltage order to tapchanger
LOWER BOOLEAN Lower voltage order to tapchanger
USETOUT REAL Voltage setpoint used in single mode (service
value)
IPRIM REAL Max of 3 phase currents (service value)

Table 496: TCMYLTC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
YLTCIN GROUP - Input group connection for YLTC
SIGNAL
TCINPROG BOOLEAN 0 Indication that tap is moving
INERR BOOLEAN 0 Supervision signal of the input board
RESETERR BOOLEAN 0 Reset of command and tap error
OUTERR BOOLEAN 0 Supervision off the digital output board
RS_CLCNT BOOLEAN 0 Reset of the contact life counter
RS_OPCNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
PARITY BOOLEAN 0 Parity bit from tap changer for the tap position
BIERR BOOLEAN 0 Error bit from tap changer for the tap position
B1 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 1 from tap changer for the tap position
B2 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 2 from tap changer for the tap position
B3 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 3 from tap changer for the tap position
B4 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 4 from tap changer for the tap position
B5 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 5 from tap changer for the tap position
B6 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 6 from tap changer for the tap position
MA REAL 0 mA from tap changer for the tap position

856
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Table 497: TCMYLTC Output signals

Name Type Description
URAISE BOOLEAN Raise voltage command to tap changer
ULOWER BOOLEAN Lower voltage command to tap changer
HIPOSAL BOOLEAN Alarm for tap in highest volt position
LOPOSAL BOOLEAN Alarm for tap in lowest volt position
POSERRAL BOOLEAN Alarm that indicates a problem with the position
indication
CMDERRAL BOOLEAN Alarm for a command without an expected
position change
TCERRAL BOOLEAN Alarm for none or illegal tap position change
POSOUT BOOLEAN Tap position outside min and max position
CONVERR BOOLEAN General tap position conversion error
NEWPOS BOOLEAN A new tap position is reported, 1 sec pulse
HIDIFPOS BOOLEAN Tap position has changed more than one position
INVALPOS BOOLEAN Last position change was an invalid change
CNT_VAL INTEGER Number of operations on tap changer
TCPOS INTEGER Integer value corresponding to actual tap position
YLTCOUT GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to ATCCIN

Table 498: TCLYLTC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
YLTCIN GROUP - Input group connection for YLTC
SIGNAL
TCINPROG BOOLEAN 0 Indication that tap is moving
INERR BOOLEAN 0 Supervision signal of the input board
RESETERR BOOLEAN 0 Reset of command and tap error
OUTERR BOOLEAN 0 Supervision off the digital output board
RS_CLCNT BOOLEAN 0 Reset of the contact life counter
RS_OPCNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
PARITY BOOLEAN 0 Parity bit from tap changer for the tap position
BIERR BOOLEAN 0 Error bit from tap changer for the tap position
B1 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 1 from tap changer for the tap position
B2 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 2 from tap changer for the tap position
B3 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 3 from tap changer for the tap position
B4 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 4 from tap changer for the tap position
B5 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 5 from tap changer for the tap position
B6 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 6 from tap changer for the tap position
B7 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 7 from tap changer for the tap position
B8 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 8 from tap changer for the tap position
B9 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 9 from tap changer for the tap position
Table continues on next page

857
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Name Type Default Description

B10 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 10 from tap changer for the tap position
B11 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 11 from tap changer for the tap position
B12 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 12 from tap changer for the tap position
B13 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 13 from tap changer for the tap position
B14 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 14 from tap changer for the tap position
B15 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 15 from tap changer for the tap position
B16 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 16 from tap changer for the tap position
B17 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 17 from tap changer for the tap position
B18 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 18 from tap changer for the tap position
B19 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 19 from tap changer for the tap position
B20 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 20 from tap changer for the tap position
B21 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 21 from tap changer for the tap position
B22 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 22 from tap changer for the tap position
B23 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 23 from tap changer for the tap position
B24 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 24 from tap changer for the tap position
B25 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 25 from tap changer for the tap position
B26 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 26 from tap changer for the tap position
B27 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 27 from tap changer for the tap position
B28 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 28 from tap changer for the tap position
B29 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 29 from tap changer for the tap position
B30 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 30 from tap changer for the tap position
B31 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 31 from tap changer for the tap position
B32 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 32 from tap changer for the tap position
MA REAL 0 mA from tap changer for the tap position

Table 499: TCLYLTC Output signals

Name Type Description
URAISE BOOLEAN Raise voltage command to tap changer
ULOWER BOOLEAN Lower voltage command to tap changer
HIPOSAL BOOLEAN Alarm for tap in highest volt position
LOPOSAL BOOLEAN Alarm for tap in lowest volt position
POSERRAL BOOLEAN Alarm that indicates a problem with the position
indication
CMDERRAL BOOLEAN Alarm for a command without an expected
position change
TCERRAL BOOLEAN Alarm for none or illegal tap position change
POSOUT BOOLEAN Tap position outside min and max position
CONVERR BOOLEAN General tap position conversion error
NEWPOS BOOLEAN A new tap position is reported, 1 sec pulse
HIDIFPOS BOOLEAN Tap position has changed more than one position
Table continues on next page

858
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Name Type Description

INVALPOS BOOLEAN Last position change was an invalid change
CNT_VAL INTEGER Number of operations on tap changer
TCPOS INTEGER Integer value corresponding to actual tap position
YLTCOUT GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to ATCCIN

Table 500: VCTRRCV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 501: VCTRRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
VCTR_REC GROUP SIGNAL Received data from horizontal communication
COMVALID BOOLEAN Communication is valid
DATVALID BOOLEAN Data valid

14.4.8 Settings
Table 502: TR1ATCC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
MeasMode L1 - - PosSeq Selection of measured voltage and
L2 current
L3
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
PosSeq
TotalBlock Off - - Off Total block of the voltage control function
On
AutoBlock Off - - Off Block of the automatic mode in voltage
On control function
FSDMode Off - - Off Fast step down function activation mode
Auto
AutoMan
tFSD 1.0 - 100.0 s 0.1 15.0 Time delay for lower command when
fast step down mode is activated
USet 85.0 - 120.0 %UB 0.1 100.0 Voltage control set voltage, % of rated
voltage
UDeadband 0.2 - 9.0 %UB 0.1 1.2 Outer voltage deadband, % of rated
voltage
UDeadbandInner 0.1 - 9.0 %UB 0.1 0.9 Inner voltage deadband, % of rated
voltage
Table continues on next page

859
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Umax 80 - 180 %UB 1 105 Upper lim of busbar voltage, % of rated
voltage
Umin 70 - 120 %UB 1 80 Lower lim of busbar voltage, % of rated
voltage
Ublock 50 - 120 %UB 1 80 Undervoltage block level, % of rated
voltage
t1Use Constant - - Constant Activation of long inverse time delay
Inverse
t1 3 - 1000 s 1 60 Time delay (long) for automatic control
commands
t2Use Constant - - Constant Activation of short inverse time delay
Inverse
t2 1 - 1000 s 1 15 Time delay (short) for automatic control
commands
tMin 3 - 120 s 1 5 Minimum operating time in inverse mode
OperationLDC Off - - Off Operation line voltage drop compensation
On
OperCapaLDC Off - - Off LDC compensation for capacitive load
On
Rline 0.00 - 150.00 Ohm 0.01 0.0 Line resistance, primary values, in ohm
Xline -150.00 - 150.00 Ohm 0.01 0.0 Line reactance, primary values, in ohm
LVAConst1 -20.0 - 20.0 %UB 0.1 0.0 Constant 1 for LVA, % of regulated
voltage
LVAConst2 -20.0 - 20.0 %UB 0.1 0.0 Constant 2 for LVA, % of regulated
voltage
LVAConst3 -20.0 - 20.0 %UB 0.1 0.0 Constant 3 for LVA, % of regulated
voltage
LVAConst4 -20.0 - 20.0 %UB 0.1 0.0 Constant 4 for LVA, % of regulated
voltage
VRAuto -20.0 - 20.0 %UB 0.1 0.0 Load voltage auto correction, % of rated
voltage
OperationRA Off - - Off Enable block from reverse action
On supervision
tRevAct 30 - 6000 s 1 60 Duration time for the reverse action
block signal
RevActLim 0 - 100 %IB1 1 95 Current limit for reverse action block in
% of I1Base
Iblock 5 - 250 %IB1 1 150 Overcurrent block level, % of rated current
HourHuntDetect 0 - 30 Op/H 1 30 Level for number of counted raise/lower
within one hour
DayHuntDetect 0 - 100 Op/D 1 100 Level for number of counted raise/lower
within 24 hour
tWindowHunt 1 - 120 Min 1 60 Time window for hunting alarm, minutes
NoOpWindow 3 - 30 Op/W 1 30 Hunting detection alarm, max operations/
window
P> -9999.99 - 9999.99 MW 0.01 1000 Alarm level of active power in forward
direction
Table continues on next page

860
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

P< -9999.99 - 9999.99 MW 0.01 -1000 Alarm level of active power in reverse
direction
Q> -9999.99 - 9999.99 MVAr 0.01 1000 Alarm level of reactive power in forward
direction
Q< -9999.99 - 9999.99 MVAr 0.01 -1000 Alarm level of reactive power in reverse
direction
tPower 1 - 6000 s 1 10 Time delay for alarms from power
supervision

Table 503: TR1ATCC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Xr2 0.1 - 200.0 Ohm 0.1 0.5 Transformer reactance in primary ohms
on ATCC side
CmdErrBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block command error
Auto&Man Block
OCBk Alarm - - Auto&Man Block Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block overcurrent
Auto&Man Block
OVPartBk Alarm - - Auto&Man Block Alarm or auto&man partial block for
Auto&Man Block overvoltage
RevActPartBk Alarm - - Alarm Alarm or auto partial block for reverse
Auto Block action
TapChgBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block tap changer error
Auto&Man Block
TapPosBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm, auto or auto&man block for pos
Auto Block sup
Auto&Man Block
UVBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block undervoltage
Auto&Man Block
UVPartBk Alarm - - Alarm Alarm or auto&man partial block for
Auto&Man Block undervoltage
GlobalBaseSel1 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups, winding 1
GlobalBaseSel2 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups, winding 2

861
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Table 504: TR8ATCC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
MeasMode L1 - - PosSeq Selection of measured voltage and
L2 current
L3
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
PosSeq
Q1 -9999.99 - 9999.99 MVAr 0.01 0 Size of cap/reactor bank 1 in MVAr, >0
for C and <0 for L
Q2 -9999.99 - 9999.99 MVAr 0.01 0 Size of cap/reactor bank 2 in MVAr, >0
for C and <0 for L
Q3 -9999.99 - 9999.99 MVAr 0.01 0 Size of cap/reactor bank 3 in MVAr, >0
for C and <0 for L
TotalBlock Off - - Off Total block of the voltage control function
On
AutoBlock Off - - Off Block of the automatic mode in voltage
On control function
FSDMode Off - - Off Fast step down function activation mode
Auto
AutoMan
tFSD 1.0 - 100.0 s 0.1 15.0 Time delay for lower command when
fast step down mode is activated
USet 85.0 - 120.0 %UB 0.1 100.0 Voltage control set voltage, % of rated
voltage
UDeadband 0.2 - 9.0 %UB 0.1 1.2 Outer voltage deadband, % of rated
voltage
UDeadbandInner 0.1 - 9.0 %UB 0.1 0.9 Inner voltage deadband, % of rated
voltage
Umax 80 - 180 %UB 1 105 Upper lim of busbar voltage, % of rated
voltage
Umin 70 - 120 %UB 1 80 Lower lim of busbar voltage, % of rated
voltage
Ublock 50 - 120 %UB 1 80 Undervoltage block level, % of rated
voltage
t1Use Constant - - Constant Activation of long inverse time delay
Inverse
t1 3 - 1000 s 1 60 Time delay (long) for automatic control
commands
t2Use Constant - - Constant Activation of short inverse time delay
Inverse
t2 1 - 1000 s 1 15 Time delay (short) for automatic control
commands
tMin 3 - 120 s 1 5 Minimum operating time in inverse mode
OperationLDC Off - - Off Operation line voltage drop compensation
On
OperCapaLDC Off - - Off LDC compensation for capacitive load
On
Table continues on next page

862
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Rline 0.00 - 150.00 Ohm 0.01 0.0 Line resistance, primary values, in ohm
Xline -150.00 - 150.00 Ohm 0.01 0.0 Line reactance, primary values, in ohm
LVAConst1 -20.0 - 20.0 %UB 0.1 0.0 Constant 1 for LVA, % of regulated
voltage
LVAConst2 -20.0 - 20.0 %UB 0.1 0.0 Constant 2 for LVA, % of regulated
voltage
LVAConst3 -20.0 - 20.0 %UB 0.1 0.0 Constant 3 for LVA, % of regulated
voltage
LVAConst4 -20.0 - 20.0 %UB 0.1 0.0 Constant 4 for LVA, % of regulated
voltage
VRAuto -20.0 - 20.0 %UB 0.1 0.0 Load voltage auto correction, % of rated
voltage
OperationRA Off - - Off Enable block from reverse action
On supervision
tRevAct 30 - 6000 s 1 60 Duration time for the reverse action
block signal
RevActLim 0 - 100 %IB1 1 95 Current limit for reverse action block in
% of I1Base
Iblock 5 - 250 %IB1 1 150 Overcurrent block level, % of rated current
HourHuntDetect 0 - 30 Op/H 1 30 Level for number of counted raise/lower
within one hour
DayHuntDetect 0 - 100 Op/D 1 100 Level for number of counted raise/lower
within 24 hour
tWindowHunt 1 - 120 Min 1 60 Time window for hunting alarm, minutes
NoOpWindow 3 - 30 Op/W 1 30 Hunting detection alarm, max operations/
window
P> -9999.99 - 9999.99 MW 0.01 1000 Alarm level of active power in forward
direction
P< -9999.99 - 9999.99 MW 0.01 -1000 Alarm level of active power in reverse
direction
Q> -9999.99 - 9999.99 MVAr 0.01 1000 Alarm level of reactive power in forward
direction
Q< -9999.99 - 9999.99 MVAr 0.01 -1000 Alarm level of reactive power in reverse
direction
tPower 1 - 6000 s 1 10 Time delay for alarms from power
supervision
OperationPAR Off - - Off Parallel operation, Off/CirculatingCurrent/
CC MasterFollower
MF
OperCCBlock Off - - On Enable block from circulating current
On supervision
CircCurrLimit 0.0 - 20000.0 %IB2 0.1 100.0 Block level for circulating current
tCircCurr 0 - 1000 s 1 30 Time delay for block from circulating
current
Comp 0 - 2000 % 1 100 Compensation parameter in % for
Circulating Current
OperSimTap Off - - Off Simultaneous tapping prohibited
On
Table continues on next page

863
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OperUsetPar Off - - Off Use common voltage set point for
On parallel operation
OperHoming Off - - Off Activate homing function
On
VTmismatch 0.5 - 10.0 %UB 0.1 10.0 Alarm level for VT supervision, % of
rated voltage
tVTmismatch 1 - 600 s 1 10 Time delay for VT supervision alarm
T1RXOP Off - - Off Receive block operation from parallel
On transformer1
T2RXOP Off - - Off Receive block operation from parallel
On transformer2
T3RXOP Off - - Off Receive block operation from parallel
On transformer3
T4RXOP Off - - Off Receive block operation from parallel
On transformer4
T5RXOP Off - - Off Receive block operation from parallel
On transformer5
T6RXOP Off - - Off Receive block operation from parallel
On transformer6
T7RXOP Off - - Off Receive block operation from parallel
On transformer7
T8RXOP Off - - Off Receive block operation from parallel
On transformer8
TapPosOffs -5 - 5 - 1 0 Tap position offset in relation to the master
MFPosDiffLim 1 - 20 - 1 1 Limit for tap pos difference from master
tMFPosDiff 0 - 6000 s 1 60 Time for tap pos difference from master

Table 505: TR8ATCC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrfId T1 - - T1 Identity of transformer
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
Xr2 0.1 - 200.0 Ohm 0.1 0.5 Transformer reactance in primary ohms
on ATCC side
tAutoMSF 0 - 60 s 1 10 Time delay for command for auto follower
OperationAdapt Off - - Off Enable adapt mode
On
MFMode Follow Cmd - - Follow Cmd Select follow tap or follow command
Follow Tap
CircCurrBk Alarm - - Alarm Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block high circ current
Auto&Man Block
Table continues on next page

864
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CmdErrBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block command error
Auto&Man Block
OCBk Alarm - - Auto&Man Block Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block overcurrent
Auto&Man Block
MFPosDiffBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm or auto block for tap position
Auto Block difference in MF
OVPartBk Alarm - - Auto&Man Block Alarm or auto&man partial block for
Auto&Man Block overvoltage
RevActPartBk Alarm - - Alarm Alarm or auto partial block for reverse
Auto Block action
TapChgBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block tap changer error
Auto&Man Block
TapPosBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm, auto or auto&man block for pos
Auto Block sup
Auto&Man Block
UVBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block undervoltage
Auto&Man Block
UVPartBk Alarm - - Alarm Alarm or auto&man partial block for
Auto&Man Block undervoltage
GlobalBaseSel1 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups, winding 1
GlobalBaseSel2 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups, winding 2

Table 506: TCMYLTC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
tTCTimeout 1 - 120 s 1 5 Tap changer constant time-out
tPulseDur 0.5 - 10.0 s 0.1 1.5 Raise/lower command output pulse
duration

Table 507: TCMYLTC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
LowVoltTap 1 - 63 - 1 1 Tap position for lowest voltage
HighVoltTap 1 - 63 - 1 33 Tap position for highest voltage
mALow 0.000 - 25.000 mA 0.001 4.000 mA for lowest voltage tap position
mAHigh 0.000 - 25.000 mA 0.001 20.000 mA for highest voltage tap position
CodeType BIN - - BIN Type of code conversion
BCD
Gray
SINGLE
mA
Table continues on next page

865
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

UseParity Off - - Off Enable parity check
On
tStable 1 - 60 s 1 2 Time after position change before the
value is accepted
CLFactor 1.0 - 3.0 - 0.1 2.0 Adjustable factor for contact life function
InitCLCounter 0 - 9999999 s 1 250000 CL counter start value
EnabTapCmd Off - - On Enable commands to tap changer
On
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Table 508: TCLYLTC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
tTCTimeout 1 - 120 s 1 5 Tap changer constant time-out
tPulseDur 0.5 - 10.0 s 0.1 1.5 Raise/lower command output pulse
duration

Table 509: TCLYLTC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
LowVoltTap 1 - 63 - 1 1 Tap position for lowest voltage
HighVoltTap 1 - 63 - 1 33 Tap position for highest voltage
mALow 0.000 - 25.000 mA 0.001 4.000 mA for lowest voltage tap position
mAHigh 0.000 - 25.000 mA 0.001 20.000 mA for highest voltage tap position
CodeType BIN - - BIN Type of code conversion
BCD
Gray
SINGLE
mA
UseParity Off - - Off Enable parity check
On
tStable 1 - 60 s 1 2 Time after position change before the
value is accepted
CLFactor 1.0 - 3.0 - 0.1 2.0 Adjustable factor for contact life function
InitCLCounter 0 - 9999999 s 1 250000 CL counter start value
EnabTapCmd Off - - On Enable commands to tap changer
On
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

866
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

14.4.9 Monitored data

Table 510: TR1ATCC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
RAISE BOOLEAN - - Raise voltage order to
tapchanger
LOWER BOOLEAN - - Lower voltage order to
tapchanger
BUSVOLT REAL - kV The average of the
measured busbar
voltage (service value)
VOLTDEV REAL - % Voltage deviation
compared to dead band
(%)
TRLDCURR REAL - A Amplitude of own load
current
USETOUT REAL - kV Voltage setpoint used in
single mode (service
value)
ULOAD REAL - kV Calculated compensated
voltage (service value)
P REAL - MW Calculated active power
(service value)
Q REAL - MVAr Calculated reactive
power (service value)
IPRIM REAL - A Max of 3 phase currents
(service value)

Table 511: TR8ATCC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
RAISE BOOLEAN - - Raise voltage order to
tapchanger
LOWER BOOLEAN - - Lower voltage order to
tapchanger
BUSVOLT REAL - kV The average of the
measured busbar
voltage (service value)
VOLTDEV REAL - % Voltage deviation
compared to dead band
(%)
TRLDCURR REAL - A Amplitude of own load
current
USETOUT REAL - kV Voltage setpoint used in
single mode (service
value)
ULOAD REAL - kV Calculated compensated
voltage (service value)
P REAL - MW Calculated active power
(service value)
Table continues on next page

867
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

Q REAL - MVAr Calculated reactive
power (service value)
IPRIM REAL - A Max of 3 phase currents
(service value)
CCAVolt REAL - kV Circulating Current
Adjusted Voltage
USETPAR REAL - kV Average voltage setpoint
used in parallel mode
ICIRCUL REAL - A Circulating current

Table 512: TCMYLTC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CNT_VAL INTEGER - - Number of operations on
tap changer
CLCNT_VAL REAL - - Remaining number of
operations at rated load
TCPOS INTEGER - - Integer value
corresponding to actual
tap position

Table 513: TCLYLTC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CNT_VAL INTEGER - - Number of operations on
tap changer
CLCNT_VAL REAL - - Remaining number of
operations at rated load
TCPOS INTEGER - - Integer value
corresponding to actual
tap position

14.4.10 Operation principle

The voltage control function is built up by two function blocks. Both are logical
nodes in IEC 61850-8-1.

Automatic voltage control for tap changer

TR1ATCC for single control
TR8ATCC for parallel control
Tap changer control and supervision
TCMYLTC, 6 binary inputs
TCLYLTC, 32 binary inputs

TR1ATCCand TR8ATCC are designed to automatically maintain the voltage at the

LV-side side of a power transformer within given limits around a set target voltage.

868
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

A raise or lower command is generated whenever the measured voltage, for a given
period of time, deviates from the set target value by more than the preset deadband
value that is, degree of insensitivity. A time-delay (inverse or definite time) is set to
avoid unnecessary operation during shorter voltage deviations from the target
value, and in order to coordinate with other automatic voltage controllers in the
system.

TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC are an interface between TR1ATCC and TR8ATCC

and the transformer load tap changer. More specifically this means that it receives
information from TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC and based on this it gives command-
pulses to a power transformer motor driven on-load tap changer and also receives
information from the load tap changer regarding tap position, progress of given
commands, and so on.

TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC also serve the purpose of giving information about tap
position to the transformer differential protection T2WPDIF and T3WPDIF.

14.4.11 Technical data

Table 514: TR1ATCC and TR8ATCC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Transformer reactance (0.1200.0), primary -
Time delay for lower (1.0100.0) s -
command when fast step
down mode is activated
Voltage control set voltage (85.0120.0)% of UBase 0.25 % of Ur

Outer voltage deadband (0.29.0)% of UBase -

Inner voltage deadband (0.19.0)% of UBase -
Upper limit of busbar voltage (80180)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Lower limit of busbar voltage (70120)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Undervoltage block level (50120)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Time delay (long) for (31000) s 0.2% or 600 ms

automatic control commands whichever is greater
Time delay (short) for (11000) s 0.2% or 600 ms
automatic control commands whichever is greater
Minimum operating time in (3120) s 0.2% or 600 ms
inverse mode whichever is greater
Line resistance (0.00150.00), primary -
Line reactance (-150.00150.00), primary -
Load voltage adjustment (-20.020.0)% of UBase -
constants
Load voltage auto correction (-20.020.0)% of UBase -
Duration time for the reverse (306000) s 0.2% or 600 ms
action block signal whichever is greater
Current limit for reverse (0100)% of I1Base -
action block
Table continues on next page

869
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Function Range or value Accuracy

Overcurrent block level (5250)% of I1Base 1.0% of Ir at IIr
1.0% of I at I>Ir

Level for number of counted (030) operations/hour -

raise/lower within one hour
Level for number of counted (0100) operations/day -
raise/lower within 24 hours
Time window for hunting (1120) minutes -
alarm
Hunting detection alarm, (330) operations/window -
max operations/window
Alarm level of active power (-9999.999999.99) MW 1.0% of Sr
in forward and reverse
direction at (10-200)% of Sr
and (85-120)% of UBase
Alarm level of reactive (-9999.999999.99) MVAr 1.0% of Sr
power in forward and
reverse direction at
(10-200)% of Sr and
(85-120)% of UBase
Time delay for alarms from (16000) s 0.2% or 600 ms
power supervision whichever is greater
Tap position for lowest and (163) -
highest voltage
mA for lowest and highest (0.00025.000) mA -
voltage tap position
Type of code conversion BIN, BCD, GRAY, SINGLE, mA -
Time after position change (160) s 0.2% or 200 ms
before the value is accepted whichever is greater
Tap changer constant time- (1120) s 0.2% or 200 ms
out whichever is greater
Raise/lower command (0.510.0) s 0.2% or 200 ms
output pulse duration whichever is greater

14.5 Logic rotating switch for function selection and

LHMI presentation SLGAPC

14.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Logic rotating switch for function SLGAPC - -
selection and LHMI presentation

870
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

14.5.2 Functionality
The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation SLGAPC
(or the selector switch function block) is used to get an enhanced selector switch
functionality compared to the one provided by a hardware selector switch.
Hardware selector switches are used extensively by utilities, in order to have
different functions operating on pre-set values. Hardware switches are however
sources for maintenance issues, lower system reliability and an extended purchase
portfolio. The selector switch function eliminates all these problems.

14.5.3 Function block

SLGAPC
BLOCK ^P01
PSTO ^P02
UP ^P03
DOWN ^P04
^P05
^P06
^P07
^P08
^P09
^P10
^P11
^P12
^P13
^P14
^P15
^P16
^P17
^P18
^P19
^P20
^P21
^P22
^P23
^P24
^P25
^P26
^P27
^P28
^P29
^P30
^P31
^P32
SWPOSN

IEC14000005-1-en.vsd
IEC14000005 V1 EN

Figure 431: SLGAPC function block

14.5.4 Signals
Table 515: SLGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection
UP BOOLEAN 0 Binary "UP" command
DOWN BOOLEAN 0 Binary "DOWN" command

871
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Table 516: SLGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
P01 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 1
P02 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 2
P03 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 3
P04 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 4
P05 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 5
P06 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 6
P07 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 7
P08 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 8
P09 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 9
P10 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 10
P11 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 11
P12 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 12
P13 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 13
P14 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 14
P15 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 15
P16 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 16
P17 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 17
P18 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 18
P19 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 19
P20 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 20
P21 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 21
P22 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 22
P23 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 23
P24 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 24
P25 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 25
P26 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 26
P27 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 27
P28 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 28
P29 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 29
P30 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 30
P31 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 31
P32 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 32
SWPOSN INTEGER Switch position (integer)

872
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

14.5.5 Settings
Table 517: SLGAPC Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
NrPos 2 - 32 - 1 32 Number of positions in the switch
OutType Pulsed - - Steady Output type, steady or pulse
Steady
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate pulse duration, in [s]
tDelay 0.000 - 60000.000 s 0.010 0.000 Time delay on the output, in [s]
StopAtExtremes Disabled - - Disabled Stop when min or max position is reached
Enabled

14.5.6 Monitored data

Table 518: SLGAPC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
SWPOSN INTEGER - - Switch position (integer)

14.5.7 Operation principle

The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGAPC)
function has two operating inputs UP and DOWN. When a signal is received on
the UP input, the function will activate the output next to the present activated
output, in ascending order (for example if the present activated output is P03 and
one activates the UP input then the output P04 will be activated). When a signal is
received on the DOWN input, the function will activate the output next to the
present activated output, in descending order (for example if the present activated
output is P03 and one activates the DOWN input then the output P02 will be
activated). Depending on the output settings the output signals can be steady or
pulsed. In case of steady signals, the output will be active till the time it receives
next operation of UP/DOWN inputs. Also, depending on the settings one can have
a time delay between the UP or DOWN activation signal positive front and the
output activation.

Besides the inputs visible in the application configuration in the Application

Configuration tool, there are other possibilities that will allow an user to set the
desired position directly (without activating the intermediate positions), either
locally or remotely, using a select before execute dialog. One can block the
function operation, by activating the BLOCK input. In this case, the present
position will be kept and further operation will be blocked. The operator place
(local or remote) is specified through the PSTO input. If any operation is allowed
the signal INTONE from the Fixed signal function block can be connected.
SLGAPC function block has also an integer value output, that generates the actual

873
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

position number. The positions and the block names are fully settable by the user.
These names will appear in the menu, so the user can see the position names
instead of a number.

14.5.7.1 Graphical display

There are two possibilities for SLGAPC

if it is used just for the monitoring, the switches will be listed with their actual
position names, as defined by the user (max. 13 characters).
if it is used for control, the switches will be listed with their actual positions,
but only the first three letters of the name will be used.

In both cases, the switch full name will be shown, but the user has to redefine it
when building the Graphical Display Editor, under the "Caption". If used for the
control, the following sequence of commands will ensure:

874
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

From the graphical display:

Control
Control Single Line Diagram
Measurements Commands
Events
Disturbance records
Settings
Diagnostics
Test
Change to the "Switches" page Reset
of the SLD by left-right arrows. Authorization
Select switch by up-down Language
arrows

../Control/SLD/Switch
O I ../Control/SLD/Switch
SMBRREC control SMBRREC control
WFM Select switch. Press the
WFM
I or O key. A dialog box
Pilot setup appears.
Pilot setup
OFF OFF
Damage control E P: Disc N: Disc Fe
DAL
The pos will not be modified
(outputs will not be activated) until OK Cancel
you press the E-button for O.K.

../Control/SLD/Switch

SMBRREC control
WFM

Pilot setup
OFF

Damage control
DFW

IEC06000421-2-en.vsd
IEC06000421 V2 EN

Figure 432: Example 2 on handling the switch from the local HMI.
From the single line diagram on local HMI.

14.6 Selector mini switch VSGAPC

14.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Selector mini switch VSGAPC - -

875
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

14.6.2 Functionality
The Selector mini switch VSGAPC function block is a multipurpose function used
for a variety of applications, as a general purpose switch.

VSGAPC can be controlled from the menu or from a symbol on the single line
diagram (SLD) on the local HMI.

14.6.3 Function block

VSGAPC
BLOCK BLOCKED
PSTO POSITION
IPOS1 POS1
IPOS2 POS2
CMDPOS12
CMDPOS21

IEC14000066-1-en.vsd
IEC14000066 V1 EN

Figure 433: VSGAPC function block

14.6.4 Signals
Table 519: VSGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection
IPOS1 BOOLEAN 0 Position 1 indicating input
IPOS2 BOOLEAN 0 Position 2 indicating input

Table 520: VSGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
BLOCKED BOOLEAN The function is active but the functionality is
blocked
POSITION INTEGER Position indication, integer
POS1 BOOLEAN Position 1 indication, logical signal
POS2 BOOLEAN Position 2 indication, logical signal
CMDPOS12 BOOLEAN Execute command from position 1 to position 2
CMDPOS21 BOOLEAN Execute command from position 2 to position 1

876
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

14.6.5 Settings
Table 521: VSGAPC Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
CtlModel Dir Norm - - Dir Norm Specifies the type for control model
SBO Enh according to IEC 61850
Mode Steady - - Pulsed Operation mode
Pulsed
tSelect 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 30.000 Max time between select and execute
signals
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Command pulse lenght

14.6.6 Operation principle

Selector mini switch (VSGAPC) function can be used for double purpose, in the
same way as switch controller (SCSWI) functions are used:

for indication on the single line diagram (SLD). Position is received through
the IPOS1 and IPOS2 inputs and distributed in the configuration through the
POS1 and POS2 outputs, or to IEC 61850 through reporting, or GOOSE.
for commands that are received via the local HMI or IEC 61850 and
distributed in the configuration through outputs CMDPOS12 and CMDPOS21.
The output CMDPOS12 is set when the function receives a CLOSE command
from the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.
The output CMDPOS21 is set when the function receives an OPEN command
from the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.

It is important for indication in the SLD that the a symbol is

associated with a controllable object, otherwise the symbol won't be
displayed on the screen. A symbol is created and configured in
GDE tool in PCM600.

The PSTO input is connected to the Local remote switch to have a selection of
operators place, operation from local HMI (Local) or through IEC 61850 (Remote).
An INTONE connection from Fixed signal function block (FXDSIGN) will allow
operation from local HMI.

As it can be seen, both indications and commands are done in double-bit

representation, where a combination of signals on both inputs/outputs generate the
desired result.

The following table shows the relationship between IPOS1/IPOS2 inputs and the
name of the string that is shown on the SLD. The value of the strings are set in PST.

877
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

IPOS1 IPOS2 Name of displayed string Default string value

0 0 PosUndefined P00
1 0 Position1 P01
0 1 Position2 P10
1 1 PosBadState P11

14.7 Generic communication function for Double Point

indication DPGAPC

14.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Generic communication function for DPGAPC - -
Double Point indication

14.7.2 Functionality
Generic communication function for Double Point indication DPGAPC function
block is used to send double indications to other systems, equipment or functions in
the substation through IEC 61850-8-1 or other communication protocols. It is
especially used in the interlocking station-wide logics.

14.7.3 Function block

IEC13000081 V1 EN

Figure 434: DPGAPC function block

14.7.4 Signals
Table 522: DPGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open indication
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close indication
VALID BOOLEAN 0 Valid indication

878
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Table 523: DPGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
POSITION INTEGER Double point indication

14.7.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

14.7.6 Operation principle

When receiving the input signals, DPGAPC sends the signals over IEC 61850-8-1
to the systems, equipment or functions that requests and thus subscribes on these
signals. To be able to get the signals into other systems, equipment or functions,
one must use other tools, described in the Engineering manual and define which
function block in which systems, equipment or functions should receive this
information.

14.8 Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC

14.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC - -

14.8.2 Functionality
The Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC function block is a
collection of 8 single point commands, designed to bring in commands from
REMOTE (SCADA) to those parts of the logic configuration that do not need
extensive command receiving functionality (for example, SCSWI). In this way,
simple commands can be sent directly to the IED outputs, without confirmation.
Confirmation (status) of the result of the commands is supposed to be achieved by
other means, such as binary inputs and SPGAPC function blocks. The commands
can be pulsed or steady with a settable pulse time.

879
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

14.8.3 Function block

SPC8GAPC
BLOCK ^OUT1
PSTO ^OUT2
^OUT3
^OUT4
^OUT5
^OUT6
^OUT7
^OUT8

IEC07000143-3-en.vsd
IEC07000143 V3 EN

Figure 435: SPC8GAPC function block

14.8.4 Signals
Table 524: SPC8GAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the function operation
PSTO INTEGER 1 Operator place selection

Table 525: SPC8GAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Command output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Command output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Command output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Command output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Command output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Command output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Command output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Command output 8

14.8.5 Settings
Table 526: SPC8GAPC Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
PulseMode1 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 1
tPulse1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 1
PulseMode2 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 2
tPulse2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 2
Table continues on next page

880
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

PulseMode3 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 3
tPulse3 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 3
PulseMode4 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 4
tPulse4 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 4
PulseMode5 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 5
tPulse5 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 5
PulseMode6 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 6
tPulse6 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 6
PulseMode7 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 7
tPulse7 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 7
PulseMode8 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 8
tPulse8 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 8

14.8.6 Operation principle

The PSTO input selects the operator place (LOCAL, REMOTE or ALL). One of
the eight outputs is activated based on the command sent from the operator place
selected. The settings Latchedx and tPulsex (where x is the respective output) will
determine if the signal will be pulsed (and how long the pulse is) or latched
(steady). BLOCK will block the operation of the function in case a command is
sent, no output will be activated.

PSTO is the universal operator place selector for all control

functions. Although, PSTO can be configured to use LOCAL or
ALL operator places only, REMOTE operator place is used in
SPC8GAPC function.

14.9 AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0

AUTOBITS

14.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
AutomationBits, command function for
AUTOBITS - -
DNP3

881
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

14.9.2 Functionality
AutomationBits function for DNP3 (AUTOBITS) is used within PCM600 to get
into the configuration of the commands coming through the DNP3 protocol. The
AUTOBITS function plays the same role as functions GOOSEBINRCV (for IEC
61850) and MULTICMDRCV (for LON).

14.9.3 Function block

AUTOBITS
BLOCK ^CMDBIT1
PSTO ^CMDBIT2
^CMDBIT3
^CMDBIT4
^CMDBIT5
^CMDBIT6
^CMDBIT7
^CMDBIT8
^CMDBIT9
^CMDBIT10
^CMDBIT11
^CMDBIT12
^CMDBIT13
^CMDBIT14
^CMDBIT15
^CMDBIT16
^CMDBIT17
^CMDBIT18
^CMDBIT19
^CMDBIT20
^CMDBIT21
^CMDBIT22
^CMDBIT23
^CMDBIT24
^CMDBIT25
^CMDBIT26
^CMDBIT27
^CMDBIT28
^CMDBIT29
^CMDBIT30
^CMDBIT31
^CMDBIT32

IEC09000925-1-en.vsd
IEC09000925 V1 EN

Figure 436: AUTOBITS function block

14.9.4 Signals
Table 527: AUTOBITS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection

882
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Table 528: AUTOBITS Output signals

Name Type Description
CMDBIT1 BOOLEAN Command out bit 1
CMDBIT2 BOOLEAN Command out bit 2
CMDBIT3 BOOLEAN Command out bit 3
CMDBIT4 BOOLEAN Command out bit 4
CMDBIT5 BOOLEAN Command out bit 5
CMDBIT6 BOOLEAN Command out bit 6
CMDBIT7 BOOLEAN Command out bit 7
CMDBIT8 BOOLEAN Command out bit 8
CMDBIT9 BOOLEAN Command out bit 9
CMDBIT10 BOOLEAN Command out bit 10
CMDBIT11 BOOLEAN Command out bit 11
CMDBIT12 BOOLEAN Command out bit 12
CMDBIT13 BOOLEAN Command out bit 13
CMDBIT14 BOOLEAN Command out bit 14
CMDBIT15 BOOLEAN Command out bit 15
CMDBIT16 BOOLEAN Command out bit 16
CMDBIT17 BOOLEAN Command out bit 17
CMDBIT18 BOOLEAN Command out bit 18
CMDBIT19 BOOLEAN Command out bit 19
CMDBIT20 BOOLEAN Command out bit 20
CMDBIT21 BOOLEAN Command out bit 21
CMDBIT22 BOOLEAN Command out bit 22
CMDBIT23 BOOLEAN Command out bit 23
CMDBIT24 BOOLEAN Command out bit 24
CMDBIT25 BOOLEAN Command out bit 25
CMDBIT26 BOOLEAN Command out bit 26
CMDBIT27 BOOLEAN Command out bit 27
CMDBIT28 BOOLEAN Command out bit 28
CMDBIT29 BOOLEAN Command out bit 29
CMDBIT30 BOOLEAN Command out bit 30
CMDBIT31 BOOLEAN Command out bit 31
CMDBIT32 BOOLEAN Command out bit 32

14.9.5 Settings
Table 529: AUTOBITS Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On

883
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Table 530: DNPGEN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation mode Off / On
On

Table 531: CHSERRS485 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
BaudRate 300 Bd - - 9600 Bd Baud-rate for serial port
600 Bd
1200 Bd
2400 Bd
4800 Bd
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
38400 Bd
57600 Bd
115200 Bd

Table 532: CHSERRS485 Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
DLinkConfirm Never - - Never Data-link confirm
Sometimes
Always
tDLinkTimeout 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Data-link confirm timeout in s
DLinkRetries 0 - 255 - 1 3 Data-link maximum retries
tRxToTxMinDel 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Rx to Tx minimum delay in s
ApLayMaxRxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Rx fragment
size
ApLayMaxTxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Tx fragment
size
StopBits 1-2 - 1 1 Stop bits
Parity No - - Even Parity
Even
Odd
tRTSWarmUp 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 RTS warm-up in s
tRTSWarmDown 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 RTS warm-down in s
tBackOffDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.050 RS485 back-off delay in s
tMaxRndDelBkOf 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 RS485 maximum back-off random delay
in s

884
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Table 533: CH1TCP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation mode
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
TCPIPLisPort 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from
master
UDPPortInitNUL 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 UDP portfor initial NULL response
UDPPortCliMast 0 - 65535 - 1 0 UDP port to remote client/master

Table 534: CH1TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ApLayMaxRxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Rx fragment
size
ApLayMaxTxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Tx fragment
size

Table 535: CH2TCP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation mode
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
TCPIPLisPort 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from
master
UDPPortInitNUL 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 UDP port for initial NULL response
UDPPortCliMast 0 - 65535 - 1 0 UDP port to remote client/master

Table 536: CH2TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ApLayMaxRxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Rx fragment
size
ApLayMaxTxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Tx fragment
size

885
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Table 537: CH3TCP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation mode
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
TCPIPLisPort 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from
master
UDPPortInitNUL 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 UDP port for initial NULL response
UDPPortCliMast 0 - 65535 - 1 0 UDP port to remote client/master

Table 538: CH3TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ApLayMaxRxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Rx fragment
size
ApLayMaxTxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Tx fragment
size

Table 539: CH4TCP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation mode
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
TCPIPLisPort 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from
master
UDPPortInitNUL 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 UDP port for initial NULL response
UDPPortCliMast 0 - 65535 - 1 0 UDP port to remote client/master

Table 540: CH4TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ApLayMaxRxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Rx fragment
size
ApLayMaxTxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Tx fragment
size

Table 541: MSTSER Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
ChToAssociate RS485 - - RS485 Channel to associate to
Optical
SlaveAddress 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Slave address
Table continues on next page

886
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

MasterAddres 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Master address
Obj1DefVar 1:BISingleBit - - 1:BISingleBit Object 1, default variation
2:BIWithStatus
Obj2DefVar 1:BIChWithoutTim - - 3:BIChWithRelTim Object 2, default variation
e e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
Obj3DefVar 1:DIWithoutFlag - - 1:DIWithoutFlag Object 3, default variation
2:DIWithFlag
Obj4DefVar 1:DIChWithoutTim - - 3:DIChWithRelTim Object 4, default variation
e e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
Obj10DefVar 1:BO - - 2:BOStatus Object 10, default variation
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar 1:BinCnt32 - - 5:BinCnt32WoutF Object 20, default variation
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
Obj22DefVar 1:BinCnt32EvWout - - 1:BinCnt32EvWou Object 22, default variation
T tT
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
Obj30DefVar 1:AI32Int - - 3:AI32IntWithoutF Object 30, default variation
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
Obj32DefVar 1:AI32IntEvWoutF - - 1:AI32IntEvWoutF Object 32, default variation
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT

Table 542: MSTSER Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ValMasterAddr No - - Yes Validate source (master) address
Yes
AddrQueryEnbl No - - Yes Address query enable
Yes
tApplConfTout 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 10.00 Application layer confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes No - - Yes Enable application for multiple fragment
Yes response
Table continues on next page

887
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ConfMultFrag No - - Yes Confirm each multiple fragment
Yes
UREnable No - - Yes Unsolicited response enabled
Yes
UREvClassMask Off - - Off Unsolicited response, event class mask
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
UROfflineRetry 0 - 10 - 1 5 Unsolicited response retries before off-
line retry mode
tURRetryDelay 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 30.00 Unsolicited response off-line retry delay
in s
UREvCntThold1 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 1 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout1 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 1 event
buffer timeout
UREvCntThold2 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 2 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout2 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 2 event
buffer timeout
UREvCntThold3 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 3 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout3 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 3 event
buffer timeout
DelOldBufFull No - - No Delete oldest event when buffer is full
Yes
ExtTimeFormat LocalTime - - UTC External time format
UTC
DNPToSetTime No - - Yes Allow DNP to set time in IED
Yes
tSynchTimeout 30 - 3600 s 1 1800 Time synch timeout before error status is
generated
TSyncReqAfTout No - - No Time synchronization request after
Yes timeout
Averag3TimeReq No - - No Use average of 3 time requests
Yes
PairedPoint No - - Yes Enable paired point
Yes
tSelectTimeout 1.0 - 60.0 s 0.1 30.0 Select timeout

888
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Table 543: MST1TCP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
SlaveAddress 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Slave address
MasterAddres 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Master address
ValMasterAddr No - - Yes Validate source (master) address
Yes
MasterIP-Addr 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Master IP-address
Address
MasterIPNetMsk 0 - 18 IP 1 255.255.255.255 Master IP net mask
Address
Obj1DefVar 1:BISingleBit - - 1:BISingleBit Object 1, default variation
2:BIWithStatus
Obj2DefVar 1:BIChWithoutTim - - 3:BIChWithRelTim Object 2, default variation
e e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
Obj3DefVar 1:DIWithoutFlag - - 1:DIWithoutFlag Object 3, default variation
2:DIWithFlag
Obj4DefVar 1:DIChWithoutTim - - 3:DIChWithRelTim Object 4, default variation
e e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
Obj10DefVar 1:BO - - 2:BOStatus Object 10, default variation
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar 1:BinCnt32 - - 5:BinCnt32WoutF Object 20, default variation
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
Obj22DefVar 1:BinCnt32EvWout - - 1:BinCnt32EvWou Object 22, default variation
T tT
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
Obj30DefVar 1:AI32Int - - 3:AI32IntWithoutF Object 30, default variation
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
Obj32DefVar 1:AI32IntEvWoutF - - 1:AI32IntEvWoutF Object 32, default variation
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT

889
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Table 544: MST1TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
AddrQueryEnbl No - - Yes Address query enable
Yes
tApplConfTout 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 10.00 Application layer confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes No - - Yes Enable application for multiple fragment
Yes response
ConfMultFrag No - - Yes Confirm each multiple fragment
Yes
UREnable No - - Yes Unsolicited response enabled
Yes
UREvClassMask Off - - Off Unsolicited response, event class mask
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
UROfflineRetry 0 - 10 - 1 5 Unsolicited response retries before off-
line retry mode
tURRetryDelay 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 30.00 Unsolicited response off-line retry delay
in s
UREvCntThold1 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 1 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout1 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 1 event
buffer timeout
UREvCntThold2 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 2 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout2 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 2 event
buffer timeout
UREvCntThold3 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 3 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout3 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 3 event
buffer timeout
DelOldBufFull No - - No Delete oldest event when buffer is full
Yes
ExtTimeFormat LocalTime - - UTC External time format
UTC
DNPToSetTime No - - No Allow DNP to set time in IED
Yes
tSynchTimeout 30 - 3600 s 1 1800 Time synch timeout before error status is
generated
TSyncReqAfTout No - - No Time synchronization request after
Yes timeout
Averag3TimeReq No - - No Use average of 3 time requests
Yes
PairedPoint No - - Yes Enable paired point
Yes
Table continues on next page

890
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tSelectTimeout 1.0 - 60.0 s 0.1 30.0 Select timeout
tBrokenConTout 0 - 3600 s 1 0 Broken connection timeout
tKeepAliveT 0 - 3600 s 1 10 Keep-Alive timer

Table 545: MST2TCP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
SlaveAddress 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Slave address
MasterAddres 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Master address
ValMasterAddr No - - Yes Validate source (master) address
Yes
MasterIP-Addr 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Master IP-address
Address
MasterIPNetMsk 0 - 18 IP 1 255.255.255.255 Master IP net mask
Address
Obj1DefVar 1:BISingleBit - - 1:BISingleBit Object 1, default variation
2:BIWithStatus
Obj2DefVar 1:BIChWithoutTim - - 3:BIChWithRelTim Object 2, default variation
e e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
Obj3DefVar 1:DIWithoutFlag - - 1:DIWithoutFlag Object 3, default variation
2:DIWithFlag
Obj4DefVar 1:DIChWithoutTim - - 3:DIChWithRelTim Object 4, default variation
e e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
Obj10DefVar 1:BO - - 2:BOStatus Object 10, default variation
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar 1:BinCnt32 - - 5:BinCnt32WoutF Object 20, default variation
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
Table continues on next page

891
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Obj22DefVar 1:BinCnt32EvWout - - 1:BinCnt32EvWou Object 22, default variation
T tT
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
Obj30DefVar 1:AI32Int - - 3:AI32IntWithoutF Object 30, default variation
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
Obj32DefVar 1:AI32IntEvWoutF - - 1:AI32IntEvWoutF Object 32, default variation
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT

Table 546: MST2TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
AddrQueryEnbl No - - Yes Address query enable
Yes
tApplConfTout 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 10.00 Application layer confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes No - - Yes Enable application for multiple fragment
Yes response
ConfMultFrag No - - Yes Confirm each multiple fragment
Yes
UREnable No - - Yes Unsolicited response enabled
Yes
UREvClassMask Off - - Off Unsolicited response, event class mask
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
UROfflineRetry 0 - 10 - 1 5 Unsolicited response retries before off-
line retry mode
tURRetryDelay 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 30.00 Unsolicited response off-line retry delay
in s
UREvCntThold1 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 1 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout1 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 1 event
buffer timeout
UREvCntThold2 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 2 event count
report treshold
Table continues on next page

892
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tUREvBufTout2 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 2 event
buffer timeout
UREvCntThold3 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 3 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout3 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 3 event
buffer timeout
DelOldBufFull No - - No Delete oldest event when buffer is full
Yes
ExtTimeFormat LocalTime - - UTC External time format
UTC
DNPToSetTime No - - No Allow DNP to set time in IED
Yes
tSynchTimeout 30 - 3600 s 1 1800 Time synch timeout before error status is
generated
TSyncReqAfTout No - - No Time synchronization request after
Yes timeout
Averag3TimeReq No - - No Use average of 3 time requests
Yes
PairedPoint No - - Yes Enable paired point
Yes
tSelectTimeout 1.0 - 60.0 s 0.1 30.0 Select timeout
tBrokenConTout 0 - 3600 s 1 0 Broken connection timeout
tKeepAliveT 0 - 3600 s 1 10 Keep-Alive timer

Table 547: MST3TCP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
SlaveAddress 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Slave address
MasterAddres 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Master address
ValMasterAddr No - - Yes Validate source (master) address
Yes
MasterIP-Addr 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Master IP-address
Address
MasterIPNetMsk 0 - 18 IP 1 255.255.255.255 Master IP net mask
Address
Obj1DefVar 1:BISingleBit - - 1:BISingleBit Object 1, default variation
2:BIWithStatus
Obj2DefVar 1:BIChWithoutTim - - 3:BIChWithRelTim Object 2, default variation
e e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
Obj3DefVar 1:DIWithoutFlag - - 1:DIWithoutFlag Object 3, default variation
2:DIWithFlag
Table continues on next page

893
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Obj4DefVar 1:DIChWithoutTim - - 3:DIChWithRelTim Object 4, default variation
e e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
Obj10DefVar 1:BO - - 2:BOStatus Object 10, default variation
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar 1:BinCnt32 - - 5:BinCnt32WoutF Object 20, default variation
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
Obj22DefVar 1:BinCnt32EvWout - - 1:BinCnt32EvWou Object 22, default variation
T tT
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
Obj30DefVar 1:AI32Int - - 3:AI32IntWithoutF Object 30, default variation
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
Obj32DefVar 1:AI32IntEvWoutF - - 1:AI32IntEvWoutF Object 32, default variation
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT

Table 548: MST3TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
AddrQueryEnbl No - - Yes Address query enable
Yes
tApplConfTout 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 10.00 Application layer confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes No - - Yes Enable application for multiple fragment
Yes response
ConfMultFrag No - - Yes Confirm each multiple fragment
Yes
UREnable No - - Yes Unsolicited response enabled
Yes
UREvClassMask Off - - Off Unsolicited response, event class mask
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
Table continues on next page

894
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

UROfflineRetry 0 - 10 - 1 5 Unsolicited response retries before off-
line retry mode
tURRetryDelay 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 30.00 Unsolicited response off-line retry delay
in s
UREvCntThold1 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 1 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout1 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 1 event
buffer timeout
UREvCntThold2 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 2 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout2 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 2 event
buffer timeout
UREvCntThold3 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 3 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout3 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 3 event
buffer timeout
DelOldBufFull No - - No Delete oldest event when buffer is full
Yes
ExtTimeFormat LocalTime - - UTC External time format
UTC
DNPToSetTime No - - No Allow DNP to set time in IED
Yes
tSynchTimeout 30 - 3600 s 1 1800 Time synch timeout before error status is
generated
TSyncReqAfTout No - - No Time synchronization request after
Yes timeout
Averag3TimeReq No - - No Use average of 3 time requests
Yes
PairedPoint No - - Yes Enable paired point
Yes
tSelectTimeout 1.0 - 60.0 s 0.1 30.0 Select timeout
tBrokenConTout 0 - 3600 s 1 0 Broken connection timeout
tKeepAliveT 0 - 3600 s 1 10 Keep-Alive timer

Table 549: MST4TCP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
SlaveAddress 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Slave address
MasterAddres 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Master address
ValMasterAddr No - - Yes Validate source (master) address
Yes
MasterIP-Addr 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Master IP-address
Address
Table continues on next page

895
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

MasterIPNetMsk 0 - 18 IP 1 255.255.255.255 Master IP net mask
Address
Obj1DefVar 1:BISingleBit - - 1:BISingleBit Object 1, default variation
2:BIWithStatus
Obj2DefVar 1:BIChWithoutTim - - 3:BIChWithRelTim Object 2, default variation
e e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
Obj3DefVar 1:DIWithoutFlag - - 1:DIWithoutFlag Object 3, default variation
2:DIWithFlag
Obj4DefVar 1:DIChWithoutTim - - 3:DIChWithRelTim Object 4, default variation
e e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
Obj10DefVar 1:BO - - 2:BOStatus Object 10, default variation
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar 1:BinCnt32 - - 5:BinCnt32WoutF Object 20, default variation
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
Obj22DefVar 1:BinCnt32EvWout - - 1:BinCnt32EvWou Object 22, default variation
T tT
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
Obj30DefVar 1:AI32Int - - 3:AI32IntWithoutF Object 30, default variation
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
Obj32DefVar 1:AI32IntEvWoutF - - 1:AI32IntEvWoutF Object 32, default variation
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT

Table 550: MST4TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
AddrQueryEnbl No - - Yes Address query enable
Yes
tApplConfTout 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 10.00 Application layer confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes No - - Yes Enable application for multiple fragment
Yes response
Table continues on next page

896
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ConfMultFrag No - - Yes Confirm each multiple fragment
Yes
UREnable No - - Yes Unsolicited response enabled
Yes
UREvClassMask Off - - Off Unsolicited response, event class mask
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
UROfflineRetry 0 - 10 - 1 5 Unsolicited response retries before off-
line retry mode
tURRetryDelay 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 30.00 Unsolicited response off-line retry delay
in s
UREvCntThold1 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 1 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout1 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 1 event
buffer timeout
UREvCntThold2 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 2 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout2 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 2 event
buffer timeout
UREvCntThold3 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 3 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout3 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 3 event
buffer timeout
DelOldBufFull No - - No Delete oldest event when buffer is full
Yes
ExtTimeFormat LocalTime - - UTC External time format
UTC
DNPToSetTime No - - No Allow DNP to set time in IED
Yes
tSynchTimeout 30 - 3600 s 1 1800 Time synch timeout before error status is
generated
TSyncReqAfTout No - - No Time synchronization request after
Yes timeout
Averag3TimeReq No - - No Use average of 3 time requests
Yes
PairedPoint No - - Yes Enable paired point
Yes
tSelectTimeout 1.0 - 60.0 s 0.1 30.0 Select timeout
tBrokenConTout 0 - 3600 s 1 0 Broken connection timeout
tKeepAliveT 0 - 3600 s 1 10 Keep-Alive timer

897
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

14.9.6 Operation principle

AutomationBits function (AUTOBITS) has 32 individual outputs which each can
be mapped as a Binary Output point in DNP3. The output is operated by a "Object
12" in DNP3. This object contains parameters for control-code, count, on-time and
off-time. To operate an AUTOBITS output point, send a control-code of latch-On,
latch-Off, pulse-On, pulse-Off, Trip or Close. The remaining parameters will be
regarded were appropriate. ex: pulse-On, on-time=100, off-time=300, count=5
would give 5 positive 100 ms pulses, 300 ms apart.

There is a BLOCK input signal, which will disable the operation of the function, in
the same way the setting Operation: On/Off does. That means that, upon activation
of the BLOCK input, all 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set to 0. The BLOCK acts
like an overriding, the function still receives data from the DNP3 master. Upon
deactivation of BLOCK, all the 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set by the DNP3
master again, momentarily. For AUTOBITS , the PSTO input determines the
operator place. The command can be written to the block while in Remote. If
PSTO is in Local then no change is applied to the outputs.

14.10 Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD

14.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD - -

14.10.2 Functionality
The IEDs can receive commands either from a substation automation system or
from the local HMI. The command function block has outputs that can be used, for
example, to control high voltage apparatuses or for other user defined functionality.

898
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 14
Control

14.10.3 Function block

SINGLECMD
BLOCK ^OUT1
^OUT2
^OUT3
^OUT4
^OUT5
^OUT6
^OUT7
^OUT8
^OUT9
^OUT10
^OUT11
^OUT12
^OUT13
^OUT14
^OUT15
^OUT16

IEC05000698-2-en.vsd
IEC05000698 V3 EN

Figure 437: SINGLECMD function block

14.10.4 Signals
Table 551: SINGLECMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block single command function

Table 552: SINGLECMD Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Single command output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Single command output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Single command output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Single command output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Single command output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Single command output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Single command output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Single command output 8
OUT9 BOOLEAN Single command output 9
OUT10 BOOLEAN Single command output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Single command output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Single command output 12
OUT13 BOOLEAN Single command output 13
OUT14 BOOLEAN Single command output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Single command output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Single command output 16

899
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Control

14.10.5 Settings
Table 553: SINGLECMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
Steady
Pulsed

14.10.6 Operation principle

Single command, 16 signals (SINGLECMD) function has 16 binary output signals.
The outputs can be individually controlled from a substation automation system or
from the local HMI. Each output signal can be given a name with a maximum of
13 characters in PCM600.

The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. This configuration
setting is done via the local HMI or PCM600 and is common for the whole
function block. The length of the output pulses are 100 ms. In steady mode,
SINGLECMD function has a memory to remember the output values at power
interruption of the IED. Also a BLOCK input is available used to block the
updating of the outputs.

The output signals, OUT1 to OUT16, are available for configuration to built-in
functions or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of the IED.

900
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 15
Scheme communication

Section 15 Scheme communication

15.1 Scheme communication logic for residual

overcurrent protection ECPSCH

15.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Scheme communication logic for ECPSCH - 85
residual overcurrent protection

15.1.2 Functionality
To achieve fast fault clearance of earth faults on the part of the line not covered by
the instantaneous step of the residual overcurrent protection, the directional
residual overcurrent protection can be supported with a logic that uses
communication channels.

In the directional scheme, information of the fault current direction must be

transmitted to the other line end. With directional comparison, a short operate time
of the protection including a channel transmission time, can be achieved. This short
operate time enables rapid autoreclosing function after the fault clearance.

The communication logic module for directional residual current protection

enables blocking as well as permissive under/overreaching, and unblocking
schemes. The logic can also be supported by additional logic for weak-end infeed
and current reversal, included in Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for
residual overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH function.

15.1.3 Function block

ECPSCH
BLOCK TRIP
BLKTR CS
BLKCS CRL
CSBLK LCG
CACC
CSOR
CSUR
CR
CRG

IEC06000288-2-en.vsd
IEC06000288 V2 EN

Figure 438: ECPSCH function block

901
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Scheme communication

15.1.4 Signals
Table 554: ECPSCH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Signal for blocking trip due to communication logic
BLKCS BOOLEAN 0 Signal for blocking CS in Overreach and Blocking
schemes
CSBLK BOOLEAN 0 Reverse residual overcurrent signal for Carrier
Send
CACC BOOLEAN 0 Signal to be used for tripping by Communication
Scheme
CSOR BOOLEAN 0 Overreaching residual overcurrent signal for
Carrier Send
CSUR BOOLEAN 0 Underreaching residual overcurrent signal for
Carrier Send
CR BOOLEAN 0 Carrier Receive for Communication Scheme Logic
CRG BOOLEAN 0 Carrier guard signal received

Table 555: ECPSCH Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal by communication scheme logic
CS BOOLEAN Carrier Send by Communication Scheme Logic
CRL BOOLEAN Carrier Receive from Communication Scheme
Logic
LCG BOOLEAN loss of carrier guard signal

15.1.5 Settings
Table 556: ECPSCH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
SchemeType Off - - Permissive UR Scheme type, Mode of Operation
Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
tCoord 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.035 Communication scheme coordination
time
tSendMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Minimum duration of a carrier send signal

902
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 15
Scheme communication

Table 557: ECPSCH Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Unblock Off - - Off Operation mode of unblocking logic
NoRestart
Restart
tSecurity 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.035 Security timer for loss of carrier guard
detection

15.1.6 Operation principle

The four step directional residual overcurrent protection EF4PTOC is configured to
give input information, that is directional fault detection signals, to the ECPSCH
logic:

Input signal CACC is used for tripping of the communication scheme,

normally the start signal of a forward overreaching step of STFW.
Input signal CSBLK is used for sending block signal in the blocking
communication scheme, normally the start signal of a reverse overreaching
step of STRV.
Input signal CSUR is used for sending permissive signal in the underreaching
permissive communication scheme, normally the start signal of a forward
underreaching step of STINn, where n corresponds to the underreaching step.
Input signal CSOR is used for sending permissive signal in the overreaching
permissive communication scheme, normally the start signal of a forward
overreaching step of STINn, where n corresponds to the overreaching step.

In addition to this a signal from the autoreclosing function should be configured to

the BLKCS input for blocking of the function at a single phase reclosing cycle.

15.1.6.1 Blocking scheme

In the blocking scheme a signal is sent to the other line end if the directional
element detects an earth fault in the reverse direction. When the forward directional
element operates, it trips after a short time delay if no blocking signal is received
from the opposite line end. The time delay, normally 30 40 ms, depends on the
communication transmission time and a chosen safety margin.

One advantage of the blocking scheme is that only one channel (carrier frequency)
is needed if the ratio of source impedances at both end is approximately equal for
zero and positive sequence source impedances, the channel can be shared with the
impedance measuring system, if that system also works in the blocking mode. The
communication signal is transmitted on a healthy line and no signal attenuation will
occur due to the fault.

Blocking schemes are particular favorable for three-terminal applications if there is

no zero-sequence outfeed from the tapping. The blocking scheme is immune to
current reversals because the received signal is maintained long enough to avoid
unwanted operation due to current reversal. There is never any need for weak-end

903
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Scheme communication

infeed logic, because the strong end trips for an internal fault when no blocking
signal is received from the weak end. The fault clearing time is however generally
longer for a blocking scheme than for a permissive scheme.

If the fault is on the line, the forward direction measuring element operates. If no
blocking signal comes from the other line end via the CR binary input (received
signal) the TRIP output is activated after the tCoord set time delay.

IEC05000448 V1 EN

Figure 439: Simplified logic diagram for blocking scheme

15.1.6.2 Permissive under/overreaching scheme

In the permissive scheme the forward directed earth-fault measuring element sends
a permissive signal to the other end, if an earth fault is detected in the forward
direction. The directional element at the other line end must wait for a permissive
signal before activating a trip signal. Independent channels must be available for
the communication in each direction.

An impedance measuring IED, which works in the same type of permissive mode,
with one channel in each direction, can share the channels with the communication
scheme for residual overcurrent protection. If the impedance measuring IED works
in the permissive overreaching mode, common channels can be used in single line
applications. In case of double lines connected to a common bus at both ends, use
common channels only if the ratio Z1S/Z0S (positive through zero-sequence source
impedance) is about equal at both ends. If the ratio is different, the impedance
measuring and the directional earth-fault current system of the healthy line may
detect a fault in different directions, which could result in unwanted tripping.

Common channels cannot be used when the weak-end infeed function is used in
the distance or earth-fault protection.

In case of an internal earth-fault, the forward directed measuring element operates

and sends a permissive signal to the remote end via the CS output (sent signal).

904
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 15
Scheme communication

Local tripping is permitted when the forward direction measuring element operates
and a permissive signal is received via the CR binary input (received signal).

The permissive scheme can be of either underreaching or overreaching type. In the

underreaching alternative, an underreaching directional residual overcurrent
measurement element will be used as sending criterion of the permissive input
signal CSUR.

In the overreaching alternative, an overreaching directional residual overcurrent

measurement element will be used as sending criterion of the permissive input
signal CSOR. Also the underreaching input signal CSUR can initiate sending.

BLOCK
CRL
CR AND
25 ms

t TRIP
0 - 60 s

CACC AND AND t

50 ms
tCoord
t

AND

BLKCS OR CS
AND
Overreach
CSOR AND 50 ms

CSUR OR t

en05000280_3_en.vsd
IEC05000280 V3 EN

15.1.6.3 Unblocking scheme

In unblocking scheme, the lower dependability in permissive scheme is overcome

by using the loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally
create a receive signal. It is common or suitable to use the function when older, less
reliable, power line carrier (PLC) communication is used.

The unblocking function uses a guard signal CRG, which must always be present,
even when no CR signal is received. The absence of the CRG signal for a time
longer than the setting tSecurity time is used as a CR signal, see figure 440. This
also enables a permissive scheme to operate when the line fault blocks the signal
transmission.

The received signal created by the unblocking function is reset 150 ms after the
security timer has elapsed. When that occurs an output signal LCG is activated for

905
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Scheme communication

signaling purpose. The unblocking function is reset 200 ms after that the guard
signal is present again.

CR
tSecurity CRL
t >1
1
CRG
200 ms 150 ms
t OR t AND
AND
LCG

en05000746.vsd
IEC05000746 V1 EN

Figure 440: Guard signal logic with unblocking scheme

The unblocking function can be set in three operation modes (setting Unblock):

Off: The unblocking function is out of operation

No restart: Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored
If CRG disappears, a CRL signal will be transferred to the trip logic
There will not be any information in case of communication failure (LCG)
Restart Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored
It sends a defined (150 ms) CRL after the disappearance of the CRG signal
The function will activate LCG output in case of communication failure
If the communication failure comes and goes (<200 ms) there will not be recurrent
signaling

15.1.7 Technical data

Table 558: ECPSCH technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Scheme type Permissive Underreaching -
Permissive Overreaching
Blocking
Communication scheme (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms whichever
coordination time is greater

906
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 15
Scheme communication

15.2 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for

residual overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH

15.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Current reversal and weak-end infeed ECRWPSCH - 85
logic for residual overcurrent protection

15.2.2 Functionality
The Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection
ECRWPSCH is a supplement to Scheme communication logic for residual
overcurrent protection ECPSCH.

To achieve fast fault clearing for all earth faults on the line, the directional earth
fault protection function can be supported with logic that uses tele protection
channels.

The 670 series IEDs have for this reason available additions to scheme
communication logic.

If parallel lines are connected to common busbars at both terminals, overreaching

permissive communication schemes can trip unselectively due to fault current
reversal. This unwanted tripping affects the healthy line when a fault is cleared on
the other line. This lack of security can result in a total loss of interconnection
between the two buses. To avoid this type of disturbance, a fault current reversal
logic (transient blocking logic) can be used.

Permissive communication schemes for residual overcurrent protection can

basically operate only when the protection in the remote IED can detect the fault.
The detection requires a sufficient minimum residual fault current, out from this
IED. The fault current can be too low due to an opened breaker or high-positive and/
or zero-sequence source impedance behind this IED. To overcome these
conditions, weak-end infeed (WEI) echo logic is used. The weak-end infeed echo is
limited to 200 ms to avoid channel lockup.

907
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Scheme communication

15.2.3 Function block

ECRWPSCH
U3P* IRVL
BLOCK TRWEI
IRVBLK ECHO
IRV
WEIBLK1
WEIBLK2
VTSZ
CBOPEN
CRL

IEC06000289-3-en.vsd
IEC06000289 V3 EN

Figure 441: ECRWPSCH function block

15.2.4 Signals
Table 559: ECRWPSCH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IRVBLK BOOLEAN 0 Block of current reversal function
IRV BOOLEAN 0 Activation of current reversal logic
WEIBLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI Logic
WEIBLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic due to operation of other
protections
VTSZ BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic through fuse-failure
function
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker
CRL BOOLEAN 0 POR Carrier receive for WEI logic

Table 560: ECRWPSCH Output signals

Name Type Description
IRVL BOOLEAN Operation of current reversal logic
TRWEI BOOLEAN Trip signal from weak end infeed logic
ECHO BOOLEAN Permissive signal transmitted as echo signal or in
case of weak end infeed

908
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 15
Scheme communication

15.2.5 Settings
Table 561: ECRWPSCH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CurrRev Off - - Off Operating mode of Current Reversal
On Logic
tPickUpRev 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Pickup time for current reversal logic
tDelayRev 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.060 Time Delay to prevent Carrier send and
local trip
WEI Off - - Off Operating mode of WEI logic
Echo
Echo & Trip
tPickUpWEI 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Coordination time for the WEI logic
3U0> 5 - 70 %UB 1 25 Neutral voltage setting for fault
conditions measurement

Table 562: ECRWPSCH Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

15.2.6 Operation principle

15.2.6.1 Directional comparison logic function

The directional comparison function contains logic for blocking overreaching and
permissive overreaching schemes.

The circuits for the permissive overreaching scheme contain logic for current
reversal and weak-end infeed functions. These functions are not required for the
blocking overreaching scheme.

Use the independent or inverse time functions in the directional earth fault
protection module to get backup tripping in case the communication equipment
malfunctions and prevents operation of the directional comparison logic.

Connect the necessary signal from the autorecloser for blocking of the directional
comparison scheme, during a single-phase autoreclosing cycle, to the BLOCK
input of the directional comparison module.

15.2.6.2 Fault current reversal logic

The fault current reversal logic uses a reverse directed element, connected to the
input signal IRV, which recognizes that the fault is in reverse direction. When the
reverse direction element is activated the output signal IRVL is activated which is
shown in Figure 442. The logic is now ready to handle a current reversal without

909
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Scheme communication

tripping. The output signal IRVL will be connected to the block input on the
permissive overreaching scheme.

When the fault current is reversed on the healthy line, IRV is deactivated and
IRVBLK is activated. The tDelayRev timer delays the reset of the output signal.
The signal blocks operation of the overreach permissive scheme for residual
current and thus prevents unwanted operation caused by fault current reversal.

BLOCK

IRVBLK
tDelayRev
tPickUpRev 10 ms tPickUpRev AND t
IRVL
IRV
t t t

CurrRev = On

IEC09000031-4-en.vsd

IEC09000031 V4 EN

Figure 442: Simplified logic diagram for current reversal

15.2.6.3 Weak-end infeed logic

The weak-end infeed function can be set to send only an echo signal (WEI=Echo)
or an echo signal and a trip signal (WEI=Echo & Trip). The corresponding logic
diagrams are depicted in Figure 443 and Figure 444.

The weak-end infeed logic uses normally a reverse and a forward direction
element, connected to WEIBLK2 via an OR-gate. If neither the forward nor the
reverse directional measuring element is activated during the last 200 ms, the weak-
end infeed logic echoes back the received permissive signal as shown in Figure 443
and Figure 444. The weak-end infeed logic also echoes the received permissive
signal when CBOPEN is high (local breaker opens) prior to faults appeared at the
end of line.

If the forward or the reverse directional measuring element is activated during the
last 200 ms, the fault current is sufficient for the IED to detect the fault with the
earth fault function that is in operation.

910
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 15
Scheme communication

CR
BLOCK AND

VTSZ
OR

tPickUpWEI
WEIBLK1
t AND 50 ms 200 ms
AND
OR t t ECHO
200 ms AND
CRL t

WEIBLK2

AND
1500 ms
CBOPEN OR
t

WEI = Echo

IEC09000032-5-en.vsd

IEC09000032 V5 EN

Figure 443: Simplified logic diagram for weak-end infeed logic - Echo

With the WEI= Echo & Trip setting, the logic sends an echo according to the
diagram above. Further, it activates the TRWEI signal to trip the breaker if the
echo conditions are fulfilled and the neutral point voltage is above the set operate
value for 3U0>.

The voltage signal that is used to calculate the zero sequence voltage is set in the
earth fault function which is in operation.

BLOCK

VTSZ
OR

tPickUpWEI
WEIBLK1 t AND 50 ms 200 ms
AND
OR t t ECHO
200 ms AND
t
CRL

AND
WEIBLK2 1500 ms
OR
t

CBOPEN

AND
ST3U0
15 ms TRWEI
a>b AND
3U0> t

WEI = Echo&Trip

IEC09000020-5-en.vsd

IEC09000020 V5 EN

Figure 444: Simplified logic diagram for weak-end infeed logic - Echo & Trip

911
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Scheme communication

The weak-end infeed echo sent to the strong line end has a maximum duration of
200 ms. When this time period has elapsed, the conditions that enable the echo
signal to be sent are set to zero for a time period of 50 ms. This avoids ringing
action if the weak-end echo is selected for both line ends.

15.2.7 Technical data

Table 563: ECRWPSCH technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate mode of WEI logic Off -
Echo
Echo & Trip
Operate voltage 3U0 for WEI trip (5-70)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Operate time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 30 ms whichever

logic is greater
Delay time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 30 ms whichever
is greater
Coordination time for weak-end (0.00060.000) s 0.2% or 30 ms whichever
infeed logic is greater

912
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 16
Logic

Section 16 Logic

16.1 Tripping logic common 3-phase output SMPPTRC

16.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Tripping logic common 3-phase output SMPPTRC 94

I->O

SYMBOL-K V1 EN

16.1.2 Functionality
A function block for protection tripping is provided for each circuit breaker
involved in the tripping of the fault. It provides a settable pulse prolongation to
ensure a trip pulse of sufficient length, as well as all functionality necessary for
correct co-operation with autoreclosing functions.

The trip function block also includes a settable latch functionality for evolving
faults and breaker lock-out.

16.1.3 Function block

SMPPTRC
BLOCK TRIP
BLKLKOUT TRL1
TRIN TRL2
TRINL1 TRL3
TRINL2 TR1P
TRINL3 TR2P
PSL1 TR3P
PSL2 CLLKOUT
PSL3
1PTRZ
1PTREF
P3PTR
SETLKOUT
RSTLKOUT

IEC05000707-2-en.vsd
IEC05000707 V2 EN

Figure 445: SMPPTRC function block

913
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Logic

16.1.4 Signals
Table 564: SMPPTRC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Blocks circuit breaker lockout output (CLLKOUT)
TRIN BOOLEAN 0 Trip all phases
TRINL1 BOOLEAN 0 Trip phase 1
TRINL2 BOOLEAN 0 Trip phase 2
TRINL3 BOOLEAN 0 Trip phase 3
PSL1 BOOLEAN 0 Functional input for phase selection in phase L1
PSL2 BOOLEAN 0 Functional input for phase selection in phase L2
PSL3 BOOLEAN 0 Functional input for phase selection in phase L3
1PTRZ BOOLEAN 0 Zone Trip with a separate phase selection
1PTREF BOOLEAN 0 Single phase DEF Trip for separate phase
selection
P3PTR BOOLEAN 0 Prepare all tripping to be three-phase
SETLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for setting the circuit breaker lockout function
RSTLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for resetting the circuit breaker lockout
function

Table 565: SMPPTRC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip output signal
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
TR1P BOOLEAN Tripping single-pole
TR2P BOOLEAN Tripping two-pole
TR3P BOOLEAN Tripping three-pole
CLLKOUT BOOLEAN Circuit breaker lockout output (set until reset)

914
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 16
Logic

16.1.5 Settings
Table 566: SMPPTRC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
Program 3 phase - - 1ph/3ph Three ph; single or three ph; single, two
1ph/3ph or three ph trip
1ph/2ph/3ph
tTripMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Minimum duration of trip output signal
tWaitForPHS 0.020 - 0.500 s 0.001 0.050 Secures 3-pole trip when phase
selection failed

Table 567: SMPPTRC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TripLockout Off - - Off On: activate output (CLLKOUT) and trip
On latch, Off: only outp
AutoLock Off - - Off On: lockout from input (SETLKOUT) and
On trip, Off: only inp

16.1.6 Operation principle

The duration of a trip output signal from tripping logic common 3-phase output
SMPPTRC is settable (tTripMin). The pulse length should be long enough to
secure the breaker opening.

For three-phase tripping logic common 3-phase output, SMPPTRC has a single
input (TRIN) through which all trip output signals from the protection functions
within the IED, or from external protection functions via one or more of the IEDs
binary inputs, are routed. It has a single trip output (TRIP) for connection to one or
more of the IEDs binary outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED
requiring this signal.

BLOCK
tTripMin TRIP
TRIN OR
AND t

Operation Mode = On

Program = 3Ph

en05000789.vsd
IEC05000789 V1 EN

Figure 446: Simplified logic diagram for three phase trip

915
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Logic

SMPPTRC function for single-phase and two-phase tripping has additional phase
segregated inputs for this, as well as inputs for faulted phase selection. The latter
inputs enable single- phase and two-phase tripping for those functions which do not
have their own phase selection capability, and therefore which have just a single
trip output and not phase segregated trip outputs for routing through the phase
segregated trip inputs of the expanded SMPPTRC function. Examples of such
protection functions are the residual overcurrent protections. The expanded
SMPPTRC function has two inputs for these functions, one for impedance tripping
(for example, carrier-aided tripping commands from the scheme communication
logic), and one for earth fault tripping (for example, tripping output from a residual
overcurrent protection).

Additional logic, including a timer tWaitForPHS, secures a three-phase trip

command for these protection functions in the absence of the required phase
selection signals.

The expanded SMPPTRC function has three trip outputs TRL1, TRL2, TRL3
(besides the trip output TRIP), one per phase, for connection to one or more of the
IEDs binary outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED requiring these
signals. There are also separate output signals indicating single-phase, two-phase or
three-phase trip. These signals are important for cooperation with the autorecloser
SMBRREC function.

The expanded SMPPTRC function is equipped with logic which secures correct
operation for evolving faults as well as for reclosing on to persistent faults. A
special input is also provided which disables single- phase and two-phase tripping,
forcing all tripping to be three-phase.

In multi-breaker arrangements, one SMPPTRC function block is used for each

breaker. This can be the case if single pole tripping and autoreclosing is used.

The breaker close lockout function can be activated from an external trip signal
from another protection function via input (SETLKOUT) or internally at a three-
phase trip, if desired.

It is possible to lockout seal in the tripping output signals or use blocking of

closing only the choice is by setting TripLockout.

916
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 16
Logic

16.1.6.1 Logic diagram

TRINL1

TRINL2
OR
TRINL3

1PTRZ OR
1PTREF
OR
TRIN RSTTRIP
AND
Program = 3ph

IEC05000517-2-en.vsd
IEC05000517 V2 EN

Figure 447: Three-phase front logic simplified logic diagram

TRIN

TRINL1

PSL1 L1TRIP
OR
AND

TRINL2

PSL2 L2TRIP
OR
AND

TRINL3

PSL3 L3TRIP
OR
AND

OR

OR OR

-loop
-loop
OR
AND AND AND

1PTREF AND tWaitForPHS

1PTRZ OR t

IEC10000056-2-en.vsd
IEC10000056 V2 EN

Figure 448: Phase segregated front logic

917
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Logic

150 ms
L1TRIP OR
t RTRIP
OR
2000 ms
t
OR
AND

150 ms
L2TRIP OR
t STRIP
OR
2000 ms
t
OR
AND

150 ms
L3TRIP OR
t OR
TTRIP

2000 ms
t
OR
AND
OR

OR AND
P3PTR
OR

-loop

IEC05000519-2-en.vsd
IEC05000519-WMF V2 EN

Figure 449: Additional logic for the 1ph/3ph operating mode

918
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 16
Logic

150 ms
L1TRIP
t OR RTRIP
OR
2000 ms
t

AND

150 ms
L2TRIP
t OR STRIP
OR
2000 ms
t AND

AND

150 ms
L3TRIP
t OR TTRIP
OR
2000 ms
t

AND
OR

AND
P3PTR OR
OR

-loop

IEC05000520-2-en.vsd
IEC05000520-WMF V2 EN

Figure 450: Additional logic for the 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode

919
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Logic

BLOCK

RTRIP TRL1
AND
OR

STRIP TRL2
AND
OR

TTRIP TRL3
AND
OR
RSTTRIP
TRIP
OR

TR3P
AND AND
OR

-loop

AND 10 ms
TR1P
AND t

AND 5 ms
TR2P
AND t
OR
AND

-loop

IEC05000521-2-en.vsd
IEC05000521-WMF V2 EN

Figure 451: Final tripping circuits

16.1.7 Technical data

Table 568: SMPPTRC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Trip action 3-ph, 1/3-ph, 1/2/3-ph -
Minimum trip pulse length (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 30 ms whichever
is greater
3-pole trip delay (0.020-0.500) s 0.2% or 10 ms whichever
is greater
Single phase delay, two phase (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 10 ms whichever
delay and evolving fault delay is greater

16.2 Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC

16.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC - -

920
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 16
Logic

16.2.2 Functionality
Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC function is used to route trip signals and other
logical output signals to different output contacts on the IED.

The trip matrix logic function has 3 output signals and these outputs can be
connected to physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs
for settable pulse or steady output.

16.2.3 Function block

TMAGAPC
BLOCK OUTPUT1
BLK1 OUTPUT2
BLK2 OUTPUT3
BLK3
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32

IEC13000197-1-en.vsd
IEC13000197 V1 EN

Figure 452: TMAGAPC function block

16.2.4 Signals
Table 569: TMAGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of output 1
BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of output 2
BLK3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of output 3
Table continues on next page

921
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Logic

Name Type Default Description

INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 16
INPUT17 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 17
INPUT18 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 18
INPUT19 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 19
INPUT20 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 20
INPUT21 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 21
INPUT22 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 22
INPUT23 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 23
INPUT24 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 24
INPUT25 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 25
INPUT26 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 26
INPUT27 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 27
INPUT28 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 28
INPUT29 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 29
INPUT30 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 30
INPUT31 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 31
INPUT32 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 32

Table 570: TMAGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN OR function between inputs 17 to 32
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN OR function between inputs 1 to 32

922
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 16
Logic

16.2.5 Settings
Table 571: TMAGAPC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
PulseTime 0.050 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Output pulse time
OnDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Output on delay time
OffDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Output off delay time
ModeOutput1 Steady - - Steady Mode for output ,1 steady or pulsed
Pulsed
ModeOutput2 Steady - - Steady Mode for output 2, steady or pulsed
Pulsed
ModeOutput3 Steady - - Steady Mode for output 3, steady or pulsed
Pulsed

16.2.6 Operation principle

The trip matrix logic (TMAGAPC) block is provided with 32 input signals and 3
output signals. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gates in order to
provide grouping of connected input signals to the three output signals from the
function block.

Internal built-in OR logic is made in accordance with the following three rules:

1. when any one of first 16 inputs signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical
value 1 the first output signal (OUTPUT1) will get logical value 1.
2. when any one of second 16 inputs signals (INPUT17 to INPUT32) has logical
value 1 the second output signal (OUTPUT2) will get logical value 1.
3. when any one of all 32 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT32) has logical value
1 the third output signal (OUTPUT3) will get logical value 1.

By use of the settings ModeOutput1, ModeOutput2, ModeOutput3, PulseTime,

OnDelay and OffDelay the behavior of each output can be customized. The
OnDelay is always active and will delay the input to output transition by the set
time. The ModeOutput for respective output decides whether the output shall be
steady with an drop-off delay as set by OffDelay or if it shall give a pulse with
duration set by PulseTime. Note that for pulsed operation and that the inputs are
connected in an OR-function, a new pulse will only be given on the output if all
related inputs are reset and then one is activated again. For steady operation the
OffDelay will start when all related inputs have reset. Detailed logical diagram is
shown in figure 453

923
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Logic

PulseTime

t
&
ModeOutput1=Pulsed
INPUT 1
OUTPUT 1
Ondelay Offdelay
&
1
1 t t
INPUT 16

PulseTime

t
&
ModeOutput2=Pulsed

INPUT 17
OUTPUT 2
Ondelay Offdelay
&
1
1 t t
INPUT 32

PulseTime
t
&

ModeOutput3=Pulsed

OUTPUT 3
Ondelay Offdelay
&
1
1 t t

IEC09000612-3-en.vsd
IEC09000612 V3 EN

Figure 453: Trip matrix internal logic

Output signals from TMAGAPC are typically connected to other logic blocks or
directly to output contacts in the IED. When used for direct tripping of the circuit
breaker(s) the pulse time shall be set to at least 0.150 seconds in order to obtain
satisfactory minimum duration of the trip pulse to the circuit breaker trip coils.

16.3 Logic for group alarm ALMCALH

16.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Logic for group alarm ALMCALH - -

16.3.2 Functionality
Group alarm logic function ALMCALH is used to route several alarm signals to a
common indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.

924
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 16
Logic

16.3.3 Function block

ALMCALH
BLOCK ALARM
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16

IEC13000181-1-en.vsd
IEC13000181 V1 EN

16.3.4 Signals
Table 572: ALMCALH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 16

Table 573: ALMCALH Output signals

Name Type Description
ALARM BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16

925
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Logic

16.3.5 Settings
Table 574: ALMCALH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On

16.3.6 Operation principle

The logic for group alarm ALMCALH block is provided with 16 input signals and
one ALARM output signal. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gate
in order to provide grouping of connected input signals to the output ALARM
signal from the function block.

When any one of 16 inputs signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1 the
ALARM output signal will get logical value 1.

The function has an off-delay of 200 ms when all inputs are reset to provide a
steady signal.

Input 1
200 ms
ALARM
1 t
Input 16

IEC13000191-1-en.vsd
IEC13000191 V1 EN

Figure 454: Group alarm logic

16.4 Identification

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Logic for group warning WRNCALH - -

16.4.1 Functionality
Group alarm logic function WRNCALH is used to route several warning signals to
a common indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.

926
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 16
Logic

16.4.2 Function block

WRNCALH
BLOCK WARNING
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16

IEC13000182-1-en.vsd
IEC13000182 V1 EN

16.4.3 Operation principle

The logic for group warning WRNCALH block is provided with 16 input signals
and 1 WARNING output signal. The function block incorporates internal logic OR
gate in order to provide grouping of connected input signals to the output
WARNING signal from the function block.

When any one of 16 inputs signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1 the
WARNING output signal will get logical value 1.

The function has an off-delay of 200 ms when all inputs are reset to provide a
steady signal.

INPUT1
200 ms
WARNING
1 t
INPUT16

IEC13000192-1-en.vsd
IEC13000192 V1 EN

16.4.4 Signals
Table 575: WRNCALH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 4
Table continues on next page

927
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Logic

Name Type Default Description

INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 16

Table 576: WRNCALH Output signals

Name Type Description
WARNING BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16

16.4.5 Settings
Table 577: WRNCALH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On

16.5 Identification

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Logic for group indication INDCALH - -

16.5.1 Functionality
Group indication logic function INDCALH is used to route several indication
signals to a common indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.

928
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 16
Logic

16.5.2 Function block

INDCALH
BLOCK IND
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16

IEC13000183-1-en.vsd
IEC13000183 V1 EN

16.5.3 Operation principle

The logic for group indication INDCALH block is provided with 16 input signals
and 1 IND output signal. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gate in
order to provide grouping of connected input signals to the output IND signal from
the function block.

When any one of 16 inputs signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1 the
IND output signal will get logical value 1.

The function has an off-delay of 200 ms when all inputs are reset to provide a
steady signal.

INPUT1
200 ms
IND
1 t
INPUT16

IEC13000193-1-en.vsd
IEC13000193 V1 EN

16.5.4 Signals
Table 578: INDCALH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 4
Table continues on next page

929
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Logic

Name Type Default Description

INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 16

Table 579: INDCALH Output signals

Name Type Description
IND BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16

16.5.5 Settings
Table 580: INDCALH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On

16.6 Configurable logic blocks

16.6.1 Functionality
A number of logic blocks and timers are available for the user to adapt the
configuration to the specific application needs.

OR function block. Each block has 6 inputs and two outputs where one is
inverted.

INVERTER function blocks that inverts the input signal.

PULSETIMER function block can be used, for example, for pulse extensions
or limiting of operation of outputs, settable pulse time.

930
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 16
Logic

GATE function block is used for whether or not a signal should be able to
pass from the input to the output.

XOR function block. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted.

LOOPDELAY function block used to delay the output signal one execution
cycle.

TIMERSET function has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the
input signal. The timer has a settable time delay.

AND function block. Each block has four inputs and two outputs where one is
inverted

SRMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output from
two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
memory setting controls if the block's output should reset or return to the state
it was, after a power interruption. Set input has priority.

RSMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output from
two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
memory setting controls if the block's output should reset or return to the state
it was, after a power interruption. RESET input has priority.

Configurable logic Q/T

A number of logic blocks and timers, with the capability to propagate timestamp
and quality of the input signals, are available. The function blocks assist the user to
adapt the IEDs configuration to the specific application needs.

ORQT OR function block that also propagates timestamp and quality of input
signals. Each block has six inputs and two outputs where one is inverted.

INVERTERQT function block that inverts the input signal and propagates
timestamp and quality of input signal.

PULSETIMERQT Pulse timer function block can be used, for example, for
pulse extensions or limiting of operation of outputs. The function also
propagates timestamp and quality of input signal.

XORQT XOR function block. The function also propagates timestamp and
quality of input signals. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted.

931
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Logic

TIMERSETQT function has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to

the input signal. The timer has a settable time delay. The function also
propagates timestamp and quality of input signal.

ANDQT AND function block. The function also propagates timestamp and
quality of input signals. Each block has four inputs and two outputs where one
is inverted.

SRMEMORYQT function block is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output

from two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is
inverted. The memory setting controls if the block after a power interruption
should return to the state before the interruption, or be reset. The function also
propagates timestamp and quality of input signal.

RSMEMORYQT function block is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output

from two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is
inverted. The memory setting controls if the block after a power interruption
should return to the state before the interruption, or be reset. The function also
propagates timestamp and quality of input signal.

INVALIDQT function which sets quality invalid of outputs according to a

"valid" input. Inputs are copied to outputs. If input VALID is 0, or if its quality
invalid bit is set, all outputs invalid quality bit will be set to invalid. The
timestamp of an output will be set to the latest timestamp of INPUT and
VALID inputs.

INDCOMBSPQT combines single input signals to group signal. Single

position input is copied to value part of SP_OUT output. TIME input is copied
to time part of SP_OUT output. Quality input bits are copied to the
corresponding quality part of SP_OUT output.

INDEXTSPQT extracts individual signals from a group signal input. Value

part of single position input is copied to SI_OUT output. Time part of single
position input is copied to TIME output. Quality bits in common part and
indication part of inputs signal is copied to the corresponding quality output.

16.6.2 Inverter function block INV

16.6.2.1 Function block

INV
INPUT OUT

IEC04000404_2_en.vsd
IEC04000404 V2 EN

Figure 455: INV function block

932
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 16
Logic

16.6.2.2 Signals
Table 581: INV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input

Table 582: INV Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output

16.6.3 OR function block OR

The OR function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. The OR function block has six inputs and two outputs. One of the
outputs is inverted.

16.6.3.1 Function block

OR
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6

IEC04000405_2_en.vsd
IEC04000405 V2 EN

Figure 456: OR function block

16.6.3.2 Signals
Table 583: OR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 to OR gate
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 to OR gate
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 to OR gate
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 to OR gate
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 to OR gate
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 to OR gate

Table 584: OR Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output from OR gate
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output from OR gate

933
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Logic

16.6.4 AND function block AND

The AND function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. The AND function block has four inputs and two outputs. One of the
outputs are inverted.

16.6.4.1 Function block

AND
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4

IEC14000071-1-en.vsd
IEC14000071 V1 EN

Figure 457: AND function block

16.6.4.2 Signals
Table 585: AND Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 4

Table 586: AND Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

16.6.5 Timer function block TIMER

The function block TIMER has drop-out and pick-up delayed outputs related to the
input signal. The timer has a settable time delay (T).

16.6.5.1 Function block

TIMER
INPUT ON
OFF

IEC04000378-3-en.vsd
IEC04000378 V2 EN

Figure 458: TIMER function block

934
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 16
Logic

16.6.5.2 Signals
Table 587: TIMER Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to timer

Table 588: TIMER Output signals

Name Type Description
ON BOOLEAN Output from timer , pick-up delayed
OFF BOOLEAN Output from timer, drop-out delayed

16.6.5.3 Settings
Table 589: TIMER Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
T 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of function

16.6.6 Pulse timer function block PULSETIMER

The pulse (PULSETIMER) function can be used, for example, for pulse extensions
or limiting of operation of outputs. The pulse timer TP has a settable length.

16.6.6.1 Function block

PULSETIMER
INPUT OUT

IEC04000407-3-en.vsd
IEC04000407 V3 EN

Figure 459: PULSETIMER function block

16.6.6.2 Signals
Table 590: PULSETIMER Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to pulse timer

Table 591: PULSETIMER Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output from pulse timer

935
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Logic

16.6.6.3 Settings
Table 592: PULSETIMER Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.010 Time delay of function

16.6.7 Exclusive OR function block XOR

The exclusive OR function (XOR) is used to generate combinatory expressions
with boolean variables. XOR has two inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is
inverted. The output signal is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if they are the
same.

16.6.7.1 Function block

XOR
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT

IEC04000409-2-en.vsd
IEC04000409 V2 EN

Figure 460: XOR function block

16.6.7.2 Signals
Table 593: XOR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 to XOR gate
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 to XOR gate

Table 594: XOR Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output from XOR gate
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output from XOR gate

16.6.8 Loop delay function block LOOPDELAY

The Logic loop delay function block (LOOPDELAY) function is used to delay the
output signal one execution cycle.

936
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 16
Logic

16.6.8.1 Function block

LOOPDELAY
INPUT OUT

IEC09000296-1-en.vsd
IEC09000296 V1 EN

Figure 461: LOOPDELAY function block

16.6.8.2 Signals
Table 595: LLD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

Table 596: LLD Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal delayed one execution cycle

16.6.9 Set-reset with memory function block SRMEMORY

The Set-reset with memory function block (SRMEMORY) is a flip-flop with
memory that can set or reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each
SRMEMORY function block has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory
setting controls if the flip-flop after a power interruption will return the state it had
before or if it will be reset.

Table 597: Truth table for SRMEMORY function block

SET RESET OUT NOUT
0 0 Last Inverted
value last value
0 1 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 1 1 0

16.6.9.1 Function block

SRMEMORY
SET OUT
RESET NOUT

IEC04000408_2_en.vsd
IEC04000408 V2 EN

Figure 462: SRMEMORY function block

937
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Logic

16.6.9.2 Signals
Table 598: SRMEMORY Input signals
Name Type Default Description
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

Table 599: SRMEMORY Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

16.6.9.3 Settings
Table 600: SRMEMORY Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory function
On

16.6.10 Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY

The Reset-set with memory function block (RSMEMORY) is a flip-flop with

memory that can reset or set an output from two inputs respectively. Each
RSMEMORY function block has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory
setting controls if the flip-flop after a power interruption will return the state it had
before or if it will be reset. For a Reset-Set flip-flop, RESET input has higher
priority over SET input.

Table 601: Truth table for RSMEMORY function block

RESET SET OUT NOUT
0 0 Last Inverted last
value value
0 1 1 0
1 0 0 1
1 1 0 1

938
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 16
Logic

16.6.10.1 Function block

RSMEMORY
SET OUT
RESET NOUT

IEC09000294-1-en.vsd
IEC09000294 V1 EN

Figure 463: RSMEMORY function block

16.6.10.2 Signals
Table 602: RSMEMORY Input signals
Name Type Default Description
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

Table 603: RSMEMORY Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

16.6.10.3 Settings
Table 604: RSMEMORY Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory function
On

16.6.11 Controllable gate function block GATE

The Controllable gate function block (GATE) is used for controlling if a signal
should be able to pass from the input to the output or not depending on a setting.

16.6.11.1 Function block

GATE
INPUT OUT

IEC04000410-2-en.vsd
IEC04000410 V2 EN

Figure 464: GATE function block

939
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Logic

16.6.11.2 Signals
Table 605: GATE Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to gate

Table 606: GATE Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output from gate

16.6.11.3 Settings
Table 607: GATE Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

16.6.12 Settable timer function block TIMERSET

The Settable timer function block (TIMERSET) timer has outputs for delayed input
signal at drop-out and at pick-up. The timer has a settable time delay. It also has an
Operation setting On/, Off/ that controls the operation of the timer.

16.6.12.1 Function block

TIMERSET
INPUT ON
OFF

IEC04000411-2-en.vsd
IEC04000411 V2 EN

Figure 465: TIMERSET function block

16.6.12.2 Signals
Table 608: TIMERSET Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to timer

Table 609: TIMERSET Output signals

Name Type Description
ON BOOLEAN Output from timer, pick-up delayed
OFF BOOLEAN Output from timer, drop-out delayed

940
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 16
Logic

16.6.12.3 Settings
Table 610: TIMERSET Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.000 Delay for settable timer n

16.7 Configurable logic Q/T

16.7.1 Functionality
A number of logic blocks and timers with the capability to propagate timestamp
and quality of the input signals are available. The function blocks assist the user to
adapt the IEDs configuration to the specific application needs.

16.7.2 ANDQT function block

ANDQT function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. ANDQT function block has four inputs and two outputs.

16.7.2.1 Function block

ANDQT
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4

IEC09000297-1-en.vsd
IEC09000297 V1 EN

Figure 466: ANDQT function block

16.7.2.2 Signals

Table 611: ANDQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 4

941
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Logic

Table 612: ANDQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

16.7.3 ORQT function block

ORQT function block (ORQT) is used to form general combinatory expressions

with boolean variables. ORQT function block has six inputs and two outputs. One
of the outputs is inverted.

16.7.3.1 Function block

ORQT
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6

IEC09000298-1-en.vsd
IEC09000298 V1 EN

Figure 467: ORQT function block

16.7.3.2 Signals

Table 613: ORQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 6

Table 614: ORQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

16.7.4 Inverter function block INVERTERQT

942
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 16
Logic

16.7.4.1 Function block

INVERTERQT
INPUT OUT

IEC09000299-1-en.vsd
IEC09000299 V1 EN

Figure 468: INVERTERQT function block

16.7.4.2 Signals

Table 615: INVERTERQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

Table 616: INVERTERQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal

16.7.5 Exclusive OR function block XORQT

The exclusive OR function (XORQT) function is used to generate combinatory

expressions with boolean variables. XORQT function has two inputs and two
outputs. One of the outputs is inverted. The output signal is 1 if the input signals
are different and 0 if they are equal.

16.7.5.1 Function block

XORQT
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT

IEC09000300-1-en.vsd
IEC09000300 V1 EN

Figure 469: XORQT function block

16.7.5.2 Signals

Table 617: XORQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2

943
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Logic

Table 618: XORQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

16.7.6 Set/Reset function block SRMEMORYQT

The Set-reset function (SRMEMORYQT) is a flip-flop with memory that can set or
reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each SRMEMORYQT function block
has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if the flip-flop
after a power interruption will return the state it had before or if it will be reset.

SRMEMORYQT propagates quality and time as well as value.

Table 619: Truth table for SRMEMORYQT function block

SET RESET OUT NOUT
0 0 Last Inverted
value last value
0 1 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 1 1 0

If Memory parameter is On, the output result is stored in semi-retained memory.

16.7.6.1 Function block

SRMEMORYQT
SET OUT
RESET NOUT

IEC14000070-1-en.vsd
IEC14000070 V1 EN

Figure 470: SRMEMORYQT function block

16.7.6.2 Signals

Table 620: SRMEMORYQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

944
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 16
Logic

Table 621: SRMEMORYQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

16.7.6.3 Settings
Table 622: SRMEMORYQT Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory function
On

16.7.7 Reset/Set function block RSMEMORYQT

The Reset-set function (RSMEMORYQT) is a flip-flop with memory that can reset
or set an output from two inputs respectively. Each RSMEMORYQT function
block has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if the flip-
flop after a power interruption will return the state it had before or if it will be reset.

Table 623: Truth table for RSMEMORYQT function block

RESET SET OUT NOUT
0 0 Last Inverted last
value value
0 1 1 0
1 0 0 1
1 1 0 1

16.7.7.1 Function block

RSMEMORYQT
SET OUT
RESET NOUT

IEC14000069-1-en.vsd
IEC14000069 V1 EN

Figure 471: RSMEMORYQT function block

16.7.7.2 Signals

Table 624: RSMEMORYQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

945
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Logic

Table 625: RSMEMORYQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

16.7.7.3 Settings
Table 626: RSMEMORYQT Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory function
On

16.7.8 Settable timer function block TIMERSETQT

The Settable timer function block (TIMERSETQT) has pick-up and drop-out
delayed outputs related to the input signal. The timer has a settable time delay (t).

When the output changes value the timestamp of the output signal is updated. The
supported quality state bits are propagated from the input each execution to the
output. A change of these bits will not lead to an updated timestamp on the output.
TIMERSETQT
INPUT ON
OFF

IEC14000068-1-en.vsd
IEC14000068 V1 EN

Figure 472: TIMERSETQT function

16.7.8.1 Signals

Table 627: TIMERSETQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

Table 628: TIMERSETQT Output signals

Name Type Description
ON BOOLEAN Output signal, pick-up delayed
OFF BOOLEAN Output signal, drop-out delayed

946
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 16
Logic

16.7.8.2 Settings
Table 629: TIMERSETQT Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.000 Delay for settable timer n

16.7.9 Pulse timer function block PULSETIMERQT

Pulse timer function block (PULSETIMERQT) can be used, for example, for pulse
extensions or limiting of operation of outputs. The pulse timer has a settable length
and will also propagate quality and time.

When the input goes to 1 the output will be 1 for the time set by the time delay
parameter t. Then return to 0.

When the output changes value, the timestamp of the output signal is updated.

The supported quality state bits are propagated from the input each execution to
the output. A change of these bits will not lead to an updated timestamp on the output.

16.7.9.1 Signals

Table 630: PULSETIMERQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

Table 631: PULSETIMERQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal

16.7.9.2 Settings
Table 632: PULSETIMERQT Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.010 Pulse time length

16.7.10 InvalidLogic INVALIDQT

Component which sets quality invalid of outputs according to a "valid" input.

947
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Logic

Inputs are copied to outputs. If InputValid input is 0 or if its quality invalid bit is
set, all outputs invalid quality bit will be set to invalid. The timestamp of output
will be set to the latest timestamp of input and InputValid input.

16.7.10.1 Function block

INVALIDQT
INPUT1 OUTPUT1
INPUT2 OUTPUT2
INPUT3 OUTPUT3
INPUT4 OUTPUT4
INPUT5 OUTPUT5
INPUT6 OUTPUT6
INPUT7 OUTPUT7
INPUT8 OUTPUT8
INPUT9 OUTPUT9
INPUT10 OUTPUT10
INPUT11 OUTPUT11
INPUT12 OUTPUT12
INPUT13 OUTPUT13
INPUT14 OUTPUT14
INPUT15 OUTPUT15
INPUT16 OUTPUT16
VALID

iec08000169.vsd
IEC08000169 V1 EN

Figure 473: INVALIDQT function block

16.7.10.2 Signals

Table 633: INVALIDQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 14
Table continues on next page

948
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 16
Logic

Name Type Default Description

INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 16
VALID BOOLEAN 1 Inputs are valid or not

Table 634: INVALIDQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Indication output 1
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN Indication output 2
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN Indication output 3
OUTPUT4 BOOLEAN Indication output 4
OUTPUT5 BOOLEAN Indication output 5
OUTPUT6 BOOLEAN Indication output 6
OUTPUT7 BOOLEAN Indication output 7
OUTPUT8 BOOLEAN Indication output 8
OUTPUT9 BOOLEAN Indication output 9
OUTPUT10 BOOLEAN Indication output 10
OUTPUT11 BOOLEAN Indication output 11
OUTPUT12 BOOLEAN Indication output 12
OUTPUT13 BOOLEAN Indication output 13
OUTPUT14 BOOLEAN Indication output 14
OUTPUT15 BOOLEAN Indication output 15
OUTPUT16 BOOLEAN Indication output 16

16.7.11 Single indication signal combining function block

INDCOMBSPQT

Single position input is copied to value part of SP_OUT output. TIME input is
copied to time part of SP_OUT output. State input bits are copied to the
corresponding state part of SP_OUT output. If the state or value on the SP_OUT
output changes, the Event bit in the state part is toggled.

16.7.11.1 Signals

949
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Logic

Table 635: INDCOMBSPQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
SP_IN BOOLEAN 0 Single point indication
TIME GROUP 0 Timestamp
SIGNAL
BLOCKED BOOLEAN 0 Blocked for update
SUBST BOOLEAN 0 Substitued
INVALID BOOLEAN 0 Invalid value
TEST BOOLEAN 0 Testmode

Table 636: INDCOMBSPQT Output signals

Name Type Description
SP_OUT BOOLEAN Single point indication

16.7.12 Function block

INDEXTSPQT
SI_IN* SI_OUT
TIME
BLOCKED
SUBST
INVALID
TEST

IEC14000067-1-en.vsd
IEC14000067 V1 EN

Figure 474: INDEXTSPQT function block

Value part of single position input is copied to SI_OUT output.

Time part of single position input is copied to TIME output.

State bits in common part and indication part of inputs signal is copied to the
corresponding state output.

16.7.12.1 Signals

Table 637: INDEXTSPQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
SI_IN BOOLEAN 0 Single indication

950
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 16
Logic

Table 638: INDEXTSPQT Output signals

Name Type Description
SI_OUT BOOLEAN Single indication
TIME GROUP SIGNAL Timestamp of input
BLOCKED BOOLEAN Blocked for update
SUBST BOOLEAN Substituted
INVALID BOOLEAN Invalid value
TEST BOOLEAN Testmode

16.8 Technical data

Table 639: Configurable logic blocks

Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Accuracy
fast medium normal value
LogicAND 60 60 160 - -
LogicOR 60 60 160 - -
LogicXOR 10 10 20 - -
LogicInverter 30 30 80 - -
LogicSRMemory 10 10 20 - -
LogicRSMemory 10 10 20 - -
LogicGate 10 10 20 - -
LogicTimer 10 10 20 (0.000 0.5% 10 ms
90000.000) s
LogicPulseTimer 10 10 20 (0.000 0.5% 10 ms
90000.000) s
LogicTimerSet 10 10 20 (0.000 0.5% 10 ms
90000.000) s
LogicLoopDelay 10 10 20 (0.000 0.5% 10 ms
90000.000) s
Trip Matrix Logic 6 6 - - -
Boolean 16 to Integer 4 4 8 - -
Boolean 16 to 4 4 8 - -
integer with Logic
Node
Integer to Boolean 16 4 4 8 - -
Integer to Boolean 4 4 8 - -
16 with Logic Node

951
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Logic

Table 640: Extension logic package

Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Accuracy
fast medium normal value
LogicAND 40 40 100 - -
LogicXOR - - 49 - -
LogicSRMemory - - 110 - -
LogicTimer 5 5 49 (0.000 0.5% 10 ms
90000.00
0) s
LogicPulseTimer 5 5 49 (0.000 0.5% 10 ms
90000.00
0) s
Trip matrix logic - - 18 - -
SLGAPC 10 10 54 - -
VSGAPC 10 10 10 - -
LogicOR 40 40 100 - -
LogicGate - - 49 - -
LogicTimerSet - - 49 - -
LogicLoopDelay - - 49 - -

16.9 Fixed signals FXDSIGN

16.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Fixed signals FXDSIGN - -

16.9.2 Functionality
The Fixed signals function FXDSIGN generates nine pre-set (fixed) signals that
can be used in the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in
other function blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating certain logic. Boolean,
integer, floating point, string types of signals are available.

952
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 16
Logic

16.9.3 Function block

FXDSIGN
OFF
ON
INTZERO
INTONE
INTALONE
REALZERO
STRNULL
ZEROSMPL
GRP_OFF

IEC05000445-3-en.vsd
IEC05000445 V3 EN

Figure 475: FXDSIGN function block

16.9.4 Signals
Table 641: FXDSIGN Output signals
Name Type Description
OFF BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed off
ON BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed on
INTZERO INTEGER Integer signal fixed zero
INTONE INTEGER Integer signal fixed one
INTALONE INTEGER Integer signal fixed all ones
REALZERO REAL Real signal fixed zero
STRNULL STRING String signal with no characters
ZEROSMPL GROUP SIGNAL Channel id for zero sample
GRP_OFF GROUP SIGNAL Group signal fixed off

16.9.5 Settings
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

16.9.6 Operation principle

There are eight outputs from FXDSIGN function block:
OFF is a boolean signal, fixed to OFF (boolean 0) value
ON is a boolean signal, fixed to ON (boolean 1) value
INTZERO is an integer number, fixed to integer value 0
INTONE is an integer number, fixed to integer value 1
INTALONE is an integer value FFFF (hex)
REALZERO is a floating point real number, fixed to 0.0 value

953
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Logic

STRNULL is a string, fixed to an empty string (null) value

ZEROSMPL is a channel index, fixed to 0 value
GRP_OFF is a group signal, fixed to 0 value

16.10 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I

16.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16I - -

Boolean 16 to integer conversion function B16I is used to transform a set of 16

binary (logical) signals into an integer.

16.10.2 Function block

B16I
BLOCK OUT
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16

IEC07000128-2-en.vsd
IEC07000128 V2 EN

Figure 476: B16I function block

16.10.3 Signals
Table 642: B16I Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4
Table continues on next page

954
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 16
Logic

Name Type Default Description

IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16

Table 643: B16I Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT INTEGER Output value

16.10.4 Monitored data

Table 644: B16I Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUT INTEGER - - Output value

16.10.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

16.10.6 Operation principle

The Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (B16I) will transfer a combination
of up to 16 binary inputs INx where 1x16 to an integer. Each INx represents a
value according to the table below from 0 to 32768. This follows the general
formula: INx = 2x-1 where 1x16. The sum of all the values on the activated INx
will be available on the output OUT as a sum of the values of all the inputs INx
that are activated. OUT is an integer. When all INx where 1x16 are activated
that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds to that integer 65535 is available on the output
OUT. B16I function is designed for receiving up to 16 booleans input locally. If the
BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze the output at the last value.

Values of each of the different OUTx from function block B16I for 1x16.

955
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Logic

The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the
output OUT on the function block B16I
Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 1 0
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 2 0
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 4 0
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 8 0
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 16 0
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 32 0
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 64 0
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 128 0
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 256 0
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 512 0
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 1024 0
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 2048 0
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 4096 0
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 8192 0
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 16384 0
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all INx (where
1x16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can
be converted to an integer by the B16I function block.

16.11 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node

representation BTIGAPC

16.11.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with BTIGAPC - -
logic node representation

956
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 16
Logic

16.11.2 Functionality
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function
BTIGAPC is used to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer.
The block input will freeze the output at the last value.

BTIGAPC can receive remote values via IEC 61850 depending on the operator
position input (PSTO).

16.11.3 Function block

BTIGAPC
BLOCK OUT
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16

IEC13000303-1-en.vsd
IEC13000303 V1 EN

Figure 477: BTIGAPC function block

16.11.4 Signals
Table 645: BTIGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12
Table continues on next page

957
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Logic

Name Type Default Description

IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16

Table 646: BTIGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT INTEGER Output value

16.11.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

16.11.6 Monitored data

Table 647: BTIGAPC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUT INTEGER - - Output value

16.11.7 Operation principle

The Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function
(BTIGAPC) will transfer a combination of up to 16 binary inputs INx where
1x16 to an integer. Each INx represents a value according to the table below
from 0 to 32768. This follows the general formula: INx = 2x-1 where 1x16. The
sum of all the values on the activated INx will be available on the output OUT as a
sum of the values of all the inputs INx that are activated. OUT is an integer. When
all INx where 1x16 are activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds to that
integer 65535 is available on the output OUT. The BTIGAPC function is designed
for receiving the integer input from a station computer - for example, over IEC
61850. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze the logical outputs at the last
value.

Values of each of the different OUTx from function block BTIGAPC for 1x16.

The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the
output OUT on the function block BTIGAPC.

958
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 16
Logic

Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when

activated deactivated
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 1 0
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 2 0
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 4 0
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 8 0
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 16 0
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 32 0
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 64 0
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 128 0
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 256 0
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 512 0
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 1024 0
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 2048 0
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 4096 0
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 8192 0
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 16384 0
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all INx (where
1x16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can
be converted to an integer by the BTIGAPC function block.

16.12 Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16A

16.12.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16 - -

16.12.2 Functionality
Integer to boolean 16 conversion function IB16 is used to transform an integer into
a set of 16 binary (logical) signals.

959
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Logic

16.12.3 Function block

IB16
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16

IEC06000501-2-en.vsd
IEC06000501 V2 EN

Figure 478: IB16 function block

16.12.4 Signals
Table 648: IB16 Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INP INTEGER 0 Integer Input

Table 649: IB16 Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16

960
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 16
Logic

16.12.5 Setting parameters

The function does not have any parameters available in local HMI or Protection
and Control IED Manager (PCM600)

16.12.6 Operation principle

With integer 15 on the input INP the OUT1 = OUT2 = OUT3= OUT4 =1 and the
remaining OUTx = 0 for (5x16).

OUTx represents a value when activated. The value of each of the OUTx is in
accordance with the table IB16_1. When not activated the OUTx has the value 0.

In the above example when integer 15 is on the input INP the OUT1 has a value
=1, OUT2 has a value =2, OUT3 has a value =4 and OUT4 has a value =8. The
sum of these OUTx is equal to 1 + 2 + 4 + 8 = 15.

This follows the general formulae: The sum of the values of all OUTx = 2x-1 where
1x16 will be equal to the integer value on the input INP.

The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion function (IB16) will transfer an integer with
a value between 0 to 65535 connected to the input INP to a combination of
activated outputs OUTx where 1x16. The sum of the values of all OUTx will
then be equal to the integer on input INP. The values of the different OUTx are
according to the table below. When an OUTx is not activated, its value is 0.

When all OUTx where 1x16 are activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds to
that integer 65535 is connected to input INP. The IB16 function is designed for
receiving the integer input locally. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze
the logical outputs at the last value.

Values of each of the different OUTx from function block IB16 for 1x16.

The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the
output OUT on the function block IB16.
Name of OUTx Type Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 1 0
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 2 0
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3 4 0
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4 8 0
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5 16 0
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6 32 0
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7 64 0
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8 128 0
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9 256 0
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10 512 0
Table continues on next page

961
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Logic

Name of OUTx Type Description Value when Value when

activated deactivated
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11 1024 0
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12 2048 0
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13 4096 0
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14 8192 0
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15 16384 0
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all OUTx (where
x = 1 to 16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest integer that can be
converted by the IB16 function block.

16.13 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node

representation ITBGAPC

16.13.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Integer to boolean 16 conversion with ITBGAPC - -
logic node representation

16.13.2 Functionality
Integer to boolean conversion with logic node representation function ITBGAPC is
used to transform an integer which is transmitted over IEC 61850 and received by
the function to 16 binary coded (logic) output signals.

ITBGAPC function can only receive remote values over IEC 61850 when the R/L
(Remote/Local) push button on the front HMI, indicates that the control mode for
the operator is in position R (Remote i.e. the LED adjacent to R is lit ), and the
corresponding signal is connected to the input PSTO ITBGAPC function block.
The input BLOCK will freeze the output at the last received value and blocks new
integer values to be received and converted to binary coded outputs.

962
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 16
Logic

16.13.3 Function block

ITBGAPC
BLOCK OUT1
PSTO OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16

IEC14000012-1-en.vsd
IEC14000012 V1 EN

Figure 479: ITBGAPC function block

16.13.4 Signals
Table 650: ITBGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 1 Operator place selection

Table 651: ITBGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16

963
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Logic

16.13.5 Settings
This function does not have any setting parameters.

16.13.6 Operation principle

An example is used to explain the principle of operation: With integer 15 sent to
and received by the ITBGAPC function on the IEC61850 the OUTx changes from
0 to 1 on each of the OUT1; OUT2 OUT3 and OUT4. All other OUTx (5x16)
remains 0. The boolean interpretation of this is represented by the assigned values
of each of the outputs OUT1 = 1; and OUT2 = 2; and OUT3= 4; and OUT4 = 8.
The sum of these OUTx (1x4) is equal to the integer 15 received via the
IEC61850 network. The remaining OUTx = 0 for (5x16).

OUTx represents a value when activated. The value of each of the OUTx is in
accordance with the Table 652. When not activated the OUTx has the value 0.

The value of each OUTx for 1x16 (1x16) follows the general formulae:
OUTx = 2x-1 The sum of the values of all activated OUTx = 2x-1 where 1x16
will be equal to the integer value received over IEC61850 to the ITBGAPC_1
function block.

The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation function

(ITBGAPC) will transfer an integer with a value between 0 to 65535
communicated via IEC61850 and connected to the ITBGAPC function block to a
combination of activated outputs OUTx where 1x16. The values represented by
the different OUTx are according to Table 652. When an OUTx is not activated, its
value is 0.

The ITBGAPC function is designed for receiving the integer input from a station
computer - for example, over IEC 61850. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will
freeze the logical outputs at the last value.

Table 652: Outputs and their values when activated

Name of OUTx Type Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 1 0
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 2 0
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3 4 0
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4 8 0
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5 16 0
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6 32 0
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7 64 0
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8 128 0
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9 256 0
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10 512 0
Table continues on next page

964
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 16
Logic

Name of OUTx Type Description Value when Value when

activated deactivated
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11 1024 0
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12 2048 0
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13 4096 0
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14 8192 0
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15 16384 0
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all OUTx
(1x16) are active equals 65535. This is the highest integer that can be converted
to boolean by the ITBGAPC function block.

The operator position input (PSTO) determines the operator place. The integer
number that is communicated to the ITBGAPC can only be written to the block
while the PSTO is in position Remote. If PSTO is in position Off or Local,
then no changes are applied to the outputs.

16.14 Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and

overflow supervision TEIGAPC

16.14.1 Identification
Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device
identification identification number
Elapsed time integrator TEIGAPC - -

16.14.2 Functionality
Elapsed Time Integrator (TEIGAPC) function is a function that accumulates the
elapsed time when a given binary signal has been high, see also Figure 480.

965
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Logic

BLOCK
RESET
IN Time Integration ACCTIME
with Retain

q-1

OVERFLOW
a
&
a=b
999 999 s b

WARNING
a
&
a=b
tWarning b

ALARM
a
&
a=b
tAlarm b

q-1 = unit delay IEC13000290-1-en.vsd

IEC13000290 V1 EN

Figure 480: TEIGAPC logics

The main features of TEIGAPC

Applicable to long time integration up to 999 999.9 seconds

Supervision of overflow
Possibility to define a warning and an alarm with the resolution of 10
milliseconds
Retain the integration value
Possibilities for blocking and reset of the total integrated time
Report of the integrated time

16.14.3 Function block

TEIGAPC
BLOCK WARNING
IN ALARM
RESET OVERFLOW
ACCTIME

IEC14000014-1-en.vsd
IEC14000014 V1 EN

Figure 481: TEIGAPC function block

16.14.4 Signals
Table 653: TEIGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Freeze the integration and block the other outputs
IN BOOLEAN 0 The input signal that is used to measure the
elapsed time, when its value is high
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset the integration time

966
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 16
Logic

Table 654: TEIGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
WARNING BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the
warning limit
ALARM BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the
alarm limit
OVERFLOW BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the
overflow limit
ACCTIME REAL Integrated elapsed time in seconds

16.14.5 Settings
Table 655: TEIGAPC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
tWarning 1.00 - 999999.99 s 0.01 600.00 Time limit for warning supervision
tAlarm 1.00 - 999999.99 s 0.01 1200.00 Time limit for alarm supervision

16.14.6 Operation principle

The elapsed time integrator (TEIGAPC) provides

time integration, accumulating the elapsed time when a given binary signal has
been high
blocking and reset of the total integrated time
supervision of limit transgression and overflow, the overflow limit is fixed to
999999.9 seconds
retaining of the integrated value

Figure 482 describes the simplified logic of the function where the block Time
Integration covers the logics for the first two items listed above while the block
Transgression Supervision Plus Retain contains the logics for the last two.

967
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Logic

Loop Delay

tWarning
OVERFLOW
tAlarm
Transgression Supervision WARNING
Plus Retain
ALARM

BLOCK
RESET ACCTIME
Time Integration
IN

Loop Delay

IEC12000195-3-en.vsd
IEC12000195 V3 EN

Figure 482: TEIGAPC Simplified logic

TEIGAPC main functionalities

integration of the elapsed time when IN has been high
applicable to long time integration (999 999.9 seconds)
output ACCTIME presents integrated value in seconds
integrated value is retained in nonvolatile memory
any retained value with a warning/alarm/overflow is used as initiation
value for the integration following by a restart
RESET: Reset of the integration value. Consequently all other outputs are also
reset
unconditionally on the input IN value
reset the value of the nonvolatile memory to zero
BLOCK: Freeze the integration and block/reset the other outputs
unconditionally on the signal value
BLOCK request overrides RESET request
Monitor and report the conditions of limit transgression
overflow if output ACCTIME >999999.9 seconds
alarm if ACCTIME > tAlarm
warning if ACCTIME > tWarning

The ACCTIME output represents the integrated time in seconds while tOverflow,
tAlarm and tWarning are the time limit parameters in seconds.

tAlarm and tWarning are user settable limits. They are also independent, that is,
there is no check if tAlarm > tWarning.

968
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 16
Logic

tAlarm and tWarning are possible to be defined with a resolution of 10 ms,

depending on the level of the defined values for the parameters.

The limit for the overflow supervision is fixed at 999999.9 seconds. The outputs
freeze if an overflow occurs.

16.14.6.1 Operation Accuracy

The accuracy of TEIGAPC depends on essentially three factors

function cycle time
the pulse length
the number of pulses, that is, the number of rising and falling flank pairs

In principle, a shorter function cycle time, longer integrated time length or more
pulses may lead to reduced accuracy.

16.14.6.2 Memory storage

The value of the integrated elapsed time is retained in a non-volatile memory.

16.14.7 Technical data

Table 656: TEIGAPC Technical data
Function Cycle time (ms) Range or value Accuracy
Elapsed time 3 0 ~ 999999.9 s 0.2% or 20 ms
integration whichever is greater
8 0 ~ 999999.9 s 0.2% or 100 ms
whichever is greater
100 0 ~ 999999.9 s 0.2% or 250 ms
whichever is greater

969
Technical Manual
970
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Section 17 Monitoring

17.1 Measurements

17.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Measurements CVMMXN -
P, Q, S, I, U, f

SYMBOL-RR V1 EN

Phase current measurement CMMXU -

I

SYMBOL-SS V1 EN

Phase-phase voltage measurement VMMXU -

U

SYMBOL-UU V1 EN

Current sequence component CMSQI -

measurement
I1, I2, I0

SYMBOL-VV V1 EN

Voltage sequence component VMSQI -

measurement
U1, U2, U0

SYMBOL-TT V1 EN

Phase-neutral voltage measurement VNMMXU -

U

SYMBOL-UU V1 EN

17.1.2 Functionality
Measurement functions is used for power system measurement, supervision and
reporting to the local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM600 or to station level for
example, via IEC 61850. The possibility to continuously monitor measured values
of active power, reactive power, currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is

971
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

vital for efficient production, transmission and distribution of electrical energy. It

provides to the system operator fast and easy overview of the present status of the
power system. Additionally, it can be used during testing and commissioning of
protection and control IEDs in order to verify proper operation and connection of
instrument transformers (CTs and VTs). During normal service by periodic
comparison of the measured value from the IED with other independent meters the
proper operation of the IED analog measurement chain can be verified. Finally, it
can be used to verify proper direction orientation for distance or directional
overcurrent protection function.

The available measured values of an IED are depending on the

actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits that is, low-low
limit, low limit, high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also
supported, that is, the measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which
reduces the impact of noise in the inputs.

Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level
when change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all
changes since the last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure
value can also be based on periodic reporting.

Main menu/Measurement/Monitoring/Service values/CVMMXN

The measurement function, CVMMXN, provides the following power system

quantities:

P, Q and S: three phase active, reactive and apparent power

PF: power factor
U: phase-to-phase voltage amplitude
I: phase current amplitude
F: power system frequency

,
The measuring functions CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU provide physical
quantities:

I: phase currents (amplitude and angle) (CMMXU)

U: voltages (phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase voltage, amplitude and angle)
(VMMXU, VNMMXU)

The CVMMXN function calculates three-phase power quantities by using

fundamental frequency phasors (DFT values) of the measured current respectively
voltage signals. The measured power quantities are available either, as
instantaneously calculated quantities or, averaged values over a period of time (low
pass filtered) depending on the selected settings.

972
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get better then class 0.5
presentation. This is accomplished by angle and amplitude compensation at 5, 30
and 100% of rated current and at 100% of rated voltage.

The power system quantities provided, depends on the actual

hardware, (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

The measuring functions CMSQI and VMSQI provide sequence component

quantities:

I: sequence currents (positive, zero, negative sequence, amplitude and angle)

U: sequence voltages (positive, zero and negative sequence, amplitude and
angle).

17.1.3 Function block

The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware
(TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

CVMMXN
I3P* S
U3P* S_RANGE
P_INST
P
P_RANGE
Q_INST
Q
Q_RANGE
PF
PF_RANGE
ILAG
ILEAD
U
U_RANGE
I
I_RANGE
F
F_RANGE

IEC10000016-1-en.vsd
IEC10000016 V1 EN

Figure 483: CVMMXN function block

CMMXU
I3P* IL1
IL1RANG
IL1ANGL
IL2
IL2RANG
IL2ANGL
IL3
IL3RANG
IL3ANGL

IEC05000699-2-en.vsd
IEC05000699 V2 EN

Figure 484: CMMXU function block

973
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

VMMXU
U3P* UL12
UL12RANG
UL12ANGL
UL23
UL23RANG
UL23ANGL
UL31
UL31RANG
UL31ANGL

IEC05000701-2-en.vsd
IEC05000701 V2 EN

Figure 485: VMMXU function block

CMSQI
I3P* 3I0
3I0RANG
3I0ANGL
I1
I1RANG
I1ANGL
I2
I2RANG
I2ANGL

IEC05000703-2-en.vsd
IEC05000703 V2 EN

Figure 486: CMSQI function block

VMSQI
U3P* 3U0
3U0RANG
3U0ANGL
U1
U1RANG
U1ANGL
U2
U2RANG
U2ANGL

IEC05000704-2-en.vsd
IEC05000704 V2 EN

Figure 487: VMSQI function block

VNMMXU
U3P* UL1
UL1RANG
UL1ANGL
UL2
UL2RANG
UL2ANGL
UL3
UL3RANG
UL3ANGL

IEC09000850-1-en.vsd
IEC09000850 V1 EN

Figure 488: VNMMXU function block

974
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

17.1.4 Signals
Table 657: CVMMXN Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL

Table 658: CVMMXN Output signals

Name Type Description
S REAL Apparent Power magnitude of deadband value
S_RANGE INTEGER Apparent Power range
P_INST REAL Active Power
P REAL Active Power magnitude of deadband value
P_RANGE INTEGER Active Power range
Q_INST REAL Reactive Power
Q REAL Reactive Power magnitude of deadband value
Q_RANGE INTEGER Reactive Power range
PF REAL Power Factor magnitude of deadband value
PF_RANGE INTEGER Power Factor range
ILAG BOOLEAN Current is lagging voltage
ILEAD BOOLEAN Current is leading voltage
U REAL Calculated voltage magnitude of deadband value
U_RANGE INTEGER Calculated voltage range
I REAL Calculated current magnitude of deadband value
I_RANGE INTEGER Calculated current range
F REAL System frequency magnitude of deadband value
F_RANGE INTEGER System frequency range

Table 659: CMMXU Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL

Table 660: CMMXU Output signals

Name Type Description
IL1 REAL IL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
IL1RANG INTEGER IL1 Amplitude range
IL1ANGL REAL IL1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
Table continues on next page

975
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Type Description

IL2 REAL IL2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
IL2RANG INTEGER IL2 Amplitude range
IL2ANGL REAL IL2 Angle, magnitude of reported value
IL3 REAL IL3 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
IL3RANG INTEGER IL3 Amplitude range
IL3ANGL REAL IL3 Angle, magnitude of reported value

Table 661: VMMXU Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Group connection abstract block 2
SIGNAL

Table 662: VMMXU Output signals

Name Type Description
UL12 REAL UL12 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL12RANG INTEGER UL12 Amplitude range
UL12ANGL REAL UL12 Angle, magnitude of reported value
UL23 REAL UL23 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL23RANG INTEGER UL23 Amplitude range
UL23ANGL REAL UL23 Angle, magnitude of reported value
UL31 REAL UL31 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL31RANG INTEGER UL31 Amplitude range
UL31ANGL REAL UL31 Angle, magnitude of reported value

Table 663: CMSQI Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group connection abstract block 3
SIGNAL

Table 664: CMSQI Output signals

Name Type Description
3I0 REAL 3I0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
3I0RANG INTEGER 3I0 Amplitude range
3I0ANGL REAL 3I0 Angle, magnitude of reported value
I1 REAL I1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
I1RANG INTEGER I1 Amplitude range
I1ANGL REAL I1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
Table continues on next page

976
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Name Type Description

I2 REAL I2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
I2RANG INTEGER I2 Amplitude range
I2ANGL REAL I2 Angle, magnitude of reported value

Table 665: VMSQI Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Group connection abstract block 4
SIGNAL

Table 666: VMSQI Output signals

Name Type Description
3U0 REAL 3U0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
3U0RANG INTEGER 3U0 Amplitude range
3U0ANGL REAL 3U0 Angle, magnitude of reported value
U1 REAL U1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
U1RANG INTEGER U1 Amplitude range
U1ANGL REAL U1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
U2 REAL U2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
U2RANG INTEGER U2 Amplitude range
U2ANGL REAL U2 Angle, magnitude of reported value

Table 667: VNMMXU Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL

Table 668: VNMMXU Output signals

Name Type Description
UL1 REAL UL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL1RANG INTEGER UL1 Amplitude range
UL1ANGL REAL UL1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
UL2 REAL UL2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL2RANG INTEGER UL2 Amplitude range
UL2ANGL REAL UL2 Angle, magnitude of reported value
UL3 REAL UL3 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL3RANG INTEGER UL3 Amplitude range
UL3ANGL REAL UL3 Angle, magnitude of reported value

977
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

17.1.5 Settings
The available setting parameters of the measurement function (MMXU, MSQI) are
depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in
PCM600.

These six functions are not handled as a group, so parameter settings are only
available in the first setting group.

The following terms are used in the Unit and Description columns:

UBase: Base voltage in primary kV. This voltage is used as reference for
voltage setting. It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary
voltage supervised object.
IBase: Base current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current
setting. It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary current of
the supervised object.
SBase: Base setting for power values in MVA.

Table 669: CVMMXN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SLowLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of SBase
SLowLowLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
SMin 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
SMax 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
SRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
PMin -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -200.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
PMax -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
PRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
QMin -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -200.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
QMax -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
QRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
PFMin -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -1.000 Minimum value
PFMax -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Maximum value
PFRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UMin 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
UMax 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
Table continues on next page

978
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

URepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
IMin 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 5.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
IMax 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
IRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
FrMin 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 0.000 Minimum value
FrMax 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 70.000 Maximum value
FrRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
Mode L1, L2, L3 - - L1, L2, L3 Selection of measured current and
Arone voltage
Pos Seq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3
PowAmpFact 0.000 - 6.000 - 0.001 1.000 Amplitude factor to scale power
calculations
PowAngComp -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Angle compensation for phase shift
between measured I & U
k 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 0.000 Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement, U and I

Table 670: CVMMXN Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
SZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
SHiHiLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
SHiLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
SLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
PDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
PZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
PHiHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
PHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
Table continues on next page

979
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

PLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -120.0 Low limit in % of SBase
PLowLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -150.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
PLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
QDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
QZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
QHiHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
QHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
QLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -120.0 Low limit in % of SBase
QLowLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -150.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
QLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
PFDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
PFZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
PFHiHiLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 High High limit (physical value)
PFHiLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 0.800 High limit (physical value)
PFLowLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -0.800 Low limit (physical value)
PFLowLowLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -1.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
PFLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
UDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
UZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
UHiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
ULowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
ULowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
ULimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
IDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
IZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
IHiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
IHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
ILowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
ILowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
ILimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
FrDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
FrZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
Table continues on next page

980
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

FrHiHiLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 65.000 High High limit (physical value)
FrHiLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 63.000 High limit (physical value)
FrLowLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 47.000 Low limit (physical value)
FrLowLowLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 45.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
FrLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
UGenZeroDb 1 - 100 %UB 1 5 Zero point clamping in % of UBase
IGenZeroDb 1 - 100 %IB 1 5 Zero point clamping in % of IBase
UAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at
5% of Ur
UAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at
30% of Ur
UAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at
100% of Ur
IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at
5% of Ir
IAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at
30% of Ir
IAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at
100% of Ir
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir
IAngComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 30% of Ir
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 100% of Ir

Table 671: CMMXU Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IL1DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode On / Off
On
IL1Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
IL1RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
IL1AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
IL2DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
IL2Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
IL2RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
Table continues on next page

981
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IL2AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
IL3DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
IL3Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
IL3RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
IL3AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s

Table 672: CMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IL1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
IL1HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
IL1HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at
5% of Ir
IAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at
30% of Ir
IL1LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
IL1LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
IAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at
100% of Ir
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir
IL1Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
IAngComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 30% of Ir
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 100% of Ir
IL1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
IL2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
IL2HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
IL2HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
IL2LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
IL2LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
IL2Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
IL2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
IL3ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
IL3HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
IL3HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
IL3LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
Table continues on next page

982
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IL3LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
IL3Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
IL3LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits

Table 673: VMMXU Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
UL12DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode On / Off
On
UL12ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
UL12Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
UL12RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
UL12AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
UL23DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
UL2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
UL23Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
UL23RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UL23AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
UL31DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
UL3ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
UL31Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
UL31RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UL31AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s

Table 674: VMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
UL12HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UL12HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
UL12LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
Table continues on next page

983
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

UL12LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
UAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at
100% of Ur
UL12Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in in % of UBase
UL12LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
UL23HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UL23HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
UL23LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
UL23LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
UL23Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
UL23LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
UL31HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UL31HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
UL31LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
UL31LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
UL31Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
UL31LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits

Table 675: CMSQI Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
3I0DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
3I0ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
3I0Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
3I0Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
3I0RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
3I0LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
3I0AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode On / Off
On
3I0AngMin -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
3I0AngMax -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value
3I0AngRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
Table continues on next page

984
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

I1DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
I1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
I1Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
I1Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
I1RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
I1AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
I1AngMax -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value
I1AngRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
I2DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
I2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
I2Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
I2Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
I2RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
I2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
I2AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
I2AngMin -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
I2AngRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband

Table 676: CMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
3I0HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
3I0HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
3I0LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
3I0LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
3I0AngZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
I1HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
I1HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
I1LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
I1LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
I1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
Table continues on next page

985
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

I1AngZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
I1AngMin -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
I2HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
I2HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
I2LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
I2LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
I2AngZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
I2AngMax -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value

Table 677: VMSQI Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
3U0DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
3U0ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
3U0Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
3U0Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
3U0RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
3U0LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
3U0AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode On / Off
On
3U0AngZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
3U0AngMin -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
3U0AngMax -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value
3U0AngRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
U1DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
U1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
U1Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
U1Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
U1RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
U1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
Table continues on next page

986
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

U1AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
U2DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
U2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
U2Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
U2Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
U2RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
U2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
U2AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
U2AngMin -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
U2AngMax -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value
U2AngRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UAmpPreComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to pre-calibrate voltage
at 5% of Ur
UAmpPreComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to pre-calibrate voltage
at 30% of Ur
UAmpPreComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to pre-calibrate voltage
at 100% of Ur

Table 678: VMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
3U0HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
3U0HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
3U0LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
3U0LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
U1HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
U1HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
U1LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
U1LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
U1AngZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
U1AngMin -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
U1AngMax -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value
U1AngRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
U2HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
U2HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
Table continues on next page

987
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

U2LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
U2LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
U2AngZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range

Table 679: VNMMXU Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
UL1DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode On / Off
On
UL1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
UL1Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
UL1RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
UL1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
UL1AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
UL2DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
UL2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
UL2Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
UL2RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UL2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
UL2AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
UL3DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
UL3ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
UL3Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
UL3RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UL3LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
UL3AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s

988
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Table 680: VNMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
UL1HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UL1HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
UL1LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
UL1LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
UAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at
100% of Ur
UL1Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
UL2HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UL2HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
UL2LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
UL2LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
UL2Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
UL3HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UL3HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
UL3LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
UL3LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
UL3Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase

17.1.6 Monitored data

Table 681: CVMMXN Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
S_IMAG REAL - - Apparent Power
magnitude of
instantaneous value
S REAL - MVA Apparent Power
magnitude of deadband
value
P_IMAG REAL - - Active Power magnitude
of instantaneous value
P REAL - MW Active Power magnitude
of deadband value
Q_IMAG REAL - - Reactive Power
magnitude of
instantaneous value
Q REAL - MVAr Reactive Power
magnitude of deadband
value
PF_IMAG REAL - - Power Factor magnitude
of instantaneous value
PF REAL - - Power Factor magnitude
of deadband value
Table continues on next page

989
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

U_IMAG REAL - - Calcuated voltage
magnitude of
instantaneous value
U REAL - kV Calculated voltage
magnitude of deadband
value
I_IMAG REAL - - Caculated current
magnitude of
instantaneous value
I REAL - A Calculated current
magnitude of deadband
value
F_IMAG REAL - - System frequency
magnitude of
instantaneous value
F REAL - Hz System frequency
magnitude of deadband
value

Table 682: CMMXU Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IL1IMAG REAL - - IL1 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
IL1 REAL - A IL1 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
IL1ANGIM REAL - - IL1 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
IL1ANGL REAL - deg IL1 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
IL2IMAG REAL - - IL2 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
IL2 REAL - A IL2 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
IL2ANGIM REAL - - IL2 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
IL2ANGL REAL - deg IL2 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
IL3IMAG REAL - - IL3 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
IL3 REAL - A IL3 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
IL3ANGIM REAL - - IL3 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
IL3ANGL REAL - deg IL3 Angle, magnitude of
reported value

990
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Table 683: VMMXU Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UL12IMAG REAL - - UL12 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
UL12 REAL - kV UL12 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
UL12ANGIM REAL - - UL12 Angle, magnitude
of instantaneous value
UL12ANGL REAL - deg UL12 Angle, magnitude
of reported value
UL23IMAG REAL - - UL23 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
UL23 REAL - kV UL23 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
UL23ANGIM REAL - - UL23 Angle, magnitude
of instantaneous value
UL23ANGL REAL - deg UL23 Angle, magnitude
of reported value
UL31IMAG REAL - - UL31 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
UL31 REAL - kV UL31 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
UL31ANGIM REAL - - UL31 Angle, magnitude
of instantaneous value
UL31ANGL REAL - deg UL31 Angle, magnitude
of reported value

Table 684: CMSQI Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
3I0IMAG REAL - - 3I0 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
3I0 REAL - A 3I0 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
3I0ANGIM REAL - - 3I0 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
3I0ANGL REAL - deg 3I0 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
I1IMAG REAL - - I1 Amplitude, magnitude
of instantaneous value
I1 REAL - A I1 Amplitude, magnitude
of reported value
Table continues on next page

991
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

I1ANGIM REAL - - I1 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
I1ANGL REAL - deg I1 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
I2IMAG REAL - - I2 Amplitude, magnitude
of instantaneous value
I2 REAL - A I2 Amplitude, magnitude
of reported value
I2ANGIM REAL - - I2 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
I2ANGL REAL - deg I2 Angle, magnitude of
reported value

Table 685: VMSQI Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
3U0IMAG REAL - - 3U0 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
3U0 REAL - kV 3U0 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
3U0ANGIM REAL - - 3U0 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
3U0ANGL REAL - deg 3U0 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
U1IMAG REAL - - U1 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
U1 REAL - kV U1 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
U1ANGIM REAL - - U1 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
U1ANGL REAL - deg U1 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
U2IMAG REAL - - U2 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
U2 REAL - kV U2 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
U2ANGIM REAL - - U2 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
U2ANGL REAL - deg U2 Angle, magnitude of
reported value

992
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Table 686: VNMMXU Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UL1IMAG REAL - - UL1 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
UL1 REAL - kV UL1 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
UL1ANGIM REAL - - UL1 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
UL1ANGL REAL - deg UL1 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
UL2IMAG REAL - - UL2 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
UL2 REAL - kV UL2 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
UL2ANGIM REAL - - UL2 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
UL2ANGL REAL - deg UL2 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
UL3IMAG REAL - - UL3 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
UL3 REAL - kV UL3 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
UL3ANGIM REAL - - UL3 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
UL3ANGL REAL - deg UL3 Angle, magnitude of
reported value

17.1.7 Operation principle

17.1.7.1 Measurement supervision

The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and
further process information for currents and voltages obtained from the pre-
processing blocks. The number of processed alternate measuring quantities
depends on the type of IED and built-in options.

The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different locations:

Locally by means of the local HMI

Remotely using the monitoring tool within PCM600 or over the station bus
Internally by connecting the analogue output signals to the Disturbance Report
function

993
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Phase angle reference

All phase angles are presented in relation to a defined reference channel. The
General setting parameter PhaseAngleRef defines the reference, see section
"Analog inputs".

Zero point clamping

Measured value below zero point clamping limit is forced to zero. This allows the
noise in the input signal to be ignored. The zero point clamping limit is a general
setting (XZeroDb where X equals S, P, Q, PF, U, I, F, IL1-3, UL1-3, UL12-31, I1,
I2, 3I0, U1, U2 or 3U0). Observe that this measurement supervision zero point
clamping might be overridden by the zero point clamping used for the
measurement values within CVMMXU.

Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity

Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity available in each function
block by means of four defined operating thresholds, see figure 489. The
monitoring has two different modes of operating:

Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) or
High-high limit (XHiHiLim) pre-set values
Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low limit
(XLowLim) or Low-low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.

X_RANGE is illustrated in figure 489.

X_RANGE = 3
High-high limit

X_RANGE= 1 Hysteresis
High limit

X_RANGE=0

X_RANGE=0 t

Low limit

X_RANGE=2

Low-low limit
X_RANGE=4

en05000657.vsd
IEC05000657 V1 EN

Figure 489: Presentation of operating limits

Each analogue output has one corresponding supervision level output

(X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4 (0: Normal, 1:
High limit exceeded, 3: High-high limit exceeded, 2: below Low limit and 4: below
Low-low limit). The output may be connected to a measurement expander block
(XP (RANGE_XP)) to get measurement supervision as binary signals.

994
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 489.

The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference
between the operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for
each measuring channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all operating
values within one channel.

Actual value of the measured quantity

The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. The
measurement is continuous for each measured quantity separately, but the reporting
of the value to the higher levels depends on the selected reporting mode. The
following basic reporting modes are available:

Cyclic reporting (Cyclic)

Amplitude dead-band supervision (Dead band)
Integral dead-band supervision (Int deadband)

Cyclic reporting
The cyclic reporting of measured value is performed according to chosen setting
(XRepTyp). The measuring channel reports the value independent of amplitude or
integral dead-band reporting.

In addition to the normal cyclic reporting the IED also report spontaneously when
measured value passes any of the defined threshold limits.

Y
Value Reported Value Reported
Value Reported Value Reported
(1st)

Y3 Value Reported
Y2 Y4

Y1 Y5

t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)

t
Value 1

Value 2

Value 3

Value 4

Value 5

en05000500.vsd
(*)Set value for t: XDbRepInt

IEC05000500 V1 EN

Figure 490: Periodic reporting

995
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Amplitude dead-band supervision

If a measuring value is changed, compared to the last reported value, and the
change is larger than the Y pre-defined limits that are set by user (UDbRepIn),
then the measuring channel reports the new value to a higher level. This limits the
information flow to a minimum necessary. Figure 491 shows an example with the
amplitude dead-band supervision. The picture is simplified: the process is not
continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle
from each other.

Value Reported
Y

Value Reported Value Reported

Value Reported
(1st)
Y3 DY
DY
Y2 DY
DY
DY
DY
Y1

99000529.vsd

IEC99000529 V1 EN

Figure 491: Amplitude dead-band supervision reporting

After the new value is reported, the Y limits for dead-band are automatically set
around it. The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more
than defined by the Y set limits.

Integral dead-band reporting

The measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-
set limit (XDbRepInt), figure 492, where an example of reporting with integral dead-
band supervision is shown. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous
but the values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each
other.

The last value reported, Y1 in figure 492 serves as a basic value for further
measurement. A difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly
measured value and is multiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). The
absolute values of these integral values are added until the pre-set value is
exceeded. This occurs with the value Y2 that is reported and set as a new base for
the following measurements (as well as for the values Y3, Y4 and Y5).

996
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

The integral dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals

with small variations that can last for relatively long periods.

Y A1 >=
A >= pre-set value
A2 >=
pre-set value pre-set value
Y3 A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=
pre-set value
Y2 A1 A2
A4 A6
Value Reported Y4 A3 A5 A7
(1st) Value
Value Reported Y5
A Reported Value
Reported Value
Y1 Reported

t
99000530.vsd

IEC99000530 V1 EN

Figure 492: Reporting with integral dead-band supervision

17.1.7.2 Measurements CVMMXN

Mode of operation
The measurement function must be connected to three-phase current and three-
phase voltage input in the configuration tool (group signals), but it is capable to
measure and calculate above mentioned quantities in nine different ways depending
on the available VT inputs connected to the IED. The end user can freely select by
a parameter setting, which one of the nine available measuring modes shall be used
within the function. Available options are summarized in the following table:

997
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Set value for Formula used for complex, three- Formula used for voltage and Comment
parameter phase power calculation current magnitude calculation
Mode
1 L1, L2, L3 Used when
* *
S = U L1 I L1 + U L 2 I L 2 + U L 3 I L 3
*
U = ( U L1 + U L 2 + U L 3 ) / 3
three phase-
EQUATION1385 V1 EN
to-earth
I = ( I L1 + I L 2 + I L 3 ) / 3
voltages are
EQUATION1386 V1 EN available
2 Arone Used when
S = U L1 L 2 I L1 - U L 2 L 3 I L 3
* *
U = ( U L1 L 2 + U L 2 L 3 ) / 2 three two
phase-to-
(Equation 199)
I = ( I L1 + I L 3 ) / 2 phase
EQUATION1387 V1 EN

voltages are
EQUATION1388 V1 EN (Equation 200) available
3 PosSeq Used when
S = 3 U PosSeq I PosSeq
*
U = 3 U PosSeq only
symmetrical
(Equation 201) three phase
EQUATION1389 V1 EN
I = I PosSeq
power shall
EQUATION1390 V1 EN (Equation 202) be measured

4 L1L2 Used when

S = U L1 L 2 ( I L*1 - I L* 2 ) U = U L1 L 2 only UL1L2
phase-to-
(Equation 203)
I = ( I L1 + I L 2 ) / 2
EQUATION1391 V1 EN
phase
voltage is
EQUATION1392 V1 EN (Equation 204) available
5 L2L3 Used when
S = U L 2 L3 ( I L 2 - I L3 )
* *
U = U L2 L3 only UL2L3
phase-to-
(Equation 205)
I = ( I L2 + I L3 ) / 2
EQUATION1393 V1 EN
phase
voltage is
EQUATION1394 V1 EN (Equation 206) available
6 L3L1 Used when
S = U L 3 L1 ( I L 3 - I L1 )
* *
U = U L 3 L1 only UL3L1
phase-to-
(Equation 207)
I = ( I L 3 + I L1 ) / 2
EQUATION1395 V1 EN
phase
voltage is
EQUATION1396 V1 EN (Equation 208) available
7 L1 Used when
S = 3 U L1 I L1
*
U = 3 U L1 only UL1
phase-to-
(Equation 209) earth voltage
I = I L1
EQUATION1397 V1 EN

is available
EQUATION1398 V1 EN (Equation 210)
8 L2 Used when
S = 3 U L2 I L2
*
U = 3 U L2 only UL2
phase-to-
(Equation 211) earth voltage
I = IL2
EQUATION1399 V1 EN

is available
EQUATION1400 V1 EN (Equation 212)
9 L3 Used when
S = 3 U L3 I L3
*
U = 3 U L3 only UL3
phase-to-
(Equation 213)
I = I L3 earth voltage
EQUATION1401 V1 EN

is available
EQUATION1402 V1 EN (Equation 214)
* means complex conjugated value

998
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

It shall be noted that only in the first two operating modes that is, 1 & 2 the
measurement function calculates exact three-phase power. In other operating
modes that is, from 3 to 9 it calculates the three-phase power under assumption that
the power system is fully symmetrical. Once the complex apparent power is
calculated then the P, Q, S, & PF are calculated in accordance with the following
formulas:

P = Re( S )
EQUATION1403 V1 EN (Equation 215)

Q = Im( S )
EQUATION1404 V1 EN (Equation 216)

S = S = P +Q
2 2

EQUATION1405 V1 EN (Equation 217)

PF = cosj = P
S
EQUATION1406 V1 EN (Equation 218)

Additionally to the power factor value the two binary output signals from the
function are provided which indicates the angular relationship between current and
voltage phasors. Binary output signal ILAG is set to one when current phasor is
lagging behind voltage phasor. Binary output signal ILEAD is set to one when
current phasor is leading the voltage phasor.

Each analogue output has a corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE).

The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement
supervision".

Calibration of analog inputs

Measured currents and voltages used in the CVMMXN function can be calibrated
to get class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle
compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation
below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in
figure 493.

999
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

IEC05000652 V2 EN

Figure 493: Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference
and the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.

Low pass filtering

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is
possible to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for P,
Q, S, U, I and power factor. This will make slower measurement response to the
step changes in the measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with
the following recursive formula:

X = k X Old + (1 - k ) X Calculated
EQUATION1407 V1 EN (Equation 219)

where:
X is a new measured value (that is P, Q, S, U, I or PF) to be given out from the function
XOld is the measured value given from the measurement function in previous execution cycle

XCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties

1000
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay).
When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. Appropriate value of k
shall be determined separately for every application. Some typical value for k =0.14.

Zero point clamping

In order to avoid erroneous measurements when either current or voltage signal is
not present, it is possible for the end user to set the amplitudeIGenZeroDb level for
current and voltage measurement UGenZeroDb is forced to zero. When either
current or voltage measurement is forced to zero automatically the measured values
for power (P, Q and S) and power factor are forced to zero as well. Since the
measurement supervision functionality, included in CVMMXN, is using these
values the zero clamping will influence the subsequent supervision (observe the
possibility to do zero point clamping within measurement supervision, see section
"Measurement supervision").

Compensation facility
In order to compensate for small amplitude and angular errors in the complete
measurement chain (CT error, VT error, IED input transformer errors and so on.) it
is possible to perform on site calibration of the power measurement. This is
achieved by setting the complex constant which is then internally used within the
function to multiply the calculated complex apparent power S. This constant is set
as amplitude (setting parameter PowAmpFact, default value 1.000) and angle
(setting parameter PowAngComp, default value 0.0 degrees). Default values for
these two parameters are done in such way that they do not influence internally
calculated value (complex constant has default value 1). In this way calibration, for
specific operating range (for example, around rated power) can be done at site.
However, to perform this calibration it is necessary to have an external power
meter with high accuracy class available.

Directionality
If CT earthing parameter is set as described in section "Analog inputs", active and
reactive power will be measured always towards the protected object. This is
shown in the following figure 494.

1001
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Busbar

IED

P Q

Protected
Object
IEC09000038-1-en.vsd
IEC09000038-1-EN V1 EN

Figure 494: Internal IED directionality convention for P & Q measurements

Practically, it means that active and reactive power will have positive values when
they flow from the busbar towards the protected object and they will have negative
values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.

In some application, for example, when power is measured on the secondary side
of the power transformer it might be desirable, from the end client point of view, to
have actually opposite directional convention for active and reactive power
measurements. This can be easily achieved by setting parameter PowAngComp to
value of 180.0 degrees. With such setting the active and reactive power will have
positive values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.

Frequency
Frequency is actually not calculated within measurement block. It is simply
obtained from the pre-processing block and then just given out from the
measurement block as an output.

17.1.7.3 Phase current measurement CMMXU

The Phase current measurement (CMMXU) function must be connected to three-

phase current input in the configuration tool to be operable. Currents handled in the
function can be calibrated to get better then class 0.5 measuring accuracy for
internal use, on the outputs and IEC 61850. This is achieved by amplitude and

1002
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current. The compensation below

5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see figure 493.

Phase currents (amplitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each
amplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output (ILx_RANG). The
supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section
"Measurement supervision".

17.1.7.4 Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements VMMXU,

VNMMXU

The voltage function must be connected to three-phase voltage input in the

configuration tool to be operable. Voltages are handled in the same way as currents
when it comes to class 0.5 calibrations, see above.

The voltages (phase or phase-phase voltage, amplitude and angle) are available on
the outputs and each amplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output
(ULxy_RANG). The supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see
section "Measurement supervision".

17.1.7.5 Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI, CMSQI

The measurement functions must be connected to three-phase current (CMSQI) or

voltage (VMSQI) input in the configuration tool to be operable. No outputs, other
than X_RANG, are calculated within the measuring blocks and it is not possible to
calibrate the signals. Input signals are obtained from the pre-processing block and
transferred to corresponding output.

Positive, negative and three times zero sequence quantities are available on the
outputs (voltage and current, amplitude and angle). Each amplitude output has a
corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is an
integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

17.1.8 Technical data

Table 687: CVMMXN technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Frequency (0.95-1.05) fr 2.0 mHz

Voltage (0.1-1.5) Ur 0.5% of Ur at UUr

0.5% of U at U > Ur

Connected current (0.2-4.0) Ir 0.5% of Ir at I Ir

0.5% of I at I > Ir

Table continues on next page

1003
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Function Range or value Accuracy

Active power, P
Reactive power, Q
Apparent power, S
0.1 x Ur< U < 1.5 x Ur 1.0% of Sr at S Sr
0.2 x Ir < I < 4.0 x Ir 1.0% of S at S > Sr
Conditions:
0.1 x Ur< U < 1.5 x Ur 0.8 x Ur < U < 1.2 Ur
0.2 x Ir < I < 4.0 x Ir 0.2 x Ir < I < 1.2 Ir
0.1 x Ur < U < 1.5 x Ur
0.2 x Ir< I < 4.0 x Ir

Power factor, cos () 0.1 x Ur < U < 1.5 x Ur 0.02

0.2 x Ir< I < 4.0 x Ir

Table 688: CMMXU technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Current at symmetrical load (0.1-4.0) Ir 0.3% of Ir at I 0.5 Ir
0.3% of I at I > 0.5 Ir

Phase angle at symmetrical load (0.1-4.0) Ir 1.0 at 0.1 Ir < I 0.5 Ir

0.5 at 0.5 Ir < I 4.0 Ir

Table 689: VMMXU technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Voltage (10 to 300) V 0.5% of U at U 50 V
0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Phase angle (10 to 300) V 0.5 at U 50 V
0.2 at U > 50 V

Table 690: CMSQI technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Current positive sequence, I1 (0.14.0) Ir 0.3% of Ir at I 0.5 Ir
Three phase settings 0.3% of I at I > 0.5 Ir

Current zero sequence, 3I0 (0.11.0) Ir 0.3% of Ir at I 0.5 Ir

Three phase settings 0.3% of I at I > 0.5 Ir

Current negative sequence, I2 (0.11.0) Ir 0.3% of Ir at I 0.5 Ir

Three phase settings 0.3% of I at I > 0.5 Ir

Phase angle (0.14.0) Ir 1.0 at 0.1 Ir < I 0.5 Ir

0.5 at 0.5 Ir < I 4.0 Ir

1004
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Table 691: VMSQI technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Voltage positive sequence, U1 (10 to 300) V 0.3% of U at U 50 V
0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Voltage zero sequence, 3U0 (10 to 300) V 0.3% of U at U 50 V
0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Voltage negative sequence, U2 (10 to 300) V 0.3% of U at U 50 V
0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Phase angle (10 to 300) V 0.3 at U 50 V
0.2 at U > 50 V

Table 692: VNMMXU technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Voltage (5 to 175) V 0.5% of U at U 50 V
0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Phase angle (5 to 175) V 0.5 at U 50 V
0.2 at U > 50 V

17.2 Analog inputs

17.2.1 Introduction
Analog input channels must be configured and set properly in order to get correct
measurement results and correct protection operations. For power measuring and
all directional and differential functions the directions of the input currents must be
defined in order to reflect the way the current transformers are installed/connected
in the field ( primary and secondary connections ). Measuring and protection
algorithms in the IED use primary system quantities. Setting values are in primary
quantities as well and it is important to set the data about the connected current and
voltage transformers properly.

A reference PhaseAngleRef can be defined to facilitate service values reading. This

analog channels phase angle will always be fixed to zero degrees and all other
angle information will be shown in relation to this analog input. During testing and
commissioning of the IED the reference channel can be changed to facilitate testing
and service values reading.

The IED has the ability to receive analog values from primary
equipment, that are sampled by Merging units (MU) connected to a
process bus, via the IEC 61850-9-2 LE protocol.

The availability of VT inputs depends on the ordered transformer

input module (TRM) type.

1005
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

17.2.2 Function block

The function blocks are not represented in the configuration tool.

The signals appear only in the SMT tool when a TRM is included in
the configuration with the function selector tool. In the SMT tool
they can be mapped to the desired virtual input (SMAI) of the IED
and used internally in the configuration.

17.2.3 Signals
Table 693: TRM_12I Output signals
Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analogue current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analogue current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analogue current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analogue current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analogue current input 6
CH7(I) STRING Analogue current input 7
CH8(I) STRING Analogue current input 8
CH9(I) STRING Analogue current input 9
CH10(I) STRING Analogue current input 10
CH11(I) STRING Analogue current input 11
CH12(I) STRING Analogue current input 12

Table 694: TRM_6I_6U Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analogue current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analogue current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analogue current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analogue current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analogue current input 6
CH7(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 7
CH8(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 8
CH9(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 9
Table continues on next page

1006
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Name Type Description

CH10(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 10
CH11(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 11
CH12(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 12

Table 695: TRM_6I Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analogue current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analogue current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analogue current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analogue current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analogue current input 6

Table 696: TRM_7I_5U Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analogue current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analogue current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analogue current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analogue current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analogue current input 6
CH7(I) STRING Analogue current input 7
CH8(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 8
CH9(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 9
CH10(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 10
CH11(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 11
CH12(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 12

Table 697: TRM_9I_3U Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analogue current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analogue current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analogue current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analogue current input 5
Table continues on next page

1007
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Type Description

CH6(I) STRING Analogue current input 6
CH7(I) STRING Analogue current input 7
CH8(I) STRING Analogue current input 8
CH9(I) STRING Analogue current input 9
CH10(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 10
CH11(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 11
CH12(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 12

17.2.4 Settings
Dependent on ordered IED type.

1008
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Table 698: AISVBAS Non group settings (basic)

1009
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

PhaseAngleRef TRM40-Ch1 - - TRM40-Ch1 Reference channel for phase angle
TRM40-Ch2 presentation
TRM40-Ch3
TRM40-Ch4
TRM40-Ch5
TRM40-Ch6
TRM40-Ch7
TRM40-Ch8
TRM40-Ch9
TRM40-Ch10
TRM40-Ch11
TRM40-Ch12
TRM41-Ch1
TRM41-Ch2
TRM41-Ch3
TRM41-Ch4
TRM41-Ch5
TRM41-Ch6
TRM41-Ch7
TRM41-Ch8
TRM41-Ch9
TRM41-Ch10
TRM41-Ch11
TRM41-Ch12
MU1-L1I
MU1-L2I
MU1-L3I
MU1-L4I
MU1-L1U
MU1-L2U
MU1-L3U
MU1-L4U
MU2-L1I
MU2-L2I
MU2-L3I
MU2-L4I
MU2-L1U
MU2-L2U
MU2-L3U
MU2-L4U
MU3-L1I
MU3-L2I
MU3-L3I
MU3-L4I
MU3-L1U
MU3-L2U
MU3-L3U
MU3-L4U
MU4-L1I
MU4-L2I
MU4-L3I
MU4-L4I
MU4-L1U
MU4-L2U
MU4-L3U
MU4-L4U
MU5-L1I
MU5-L2I
MU5-L3I
MU5-L4I
MU5-L1U
MU5-L2U
MU5-L3U
MU5-L4U
MU6-L1I
MU6-L2I
MU6-L3I
MU6-L4I
1010 MU6-L1U
MU6-L2U Technical Manual
MU6-L3U
MU6-L4U
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Table 699: TRM_12I Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint7 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec7 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim7 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint8 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec8 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim8 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint9 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec9 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim9 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint10 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec10 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim10 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint11 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec11 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
Table continues on next page

1011
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CTprim11 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint12 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec12 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim12 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current

Table 700: TRM_6I_6U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec7 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim7 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec8 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim8 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec9 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim9 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec11 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
Table continues on next page

1012
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

VTprim11 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec12 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim12 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage

Table 701: TRM_6I Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current

Table 702: TRM_7I_5U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
Table continues on next page

1013
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint7 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec7 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim7 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec8 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim8 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec9 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim9 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec11 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim11 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec12 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim12 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage

Table 703: TRM_9I_3U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
Table continues on next page

1014
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint7 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec7 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim7 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint8 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec8 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim8 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint9 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec9 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim9 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec11 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim11 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec12 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim12 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage

17.2.5 Monitored data

Table 704: AISVBAS Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
Status INTEGER 0=Ok - Service value status
1=Error
2=AngRefLow
3=Uncorrelated

1015
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Table 705: TRM_12I Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module
1=Error status

Table 706: TRM_6I_6U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module
1=Error status

Table 707: TRM_6I Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module
1=Error status

Table 708: TRM_7I_5U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module
1=Error status

Table 709: TRM_9I_3U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module
1=Error status

17.2.6 Operation principle

The direction of a current depends on the connection of the CT. The main CTs are
typically star connected and can be connected with the star point towards the object
or away from the object. This information must be set in the IED.

The convention of the directionality is defined as follows:

Positive value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction
into the object.
Negative value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction
out from the object.

For directional functions the directional conventions are defined as follows (see
figure 2)

Forward means the direction is into the object.

Reverse means the direction is out from the object.

1016
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Definition of direction Definition of direction

for directional functions for directional functions
Reverse Forward Forward Reverse
Protected Object
Line, transformer, etc
e.g. P, Q, I e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is Measured quantity is
positive when flowing positive when flowing
towards the object towards the object

Set parameter Set parameter

CTStarPoint CTStarPoint
Correct Setting is Correct Setting is
"ToObject" "FromObject"

en05000456.vsd
IEC05000456 V1 EN

Figure 495: Internal convention of the directionality in the IED

If the settings of the primary CT is correct, that is CTStarPoint set as FromObject

or ToObject according to the plant condition, then a positive quantity always flows
towards the protected object, and a Forward direction always looks towards the
protected object.

The settings of the IED is performed in primary values. The ratios of the main CTs
and VTs are therefore basic data for the IED. The user has to set the rated
secondary and primary currents and voltages of the CTs and VTs to provide the
IED with their rated ratios.

The CT and VT ratio and the name on respective channel is done under Main
menu/Hardware/Analog modules in the Parameter Settings tool or on the HMI.

17.3 Gas medium supervision SSIMG

17.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Gas medium supervision SSIMG - 63

17.3.2 Functionality
Gas medium supervision SSIMG is used for monitoring the circuit breaker
condition. Binary information based on the gas pressure in the circuit breaker is
used as input signals to the function. In addition, the function generates alarms
based on received information.

1017
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

17.3.3 Function block

SSIMG
BLOCK PRESSURE
BLK_ALM PRES_ALM
PRESSURE PRES_LO
TEMP TEMP
PRES_ALM TEMP_ALM
PRES_LO TEMP_LO
SET_P_LO
SET_T_LO
RESET_LO

IEC09000129-1-en.vsd
IEC09000129 V1 EN

Figure 496: SSIMG function block

17.3.4 Signals

Table 710: SSIMG Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms
PRESSURE REAL 0.0 Pressure input from CB
TEMP REAL 0.0 Temperature of the insulation medium from CB
PRES_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Pressure alarm signal
PRES_LO BOOLEAN 0 Pressure lockout signal
SET_P_LO BOOLEAN 0 Set pressure lockout
SET_T_LO BOOLEAN 0 Set temperature lockout
RESET_LO BOOLEAN 0 Reset pressure and temperature lockout

Table 711: SSIMG Output signals

Name Type Description
PRESSURE REAL Pressure service value
PRES_ALM BOOLEAN Pressure below alarm level
PRES_LO BOOLEAN Pressure below lockout level
TEMP REAL Temperature of the insulation medium
TEMP_ALM BOOLEAN Temperature above alarm level
TEMP_LO BOOLEAN Temperature above lockout level

1018
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

17.3.5 Settings
Table 712: SSIMG Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
PressAlmLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 5.00 Alarm setting for pressure
PressLOLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 3.00 Pressure lockout setting
TempAlarmLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature alarm level setting of the
medium
TempLOLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature lockout level of the medium
tPressureAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for pressure alarm
tPressureLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for pressure lockout indication
tTempAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperature alarm
tTempLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperture lockout
tResetPressAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for pressure alarm
tResetPressLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for pressure lockout
tResetTempLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture lockout
tResetTempAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture alarm

17.3.6 Operation principle

Gas medium supervision SSIMG is used to monitor the gas pressure in the circuit
breaker. Binary inputs of gas density PRES_ALM, PRES_LO, and gas pressure
signal PRESSURE, are taken into account to initiate the alarms PRES_ALM and
PRES_LO. When PRESSURE is less than PressAlmLimit or binary signal from CB
PRES_ALM is high then the gas pressure alarm, PRES_ALM will be initiated.
Similarly, if pressure input PRESSURE is less than PressLOLimit or binary signal
from CB PRES_LO is high or temperature input TEMP is above lockout level
TempLOLimit then the gas pressure lockout, PRES_LO will be initiated.

There may be sudden change in pressure of the gas for a very small time, for which
the function need not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays
tPressureAlarm or tPressureLO have been included. If the pressure goes below the
settings for more than these time delays, then only the corresponding alarm
PRES_ALM or lockout PRES_LO will be initiated. The SET_P_LO binary input is
used for setting the gas pressure lockout. The PRES_LO output retains the last
value until it is reset by using the binary input RESET_LO. Hysteresis type
comparators have been used with the setting for relative and absolute hysteresis.
The binary input BLK_ALM can be used to block the alarms, and the BLOCK
input can block both alarms and the lockout indication.

Temperature of the medium is available from the input signal of temperature. The
signal is monitored to detect high temperature.

1019
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

When temperature input TEMP is greater than TempAlarmLimit, then temperature

alarm TEMP_ALM will be initiated. Similarly, if temperature input TEMP is
greater than TempLOLimit, then TEMP_LO will be initiated.

There may be sudden change in temperature of the medium for a very small time,
for which the function need not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays
tTempAlarm or tTempLockOut have been included. If the temperature goes above
the settings for more than these time delays, then only the corresponding alarm
TEMP_ALM or lockout TEMP_LO will be initiated. The SET_T_LO binary input
is used for setting the temperature lockout. The TEMP_LO output retains the last
value until it is reset by using the binary input RESET_LO. Hysteresis type
comparators have been used with the setting for relative and absolute hysteresis.
The binary input BLK_ALM can be used to block the alarms, and the BLOCK
input can block both alarms and the lockout indication.

17.3.7 Technical data

Table 713: SSIMG Technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Pressure alarm level 1.00-100.00 10.0% of set value
Pressure lockout level 1.00-100.00 10.0% of set value
Temperature alarm level -40.00-200.00 2.5% of set value
Temperature lockout level -40.00-200.00 2.5% of set value
Time delay for pressure alarm (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250ms whichever is
greater
Reset time delay for pressure (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250ms whichever is
alarm greater
Time delay for pressure lockout (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for temperature (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250ms whichever is
alarm greater
Reset time delay for (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250ms whichever is
temperature alarm greater
Time delay for temperature (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250ms whichever is
lockout greater

17.4 Liquid medium supervision SSIML

17.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Liquid medium supervision SSIML - 71

1020
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

17.4.2 Functionality
Liquid medium supervision SSIML is used for monitoring the circuit breaker
condition. Binary information based on the oil level in the circuit breaker is used as
input signals to the function. In addition, the function generates alarms based on
received information.

17.4.3 Function block

SSIML
BLOCK LEVEL
BLK_ALM LVL_ALM
LEVEL LVL_LO
TEMP TEMP
LVL_ALM TEMP_ALM
LEVEL_LO TEMP_LO
SET_L_LO
SET_T_LO
RESET_LO

IEC09000128-1-en.vsd
IEC09000128 V1 EN

Figure 497: SSIML function block

17.4.4 Signals

Table 714: SSIML Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms
LEVEL REAL 0.0 Level input from CB
TEMP REAL 0.0 Temperature of the insulation medium from CB
LVL_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Level alarm signal
LEVEL_LO BOOLEAN 0 Level lockout signal
SET_L_LO BOOLEAN 0 Set level lockout
SET_T_LO BOOLEAN 0 Set temperature lockout
RESET_LO BOOLEAN 0 Reset level and temperature lockout

Table 715: SSIML Output signals

Name Type Description
LEVEL REAL Level service value
LVL_ALM BOOLEAN Level below alarm level
LVL_LO BOOLEAN Level below lockout level
TEMP REAL Temperature of the insulation medium
TEMP_ALM BOOLEAN Temperature above alarm level
TEMP_LO BOOLEAN Temperature above lockout level

1021
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

17.4.5 Settings
Table 716: SSIML Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
LevelAlmLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 5.00 Alarm setting for level
LevelLOLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 3.00 Level lockout setting
TempAlarmLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature alarm level setting of the
medium
TempLOLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature lockout level of the medium
tLevelAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for level alarm
tLevelLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for level lockout indication
tTempAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperature alarm
tTempLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperture lockout
tResetLevelAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for level alarm
tResetLevelLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for level lockout
tResetTempLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture lockout
tResetTempAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture alarm

17.4.6 Operation principle

Liquid medium supervision SSIML is used to monitor the oil level in the circuit
breaker. Binary inputs of oil level LVL_ALM, LEVEL_LO and oil level signal
LEVEL are taken into account to initiate the alarms LVL_ALM and LVL_LO.
When LEVEL is less than LevelAlmLimit or binary signal from CB LVL_ALM is
high, then the oil level indication alarm, LVL_ALM will be initiated. Similarly, if
oil level input LEVEL is less than LevelLOLimit or binary signal from CB
LVL_LO is high or temperature input TEMP is above lockout level TempLOLimit,
then the oil level indication lockout, LVL_LO will be initiated.

There may be sudden change in oil level for a very small time, for which the
function need not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays tLevelAlarm or
tLevelLockOut have been included. If the oil level goes below the settings for
more than these time delays, then only the corresponding alarm LVL_ALM or
lockout LVL_LO will be initiated. The SET_L_LO binary input is used for setting
the gas pressure lockout. The LVL_LO output retains the last value until it is reset
by using the binary input RESET_LO. Hysteresis type comparators have been used
with the setting for relative and absolute hysteresis. The binary input BLK_ALM
can be used for blocking the alarms, and the BLOCK input can block both alarms
and the lockout indication.

Temperature of the medium is available from the input signal of temperature. The
signal is monitored to detect high temperature.

1022
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

When temperature input TEMP is greater than TempAlarmLimit, then temperature

alarm TEMP_ALM will be initiated. Similarly, if temperature input TEMP is
greater than TempLOLimit, then TEMP_LO will be initiated.

There may be sudden change in temperature of the medium for a very small time,
for which the function need not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays
tTempAlarm or tTempLockOuthave been included. If the temperature goes above
the settings for more than these time delays, then only the corresponding alarm
TEMP_ALM or lockout TEMP_LO will be initiated. The SET_T_LO binary input
is used for setting the temperature lockout. The TEMP_LO output retains the last
value until it is reset by using the binary input RESET_LO. Hysteresis type
comparators have been used with the setting for relative and absolute hysteresis.
The binary input BLK_ALM can be used for blocking the alarms, and the BLOCK
input can block both alarms and the lockout indication.

17.4.7 Technical data

Table 717: SSIMLTechnical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Oil alarm level 1.00-100.00 10.0% of set value
Oil lockout level 1.00-100.00 10.0% of set value
Temperature alarm level -40.00-200.00 2.5% of set value
Temperature lockout level -40.00-200.00 2.5% of set value
Time delay for oil alarm (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250ms whichever is
greater
Reset time delay for oil alarm (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for oil lockout (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for temperature (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250ms whichever is
alarm greater
Reset time delay for (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250ms whichever is
temperature alarm greater
Time delay for temperature (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250ms whichever is
lockout greater

17.5 Breaker monitoring SSCBR

17.5.1 Identification

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Breaker monitoring SSCBR - -

1023
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

17.5.2 Functionality
The breaker monitoring function SSCBR is used to monitor different parameters of
the breaker condition. The breaker requires maintenance when the number of
operations reaches a predefined value. For a proper functioning of the circuit
breaker, it is essential to monitor the circuit breaker operation, spring charge
indication or breaker wear, travel time, number of operation cycles and estimate the
accumulated energy during arcing periods.

17.5.3 Function block

SSCBR
I3P* OPENPOS
BLOCK CLOSEPOS
BLKALM INVDPOS
TRIND TRCMD
POSOPEN TRVTOPAL
POSCLOSE TRVTCLAL
PRESALM OPERALM
PRESLO OPERLO
SPRCHRST CBLIFEAL
SPRCHRD MONALM
RSTCBWR IPOWALPH
RSTTRVT IPOWLOPH
RSTIPOW SPCHALM
RSTSPCHT GPRESALM
GPRESLO

IEC13000231-2-en.vsd
IEC13000231 V2 EN

Figure 498: SSCBR function block

17.5.4 Signals
Table 718: SSCBR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarm and lockout indication
BLKALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms
TRIND BOOLEAN 0 Trip command from trip circuit
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
PRESALM BOOLEAN 0 Pressure alarm indication from CB
PRESLO BOOLEAN 0 Pressure lockout indication from CB
SPRCHRST BOOLEAN 0 CB spring charging started indication signal
SPRCHRD BOOLEAN 0 CB spring charged indication signal
RSTCBWR BOOLEAN 0 Reset of CB remaining life and operation counter
RSTTRVT BOOLEAN 0 Reset of CB closing and opening travel times
RSTIPOW BOOLEAN 0 Reset of accumulated I^CurrExponent
RSTSPCHT BOOLEAN 0 Reset of CB spring charging time

1024
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Table 719: SSCBR Output signals

Name Type Description
OPENPOS BOOLEAN CB is in open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN CB is in closed position
INVDPOS BOOLEAN CB is in Invalid Position
TRCMD BOOLEAN Open command issued to CB
TRVTOPAL BOOLEAN CB open travel time exceeded set value
TRVTCLAL BOOLEAN CB close travel time exceeded set value
OPERALM BOOLEAN Number of CB operations exceeds alarm limit
OPERLO BOOLEAN Number of CB operations exceeds lockout limit
CBLIFEAL BOOLEAN Remaining life of CB reduced to Life alarm level
MONALM BOOLEAN CB 'not operated for long time' alarm
IPOWALPH BOOLEAN Accum I^CurrExponent integr over CB open
travel time exceeds alarm limit
IPOWLOPH BOOLEAN Accum I^CurrExponent integr over CB open
travel time exceeds lockout limit
SPCHALM BOOLEAN Spring charging time has crossed the set value
GPRESALM BOOLEAN Pressure below alarm level
GPRESLO BOOLEAN Pressure below lockout level

17.5.5 Settings
Table 720: SSCBR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
PhSel Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Phase selection
Phase L2
Phase L3
RatedOperCurr 100.00 - 5000.00 A 0.01 1000.00 Rated operating current of the breaker
OperNoRated 1 - 99999 - 1 10000 Number of operations possible at rated
current
RatedFltCurr 500.00 - 99999.99 A 0.01 5000.00 Rated fault current of the breaker
OperNoFault 1 - 10000 - 1 1000 Number of operations possible at rated
fault current
tTrOpenAlm 0.000 - 0.200 s 0.001 0.040 Alarm level for open travel time
tTrCloseAlm 0.000 - 0.200 s 0.001 0.040 Alarm level for close travel time
OperAlmLevel 0 - 9999 - 1 200 Alarm level for number of operations
OperLOLevel 0 - 9999 - 1 300 Lockout level for number of operations
AccSelCal Aux Contact - - Trip Signal Accumulated energy calculation selection
Trip Signal
Table continues on next page

1025
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CurrExponent 0.50 - 3.00 - 0.01 2.00 Current exponent value used for energy
calculation
AccStopCurr 5.00 - 100.00 %IB 0.01 10.00 RMS current level below which energy
accumulation stops
AlmAccCurrPwr 0.00 - 20000.00 - 0.01 2500.00 Alarm level for accumulated
I^CurrExponent integrated over CB open
travel time
LOAccCurrPwr 0.00 - 20000.00 - 0.01 2500.00 Lockout level for accumulated
I^CurrExponent integrated over CB open
travel time
SpChAlmTime 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 1.00 Alarm level for spring charging time
InitCBRemLife 1 - 99999 - 1 10000 Initial value for remaining life estimates
InactiveAlDays 0 - 9999 Day 1 2000 Alarm level for inactive days counter

Table 721: SSCBR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
OpenTimeCorr -0.100 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.010 Correction for open travel time
CloseTimeCorr -0.100 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.010 Correction for close travel time
DirCoef -3.00 - -0.50 - 0.01 -1.50 Directional coefficient for CB life
calculation
CBLifeAlmLevel 1 - 99999 - 1 5000 Alarm level for CB remaining life
ContTrCorr -0.010 - 0.010 s 0.001 0.005 Correction for time difference in auxiliary
and main contacts open time
OperTimeDelay 0.000 - 0.200 s 0.001 0.020 Time delay between change of status of
trip output and start of main contact
separation
tDGasPresAlm 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.10 Time delay for gas pressure alarm
tDGasPresLO 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.10 Time delay for gas pressure lockout
InitCounterVal 0 - 9999 - 1 0 Initial value for number of operations
InitAccCurrPwr 0.00 - 9999.99 - 0.01 0.00 Initial value for accum I^CurrExponent
integr over CB open travel time value
InitInactDays 0 - 9999 Day 1 0 Initial value for inactive days
InactiveAlHrs 0 - 23 Hour 1 0 Alarm time for inactive days counter in
hours

1026
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

17.5.6 Monitored data

Table 722: SSCBR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TTRVOP REAL - ms Travel time of the CB
during opening operation
TTRVCL REAL - ms Travel time of the CB
during closing operation
NOOPER INTEGER - - Number of CB operation
cycle
CBLIFEPH INTEGER - - CB Remaining life of
respective phase
INADAYS INTEGER - - The number of days CB
has been inactive
IPOWPH REAL - - Accumulated
I^CurrExponent
integrated over CB open
travel time
SPCHT REAL - s The charging time of the
CB spring
IRMSOUT REAL - - Service value output for
rms phase current input

17.5.7 Operation principle

The breaker monitoring function includes metering and monitoring subfunctions.
The subfunctions can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are On and Off.

The operation of the subfunctions is described by the module diagram as shown in

Figure 499. All the modules in the diagram are explained in subsequent sections.

1027
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

I3P-ILRMSPH
POSCLOSE TTRVOP
POSOPEN CB Contact Travel TTRVCL
BLOCK Time TRVTOPAL
BLKALM TRVTCLAL
RSTTRVT

OPENPOS

CB Status CLOSEPOS
INVDPOS

CBLIFEAL
Remaining Life of CB
CBLIFEPH
RSTCBWR

TRCMD

Accumulated IPOWALPH
energy
I3P-IL IPOWLOPH
TRIND
IPOWPH
RSTIPOW

CB Operation OPERALM
Cycles NOOPER

CB Operation MONALM
Monitoring INADAYS

SPCHALM
SPRCHRST CB Spring Charge SPCHT
SPRCHRD Monitoring
RSTSPCHT

CB Gas Pressure GPRESALM

PRESALM Indication GPRESLO
PRESLO
IEC12000624-3-en.vsd
IEC12000624 V3 EN

Figure 499: Functional module diagram of breaker monitoring

1028
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

17.5.7.1 Circuit breaker contact travel time

The circuit breaker contact travel time subfunction calculates the breaker contact
travel time for opening and closing operations. The operation of the breaker contact
travel time measurement is described in Figure 500.

POSCLOSE TTRVOP
Contact travel
POSOPEN time TTRVCL
calculation
RSTTRVT

TRVTOPAL
Alarm limit
BLOCK check TRVTCLAL
BLKALM
IEC12000615-2-en.vsd
IEC12000615 V2 EN

Figure 500: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker contact travel time

Contact travel time calculation

The contact travel time of the breaker is calculated from the time between the state
of change of auxiliary contacts. The opening travel time is measured between the
opening of the POSCLOSE and closing of the POSOPEN auxiliary contacts.
Similarly, the closing travel time is measured between the opening of the
POSOPEN and closing of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contacts. A compensation
factor has been added to consider the time difference between auxiliary contact
operation and the actual physical opening of the breaker main contact.

Main Contact

0
POSCLOSE

POSOPEN

t1 tOpen t2 t3 tClose t4

tTravelOpen = tOpen + t1 + t2 tTravelClose = tClose + t3 + t4

IEC12000616_1_en.vsd

IEC12000616 V1 EN

Figure 501: Travel time calculation

There is a time difference t1 between the start of the main contact opening and the
opening of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contact. Similarly, there is a time difference t2
between the time when the POSOPEN auxiliary contact opens and the main contact
is completely open. Therefore, a correction factor needs to be added to get the
actual opening time. This factor is added with the OpenTimeCorr (t1+t2) setting.

1029
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

The closing time is calculated by adding the value set with the CloseTimeCorr
(t3+t4) setting to the measured closing time.

The last measured opening travel time (TTRVOP) and the closing travel time
(TTRVCL) are given as service values.

The values can be reset using the Clear menu on the LHMI or by activation the
input RSTCBWR.

Alarm limit check

When the measured opening travel time is longer than the value set in the
tTrOpenAlm setting, the TRVTOPAL output is activated. Similarly, when the
measured closing travel time is longer than the value set in the tTrCloseAlm setting,
the TRVTCLAL output is activated.

It is also possible to block the TRVTCLAL and TRVTOPAL alarm signals by

activating the BLOCK input.

17.5.7.2 Circuit breaker status

The circuit breaker status subfunction monitors the position of the circuit breaker,
that is, whether the breaker is in the open, closed or error position. The operation is
described in Figure 502.

Phase current
I3P-ILRMSPH
check

OPENPOS
Contact
POSCLOSE position CLOSEPOS
indicator
POSOPEN INVDPOS

IEC12000613-3-en.vsd

IEC12000613 V3 EN

Figure 502: Functional module diagram for monitoring circuit breaker status

Phase current check

The module compares the phase current I3P-ILRMSPH to the AccStopCurr setting.
If the current in the selected phase exceeds the set level, it is reported to the contact
position indicator module as closed circuit breaker.

Contact position indicator

The circuit breaker status is open when the auxiliary input contact POSCLOSE is
low, the POSOPEN input is high and the phase current is less than the setting
AccStopCurr value. The circuit breaker is closed when the POSOPEN input is low
and the POSCLOSE input is high. The breaker is in the error state if both auxiliary

1030
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

contacts have the same value or if the auxiliary input contact POSCLOSE is low
and the POSOPEN input is high but the current is above the setting AccStopCurr.

The status of the breaker is indicated with the binary outputs OPENPOS,
CLOSEPOS and INVDPOS for open, closed and error position respectively.

17.5.7.3 Remaining life of circuit breaker

The Remaining life of circuit breaker subfunction is used to give an indication on

the wear and tear of the circuit breaker. Every time the breaker operates, the life of
the circuit breaker reduces due to wear. The breaker wear depends on the
interrupted current. The remaining life of the breaker is estimated from the circuit
breaker trip curve provided by the manufacturer. The remaining life is decreased
by at least one when the circuit breaker is opened. The operation of the remaining
life of circuit breaker subfunction is described in Figure 503.

I3P-ILRMSPH
CB remaining CBLIFEPH
POSCLOSE life estimation

RSTCBWR

Alarm limit
BLOCK CBLIFEAL
Check
BLKALM

IEC12000620-3-en.vsd
IEC12000620 V3 EN

Figure 503: Functional module diagram for estimating the life of the circuit
breaker

Circuit breaker remaining life estimation

If the interrupted current is less than the rated operating current set using the
RatedOperCurr setting, the remaining operations of the breaker are reduced by one
operation. If the interrupted current is more than the rated fault current set using the
RatedFltCurr setting, the remaining operations of the circuit breaker are reduced
by the set OperNoRated by divided by the set OperNoFault value. If the tripping
current is between these two values, the remaining life of the circuit breaker is
calculated based on the maintenance curve equation given by the manufacturer.
The OperNoRated parameter sets the number of operations the breaker can perform
at the rated current. The OperNoFault parameter sets the number of operations the
breaker can perform at the rated fault current.

Alarm limit check

When the remaining life of a circuit breaker phase drops below the
CBLifeAlmLevel setting, the life alarm CBLIFEAL is activated.

It is possible to deactivate the CBLIFEAL alarm signal by activating the binary

input BLKALM.

1031
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

The old circuit breaker operation counter value can be used by adding the value to
the InitCBRemLife parameter. The value can be reset using the Clear menu from
LHMI or by activating the input RSTCBWR.

17.5.7.4 Accumulated energy

The Accumulated energy subfunction calculates the accumulated energy (Iyt) based
on current samples, where the setting CurrExponent (y) ranges from 0.5 to 3.0. The
operation is described in Figure 504.

The TRCMD output is enabled when either of the trip indications from the trip coil
circuit TRIND is high or the breaker status is OPENPOS.

I3P-IL
TRCMD
I3P-ILRMSPH Accumulated
POSCLOSE energy
calculation IPOWPH
TRIND

LRSTIPOW

IPOWALPH
Alarm limit
BLOCK Check IPOWLOPH
BLKALM

IEC12000619-3-en.vsd
IEC12000619 V3 EN

Figure 504: Functional module diagram for estimating accumulated energy

Accumulated energy calculation

Accumulated energy can be calculated either with TRIND or POSCLOSE by
selecting the AccSelCal parameter value accordingly.

The calculation is initiated with the POSCLOSE or TRIND input events. It ends
when the RMS current is lower than the AccStopCurr setting.

1032
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Main Contact Main Contact

close close

open open
POSCLOSE 1 POSCLOSE 1

0 0

Energy Energy
Accumulation Accumulation
starts starts

ContTrCorr ContTrCorr
(Negative) (Positive)
IEC12000618_1_en.vsd
IEC12000618 V1 EN

Figure 505: Significance of correction factor setting

The ContTrCorr setting is used to determine the accumulated energy in relation to

the time the main contact opens. If the setting is positive, the calculation of energy
starts after the auxiliary contact has opened and the delay equal to the value of the
ContTrCorr setting has passed. When the setting is negative, the calculation starts
in advance by the correction time in relation to when the auxiliary contact opened.

Accumulated energy can also be calculated by using the change of state of the trip
output. TRIND is used to get the instance of the trip output and the time delay
between the trip initiation and the opening of the main contact is introduced by the
setting OperTimeDelay.

The accumulated energy output IPOWPH is provided as a service value. The value
can be reset by enabling RSTIPOW through LHMI or by activating the input
RSTIPOW.

Alarm limit check

The IPOWALPH alarm is activated when the accumulated energy exceeds the set
value AlmAccCurrPwr.

IPOWLOPH is activated when the accumulated energy exceeds the limit of the
LOAccCurrPwr setting.

The IPOWALPH and IPOWLOPH outputs can be blocked by activating the binary
input BLOCK.

17.5.7.5 Circuit breaker operation cycles

The circuit breaker operation cycles subfunction counts the number of closing-
opening sequences of the breaker. The operation counter value is updated after
each closing-opening sequence. The operation is described in Figure 506.

1033
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

POSCLOSE
Operation
POSOPEN NOOPER
counter
RSTCBWR

OPERALM
Alarm limit
BLOCK
Check
OPERLO
BLKALM
IEC12000617 V2 EN

Figure 506: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker operation cycles

Operation counter
The operation counter counts the number of operations based on the state of change
of the auxiliary contact inputs POSCLOSE and POSOPEN.

The number of operations NOOPER is given as a service value. The old circuit
breaker operation counter value can be used by adding the value to the
InitCounterVal parameter and can be reset by Clear CB wear in the Clear menu on
the LHMI or activating the input RSTCBWR.

Alarm limit check

OPERALM is generated when the number of operations exceeds the set value of the
OperAlmLevel threshold setting.

If the number of operations increases and exceeds the limit value set with the
OperLOLevel setting, the OPERLO output is activated.

The binary outputs OPERALM and OPERALO are deactivated when the BLOCK
input is activated.

17.5.7.6 Circuit breaker operation monitoring

The circuit breaker operation monitoring subfunction indicates the inactive days of
the circuit breaker and gives an alarm when the number of days exceed the set
level. The operation of the circuit breaker operation monitoring is shown in Figure
507.

POSCLOSE
Inactive timer INADAYS
POSOPEN

Alarm limit MONALM

BLOCK
Check
BLKALM
IEC12000614 V2 EN

Figure 507: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker operation monitoring

1034
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Inactive timer
The Inactive timer module calculates the number of days the circuit breaker has
remained in the same open or closed state. The value is calculated by monitoring
the states of the POSOPEN and POSCLOSE auxiliary contacts.

The number of inactive days INADAYS is available as a service value. The initial
number of inactive days is set using the InitInactDays parameter.

Alarm limit check

MONALM is initiated when the number of inactive days and hours exceed the limit
value defined by the InactiveAlDays and InactivAlHrs setting. The alarm signal
MONALM can be blocked by activating the binary inputs BLOCK and BLKALM.

17.5.7.7 Circuit breaker spring charge monitoring

The circuit breaker spring charge monitoring subfunction calculates the spring
charging time. The operation is described in Figure 508.

SPRCHRST
Spring charging
SPRCHRD time SPCHT
measurement
RSTSPCHT

Alarm limit
BLOCK SPCHALM
Check
BLKALM

IEC12000621 V2 EN

Figure 508: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker spring charge
indication

Spring charging time measurement

The binary input SPRCHRST indicates the start of circuit breaker spring charging
time. SPRCHRD indicates that the circuit breaker spring is charged. The spring
charging time is calculated from the difference of these two signal timings. Spring
charging indication is described in Figure508.

The last measured spring charging time SPCHT is provided as a service value. The
spring charging time SPCHT can be reset on the LHMI or by activating the input
RSTSPCHT.

Alarm limit check

If the time taken by the spring to charge is more than the value set with the
SpChAlmTime setting, the subfunction generates the SPCHALM alarm.

It is possible to block the SPCHALM alarm signal by activating the BLKALM binary
input.

1035
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

17.5.7.8 Circuit breaker gas pressure indication

The circuit breaker gas pressure indication subfunction monitors the gas pressure
inside the arc chamber. The operation is described in Figure 509.

PRESALM
tDGasPresAlm
BLOCK AND t GPRESALM

BLKALM

tDGasPresLO
PRESLO AND t GPRESLO
IEC12000622 V3 EN

Figure 509: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker gas pressure
indication

When the PRESALM binary input is activated, the GPRESALM output is activated
after a time delay set with the tDGasPresAlm setting. The GPRESALM alarm can
be blocked by activating the BLKALM input.

If the pressure drops further to a very low level, the PRESLO binary input goes
high, activating the lockout alarm GPRESLO after a time delay set with the
tDGasPresLO setting. The GPRESLO alarm can be blocked by activating the
BLOCK input.

The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The alarm signals
from the function can be blocked by activating the binary input BLKALM.

17.5.8 Technical data

Table 723: SSCBR Technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Alarm level for open and close (0 200) ms 2 ms
travel time
Alarm level for number of (0 9999) -
operations
Independent time delay for (0.00 60.00) s 0.2% or 30 ms whichever is
spring charging time alarm greater
Independent time delay for gas (0.00 60.00) s 0.2% or 30 ms whichever is
pressure alarm greater
Independent time delay for gas (0.00 60.00) s 0.2% or 30 ms whichever is
pressure lockout greater

17.6 Event function EVENT

1036
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

17.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Event function EVENT -
S00946 V1 EN

17.6.2 Functionality
When using a Substation Automation system with LON or SPA communication,
time-tagged events can be sent at change or cyclically from the IED to the station
level. These events are created from any available signal in the IED that is
connected to the Event function (EVENT). The event function block is used for
LON and SPA communication.

Analog and double indication values are also transferred through EVENT function.

17.6.3 Function block

EVENT
BLOCK
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9
^INPUT10
^INPUT11
^INPUT12
^INPUT13
^INPUT14
^INPUT15
^INPUT16

IEC05000697-2-en.vsd
IEC05000697 V2 EN

Figure 510: EVENT function block

17.6.4 Signals
Table 724: EVENT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 GROUP 0 Input 1
SIGNAL
INPUT2 GROUP 0 Input 2
SIGNAL
INPUT3 GROUP 0 Input 3
SIGNAL
Table continues on next page

1037
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Type Default Description

INPUT4 GROUP 0 Input 4
SIGNAL
INPUT5 GROUP 0 Input 5
SIGNAL
INPUT6 GROUP 0 Input 6
SIGNAL
INPUT7 GROUP 0 Input 7
SIGNAL
INPUT8 GROUP 0 Input 8
SIGNAL
INPUT9 GROUP 0 Input 9
SIGNAL
INPUT10 GROUP 0 Input 10
SIGNAL
INPUT11 GROUP 0 Input 11
SIGNAL
INPUT12 GROUP 0 Input 12
SIGNAL
INPUT13 GROUP 0 Input 13
SIGNAL
INPUT14 GROUP 0 Input 14
SIGNAL
INPUT15 GROUP 0 Input 15
SIGNAL
INPUT16 GROUP 0 Input 16
SIGNAL

17.6.5 Settings
Table 725: EVENT Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SPAChannelMask Off - - Off SPA channel mask
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
LONChannelMask Off - - Off LON channel mask
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
EventMask1 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 1
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask2 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 2
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
Table continues on next page

1038
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

EventMask3 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 3
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask4 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 4
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask5 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 5
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask6 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 6
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask7 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 7
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask8 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 8
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask9 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 9
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask10 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 10
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask11 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 11
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask12 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 12
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask13 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 13
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
Table continues on next page

1039
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

EventMask14 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 14
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask15 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 15
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask16 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 16
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
MinRepIntVal1 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 1
MinRepIntVal2 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 2
MinRepIntVal3 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 3
MinRepIntVal4 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 4
MinRepIntVal5 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 5
MinRepIntVal6 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 6
MinRepIntVal7 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 7
MinRepIntVal8 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 8
MinRepIntVal9 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 9
MinRepIntVal10 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 10
MinRepIntVal11 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 11
MinRepIntVal12 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 12
MinRepIntVal13 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 13
MinRepIntVal14 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 14
MinRepIntVal15 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 15
MinRepIntVal16 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 16

17.6.6 Operation principle

The main purpose of the event function (EVENT) is to generate events when the
state or value of any of the connected input signals is in a state, or is undergoing a
state transition, for which event generation is enabled.

Each EVENT function has 16 inputs INPUT1 - INPUT16. Each input can be given
a name from the Application Configuration tool. The inputs are normally used to
create single events, but are also intended for double indication events.

EVENT function also has an input BLOCK to block the generation of events.

The events that are sent from the IED can originate from both internal logical
signals and binary input channels. The internal signals are time-tagged in the main
processing module, while the binary input channels are time-tagged directly on the

1040
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

input module. The time-tagging of the events that are originated from internal
logical signals have a resolution corresponding to the execution cyclicity of
EVENT function. The time-tagging of the events that are originated from binary
input signals have a resolution of 1 ms.

The outputs from EVENT function are formed by the reading of status, events and
alarms by the station level on every single input. The user-defined name for each
input is intended to be used by the station level.

All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to
1000 events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the
oldest event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears.

The events are produced according to the set-event masks. The event masks are
treated commonly for both the LON and SPA communication. The EventMask can
be set individually for each input channel. These settings are available:

NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

It is possible to define which part of EVENT function generates the events. This
can be performed individually for the SPAChannelMask and LONChannelMask
respectively. For each communication type these settings are available:

Off
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16

For LON communication the events normally are sent to station level at change. It
is possibly also to set a time for cyclic sending of the events individually for each
input channel.

To protect the SA system from signals with a high change rate that can easily
saturate the event system or the communication subsystems behind it, a quota
limiter is implemented. If an input creates events at a rate that completely consume
the granted quota then further events from the channel will be blocked. This block
will be removed when the input calms down and the accumulated quota reach 66%
of the maximum burst quota. The maximum burst quota per input channel is 45
events per second.

17.7 Disturbance report DRPRDRE

1041
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

17.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Analog input signals A41RADR - -
Disturbance report DRPRDRE - -
Disturbance report A1RADR - -
Disturbance report A2RADR - -
Disturbance report A3RADR - -
Disturbance report A4RADR - -
Disturbance report B1RBDR - -
Disturbance report B2RBDR - -
Disturbance report B3RBDR - -
Disturbance report B4RBDR - -
Disturbance report B5RBDR - -
Disturbance report B6RBDR - -

17.7.2 Functionality
Complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the
secondary system together with continuous event-logging is accomplished by the
disturbance report functionality.

Disturbance report DRPRDRE, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data
of all selected analog input and binary signals connected to the function block with
a, maximum of 40 analog and 96 binary signals.

The Disturbance report functionality is a common name for several functions:

Event list
Indications
Event recorder
Trip value recorder
Disturbance recorder

The Disturbance report function is characterized by great flexibility regarding

configuration, starting conditions, recording times, and large storage capacity.

A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input to the AnRADR or BnRBDR

function blocks, which are set to trigger the disturbance recorder. All connected
signals from start of pre-fault time to the end of post-fault time will be included in
the recording.

Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in the standard Comtrade
format as a reader file HDR, a configuration file CFG, and a data file DAT. The
same applies to all events, which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer. The local

1042
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

HMI is used to get information about the recordings. The disturbance report files
may be uploaded to PCM600 for further analysis using the disturbance handling tool.

17.7.3 Function block

DRPRDRE
DRPOFF
RECSTART
RECMADE
CLEARED
MEMUSED

IEC05000406-3-en.vsd
IEC05000406 V3 EN

Figure 511: DRPRDRE function block

A1RADR
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9
^INPUT10

IEC05000430-3-en.vsd
IEC05000430 V3 EN

Figure 512: A1RADR function block

A4RADR
^INPUT31
^INPUT32
^INPUT33
^INPUT34
^INPUT35
^INPUT36
^INPUT37
^INPUT38
^INPUT39
^INPUT40

IEC05000431-3-en.vsd
IEC05000431 V3 EN

Figure 513: A4RADR function block, derived analog inputs

1043
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

B1RBDR
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9
^INPUT10
^INPUT11
^INPUT12
^INPUT13
^INPUT14
^INPUT15
^INPUT16

IEC05000432-3-en.vsd
IEC05000432 V3 EN

Figure 514: B1RBDR function block, binary inputs, example for B1RBDR -
B6RBDR

17.7.4 Signals
Table 726: DRPRDRE Output signals
Name Type Description
DRPOFF BOOLEAN Disturbance report function turned off
RECSTART BOOLEAN Disturbance recording started
RECMADE BOOLEAN Disturbance recording made
CLEARED BOOLEAN All disturbances in the disturbance report cleared
MEMUSED BOOLEAN More than 80% of memory used

Table 727: A1RADR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
GRPINPUT1 GROUP - Group signal for input 1
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT2 GROUP - Group signal for input 2
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT3 GROUP - Group signal for input 3
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT4 GROUP - Group signal for input 4
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT5 GROUP - Group signal for input 5
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT6 GROUP - Group signal for input 6
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT7 GROUP - Group signal for input 7
SIGNAL
Table continues on next page

1044
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Name Type Default Description

GRPINPUT8 GROUP - Group signal for input 8
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT9 GROUP - Group signal for input 9
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT10 GROUP - Group signal for input 10
SIGNAL

Table 728: A2RADR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
GRPINPUT11 GROUP - Group signal for input 11
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT12 GROUP - Group signal for input 12
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT13 GROUP - Group signal for input 13
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT14 GROUP - Group signal for input 14
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT15 GROUP - Group signal for input 15
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT16 GROUP - Group signal for input 16
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT17 GROUP - Group signal for input 17
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT18 GROUP - Group signal for input 18
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT19 GROUP - Group signal for input 19
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT20 GROUP - Group signal for input 20
SIGNAL

Table 729: A3RADR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
GRPINPUT21 GROUP - Group signal for input 21
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT22 GROUP - Group signal for input 22
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT23 GROUP - Group signal for input 23
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT24 GROUP - Group signal for input 24
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT25 GROUP - Group signal for input 25
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT26 GROUP - Group signal for input 26
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT27 GROUP - Group signal for input 27
SIGNAL
Table continues on next page

1045
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Type Default Description

GRPINPUT28 GROUP - Group signal for input 28
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT29 GROUP - Group signal for input 29
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT30 GROUP - Group signal for input 30
SIGNAL

Table 730: A4RADR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT31 REAL 0 Analog channel 31
INPUT32 REAL 0 Analog channel 32
INPUT33 REAL 0 Analog channel 33
INPUT34 REAL 0 Analog channel 34
INPUT35 REAL 0 Analog channel 35
INPUT36 REAL 0 Analog channel 36
INPUT37 REAL 0 Analog channel 37
INPUT38 REAL 0 Analog channel 38
INPUT39 REAL 0 Analog channel 39
INPUT40 REAL 0 Analog channel 40

Table 731: B1RBDR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 16

1046
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Table 732: B2RBDR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT17 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 17
INPUT18 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 18
INPUT19 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 19
INPUT20 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 20
INPUT21 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 21
INPUT22 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 22
INPUT23 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 23
INPUT24 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 24
INPUT25 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 25
INPUT26 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 26
INPUT27 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 27
INPUT28 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 28
INPUT29 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 29
INPUT30 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 30
INPUT31 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 31
INPUT32 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 32

Table 733: B3RBDR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT33 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 33
INPUT34 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 34
INPUT35 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 35
INPUT36 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 36
INPUT37 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 37
INPUT38 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 38
INPUT39 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 39
INPUT40 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 40
INPUT41 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 41
INPUT42 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 42
INPUT43 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 43
INPUT44 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 44
INPUT45 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 45
INPUT46 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 46
INPUT47 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 47
INPUT48 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 48

1047
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Table 734: B4RBDR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT49 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 49
INPUT50 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 50
INPUT51 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 51
INPUT52 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 52
INPUT53 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 53
INPUT54 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 54
INPUT55 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 55
INPUT56 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 56
INPUT57 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 57
INPUT58 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 58
INPUT59 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 59
INPUT60 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 60
INPUT61 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 61
INPUT62 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 62
INPUT63 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 63
INPUT64 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 64

Table 735: B5RBDR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT65 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 65
INPUT66 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 66
INPUT67 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 67
INPUT68 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 68
INPUT69 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 69
INPUT70 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 70
INPUT71 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 71
INPUT72 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 72
INPUT73 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 73
INPUT74 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 74
INPUT75 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 75
INPUT76 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 76
INPUT77 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 77
INPUT78 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 78
INPUT79 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 79
INPUT80 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 80

1048
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Table 736: B6RBDR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT81 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 81
INPUT82 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 82
INPUT83 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 83
INPUT84 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 84
INPUT85 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 85
INPUT86 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 86
INPUT87 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 87
INPUT88 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 88
INPUT89 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 89
INPUT90 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 90
INPUT91 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 91
INPUT92 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 92
INPUT93 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 93
INPUT94 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 94
INPUT95 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 95
INPUT96 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 96

17.7.5 Settings
Table 737: DRPRDRE Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
PreFaultRecT 0.05 - 9.90 s 0.01 0.10 Pre-fault recording time
PostFaultRecT 0.1 - 10.0 s 0.1 0.5 Post-fault recording time
TimeLimit 0.5 - 10.0 s 0.1 1.0 Fault recording time limit
PostRetrig Off - - Off Post-fault retrig enabled (On) or not (Off)
On
MaxNoStoreRec 10 - 100 - 1 100 Maximum number of stored disturbances
ZeroAngleRef 1 - 30 Ch 1 1 Trip value recorder, phasor reference
channel
OpModeTest Off - - Off Operation mode during test mode
On

1049
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Table 738: A1RADR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation01 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation02 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation03 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation04 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation05 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation06 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation07 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation08 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation09 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation10 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On

Table 739: A1RADR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
NomValue01 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 1
UnderTrigOp01 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 1 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe01 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 1
in % of signal
OverTrigOp01 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 1 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe01 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 1 in
% of signal
NomValue02 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 2
UnderTrigOp02 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 2 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe02 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 2
in % of signal
OverTrigOp02 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 2 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe02 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 2 in
% of signal
NomValue03 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 3
UnderTrigOp03 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 3 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe03 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 3
in % of signal
Table continues on next page

1050
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OverTrigOp03 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 3 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe03 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Overtrigger level for analog channel 3 in
% of signal
NomValue04 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 4
UnderTrigOp04 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 4 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe04 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 4
in % of signal
OverTrigOp04 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 4 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe04 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 4 in
% of signal
NomValue05 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 5
UnderTrigOp05 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 5 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe05 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 5
in % of signal
OverTrigOp05 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 5 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe05 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 5 in
% of signal
NomValue06 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 6
UnderTrigOp06 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 6 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe06 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 6
in % of signal
OverTrigOp06 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 6 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe06 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 6 in
% of signal
NomValue07 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 7
UnderTrigOp07 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 7 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe07 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 7
in % of signal
OverTrigOp07 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 7 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe07 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 7 in
% of signal
NomValue08 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 8
UnderTrigOp08 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 8 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe08 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 8
in % of signal
OverTrigOp08 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 8 (on) or not (off)
Table continues on next page

1051
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OverTrigLe08 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 8 in
% of signal
NomValue09 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 9
UnderTrigOp09 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 9 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe09 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 9
in % of signal
OverTrigOp09 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 9 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe09 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 9 in
% of signal
NomValue10 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 10
UnderTrigOp10 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 10 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe10 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 10
in % of signal
OverTrigOp10 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 10 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe10 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 10
in % of signal

Table 740: A2RADR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation11 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation12 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation13 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation14 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation15 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation16 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation17 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation18 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation19 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation20 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On

1052
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Table 741: A2RADR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
NomValue11 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 11
UnderTrigOp11 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 11 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe11 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 11
in % of signal
OverTrigOp11 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 11 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe11 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 11
in % of signal
NomValue12 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 12
UnderTrigOp12 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 12 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe12 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 12
in % of signal
OverTrigOp12 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 12 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe12 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 12
in % of signal
NomValue13 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 13
UnderTrigOp13 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 13 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe13 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 13
in % of signal
OverTrigOp13 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 13 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe13 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Overtrigger level for analog channel 13
in % of signal
NomValue14 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 14
UnderTrigOp14 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 14 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe14 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 14
in % of signal
OverTrigOp14 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 14 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe14 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 14
in % of signal
NomValue15 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 15
UnderTrigOp15 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 15 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe15 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 15
in % of signal
OverTrigOp15 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 15 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe15 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 15
in % of signal
NomValue16 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 16
Table continues on next page

1053
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

UnderTrigOp16 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 16 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe16 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 16
in % of signal
OverTrigOp16 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 16 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe16 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 16
in % of signal
NomValue17 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 17
UnderTrigOp17 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 17 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe17 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 17
in % of signal
OverTrigOp17 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 17 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe17 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 17
in % of signal
NomValue18 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 18
UnderTrigOp18 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 18 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe18 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 18
in % of signal
OverTrigOp18 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 18 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe18 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 18
in % of signal
NomValue19 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 19
UnderTrigOp19 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 19 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe19 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 19
in % of signal
OverTrigOp19 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 19 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe19 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 19
in % of signal
NomValue20 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 20
UnderTrigOp20 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 20 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe20 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 20
in % of signal
OverTrigOp20 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 20 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe20 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 20
in % of signal

1054
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Table 742: A3RADR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation21 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation22 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation23 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation24 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation25 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation26 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation27 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation28 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation29 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation30 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On

Table 743: A3RADR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
NomValue21 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 21
UnderTrigOp21 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 21 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe21 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 21
in % of signal
OverTrigOp21 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 21 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe21 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 21
in % of signal
NomValue22 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 22
UnderTrigOp22 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 22 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe22 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 22
in % of signal
OverTrigOp22 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 22 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe22 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 22
in % of signal
NomValue23 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 23
UnderTrigOp23 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 23 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe23 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 23
in % of signal
Table continues on next page

1055
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OverTrigOp23 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 23 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe23 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Overtrigger level for analog channel 23
in % of signal
NomValue24 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 24
UnderTrigOp24 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 24 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe24 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 24
in % of signal
OverTrigOp24 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 24 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe24 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 24
in % of signal
NomValue25 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 25
UnderTrigOp25 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 25 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe25 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 25
in % of signal
OverTrigOp25 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 25 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe25 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 25
in % of signal
NomValue26 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 26
UnderTrigOp26 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 26 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe26 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 26
in % of signal
OverTrigOp26 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 26 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe26 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 26
in % of signal
NomValue27 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 27
UnderTrigOp27 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 27 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe27 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 27
in % of signal
OverTrigOp27 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 27 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe27 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 27
in % of signal
NomValue28 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 28
UnderTrigOp28 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 28 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe28 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 28
in % of signal
OverTrigOp28 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 28 (on) or not (off)
Table continues on next page

1056
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OverTrigLe28 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 28
in % of signal
NomValue29 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 29
UnderTrigOp29 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 29 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe29 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 29
in % of signal
OverTrigOp29 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 29 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe29 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 29
in % of signal
NomValue30 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 30
UnderTrigOp30 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 30 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe30 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 30
in % of signal
OverTrigOp30 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 30 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe30 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 30
in % of signal

Table 744: A4RADR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation31 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation32 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation33 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation34 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation35 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation36 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation37 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation38 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation39 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation40 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On

1057
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Table 745: A4RADR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
NomValue31 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 31
UnderTrigOp31 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 31 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe31 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 31
in % of signal
OverTrigOp31 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 31 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe31 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 31
in % of signal
NomValue32 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 32
UnderTrigOp32 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 32 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe32 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 32
in % of signal
OverTrigOp32 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 32 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe32 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 32
in % of signal
NomValue33 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 33
UnderTrigOp33 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 33 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe33 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 33
in % of signal
OverTrigOp33 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 33 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe33 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Overtrigger level for analog channel 33
in % of signal
NomValue34 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 34
UnderTrigOp34 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 34 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe34 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 34
in % of signal
OverTrigOp34 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 34 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe34 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 34
in % of signal
NomValue35 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 35
UnderTrigOp35 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 35 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe35 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 35
in % of signal
OverTrigOp35 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 35 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe35 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 35
in % of signal
NomValue36 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 36
Table continues on next page

1058
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

UnderTrigOp36 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 36 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe36 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 36
in % of signal
OverTrigOp36 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 36 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe36 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 36
in % of signal
NomValue37 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 37
UnderTrigOp37 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 37 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe37 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 37
in % of signal
OverTrigOp37 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 37 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe37 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 37
in % of signal
NomValue38 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 38
UnderTrigOp38 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 38 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe38 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 38
in % of signal
OverTrigOp38 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 38 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe38 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 38
in % of signal
NomValue39 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 39
UnderTrigOp39 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 39 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe39 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 39
in % of signal
OverTrigOp39 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 39 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe39 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 39
in % of signal
NomValue40 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 40
UnderTrigOp40 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 40 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe40 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 40
in % of signal
OverTrigOp40 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 40 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe40 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 40
in % of signal

1059
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Table 746: B1RBDR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigDR01 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED01 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 1
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR02 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED02 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 2
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR03 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED03 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 3
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR04 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED04 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 4
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR05 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED05 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 5
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR06 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED06 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 6
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR07 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED07 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 7
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR08 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED08 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 8
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR09 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
Table continues on next page

1060
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

SetLED09 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 9
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR10 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED10 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 10
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR11 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED11 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 11
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR12 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED12 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 12
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR13 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED13 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 13
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR14 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED14 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 14
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR15 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED15 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 15
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR16 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED16 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 16
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
FunType1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 1 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 1
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType2 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 2 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
Table continues on next page

1061
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

InfNo2 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 2
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType3 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 3 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo3 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 3
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType4 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 4 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo4 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 4
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType5 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 5 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo5 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 5
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType6 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 6 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo6 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 6
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType7 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 7 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo7 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 7
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType8 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 8 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo8 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 8
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType9 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 9 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo9 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 9
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType10 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 10 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo10 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
10 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType11 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 11 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo11 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
11 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType12 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 12 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo12 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
12 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType13 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 13 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo13 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
13 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType14 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 14 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
Table continues on next page

1062
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

InfNo14 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
14 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType15 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 15 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo15 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
15 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType16 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 16 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo16 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
16 (IEC -60870-5-103)

Table 747: B1RBDR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigLevel01 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 1
IndicationMa01 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 1
Show
TrigLevel02 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 2
IndicationMa02 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 2
Show
TrigLevel03 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 3
IndicationMa03 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 3
Show
TrigLevel04 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 4
IndicationMa04 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 4
Show
TrigLevel05 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 5
IndicationMa05 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 5
Show
TrigLevel06 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 6
IndicationMa06 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 6
Show
TrigLevel07 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 7
IndicationMa07 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 7
Show
TrigLevel08 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 8
IndicationMa08 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 8
Show
TrigLevel09 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 9
Table continues on next page

1063
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IndicationMa09 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 9
Show
TrigLevel10 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 10
IndicationMa10 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 10
Show
TrigLevel11 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 11
IndicationMa11 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 11
Show
TrigLevel12 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 12
IndicationMa12 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 12
Show
TrigLevel13 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 13
IndicationMa13 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 13
Show
TrigLevel14 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 14
IndicationMa14 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 14
Show
TrigLevel15 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 15
IndicationMa15 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 15
Show
TrigLevel16 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 16
IndicationMa16 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 16
Show

Table 748: B2RBDR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigDR17 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED17 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 17
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR18 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED18 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 18
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR19 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
Table continues on next page

1064
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

SetLED19 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 19
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR20 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED20 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 20
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR21 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED21 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 21
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR22 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED22 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 22
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR23 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED23 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 23
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR24 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED24 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 24
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR25 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED25 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 25
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR26 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED26 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 26
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR27 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED27 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 27
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
Table continues on next page

1065
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TrigDR28 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED28 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 28
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR29 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED29 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 29
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR30 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED30 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 30
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR31 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED31 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 31
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR32 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED32 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 32
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
FunType17 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 17 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo17 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
17 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType18 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 18 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo18 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
18 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType19 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 19 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo19 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
19 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType20 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 20 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo20 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
20 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType21 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 21 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo21 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
21 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType22 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 22 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
Table continues on next page

1066
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

InfNo22 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
22 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType23 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 23 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo23 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
23 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType24 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 24 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo24 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
24 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType25 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 25 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo25 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
25 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType26 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 26 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo26 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
26 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType27 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 27 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo27 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
27 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType28 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 28 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo28 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
28 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType29 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 29 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo29 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
29 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType30 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 30 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo30 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
30 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType31 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 31 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo31 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
31 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType32 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 32 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo32 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
32 (IEC -60870-5-103)

1067
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Table 749: B2RBDR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigLevel17 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 17
IndicationMa17 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 17
Show
TrigLevel18 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 18
IndicationMa18 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 18
Show
TrigLevel19 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 19
IndicationMa19 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 19
Show
TrigLevel20 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 20
IndicationMa20 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 20
Show
TrigLevel21 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 21
IndicationMa21 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 21
Show
TrigLevel22 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 22
IndicationMa22 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 22
Show
TrigLevel23 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 23
IndicationMa23 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 23
Show
TrigLevel24 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 24
IndicationMa24 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 24
Show
TrigLevel25 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 25
IndicationMa25 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 25
Show
TrigLevel26 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 26
IndicationMa26 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 26
Show
TrigLevel27 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 27
IndicationMa27 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 27
Show
TrigLevel28 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 28
IndicationMa28 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 28
Show
Table continues on next page

1068
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TrigLevel29 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 29
IndicationMa29 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 29
Show
TrigLevel30 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 30
IndicationMa30 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 30
Show
TrigLevel31 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 31
IndicationMa31 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 31
Show
TrigLevel32 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 32
IndicationMa32 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 32
Show

Table 750: B3RBDR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigDR33 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED33 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 33
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR34 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED34 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 34
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR35 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED35 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 35
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR36 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED36 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 36
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR37 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED37 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 37
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
Table continues on next page

1069
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TrigDR38 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED38 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 38
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR39 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED39 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 39
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR40 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED40 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 40
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR41 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED41 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 41
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR42 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED42 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 42
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR43 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED43 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 43
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR44 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED44 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 44
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR45 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED45 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 45
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR46 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
Table continues on next page

1070
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

SetLED46 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 46
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR47 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED47 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 47
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR48 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED48 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 48
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
FunType33 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 33 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo33 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
33 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType34 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 34 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo34 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
34 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType35 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 35 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo35 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
35 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType36 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 36 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo36 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
36 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType37 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 37 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo37 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
37 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType38 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 38 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo38 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
38 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType39 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 39 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo39 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
39 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType40 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 40 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo40 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
40 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType41 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 41 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
Table continues on next page

1071
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

InfNo41 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
41 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType42 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 42 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo42 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
42 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType43 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 43 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo43 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
43 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType44 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 44 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo44 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
44 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType45 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 45 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo45 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
45 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType46 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 46 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo46 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
46 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType47 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 47 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo47 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
47 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType48 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 48 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo48 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
48 (IEC -60870-5-103)

Table 751: B3RBDR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigLevel33 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 33
IndicationMa33 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 33
Show
TrigLevel34 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 34
IndicationMa34 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 34
Show
TrigLevel35 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 35
IndicationMa35 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 35
Show
TrigLevel36 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 36
Table continues on next page

1072
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IndicationMa36 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 36
Show
TrigLevel37 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 37
IndicationMa37 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 37
Show
TrigLevel38 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 38
IndicationMa38 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 38
Show
TrigLevel39 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 39
IndicationMa39 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 39
Show
TrigLevel40 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 40
IndicationMa40 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 40
Show
TrigLevel41 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 41
IndicationMa41 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 41
Show
TrigLevel42 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 42
IndicationMa42 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 42
Show
TrigLevel43 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 43
IndicationMa43 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 43
Show
TrigLevel44 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 44
IndicationMa44 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 44
Show
TrigLevel45 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 45
IndicationMa45 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 45
Show
TrigLevel46 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 46
IndicationMa46 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 46
Show
TrigLevel47 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 47
Table continues on next page

1073
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IndicationMa47 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 47
Show
TrigLevel48 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 48
IndicationMa48 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 48
Show

Table 752: B4RBDR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigDR49 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED49 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 49
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR50 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED50 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 50
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR51 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED51 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 51
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR52 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED52 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 52
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR53 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED53 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 53
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR54 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED54 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 54
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR55 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED55 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 55
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
Table continues on next page

1074
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TrigDR56 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED56 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 56
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR57 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED57 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 57
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR58 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED58 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 58
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR59 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED59 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 59
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR60 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED60 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 60
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR61 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED61 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 61
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR62 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED62 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 62
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR63 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED63 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 63
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR64 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
Table continues on next page

1075
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

SetLED64 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 64
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
FunType49 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 49 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo49 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
49 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType50 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 50 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo50 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
50 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType51 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 51 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo51 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
51 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType52 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 52 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo52 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
52 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType53 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 53 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo53 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
53 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType54 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 54 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo54 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
54 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType55 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 55 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo55 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
55 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType56 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 56 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo56 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
56 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType57 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 57 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo57 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
57 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType58 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 58 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo58 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
58 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType59 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 59 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo59 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
59 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType60 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 60 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
Table continues on next page

1076
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

InfNo60 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
60 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType61 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 61 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo61 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
61 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType62 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 62 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo62 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
62 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType63 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 63 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo63 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
63 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType64 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 64 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo64 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
64 (IEC -60870-5-103)

Table 753: B4RBDR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigLevel49 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 49
IndicationMa49 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 49
Show
TrigLevel50 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 50
IndicationMa50 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 50
Show
TrigLevel51 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 51
IndicationMa51 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 51
Show
TrigLevel52 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 52
IndicationMa52 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 52
Show
TrigLevel53 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 53
IndicationMa53 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 53
Show
TrigLevel54 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 54
IndicationMa54 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 54
Show
TrigLevel55 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 55
Table continues on next page

1077
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IndicationMa55 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 55
Show
TrigLevel56 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 56
IndicationMa56 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 56
Show
TrigLevel57 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 57
IndicationMa57 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 57
Show
TrigLevel58 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 58
IndicationMa58 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 58
Show
TrigLevel59 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 59
IndicationMa59 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 59
Show
TrigLevel60 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 60
IndicationMa60 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 60
Show
TrigLevel61 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 61
IndicationMa61 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 61
Show
TrigLevel62 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 62
IndicationMa62 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 62
Show
TrigLevel63 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 63
IndicationMa63 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 63
Show
TrigLevel64 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 64
IndicationMa64 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 64
Show

1078
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Table 754: B5RBDR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigDR65 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED65 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 65
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR66 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED66 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 66
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR67 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED67 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 67
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR68 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED68 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 68
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR69 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED69 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 69
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR70 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED70 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 70
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR71 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED71 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 71
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR72 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED72 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 72
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR73 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
Table continues on next page

1079
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

SetLED73 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 73
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR74 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED74 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 74
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR75 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED75 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 75
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR76 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED76 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 76
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR77 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED77 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 77
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR78 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED78 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 78
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR79 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED79 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 79
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR80 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED80 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 80
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
FunType65 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 65 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo65 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
65 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType66 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 66 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
Table continues on next page

1080
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

InfNo66 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
66 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType67 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 67 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo67 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
67 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType68 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 68 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo68 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
68 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType69 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 69 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo69 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
69 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType70 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 70 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo70 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
70 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType71 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 71 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo71 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
71 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType72 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 72 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo72 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
72 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType73 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 73 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo73 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
73 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType74 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 74 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo74 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
74 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType75 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 75 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo75 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
75 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType76 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 76 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo76 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
76 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType77 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 77 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo77 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
77 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType78 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 78 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
Table continues on next page

1081
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

InfNo78 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
78 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType79 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 79 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo79 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
79 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType80 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 80 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo80 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
80 (IEC -60870-5-103)

Table 755: B5RBDR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigLevel65 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 65
IndicationMa65 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 65
Show
TrigLevel66 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 66
IndicationMa66 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 66
Show
TrigLevel67 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 67
IndicationMa67 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 67
Show
TrigLevel68 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 68
IndicationMa68 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 68
Show
TrigLevel69 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 69
IndicationMa69 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 69
Show
TrigLevel70 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 70
IndicationMa70 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 70
Show
TrigLevel71 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 71
IndicationMa71 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 71
Show
TrigLevel72 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 72
IndicationMa72 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 72
Show
TrigLevel73 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 73
Table continues on next page

1082
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IndicationMa73 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 73
Show
TrigLevel74 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 74
IndicationMa74 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 74
Show
TrigLevel75 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 75
IndicationMa75 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 75
Show
TrigLevel76 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 76
IndicationMa76 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 76
Show
TrigLevel77 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 77
IndicationMa77 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 77
Show
TrigLevel78 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 78
IndicationMa78 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 78
Show
TrigLevel79 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 79
IndicationMa79 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 79
Show
TrigLevel80 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 80
IndicationMa80 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 80
Show

Table 756: B6RBDR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigDR81 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED81 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 81
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR82 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED82 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 82
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR83 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
Table continues on next page

1083
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

SetLED83 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 83
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR84 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED84 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 84
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR85 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED85 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 85
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR86 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED86 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 86
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR87 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED87 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 87
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR88 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED88 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 88
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR89 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED89 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 89
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR90 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED90 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 90
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR91 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED91 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 91
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
Table continues on next page

1084
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TrigDR92 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED92 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 92
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR93 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED93 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 93
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR94 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED94 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 94
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR95 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED95 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 95
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR96 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED96 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 96
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
FunType81 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 81 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo81 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
81 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType82 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 82 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo82 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
82 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType83 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 83 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo83 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
83 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType84 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 84 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo84 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
84 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType85 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 85 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo85 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
85 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType86 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 86 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
Table continues on next page

1085
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

InfNo86 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
86 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType87 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 87 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo87 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
87 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType88 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 88 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo88 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
88 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType89 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 89 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo89 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
89 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType90 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 90 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo90 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
90 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType91 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 91 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo91 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
91 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType92 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 92 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo92 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
92 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType93 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 93 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo93 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
93 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType94 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 94 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo94 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
94 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType95 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 95 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo95 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
95 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType96 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 96 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo96 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
96 (IEC -60870-5-103)

1086
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Table 757: B6RBDR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigLevel81 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 81
IndicationMa81 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 81
Show
TrigLevel82 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 82
IndicationMa82 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 82
Show
TrigLevel83 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 83
IndicationMa83 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 83
Show
TrigLevel84 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 84
IndicationMa84 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 84
Show
TrigLevel85 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 85
IndicationMa85 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 85
Show
TrigLevel86 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 86
IndicationMa86 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 86
Show
TrigLevel87 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 87
IndicationMa87 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 87
Show
TrigLevel88 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 88
IndicationMa88 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 88
Show
TrigLevel89 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 89
IndicationMa89 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 89
Show
TrigLevel90 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 90
IndicationMa90 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 90
Show
TrigLevel91 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 91
IndicationMa91 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 91
Show
TrigLevel92 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 92
IndicationMa92 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 92
Show
Table continues on next page

1087
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TrigLevel93 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 93
IndicationMa93 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 93
Show
TrigLevel94 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 94
IndicationMa94 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 94
Show
TrigLevel95 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 95
IndicationMa95 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 95
Show
TrigLevel96 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 96
IndicationMa96 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 96
Show

17.7.6 Monitored data

Table 758: DRPRDRE Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
MemoryUsed INTEGER - % Memory usage (0-100%)
UnTrigStatCh1 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 1
activated
OvTrigStatCh1 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 1 activated
UnTrigStatCh2 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 2
activated
OvTrigStatCh2 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 2 activated
UnTrigStatCh3 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 3
activated
OvTrigStatCh3 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 3 activated
UnTrigStatCh4 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 4
activated
OvTrigStatCh4 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 4 activated
UnTrigStatCh5 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 5
activated
OvTrigStatCh5 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 5 activated
Table continues on next page

1088
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

UnTrigStatCh6 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 6
activated
OvTrigStatCh6 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 6 activated
UnTrigStatCh7 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 7
activated
OvTrigStatCh7 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 7 activated
UnTrigStatCh8 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 8
activated
OvTrigStatCh8 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 8 activated
UnTrigStatCh9 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 9
activated
OvTrigStatCh9 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 9 activated
UnTrigStatCh10 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 10
activated
OvTrigStatCh10 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 10 activated
UnTrigStatCh11 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 11
activated
OvTrigStatCh11 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 11 activated
UnTrigStatCh12 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 12
activated
OvTrigStatCh12 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 12 activated
UnTrigStatCh13 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 13
activated
OvTrigStatCh13 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 13 activated
UnTrigStatCh14 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 14
activated
OvTrigStatCh14 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 14 activated
UnTrigStatCh15 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 15
activated
OvTrigStatCh15 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 15 activated
Table continues on next page

1089
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

UnTrigStatCh16 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 16
activated
OvTrigStatCh16 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 16 activated
UnTrigStatCh17 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 17
activated
OvTrigStatCh17 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 17 activated
UnTrigStatCh18 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 18
activated
OvTrigStatCh18 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 18 activated
UnTrigStatCh19 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 19
activated
OvTrigStatCh19 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 19 activated
UnTrigStatCh20 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 20
activated
OvTrigStatCh20 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 20 activated
UnTrigStatCh21 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 21
activated
OvTrigStatCh21 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 21 activated
UnTrigStatCh22 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 22
activated
OvTrigStatCh22 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 22 activated
UnTrigStatCh23 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 23
activated
OvTrigStatCh23 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 23 activated
UnTrigStatCh24 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 24
activated
OvTrigStatCh24 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 24 activated
UnTrigStatCh25 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 25
activated
OvTrigStatCh25 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 25 activated
Table continues on next page

1090
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

UnTrigStatCh26 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 26
activated
OvTrigStatCh26 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 26 activated
UnTrigStatCh27 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 27
activated
OvTrigStatCh27 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 27 activated
UnTrigStatCh28 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 28
activated
OvTrigStatCh28 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 28 activated
UnTrigStatCh29 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 29
activated
OvTrigStatCh29 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 29 activated
UnTrigStatCh30 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 30
activated
OvTrigStatCh30 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 30 activated
UnTrigStatCh31 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 31
activated
OvTrigStatCh31 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 31 activated
UnTrigStatCh32 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 32
activated
OvTrigStatCh32 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 32 activated
UnTrigStatCh33 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 33
activated
OvTrigStatCh33 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 33 activated
UnTrigStatCh34 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 34
activated
OvTrigStatCh34 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 34 activated
UnTrigStatCh35 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 35
activated
OvTrigStatCh35 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 35 activated
Table continues on next page

1091
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

UnTrigStatCh36 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 36
activated
OvTrigStatCh36 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 36 activated
UnTrigStatCh37 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 37
activated
OvTrigStatCh37 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 37 activated
UnTrigStatCh38 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 38
activated
OvTrigStatCh38 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 38 activated
UnTrigStatCh39 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 39
activated
OvTrigStatCh39 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 39 activated
UnTrigStatCh40 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 40
activated
OvTrigStatCh40 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 40 activated
FaultNumber INTEGER - - Disturbance fault number

17.7.7 Operation principle

Disturbance report DRPRDRE is a common name for several functions to supply
the operator, analysis engineer, and so on, with sufficient information about events
in the system.

The functions included in the disturbance report are:

Event list (EL)

Indications (IND)
Event recorder (ER)
Trip value recorder(TVR)
Disturbance recorder (DR)

Figure 515 shows the relations between Disturbance Report, included functions
and function blocks. Event list (EL), Event recorder (ER) and Indications (IND)
uses information from the binary input function blocks (BxRBDR). Trip value
recorder (TVR) uses analog information from the analog input function blocks
(AxRADR). Disturbance recorder DRPRDRE acquires information from both
AxRADR and BxRBDR.

1092
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

A1-4RADR Disturbance Report

A4RADR DRPRDRE
Analog signals
Trip value rec

B1-6RBDR Disturbance
recorder

Binary signals B6RBDR

Event list

Event recorder

Indications

IEC09000337-2-en.vsd
IEC09000337 V2 EN

Figure 515: Disturbance report functions and related function blocks

The whole disturbance report can contain information for a number of recordings,
each with the data coming from all the parts mentioned above. The event list
function is working continuously, independent of disturbance triggering, recording
time, and so on. All information in the disturbance report is stored in non-volatile
flash memories. This implies that no information is lost in case of loss of auxiliary
power. Each report will get an identification number in the interval from 0-999.

Disturbance report

Record no. N Record no. N+1 Record no. N+100

General dist. Trip Event Disturbance

Indications Event list
information values recordings recording

en05000161.vsd
IEC05000161 V1 EN

Figure 516: Disturbance report structure

Up to 100 disturbance reports can be stored. If a new disturbance is to be recorded

when the memory is full, the oldest disturbance report is overwritten by the new
one. The total recording capacity for the disturbance recorder is depending of
sampling frequency, number of analog and binary channels and recording time.
Figure 517 shows the number of recordings versus the total recording time tested
for a typical configuration, that is, in a 50 Hz system it is possible to record 100

1093
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

where the average recording time is 3.4 seconds. The memory limit does not affect
the rest of the disturbance report (Event list (EL), Event recorder (ER), Indications
(IND) and Trip value recorder (TVR)).

Number of recordings
100
3,4 s

80 3,4 s 20 analog
96 binary
40 analog
96 binary
60 6,3 s
6,3 s

6,3 s 50 Hz
40
60 Hz
Total recording time

250 300 350 400 s

en05000488.vsd
IEC05000488 V1 EN

Figure 517: Example of number of recordings versus the total recording time

The maximum number of recordings depend on each recordings

total recording time. Long recording time will reduce the number of
recordings to less than 100.

The IED flash disk should NOT be used to store any user files. This
might cause disturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk
space.

Disturbance information
Date and time of the disturbance, the indications, events, fault location and the trip
values are available on the local HMI. To acquire a complete disturbance report the
user must use a PC and - either the PCM600 Disturbance handling tool - or a FTP
or MMS (over 61850) client. The PC can be connected to the IED front, rear or
remotely via the station bus (Ethernet ports).

1094
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

Indications (IND)
Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the total recording time of
the disturbance (not time-tagged), see section "" for more detailed information.

Event recorder (ER)

The event recorder may contain a list of up to 150 time-tagged events, which have
occurred during the disturbance. The information is available via the local HMI or
PCM600, see section "" for more detailed information.

Event list (EL)

The event list may contain a list of totally 1000 time-tagged events. The list
information is continuously updated when selected binary signals change state. The
oldest data is overwritten. The logged signals may be presented via local HMI or
PCM600, see section "" for more detailed information.

Trip value recorder (TVR)

The recorded trip values include phasors of selected analog signals before the fault
and during the fault, see section "" for more detailed information.

Disturbance recorder (DR)

Disturbance recorder records analog and binary signal data before, during and after
the fault, see section "" for more detailed information.

Time tagging
The IED has a built-in real-time calendar and clock. This function is used for all
time tagging within the disturbance report

Recording times
Disturbance report DRPRDRE records information about a disturbance during a
settable time frame. The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report.
Disturbance recorder (DR), event recorder (ER) and indication function register
disturbance data and events during tRecording, the total recording time.

The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:

tRecording = PreFaultrecT + tFault + PostFaultrecT or PreFaultrecT + TimeLimit, depending on

which criterion stops the current disturbance recording

1095
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Trig point
TimeLimit

PreFaultRecT PostFaultRecT

1 2 3

en05000487.vsd
IEC05000487 V1 EN

Figure 518: The recording times definition

PreFaultRecT, 1 Pre-fault or pre-trigger recording time. The time before the fault including the
operate time of the trigger. Use the setting PreFaultRecT to set this time.
tFault, 2 Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set. It continues as long as
any valid trigger condition, binary or analog, persists (unless limited by TimeLimit
the limit time).
PostFaultRecT, 3 Post fault recording time. The time the disturbance recording continues after all
activated triggers are reset. Use the setting PostFaultRecT to set this time.
TimeLimit Limit time. The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording
was triggered. The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger
that does not reset within a reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum
recording time of a recording and prevents subsequent overwriting of already
stored disturbances. Use the setting TimeLimit to set this time.

Analog signals
Up to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the Disturbance recorder
and triggering of the Disturbance report function. Out of these 40, 30 are reserved
for external analog signals from analog input modules (TRM) and line data
communication module (LDCM) via preprocessing function blocks (SMAI) and
summation block (3PHSUM). The last 10 channels may be connected to internally
calculated analog signals available as function block output signals (mA input
signals, phase differential currents, bias currents and so on).

1096
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

SMAI A1RADR
Block AI3P A2RADR
^GRP2L1 AI1 INPUT1 A3RADR
External
analogue ^GRP2L2 AI2 INPUT2
signals ^GRP2L3 AI3 INPUT3
^GRP2N AI4 INPUT4
Type AIN INPUT5
INPUT6
...

A4RADR

INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
Internal analogue signals INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36

...

INPUT40

IEC10000029-1-en.vsd
IEC10000029 V1 EN

Figure 519: Analog input function blocks

The external input signals will be acquired, filtered and skewed and (after
configuration) available as an input signal on the AxRADR function block via the
SMAI function block. The information is saved at the Disturbance report base
sampling rate (1000 or 1200 Hz). Internally calculated signals are updated
according to the cycle time of the specific function. If a function is running at
lower speed than the base sampling rate, Disturbance recorder will use the latest
updated sample until a new updated sample is available.

If the IED is preconfigured the only tool needed for analog configuration of the
Disturbance report is the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT, external signal configuration).
In case of modification of a preconfigured IED or general internal configuration the
Application Configuration tool within PCM600 is used.

The preprocessor function block (SMAI) calculates the residual quantities in cases
where only the three phases are connected (AI4-input not used). SMAI makes the
information available as a group signal output, phase outputs and calculated
residual output (AIN-output). In situations where AI4-input is used as an input
signal the corresponding information is available on the non-calculated output
(AI4) on the SMAI function block. Connect the signals to the AxRADR accordingly.

For each of the analog signals, Operation = On means that it is recorded by the
disturbance recorder. The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation, and
triggers even if operation is set to Off. Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be
used as trigger conditions. The same applies for the current signals.

1097
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

If Operation = Off, no waveform (samples) will be recorded and reported in graph.

However, Trip value, pre-fault and fault value will be recorded and reported. The
input channel can still be used to trig the disturbance recorder.

If Operation = On, waveform (samples) will also be recorded and reported in graph.

The analog signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, but they affect
the entire disturbance report when being used as triggers.

Binary signals
Up to 96 binary signals can be selected to be handled by disturbance report. The
signals can be selected from internal logical and binary input signals. A binary
signal is selected to be recorded when:

the corresponding function block is included in the configuration

the signal is connected to the input of the function block

Each of the 96 signals can be selected as a trigger of the disturbance report

(Operation = Off). A binary signal can be selected to activate the red LED on the
local HMI (SetLED = On/Off).

The selected signals are presented in the event recorder, event list and the
disturbance recording. But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are
used as triggers. The indications are also selected from these 96 signals with local
HMI IndicationMask=Show/Hide.

Trigger signals
The trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report, except the event list,
which runs continuously. As soon as at least one trigger condition is fulfilled, a
complete disturbance report is recorded. On the other hand, if no trigger condition
is fulfilled, there is no disturbance report, no indications, and so on. This implies
the importance of choosing the right signals as trigger conditions.

A trigger can be of type:

Manual trigger
Binary-signal trigger
Analog-signal trigger (over/under function)

Manual trigger
A disturbance report can be manually triggered from the local HMI, PCM600 or
via station bus (IEC 61850). When the trigger is activated, the manual trigger
signal is generated. This feature is especially useful for testing. Refer to the
operator's manual for procedure.

Binary-signal trigger
Any binary signal state (logic one or a logic zero) can be selected to generate a
trigger (Triglevel = Trig on 0/Trig on 1). When a binary signal is selected to

1098
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

generate a trigger from a logic zero, the selected signal will not be listed in the
indications list of the disturbance report.

Analog-signal trigger
All analog signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if they are recorded
in the disturbance recorder or not. The settings are OverTrigOp, UnderTrigOp,
OverTrigLe and UnderTrigLe.

The check of the trigger condition is based on peak-to-peak values. When this is
found, the absolute average value of these two peak values is calculated. If the
average value is above the threshold level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger,
this trigger is indicated with a greater than (>) sign with the user-defined name.

If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage or
undercurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a less than (<) sign with its name.
The procedure is separately performed for each channel.

This method of checking the analog start conditions gives a function which is
insensitive to DC offset in the signal. The operate time for this start is typically in
the range of one cycle, 20 ms for a 50 Hz network.

All under/over trig signal information is available on the local HMI and PCM600.

Post Retrigger
Disturbance report function does not automatically respond to any new trig
condition during a recording, after all signals set as trigger signals have been reset.
However, under certain circumstances the fault condition may reoccur during the
post-fault recording, for instance by automatic reclosing to a still faulty power line.

In order to capture the new disturbance it is possible to allow retriggering

(PostRetrig = On) during the post-fault time. In this case a new, complete
recording will start and, during a period, run in parallel with the initial recording.

When the retrig parameter is disabled (PostRetrig = Off), a new recording will not
start until the post-fault (PostFaultrecT or TimeLimit) period is terminated. If a
new trig occurs during the post-fault period and lasts longer than the proceeding
recording a new complete recording will be started.

Disturbance report function can handle maximum 3 simultaneous disturbance

recordings.

17.7.8 Technical data

Table 759: DRPRDRE technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Pre-fault time (0.059.90) s -
Post-fault time (0.110.0) s -
Limit time (0.510.0) s -
Table continues on next page

1099
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Function Range or value Accuracy

Maximum number of recordings 100, first in - first out -
Time tagging resolution 1 ms See table 931
Maximum number of analog inputs 30 + 10 (external + internally -
derived)
Maximum number of binary inputs 96 -
Maximum number of phasors in the 30 -
Trip Value recorder per recording
Maximum number of indications in a 96 -
disturbance report
Maximum number of events in the 150 -
Event recording per recording
Maximum number of events in the 1000, first in - first out -
Event list
Maximum total recording time (3.4 s 340 seconds (100 recordings) -
recording time and maximum number at 50 Hz, 280 seconds (80
of channels, typical value) recordings) at 60 Hz
Sampling rate 1 kHz at 50 Hz -
1.2 kHz at 60 Hz
Recording bandwidth (5-300) Hz -

17.8 Logical signal status report BINSTATREP

17.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Logical signal status report BINSTATREP - -

17.8.2 Functionality
The Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP) function makes it possible for a
SPA master to poll signals from various other functions.

1100
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

17.8.3 Function block

BINSTATREP
BLOCK OUTPUT1
^INPUT1 OUTPUT2
^INPUT2 OUTPUT3
^INPUT3 OUTPUT4
^INPUT4 OUTPUT5
^INPUT5 OUTPUT6
^INPUT6 OUTPUT7
^INPUT7 OUTPUT8
^INPUT8 OUTPUT9
^INPUT9 OUTPUT10
^INPUT10 OUTPUT11
^INPUT11 OUTPUT12
^INPUT12 OUTPUT13
^INPUT13 OUTPUT14
^INPUT14 OUTPUT15
^INPUT15 OUTPUT16
^INPUT16

IEC09000730-1-en.vsd
IEC09000730 V1 EN

Figure 520: BINSTATREP function block

17.8.4 Signals
Table 760: BINSTATREP Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 16

1101
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Table 761: BINSTATREP Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 1
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 2
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 3
OUTPUT4 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 4
OUTPUT5 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 5
OUTPUT6 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 6
OUTPUT7 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 7
OUTPUT8 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 8
OUTPUT9 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 9
OUTPUT10 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 10
OUTPUT11 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 11
OUTPUT12 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 12
OUTPUT13 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 13
OUTPUT14 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 14
OUTPUT15 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 15
OUTPUT16 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 16

17.8.5 Settings
Table 762: BINSTATREP Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
t 0.0 - 60.0 s 0.1 10.0 Time delay of function

17.8.6 Operation principle

The Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP) function has 16 inputs and 16
outputs. The output status follows the inputs and can be read from the local HMI or
via SPA communication.

When an input is set, the respective output is set for a user defined time. If the
input signal remains set for a longer period, the output will remain set until the
input signal resets.

1102
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

INPUTn

OUTPUTn
t t

IEC09000732-1-en.vsd
IEC09000732 V1 EN

Figure 521: BINSTATREP logical diagram

17.9 Measured value expander block RANGE_XP

17.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Measured value expander block RANGE_XP - -

17.9.2 Functionality
The current and voltage measurements functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU
and VNMMXU), current and voltage sequence measurement functions (CMSQI
and VMSQI) and IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGAPC) are
provided with measurement supervision functionality. All measured values can be
supervised with four settable limits: low-low limit, low limit, high limit and high-
high limit. The measure value expander block (RANGE_XP) has been introduced
to enable translating the integer output signal from the measuring functions to 5
binary signals: below low-low limit, below low limit, normal, above high limit or
above high-high limit. The output signals can be used as conditions in the
configurable logic or for alarming purpose.

17.9.3 Function block

RANGE_XP
RANGE* HIGHHIGH
HIGH
NORMAL
LOW
LOWLOW

IEC05000346-2-en.vsd
IEC05000346 V2 EN

Figure 522: RANGE_XP function block

1103
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

17.9.4 Signals
Table 763: RANGE_XP Input signals
Name Type Default Description
RANGE INTEGER 0 Measured value range

Table 764: RANGE_XP Output signals

Name Type Description
HIGHHIGH BOOLEAN Measured value is above high-high limit
HIGH BOOLEAN Measured value is between high and high-high limit
NORMAL BOOLEAN Measured value is between high and low limit
LOW BOOLEAN Measured value is between low and low-low limit
LOWLOW BOOLEAN Measured value is below low-low limit

17.9.5 Operation principle

The input signal must be connected to a range output of a measuring function block
(CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU, VNMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQ or MVGAPC).
The function block converts the input integer value to five binary output signals
according to table 765.

Table 765: Input integer value converted to binary output signals

Measured supervised below low-low between low between low between high- above high-
value is: limit low and low and high limit high and high high limit
Output: limit limit
LOWLOW High
LOW High
NORMAL High
HIGH High
HIGHHIGH High

17.10 Limit counter L4UFCNT

17.10.1 Identification

17.10.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Limit counter L4UFCNT -

1104
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

17.10.2 Functionality
The 12 Up limit counter L4UFCNT provides a settable counter with four
independent limits where the number of positive and/or negative flanks on the
input signal are counted against the setting values for limits. The output for each
limit is activated when the counted value reaches that limit.

Overflow indication is included for each up-counter.

17.10.3 Operation principle

Limit counter (L4UFCNT) counts the number of positive and/or negative flanks on
the binary input signal depending on the function settings. L4UFCNT also checks
if the accumulated value is equal or greater than any of its four settable limits. The
four limit outputs will be activated relatively on reach of each limit and remain
activated until the reset of the function. Moreover, the content of L4UFCNT is
stored in flash memory and will not be lost at an auxiliary power interruption.

17.10.3.1 Design

Figure 523 illustrates the general logic diagram of the function.

BLOCK

INPUT
Operation
Counter
RESET
VALUE
Overflow
CountType Detection OVERFLOW

OnMaxValue

Limit LIMIT1 4
MaxValue Check

CounterLimit1...4

Error ERROR
Detection
InitialValue

IEC12000625_1_en.vsd
IEC12000625 V1 EN

Figure 523: Logic diagram

The counter can be initialized to count from a settable non-zero value after reset of
the function. The function has also a maximum counted value check. The three
possibilities after reaching the maximum counted value are:

1105
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

Stops counting and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count
Rolls over to zero and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count
Rolls over to zero and activates a pulsed overflow indication for the next count

The pulsed overflow output lasts up to the first count after rolling over to zero, as
illustrated in figure 524.

Overflow indication

Actual value ... Max value -1 Max value Max value +1 Max value +2 Max value +3 ...

Counted value ... Max value -1 Max value 0 1 2 ...

IEC12000626_1_en.vsd
IEC12000626 V1 EN

Figure 524: Overflow indication when OnMaxValue is set to rollover pulsed

The Error output is activated as an indicator of setting the counter limits and/or
initial value setting(s) greater than the maximum value. The counter stops counting
the input and all the outputs except the error output remains at zero state. The error
condition remains until the correct settings for counter limits and/or initial value
setting(s) are applied.

The function can be blocked through a block input. During the block time, input is
not counted and outputs remain in their previous states. However, the counter can
be initialized after reset of the function. In this case the outputs remain in their
initial states until the release of the block input.

17.10.3.2 Reporting

The content of the counter can be read on the local HMI.

Reset of the counter can be performed from the local HMI or via a binary input.

Reading of content and resetting of the function can also be performed remotely,
for example from a IEC 61850 client. The value can also be presented as a
measurement on the local HMI graphical display.

1106
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 17
Monitoring

17.10.4 Function block

L4UFCNT
BLOCK ERROR
INPUT OVERFLOW
RESET LIMIT1
LIMIT2
LIMIT3
LIMIT4
VALUE

IEC12000029-1-en.vsd
IEC12000029 V1 EN

Figure 525: L4UFCNT function block

17.10.5 Signals
Table 766: L4UFCNT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of function

Table 767: L4UFCNT Output signals

Name Type Description
ERROR BOOLEAN Error indication on counter limit and/or initial
value settings
OVERFLOW BOOLEAN Overflow indication on count of greater than
MaxValue
LIMIT1 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to
CounterLimit1
LIMIT2 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to
CounterLimit2
LIMIT3 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to
CounterLimit3
LIMIT4 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to
CounterLimit4
VALUE INTEGER Counted value

1107
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Monitoring

17.10.6 Settings
Table 768: L4UFCNT Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
CountType Positive edge - - Positive edge Select counting on positive and/or
Negative edge negative flanks
Both edges
CounterLimit1 1 - 65535 - 1 100 Value of the first limit
CounterLimit2 1 - 65535 - 1 200 Value of the second limit
CounterLimit3 1 - 65535 - 1 300 Value of the third limit
CounterLimit4 1 - 65535 - 1 400 Value of the fourth limit
MaxValue 1 - 65535 - 1 500 Maximum count value
OnMaxValue Stop - - Stop Select if counter stops or rolls over after
Rollover Steady reaching maxValue with steady or
Rollover Pulsed pulsed overflow flag
InitialValue 0 - 65535 - 1 0 Initial count value after reset of the
function

17.10.7 Monitored data

Table 769: L4UFCNT Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
VALUE INTEGER - - Counted value

17.10.8 Technical data

Table 770: L4UFCNTtechnical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Counter value 0-65535 -
Max. count up speed 30 pulses/s (50% duty cycle) -

1108
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 18
Metering

Section 18 Metering

18.1 Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT

18.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT -

S00947 V1 EN

18.1.2 Functionality
Pulse-counter logic (PCFCNT) function counts externally generated binary pulses,
for instance pulses coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy
consumption values. The pulses are captured by the binary input module and then
read by the PCFCNT function. A scaled service value is available over the station
bus. The special Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities
must be ordered to achieve this functionality.

18.1.3 Function block

PCFCNT
BLOCK INVALID
READ_VAL RESTART
BI_PULSE* BLOCKED
RS_CNT NEW_VAL
SCAL_VAL

IEC14000043-1-en.vsd
IEC09000335 V3 EN

Figure 526: PCFCNT function block

1109
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Metering

18.1.4 Signals
Table 771: PCFCNT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
READ_VAL BOOLEAN 0 Initiates an additional pulse counter reading
BI_PULSE BOOLEAN 0 Connect binary input channel for metering
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets pulse counter value

Table 772: PCFCNT Output signals

Name Type Description
INVALID BOOLEAN The pulse counter value is invalid
RESTART BOOLEAN The reported value does not comprise a complete
integration cycle
BLOCKED BOOLEAN The pulse counter function is blocked
NEW_VAL BOOLEAN A new pulse counter value is generated
SCAL_VAL REAL Scaled value with time and status information

18.1.5 Settings
Table 773: PCFCNT Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
EventMask NoEvents - - NoEvents Report mask for analog events from
ReportEvents pulse counter
CountCriteria Off - - RisingEdge Pulse counter criteria
RisingEdge
Falling edge
OnChange
Scale 1.000 - 90000.000 - 0.001 1.000 Scaling value for SCAL_VAL output to
unit per counted value
Quantity Count - - Count Measured quantity for SCAL_VAL output
ActivePower
ApparentPower
ReactivePower
ActiveEnergy
ApparentEnergy
ReactiveEnergy
tReporting 0 - 3600 s 1 60 Cycle time for reporting of counter value

1110
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 18
Metering

18.1.6 Monitored data

Table 774: PCFCNT Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CNT_VAL INTEGER - - Actual pulse counter
value
SCAL_VAL REAL - - Scaled value with time
and status information

18.1.7 Operation principle

The registration of pulses is done for positive transitions (0->1) on one of the 16
binary input channels located on the Binary Input Module (BIM). Pulse counter
values are sent to the station HMI with predefined cyclicity without reset.

The reporting time period can be set in the range from 1 second to 60 minutes and
is synchronized with absolute system time. Interrogation of additional pulse
counter values can be done with a command (intermediate reading) for a single
counter. All active counters can also be read by the LON General Interrogation
command (GI) or IEC 61850.

Pulse-counter logic (PCFCNT) function in the IED supports unidirectional

incremental counters. That means only positive values are possible. The counter
uses a 32 bit format, that is, the reported value is a 32-bit, signed integer with a
range 0...+2147483647. The counter is reset at initialization of the IED.

The reported value to station HMI over the station bus contains Identity, Scaled
Value (pulse count x scale), Time, and Pulse Counter Quality. The Pulse Counter
Quality consists of:

Invalid (board hardware error or configuration error)

Wrapped around
Blocked
Adjusted

The transmission of the counter value by SPA can be done as a service value, that
is, the value frozen in the last integration cycle is read by the station HMI from the
database. PCFCNT updates the value in the database when an integration cycle is
finished and activates the NEW_VAL signal in the function block. This signal can
be connected to an Event function block, be time tagged, and transmitted to the
station HMI. This time corresponds to the time when the value was frozen by the
function.

The pulse-counter logic function requires a binary input card,

BIMp, that is specially adapted to the pulse-counter logic function.

1111
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Metering

Figure 527 shows the pulse-counter logic function block with connections of the
inputs and outputs.

SingleCmdFunc PulseCounter EVENT

OUTx BLOCK
INVALID INPUT1
SingleCmdFunc Pulse RESTART INPUT2
OUTx INPUT OUT READ_VAL
Pulse length >1s BLOCKED INPUT3
I/O-module NEW_VAL INPUT4
BI_PULSE
Reset counter RS_CNT
NAME
SCAL_VAL IEC EVENT

SMS settings Database

1.Operation = Off/On Pulse counter value:
2.tReporting = 0s...60min 0...2147483647
3.Event Mask = No Events/Report Events
4.Scale = 1-90000
en05000744.vsd
IEC05000744 V1 EN

Figure 527: Overview of the pulse-counter logic function

The BLOCK and READ_VAL inputs can be connected to Single Command logics,
which are intended to be controlled either from the station HMI or/and the local
HMI. As long as the BLOCK signal is set, the pulse counter is blocked. The signal
connected to READ_VAL performs one additional reading per positive flank. The
signal must be a pulse with a length >1 second.

The BI_PULSE input is connected to the used input of the function block for the
Binary Input Module (BIM).

The RS_CNT input is used for resetting the counter.

Each pulse-counter logic function block has four binary output signals that can be
connected to an Event function block for event recording: INVALID, RESTART,
BLOCKED and NEW_VAL. The SCAL_VAL signal can be connected to the IEC
Event function block.

The INVALID signal is a steady signal and is set if the Binary Input Module,
where the pulse counter input is located, fails or has wrong configuration.

The RESTART signal is a steady signal and is set when the reported value does not
comprise a complete integration cycle. That is, in the first message after IED start-
up, in the first message after deblocking, and after the counter has wrapped around
during last integration cycle.

The BLOCKED signal is a steady signal and is set when the counter is blocked.
There are two reasons why the counter is blocked:

The BLOCK input is set, or

The Binary Input Module, where the counter input is situated, is inoperative.

1112
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 18
Metering

The NEW_VAL signal is a pulse signal. The signal is set if the counter value was
updated since last report.

Note, the pulse is short, one cycle.

The SCAL_VAL signal consists of scaled value (according to parameter Scale),

time and status information.

18.1.8 Technical data

Table 775: PCFCNT technical data
Function Setting range Accuracy
Input frequency See Binary Input Module (BIM) -
Cycle time for report of (13600) s -
counter value

18.2 Function for energy calculation and demand

handling ETPMMTR

18.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Function for energy calculation and ETPMMTR W_Varh -
demand handling

18.2.2 Functionality
Measurements function block (CVMMXN) can be used to measure active as well
as reactive power values. Function for energy calculation and demand handling
(ETPMMTR) uses measured active and reactive power as input and calculates the
accumulated active and reactive energy pulses, in forward and reverse direction.
Energy values can be read or generated as pulses. Maximum demand power values
are also calculated by the function. This function includes zero point clamping to
remove noise from the input signal. As output of this function: periodic energy
calculations, integration of energy values, calculation of energy pulses, alarm
signals for limit violation of energy values and maximum power demand, can be
found.

The values of active and reactive energies are calculated from the input power
values by integrating them over a selected time tEnergy. The integration of active

1113
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Metering

and reactive energy values will happen in both forward and reverse directions.
These energy values are available as output signals and also as pulse outputs.
Integration of energy values can be controlled by inputs (STARTACC and
STOPACC) and EnaAcc setting and it can be reset to initial values with RSTACC
input.

The maximum demand for active and reactive powers are calculated for the set
time interval tEnergy and these values are updated every minute through output
channels. The active and reactive maximum power demand values are calculated
for both forward and reverse direction and these values can be reset with RSTDMD
input.

18.2.3 Function block

ETPMMTR
P* ACCINPRG
Q* EAFPULSE
STARTACC EARPULSE
STOPACC ERFPULSE
RSTACC ERRPULSE
RSTDMD EAFALM
EARALM
ERFALM
ERRALM
EAFACC
EARACC
ERFACC
ERRACC
MAXPAFD
MAXPARD
MAXPRFD
MAXPRRD

IEC14000019-1-en.vsd
IEC14000019 V1 EN

Figure 528: ETPMMTR function block

18.2.4 Signals
Table 776: ETPMMTR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
P REAL 0 Measured active power
Q REAL 0 Measured reactive power
STARTACC BOOLEAN 0 Start to accumulate energy values
STOPACC BOOLEAN 0 Stop to accumulate energy values.
RSTACC BOOLEAN 0 Reset of accumulated enery reading
RSTDMD BOOLEAN 0 Reset of maximum demand reading

1114
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 18
Metering

Table 777: ETPMMTR Output signals

Name Type Description
ACCINPRG BOOLEAN Accumulation of energy values in progress
EAFPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated forward active energy pulse
EARPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated reverse active energy pulse
ERFPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated forward reactive energy pulse
ERRPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated reverse reactive energy pulse
EAFALM BOOLEAN Alarm for active forward energy exceed limit in
set interval
EARALM BOOLEAN Alarm for active reverse energy exceed limit in
set interval
ERFALM BOOLEAN Alarm for reactive forward energy exceed limit in
set interval
ERRALM BOOLEAN Alarm for reactive reverse energy exceed limit in
set interval
EAFACC REAL Accumulated forward active energy value in Ws
EARACC REAL Accumulated reverse active energy value in Ws
ERFACC REAL Accumulated forward reactive energy value in
VArS
ERRACC REAL Accumulated reverse reactive energy value in
VArS
MAXPAFD REAL Maximum forward active power demand value for
set interval
MAXPARD REAL Maximum reverse active power demand value for
set interval
MAXPRFD REAL Maximum forward reactive power demand value
for set interval
MAXPRRD REAL Maximum reactive power demand value in
reverse direction

18.2.5 Settings
Table 778: ETPMMTR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
EnaAcc Off - - Off Activate the accumulation of energy
On values
tEnergy 1 Minute - - 1 Minute Time interval for energy calculation
5 Minutes
10 Minutes
15 Minutes
30 Minutes
60 Minutes
180 Minutes
tEnergyOnPls 0.100 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Energy accumulated pulse ON time in
secs
Table continues on next page

1115
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Metering

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tEnergyOffPls 0.100 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.500 Energy accumulated pulse OFF time in
secs
EAFAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MWh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for active forward
accumulated energy value
EARAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MWh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for active reverse
accumulated energy value
ERFAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MVArh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for reactive forward
accumulated energy value
ERRAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MVArh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for reactive reverse
accumulated energy value

Table 779: ETPMMTR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
EALim 0.001 - MWh 0.001 1000000.000 Active energy limit
10000000000.000
ERLim 0.001 - MVArh 0.001 1000.000 Reactive energy limit
10000000000.000
EnZeroClamp Off - - On Enable of zero point clamping detection
On function
LevZeroClampP 0.001 - 10000.000 MW 0.001 10.000 Zero point clamping level at active Power
LevZeroClampQ 0.001 - 10000.000 MVAr 0.001 10.000 Zero point clamping level at reactive
Power
DirEnergyAct Forward - - Forward Direction of active energy flow Forward/
Reverse Reverse
DirEnergyReac Forward - - Forward Direction of reactive energy flow Forward/
Reverse Reverse
EAFPrestVal 0.000 - MWh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for forward active
100000000.000 energy
EARPrestVal 0.000 - MWh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for reverse active
100000000.000 energy
ERFPresetVal 0.000 - MVArh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for forward reactive
100000000.000 energy
ERRPresetVal 0.000 - MVArh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for reverse reactive
100000000.000 energy

18.2.6 Monitored data

Table 780: ETPMMTR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
EAFACC REAL - MWh Accumulated forward
active energy value in Ws
EARACC REAL - MWh Accumulated reverse
active energy value in Ws
ERFACC REAL - MVArh Accumulated forward
reactive energy value in
VArS
Table continues on next page

1116
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 18
Metering

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

ERRACC REAL - MVArh Accumulated reverse
reactive energy value in
VArS
MAXPAFD REAL - MW Maximum forward active
power demand value for
set interval
MAXPARD REAL - MW Maximum reverse active
power demand value for
set interval
MAXPRFD REAL - MVAr Maximum forward
reactive power demand
value for set interval
MAXPRRD REAL - MVAr Maximum reactive power
demand value in reverse
direction

18.2.7 Operation principle

The instantaneous output values of active and reactive power from the
Measurements function CVMMXN are used and integrated over a selected time
tEnergy to measure the integrated energy. Figure 529 shows the overall
functionality of the energy calculation and demand handling function ETPMMTR.
MAXPAFD
RSTDMD
MAXPARD
MAXPRFD
P
MAXPRRD
Zero Clamping Maximum Power
EAFALM
Detection Demand Calculation
Q EARALM
ERFALM
ERRALM

ACCINPRG
EAFPULSE
EARPULSE
ERFPULSE
Energy Accumulation ERRPULSE
STARTACC
Calculation EAFACC
EARACC
STOPACC
ERFACC
ERRACC
RSTACC

IEC13000185-2-en.vsd
IEC13000185 V2 EN

Figure 529: ETPMMTR Functional overview logical diagram

The integration of energy values is enabled by the setting EnaAcc and controlled
by the STARTACC and STOPACC inputs. If the integration is in progress, the
output ACCINPRG is high. Otherwise, it is low. Figure 530 shows the logic of the
ACCINPRG output. ACCINPRG is active when the STARTACC input is active and
the EnaAcc setting is enabled. When the RSTACC input is in the active state, the

1117
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Metering

output ACCINPRG is low even if the integration of energy is enabled. ACCINPRG

is deactivated by activating the STOPACC input.

STOPACC

FALSE
STARTACC T
1
& F ACCINPRG
EnaAcc &

q-1

RSTACC

q-1 = unit delay IEC13000186-4-en.vsd

IEC13000186 V4 EN

Figure 530: ACCINPRG Logic diagram

The accumulated energy values (in MWh and MVArh) are available as service
values and also as pulsed output depending on the ExxAccPlsQty setting, which can
be connected to a pulse counter. Accumulated energy outputs are available for
forward as well as reverse direction. The accumulated energy values can be reset to
initial accumulated energy values (ExxPrestVal) from the local HMI reset menu or
with the input signal RSTACC. Figure 531 shows the logic for integration of energy
in active forward direction. Similarly, the integration of energy in active reverse,
reactive forward and reactive reverse is done.
RSTACC

EAFPrestVal

ACCINPRG

P* (ACTIVE FORWARD)
X
S T
T EAFACC
60.0
F
F

&

q-1

EALim T

q-1 0.0 F

a
a>b
b
-1
q = unit delay
IEC13000187-4-en.vsd
IEC13000187 V4 EN

Figure 531: Logic for integration of active forward energy

1118
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 18
Metering

The energy pulses generated by using internally calculated accumulated energy

values and energy per pulse (ExxAccPlsQty) setting. The accumulated energy
values are divided by the energy-per-pulse value to get the number of pulses. The
number of pulses can be reset to zero by activating RSTACC input or by using the
local HMI reset menu. The pulse on and off time duration is set by the settings
tEnergyOnPls and tEnergyOffPls. Figure 532 shows the logic for pulse output
generation for the integrated energy in the active forward direction. Similarly, the
pulse generation for integrated energy in the active reverse, reactive forward and
reactive reverse is done.
tEnergyOffPls
EAFACC

a Counter q-1
a>b CU
EALim b CV
Rst
tOff
t
R I q-1

0
X
S R I T
EAFPULSE
a TP
a>b F
b
EAFAccPlsQty 0
Counter
CU
CV
RSTACC
Rst

q-1

tEnergyOnPls

q-1 = unit delay IEC13000188-4-en.vsd

IEC13000188 V4 EN

Figure 532: Logic for pulse generation of integrated active forward energy

The maximum demand values for active and reactive power are calculated for the
set time interval tEnergy. The maximum values are updated every minute and
stored in a register available over communication and from outputs MAXPAFD,
MAXPARD, MAXPRFD and MAXPRRD for the active and reactive power forward
and reverse direction. When the RSTDMD input is active from the local HMI reset
menu, these outputs are reset to zero. The energy alarm is activated once the
periodic energy value crosses the energy limit ExLim. Figure 533 shows the logic
of alarm for active forward energy exceeds limit and Maximum forward active
power demand value. Similarly, the maximum power calculation and energy alarm
outputs in the active reverse, reactive forward and reactive reverse is implemented.

1119
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Metering

P (ACTIVE FORWARD)
Average Power
X a EAFALM
tEnergy Calculation a>b
b

EALim

RSTMAXD

0.0 T MAXPAFD
MAX F

q-1
q-1 = unit delay
IEC13000189-4-en.vsd
IEC13000189 V4 EN

Figure 533: Logic for maximum power demand calculation and energy alarm

18.2.8 Technical data

18.2.8.1 Technical data

Table 781:
Function Range or value Accuracy
Energy metering MWh Export/Import, MVarh Input from MMXU. No extra
Export/Import error at steady load

1120
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

Section 19 Station communication

19.1 670 series protocols

Each IED is provided with a communication interface, enabling it to connect to one

or many substation level systems or equipment, either on the Substation
Automation (SA) bus or Substation Monitoring (SM) bus.

Following communication protocols are available:

IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol
LON communication protocol
SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
DNP3.0 communication protocol

Theoretically, several protocols can be combined in the same IED.

19.2 DNP3 protocol

DNP3 (Distributed Network Protocol) is a set of communications protocols used to

communicate data between components in process automation systems. For a
detailed description of the DNP3 protocol, see the DNP3 Communication protocol
manual.

19.3 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

19.3.1 Communication interfaces and protocols

Table 782: Supported station communication interfaces and protocols
Protocol Ethernet Serial
Glass fibre (ST
100BASE-FX LC EIA-485
connector)
IEC 6185081 - -
DNP3
IEC 60870-5-103 -
= Supported

1121
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

When double Ethernet ports are activated, make sure that the two
ports are connected to different subnets. For example: Port 1 has IP-
address 138.227.102.10 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0 and port 2
has IP-address 138.227.103.10 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0

19.3.2 Settings
Table 783: IEC61850-8-1 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
PortSelGOOSE Front - - LANAB Port selection for GOOSE communication
LANAB
LANCD
PortSelMMS Front - - Any Port selection for MMS communication
LANAB
LANCD
Any
ProtocolEdition Ed 1 - - Ed 1 Protocol Edition
Ed 2
RemoteModControl Off - - Off Remote Mode Control
Maintenance
All levels
AllowGOOSESimulation No - - No Allow enabling of GOOSE Simulation
Yes
IEC61850BufTimEnable Disabled - - Enabled Enable BRC buf time behavior
Enabled

19.3.3 Technical data

Table 784: IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol
Function Value
Protocol IEC 61850-8-1
Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX
Protocol IEC 6085103
Communication speed for the IEDs 9600 or 19200 Bd
Protocol DNP3.0
Communication speed for the IEDs 30019200 Bd
Protocol TCP/IP, Ethernet
Communication speed for the IEDs 100 Mbit/s

19.3.4 Generic communication function for Single Point indication

SPGAPC, SP16GAPC

1122
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

19.3.4.1 Functionality

Generic communication function for Single Point indication SPGAPC is used to

send one single logical signal to other systems or equipment in the substation.

19.3.4.2 Function block

SPGAPC
BLOCK
^IN

IEC14000021-1-en.vsd
IEC14000021 V1 EN

Figure 534: SPGAPC function block

SP16GAPC
BLOCK
^IN1
^IN2
^IN3
^IN4
^IN5
^IN6
^IN7
^IN8
^IN9
^IN10
^IN11
^IN12
^IN13
^IN14
^IN15
^IN16

IEC14000020-1-en.vsd
IEC14000020 V1 EN

Figure 535: SP16GAPC function block

19.3.4.3 Signals
Table 785: SPGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN BOOLEAN 0 Input status

Table 786: SP16GAPC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 status
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 status
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 status
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 status
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 status
Table continues on next page

1123
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

Name Type Default Description

IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 status
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 status
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 status
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 status
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 status
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 status
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 status
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 status
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 status
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 status
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 status

19.3.4.4 Settings

The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

19.3.4.5 Monitored data

Table 787: SPGAPC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUT GROUP - - Output status
SIGNAL

Table 788: SP16GAPC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUT1 GROUP - - Output 1 status
SIGNAL
OUT2 GROUP - - Output 2 status
SIGNAL
OUT3 GROUP - - Output 3 status
SIGNAL
OUT4 GROUP - - Output 4 status
SIGNAL
OUT5 GROUP - - Output 5 status
SIGNAL
OUT6 GROUP - - Output 6 status
SIGNAL
OUT7 GROUP - - Output 7 status
SIGNAL
OUT8 GROUP - - Output 8 status
SIGNAL
OUT9 GROUP - - Output 9 status
SIGNAL
Table continues on next page

1124
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

OUT10 GROUP - - Output 10 status
SIGNAL
OUT11 GROUP - - Output 11 status
SIGNAL
OUT12 GROUP - - Output 12 status
SIGNAL
OUT13 GROUP - - Output 13 status
SIGNAL
OUT14 GROUP - - Output 14 status
SIGNAL
OUT15 GROUP - - Output 15 status
SIGNAL
OUT16 GROUP - - Output 16 status
SIGNAL
OUTOR GROUP - - Output status logic OR
SIGNAL gate for input 1 to 16

19.3.4.6 Operation principle

Upon receiving a signal at its input, Generic communication function for Single
Point indication (SPGAPC) function sends the signal over IEC 61850-8-1 to the
equipment or system that requests this signal. To get the signal, PCM600 must be
used to define which function block in which equipment or system should receive
this information.

19.3.5 Generic communication function for Measured Value

MVGAPC

19.3.5.1 Functionality

Generic communication function for Measured Value MVGAPC function is used

to send the instantaneous value of an analog signal to other systems or equipment
in the substation. It can also be used inside the same IED, to attach a RANGE
aspect to an analog value and to permit measurement supervision on that value.

19.3.5.2 Function block

MVGAPC
BLOCK ^VALUE
^IN RANGE

IEC14000022-1-en.vsd
IEC14000022 V1 EN

Figure 536: MVGAPC function block

1125
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

19.3.5.3 Signals
Table 789: MVGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN REAL 0 Analog input value

Table 790: MVGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
VALUE REAL Magnitude of deadband value
RANGE INTEGER Range

19.3.5.4 Settings
Table 791: MVGAPC Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
BasePrefix micro - - unit Base prefix (multiplication factor)
milli
unit
kilo
Mega
Giga
Tera
MV db 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
MV zeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
MV hhLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 900.00 High High limit multiplied with the base
prefix (multiplication factor)
MV hLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 800.00 High limit multiplied with the base prefix
(multiplication factor)
MV lLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 -800.00 Low limit multiplied with the base prefix
(multiplication factor)
MV llLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 -900.00 Low Low limit multiplied with the base
prefix (multiplication factor)
MV min -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 -1000.00 Minimum value multiplied with the base
prefix (multiplication factor)
MV max -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 1000.00 Maximum value multiplied with the base
prefix (multiplication factor)
MV dbType Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
MV limHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)

1126
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

19.3.5.5 Monitored data

Table 792: MVGAPC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
INSTMAGN REAL - - Magnitude of
instantaneous value
VALUE REAL - - Magnitude of deadband
value
RANGE INTEGER 1=High - Range
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low
0=Normal

19.3.5.6 Operation principle

Upon receiving an analog signal at its input, Generic communication function for
Measured Value (MVGAPC) will give the instantaneous value of the signal and the
range, as output values. In the same time, it will send over IEC 61850-8-1 the
value, to other IEC 61850 clients in the substation.

19.3.6 IEC 61850-8-1 redundant station bus communication

Function description LHMI identification IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Parallel Redundancy PRPSTATUS RCHLCCH - -
Protocol Status
Duo driver PRP - - -
configuration

19.3.6.1 Functionality

Redundant station bus communication according to IEC 62439-3 Edition 1 and

IEC 62439-3 Edition 2 are available as options in 670 series IEDs. IEC 62439-3
parallel redundant protocol is an optional quantity and the selection is made at
ordering. Redundant station bus communication according to IEC 62439-3 uses
both port AB and port CD on the OEM module.

19.3.6.2 Function block

PRPSTATUS
LAN-A-Status
LAN-B-Status

IEC09000757-1-en.vsd
IEC09000757 V1 EN

Figure 537: PRPSTATUS function block

1127
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

19.3.6.3 Signals
Table 793: PRPSTATUS Output signals
Name Type Description
PRP-A LINK BOOLEAN PRP-A Link Status
PRP-A VALID BOOLEAN PRP-A Link Valid
PRP-B LINK BOOLEAN PRP-B Link Status
PRP-B VALID BOOLEAN PRP-B Link Valid

19.3.6.4 Settings
Table 794: PRP Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
PRPMode PRP-0 - - PRP-1 PRP Mode
PRP-1
IPAddress 0 - 18 IP 1 192.168.7.10 IP-Address
Address
IPMask 0 - 18 IP 1 255.255.255.0 IP-Mask
Address

19.3.6.5 Monitored data

Table 795: PRPSTATUS Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
AB Beh INTEGER 2=Blocked - AB Link Beh
3=Test
4=Test blocked
5=Off
1=On
CD Beh INTEGER 1=On - CD Link Beh
2=Blocked
3=Test
4=Test blocked
5=Off
PRP Beh INTEGER 2=Blocked - PRP Beh
3=Test
4=Test blocked
5=Off
1=On

19.3.6.6 Principle of operation

The redundant station bus communication (DUODRV) is configured using the

local HMI. The settings for DUODRV are also visible in PST in PCM600.

1128
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

The communication is performed in parallel, that is the same data package is

transmitted on both channels simultaneously. The received package identity from
one channel is compared with data package identity from the other channel, if the
same, the last package is discarded.

PRPSTATUS function block supervise the redundant communication on the two

channels. If no data package has been received on one (or both) channels within the
last 10 s, the output LAN-A-STATUS and/or LAN-B-STATUS is set to 0 which
indicate error.

1129
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

Station Control System

Redundancy
Supervision

Duo

Data Data

Switch A Switch B
1 2 1 2

Data
Data

AB CD IED
Configuration OEM

DUODRV PRPSTATUS

IEC09000758-2-en.vsd
IEC09000758 V2 EN

Figure 538: Redundant station bus

1130
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

19.4 IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol

19.4.1 Introduction
The IEC 61850-9-2LE process bus communication protocol enables an IED to
communicate with devices providing measured values in digital format, commonly
known as Merging Units (MU). The physical interface in the IED that is used for
the communication is the OEM modules (the two port module version) "CD" port.

19.4.2 Function block

The function blocks are not represented in the configuration tool.

The signals appear only in the SMT tool when merging units (MU)
are included in the configuration with the function selector tool. In
the SMT tool they can be mapped to the desired virtual input
(SMAI) of the IED and used internally in the configuration.

19.4.3 Signals

19.4.3.1 Output signals

Table 796: MU1_4I_4U Output signals
Name Type Description
I1 STRING Analogue input I1
I2 STRING Analogue input I2
I3 STRING Analogue input I3
I4 STRING Analogue input I4
U1 STRING Analogue input U1
U2 STRING Analogue input U2
U3 STRING Analogue input U3
U4 STRING Analogue input U4
MUDATA BOOLEAN Fatal error, serious data loss
SYNCH BOOLEAN MU clock synchronized to same clock as IED
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN Sample lost
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN Synchronization lost in MU
TESTMODE BOOLEAN MU in test mode

1131
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

Table 797: MU2_4I_4U Output signals

Name Type Description
I1 STRING Analogue input I1
I2 STRING Analogue input I2
I3 STRING Analogue input I3
I4 STRING Analogue input I4
U1 STRING Analogue input U1
U2 STRING Analogue input U2
U3 STRING Analogue input U3
U4 STRING Analogue input U4
MUDATA BOOLEAN Fatal error, serious data loss
SYNCH BOOLEAN MU clock synchronized to same clock as IED
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN Sample lost
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN Synchronization lost in MU
TESTMODE BOOLEAN MU in test mode

Table 798: MU3_4I_4U Output signals

Name Type Description
I1 STRING Analogue input I1
I2 STRING Analogue input I2
I3 STRING Analogue input I3
I4 STRING Analogue input I4
U1 STRING Analogue input U1
U2 STRING Analogue input U2
U3 STRING Analogue input U3
U4 STRING Analogue input U4
MUDATA BOOLEAN Fatal error, serious data loss
SYNCH BOOLEAN MU clock synchronized to same clock as IED
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN Sample lost
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN Synchronization lost in MU
TESTMODE BOOLEAN MU in test mode

Table 799: MU4_4I_4U Output signals

Name Type Description
I1 STRING Analogue input I1
I2 STRING Analogue input I2
I3 STRING Analogue input I3
I4 STRING Analogue input I4
U1 STRING Analogue input U1
Table continues on next page

1132
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

Name Type Description

U2 STRING Analogue input U2
U3 STRING Analogue input U3
U4 STRING Analogue input U4
MUDATA BOOLEAN Fatal error, serious data loss
SYNCH BOOLEAN MU clock synchronized to same clock as IED
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN Sample lost
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN Synchronization lost in MU
TESTMODE BOOLEAN MU in test mode

Table 800: MU5_4I_4U Output signals

Name Type Description
I1 STRING Analogue input I1
I2 STRING Analogue input I2
I3 STRING Analogue input I3
I4 STRING Analogue input I4
U1 STRING Analogue input U1
U2 STRING Analogue input U2
U3 STRING Analogue input U3
U4 STRING Analogue input U4
MUDATA BOOLEAN Fatal error, serious data loss
SYNCH BOOLEAN MU clock synchronized to same clock as IED
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN Sample lost
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN Synchronization lost in MU
TESTMODE BOOLEAN MU in test mode

Table 801: MU6_4I_4U Output signals

Name Type Description
I1 STRING Analogue input I1
I2 STRING Analogue input I2
I3 STRING Analogue input I3
I4 STRING Analogue input I4
U1 STRING Analogue input U1
U2 STRING Analogue input U2
U3 STRING Analogue input U3
U4 STRING Analogue input U4
MUDATA BOOLEAN Fatal error, serious data loss
SYNCH BOOLEAN MU clock synchronized to same clock as IED
Table continues on next page

1133
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

Name Type Description

SMPLLOST BOOLEAN Sample lost
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN Synchronization lost in MU
TESTMODE BOOLEAN MU in test mode

19.4.4 Settings
Table 802: MU1_4I_4U Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SVId 10 - 34 - 1 ABB_MU0101 MU identifier
SmplGrp 0 - 65535 - 1 0 Sampling group
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite

Table 803: MU1_4I_4U Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SynchMode NoSynch - - Operation Synchronization mode
Init
Operation

Table 804: MU2_4I_4U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SVId 10 - 34 - 1 ABB_MU0102 MU identifier
SmplGrp 0 - 65535 - 1 0 Sampling group
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite

Table 805: MU2_4I_4U Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SynchMode NoSynch - - Operation Synchronization mode
Init
Operation

1134
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

Table 806: MU3_4I_4U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SVId 10 - 34 - 1 ABB_MU0103 MU identifier
SmplGrp 0 - 65535 - 1 0 Sampling group
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite

Table 807: MU3_4I_4U Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SynchMode NoSynch - - Operation Synchronization mode
Init
Operation

Table 808: MU4_4I_4U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SVId 10 - 34 - 1 ABB_MU0104 MU identifier
SmplGrp 0 - 65535 - 1 0 Sampling group
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite

Table 809: MU4_4I_4U Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SynchMode NoSynch - - Operation Synchronization mode
Init
Operation

1135
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

Table 810: MU5_4I_4U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SVId 10 - 34 - 1 ABB_MU0105 MU identifier
SmplGrp 0 - 65535 - 1 0 Sampling group
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite

Table 811: MU5_4I_4U Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SynchMode NoSynch - - Operation Synchronization mode
Init
Operation

Table 812: MU6_4I_4U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SVId 10 - 34 - 1 ABB_MU0106 MU identifier
SmplGrp 0 - 65535 - 1 0 Sampling group
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite

Table 813: MU6_4I_4U Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SynchMode NoSynch - - Operation Synchronization mode
Init
Operation

1136
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

19.4.5 Monitored data

Table 814: MU1_4I_4U Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
MUDATA BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Fatal error, serious data
1=Error loss
SYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - MU clock synchronized
1=Error to same clock as IED
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Sample lost
0=No
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Synchronization lost in
1=Error MU
TESTMODE BOOLEAN 1=Yes - MU in test mode
0=No

Table 815: MU2_4I_4U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
MUDATA BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Fatal error, serious data
1=Error loss
SYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - MU clock synchronized
1=Error to same clock as IED
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Sample lost
0=No
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Synchronization lost in
1=Error MU
TESTMODE BOOLEAN 1=Yes - MU in test mode
0=No

Table 816: MU3_4I_4U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
MUDATA BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Fatal error, serious data
1=Error loss
SYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - MU clock synchronized
1=Error to same clock as IED
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Sample lost
0=No
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Synchronization lost in
1=Error MU
TESTMODE BOOLEAN 1=Yes - MU in test mode
0=No

1137
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

Table 817: MU4_4I_4U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
MUDATA BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Fatal error, serious data
1=Error loss
SYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - MU clock synchronized
1=Error to same clock as IED
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Sample lost
0=No
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Synchronization lost in
1=Error MU
TESTMODE BOOLEAN 1=Yes - MU in test mode
0=No

Table 818: MU5_4I_4U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
MUDATA BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Fatal error, serious data
1=Error loss
SYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - MU clock synchronized
1=Error to same clock as IED
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Sample lost
0=No
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Synchronization lost in
1=Error MU
TESTMODE BOOLEAN 1=Yes - MU in test mode
0=No

Table 819: MU6_4I_4U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
MUDATA BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Fatal error, serious data
1=Error loss
SYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - MU clock synchronized
1=Error to same clock as IED
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Sample lost
0=No
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Synchronization lost in
1=Error MU
TESTMODE BOOLEAN 1=Yes - MU in test mode
0=No

19.4.6 Operation principle

The ABB merging units (MUs) are situated close to primary equipment, like circuit
breakers, isolators, etc. The MUs have the capability to gather measured values
from measuring transformers, non-conventional transducers or both. The gathered
data are then transmitted to subscribers over the process bus, utilizing the IEC
61850-9-2LE protocol.

1138
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

ABB "physical MU" contains up to 3 logical MUs, each capable of sampling 4

currents and 4 voltages.

The IED communicates with the MUs over the process bus via the OEM module
port "CD". For the user, the MU appears in the IED as a normal analogue input
module and is engineered in the very same way.

1139
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

IED

Application

Station Wide
Preprocessing blocks Preprocessing blocks GPS Clock
SMAI SMAI

MU1 MU2
Splitter
Electrical-to-
Optical Converter

1PPS
TRM module OEM Module
CD
110 V 1A 1A

IEC61850-9-2LE

Ethernet Switch

IEC61850-9-2LE

IEC61850-9-2LE

ABB ABB
1PPS 1PPS
Merging Merging
Unit Unit

Combi Combi
CT CT
Sensor Sensor

Conventional VT
en08000072-2.vsd

IEC08000072 V2 EN

Figure 539: Example of signal path for sampled analogue values from MU and
conventional CT/VT

The function has the following alarm signals:

1140
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

MUDATA: Indicates when sample sequence needs to be realigned. that is the

application soon needs to be restarted. The signal is raised to 2 s before the
application is restarted.
SYNCH: Indicates that the time quality of the hardware is out of the set value
from parameter synchAccLevel (1 s, 4 s or unspecified) and the parameter
AppSynch is set to Synch. In case of AppSynch is set to NoSynch the SYNCH
output will never go high.
SMPLLOST: Indicates that more than one sample has been lost/been marked
invalid/ overflow/ been marked failed, and the sample has thereafter been
substituted. When SMPLLOST is high, protection is blocked.
MUSYNCH: Indicates that the MU connected is not synchronized. Received
from quality flag in datastream. No IED setting affects this signal.
TESTMODE: Indicates that the MU connected is in TestMode. Received from
quality flag in datastream. No IED setting affects this signal.

Timeout

TSYNCERR Indicates that there is some timeout on any configured time source or
the time quality is worse than specified in SynchAccLevel. The timeout is
individually specified per time source (PPS, IRIG-B, SNTP etc.) See section
"Time synchronization"

Blocking condition

Blocking of protection functions is indicated by (SAMPLOST is high) or

(MUSYNCH is high and AppSynch is set to Synch) or (SYNCH is high)

Application synch is not required for differential protection based on ECHO mode.
A missing PPS however will lead to a drift between MU and IED. Therefore
protection functions in this case will be blocked.

19.4.7 Technical data

Table 820: IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol
Functions Value
Protocol IEC 61850-9-2LE
Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX

19.5 LON communication protocol

19.5.1 Functionality
An optical network can be used within the substation automation system. This
enables communication with the IED through the LON bus from the operators
workplace, from the control center and also from other terminals.

1141
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

LON communication protocol is specified in LonTalkProtocol Specification

Version 3 from Echelon Corporation and is designed for communication in control
networks. These networks are characterized by high speed for data transfer, short
messages (few bytes), peer-to-peer communication, multiple communication
media, low maintenance, multivendor equipment, and low support costs. LonTalk
supports the needs of applications that cover a range of requirements. The protocol
follows the reference model for open system interconnection (OSI) designed by the
International Standardization Organization (ISO).

In this document the most common addresses for commands and events are
available. For other addresses, refer to section "".

It is assumed that the reader is familiar with LON communication protocol in general.

19.5.2 Settings
Table 821: HORZCOMM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation
On

Table 822: ADE Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation
On
TimerClass Slow - - Slow Timer class
Normal
Fast
TimeDomain Local without DST - - Local with DST Time domain
Local with DST

19.5.3 Operation principle

The speed of the network depends on the medium and transceiver design. With
protection and control devices, fibre optic media is used, which enables the use of
the maximum speed of 1.25 Mbits/s. The protocol is a peer-to-peer protocol where
all the devices connected to the network can communicate with each other. The
own subnet and node number are identifying the nodes (max. 255 subnets, 127
nodes per one subnet).

The LON bus links the different parts of the protection and control system. The
measured values, status information, and event information are spontaneously sent
to the higher-level devices. The higher-level devices can read and write memorized
values, setting values, and other parameter data when required. The LON bus also
enables the bay level devices to communicate with each other to deliver, for
example, interlocking information among the terminals without the need of a bus
master.

1142
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

The LonTalk protocol supports two types of application layer objects: network
variables and explicit messages. Network variables are used to deliver short
messages, such as measuring values, status information, and interlocking/blocking
signals. Explicit messages are used to transfer longer pieces of information, such as
events and explicit read and write messages to access device data.

The benefits achieved from using the LON bus in protection and control systems
include direct communication among all terminals in the system and support for
multi-master implementations. The LON bus also has an open concept, so that the
terminals can communicate with external devices using the same standard of
network variables.

Introduction of LON protocol

For more information, refer to LON bus, LonWorks Network in Protection and
Control, Users manual and Technical description.

LON protocol

Configuration of LON
LON network tool (LNT) is a multi-purpose tool for LonWorks network
configuration. All the functions required for setting up and configuring a
LonWorks network, is easily accessible on a single tool program.

Activate LON Communication

Activate LON communication in the Parameter Setting tool under Main menu/
Communication/ SLM configuration/ Rear optical LON port/ Horizontal
communication, where Operation must be set to ON.

Add LON Device Types LNT

A new device is added to LON Network Tool from the Device menu or by
installing the device from the ABB LON Device Types package for LNT 505, with
the SLDT 670 series package version 1p2 r03.

LON net address

To establish a LON connection with the 670 series IEDs, the IED has to be given a
unique net address. The net address consists of a subnet and node number. This is
accomplished with the LON Network Tool by creating one device for each IED.

Vertical communication
Vertical communication describes communication between the monitoring devices
and protection and control IEDs. This communication includes sending of changed
process data to monitoring devices as events and transfer of commands, parameter
data and disturbance recorder files. This communication is implemented using
explicit messages.

Events and indications

Events sent to the monitoring devices are using explicit messages (message code
44H) with unacknowledged transport service of the LonTalk protocol. When a
signal is changed in the IED, one message with the value, quality and time is
transmitted from terminal.

1143
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

Binary events
Binary events are generated in event function blocks EVENT:1 to EVENT:20 in
the 670 series IEDs. The event function blocks have predefined LON addresses.
Table 823 shows the LON addresses to the first input on the event function blocks.
The addresses to the other inputs on the event function block are consecutive after
the first input. For example, input 15 on event block EVENT:17 has the address
1280 + 14 (15-1) = 1294.

For double indications only the first eight inputs 18 must be used. Inputs 916 can
be used for other type of events at the same event block.

As basic, three event function blocks EVENT:1 to EVENT:3 running with a fast
loop time (3 ms) is available in the 670 series IEDs. The remaining event function
blocks EVENT:4 to EVENT:9 runs with a loop time on 8 ms and EVENT:10 to
EVENT:20 runs with a loop time on 100 ms. The event blocks are used to send
binary signals, integers, real time values like analogue data from measuring
functions and mA input modules as well as pulse counter signals.

16 pulse counter value function blocks PCFCNT:1 to PCFCNT:16 and 24 mA

input service values function blocks SMMI1_In1 to 6 SMMI4_In1 to 6 are
available in the 670 series IEDs.

The first LON address in every event function block is found in table 823

Table 823: LON adresses for Event functions

Function block First LON address in
function block
EVENT:1 1024
EVENT:2 1040
EVENT:3 1056
EVENT:4 1072
EVENT:5 1088
EVENT:6 1104
EVENT:7 1120
EVENT:8 1136
EVENT:9 1152
EVENT:10 1168
EVENT:11 1184
EVENT:12 1200
EVENT:13 1216
EVENT:14 1232
EVENT:15 1248
EVENT:16 1264
EVENT:17 1280
EVENT:18 1296
EVENT:19 1312
EVENT:20 1328

1144
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

Event masks
The event mask for each input can be set individually from Parameter Setting Tool
(PST) under: Settings/ General Settings/ Monitoring / EventFunction as follows:

No events
OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria
for integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)

The following type of signals from application functions can be connected to the
event function block.

Single indication
Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is
always reported on change, no changed detection is done in the event function
block. Other Boolean signals, for example a start or a trip signal from a protection
function is event masked in the event function block.

Double indications
Double indications can only be reported via switch-control (SCSWI) functions, the
event reporting is based on information from switch-control, no change detection is
done in the event function block.

Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is not
possible to handle as double indication. Double indications can only be reported for
the first 8 inputs on an event function block.

00 generates an intermediate event with the read status 0

01 generates an open event with the read status 1
10 generates a close event with the read status 2
11 generates an undefined event with the read status 3

Analog value
All analog values are reported cyclic. The reporting interval is taken from the
connected function if there is a limit supervised signal, otherwise it is taken from
the event function block.

Command handling
Commands are transferred using transparent SPA-bus messages. The transparent
SPA-bus message is an explicit LON message, which contains an ASCII character
message following the coding rules of the SPA-bus protocol. The message is sent
using explicit messages with message code 41H and using acknowledged transport
service.

Both the SPA-bus command messages (R or W) and the reply messages (D, A or
N) are sent using the same message code. It is mandatory that one device sends out

1145
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

only one SPA-bus message at a time to one node and waits for the reply before
sending the next message.

For commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control, That
is, the function blocks type SCSWI 1 to 32, SXCBR 1 to 18 and SXSWI 1 to 28;
the SPA addresses are according to table 824.

Horizontal communication
Network variables are used for communication between 500 series and 670 series
IEDs. The supported network variable type is SNVT_state (NV type 83).
SNVT_state is used to communicate the state of a set of 1 to 16 Boolean values.

Multiple command send function block (MULTICMDSND) is used to pack the

information to one value. This value is transmitted to the receiving node and
presented for the application by a multiple command receive function block
(MULTICMDRCV). At horizontal communication the input BOUND on the
multiple command send function block (MULTICMDSND) must be set to 1. There
are 10 MULTICMDSND and 60 MULTICMDRCV function blocks available. The
MULTICMDSND and MULTICMDRCV function blocks are connected using
LON network tool (LNT). This tool also defines the service and addressing on LON.

This is an overview for configuring the network variables for 670 series IEDs.

Configuration of LON network variables

Configure the Network variables according to the specific application using the
LON network tool (LNT). The following is an example of how to configure
network variables concerning, for example, interlocking between two IEDs.

LON

BAY E1 BAY E3 BAY E4

MULTICMDSND: 7 MULTICMDSND: 9 MULTICMDSND: 9

en05000718.vsd
IEC05000718 V2 EN

Figure 540: Examples connections between MULTICMDSND and

MULTICMDRCV function blocks in three IEDs

The network variable connections are done from the NV Connection window.
From LNT window select Connections/ NVConnections/ New.

1146
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

en05000719.vsd
IEC05000719 V1 EN

Figure 541: The network variables window in LNT

There are two ways of downloading NV connections. Either the users can use the
drag-and-drop method where they can select all nodes in the device window, drag
them to the Download area in the bottom of the program window and drop them
there; or, they can perform it by selecting the traditional menu, Configuration/
Download.

1147
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

en05000720.vsd
IEC05000720 V1 EN

Figure 542: The download configuration window in LNT

Communication ports
The serial communication module (SLM) is a mezzanine module placed on the
Main Processing Module (NUM) and is used for LON, SPA, IEC60870-5-103 and
DNP communication.

There are two types of IO connectors: 1) snap-in for plastic fibre cables, and 2) ST/
bayonet for glass fibre cables. The SLM can be equipped with either type or a
combination of both, which is identified by a tag.

Connect the incoming optical fibre to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing
optical fibre to the TX transmitter output. Pay special attention to the instructions
concerning handling and connection of fibre cables.

Table 824: SPA addresses for commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus
control
Name Function SPA Description
block address
BL_CMD SCSWI01 1 I 5115 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI02 1 I 5139 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI02 1 I 5161 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI04 1 I 5186 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI05 1 I 5210 SPA parameters for block
command
Table continues on next page

1148
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
BL_CMD SCSWI06 1 I 5234 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI07 1 I 5258 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI08 1 I 5283 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI09 1 I 5307 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI10 1 I 5331 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI11 1 I 5355 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI12 1 I 5379 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI13 1 I 5403 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI14 1 I 5427 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI15 1 I 5451 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI16 1 I 5475 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI17 1 I 5499 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI18 1 I 5523 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI19 1 I 5545 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI20 1 I 5571 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI21 1 I 5594 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI22 1 I 5619 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI23 1 I 5643 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI24 1 I 5667 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI25 1 I 5691 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI26 1 I 5715 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI27 1 I 5739 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI28 1 I 5763 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI29 1 I 5787 SPA parameters for block
command
Table continues on next page

1149
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
BL_CMD SCSWI30 1 I 5811 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI31 1 I 5835 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI32 1 I 5859 SPA parameters for block
command
CANCEL SCSWI01 1 I 5107 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI02 1 I 5131 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI03 1 I 5153 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI04 1 I 5178 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI05 1 I 5202 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI06 1 I 5226 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI07 1 I 5250 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI08 1 I 5275 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI09 1 I 5299 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI10 1 I 5323 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI11 1 I 5347 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI12 1 I 5371 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI13 1 I 5395 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI14 1 I 5419 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI15 1 I 5443 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI16 1 I 5467 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI17 1 I 5491 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI18 1 I 5515 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI19 1 I 5537 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI20 1 I 5563 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI21 1 I 5586 SPA parameters for cancel
command
Table continues on next page

1150
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
CANCEL SCSWI22 1 I 5611 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI23 1 I 5635 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI24 1 I 5659 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI25 1 I 5683 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI26 1 I 5707 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI27 1 I 5731 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI28 1 I 5755 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI29 1 I 5779 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI30 1 I 5803 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI31 1 I 5827 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI32 1 I 5851 SPA parameters for cancel
command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI01 1 I 5105 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, Close) command
SELOpen+ILO=10, Note: Send select command
SELClose+ILO=11, before operate command
SELOpen+SCO=20,
SELClose+SCO=21,
SELOpen+ILO+SCO=30,
SELClose+ILO+SCO=31
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI02 1 I 5129 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI03 1 I 5151 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI04 1 I 5176 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI05 1 I 5200 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI06 1 I 5224 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI07 1 I 5248 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI08 1 I 5273 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI09 1 I 5297 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI10 1 I 5321 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI11 1 I 5345 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
Table continues on next page

1151
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI12 1 I 5369 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI13 1 I 5393 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI14 1 I 5417 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI15 1 I 5441 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI16 1 I 5465 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI17 1 I 5489 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI18 1 I 5513 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI19 1 I 5535 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI20 1 I 5561 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI21 1 I 5584 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI22 1 I 5609 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI23 1 I 5633 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI24 1 I 5657 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI25 1 I 5681 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI26 1 I 5705 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI27 1 I 5729 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI28 1 I 5753 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI29 1 I 5777 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI30 1 I 5801 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI31 1 I 5825 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI32 1 I 5849 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI01 1 I 5106 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, Close) command
ExcOpen+ILO=10, Note: Send select command
ExcClose+ILO=11, before operate command
ExcOpen+SCO=20,
ExcClose+SCO=21,
ExcOpen+ILO+SCO=30,
ExcClose+ILO+SCO=31
Table continues on next page

1152
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI02 1 I 5130 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI02 1 I 5152 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI04 1 I 5177 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI05 1 I 5201 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI06 1 I 5225 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI07 1 I 5249 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI08 1 I 5274 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI09 1 I 5298 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI10 1 I 5322 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI11 1 I 5346 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI12 1 I 5370 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI13 1 I 5394 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI14 1 I 5418 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI15 1 I 5442 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI16 1 I 5466 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI17 1 I 5490 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI18 1 I 5514 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI19 1 I 5536 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI20 1 I 5562 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI21 1 I 5585 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI22 1 I 5610 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI23 1 I 5634 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI24 1 I 5658 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI25 1 I 5682 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
Table continues on next page

1153
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI26 1 I 5706 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI27 1 I 5730 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI28 1 I 5754 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI29 1 I 5778 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI30 1 I 5802 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI31 1 I 5826 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI32 1 I 5850 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
Sub Value SXCBR01 2 I 7854 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Note: Send the value before Enable
Sub Value SXCBR02 2 I 7866 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR03 2 I 7884 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR04 2 I 7904 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR05 2 I 7923 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR06 2 I 7942 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR07 2 I 7961 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR08 2 I 7980 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR09 3I7 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR10 3 I 26 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR11 3 I 45 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR12 3 I 56 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR13 3 I 74 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR14 3 I 94 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR15 3 I 120 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR16 3 I 133 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR17 3 I 158 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Table continues on next page

1154
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
Sub Value SXCBR18 3 I 179 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI01 3 I 196 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI02 3 I 216 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI03 3 I 235 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI04 3 I 254 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI05 3 I 272 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI06 3 I 292 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI07 3 I 310 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI08 3 I 330 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI09 3 I 348 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI10 3 I 359 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI11 3 I 378 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI12 3 I 397 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI13 3 I 416 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI14 3 I 435 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI15 3 I 454 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI16 3 I 473 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI17 3 I 492 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI18 3 I 511 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI19 3 I 530 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI20 3 I 549 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI21 3 I 568 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI22 3 I 587 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI23 3 I 606 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Table continues on next page

1155
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
Sub Value SXSWI24 3 I 625 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI25 3 I 644 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI26 3 I 663 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI27 3 I 682 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI28 3 I 701 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Enable SXCBR01 2 I 7855 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Note: Send the Value before
Enable
Sub Enable SXCBR02 2 I 7865 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR03 2 I 7885 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR04 2 I 7903 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR05 2 I 7924 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR06 2 I 7941 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR07 2 I 7962 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR08 2 I 7979 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR09 3I8 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR10 3 I 25 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR11 3 I 46 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR12 3 I 55 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR13 3 I 75 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR14 3 I 93 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR15 3 I 121 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR16 3 I 132 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR17 3 I 159 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR18 3 I 178 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Table continues on next page

1156
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
Sub Enable SXSWI01 3 I 197 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI02 3 I 215 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI03 3 I 234 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI04 3 I 252 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI05 3 I 271 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI06 3 I 290 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI07 3 I 309 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI08 3 I 328 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI09 3 I 347 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI10 3 I 360 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI11 3I 379 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI12 3 I 398 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI13 3 I 417 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI14 3 I 436 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI15 3 I 455 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI16 3 I 474 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI17 3 I 493 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI18 3 I 512 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI19 3 I 531 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI20 3 I 550 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI21 3 I 569 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI22 3 I 588 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI23 3 I 607 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI24 3 I 626 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Table continues on next page

1157
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
Sub Enable SXSWI25 3 I 645 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI26 3 I 664 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI27 3 I 683 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI28 3 I 702 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Update Block SXCBR01 2 I 7853 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR02 2 I 7864 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR03 2 I 7883 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR04 2 I 7905 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR05 2 I 7922 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR06 2 I 7943 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR07 2 I 7960 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR08 2 I 7981 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR09 3I6 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR10 3 I 27 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR11 3 I 44 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR12 3 I 57 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR13 3 I 73 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR14 3 I 92 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR15 3 I 122 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR16 3 I 131 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR17 3 I 160 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR18 3 I 177 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI01 3 I 198 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI02 3 I 214 SPA parameter for update block
command
Table continues on next page

1158
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
Update Block SXSWI03 3 I 236 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI04 3 I 253 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI05 3 I 273 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI06 3 I 291 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI07 3 I 311 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI08 3 I 329 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI09 3 I 349 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI10 3 I 358 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI11 3 I 377 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI12 3 I 396 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI13 3 I 415 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI14 3 I 434 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI15 3 I 453 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI16 3 I 472 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI17 3 I 491 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI18 3 I 510 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI19 3 I 529 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI20 3 I 548 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI21 3 I 567 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI22 3 I 586 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI23 3 I 605 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI24 3 I 624 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI25 3 I 643 SPA parameter for update block
command
Table continues on next page

1159
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
Update Block SXSWI26 3 I 662 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI27 3 I 681 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI28 3 I 700 SPA parameter for update block
command

19.5.4 Technical data

Table 825: LON communication protocol
Function Value
Protocol LON
Communication speed 1.25 Mbit/s

19.6 SPA communication protocol

19.6.1 Functionality
In this section the most common addresses for commands and events are available.
For other addresses, refer to section "".

It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the SPA communication protocol in
general.

19.6.2 Design
Using the rear SPA port for either local or remote communication with a PC
requires the following equipment:

Optical fibres
Opto/electrical converter for the PC
PC

The software needed in the PC, either local or remote, is PCM600. (Note! SPA
cannot be used with PCM600 2.6).

When communicating between the local HMI and a PC, the only hardware required
is a front-connection cable. Note! SPA cannot be used from LHMI front, except for
using "FSTACCS", that is, Field Service Tool Access.

1160
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

19.6.3 Settings
Table 826: SPA Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SlaveAddress 1 - 899 - 1 30 Slave address
BaudRate 300 Bd - - 9600 Bd Baudrate on serial line
1200 Bd
2400 Bd
4800 Bd
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
38400 Bd

Table 827: LONSPA Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation
On
SlaveAddress 1 - 899 - 1 30 Slave address

19.6.4 Operation principle

The SPA bus uses an asynchronous serial communications protocol (1 start bit, 7
data bits + even parity, 1 stop bit) with data transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. For
more information on recommended baud rate for each type of IED, refer to
Technical reference manual. Messages on the bus consist of ASCII characters.

Introduction of SPA protocol

The basic construction of the protocol assumes that the slave has no self-initiated
need to talk to the master but the master is aware of the data contained in the slaves
and, consequently, can request required data. In addition, the master can send data
to the slave. Requesting by the master can be performed either by sequenced
polling (for example, for event information) or only on demand.

The master requests slave information using request messages and sends
information to the slave in write messages. Furthermore, the master can send all
slaves in common a broadcast message containing time or other data. The inactive
state of bus transmit and receive lines is a logical "1".

SPA protocol
The tables below specify the SPA addresses for reading data from and writing data
to an IED with the SPA communication protocol implemented.

The SPA addresses for the mA input service values (MIM3 to MIM16) are found
in table 828.

1161
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

Table 828: SPA addresses for the MIM function

Function block SPA address
MIM3-CH1 4-O-6508
MIM3-CH2 4-O-6511
MIM3-CH3 4-O-6512
MIM3-CH4 4-O-6515
MIM3-CH5 4-O-6516
MIM3-CH6 4-O-6519
MIM4-CH1 4-O-6527
MIM4-CH2 4-O-6530
MIM4-CH3 4-O-6531
MIM4-CH4 4-O-6534
MIM4-CH5 4-O-6535
MIM4-CH6 4-O-6538
MIM5-CH1 4-O-6546
MIM5-CH2 4-O-6549
MIM5-CH3 4-O-6550
MIM5-CH4 4-O-6553
MIM5-CH5 4-O-6554
MIM5-CH6 4-O-6557
MIM6-CH1 4-O-6565
MIM6-CH2 4-O-6568
MIM6-CH3 4-O-6569
MIM6-CH4 4-O-6572
MIM6-CH5 4-O-6573
MIM6-CH6 4-O-6576
MIM7-CH1 4-O-6584
MIM7-CH2 4-O-6587
MIM7-CH3 4-O-6588
MIM7-CH4 4-O-6591
MIM7-CH5 4-O-6592
MIM7-CH6 4-O-6595
MIM8-CH1 4-O-6603
MIM8-CH2 4-O-6606
MIM8-CH3 4-O-6607
MIM8-CH4 4-O-6610
MIM8-CH5 4-O-6611
MIM8-CH6 4-O-6614
MIM9-CH1 4-O-6622
MIM9-CH2 4-O-6625
Table continues on next page

1162
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

Function block SPA address

MIM9-CH3 4-O-6626
MIM9-CH4 4-O-6629
MIM9-CH5 4-O-6630
MIM9-CH6 4-O-6633
MIM10-CH1 4-O-6641
MIM10-CH2 4-O-6644
MIM10-CH3 4-O-6645
MIM10-CH4 4-O-6648
MIM10-CH5 4-O-6649
MIM10-CH6 4-O-6652
MIM11-CH1 4-O-6660
MIM11-CH2 4-O-6663
MIM11-CH3 4-O-6664
MIM11-CH4 4-O-6667
MIM11-CH5 4-O-6668
MIM11-CH6 4-O-6671
MIM12-CH1 4-O-6679
MIM12-CH2 4-O-6682
MIM12-CH3 4-O-6683
MIM12-CH4 4-O-6686
MIM12-CH5 4-O-6687
MIM12-CH6 4-O-6690
MIM13-CH1 4-O-6698
MIM13-CH2 4-O-6701
MIM13-CH3 4-O-6702
MIM13-CH4 4-O-6705
MIM13-CH5 4-O-6706
MIM13-CH6 4-O-6709
MIM14-CH1 4-O-6717
MIM14-CH2 4-O-6720
MIM14-CH3 4-O-6721
MIM14-CH4 4-O-6724
MIM14-CH5 4-O-6725
MIM14-CH6 4-O-6728
MIM15-CH1 4-O-6736
MIM15-CH2 4-O-6739
MIM15-CH3 4-O-6740
MIM15-CH4 4-O-6743
MIM15-CH5 4-O-6744
Table continues on next page

1163
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

Function block SPA address

MIM15-CH6 4-O-6747
MIM16-CH1 4-O-6755
MIM16-CH2 4-O-6758
MIM16-CH3 4-O-6759
MIM16-CH4 4-O-6762
MIM16-CH5 4-O-6763
MIM16-CH6 4-O-6766

The SPA addresses for the pulse counter values PCFCNT:1 to PCFCNT:16 are
found in table 829.

Table 829: SPA addresses for the PCFCNT function

Function block SPA address CNT_VAL SPA address NEW_VAL
PCFCNT:1 6-O-2788 6-O-2787
PCFCNT:2 6-O-2794 6-O-2793
PCFCNT:3 6-O-2800 6-O-2799
PCFCNT:4 6-O-2806 6-O-2805
PCFCNT:5 6-O-2812 6-O-2811
PCFCNT:6 6-O-2818 6-O-2817
PCFCNT:7 6-O-2824 6-O-2823
PCFCNT:8 6-O-2830 6-O-2829
PCFCNT:9 6-O-2836 6-O-2835
PCFCNT:10 6-O-2842 6-O-2841
PCFCNT:11 6-O-2848 6-O-2847
PCFCNT:12 6-O-2854 6-O-2853
PCFCNT:13 6-O-2860 6-O-2859
PCFCNT:14 6-O-2866 6-O-2865
PCFCNT:15 6-O-2872 6-O-2871
PCFCNT:16 6-O-2878 6-O-2877

I/O modules
To read binary inputs, the SPA-addresses for the outputs of the I/O-module
function block are used, that is, the addresses for BI1 BI16. For SPA addresses,
refer to section Related documents in Product Guide.

Single command, 16 signals

The IEDs can be provided with a function to receive signals either from a
substation automation system or from the local HMI. That receiving function block
has 16 outputs that can be used, for example, to control high voltage apparatuses in
switchyards. For local control functions, the local HMI can also be used.

1164
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

Single command, 16 signals function consists of three function blocks;

SINGLECMD:1 to SINGLECMD:3 for 16 binary output signals each.

The signals can be individually controlled from the operator station, remote-control
gateway, or from the local HMI on the IED. For Single command, 16 signals
function block, SINGLECMD:1 to SINGLECMD:3, the address is for the first
output. The other outputs follow consecutively after the first one. For example,
output 7 on the SINGLECMD:2 function block has the 5O533 address.

The SPA addresses for Single command, 16 signals functions SINGLECMD:1 to

SINGLECMD:3 are found in table 830.

Table 830: SPA addresses for SINGLECMD function

Function block SPA address CMD Input SPA address CMD output
SINGLECMD1-Cmd1 4-S-4639 5-O-511
SINGLECMD1-Cmd2 4-S-4640 5-O-512
SINGLECMD1-Cmd3 4-S-4641 5-O-513
SINGLECMD1-Cmd4 4-S-4642 5-O-514
SINGLECMD1-Cmd5 4-S-4643 5-O-515
SINGLECMD1-Cmd6 4-S-4644 5-O-516
SINGLECMD1-Cmd7 4-S-4645 5-O-517
SINGLECMD1-Cmd8 4-S-4646 5-O-518
SINGLECMD1-Cmd9 4-S-4647 5-O-519
SINGLECMD1-Cmd10 4-S-4648 5-O-520
SINGLECMD1-Cmd11 4-S-4649 5-O-521
SINGLECMD1-Cmd12 4-S-4650 5-O-522
SINGLECMD1-Cmdt13 4-S-4651 5-O-523
SINGLECMD1-Cmd14 4-S-4652 5-O-524
SINGLECMD1-Cmd15 4-S-4653 5-O-525
SINGLECMD1-Cmd16 4-S-4654 5-O-526
SINGLECMD2-Cmd1 4-S-4672 5-O-527
SINGLECMD2-Cmd2 4-S-4673 5-O-528
SINGLECMD2-Cmdt3 4-S-4674 5-O-529
SINGLECMD2-Cmd4 4-S-4675 5-O-530
SINGLECMD2-Cmd5 4-S-4676 5-O-531
SINGLECMD2-Cmd6 4-S-4677 5-O-532
SINGLECMD2-Cmd7 4-S-4678 5-O-533
SINGLECMD2-Cmd8 4-S-4679 5-O-534
SINGLECMD2-Cmd9 4-S-4680 5-O-535
SINGLECMD2-Cmd10 4-S-4681 5-O-536
SINGLECMD2-Cmd11 4-S-4682 5-O-537
SINGLECMD2-Cmd12 4-S-4683 5-O-538
SINGLECMD2-Cmd13 4-S-4684 5-O-539
Table continues on next page

1165
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

Function block SPA address CMD Input SPA address CMD output
SINGLECMD2-Cmd14 4-S-4685 5-O-540
SINGLECMD2-Cmd15 4-S-4686 5-O-541
SINGLECMD2-Cmd16 4-S-4687 5-O-542
SINGLECMD3-Cmd1 4-S-4705 5-O-543
SINGLECMD3-Cmd2 4-S-4706 5-O-544
SINGLECMD3-Cmd3 4-S-4707 5-O-545
SINGLECMD3-Cmd4 4-S-4708 5-O-546
SINGLECMD3-Cmd5 4-S-4709 5-O-547
SINGLECMD3-Cmd6 4-S-4710 5-O-548
SINGLECMD3-Cmd7 4-S-4711 5-O-549
SINGLECMD3-Cmd8 4-S-4712 5-O-550
SINGLECMD3-Cmd9 4-S-4713 5-O-551
SINGLECMD3-Cmd10 4-S-4714 5-O-552
SINGLECMD3-Cmd11 4-S-4715 5-O-553
SINGLECMD3-Cmd12 4-S-4716 5-O-554
SINGLECMD3-Cmd13 4-S-4717 5-O-555
SINGLECMD3-Cmd14 4-S-4718 5-O-556
SINGLECMD3-Cmd15 4-S-4719 5-O-557
SINGLECMD3-Cmd16 4-S-4720 5-O-558

Figure 543 shows an application example of how the user can, in a simplified way,
connect the command function via the configuration logic circuit in a protection
IED for control of a circuit breaker.

A pulse via the binary outputs of the IED normally performs this type of command
control. The SPA addresses to control the outputs OUT1 OUT16 in SINGLECMD:
1 are shown in table 830.

1166
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

SINGLECMD PULSETIMER
BLOCK ^OUT1 INPUT OUT To output board, CLOSE
^OUT2 #1.000 T
^OUT3
^OUT4
^OUT5
^OUT6
^OUT7 AND PULSETIMER
^OUT8 INPUT1 OUT INPUT OUT To output board, OPEN
INPUT2 NOUT T
^OUT9 #1.000
INPUT3
^OUT10
INPUT4N
^OUT11
^OUT12
^OUT13
^OUT14
^OUT15
^OUT16

SYNCH OK

IEC05000717-2-en.vsd
IEC05000717 V2 EN

Figure 543: Application example showing a simplified logic diagram for control
of a circuit breaker

The MODE input defines if the output signals from SINGLECMD:1 is off, steady
or pulsed signals. This is set in Parameter Setting Tool (PST) under: Setting /
General Settings / Control / Commands / Single Command.

Event function
Event function is intended to send time-tagged events to the station level (for
example, operator workplace) over the station bus. The events are there presented
in an event list. The events can be created from both internal logical signals and
binary input channels. All the internal signals are time tagged in the main
processing module, while the binary input channels are time tagged directly on
each I/O module. The events are produced according to the set event masks. The
event masks are treated commonly for both the LON and SPA channels. All events
according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to 1000
events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the oldest
event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears.

Two special signals for event registration purposes are available in the IED,
Terminal Restarted (0E50) and Event buffer overflow (0E51).

The input parameters can be set individually from the Parameter Setting Tool
(PST) under: Setting / General Setting / Monitoring / Event Function as follows:

No events
OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria
for integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)

The Status and event codes for the Event functions are found in table 831.

1167
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

Table 831: Status and event codes

Single indication1) Double indication

Event block Status Set event Reset Intermedi Closed 10 Open 01 Undefined
event ate 00 11
EVENT:1
Input 1 22O1 22E33 22E32 22E0 22E1 22E2 22E3
Input 2 22O2 22E35 22E34 22E4 22E5 22E6 22E7
Input 3 22O3 22E37 22E36 22E8 22E9 22E10 22E11
Input 4 22O4 22E39 22E38 22E12 22E13 22E14 22E15
Input 5 22O5 22E41 22E40 22E16 22E17 22E18 22E19
Input 6 22O6 22E43 22E42 22E20 22E21 22E22 22E23
Input 7 22O7 22E45 22E44 22E24 22E25 22E26 22E27
Input 8 22O8 22E47 22E46 22E28 22E29 22E30 22E31
Input 9 22O9 22E49 22E48 - - - -
Input 10 22O10 22E51 22E50 - - - -
Input 11 22O11 22E53 22E52 - - - -
Input 12 22O12 22E55 22E54 - - - -
Input 13 22O13 22E57 22E56 - - - -
Input 14 22O14 22E59 22E58 - - - -
Input 15 22O15 22E61 22E60 - - - -
Input 16 22O16 22E63 22E62 - - - -

EVENT:2 230.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E..

EVENT:3 240.. 24E.. 24E.. 24E.. 23E.. 24E.. 24E..
- - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - -
EVENT:20 410.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E..

These values are only applicable if the Event mask is masked OFF.

Connection of signals as events

Signals coming from different protection and control functions and must be sent as
events to the station level over the SPA-bus (or LON-bus) are connected to the
Event function block according to figure 544.
EVENT
Block BLOCK
ILRANG ^INPUT1
PSTO ^INPUT2
UL12RANG ^INPUT3
UL23RANG ^INPUT4
UL31RANG ^INPUT5
3I0RANG ^INPUT6
3U0RANG ^INPUT7
FALSE ^INPUT8
^INPUT9
^INPUT10
^INPUT11
^INPUT12
^INPUT13
^INPUT14
^INPUT15
^INPUT16

IEC07000065-2-en.vsd
IEC07000065 V2 EN

Figure 544: Connection of protection signals for event handling

1168
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

19.6.4.1 Communication ports

The serial communication module (SLM) is a mezzanine module placed on the

analog/digital conversion module (ADM) and is used for LON, SPA,
IEC60870-5-103, or DNP communication.

There are two types of IO connectors: 1) snap-in for plastic fibre cables and 2) ST/
bayonet for glass fibre cables. The SLM can be equipped with either type or a
combination of both, which is identified by a tag.

Connect the incoming optical fibre to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing
optical fibre to the TX transmitter output. Pay special attention to the instructions
concerning handling and connection of fibre cables.

For setting the transfer rate (baud rate) and slave number, please refer to the
Application Manual and Commissioning Manual respectively.

19.6.5 Technical data

Table 832: SPA communication protocol
Function Value
Protocol SPA
Communication speed 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400
Bd
Slave number 1 to 899

19.7 IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

19.7.1 Introduction
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a protection IED
communicates with a third party control or monitoring system. This system must
have software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.

19.7.2 Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS

19.7.2.1 Functionality

103MEAS is a function block that reports all valid measuring types depending on
connected signals.

The set of connected input will control which ASDUs (Application Service Data
Units) are generated.

1169
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

9 Will be generated if at least IL1 is connected. IL2, IL3, UL1, UL2, UL3, P,
Q, F are optional but there can be no holes.
3.4 Will be generated if IN and UN are present.
3.3 Will be generated if IL2, Ul1L2, P and Q present.
3.2 Will be generated if IL2, UL1L2 and P or Q missing.
3.1 Will be generated if IL2 present and IL1 missing (otherwise IL2 in 9).

Description for I103MEAS function block:

9 = IL1
3.4 = IN AND UN
3.3 = IL2 AND UL1L2 AND P AND Q
3.2 = IL2 AND UL1L2 AND NOT 3.3
3.1 = IL2 AND NOT ( 3.2 OR 3.3 OR 9)

19.7.2.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS - -

19.7.2.3 Function block

I103MEAS
BLOCK
IL1
IL2
IL3
IN
UL1
UL2
UL3
UL1L2
UN
P
Q
F

IEC10000287-1-en.vsd
IEC10000287 V1 EN

Figure 545: I103MEAS function block

19.7.2.4 Signals
Table 833: I103MEAS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of service value reporting
IL1 REAL 0.0 Service value for current phase L1
IL2 REAL 0.0 Service value for current phase L2
IL3 REAL 0.0 Service value for current phase L3
Table continues on next page

1170
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

Name Type Default Description

IN REAL 0.0 Service value for residual current IN
UL1 REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase L1
UL2 REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase L2
UL3 REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase L3
UL1L2 REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase-phase L1-L2
UN REAL 0.0 Service value for residual voltage UN
P REAL 0.0 Service value for active power
Q REAL 0.0 Service value for reactive power
F REAL 0.0 Service value for system frequency

19.7.2.5 Settings
Table 834: I103MEAS Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)
MaxIL1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum current phase L1
MaxIL2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum current phase L2
MaxIL3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum current phase L3
MaxIN 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum residual current IN
MaxUL1 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum voltage for phase L1
MaxUL2 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum voltage for phase L2
MaxUL3 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum voltage for phase L3
MaxUL1-UL2 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Maximum voltage for phase-phase L1-L2
MaxUN 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum residual voltage UN
MaxP 0.00 - 2000.00 MW 0.05 1200.00 Maximum value for active power
MaxQ 0.00 - 2000.00 MVAr 0.05 1200.00 Maximum value for reactive power
MaxF 45.0 - 66.0 Hz 1.0 51.0 Maximum system frequency

19.7.3 Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103

I103MEASUSR

19.7.3.1 Functionality

I103MEASUSR is a function block with user defined input measurands in monitor

direction. These function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each
block in the private range, and the Information number parameter for each block.

1171
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

19.7.3.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Measurands user defined signals for I103MEASUSR - -
IEC 60870-5-103

19.7.3.3 Function block

I103MEASUSR
BLOCK
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9

IEC10000288-1-en.vsd
IEC10000288 V1 EN

Figure 546: I103MEASUSR function block

19.7.3.4 Signals
Table 835: I103MEASUSR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of service value reporting
INPUT1 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 1
INPUT2 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 2
INPUT3 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 3
INPUT4 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 4
INPUT5 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 5
INPUT6 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 6
INPUT7 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 7
INPUT8 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 8
INPUT9 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 9

1172
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

19.7.3.5 Settings
Table 836: I103MEASUSR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 25 Function type (1-255)
InfNo 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for measurands
(1-255)
MaxMeasur1 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 1
MaxMeasur2 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 2
MaxMeasur3 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 3
MaxMeasur4 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 4
MaxMeasur5 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 5
MaxMeasur6 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 6
MaxMeasur7 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 7
MaxMeasur8 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 8
MaxMeasur9 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 9

19.7.4 Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 I103AR

19.7.4.1 Functionality

I103AR is a function block with defined functions for autorecloser indications in

monitor direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the
information number parameter is defined for each output signal.

19.7.4.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Function status auto-recloser for IEC I103AR - -
60870-5-103

1173
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

19.7.4.3 Function block

I103AR
BLOCK
16_ARACT
128_CBON
130_BLKD

IEC10000289-2-en.vsd
IEC10000289 V2 EN

Figure 547: I103AR function block

19.7.4.4 Signals
Table 837: I103AR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
16_ARACT BOOLEAN 0 Information number 16, auto-recloser active
128_CBON BOOLEAN 0 Information number 128, circuit breaker on by auto-
recloser
130_BLKD BOOLEAN 0 Information number 130, auto-recloser blocked

19.7.4.5 Settings
Table 838: I103AR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)

19.7.5 Function status earth-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 I103EF

19.7.5.1 Functionality

I103EF is a function block with defined functions for earth fault indications in
monitor direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the
information number parameter is defined for each output signal.

19.7.5.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Function status earth-fault for IEC I103EF - -
60870-5-103

1174
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

19.7.5.3 Function block

I103EF
BLOCK
51_EFFW
52_EFREV

IEC10000290-1-en.vsd
IEC10000290 V1 EN

Figure 548: I103EF function block

19.7.5.4 Signals
Table 839: I103EF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
51_EFFW BOOLEAN 0 Information number 51, earth-fault forward
52_EFREV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 52, earth-fault reverse

19.7.5.5 Settings
Table 840: I103EF Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 160 Function type (1-255)

19.7.6 Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103

I103FLTPROT

19.7.6.1 Functionality

I103FLTPROT is used for fault indications in monitor direction. Each input on the
function block is specific for a certain fault type and therefore must be connected to
a correspondent signal present in the configuration. For example: 68_TRGEN
represents the General Trip of the device, and therefore must be connected to the
general trip signal SMPPTRC_TRIP or equivalent.

The delay observed in the protocol is the time difference in between the signal that
is triggering the Disturbance Recorder and the respective configured signal to the
IEC 60870-5-103 I103FLTPROT.

19.7.6.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Function status fault protection for IEC I103FLTPROT - -
60870-5-103

1175
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

19.7.6.3 Function block

I103FLTPROT
BLOCK
64_STL1
65_STL2
66_STL3
67_STIN
68_TRGEN
69_TRL1
70_TRL2
71_TRL3
72_TRBKUP
73_SCL
74_FW
75_REV
76_TRANS
77_RECEV
78_ZONE1
79_ZONE2
80_ZONE3
81_ZONE4
82_ZONE5
84_STGEN
85_BFP
86_MTRL1
87_MTRL2
88_MTRL3
89_MTRN
90_IOC
91_IOC
92_IEF
93_IEF
ARINPROG
FLTLOC

IEC10000291-1-en.vsd
IEC10000291 V1 EN

Figure 549: I103FLTPROT function block

19.7.6.4 Signals
Table 841: I103FLTPROT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting.
64_STL1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 64, start phase L1
65_STL2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 65, start phase L2
66_STL3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 66, start phase L3
67_STIN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 67, start residual current IN
68_TRGEN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 68, trip general
69_TRL1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 69, trip phase L1
70_TRL2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 70, trip phase L2
71_TRL3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 71, trip phase L3
72_TRBKUP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 72, back up trip I>>
73_SCL REAL 0 Information number 73, fault location in ohm
74_FW BOOLEAN 0 Information number 74, forward/line
75_REV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 75, reverse/busbar
Table continues on next page

1176
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

Name Type Default Description

76_TRANS BOOLEAN 0 Information number 76, signal transmitted
77_RECEV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 77, signal received
78_ZONE1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 78, zone 1
79_ZONE2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 79, zone 2
80_ZONE3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 80, zone 3
81_ZONE4 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 81, zone 4
82_ZONE5 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 82, zone 5
84_STGEN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 84, start general
85_BFP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 85, breaker failure
86_MTRL1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 86, trip measuring system
phase L1
87_MTRL2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 87, trip measuring system
phase L2
88_MTRL3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 88, trip measuring system
phase L3
89_MTRN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 89, trip measuring system
neutral N
90_IOC BOOLEAN 0 Information number 90, over current trip, stage low
91_IOC BOOLEAN 0 Information number 91, over current trip, stage high
92_IEF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 92, earth-fault trip, stage low
93_IEF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 93, earth-fault trip, stage high
ARINPROG BOOLEAN 0 Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)
FLTLOC BOOLEAN 0 Faultlocator faultlocation valid (LMBRFLO-
CALCMADE)

19.7.6.5 Settings
Table 842: I103FLTPROT Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 128 Function type (1-255)

19.7.7 IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED

19.7.7.1 Functionality

I103IED is a function block with defined IED functions in monitor direction. This
block uses parameter as FunctionType, and information number parameter is
defined for each input signal.

1177
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

19.7.7.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED - -

19.7.7.3 Function block

I103IED
BLOCK
19_LEDRS
21_TESTM
22_SETCH
23_GRP1
24_GRP2
25_GRP3
26_GRP4

IEC10000292-2-en.vsd
IEC10000292 V2 EN

Figure 550: I103IED function block

19.7.7.4 Signals
Table 843: I103IED Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
19_LEDRS BOOLEAN 0 Information number 19, reset LEDs
21_TESTM BOOLEAN 0 Information number 21, test mode is active
22_SETCH BOOLEAN 0 Information number 22, setting changed
23_GRP1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 23, setting group 1 is active
24_GRP2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 24, setting group 2 is active
25_GRP3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 25, setting group 3 is active
26_GRP4 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 26, setting group 4 is active

19.7.7.5 Settings
Table 844: I103IED Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)

1178
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

19.7.8 Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV

19.7.8.1 Functionality

I103SUPERV is a function block with defined functions for supervision indications

in monitor direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the
information number parameter is defined for each output signal.

19.7.8.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV - -

19.7.8.3 Function block

I103SUPERV
BLOCK
32_MEASI
33_MEASU
37_IBKUP
38_VTFF
46_GRWA
47_GRAL

IEC10000293-1-en.vsd
IEC10000293 V1 EN

Figure 551: I103SUPERV function block

19.7.8.4 Signals
Table 845: I103SUPERV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
32_MEASI BOOLEAN 0 Information number 32, measurand supervision of
I
33_MEASU BOOLEAN 0 Information number 33, measurand supervision of
U
37_IBKUP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 37, I high-high back-up
protection
38_VTFF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 38, fuse failure VT
46_GRWA BOOLEAN 0 Information number 46, group warning
47_GRAL BOOLEAN 0 Information number 47, group alarm

1179
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

19.7.8.5 Settings
Table 846: I103SUPERV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)

19.7.9 Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103

I103USRDEF

19.7.9.1 Functionality

I103USRDEF is a function blocks with user defined input signals in monitor

direction. These function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each
block in the private range, and the information number parameter for each input
signal.

GUID-391D4145-B7E6-4174-B3F7-753ADDA4D06F V1 EN

Figure 552:

19.7.9.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Status for user defiend signals for IEC I103USRDEF - -
60870-5-103

1180
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

19.7.9.3 Function block

I103USRDEF
BLOCK
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8

IEC10000294-1-en.vsd
IEC10000294 V1 EN

Figure 553: I103USRDEF function block

19.7.9.4 Signals
Table 847: I103USRDEF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal Input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 8

19.7.9.5 Settings
Table 848: I103USRDEF Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 5 Function type (1-255)
InfNo_1 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for binary input 1
(1-255)
InfNo_2 1 - 255 - 1 2 Information number for binary input 2
(1-255)
InfNo_3 1 - 255 - 1 3 Information number for binary input 3
(1-255)
InfNo_4 1 - 255 - 1 4 Information number for binary input 4
(1-255)
InfNo_5 1 - 255 - 1 5 Information number for binary input 5
(1-255)
Table continues on next page

1181
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

InfNo_6 1 - 255 - 1 6 Information number for binary input 6
(1-255)
InfNo_7 1 - 255 - 1 7 Information number for binary input 7
(1-255)
InfNo_8 1 - 255 - 1 8 Information number for binary input 8
(1-255)

19.7.10 Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103CMD

19.7.10.1 Functionality

I103CMD is a command function block in control direction with pre-defined

output signals. The signals are in steady state, not pulsed, and stored in the IED in
case of restart.

19.7.10.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Function commands for IEC I103CMD - -
60870-5-103

19.7.10.3 Function block

I103CMD
BLOCK 16-AR
17-DIFF
18-PROT

IEC10000282-1-en.vsd
IEC10000282 V1 EN

Figure 554: I103CMD function block

19.7.10.4 Signals
Table 849: I103CMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands

Table 850: I103CMD Output signals

Name Type Description
16-AR BOOLEAN Information number 16, off/on of autorecloser
17-DIFF BOOLEAN Information number 17, block of differential
protection
18-PROT BOOLEAN Information number 18, block of protection

1182
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

19.7.10.5 Settings
Table 851: I103CMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)

19.7.11 IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD

19.7.11.1 Functionality

I103IEDCMD is a command block in control direction with defined IED functions.

All outputs are pulsed and they are NOT stored. Pulse-time is a hidden parameter.

19.7.11.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD - -

19.7.11.3 Function block

I103IEDCMD
BLOCK 19-LEDRS
23-GRP1
24-GRP2
25-GRP3
26-GRP4

IEC10000283-1-en.vsd
IEC10000283 V1 EN

Figure 555: I103IEDCMD function block

19.7.11.4 Signals
Table 852: I103IEDCMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands

Table 853: I103IEDCMD Output signals

Name Type Description
19-LEDRS BOOLEAN Information number 19, reset LEDs
23-GRP1 BOOLEAN Information number 23, activate setting group 1
24-GRP2 BOOLEAN Information number 24, activate setting group 2
25-GRP3 BOOLEAN Information number 25, activate setting group 3
26-GRP4 BOOLEAN Information number 26, activate setting group 4

1183
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

19.7.11.5 Settings
Table 854: I103IEDCMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 255 Function type (1-255)

19.7.12 Function commands user defined for IEC 60870-5-103

I103USRCMD

19.7.12.1 Functionality

I103USRCMD is a command block in control direction with user defined output

signals. These function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block
in the private range, and the Information number parameter for each output signal.

19.7.12.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Function commands user defined for I103USRCMD - -
IEC 60870-5-103

19.7.12.3 Function block

I103USRCMD
BLOCK ^OUTPUT1
^OUTPUT2
^OUTPUT3
^OUTPUT4
^OUTPUT5
^OUTPUT6
^OUTPUT7
^OUTPUT8

IEC10000284-1-en.vsd
IEC10000284 V1 EN

Figure 556: I103USRCMD function block

19.7.12.4 Signals
Table 855: I103USRCMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands

1184
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

Table 856: I103USRCMD Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Command output 1
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN Command output 2
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN Command output 3
OUTPUT4 BOOLEAN Command output 4
OUTPUT5 BOOLEAN Command output 5
OUTPUT6 BOOLEAN Command output 6
OUTPUT7 BOOLEAN Command output 7
OUTPUT8 BOOLEAN Command output 8

19.7.12.5 Settings
Table 857: I103USRCMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)
PulseMode Steady - - Pulsed Pulse mode
Pulsed
PulseLength 0.200 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Pulse length
InfNo_1 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for output 1 (1-255)
InfNo_2 1 - 255 - 1 2 Information number for output 2 (1-255)
InfNo_3 1 - 255 - 1 3 Information number for output 3 (1-255)
InfNo_4 1 - 255 - 1 4 Information number for output 4 (1-255)
InfNo_5 1 - 255 - 1 5 Information number for output 5 (1-255)
InfNo_6 1 - 255 - 1 6 Information number for output 6 (1-255)
InfNo_7 1 - 255 - 1 7 Information number for output 7 (1-255)
InfNo_8 1 - 255 - 1 8 Information number for output 8 (1-255)

19.7.13 Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103

I103GENCMD

19.7.13.1 Functionality

I103GENCMD is used for transmitting generic commands over IEC 60870-5-103.

The function has two outputs signals CMD_OFF and CMD_ON that can be used to
implement double-point command schemes.

The I103GENCMD component can be configured as either 2 pulsed ON/OFF or 2

steady ON/OFF outputs. The ON output is pulsed with a command with value 2,
while the OFF output is pulsed with a command value 1. If in steady mode is ON
asserted and OFF deasserted with command 2 and vice versa with command 1.

1185
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

Steady mode is selected by setting PulseLength=0. The I103GENCMD is retained,

and a command in steady mode will be reissued on restart.

19.7.13.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Function commands generic for IEC I103GENCMD - -
60870-5-103

19.7.13.3 Function block

I103GENCMD
BLOCK ^CMD_OFF
^CMD_ON

IEC10000285-1-en.vsd
IEC10000285 V1 EN

Figure 557: I103GENCMD function block

19.7.13.4 Signals
Table 858: I103GENCMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of command

Table 859: I103GENCMD Output signals

Name Type Description
CMD_OFF BOOLEAN Command output OFF
CMD_ON BOOLEAN Command output ON

19.7.13.5 Settings
Table 860: I103GENCMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)
PulseLength 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Pulse length
InfNo 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for command output
(1-255)

1186
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

19.7.14 IED commands with position and select for IEC

60870-5-103 I103POSCMD

19.7.14.1 Functionality

I103POSCMD has double-point position indicators that are getting the position
value as an integer (for example from the POSITION output of the SCSWI
function block) and sending it over IEC 60870-5-103 (1=OPEN; 2=CLOSE). The
standard does not define the use of values 0 and 3. However, when connected to a
switching device, these values are transmitted.

The BLOCK input will block only the signals in monitoring direction (the position
information), not the commands via IEC 60870-5-103. The SELECT input is used
to indicate that the monitored apparatus has been selected (in a select-before-
operate type of control)

19.7.14.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
IED commands with position and select I103POSCMD - -
for IEC 60870-5-103

19.7.14.3 Function block

I103POSCMD
BLOCK
POSITION
SELECT

IEC10000286-1-en.vsd
IEC10000286 V1 EN

Figure 558: I103POSCMD function block

19.7.14.4 Signals
Table 861: I103POSCMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of command
POSITION INTEGER 0 Position of controllable object
SELECT BOOLEAN 0 Select of controllable object

1187
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

19.7.14.5 Settings
Table 862: I103POSCMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Fucntion type (1-255)
InfNo 160 - 196 - 4 160 Information number for command output
(1-255)

19.7.15 Operation principle

19.7.15.1 General

IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial

communication exchanging information with a control system, and with a data
transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. In IEC terminology, a primary station is a master
and a secondary station is a slave. The communication is based on a point-to-point
principle. The master must have software that can interpret IEC 60870-5-103
communication messages.

Introduction to IEC 608705103 protocol

IEC 60870-5-103 protocol functionality consists of the following functions:

Event handling
Report of analog service values (measurements)
Fault location
Command handling
Autorecloser ON/OFF
Teleprotection ON/OFF
Protection ON/OFF
LED reset
Characteristics 1 - 4 (Setting groups)
File transfer (disturbance files)
Time synchronization

For detailed information about IEC 60870-5-103, refer to the IEC 60870 standard
part 5: Transmission protocols, and to the section 103: Companion standard for the
informative interface of protection equipment.

IEC 60870-5-103 vendor specific implementation

The signal and setting tables specify the information types supported by the IEDs
with the communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 implemented.

The information types are supported when corresponding functions are included in
the protection and control IED.

1188
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

Be aware of that different cycle times for function blocks must be

considered to ensure correct time stamping.

Commands in control direction

Commands in control direction, I103IEDCMD
Command block in control direction with defined output signals.

Number of instances: 1

Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.

Information number is defined for each output signals.

Table 863: I103IEDCMD supported indications

INF Description
19 LED Reset
23 Activate setting group 1
24 Activate setting group 2
25 Activate setting group 3
26 Activate setting group 4

Function commands in control direction, pre-defined I103CMD

Function command block in control direction with defined output signals.

Number of instances: 1

Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.

Information number is defined for each output signals.

Table 864: Pre-defined I103CMD supported indications

INF Description
16 Auto-recloser on/off
17 Teleprotection on/off
18 Protection on/off

Function commands in control direction, user-defined, I103UserCMD

Function command blocks in control direction with user-defined output signals.

Number of instances: 4

Function type for each function block instance in private range is selected with
parameter FunctionType.

Information number must be selected for each output signal. Default values are 1 - 8.

1189
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

Table 865: I103UserCMD supported indications

INF Description
11) Output signal 01

2* Output signal 02
3* Output signal 03
4* Output signal 04
5* Output signal 05
6* Output signal 06
7* Output signal 07
8* Output signal 08

1) * User defined information number

Status
Terminal status indications in monitor direction, I103IED
Indication block for status in monitor direction with defined IED functions.

Number of instances: 1

Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.

Information number is defined for each input signals.

Table 866: I103IED supported functions

INF Description
19 LED reset
21 TestMode
22 Local Parameter setting
23 Setting group 1 active
24 Setting group 2 active
25 Setting group 3 active
26 Setting group 4 active

Function status indications in monitor direction, user-defined, I103UserDef

Function indication blocks in monitor direction with user-defined input signals.

Number of instances: 20

Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType for each function block
instance in private range.

Information number is required for each input signal. Default values are defined in
range 1 - 8.

1190
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

Table 867: I103UserDef supported indications

INF Description
11) Input signal 01

2* Input signal 02
3* Input signal 03
4* Input signal 04
5* Input signal 05
6* Input signal 06
7* Input signal 07
8* Input signal 08

1) * User defined information number

Supervision indications in monitor direction, I103SUPERV

Indication block for supervision in monitor direction with defined functions.

Number of instances: 1

Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.

Information number is defined for output signals.

Table 868: I103SUPERV supported functions

INF Description TYP GI COT
32 Measurand supervision I 1 Y 1,7,9
33 Measurand supervision U 1 Y 1,7,9
37 I>>back-up operation 1 Y 1,7,9
38 VT fuse failure 1 Y 1,7,9
46 Group warning 1 Y 1,7,9
47 Group alarm 1 Y 1,7,9

Earth fault indications in monitor direction, I103EF

Indication block for earth fault in monitor direction with defined functions.

Number of instances: 1

Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.

Information number is defined for each output signal.

Table 869: I103EF supported indications

INF Description
51 Earth fault forward
52 Earth fault reverse

1191
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

Fault indications in monitor direction, type 1, I103FltDis

Fault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions.

The instance type is suitable for distance protection function.

FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block.

INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal.

Number of instances: 1
Info. no. Message Supported
64 Start L1 Yes
65 Start L2 Yes
66 Start L3 Yes
67 Start IN Yes
84 General start Yes
69 Trip L1 Yes
70 Trip L2 Yes
71 Trip L3 Yes
68 General trip Yes
74 Fault forward/line Yes
75 Fault reverse/busbar Yes
78 Zone 1 Yes
79 Zone 2 Yes
80 Zone 3 Yes
81 Zone 4 Yes
82 Zone 5 Yes
76 Signal transmitted Yes
77 Signal received Yes
73 SCL, Fault location in ohm Yes

Fault indications in monitor direction, type 2, I103FltStd

Fault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions.

The instance type is suitable for line differential, transformer differential,

overcurrent and earth fault protection functions.

FUNCTION TYPE setting for each block.

INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal.

Number of instances: 1

1192
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

Info. no. Message Supported

64 Start L1 Yes
65 Start L2 Yes
66 Start L3 Yes
67 Start IN Yes
84 General start Yes
69 Trip L1 Yes
70 Trip L2 Yes
71 Trip L3 Yes
68 General trip Yes
74 Fault forward/line Yes
75 Fault reverse/busbar Yes
85 Breaker failure Yes
86 Trip measuring system L1 Yes
87 Trip measuring system L2 Yes
88 Trip measuring system L3 Yes
89 Trip measuring system N Yes
90 Over current trip I> Yes
91 Over current trip I>> Yes
92 Earth fault trip IN> Yes
93 Earth fault trip IN>> Yes

Autorecloser indications in monitor direction, I103AR

Indication block for autorecloser in monitor direction with defined functions.

Number of instances: 1

Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.

Information number is defined for each output signal.

Table 870: I103AR supported indications

INF Description
16 Autorecloser active
128 CB on by Autorecloser
130 Autorecloser blocked

Measurands
Function blocks in monitor direction for input measurands. Typically connected to
monitoring function, for example to power measurement CVMMXN.

Measurands in public range, I103MEAS

Number of instances: 1

1193
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

The IED reports all valid measuring types depending on connected signals.

Upper limit for measured currents, active/reactive-power is 2.4 times rated value.

Upper limit for measured voltages and frequency is 1.2 times rated value.

The upper limit is the maximum value that can be encoded into the ASDU
(Application Service Data Unit). Any value higher than this value will be tagged as
OVERFLOW. The factors 1.2 and 2.4 are taken from the 103 standard and require
that a rated value to use as base exists, and then use 1.2 or 2.4 times <rated> as
maxVal. You can use 2.4 times rated as maxVal, but as there is no way to propagate
value to client, the use of a scale factor on <rated> does not make much difference.

You can configure client:client-scaled-max ::= 1.2 * <rated> or

client-scaled-max ::= 1.0 * <maxVal>

If the client has a hard-coded gain of 1.2 * <rated> then client-scaled-

max ::= 1.2 times <maxVal>/1.2

Resolution is <maxVal> / 4095 and hence the lowest possible maxVal yields the
best accuracy.

Table 871: I103MEAS supported indications

INF Description
148 IL1
144, 145, IL2
146, 148
148 IL3
147 IN, Neutral current
148 UL1
148 UL2
148 UL3
145, 146 UL1-UL2
147 UN, Neutral voltage
146, 148 P, active power
146, 148 Q, reactive power
148 f, frequency

Measurands in private range, I103MeasUsr

Number of instances: 3

Function type parameter for each block in private range.

Information number must be selected for measurands.

1194
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

Table 872: I103MeasUsr supported indications

INF FUN GI TYP COT Description
*1) *2) No, polled *3) 2,7 Meas1
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas2
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas3
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas4
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas5
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas6
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas7
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas8
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas9
with CL2

1) * User defined information value (PARAM.3)

2) * User defined information value (PARAM.2)
3) 9 = Measurands II, Format = Measurand II (7.3.1.8 in IEC 60870-5-103:1997), semantics per IE is
defined by semantics of connected source.

<Number of information elements> is defined by index of first input not connected.

Example: Input1, Input2, and Input4 are connected, Input3 is not connected.

<Number of information elements> will be 3 (Input3 NOT connected) -1 = 2, that

is, only Input1 and Input2 will be transmitted.

Disturbance recordings
The following elements are used in the ASDUs (Application Service Data Units)
defined in the standard.

Analog signals, 40-channels: the channel number for each channel has to be
specified. Channels used in the public range are 1 to 8 and with:

IL1 connected to channel 1 on disturbance function block A1RADR

IL2 connected to channel 2 on disturbance function block A1RADR
IL3 connected to channel 3 on disturbance function block A1RADR
IN connected to channel 4 on disturbance function block A1RADR
UL1E connected to channel 5 on disturbance function block A1RADR
UL2E connected to channel 6 on disturbance function block A1RADR
UL3E connected to channel 7 on disturbance function block A1RADR
UEN connected to channel 8 on disturbance function block A1RADR

1195
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

Channel number used for the remaining 32 analog signals are numbers in the
private range 64 to 95.

Binary signals, 96-channels: for each channel the user can specify a FUNCTION
TYPE and an INFORMATION NUMBER.

Disturbance upload

All analog and binary signals that are recorded with disturbance recorder can be
reported to the master. The last eight disturbances that are recorded are available
for transfer to the master. A successfully transferred disturbance (acknowledged by
the master) will not be reported to the master again.

When a new disturbance is recorded by the IED a list of available recorded

disturbances will be sent to the master, an updated list of available disturbances can
be sent whenever something has happened to disturbances in this list. For example,
when a disturbance is deleted (by other client, for example, SPA) or when a new
disturbance has been recorded or when the master has uploaded a disturbance.

Deviations from the standard

Information sent in the disturbance upload is specified by the standard; however,

some of the information are adapted to information available in disturbance
recorder in 670 series.

This section describes all data that is not exactly as specified in the standard.

ASDU23

In list of recorded disturbances (ASDU23) an information element named SOF

(status of fault) exists. This information element consists of 4 bits and indicates
whether:

Bit TP: the protection equipment has tripped during the fault
Bit TM: the disturbance data are currently being transmitted
Bit TEST: the disturbance data have been recorded during normal operation or
test mode.
Bit OTEV: the disturbance data recording has been initiated by another event
than start

The only information that is easily available is test-mode status. The other
information is always set (hard coded) to:

TP Recorded fault with trip. [1]

TM Disturbance data waiting for transmission [0]
OTEV Disturbance data initiated by other events [1]

Another information element in ASDU23 is the FAN (fault number). According to

the standard this is a number that is incremented when a protection function takes

1196
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

action. In 670 series FAN is equal to disturbance number, which is incremented for
each disturbance.

ASDU26 / ASDU31

When a disturbance has been selected by the master by sending ASDU24, the
protection equipment answers by sending ASDU26, which contains an information
element named NOF (number of grid faults). This number must indicate fault
number in the power system,that is, a fault in the power system with several trip
and auto-reclosing has the same NOF (while the FAN must be incremented). NOF
is in 670 series, just as FAN, equal to disturbance number.

Interoperability, physical layer

Supported
Electrical Interface
EIA RS-485 No
number of loads No
Optical interface
glass fibre Yes
plastic fibre
Transmission speed
9600 bit/s Yes
19200 bit/s Yes
Link Layer
DFC-bit used Yes
Connectors
connector F-SMA No
connector BFOC/2.5 Yes

Interoperability, application layer

Supported
Selection of standard ASDUs in monitoring direction
ASDU Yes
1 Time-tagged message Yes
2 Time-tagged message with rel. time Yes
3 Measurands I Yes
4 Time-tagged message with rel. time Yes
5 Identification Yes
6 Time synchronization Yes
8 End of general interrogation Yes
9 Measurands II Yes
10 Generic data No
Table continues on next page

1197
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

Supported
11 Generic identification No
23 List of recorded disturbances Yes
26 Ready for transm. of disturbance data Yes
27 Ready for transm. of a channel Yes
28 Ready for transm of tags Yes
29 Transmission of tags Yes
30 Transmission fo disturbance data Yes
31 End of transmission Yes
Selection of standard ASDUs in control direction
ASDU Yes
6 Time synchronization Yes
7 General interrogation Yes
10 Generic data No
20 General command Yes
21 Generic command No
24 Order for disturbance data transmission Yes
25 Acknowledgement for distance data transmission Yes
Selection of basic application functions
Test mode No
Blocking of monitoring direction Yes
Disturbance data Yes
Private data Yes
Generic services No

19.7.15.2 Communication ports

The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP

and LON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed
on the Analog/Digital conversion module (ADM). The serial communication
module can have connectors for two plastic fibre cables (snap-in) or two glass fibre
cables (ST, bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fibre. Three different
types are available depending on type of fibre.

The incoming optical fibre is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing
optical fibre to the TX transmitter output. When the fibre optic cables are laid out,
pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling and connection of
the optical fibres. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.

1198
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

19.7.16 Technical data

Table 873: IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
Function Value
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103
Communication speed 9600, 19200 Bd

19.8 Horizontal communication via GOOSE for

interlocking GOOSEINTLKRCV

19.8.1 Functionality
GOOSE communication can be used for exchanging information between IEDs via
the IEC 61850-8-1 station communication bus. This is typically used for sending
apparatus position indications for interlocking or reservation signals for 1-of-n
control. GOOSE can also be used to exchange any boolean, integer, double point
and analog measured values between IEDs.

1199
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

19.8.2 Function block

GOOSEINTLKRCV
BLOCK ^RESREQ
^RESGRANT
^APP1_OP
^APP1_CL
APP1VAL
^APP2_OP
^APP2_CL
APP2VAL
^APP3_OP
^APP3_CL
APP3VAL
^APP4_OP
^APP4_CL
APP4VAL
^APP5_OP
^APP5_CL
APP5VAL
^APP6_OP
^APP6_CL
APP6VAL
^APP7_OP
^APP7_CL
APP7VAL
^APP8_OP
^APP8_CL
APP8VAL
^APP9_OP
^APP9_CL
APP9VAL
^APP10_OP
^APP10_CL
APP10VAL
^APP11_OP
^APP11_CL
APP11VAL
^APP12_OP
^APP12_CL
APP12VAL
^APP13_OP
^APP13_CL
APP13VAL
^APP14_OP
^APP14_CL
APP14VAL
^APP15_OP
^APP15_CL
APP15VAL
COM_VAL

IEC07000048-2-en.vsd
IEC07000048 V2 EN

Figure 559: GOOSEINTLKRCV function block

19.8.3 Signals
Table 874: GOOSEINTLKRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals

1200
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

Table 875: GOOSEINTLKRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
RESREQ BOOLEAN Reservation request
RESGRANT BOOLEAN Reservation granted
APP1_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is open
APP1_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is closed
APP1VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is valid
APP2_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 2 position is open
APP2_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 2 position is closed
APP2VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 2 position is valid
APP3_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 3 position is open
APP3_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 3 position is closed
APP3VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 3 position is valid
APP4_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 4 position is open
APP4_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 4 position is closed
APP4VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 4 position is valid
APP5_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 5 position is open
APP5_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 5 position is closed
APP5VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 5 position is valid
APP6_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 6 position is open
APP6_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 6 position is closed
APP6VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 6 position is valid
APP7_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is open
APP7_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is closed
APP7VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is valid
APP8_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 8 position is open
APP8_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 8 position is closed
APP8VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 8 position is valid
APP9_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 9 position is open
APP9_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 9 position is closed
APP9VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 9 position is valid
APP10_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is open
APP10_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is closed
APP10VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is valid
APP11_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is open
APP11_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is closed
APP11VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is valid
APP12_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 12 position is open
APP12_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 12 position is closed
APP12VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 12 position is valid
Table continues on next page

1201
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

Name Type Description

APP13_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 13 position is open
APP13_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 13 position is closed
APP13VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 13 position is valid
APP14_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 14 position is open
APP14_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 14 position is closed
APP14VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 14 position is valid
APP15_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is open
APP15_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is closed
APP15VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is valid
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication Valid
TEST BOOLEAN Test Output

19.8.4 Settings
Table 876: GOOSEINTLKRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

1202
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

19.9 Goose binary receive GOOSEBINRCV

19.9.1 Function block

GOOSEBINRCV
BLOCK ^OUT1
OUT1VAL
^OUT2
OUT2VAL
^OUT3
OUT3VAL
^OUT4
OUT4VAL
^OUT5
OUT5VAL
^OUT6
OUT6VAL
^OUT7
OUT7VAL
^OUT8
OUT8VAL
^OUT9
OUT9VAL
^OUT10
OUT10VAL
^OUT11
OUT11VAL
^OUT12
OUT12VAL
^OUT13
OUT13VAL
^OUT14
OUT14VAL
^OUT15
OUT15VAL
^OUT16
OUT16VAL

IEC07000047-2-en.vsd
IEC07000047 V2 EN

Figure 560: GOOSEBINRCV function block

19.9.2 Signals
Table 877: GOOSEBINRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals

Table 878: GOOSEBINRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Binary output 1
DVALID1 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Binary output 2
DVALID2 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Binary output 3
DVALID3 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 3
Table continues on next page

1203
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

Name Type Description

OUT4 BOOLEAN Binary output 4
DVALID4 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Binary output 5
DVALID5 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Binary output 6
DVALID6 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Binary output 7
DVALID7 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Binary output 8
DVALID8 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 8
OUT9 BOOLEAN Binary output 9
DVALID9 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 9
OUT10 BOOLEAN Binary output 10
DVALID10 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Binary output 11
DVALID11 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Binary output 12
DVALID12 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 12
OUT13 BOOLEAN Binary output 13
DVALID13 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 13
OUT14 BOOLEAN Binary output 14
DVALID14 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Binary output 15
DVALID15 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Binary output 16
DVALID16 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 16
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication Valid
TEST BOOLEAN Test Output

19.9.3 Settings
Table 879: GOOSEBINRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

1204
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

19.10 GOOSE function block to receive a double point

value GOOSEDPRCV

19.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSEDPRCV - -
double point value

19.10.2 Functionality
GOOSEDPRCV is used to receive a double point value using IEC61850 protocol
via GOOSE.

19.10.3 Function block

GOOSEDPRCV
BLOCK ^DPOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000249-1-en.vsd
IEC10000249 V1 EN

Figure 561: GOOSEDPRCV function block

19.10.4 Signals
Table 880: GOOSEDPRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 881: GOOSEDPRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
DPOUT INTEGER Double point output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for double point output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for double point output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

1205
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

19.10.5 Settings
Table 882: GOOSEDPRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

19.10.6 Operation principle

The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means

of a cross to receive the double point values.

The implementation for IEC61850 quality data handling is

restricted to a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then
the DATAVALID output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is
INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD
DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.

19.11 GOOSE function block to receive an integer value

GOOSEINTRCV

19.11.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive an GOOSEINTRCV - -
integer value

19.11.2 Functionality
GOOSEINTRCV is used to receive an integer value using IEC61850 protocol via
GOOSE.

1206
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

19.11.3 Function block

GOOSEINTRCV
BLOCK ^INTOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000250-1-en.vsd
IEC10000250 V1 EN

Figure 562: GOOSEINTRCV function block

19.11.4 Signals
Table 883: GOOSEINTRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 884: GOOSEINTRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
INTOUT INTEGER Integer output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for integer output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for integer output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

19.11.5 Settings
Table 885: GOOSEINTRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

19.11.6 Operation principle

The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means

of a cross to receive the integer values.

1207
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

The implementation for IEC61850 quality data handling is

restricted to a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then
the DATAVALID output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is
INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD
DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.

19.12 GOOSE function block to receive a measurand

value GOOSEMVRCV

19.12.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSEMVRCV - -
measurand value

19.12.2 Functionality
GOOSEMVRCV is used to receive measured value using IEC61850 protocol via
GOOSE.

19.12.3 Function block

GOOSEMVRCV
BLOCK ^MVOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000251-1-en.vsd
IEC10000251 V1 EN

Figure 563: GOOSEMVRCV function block

19.12.4 Signals
Table 886: GOOSEMVRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

1208
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

Table 887: GOOSEMVRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
MVOUT REAL Measurand value output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for measurand value output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for measurand value output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

19.12.5 Settings
Table 888: GOOSEMVRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

19.12.6 Operation principle

The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means

of a cross to receive the float values.

The implementation for IEC61850 quality data handling is

restricted to a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then
the DATAVALID output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is
INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD
DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.

19.13 GOOSE function block to receive a single point

value GOOSESPRCV

19.13.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSESPRCV - -
single point value

1209
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

19.13.2 Functionality
GOOSESPRCV is used to receive a single point value using IEC61850 protocol
via GOOSE.

19.13.3 Function block

GOOSESPRCV
BLOCK ^SPOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000248-1-en.vsd
IEC10000248 V1 EN

Figure 564: GOOSESPRCV function block

19.13.4 Signals
Table 889: GOOSESPRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 890: GOOSESPRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
SPOUT BOOLEAN Single point output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for single point output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for single point output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

19.13.5 Settings
Table 891: GOOSESPRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

19.13.6 Operation principle

The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

1210
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means

of a cross to receive the binary single point values.

The implementation for IEC61850 quality data handling is

restricted to a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then
the DATAVALID output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is
INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD
DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.

19.14 GOOSE VCTR configuration for send and receive

GOOSEVCTRCONF

19.14.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
GOOSE VCTR configuration for send GOOSEVCTRC - -
and receive ONF

19.14.2 Functionality
GOOSEVCTRCONF function is used to control the rate (in seconds) at which
voltage control information from TR8ATCC is transmitted/received to/from other
IEDs via GOOSE communication. GOOSEVCTRCONF function is visible in PST.

The following voltage control information can be sent from TR8ATCC via
GOOSE communication:
BusV
LoadAIm
LoadARe
PosRel
SetV
VCTRStatus
X2

1211
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

19.14.3 Settings
Table 892: GOOSEVCTRCONF Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SendOperation Off - - On Send operation
On
SendInterval 0.1 - 5.0 s 0.1 0.3 Send interval
ReceiveOperation Off - - On Receive operation
On
ReceiveInterval 0.1 - 10.0 s 0.1 0.8 Receive interval

19.15 GOOSE voltage control receiving block

GOOSEVCTRRCV

19.15.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
GOOSE voltage control receiving block GOOSEVCTRR - -
CV

19.15.2 Functionality
GOOSEVCTRRCV component receives the voltage control data from GOOSE
network at the user defined rate.

This component also checks the received data validity, communication validity and
test mode. Communication validity will be checked upon the rate of data reception.
Data validity also depends upon the communication. If communication is invalid
then data validity will also be invalid. IEC 61850 also checks for data validity
using internal parameters which will also be passed to the DATAVALID output.

19.15.3 Function block

GOOSEVCTRRCV
BLOCK VCTR_RCV
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000252-1-en.vsd
IEC10000252 V1 EN

Figure 565: GOOSEVCTRRCV function block

1212
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

19.15.4 Signals
Table 893: GOOSEVCTRRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block function

Table 894: GOOSEVCTRRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
VCTR_RCV GROUP SIGNAL Output group connection to voltage control
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for output signals
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for output signals
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

19.16 MULTICMDRCV and MULTICMDSND

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Multiple command and receive MULTICMDRCV - -
Multiple command and send MULTICMDSND - -

19.16.1 Functionality
The IED provides two function blocks enabling several IEDs to send and receive
signals via the interbay bus. The sending function block, MULTICMDSND, takes
16 binary inputs. LON enables these to be transmitted to the equivalent receiving
function block, MULTICMDRCV, which has 16 binary outputs.

19.16.2 Design

19.16.2.1 General

The common behavior for all 16 outputs of the MULTICMDRCV is set to either of
two modes: Steady or Pulse.

1 = Steady: This mode simply forwards the received signals to the binary outputs.
2 = Pulse: When a received signal transitions from 0 (zero) to 1 (one), a pulse
with a duration of exactly one execution cycle is triggered on the
corresponding binary output. This means that no connected function block
may have a cycle time that is higher than the execution cycle time of the
particular MULTICMDRCV instance.

1213
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

19.16.3 Function block

MULTICMDRCV
BLOCK ERROR
NEWDATA
OUTPUT1
OUTPUT2
OUTPUT3
OUTPUT4
OUTPUT5
OUTPUT6
OUTPUT7
OUTPUT8
OUTPUT9
OUTPUT10
OUTPUT11
OUTPUT12
OUTPUT13
OUTPUT14
OUTPUT15
OUTPUT16
VALID

IEC06000007-2-en.vsd
IEC06000007 V2 EN

Figure 566: MULTICMDRCV function block

MULTICMDSND
BLOCK ERROR
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16

IEC06000008-2-en.vsd
IEC06000008 V2 EN

Figure 567: MULTICMDSND function block

19.16.4 Signals
Table 895: MULTICMDRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

1214
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

Table 896: MULTICMDSND Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16

Table 897: MULTICMDRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
ERROR BOOLEAN MultiReceive error
NEWDATA BOOLEAN New data is received
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3
OUTPUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4
OUTPUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5
OUTPUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6
OUTPUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7
OUTPUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8
OUTPUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9
OUTPUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10
OUTPUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11
OUTPUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12
OUTPUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13
OUTPUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14
OUTPUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15
OUTPUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16
VALID BOOLEAN Output data is valid

1215
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

Table 898: MULTICMDSND Output signals

Name Type Description
ERROR BOOLEAN MultiSend error

19.16.5 Settings
Table 899: MULTICMDRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tMaxCycleTime 0.050 - 200.000 s 0.001 11.000 Maximum cycle time between receptions
of input data
tMinCycleTime 0.000 - 200.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum cycle time between receptions
of input data
Mode Steady - - Steady Mode for output signals
Pulsed
tPulseTime 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Pulse length for multi command outputs

Table 900: MULTICMDSND Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tMaxCycleTime 0.000 - 200.000 s 0.001 5.000 Maximum time interval between
transmission of output data
tMinCycleTime 0.000 - 200.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum time interval between
transmission of output data

19.16.6 Operation principle

There are 10 instances of the MULTICMDSND function block. The first two are
fast (8 ms cycle time) while the others are slow (100 ms cycle time). Each instance
has 16 binary inputs, to which 16 independent signals can be connected. Connected
signals are sent through MULTICMDSND to the receiving equivalent,
MULTICMDRCV, located on a different IED.

The MULTICMDRCV function block has 16 binary outputs, all controlled through
the command block of one or many MULTICMDSND function blocks. There are
60 instances of the MULTICMDRCV where the first 12 are fast (8 ms), and the
others are slow (100 ms). Additionally, the MULTICMDRCV has a supervision
function, which sets the output connector "VALID" to 0 (zero) if its block does not
receive any data within the time defined by tMaxCycleTime.

LON connections are established using LON network tool (LNT).

1216
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 19
Station communication

19.17 Security events on protocols SECALARM

19.17.1 Security alarm SECALARM

19.17.1.1 Signals
Table 901: SECALARM Output signals
Name Type Description
EVENTID INTEGER EventId of the generated security event
SEQNUMBER INTEGER Sequence number of the generated security event

19.17.1.2 Settings
Table 902: SECALARM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation On/Off
On

19.18 Activity logging parameters ACTIVLOG

19.18.1 Activity logging ACTIVLOG

ACTIVLOG contains all settings for activity logging.

There can be 6 external log servers to send syslog events to. Each server can be
configured with IP address; IP port number and protocol format. The format can be
either syslog (RFC 5424) or Common Event Format (CEF) from ArcSight.

19.18.2 Settings
Table 903: ACTIVLOG Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ExtLogSrv1Type Off - - Off External log server 1 type
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv1Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 1 port number
ExtLogSrv1IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 1 IP-address
Address
ExtLogSrv2Type Off - - Off External log server 2 type
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Table continues on next page

1217
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Station communication

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ExtLogSrv2Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 2 port number
ExtLogSrv2IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 2 IP-address
Address
ExtLogSrv3Type Off - - Off External log server 3 type
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv3Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 3 port number
ExtLogSrv3IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 3 IP-address
Address
ExtLogSrv4Type Off - - Off External log server 4 type
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv4Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 4 port number
ExtLogSrv4IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 4 IP-address
Address
ExtLogSrv5Type Off - - Off External log server 5 type
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv5Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 5 port number
ExtLogSrv5IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 5 IP-address
Address
ExtLogSrv6Type Off - - Off External log server 6 type
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv6Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 6 port number
ExtLogSrv6IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 6 IP-address
Address

1218
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 20
Remote communication

Section 20 Remote communication

20.1 Binary signal transfer

20.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Binary signal transfer BinSignReceive - -
Binary signal transfer BinSignTransm - -

20.1.2 Functionality
The remote end data communication is used either for the transmission of current
values together with maximum 8 binary signals in the line differential protection,
or for transmission of only binary signals, up to 192 signals, in the other 670 series
IEDs. The binary signals are freely configurable and can, thus, be used for any
purpose, for example, communication scheme related signals, transfer trip and/or
other binary signals between IEDs.

Communication between two IEDs requires that each IED is equipped with an
LDCM (Line Data Communication Module). The LDCMs are then interfaces to a
64 kbit/s communication channel for duplex communication between the IEDs.

The IED can be equipped with up to two short range or medium range LDCM.

1219
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Remote communication

20.1.3 Function block

LDCMRecBinStat1
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
REMCOMF
LOWLEVEL

IEC07000043-2-en.vsd

IEC07000043 V2 EN

LDCMRecBinStat2
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
TRDELERR
SYNCERR
REMCOMF
REMGPSER
SUBSTITU
LOWLEVEL

IEC07000044-2-en.vsd
IEC07000044 V2 EN

Figure 568: LDCMRecBinStat function blocks

LDCMRecBinStat3
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
TRDELERR
SYNCERR
REMCOMF
REMGPSER
SUBSTITU
LOWLEVEL

IEC05000451-2-en.vsd
IEC05000451 V2 EN

Figure 569: LDCMRecBinStat function block

20.1.4 Signals
Table 904: LDCMRecBinStat1 Output signals
Name Type Description
COMFAIL BOOLEAN Detected error in the differential communication
YBIT BOOLEAN Detected error in remote end with incoming
message
NOCARR BOOLEAN No carrier is detected in the incoming message
Table continues on next page

1220
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 20
Remote communication

Name Type Description

NOMESS BOOLEAN No start and stop flags identified for the incoming
message
ADDRERR BOOLEAN Incoming message from non-valid address
LNGTHERR BOOLEAN Wrong length of the incoming message
CRCERROR BOOLEAN Identified error by CRC check in incoming message
REMCOMF BOOLEAN Remote terminal indicates problem with received
message
LOWLEVEL BOOLEAN Low signal level on the receive link

Table 905: LDCMRecBinStat2 Output signals

Name Type Description
CH1 STRING Remote communication channel 1
CH2 STRING Remote communication channel 2
CH3 STRING Remote communication channel 3
CH4 STRING Remote communication channel 4
COMFAIL BOOLEAN Detected error in the differential communication
YBIT BOOLEAN Detected error in remote end with incoming
message
NOCARR BOOLEAN No carrier is detected in the incoming message
NOMESS BOOLEAN No start and stop flags identified for the incoming
message
ADDRERR BOOLEAN Incoming message from non-valid address
LNGTHERR BOOLEAN Wrong length of the incoming message
CRCERROR BOOLEAN Identified error by CRC check in incoming message
TRDELERR BOOLEAN Transmission time is longer than permitted
SYNCERR BOOLEAN Error in echo synchronization
REMCOMF BOOLEAN Remote terminal indicates problem with received
message
REMGPSER BOOLEAN Remote terminal indicates problem with GPS
synchronization
SUBSTITU BOOLEAN Link error, values are substituted
LOWLEVEL BOOLEAN Low signal level on the receive link

Table 906: LDCMRecBinStat3 Output signals

Name Type Description
CH1 STRING Remote communication channel 1
CH2 STRING Remote communication channel 2
CH3 STRING Remote communication channel 3
CH4 STRING Remote communication channel 4
COMFAIL BOOLEAN Detected error in the differential communication
Table continues on next page

1221
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Remote communication

Name Type Description

YBIT BOOLEAN Detected error in remote end with incoming
message
NOCARR BOOLEAN No carrier is detected in the incoming message
NOMESS BOOLEAN No start and stop flags identified for the incoming
message
ADDRERR BOOLEAN Incoming message from non-valid address
LNGTHERR BOOLEAN Wrong length of the incoming message
CRCERROR BOOLEAN Identified error by CRC check in incoming message
TRDELERR BOOLEAN Transmission time is longer than permitted
SYNCERR BOOLEAN Error in echo synchronization
REMCOMF BOOLEAN Remote terminal indicates problem with received
message
REMGPSER BOOLEAN Remote terminal indicates problem with GPS
synchronization
SUBSTITU BOOLEAN Link error, values are substituted
LOWLEVEL BOOLEAN Low signal level on the receive link

20.1.5 Settings
Table 907: LDCMRecBinStat1 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ChannelMode Blocked - - Normal Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON,
Normal 2=OutOfService
OutOfService
TerminalNo 0 - 255 - 1 0 Terminal number used for line differential
communication
RemoteTermNo 0 - 255 - 1 0 Terminal number on remote terminal
CommSync Slave - - Slave Com Synchronization mode of LDCM,
Master 0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower LowPower - - LowPower Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low,
HighPower 1=High
ComFailAlrmDel 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before communication error
signal is activated
ComFailResDel 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Reset delay before communication error
signal is reset
InvertPolX21 Off - - Off Invert polarization for X21 communication
On

1222
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 20
Remote communication

Table 908: LDCMRecBinStat2 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ChannelMode Blocked - - Normal Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON,
Normal 2=OutOfService
OutOfService
TerminalNo 0 - 255 - 1 0 Terminal number used for line differential
communication
RemoteTermNo 0 - 255 - 1 0 Terminal number on remote terminal
DiffSync Echo - - Echo Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM,
GPS 0=ECHO, 1=GPS
GPSSyncErr Block - - Block Operation mode when GPS
Echo synchroniation signal is lost
CommSync Slave - - Slave Com Synchronization mode of LDCM,
Master 0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower LowPower - - LowPower Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low,
HighPower 1=High
TransmCurr CT-GRP1 - - CT-GRP1 Summation mode for transmitted current
CT-GRP2 values
CT-SUM
CT-DIFF1
CT-DIFF2
ComFailAlrmDel 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before communication error
signal is activated
ComFailResDel 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Reset delay before communication error
signal is reset
RedChSwTime 5 - 500 ms 5 5 Time delay before switching in
redundant channel
RedChRturnTime 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before switching back from
redundant channel
AsymDelay -20.00 - 20.00 ms 0.01 0.00 Asymmetric delay when communication
use echo synch.
AnalogLatency 2 - 20 - 1 2 Latency between local analogue data
and transmitted
remAinLatency 2 - 20 - 1 2 Analog latency of remote terminal
MaxTransmDelay 0 - 40 ms 1 20 Max allowed transmission delay
CompRange 0-10kA - - 0-25kA Compression range
0-25kA
0-50kA
0-150kA
MaxtDiffLevel 200 - 2000 us 1 600 Maximum time diff for ECHO back-up
DeadbandtDiff 200 - 1000 us 1 300 Deadband for t Diff
InvertPolX21 Off - - Off Invert polarization for X21 communication
On

1223
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Remote communication

Table 909: LDCMRecBinStat3 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ChannelMode Blocked - - Normal Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON,
Normal 2=OutOfService
OutOfService
TerminalNo 0 - 255 - 1 0 Terminal number used for line differential
communication
RemoteTermNo 0 - 255 - 1 0 Terminal number on remote terminal
DiffSync Echo - - Echo Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM,
GPS 0=ECHO, 1=GPS
GPSSyncErr Block - - Block Operation mode when GPS
Echo synchroniation signal is lost
CommSync Slave - - Slave Com Synchronization mode of LDCM,
Master 0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower LowPower - - LowPower Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low,
HighPower 1=High
TransmCurr CT-GRP1 - - CT-GRP1 Summation mode for transmitted current
CT-GRP2 values
CT-SUM
CT-DIFF1
CT-DIFF2
RedundantChannel
ComFailAlrmDel 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before communication error
signal is activated
ComFailResDel 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Reset delay before communication error
signal is reset
RedChSwTime 5 - 500 ms 5 5 Time delay before switching in
redundant channel
RedChRturnTime 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before switching back from
redundant channel
AsymDelay -20.00 - 20.00 ms 0.01 0.00 Asymmetric delay when communication
use echo synch.
AnalogLatency 2 - 20 - 1 2 Latency between local analogue data
and transmitted
remAinLatency 2 - 20 - 1 2 Analog latency of remote terminal
MaxTransmDelay 0 - 40 ms 1 20 Max allowed transmission delay
CompRange 0-10kA - - 0-25kA Compression range
0-25kA
0-50kA
0-150kA
MaxtDiffLevel 200 - 2000 us 1 600 Maximum time diff for ECHO back-up
DeadbandtDiff 200 - 1000 us 1 300 Deadband for t Diff
InvertPolX21 Off - - Off Invert polarization for X21 communication
On

1224
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 20
Remote communication

20.1.6 Monitored data

Table 910: LDCMRecBinStat1 Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
NoOfShInterr BOOLEAN - - Number of short
communication
interruptions
NoOfMedInterr BOOLEAN - - Number of medium
communication
interruptions
NoOfLongInterr BOOLEAN - - Number of long
communication
interruptions
CommStatus BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Status of communication
1=SyncErr link
2=No RXD
3=LocalGPSErr
4=RemGPSErr
5=LocAndRemG
PSErr
6=LocalADErr
7=RemADErr
8=LocAndRemA
DErr
9=AddressErr
10=FreqConfErr
11=LatencyConf
Err
NoOfTXD BOOLEAN - - Percentage of
theroretical possible
transmitted message
NoOfRXD BOOLEAN - - Percentage of
theroretical possible
received message
RxAddress INTEGER - - Address of received
packets
ConfAddress INTEGER - - Configured receive
address

Table 911: LDCMRecBinStat2 Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TransmDelay REAL - - Transmission delay, for
echo half loop time, GPS
actual
NoOfShInterr BOOLEAN - - Number of short
communication
interruptions
NoOfMedInterr BOOLEAN - - Number of medium
communication
interruptions
NoOfLongInterr BOOLEAN - - Number of long
communication
interruptions
Table continues on next page

1225
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Remote communication

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

CommStatus BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Status of communication
1=SyncErr link
2=No RXD
3=LocalGPSErr
4=RemGPSErr
5=LocAndRemG
PSErr
6=LocalADErr
7=RemADErr
8=LocAndRemA
DErr
9=AddressErr
10=FreqConfErr
11=LatencyConf
Err
NoOfTXD BOOLEAN - - Percentage of
theroretical possible
transmitted message
NoOfRXD BOOLEAN - - Percentage of
theroretical possible
received message
AsymDelay REAL - - Different transmission
delays between the two
directions
RxAddress INTEGER - - Address of received
packets
ConfAddress INTEGER - - Configured receive
address

Table 912: LDCMRecBinStat3 Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TransmDelay REAL - - Transmission delay, for
echo half loop time, GPS
actual
NoOfShInterr BOOLEAN - - Number of short
communication
interruptions
NoOfMedInterr BOOLEAN - - Number of medium
communication
interruptions
NoOfLongInterr BOOLEAN - - Number of long
communication
interruptions
Table continues on next page

1226
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 20
Remote communication

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

CommStatus BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Status of communication
1=SyncErr link
2=No RXD
3=LocalGPSErr
4=RemGPSErr
5=LocAndRemG
PSErr
6=LocalADErr
7=RemADErr
8=LocAndRemA
DErr
9=AddressErr
10=FreqConfErr
11=LatencyConf
Err
NoOfTXD BOOLEAN - - Percentage of
theroretical possible
transmitted message
NoOfRXD BOOLEAN - - Percentage of
theroretical possible
received message
AsymDelay REAL - - Different transmission
delays between the two
directions
RxAddress INTEGER - - Address of received
packets
ConfAddress INTEGER - - Configured receive
address

20.1.7 Operation principle

The communication is made on standard ITU (CCITT) PCM digital 64 kbit/s
channels. It is a two-way communication where telegrams are sent every 5 ms
(same in 50 Hz and 60 Hz), exchanging information between two IEDs. The format
used is C37.94 and one telegram consists of start and stop flags, address, data to be
transmitted, Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) and Yellow bit (which is associated
with C37.94).

Start Stop
Information CRC
flag flag

8 bits n x 16 bits 16 bits 8 bits

en01000134.vsd

IEC01000134 V1 EN

Figure 570: Data message structure

The start and stop flags are the 0111 1110 sequence (7E hexadecimal), defined in
the HDLC standard. The CRC is designed according to the standard CRC16
definition. The optional address field in the HDLC frame is not used instead a
separate addressing is included in the data field.

1227
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Remote communication

The address field is used for checking that the received message originates from
the correct equipment. There is always a risk that multiplexers occasionally mix the
messages up. Each terminal in the system is given a number. The terminal is then
programmed to accept messages from a specific terminal number. If the CRC
function detects a faulty message, the message is thrown away and not used in the
evaluation.

When the communication is used for line differential purpose, the transmitted data
consists of three currents, clock information, trip-, block- and alarm-signals and
eight binary signals which can be used for any purpose. The three currents are
represented as sampled values.

When the communication is used exclusively for binary signals, the full data
capacity of the communication channel is used for the binary signal purpose which
gives the capacity of 192 signals.

20.2 Transmission of analog data from LDCM

LDCMTransmit

20.2.1 Function block

LDCMTRN
^CT1L1
^CT1L2
^CT1L3
^CT1N
^CT2L1
^CT2L2
^CT2L3
^CT2N

IEC10000017-1-en.vsd
IEC10000017 V1 EN

Figure 571: LDCMTransmit function block

The function blocks are not represented in the Application

Configuration tool except for the LDCMTRN function block that is
visible in ACT. The signals appear only in the Signal Matrix tool
when a LDCM is included in the configuration with the function
selector tool.

1228
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 20
Remote communication

20.2.2 Signals
Table 913: LDCMTRN Input signals
Name Type Default Description
CT1L1 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 line L1 to
remote end
CT1L2 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 line L2 to
remote end
CT1L3 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 line L3 to
remote end
CT1N STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 neutral N
to remote end
CT2L1 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 line L1 to
remote end
CT2L2 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 line L2 to
remote end
CT2L3 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 line L3 to
remote end
CT2N STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 neutral N
to remote end

1229
Technical Manual
1230
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 21
Basic IED functions

Section 21 Basic IED functions

21.1 Authority check ATHCHCK

21.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Authority check ATHCHCK - -

21.1.2 Functionality
To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED and the tools that are
accessing the IED are protected, by means of authorization handling. The
authorization handling of the IED and the PCM600 is implemented at both access
points to the IED:

local, through the local HMI

remote, through the communication ports

The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with PCM600 IED user
management tool.

1231
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Basic IED functions

IEC12000202-2-en.vsd
IEC12000202 V2 EN

Figure 572: PCM600 user management tool

21.1.3 Settings

21.1.4 Operation principle

There are different levels (or types) of users that can access or operate different
areas of the IED and tools functionality. The pre-defined user types are given in
Table 914.

Ensure that the user logged on to the IED has the access required
when writing particular data to the IED from PCM600.

The meaning of the legends used in the table:

R= Read
W= Write
- = No access rights

1232
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 21
Basic IED functions

Table 914: Pre-defined user types

Access rights System Protection Design User
Guest Super User SPA Guest
Operator Engineer Engineer Administrator
Basic setting possibilities (change R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R
setting group, control settings,
limit supervision)
Advanced setting possibilities (for R R/W R R R/W R/W R
example protection settings)
Basic control possibilities (process R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R
control, no bypass)
Advanced control possibilities R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R
(process control including interlock
trigg)
Basic command handling (for R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R
example clear LEDs, manual trigg)
Advanced command handling (for R R/W R R R/W R/W R/W
example clear disturbance record)
Basic configuration possibilities (I/ R R/W R R R R/W R/W
O-configuration in SMT)
Advanced configuration R R/W R R R R/W R/W
possibilities (application
configuration including SMT, GDE
and CMT)
File loading (database loading - R/W - - - R/W R/W
from XML-file)
File dumping (database dumping - R/W - - - R/W R/W
to XML-file)
File transfer (FTP file transfer) - R/W - R/W R/W R/W R/W
File transfer (limited) (FTP file R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W
transfer)
File Transfer (SPA File Transfer) - R/W - - - R/W -
Database access for normal user R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W
User administration (user R R/W R R R R R/W
management FTP File Transfer)
User administration (user - R/W - - - - -
management SPA File Transfer)

The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with the IED User
Management within PCM600. The user can only LogOn or LogOff on the local
HMI on the IED, there are no users, groups or functions that can be defined on
local HMI.

Only characters A - Z, a - z and 0 - 9 should be used in user names

and passwords.
The maximum of characters in a password is 18.

1233
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Basic IED functions

At least one user must be included in the UserAdministrator group

to be able to write users, created in PCM600, to IED.

21.1.4.1 Authorization handling in the IED

At delivery the default user is the SuperUser. No Log on is required to operate the
IED until a user has been created with the IED User Management..

Once a user is created and downloaded to the IED, that user can perform a Log on,
introducing the password assigned in the tool.

If there is no user created, an attempt to log on will display a message box: No

user defined!

If one user leaves the IED without logging off, then after the timeout (set in Main
menu/Settings/General Settings/HMI/Screen/Display Timeout) elapses, the IED
returns to Guest state, when only reading is possible. The display time out is set to
60 minutes at delivery.

If there are one or more users created with the IED User Management and
downloaded into the IED, then, when a user intentionally attempts a Log on or
when the user attempts to perform an operation that is password protected, the Log
on window will appear.

The cursor is focused on the User identity field, so upon pressing the E key, the
user can change the user name, by browsing the list of users, with the up and
down arrows. After choosing the right user name, the user must press the E
key again. When it comes to password, upon pressing the E key, the following
character will show up: $. The user must scroll for every letter in the password.
After all the letters are introduced (passwords are case sensitive) choose OK and
press the E key again.

If everything is alright at a voluntary Log on, the local HMI returns to the
Authorization screen. If the Log on is OK, when required to change for example a
password protected setting, the local HMI returns to the actual setting folder. If the
Log on has failed, then the Log on window opens again, until either the user makes
it right or presses Cancel.

21.2 Authority management AUTHMAN

21.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Authority management AUTHMAN - -

1234
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 21
Basic IED functions

21.2.2 AUTHMAN
This function enables/disables the maintenance menu. It also controls the
maintenance menu log on time out.

21.2.3 Settings
Table 915: AUTHMAN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MaintMenuDisAuth Disable - - Enable In maintenance menu, disable authority
Enable selection is shown
AuthTimeout 600 - 3600 s 600 600 Authority blocking timeout

21.3 FTP access with password FTPACCS

21.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
FTP access with SSL FTPACCS - -

21.3.2 FTP access with SSL, FTPACCS

The FTP Client defaults to the best possible security mode when trying to negotiate
with SSL.

The automatic negotiation mode acts on port number and server features, it tries to
negotiate with explicit SSL via AUTH SSL/TLS. If the specified port is any other,
it tries to negotiate with explicit SSL via AUTH SSL/TLS.

Using FTP without SSL encryption gives the FTP client reduced capabilities. This
mode is only for accessing disturbance recorder data from the IED.

If normal FTP is required to read out disturbance recordings, create

a specific account for this purpose with rights only to do File
transfer. The password of this user will be exposed in clear text on
the wire.

1235
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Basic IED functions

21.3.3 Settings
Table 916: FTPACCS Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
PortSelection None - - Any Port selection for communication
Front
LANAB
LANCD
Any
SSLMode FTP+FTPS - - FTPS Support for AUTH TLS/SSL
FTPS
TCPPortFTP 1 - 65535 - 1 21 TCP port for FTP and FTP with Explicit
SSL

21.4 Authority status ATHSTAT

21.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Authority status ATHSTAT - -

21.4.2 Functionality
Authority status ATHSTAT function is an indication function block for user log-on
activity.

User denied attempt to log-on and user successful log-on are reported.

21.4.3 Function block

ATHSTAT
USRBLKED
LOGGEDON

IEC06000503-2-en.vsd
IEC06000503 V2 EN

Figure 573: ATHSTAT function block

21.4.4 Signals
Table 917: ATHSTAT Output signals
Name Type Description
USRBLKED BOOLEAN At least one user is blocked by invalid password
LOGGEDON BOOLEAN At least one user is logged on

1236
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 21
Basic IED functions

21.4.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection
and Control IED Manager (PCM600)

21.4.6 Operation principle

Authority status (ATHSTAT) function informs about two events related to the IED
and the user authorization:
the fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it
was blocked (the output USRBLKED)
the fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)

Whenever one of the two events occurs, the corresponding output (USRBLKED or
LOGGEDON) is activated. The output can for example, be connected on Event
(EVENT) function block for LON/SPA.The signals are also available on IEC
61850 station bus.

21.5 Self supervision with internal event list

21.5.1 Functionality
Self supervision with internal event list function listens and reacts to internal
system events, generated by the different built-in self-supervision elements. The
internal events are saved in an internal event list presented on the LHMI and in
PCM600 event viewer tool.

21.5.2 Function block

IEC09000787 V1 EN

Figure 574: INTERRSIG function block

1237
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Basic IED functions

21.5.3 Signals
Table 918: INTERRSIG Output signals
Name Type Description
FAIL BOOLEAN Internal fail
WARNING BOOLEAN Internal warning
TSYNCERR BOOLEAN Time synchronization error
RTCERR BOOLEAN Real time clock error
STUPBLK BOOLEAN Application startup block

21.5.4 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

21.5.5 Operation principle

The self-supervision operates continuously and includes:

Normal micro-processor watchdog function.

Checking of digitized measuring signals.
Other alarms, for example hardware and time synchronization.

The self-supervision function status can be monitored from the local HMI, from the
Event Viewer in PCM600 or from a SMS/SCS system.

Under the Diagnostics menu in the local HMI the present information from the self-
supervision function can be reviewed. The information can be found under Main
menu/Diagnostics/Internal events or Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/
General. The information from the self-supervision function is also available in the
Event Viewer in PCM600.

The self supervision records internal signal changes in an internal event list. A
maximum of 40 internal events are stored in a first-in, first-out manner.

GUID-B481701F-05B4-4B29-83D4-18F13886FEBE V1 EN

1238
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 21
Basic IED functions

A self-supervision summary can be obtained by means of the potential free alarm

contact (INTERNAL FAIL) located on the power supply module. The function of
this output relay is an OR-function between the INT-FAIL signal see figure 576
and a couple of more severe faults that can occur in the IED, see figure 575

IEC04000520 V1 EN

Figure 575: Hardware self-supervision, potential-free alarm contact

IO fail
OR Set e.g. BIM 1 Error
IO stopped
Reset
IO started
e.g. IOM2 Error OR
e.g. IO (n) Error Internal
OR FAIL
LON ERROR

FTF fatal error

OR
Watchdog NUMFAIL
RTE fatal error
Internal
Set WARN
RTE Appl-fail
OR
RTE OK Reset

IEC61850 not ready NUMWARNING

OR
RTCERROR Set RTCERROR
RTC OK Reset

TIMESYNCHERROR
OR TIMESYNCHERROR
Time reset Set

SYNCH OK Reset
SETCHGD
Settings changed
1 second pulse

en04000519-1.vsd
IEC04000519 V2 EN

Figure 576: Software self-supervision, IES (IntErrorSign) function block

1239
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Basic IED functions

Some signals are available from the INTERRSIG function block. The signals from
this function block are sent as events to the station level of the control system. The
signals from the INTERRSIG function block can also be connected to binary
outputs for signalization via output relays or they can be used as conditions for
other functions if required/desired.

Individual error signals from I/O modules can be obtained from respective module
in the Signal Matrix tool. Error signals from time synchronization can be obtained
from the time synchronization block TIME.

21.5.5.1 Internal signals

Self supervision provides several status signals, that tells about the condition of the
IED. As they provide information about the internal status of the IED, they are also
called internal signals. The internal signals can be divided into two groups.

Standard signals are always presented in the IED, see Table 919.
Hardware dependent internal signals are collected depending on the hardware
configuration, see Table 920.

Explanations of internal signals are listed in Table 921.

Table 919: Self-supervision's standard internal signals

Name of signal Description
FAIL Internal Fail status
WARNING Internal Warning status
RTCERROR Real Time Clock status
TIMESYNCHERROR Time Synchronization status
RTEERROR Runtime Execution Error status
IEC61850ERROR IEC 61850 Error status
WATCHDOG SW Watchdog Error status
LMDERROR LON/Mip Device Error status
APPERROR Runtime Application Error status
SETCHGD Settings changed
SETGRPCHGD Setting groups changed

Table 920: Self-supervision's hardware dependent internal signals

Card Name of signal Description
PSM PSM-Error Power Supply Module Error status
ADOne ADOne-Error Analog In Module Error status
BIM BIM-Error Binary In Module Error status
BOM BOM-Error Binary Out Module Error status
Table continues on next page

1240
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 21
Basic IED functions

Card Name of signal Description

IOM IOM-Error In/Out Module Error status
MIM MIM-Error Millampere Input Module Error status
LDCM LDCM-Error Line Differential Communication Error status

Table 921: Explanations of internal signals

Name of signal Reasons for activation
FAIL This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal
signals are active; LMDERROR, WATCHDOG, APPERROR,
RTEERROR, or any of the HW dependent signals
WARNING This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal
signals are active; RTCERROR, IEC61850ERROR,
TIMESYNCHERROR
RTCERROR This signal will be active when there is a hardware error with the
real time clock.
TIMESYNCHERROR This signal will be active when the source of the time
synchronization is lost, or when the time system has to make a
time reset.
RTEERROR This signal will be active if the Runtime Engine failed to do some
actions with the application threads. The actions can be loading
of settings or parameters for components, changing of setting
groups, loading or unloading of application threads.
IEC61850ERROR This signal will be active if the IEC 61850 stack did not succeed
in some actions like reading IEC 61850 configuration, startup,
for example
WATCHDOG This signal will be activated when the terminal has been under
too heavy load for at least 5 minutes. The operating systems
background task is used for the measurements.
LMDERROR LON network interface, MIP/DPS, is in an unrecoverable error
state.
APPERROR This signal will be active if one or more of the application threads
are not in the state that Runtime Engine expects. The states can
be CREATED, INITIALIZED, RUNNING, for example
SETCHGD This signal will generate an Internal Event to the Internal Event
list if any settings are changed.
SETGRPCHGD This signal will generate an Internal Event to the Internal Event
list if any setting groups are changed.

21.5.5.2 Supervision of analog inputs

The analog signals to the A/D converter is internally distributed into two different
converters, one with low amplification and one with high amplification, see Figure
577.

1241
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Basic IED functions

ADx
ADx_Low
x1

u1

x2

ADx
ADx_High Controller
x1

u1

x2

IEC05000296-3-en.vsd
IEC05000296 V3 EN

Figure 577: Simplified drawing of A/D converter for the IED.

When the signal is within measurable limits on both channels, a direct comparison
of the two A/D converter channels can be performed. If the validation fails, the
CPU will be informed and an alarm will be given for A/D converter failure.

The ADx_Controller also supervise other parts of the A/D converter.

21.5.6 Technical data

Table 922: Self supervision with internal event list
Data Value
Recording manner Continuous, event controlled
List size 40 events, first in-first out

21.6 Time synchronization

21.6.1 Functionality
The time synchronization source selector is used to select a common source of
absolute time for the IED when it is a part of a protection system. This makes it
possible to compare event and disturbance data between all IEDs in a station
automation system. A common source shall be used for IED and merging unit
when IEC 61850-9-2LE process bus communication is used.

Micro SCADA OPC server should not be used as a time

synchronization source.

1242
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 21
Basic IED functions

21.6.2 Function block

TIMEERR
TSYNCERR
RTCERR

IEC05000425-2-en.vsd
IEC05000425 V2 EN

Figure 578: TIMEERR function block

21.6.3 Signals
Table 923: TIMEERR Output signals
Name Type Description
TSYNCERR BOOLEAN Time synchronization error
RTCERR BOOLEAN Real time clock error

21.6.4 Settings
Path in the local HMI is located under Main menu/Setting/Time

Path in PCM600 is located under Main menu/Settings/Time/Synchronization

Table 924: TIMESYNCHGEN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CoarseSyncSrc Off - - Off Coarse time synchronization source
SPA
LON
SNTP
DNP
IEC103
FineSyncSource Off - - Off Fine time synchronization source
SPA
LON
BIN
GPS
GPS+SPA
GPS+LON
GPS+BIN
SNTP
GPS+SNTP
IRIG-B
GPS+IRIG-B
PPS
SyncMaster Off - - Off Activate IEDas synchronization master
SNTP-Server
TimeAdjustRate Slow - - Fast Adjust rate for time synchronization
Fast
Table continues on next page

1243
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Basic IED functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

HWSyncSrc Off - - Off Hardware time synchronization source
GPS
IRIG-B
PPS
AppSynch NoSynch - - NoSynch Time synchronization mode for
Synch application
SyncAccLevel Class T5 (1us) - - Unspecified Wanted time synchronization accuracy
Class T4 (4us)
Unspecified

Table 925: BININPUT Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ModulePosition 3 - 16 - 1 3 Hardware position of IO module for time
synchronization
BinaryInput 1 - 16 - 1 1 Binary input number for time
synchronization
BinDetection PositiveEdge - - PositiveEdge Positive or negative edge detection
NegativeEdge

Table 926: SNTP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ServerIP-Add 0 - 255 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Server IP-address
Address
RedServIP-Add 0 - 255 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Redundant server IP-address
Address

1244
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 21
Basic IED functions

Table 927: DSTBEGIN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MonthInYear January - - March Month in year when daylight time starts
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
DayInWeek Sunday - - Sunday Day in week when daylight time starts
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
WeekInMonth Last - - Last Week in month when daylight time starts
First
Second
Third
Fourth
UTCTimeOfDay -24:00 - - 1:00 UTC Time of day in hours when daylight
-23:30 time starts
-23:00
-22:30
48:00

1245
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Basic IED functions

Table 928: DSTEND Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MonthInYear January - - October Month in year when daylight time ends
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
DayInWeek Sunday - - Sunday Day in week when daylight time ends
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
WeekInMonth Last - - Last Week in month when daylight time ends
First
Second
Third
Fourth
UTCTimeOfDay -24:00 - - 1:00 UTC Time of day in hours when daylight
-23:30 time ends
-23:00
-22:30
48:00

1246
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 21
Basic IED functions

Table 929: TIMEZONE Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TimeZone -12:00 - - 1:00 Local time from UTC
-11:00
-10:00
-9:30
-9:00
-8:00
-7:00
-6:00
-5:00
-4:30
-4:00
-3:30
-3:00
-2:00
-1:00
0:00
1:00
2:00
3:00
3:30
4:00
4:30
5:00
5:30
5:45
6:00
6:30
7:00
8:00
8:45
9:00
9:30
10:00
10:30
11:00
11:30
12:00
12:45
13:00
14:00

Table 930: IRIG-B Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SynchType BNC - - Opto Type of synchronization
Opto
TimeDomain LocalTime - - LocalTime Time domain
UTC
Encoding IRIG-B - - IRIG-B Type of encoding
1344
1344TZ
TimeZoneAs1344 MinusTZ - - PlusTZ Time zone as in 1344 standard
PlusTZ

1247
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Basic IED functions

21.6.5 Operation principle

21.6.5.1 General concepts

Time definitions
The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock, and the
time the clock is intended to have. Clock accuracy indicates the increase in error,
that is, the time gained or lost by the clock. A disciplined clock knows its own
faults and tries to compensate for them.

Design of the time system (clock synchronization)

The time system is based on a software clock, which can be adjusted from external
time sources and a hardware clock. The protection and control modules will be
timed from a hardware clock, which runs independently from the software clock.
See figure 579

External
Synchronization
sources Time tagging and general synchronisation

Off
Comm- Protection
LON Events
Time- unication and control
SPA Regulator functions
Min. pulse
(Setting,
GPS see
SW-time
technical
SNTP
reference
DNP manual) Connected when GPS-time is
IRIG-B used for differential protection

PPS

Synchronization for differential protection

(ECHO-mode or GPS)
Off Time-
GPS Regulator HW-time
(fast or slow)
IRIG-B
PPS Diff.-
A/D Trans-
converter comm- ducers*
unication

*IEC 61850-9-2

IEC08000287-2-en.vsd
IEC08000287 V2 EN

Figure 579: Design of time system (clock synchronization)

All time tagging is performed by the software clock. When for example a status
signal is changed in the protection system with the function based on free running
hardware clock, the event is time tagged by the software clock when it reaches the
event recorder. Thus the hardware clock can run independently.

1248
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 21
Basic IED functions

The echo mode for the differential protection is based on the hardware clock. Thus,
there is no need to synchronize the hardware clock and the software clock.

The synchronization of the hardware clock to the software clock is necessary only
when GPS or IRIG B 00X with optical fibre, IEEE 1344 is used for differential
protection. The two clock systems are synchronized by a special clock
synchronization unit with two modes, fast and slow. A special feature, an
automatic fast clock time regulator is used. The automatic fast mode makes the
synchronization time as short as possible during start up or at interruptions/
disturbances in the GPS timing. The setting fast or slow is also available on the
local HMI.

If a GPS clock is used for 670 series IEDs other than line differential RED670, the
hardware and software clocks are not synchronized

Fast clock synchronization mode

At startup and after interruptions in the GPS or IRIG B time signal, the clock
deviation between the GPS time and the internal differential time system can be
substantial. A new startup is also required after for example maintenance of the
auxiliary voltage system.

When the time difference is >16s, the differential function is blocked and the time
regulator for the hardware clock automatically uses a fast mode to synchronize the
clock systems. The time adjustment is made with an exponential function, that is,
big time adjustment steps in the beginning, then smaller steps until a time deviation
between the GPS time and the differential time system of >16s has been reached.
Then the differential function is enabled and the synchronization remains in fast
mode or switches to slow mode, depending on the setting.

Slow clock synchronization mode

During normal service, a setting with slow synchronization mode is normally used,
which prevents the hardware clock to make too big time steps, >16s, emanating
from the differential protection requirement of correct timing.

Synchronization principle
From a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a hierarchical
structure. A function is synchronized from a higher level and provides
synchronization to lower levels.

1249
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Basic IED functions

Synchronization from
a higher level

Function

Optional synchronization of
modules at a lower level

IEC09000342-1-en.vsd
IEC09000342 V1 EN

Figure 580: Synchronization principle

A function is said to be synchronized when it periodically receives synchronization

messages from a higher level. As the level decreases, the accuracy of the
synchronization decreases as well. A function can have several potential sources of
synchronization, with different maximum errors. This gives the function the
possibility to choose the source with the best quality, and to adjust its internal clock
after this source. The maximum error of a clock can be defined as:

The maximum error of the last used synchronization message

The time since the last used synchronization message
The rate accuracy of the internal clock in the function.

21.6.5.2 Real-time clock (RTC) operation

The IED has a built-in real-time clock (RTC) with a resolution of one second. The
clock has a built-in calendar that handles leap years through 2038.

Real-time clock at power off

During power off, the system time in the IED is kept by a capacitor-backed real-
time clock that will provide 35 ppm accuracy for 5 days. This means that if the
power is off, the time in the IED may drift with 3 seconds per day, during 5 days,
and after this time the time will be lost completely.

Real-time clock at startup

Time synchronization startup procedure

The first message that contains the full time (as for instance LON, SNTP and GPS)
gives an accurate time to the IED. After the initial setting of the clock, one of three
things happens with each of the coming synchronization messages configured as
fine:

If the synchronization message, which is similar to the other messages, has an

offset compared to the internal time in the IED, the message is used directly

1250
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 21
Basic IED functions

for synchronization, that is, for adjusting the internal clock to obtain zero
offset at the next coming time message.
If the synchronization message has an offset that is large compared to the other
messages, a spike-filter in the IED removes this time-message.
If the synchronization message has an offset that is large, and the following
message also has a large offset, the spike filter does not act and the offset in
the synchronization message is compared to a threshold that defaults to 500
milliseconds.If the offset is more than the threshold, the clock jumps a whole
number of seconds so the remaining offset is less than 500ms. The remaining
offset is then slowly adjusted with 10000 ppm until the offset is removed.
With an adjustment of 10000ppm it takes 50 seconds to remove an offset of
500 milliseconds.

Synchronization messages configured as coarse are only used for initial setting of
the time. After this has been done, the messages are checked against the internal
time and only an offset of more than 10 seconds resets the time.

Rate accuracy
In the IED, the rate accuracy at cold start is 100 ppm but if the IED is synchronized
for a while, the rate accuracy is approximately 1 ppm if the surrounding
temperature is constant. Normally, it takes an hour to reach full accuracy.

Time-out on synchronization sources

All synchronization interfaces has a time-out and a configured interface must
receive time-messages regularly in order not to give an error signal (TSYNCERR).
Normally, the time-out is set so that one message can be lost without getting a
TSYNCERR, but if more than one message is lost, a TSYNCERR is given.

21.6.5.3 Synchronization alternatives

Four main alternatives of external time synchronization are available. The

synchronization message is applied:
via any of the communication ports of the IED as a telegram message
including date and time
as a minute pulse connected to a binary input
via GPS
via IRIG-B or PPS

The minute pulse is used to fine tune already existing time in the IEDs.

Synchronization via SNTP

SNTP provides a ping-pong method of synchronization. A message is sent from an
IED to an SNTP server, and the SNTP server returns the message after filling in a
reception time and a transmission time. SNTP operates via the normal Ethernet
network that connects IEDs together in an IEC 61850 network. For SNTP to
operate properly, there must be an SNTP server present, preferably in the same

1251
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Basic IED functions

station. The SNTP synchronization provides an accuracy that gives +/- 1 ms

accuracy for binary inputs. The IED itself can be set as an SNTP-time server.

SNTP provides complete time-information and can be used as both fine and coarse
time synch source. However SNTP shall normally be used as fine synch only. The
only reason to use SNTP as coarse synch is in combination with PPS as fine
source. The combination SNTP as both fine and coarse source shall not be used.

SNTP server requirements

The SNTP server to be used is connected to the local network, that is not more than
4-5 switches or routers away from the IED. The SNTP server is dedicated for its
task, or at least equipped with a real-time operating system, that is not a PC with
SNTP server software. The SNTP server should be stable, that is, either
synchronized from a stable source like GPS, or local without synchronization.
Using a local SNTP server without synchronization as primary or secondary server
in a redundant configuration is not recommended.

Synchronization via Serial Communication Module (SLM)

On the serial buses (both LON and SPA) two types of synchronization messages
are sent.

Coarse message is sent every minute and comprises complete date and time,
that is, year, month, day, hours, minutes, seconds and milliseconds.
Fine message is sent every second and comprises only seconds and milliseconds.

The SLM module is located on the AD conversion Module (ADM).

Synchronization via Built-in-GPS

The built in GPS clock modules receives and decodes time information from the
global positioning system. The modules are located on the GPS time
synchronization Module (GTM).

Synchronization via binary input

The IED accepts minute pulses to a binary input. These minute pulses can be
generated from, for example station master clock. If the station master clock is not
synchronized from a world wide source, time will be a relative time valid for the
substation. Both positive and negative edge on the signal can be accepted. This
signal is also considered as a fine time synchronization signal.

The minute pulse is connected to any channel on any Binary Input Module in the
IED. The electrical characteristic is thereby the same as for any other binary input.

If the objective of synchronization is to achieve a relative time within the

substation and if no station master clock with minute pulse output is available, a
simple minute pulse generator can be designed and used for synchronization of the
IEDs. The minute pulse generator can be created using the logical elements and
timers available in the IED.

1252
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 21
Basic IED functions

The definition of a minute pulse is that it occurs one minute after the last pulse. As
only the flanks are detected, the flank of the minute pulse shall occur one minute
after the last flank.

Binary minute pulses are checked with reference to frequency.

Pulse data:

Period time (a) should be 60 seconds.

Pulse length (b):
Minimum pulse length should be >50 ms.
Maximum pulse length is optional.
Amplitude (c) - please refer to section "Binary input module (BIM)".

Deviations in the period time larger than 50 ms will cause TSYNCERR.

en05000251.vsd
IEC05000251 V1 EN

Figure 581: Binary minute pulses

The default time-out-time for a minute pulse is two minutes, and if no valid minute
pulse is received within two minutes a SYNCERR will be given.

If contact bounce occurs, only the first pulse will be detected as a minute pulse.
The next minute pulse will be registered first 60 s - 50 ms after the last contact bounce.

If the minute pulses are perfect, for example, it is exactly 60 seconds between the
pulses, contact bounces might occur 49 ms after the actual minute pulse without
effecting the system. If contact bounce occurs more than 50 ms, for example, it is
less than 59950 ms between the two most adjacent positive (or negative) flanks, the
minute pulse will not be accepted.

Binary synchronization example

An IED is configured to use only binary input, and a valid binary input is applied
to a binary input card. The HMI is used to tell the IED the approximate time and
the minute pulse is used to synchronize the IED thereafter. The definition of a
minute pulse is that it occurs one minute after the previous minute pulse, so the
first minute pulse is not used at all. The second minute pulse will probably be
rejected due to the spike filter. The third pulse will give the IED a good time and

1253
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Basic IED functions

will reset the time so that the fourth minute pulse will occur on a minute border.
After the first three minutes, the time in the IED will be good if the coarse time is
set properly via the HMI or the RTC backup still keeps the time since last up-time.
If the minute pulse is removed for instance for an hour, the internal time will drift
by maximum the error rate in the internal clock. If the minute pulse is returned, the
first pulse automatically is rejected. The second pulse will possibly be rejected due
to the spike filter. The third pulse will either set the time, if the time offset is more
than 500 ms, or adjust the time, if the time offset is small enough. If the time is set,
the application will be brought to a safe state before the time is set. If the time is
adjusted, the time will reach its destination within one minute.

Synchronization via IRIG-B

IRIG-B is a protocol used only for time synchronization. A clock can provide local
time of the year in this format. The B in IRIG-B states that 100 bits per second
are transmitted, and the message is sent every second. After IRIG-B there are
numbers stating if and how the signal is modulated and the information transmitted.

To receive IRIG-B there are two connectors in the IRIG-B module, one galvanic
BNC connector and one optical ST connector. IRIG-B 12x messages can be
supplied via the galvanic interface, and IRIG-B 00x messages can be supplied via
either the galvanic interface or the optical interface, where x (in 00x or 12x) means
a number in the range of 1-7.

00 means that a base band is used, and the information can be fed into the IRIG-
B module via the BNC contact or an optical fiber. 12 means that a 1 kHz
modulation is used. In this case the information must go into the module via the
BNC connector.

If the x in 00x or 12x is 4, 5, 6 or 7, the time message from IRIG-B contains

information of the year. If x is 0, 1, 2 or 3, the information contains only the time
within the year, and year information has to come from PCM600 or local HMI.

The IRIG-B module also takes care of IEEE1344 messages that are sent by IRIG-B
clocks, as IRIG-B previously did not have any year information. IEEE1344 is
compatible with IRIG-B and contains year information and information of the time-
zone.

It is recommended to use IEEE 1344 for supplying time information to the IRIG-B
module. In this case, send also the local time in the messages, as this local time
plus the TZ Offset supplied in the message equals UTC at all times.

21.6.5.4 Process bus IEC 61850-9-2LE synchronization

For the time synchronization of the process bus communication (IEC 61850-9-2LE
protocol) an optical PPS or IRIG-B signal can be used. This signal should emanate
from either an external GPS clock, or from the merging unit.

An optical PPS signal can be supplied to the optical interface of the IRIG-B module.

1254
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 21
Basic IED functions

21.6.6 Technical data

Table 931: Time synchronization, time tagging
Function Value
Time tagging resolution, events and sampled measurement values 1 ms
Time tagging error with synchronization once/min (minute pulse 1.0 ms typically
synchronization), events and sampled measurement values
Time tagging error with SNTP synchronization, sampled 1.0 ms typically
measurement values

21.7 Parameter setting groups

21.7.1 Functionality
Use the six different groups of settings to optimize the IED operation for different
power system conditions. Creating and switching between fine-tuned setting sets,
either from the local HMI or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly
adaptable IED that can be applied to a variety of power system scenarios.

21.7.2 Function block

ActiveGroup
ACTGRP1 GRP1
ACTGRP2 GRP2
ACTGRP3 GRP3
ACTGRP4 GRP4
ACTGRP5 GRP5
ACTGRP6 GRP6
SETCHGD

IEC05000433_2_en.vsd
IEC05000433 V2 EN

Figure 582: ActiveGroup function block

SETGRPS
MAXSETGR

IEC05000716_2_en.vsd
IEC05000716 V2 EN

Figure 583: SETGRPS function block

21.7.3 Signals
Table 932: ACTVGRP Input signals
Name Type Default Description
ACTGRP1 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 1 as active
ACTGRP2 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 2 as active
ACTGRP3 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 3 as active
Table continues on next page

1255
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Basic IED functions

Name Type Default Description

ACTGRP4 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 4 as active
ACTGRP5 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 5 as active
ACTGRP6 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 6 as active

Table 933: ACTVGRP Output signals

Name Type Description
GRP1 BOOLEAN Setting group 1 is active
GRP2 BOOLEAN Setting group 2 is active
GRP3 BOOLEAN Setting group 3 is active
GRP4 BOOLEAN Setting group 4 is active
GRP5 BOOLEAN Setting group 5 is active
GRP6 BOOLEAN Setting group 6 is active
SETCHGD BOOLEAN Pulse when setting changed

21.7.4 Settings
Table 934: ACTVGRP Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
t 0.0 - 10.0 s 0.1 1.0 Pulse length of pulse when setting
changed

Table 935: SETGRPS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ActiveSetGrp SettingGroup1 - - SettingGroup1 Active setting group
SettingGroup2
SettingGroup3
SettingGroup4
SettingGroup5
SettingGroup6
MaxNoSetGrp 1-6 - 1 1 Max number of setting groups 1-6

21.7.5 Operation principle

Parameter setting groups ActiveGroup function has six functional inputs, each
corresponding to one of the setting groups stored in the IED. Activation of any of
these inputs changes the active setting group. Seven functional output signals are
available for configuration purposes, so that information on the active setting group
is always available.

A setting group is selected by using the local HMI, from a front connected personal
computer, remotely from the station control or station monitoring system or by
activating the corresponding input to the ActiveGroup function block.

1256
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 21
Basic IED functions

Each input of the function block can be configured to connect to any of the binary
inputs in the IED. To do this PCM600 must be used.

The external control signals are used for activating a suitable setting group when
adaptive functionality is necessary. Input signals that should activate setting groups
must be either permanent or a pulse exceeding 400 ms.

More than one input may be activated at the same time. In such cases the lower
order setting group has priority. This means that if for example both group four and
group two are set to be activated, group two will be the one activated.

Every time the active group is changed, the output signal SETCHGD is sending a
pulse.

The parameter MAXSETGR defines the maximum number of setting groups in use
to switch between.

ACTIVATE GROUP 6
ACTIVATE GROUP 5
ACTIVATE GROUP 4
ACTIVATE GROUP 3
ACTIVATE GROUP 2
+RL2 ACTIVATE GROUP 1

IOx-Bly1 ActiveGroup
ACTGRP1 GRP1
IOx-Bly2
ACTGRP2 GRP2
IOx-Bly3
ACTGRP3 GRP3
IOx-Bly4
ACTGRP4 GRP4
IOx-Bly5
ACTGRP5 GRP5
IOx-Bly6 ACTGRP6
GRP6
SETCHGD

en05000119.vsd
IEC05000119 V2 EN

Figure 584: Connection of the function to external circuits

The above example also includes seven output signals, for confirmation of which
group that is active.

SETGRPS function block has an input where the number of setting groups used is
defined. Switching can only be done within that number of groups. The number of
setting groups selected to be used will be filtered so only the setting groups used
will be shown on the Parameter Setting Tool.

1257
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Basic IED functions

21.8 ChangeLock function CHNGLCK

21.8.1 Functionality
Change lock function CHNGLCK is used to block further changes to the IED
configuration and settings once the commissioning is complete. The purpose is to
block inadvertent IED configuration changes beyond a certain point in time.

The change lock function activation is normally connected to a binary input.

21.8.2 Function block

CHNGLCK
LOCK

IEC09000946-1-en.vsd
IEC09000946 V1 EN

Figure 585: CHNGLCK function block

21.8.3 Signals
Table 936: CHNGLCK Input signals
Name Type Default Description
LOCK BOOLEAN 0 Activate change lock

Table 937: CHNGLCK Output signals

Name Type Description
ACTIVE BOOLEAN Change lock active
OVERRIDE BOOLEAN Change lock override

21.8.4 Settings
Table 938: CHNGLCK Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation LockHMI and Com - - LockHMI and Com Operation mode of change lock
LockHMI,
EnableCom
EnableHMI,
LockCom

1258
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 21
Basic IED functions

21.8.5 Operation principle

The Change lock function (CHNGLCK) is configured using ACT.

The function, when activated, will still allow the following changes of the IED
state that does not involve reconfiguring of the IED:
Monitoring
Reading events
Resetting events
Reading disturbance data
Clear disturbances
Reset LEDs
Reset counters and other runtime component states
Control operations
Set system time
Enter and exit from test mode
Change of active setting group

The binary input signal LOCK controlling the function is defined in ACT or SMT:
Binary input Function
1 Activated
0 Deactivated

21.9 Test mode functionality TEST

21.9.1 Functionality
When the Test mode functionality TESTMODE is activated, all the functions in the
IED are automatically blocked. Activated TESTMODE is indicating by a flashing
yellow LED on the local HMI. It is then possible to unblock every function(s)
individually from the local HMI to perform required tests.

When leaving TESTMODE, all blockings are removed and the IED resumes
normal operation. However, if during TESTMODE operation, power is removed
and later restored, the IED will remain in TESTMODE with the same protection
functions blocked or unblocked as before the power was removed. All testing will
be done with actually set and configured values within the IED. No settings will be
changed, thus mistakes are avoided.

1259
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Basic IED functions

21.9.2 Function block

TESTMODE
IED_TEST TEST
IED_TEST
BLOCK
NOEVENT
INPUT
SETTING
IEC61850

IEC14000072-1-en.vsd
IEC09000219 V2 EN

Figure 586: TESTMODE function block

21.9.3 Signals
Table 939: TESTMODE Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IED_TEST BOOLEAN 0 Activate IED test mode

Table 940: TESTMODE Output signals

Name Type Description
TEST BOOLEAN In test via IED TEST or via LD0 Mode
IED_TEST BOOLEAN IED test mode is active
BLOCK BOOLEAN Active when LD0 is blocked or test blocked
NOEVENT BOOLEAN Event disabled during test mode
INPUT BOOLEAN IED TEST input is active
SETTING BOOLEAN IED test mode setting is On
IEC61850 BOOLEAN Active when LD0 Mode is in Blocked, Test or Test
blocked

21.9.4 Settings
Table 941: TESTMODE Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IEDTestMode Off - - Off Activate IED Test mode
On
EventDisable Off - - Off Event disable during test mode
On
CmdTestEd1 Off - - Off Require test bit in command at test
On mode (only for IEC61850 Ed1)

21.9.5 Operation principle

Put the IED into test mode to test functions in the IED. Set the IED in test mode by

1260
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 21
Basic IED functions

configuration, activating the input SIGNAL on the function block TESTMODE.

setting TestMode to On in the local HMI, under Main menu/TEST/IED test
mode.

While the IED is in test mode, the output ACTIVE of the function block
TESTMODE is activated. The outputs of the function block TESTMODE shows
the cause of the Test mode: being in On state. If the input from the configuration
(OUTPUT signal is activated) or setting from local HMI (SETTING signal is
activated).

While the IED is in test mode, the yellow START LED will flash and all functions
are blocked. Any function can be unblocked individually regarding functionality
and event signalling.

Most of the functions in the IED can individually be blocked by means of settings
from the local HMI. To enable these blockings the IED must be set in test mode
(output ACTIVE is activated), see example in figure 587. When leaving the test
mode, that is entering normal mode, these blockings are disabled and everything is
set to normal operation. All testing will be done with actually set and configured
parameter values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus no mistakes are
possible.

The blocked functions will still be blocked next time entering the test mode, if the
blockings were not reset. The released function will return to blocked state if test
mode is set to off.

The blocking of a function concerns all output signals from the actual function, so
no outputs will be activated.

When a binary input is used to set the IED in test mode and a
parameter, that requires restart of the application, is changed, the
IED will re-enter test mode and all functions will be blocked, also
functions that were unblocked before the change. During the re-
entering to test mode, all functions will be temporarily unblocked
for a short time, which might lead to unwanted operations. This is
only valid if the IED is set in TEST mode by a binary input, not by
local HMI.

The TESTMODE function block might be used to automatically block functions

when a test handle is inserted in a test switch. A contact in the test switch (RTXP24
contact 29-30) can supply a binary input which in turn is configured to the
TESTMODE function block.

Each of the functions includes the blocking from the TESTMODE function block.
A typical example from the undervoltage function is shown in figure 587.

The functions can also be blocked from sending events over IEC 61850 station bus
to prevent filling station and SCADA databases with test events, for example
during a commissioning or maintenance test.

1261
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Basic IED functions

U Disconnection

Normal voltage

U1<

U2<

tBlkUV1 <
t1,t1Min
IntBlkStVal1
tBlkUV2 <
t2,t2Min
IntBlkStVal2

Time

Block step 1

Block step 2
en05000466.vsd
IEC05000466 V1 EN

Figure 587: Example of blocking the time delayed undervoltage protection

function.

21.10 IED identifiers

21.10.1 Functionality
IED identifiers (TERMINALID) function allows the user to identify the individual
IED in the system, not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country.

Use only characters A-Z, a-z and 0-9 in station, object and unit names.

1262
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 21
Basic IED functions

21.10.2 Settings
Table 942: TERMINALID Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
StationName 0 - 18 - 1 Station name Station name
StationNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Station number
ObjectName 0 - 18 - 1 Object name Object name
ObjectNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Object number
UnitName 0 - 18 - 1 Unit name Unit name
UnitNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Unit number
IEDMainFunType 0 - 255 - 1 0 IED main function type for
IEC60870-5-103
TechnicalKey 0 - 16 - 1 AA0B0Q0A0 Technical key (part 1)
0 - 16 - 1 Technical key (part 2)
0 - 16 - 1 Technical key (part 3)
0 - 16 - 1 Technical key (part 4)

21.11 Product information

21.11.1 Functionality
The Product identifiers function contains constant data (i.e. not possible to change)
that uniquely identifies the IED:

ProductVer
ProductDef
SerialNo
OrderingNo
ProductionDate
IEDProdType

The settings are visible on the local HMI , under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED
status/Product identifiersand underMain menu/Diagnostics/IED Status/IED
identifiers

This information is very helpful when interacting with ABB product support (e.g.
during repair and maintenance).

21.11.2 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

1263
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Basic IED functions

21.11.3 Factory defined settings

The factory defined settings are very useful for identifying a specific version and
very helpful in the case of maintenance, repair, interchanging IEDs between
different Substation Automation Systems and upgrading. The factory made settings
can not be changed by the customer. They can only be viewed. The settings are
found in the local HMI under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/Product
identifiers

The following identifiers are available:

IEDProdType
Describes the type of the IED (like REL, REC or RET). Example: REL670
ProductDef
Describes the release number, from the production. Example: 1.2.2.0
ProductVer
Describes the product version. Example: 1.2.3

1 is the Major version of the manufactured product this means, new platform of the
product
2 is the Minor version of the manufactured product this means, new functions or new
hardware added to the product
3 is the Major revision of the manufactured product this means, functions or hardware
is either changed or enhanced in the product

IEDMainFunType
Main function type code according to IEC 60870-5-103. Example: 128
(meaning line protection).
SerialNo
OrderingNo
ProductionDate

21.12 Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI

21.12.1 Functionality
The Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI) function is used within the Application
Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT),
see the application manual to get information about how binary inputs are brought
in for one IED configuration.

1264
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 21
Basic IED functions

21.12.2 Function block

SMBI
^VIN1 ^BI1
^VIN2 ^BI2
^VIN3 ^BI3
^VIN4 ^BI4
^VIN5 ^BI5
^VIN6 ^BI6
^VIN7 ^BI7
^VIN8 ^BI8
^VIN9 ^BI9
^VIN10 ^BI10

IEC05000434-2-en.vsd
IEC05000434 V2 EN

Figure 588: SMBI function block

21.12.3 Signals
Table 943: SMBI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BI1 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI2 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI3 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI4 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI5 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI6 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI7 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI8 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI9 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI10 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input

Table 944: SMBI Output signals

Name Type Description
BI1 BOOLEAN Binary input 1
BI2 BOOLEAN Binary input 2
BI3 BOOLEAN Binary input 3
BI4 BOOLEAN Binary input 4
BI5 BOOLEAN Binary input 5
BI6 BOOLEAN Binary input 6
BI7 BOOLEAN Binary input 7
BI8 BOOLEAN Binary input 8
BI9 BOOLEAN Binary input 9
BI10 BOOLEAN Binary input 10

1265
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Basic IED functions

21.12.4 Operation principle

The Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI) function , see figure 588, receives its
inputs from the real (hardware) binary inputs via the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT),
and makes them available to the rest of the configuration via its outputs, BI1 to
BI10. The inputs and outputs, as well as the whole block, can be given a user
defined name. These names will be represented in SMT as information which
signals shall be connected between physical IO and SMBI function. The input/
output user defined name will also appear on the respective output/input signal.

21.13 Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO

21.13.1 Functionality
The Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO) function is used within the
Application Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix
Tool (SMT), see the application manual to get information about how binary inputs
are sent from one IED configuration.

21.13.2 Function block

SMBO
BO1 ^BO1
BO2 ^BO2
BO3 ^BO3
BO4 ^BO4
BO5 ^BO5
BO6 ^BO6
BO7 ^BO7
BO8 ^BO8
BO9 ^BO9
BO10 ^BO10

IEC05000439-2-en.vsd
IEC05000439 V2 EN

Figure 589: SMBO function block

21.13.3 Signals
Table 945: SMBO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO1 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO2 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO2 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO3 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO3 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO4 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO4 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO5 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO5 in Signal Matrix Tool
Table continues on next page

1266
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 21
Basic IED functions

Name Type Default Description

BO6 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO6 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO7 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO7 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO8 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO8 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO9 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO9 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO10 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO10 in Signal Matrix Tool

21.13.4 Operation principle

The Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO) function , see figure 589, receives
logical signal from the IED configuration, which is transferring to the real
(hardware) outputs, via the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT). The inputs in SMBO are
BO1 to BO10 and they, as well as the whole function block, can be tag-named. The
name tags will appear in SMT as information which signals shall be connected
between physical IO and the SMBO.

It is important that SMBO inputs are connected when SMBOs

are connected to physical outputs through the Signal Matrix
Tool. If SMBOs are connected (in SMT) but their inputs not, all
the physical outputs will be set by default. This might cause
malfunction of primary equipment and/or injury to personnel.

21.14 Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI

21.14.1 Functionality
The Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI) function is used within the Application
Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT),
see the application manual to get information about how milliamp (mA) inputs are
brought in for one IED configuration.

21.14.2 Function block

SMMI
^VIN1 AI1
^VIN2 AI2
^VIN3 AI3
^VIN4 AI4
^VIN5 AI5
^VIN6 AI6

IEC05000440-2-en.vsd
IEC05000440 V2 EN

Figure 590: SMMI function block

1267
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Basic IED functions

21.14.3 Signals
Table 946: SMMI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
AI1 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input
AI2 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input
AI3 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input
AI4 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input
AI5 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input
AI6 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input

Table 947: SMMI Output signals

Name Type Description
AI1 REAL Analog milliampere input 1
AI2 REAL Analog milliampere input 2
AI3 REAL Analog milliampere input 3
AI4 REAL Analog milliampere input 4
AI5 REAL Analog milliampere input 5
AI6 REAL Analog milliampere input 6

21.14.4 Operation principle

The Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI) function, see figure 590, receives its
inputs from the real (hardware) mA inputs via the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), and
makes them available to the rest of the configuration via its analog outputs, named
AI1 to AI6. The inputs, as well as the whole block, can be tag-named. These tags
will be represented in SMT.

The outputs on SMMI are normally connected to the IEC61850 generic

communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) function for further use of the mA signals.

21.15 Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI

21.15.1 Functionality
Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI), also known as the preprocessor function
block, analyses the connected four analog signals (three phases and neutral) and
calculates all relevant information from them like the phasor magnitude, phase
angle, frequency, true RMS value, harmonics, sequence components and so on.

1268
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 21
Basic IED functions

This information is then used by the respective functions connected to this SMAI
block in ACT (for example protection, measurement or monitoring functions).

21.15.2 Frequency values

The frequency functions includes a functionality based on level of positive
sequence voltage, IntBlockLevel, to validate if the frequency measurement is valid
or not. If positive sequence voltage is lower than IntBlockLevel the function is
blocked. IntBlockLevel, is set in % of UBase/3

If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-Ph at least two of the inputs GRPxL1,

GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 must be connected in order to calculate positive sequence
voltage. Note that phase to phase inputs shall always be connected as follows: L1-
L2 to GRPxL1, L2-L3 to GRPxL2, L3-L1 to GRPxL3. If SMAI setting
ConnectionType is Ph-N, all three inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 must be
connected in order to calculate positive sequence voltage.

If only one phase-phase voltage is available and SMAI setting ConnectionType is

Ph-Ph the user is advised to connect two (not three) of the inputs GRPxL1,
GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 to the same voltage input as shown in figure 591 to make
SMAI calculating a positive sequence voltage.

IEC10000060-1-en.vsd
IEC10000060 V1 EN

Figure 591: Connection example

The above described scenario does not work if SMAI setting

ConnectionType is Ph-N. If only one phase-earth voltage is
available, the same type of connection can be used but the SMAI
ConnectionType setting must still be Ph-Ph and this has to be
accounted for when setting IntBlockLevel. If SMAI setting
ConnectionType is Ph-N and the same voltage is connected to all
three SMAI inputs, the positive sequence voltage will be zero and
the frequency functions will not work properly.

The outputs from the above configured SMAI block shall only be
used for Overfrequency protection (SAPTOF), Underfrequency
protection (SAPTUF) and Rate-of-change frequency protection

1269
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Basic IED functions

(SAPFRC) due to that all other information except frequency and

positive sequence voltage might be wrongly calculated.

21.15.3 Function block

SMAI1
BLOCK SPFCOUT
DFTSPFC G1AI3P
REVROT G1AI1
^GRP1L1 G1AI2
^GRP1L2 G1AI3
^GRP1L3 G1AI4
^GRP1N G1N

IEC14000027-1-en.vsd
IEC14000027 V1 EN

Figure 592: SMAI1 function block

SMAI2
BLOCK G2AI3P
REVROT G2AI1
^GRP2L1 G2AI2
^GRP2L2 G2AI3
^GRP2L3 G2AI4
^GRP2N G2N

IEC14000028-1-en.vsd
IEC14000028 V1 EN

Figure 593: SMAI2 function block

21.15.4 Signals
Table 948: SMAI1 Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block group 1
DFTSPFC REAL 20.0 Number of samples per fundamental cycle used
for DFT calculation
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation group 1
GRP1L1 STRING - First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2
quantity
GRP1L2 STRING - Second analog input used for phase L2 or L2-L3
quantity
GRP1L3 STRING - Third analog input used for phase L3 or L3-L1
quantity
GRP1N STRING - Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral
quantity

1270
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 21
Basic IED functions

Table 949: SMAI1 Output signals

Name Type Description
SPFCOUT REAL Number of samples per fundamental cycle from
internal DFT reference function
G1AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 3-phase group
G1AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 1
G1AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 2
G1AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 3
G1AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 4
G1N GROUP SIGNAL Group parameter for residual sample

Table 950: SMAI2 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block group 2
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation group 2
GRP2L1 STRING - First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2
quantity
GRP2L2 STRING - Second analog input used for phase L2 or L2-L3
quantity
GRP2L3 STRING - Third analog input used for phase L3 or L3-L1
quantity
GRP2N STRING - Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral
quantity

Table 951: SMAI2 Output signals

Name Type Description
G2AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 3-phase group
G2AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 1
G2AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 2
G2AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 3
G2AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 4
G2N GROUP SIGNAL Group parameter for residual sample

21.15.5 Settings

Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default

value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available. Internal
nominal frequency DFT reference is then the reference.

1271
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Basic IED functions

Table 952: SMAI1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
DFTRefExtOut InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference for external output
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
ConnectionType Ph-N - - Ph-N Input connection type
Ph-Ph
AnalogInputType Voltage - - Voltage Analog input signal type
Current

Table 953: SMAI1 Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Negation Off - - Off Negation
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 % 1 10 Limit for frequency calculation in % of
UBase

1272
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 21
Basic IED functions

Table 954: SMAI2 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
ConnectionType Ph-N - - Ph-N Input connection type
Ph-Ph
AnalogInputType Voltage - - Voltage Analog input signal type
Current

Table 955: SMAI2 Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Negation Off - - Off Negation
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 % 1 10 Limit for frequency calculation in % of
UBase

21.15.6 Operation principle

Every Signal matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI) can receive four analog
signals (three phases and one neutral or residual value), either voltage or current,
see figure 592 and figure 593. SMAI outputs give information about every aspect
of the 3ph analog signals acquired (phase angle, RMS value, frequency and
frequency derivates etc. 244 values in total). The BLOCK input will force all
outputs to value zero.

The output signal AI1 to AI4 are single phase outputs which directly represent the
four inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2, GRPxL3 and GRPxN, x=1-12. AIN is always
calculated residual sum from the first three inputs. A3P is grouped, three-phase
information containing all relevant information about four connected inputs. Note
that all other functions, with a few exceptions, use this output in configuration.
Note that function block will always calculate the residual sum of current/voltage if
the input is not connected in SMT. Applications with a few exceptions shall always
be connected to AI3P.

1273
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Basic IED functions

21.16 Global base values GBASVAL

21.16.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Global base values GBASVAL - -

21.16.2 Functionality
Global base values function (GBASVAL) is used to provide global values,
common for all applicable functions within the IED. One set of global values
consists of values for current, voltage and apparent power and it is possible to have
six different sets.

This is an advantage since all applicable functions in the IED use a single source of
base values. This facilitates consistency throughout the IED and also facilitates a
single point for updating values when necessary.

Each applicable function in the IED has a parameter, GlobalBaseSel, defining one
out of the six sets of GBASVAL functions.

21.16.3 Settings

Table 956: GBASVAL Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Global base voltage
IBase 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Global base current
SBase 1.00 - 200000.00 MVA 0.05 2000.00 Global base apparent power

21.17 Primary system values PRIMVAL

21.17.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Primary system values PRIMVAL - -

1274
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 21
Basic IED functions

21.17.2 Functionality
The rated system frequency is set under Main menu/General settings/ Power
system/ Primary Values in the local HMI and PCM600 parameter setting tree.

21.17.3 Settings
Table 957: PRIMVAL Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Frequency 50.0 - 60.0 Hz 10.0 50.0 Rated system frequency
PhaseRotation Normal=L1L2L3 - - Normal=L1L2L3 System phase rotation
Inverse=L3L2L1

21.18 Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM

21.18.1 Functionality
Summation block 3 phase function 3PHSUM is used to get the sum of two sets of
three-phase analog signals (of the same type) for those IED functions that might
need it.

21.18.2 Function block

3PHSUM
BLOCK AI3P
DFTSPFC AI1
G1AI3P* AI2
G2AI3P* AI3
AI4

IEC05000441-2-en.vsd
IEC05000441 V2 EN

Figure 594: 3PHSUM function block

21.18.3 Signals
Table 958: 3PHSUM Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation
G1AI3P GROUP - Group 1 three phase analog input from first SMAI
SIGNAL
G2AI3P GROUP - Group 2 three phase analog input from second
SIGNAL SMAI

1275
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Basic IED functions

Table 959: 3PHSUM Output signals

Name Type Description
AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of two connected three phase
inputs
AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 1 signals from both
SMAI blocks
AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 2 signals from both
SMAI blocks
AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 3 signals from both
SMAI blocks
AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 4 signals from both
SMAI blocks

21.18.4 Settings

Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default

value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available.

Table 960: 3PHSUM Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
SummationType Group1+Group2 - - Group1+Group2 Summation type
Group1-Group2
Group2-Group1
-(Group1+Group2)
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference
DFTRefGrp1
External DFT ref

Table 961: 3PHSUM Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FreqMeasMinVal 5 - 200 % 1 10 Amplitude limit for frequency calculation
in % of UBase

21.18.5 Operation principle

Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM receives the three-phase signals from Signal
matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI). In the same way, the BLOCK input will
reset all the outputs of the function to 0.

1276
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 21
Basic IED functions

21.19 Denial of service DOS

21.19.1 Functionality
The Denial of service functions (DOSFRNT, DOSLANAB and DOSLANCD) are
designed to limit overload on the IED produced by heavy Ethernet network traffic.
The communication facilities must not be allowed to compromise the primary
functionality of the device. All inbound network traffic will be quota controlled so
that too heavy network loads can be controlled. Heavy network load might for
instance be the result of malfunctioning equipment connected to the network.

21.19.2 Function blocks

DOSFRNT
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM

IEC09000749-1-en.vsd
IEC09000749 V1 EN

Figure 595: DOSFRNT function block

DOSLANAB
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM

IEC13000308-1-en.vsd
IEC13000308 V1 EN

Figure 596: DOSLANAB function block

Figure 597: DOSLANCD function block

DOSLANCD
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM

IEC13000309-1-en.vsd

21.19.3 Signals
Table 962: DOSFRNT Output signals
Name Type Description
LINKUP BOOLEAN Ethernet link status
WARNING BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than normal state
ALARM BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than throttle state

1277
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Basic IED functions

Table 963: DOSLANAB Output signals

Name Type Description
LINKUP BOOLEAN Ethernet link status
WARNING BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than normal state
ALARM BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than throttle state

Table 964: DOSLANCD Output signals

Name Type Description
LINKUP BOOLEAN Ethernet link status
WARNING BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than normal state
ALARM BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than throttle state

21.19.4 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

21.19.5 Monitored data

Table 965: DOSFRNT Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
State INTEGER 0=Off - Frame rate control state
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll
Quota INTEGER - % Quota level in percent
0-100
IPPackRecNorm INTEGER - - Number of IP packets
received in normal mode
IPPackRecPoll INTEGER - - Number of IP packets
received in polled mode
IPPackDisc INTEGER - - Number of IP packets
discarded
NonIPPackRecNorm INTEGER - - Number of non IP
packets received in
normal mode
NonIPPackRecPoll INTEGER - - Number of non IP
packets received in
polled mode
NonIPPackDisc INTEGER - - Number of non IP
packets discarded

1278
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 21
Basic IED functions

Table 966: DOSLANAB Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
DoSStatus INTEGER 0=Off - Frame rate control state
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll
Quota INTEGER - % Quota level in percent
0-100
IPPackRecNorm INTEGER - - Number of IP packets
received in normal mode
IPPackRecPoll INTEGER - - Number of IP packets
received in polled mode
IPPackDisc INTEGER - - Number of IP packets
discarded
NonIPPackRecNorm INTEGER - - Number of non IP
packets received in
normal mode
NonIPPackRecPoll INTEGER - - Number of non IP
packets received in
polled mode
NonIPPackDisc INTEGER - - Number of non IP
packets discarded

Table 967: DOSLANCD Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
DoSStatus INTEGER 0=Off - Frame rate control state
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll
Quota INTEGER - % Quota level in percent
0-100
IPPackRecNorm INTEGER - - Number of IP packets
received in normal mode
IPPackRecPoll INTEGER - - Number of IP packets
received in polled mode
IPPackDisc INTEGER - - Number of IP packets
discarded
NonIPPackRecNorm INTEGER - - Number of non IP
packets received in
normal mode
NonIPPackRecPoll INTEGER - - Number of non IP
packets received in
polled mode
NonIPPackDisc INTEGER - - Number of non IP
packets discarded

1279
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Basic IED functions

21.19.6 Operation principle

The Denial of service functions (DOSFRNT, DOSLANAB and DOSLANCD)
measures the IED load from communication and, if necessary, limit it for not
jeopardizing the IEDs control and protection functionality due to high CPU load.
The function has the following outputs:
LINKUP indicates the Ethernet link status
WARNING indicates that communication (frame rate) is higher than normal
ALARM indicates that the IED limits communication

1280
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

Section 22 IED hardware

22.1 Overview

22.1.1 Variants of case size with local HMI display

IEC04000458-2-en.psd
IEC04000458 V2 EN

Figure 598: 1/2 19 case with local HMI display.

1281
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

IEC05000762-2-en.psd
IEC05000762 V2 EN

Figure 599: 3/4 19 case with local HMI display.

IEC04000460-2-en.psd
IEC04000460 V2 EN

Figure 600: 1/1 19 case with local HMI display.

1282
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

22.1.2 Case from the rear side

Table 968: Designations for 1/2 x 19 casing with 1 TRM slot

Module Rear Positions

PSM X11
BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or X31 and X32 etc. to X51
MIM and X52
SLM X301:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or RS485 X302
LDCM or RS485 X303
OEM X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM, RS485 or GTM X312, 313
TRM X401

1MRK002801-AC-2-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-2-670-1.2-PG V3 EN

1283
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

Table 969: Designations for 3/4 x 19 casing with 1 TRM slot

Module Rear Positions

PSM X11
BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or X31 and X32 etc. to
MIM X101 and X102
SLM X301:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or RS485 X302
LDCM or RS485 X303
OEM X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM, RS485 or GTM X312, X313
TRM X401

1MRK002801-AC-3-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-3-670-1.2-PG V3 EN

1284
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

Table 970: Designations for 3/4 x 19 casing with 2 TRM slot

Module Rear Positions

PSM X11
BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or X31 and X32 etc. to X71 and
MIM X72
SLM X301:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or RS485 X302
LDCM or RS485 X303
OEM X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM, RS485 or GTM X312, X313, X322, X323
TRM 1 X401
TRM 2 X411

1MRK002801-AC-4-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-4-670-1.2-PG V3 EN

1285
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

Table 971: Designations for 1/1 x 19 casing with 1 TRM slot

Module Rear Positions

PSM X11
BIM, BOM, X31 and X32 etc. to X161
SOM, IOM or and X162
MIM
SLM X301:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or X302
RS485
LDCM or RS485 X303
OEM X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM,RS485 or X312, X313
GTM
TRM X401

1MRK002801-AC-5-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-5-670-1.2-PG V3 EN

1286
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

Table 972: Designations for 1/1 x 19 casing with 2 TRM slots

Module Rear Positions

PSM X11
BIM, BOM, X31 and X32 etc. to X131
SOM, IOM or and X132
MIM
SLM X301:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or X302
RS485
LDCM or RS485 X303
OEM X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM, RS485 or X312, X313, X322, X323
GTM
TRM 1 X401
TRM 2 X411

1MRK002801-AC-6-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-6-670-1.2-PG V3 EN

1287
Technical Manual
Section 22
IED hardware
22.2 Hardware modules
22.2.1 Overview
Table 973: Basic modules
Module
Power supply module (PSM)
Numerical module (NUM)
Local Human machine interface (LHMI)
Transformer input module (TRM)
Analog digital conversion module (ADM)
Table 974: Application specific modules
Module
Binary input module (BIM)
Binary output module (BOM)
Binary I/O module (IOM)
Line data communication modules (LDCM),
short range, medium range, long range, X21
Serial SPA/LON/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3
communication modules (SLM)
Optical ethernet module (OEM)
mA input module (MIM)
GPS time synchronization module (GTM)
Static output module (SOM)
IRIG-B Time synchronization module (IRIG-B)
1288
1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Description
Including a regulated DC/DC converter that
supplies auxiliary voltage to all static circuits.
An internal fail alarm output is available.
Module for overall application control. All
information is processed or passed through this
module, such as configuration, settings and
communication.
The module consists of LED:s, an LCD, a push
button keyboard and an ethernet connector used
to connect a PC to the IED.
Transformer module that galvanically separates
the internal circuits from the VT and CT circuits. It
has 12 analog inputs.
Slot mounted PCB with A/D conversion.
Description
Module with 16 optically isolated binary inputs
Module with 24 single outputs or 12 double-pole
command outputs including supervision function
Module with 8 optically isolated binary inputs, 10
outputs and 2 fast signalling outputs.
Modules used for digital communication to remote
terminal.
Used for SPA/LON/IEC 608705103/DNP3
communication
PMC board for IEC 61850 based communication.
Analog input module with 6 independent,
galvanically separated channels.
Used to provide the IED with GPS time
synchronization.
Module with 6 fast static outputs and 6 change
over output relays.
Module with 2 inputs. One is used for handling
both pulse-width modulated signals and
amplitude modulated signals and one is used for
optical input type ST for PPS time synchronization.
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

22.2.2 Numeric processing module (NUM)

22.2.2.1 Introduction

The Numeric processing module (NUM), is a CPU-module that handles all

protection functions and logic.

For communication with high speed modules, e.g. analog input modules and high
speed serial interfaces, the NUM is equipped with a Compact PCI bus. The NUM
is the compact PCI system card i.e. it controls bus mastering, clock distribution and
receives interrupts.

22.2.2.2 Functionality

The NUM, Numeric processing module is a high performance, compact-PCI CPU

module. It is 6U high and occupies one slot. Contact with the backplane is via two
compact PCI connectors and an euro connector.

The NUM has one PMC slot (32-bit IEEE P1386.1 compliant) and two PC-MIP
slots onto which mezzanine cards such as SLM or LDCM can be mounted.

To reduce bus loading of the compact PCI bus in the backplane the NUM has one
internal PCI bus for internal resources and the PMC/PC-MIP slots and external PCI
accesses through the backplane are buffered in a PCI/PCI bridge.

The application code and configuration data are stored in flash memory using a
flash file system.

The NUM is equipped with a real time clock. It uses a capacitor for power backup
of the real time clock.

No forced cooling is used on this standard module because of the low power
dissipation.

1289
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

22.2.2.3 Block diagram

Compact
Flash Logic

PMC
connector
PC-MIP

connector
UBM
Memory Ethernet

North
bridge

Backplane
PCI-PCI-

connector
bridge

CPU

en04000473.vsd
IEC04000473 V1 EN

Figure 601: Numeric processing module block diagram

22.2.3 Power supply module (PSM)

22.2.3.1 Introduction

The power supply module is used to provide the correct internal voltages and full
isolation between the IED and the battery system. An internal fail alarm output is
available.

22.2.3.2 Design

There are two types of the power supply module. They are designed for different
DC input voltage ranges see table 975. The power supply module contains a built-

1290
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

in, self-regulated DC/DC converter that provides full isolation between the
terminal and the external battery system.

Connection diagram

IEC08000476 V2 EN

Figure 602: PSM Connection diagram.

22.2.3.3 Technical data

Table 975: PSM - Power supply module
Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Auxiliary dc voltage, EL (input) EL = (24 - 60) V EL 20%
EL = (90 - 250) V EL 20%
Power consumption 50 W typically -
Auxiliary DC power in-rush < 10 A during 0.1 s -

22.2.4 Local human-machine interface (Local HMI)

Refer to section "" for information.

22.2.5 Transformer input module (TRM)

22.2.5.1 Introduction

The transformer input module is used to galvanically separate and adapt the
secondary currents and voltages generated by the measuring transformers. The
module has twelve inputs in different combinations of currents and voltage inputs.

Alternative connectors of Ring lug or Compression type can be ordered.

22.2.5.2 Design

The transformer module has 12 input transformers. There are several versions of
the module, each with a different combination of voltage and current input
transformers.

1291
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

Basic versions:

6 current channels and 6 voltage channels

7 current channels and 5 voltage channels
9 current channels and 3 voltage channels
12 current channels
6 current channels

The rated values and channel type, measurement or protection, of the current inputs
are selected at order.

Transformer input module for measuring should not be used with

current transformers intended for protection purposes, due to
limitations in overload characteristics.

The TRM is connected to the ADM and NUM.

For configuration of the input and output signals, refer to section "Signal matrix
for analog inputs SMAI".

IEC08000479 V2 EN

Figure 603: TRM connection diagram

1292
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

22.2.5.3 Technical data

Table 976: TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for protection transformer
modules
Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Current Ir = 1 or 5 A (0.2-40) Ir

Operative range (0-100) x Ir

Permissive overload 4 Ir cont.

100 Ir for 1 s *)

Burden < 150 mVA at Ir = 5 A

< 20 mVA at Ir = 1 A

Ac voltage Ur = 110 V 0.5288 V

Operative range (0340) V

Permissive overload 420 V cont.
450 V 10 s
Burden < 20 mVA at 110 V
Frequency fr = 50/60 Hz 5%
*) max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included.

Table 977: TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for measuring transformer
modules
Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Current Ir = 1 or 5 A (0-1.8) Irat Ir = 1 A
(0-1.6) Irat Ir = 5 A

Permissive overload 1.1 Ir cont.

1.8 Ir for 30 min at Ir = 1 A
1.6 Ir for 30 min at Ir = 5 A

Burden < 350 mVA at Ir = 5 A

< 200 mVA at Ir = 1 A

Ac voltage Ur = 110 V 0.5288 V

Operative range (0340) V

Permissive overload 420 V cont.
450 V 10 s
Burden < 20 mVA at 110 V
Frequency fr = 50/60 Hz 5%

1293
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

22.2.6 Analog digital conversion module, with time

synchronization (ADM)

22.2.6.1 Introduction

The Analog/Digital module has twelve analog inputs, 2 PC-MIP slots and 1 PMC
slot. The PC-MIP slot is used for PC-MIP cards and the PMC slot for PMC cards
according to table 978. The OEM card should always be mounted on the ADM board.

Table 978: PC-MIP cards and PMC cards

PC-MIP cards PMC cards
LDCM SLM
LR-LDCM OEM 1 ch
MR-LDCM OEM 2 ch
X21-LDCM
IRIG-B
RS485

22.2.6.2 Design

The Analog digital conversion module input signals are voltage and current from
the transformer module. Shunts are used to adapt the current signals to the
electronic voltage level. To gain dynamic range for the current inputs, two shunts
with separate A\D channels are used for each input current. In this way a 20 bit
dynamic range is obtained with a 16 bit A\D converter.

Input signals are sampled with a sampling freqency of 5 kHz at 50 Hz system

frequency and 6 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency.

The A\D converted signals goes through a filter with a cut off frequency of 500 Hz
and are reported to the numerical module (NUM) with 1 kHz at 50 Hz system
frequency and 1,2 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency.

1294
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

Channel 1
AD1 Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
AD2
Channel 5
1.2v Channel 6
AD3 Channel 7
Channel 8
Channel 9
AD4 Channel 10
Channel 11
Channel 12

PMC

level shift

PC-MIP
2.5v

PCI to PCI

PC-MIP

en05000474.vsd
IEC05000474 V1 EN

Figure 604: The ADM layout

1295
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

22.2.7 Binary input module (BIM)

22.2.7.1 Introduction

The binary input module has 16 optically isolated inputs and is available in two
versions, one standard and one with enhanced pulse counting capabilities on the
inputs to be used with the pulse counter function. The binary inputs are freely
programmable and can be used for the input of logical signals to any of the
functions. They can also be included in the disturbance recording and event-
recording functions. This enables extensive monitoring and evaluation of operation
of the IED and for all associated electrical circuits.

22.2.7.2 Design

The Binary input module contains 16 optical isolated binary inputs. The voltage
level of the binary input is selected at order.

For configuration of the input signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for binary
inputs SMBI".

A signal discriminator detects and blocks oscillating signals. When blocked, a

hysteresis function may be set to release the input at a chosen frequency, making it
possible to use the input for pulse counting. The blocking frequency may also be set.

Well defined input high and input low voltages ensure normal operation at battery
supply earth faults, see figure 605 The figure shows the typical operating
characteristics of the binary inputs of the four voltage levels.

The standard version of binary inputs gives an improved capability to withstand

disturbances and should generally be used when pulse counting is not required.
Inputs are debounced by software.

I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance
and stored by the event recorder if present.

1296
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

[V]

300

176
144
88
72
38
32
19
17

24/30V 48/60V 110/125V 220/250V

xx06000391-2-en.vsd
IEC06000391 V2 EN

Figure 605: Voltage dependence for the binary inputs

Operation

Operation uncertain

No operation
IEC99000517-ABC V1 EN

This binary input module communicates with the Numerical module (NUM).

The design of all binary inputs enables the burn off of the oxide of the relay contact
connected to the input, despite the low, steady-state power consumption, which is
shown in figure 606 and 607.

1297
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

[mA]
50

55 [ms]

en07000104-3.vsd
IEC07000104 V3 EN

Figure 606: Approximate binary input inrush current for the standard version of
BIM.

[mA]
50

5.5 [ms]

en07000105-1.vsd
IEC07000105 V2 EN

Figure 607: Approximate binary input inrush current for the BIM version with
enhanced pulse counting capabilities.

1298
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

IEC99000503 V3 EN

Figure 608: Connection diagram

22.2.7.3 Signals
Table 979: BIM Output signals
Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Binary input module status
BI1 BOOLEAN Binary input 1
BI2 BOOLEAN Binary input 2
BI3 BOOLEAN Binary input 3
BI4 BOOLEAN Binary input 4
BI5 BOOLEAN Binary input 5
BI6 BOOLEAN Binary input 6
BI7 BOOLEAN Binary input 7
Table continues on next page

1299
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

Name Type Description

BI8 BOOLEAN Binary input 8
BI9 BOOLEAN Binary input 9
BI10 BOOLEAN Binary input 10
BI11 BOOLEAN Binary input 11
BI12 BOOLEAN Binary input 12
BI13 BOOLEAN Binary input 13
BI14 BOOLEAN Binary input 14
BI15 BOOLEAN Binary input 15
BI16 BOOLEAN Binary input 16

22.2.7.4 Settings
Table 980: BIM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On
DebounceTime 0.001 - 0.020 s 0.001 0.001 Debounce time for binary inputs
OscBlock 1 - 40 Hz 1 40 Oscillation block limit
OscRelease 1 - 30 Hz 1 30 Oscillation release limit

22.2.7.5 Monitored data

Table 981: BIM Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Binary input module
1=Error status

22.2.7.6 Technical data

Table 982: BIM - Binary input module
Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Binary inputs 16 -
DC voltage, RL 24/30 V RL 20%
48/60 V RL 20%
110/125 V RL 20%
220/250 V RL 20%
Power consumption
24/30 V max. 0.05 W/input -
48/60 V max. 0.1 W/input
110/125 V max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V max. 0.4 W/input
Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max -
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 140 Hz
Release settable 130 Hz

1300
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

Table 983: BIM - Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities
Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Binary inputs 16 -
DC voltage, RL 24/30 V RL 20%
48/60 V RL 20%
110/125 V RL 20%
220/250 V RL 20%
Power consumption
24/30 V max. 0.05 W/input -
48/60 V max. 0.1 W/input
110/125 V max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V max. 0.4 W/input
Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max -
Balanced counter input frequency 40 pulses/s max -
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 140 Hz
Release settable 130 Hz

22.2.8 Binary output modules (BOM)

22.2.8.1 Introduction

The binary output module has 24 independent output relays and is used for trip
output or any signaling purpose.

22.2.8.2 Design

The binary output module (BOM) has 24 software supervised output relays. Each
pair of relays have a common power source input to the contacts, see figure 609.
This should be considered when connecting the wiring to the connection terminal
on the back of the IED.

The high closing and carrying current capability allows connection directly to
breaker trip and closing coils. If breaking capability is required to manage fail of
the breaker auxiliary contacts normally breaking the trip coil current, a parallel
reinforcement is required.

For configuration of the output signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for binary
outputs SMBO".

1301
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

Output module

xx00000299.vsd

IEC00000299 V1 EN

Figure 609: Relay pair example

1 Output connection from relay 1

2 Output signal power source connection
3 Output connection from relay 2

IEC99000505 V3 EN

Figure 610: Connection diagram

1302
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

22.2.8.3 Signals
Table 984: BOM Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block binary outputs
BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 1
BO2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 2
BO3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 3
BO4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 4
BO5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 5
BO6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 6
BO7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 7
BO8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 8
BO9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 9
BO10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 10
BO11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 11
BO12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 12
BO13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 13
BO14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 14
BO15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 15
BO16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 16
BO17 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 17
BO18 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 18
BO19 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 19
BO20 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 20
BO21 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 21
BO22 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 22
BO23 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 23
BO24 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 24

Table 985: BOM Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Binary output part of IOM module status

22.2.8.4 Settings
Table 986: BOM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On

1303
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

22.2.8.5 Monitored data

Table 987: BOM Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Binary output part of
1=Error IOM module status
BO1VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 1 value
0=0
BO1FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 1 force
1=Forced
BO1 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 1 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO2VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 2 value
0=0
BO2FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 2 force
1=Forced
BO2 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 2 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO3VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 3 value
0=0
BO3FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 3 force
1=Forced
BO3 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 3 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO4VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 4 value
0=0
BO4FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 4 force
1=Forced
BO4 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 4 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO5VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 5 value
0=0
BO5FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 5 force
1=Forced
BO5 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 5 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO6VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 6 value
0=0
BO6FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 6 force
1=Forced
BO6 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 6 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO7VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 7 value
0=0
Table continues on next page

1304
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

BO7FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 7 force
1=Forced
BO7 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 7 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO8VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 8 value
0=0
BO8FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 8 force
1=Forced
BO8 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 8 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO9VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 9 value
0=0
BO9FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 9 force
1=Forced
BO9 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 9 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO10VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 10 value
0=0
BO10FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 10 force
1=Forced
BO10 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 10 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO11VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - nary output 11 value
0=0
BO11FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 11 force
1=Forced
BO11 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 11 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO12VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 12 value
0=0
BO12FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 12 force
1=Forced
BO12 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 12 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO13VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 13 value
0=0
BO13FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 13 force
1=Forced
BO13 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 13 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO14VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 14 value
0=0
BO14FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 14 force
1=Forced
Table continues on next page

1305
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

BO14 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 14 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO15VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 15 value
0=0
BO15FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 15 force
1=Forced
BO15 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 15 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO16VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 16 value
0=0
BO16FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 16 force
1=Forced
BO16 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 16 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO17VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 17 value
0=0
B017FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 17 force
1=Forced
BO17 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 17 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO18VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 18 value
0=0
BO18FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 18 force
1=Forced
BO18 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 18 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO19VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 19 value
0=0
BO19FORCE BOOLEAN 1=Forced - Binary output 19 force
0=Normal
BO19 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 19 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO20VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 20 value
0=0
BO20FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 20 force
1=Forced
BO20 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 20 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO21VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 21 value
0=0
BO21FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 21 force
1=Forced
Table continues on next page

1306
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

BO21 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 21 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO22VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 22 value
0=0
BO22FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 22 force
1=Forced
BO22 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 22 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO23VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 23 value
0=0
BO23FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 23 force
1=Forced
BO23 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 23 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO24VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 24 value
0=0
BO24FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - nary output 24 force
1=Forced
BO24 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 24 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked

22.2.8.6 Technical data

Table 988: BOM - Binary output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays
Binary outputs 24
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000 V rms
Current carrying capacity
Per relay, continuous 8A
Per relay, 1 s 10 A
Per process connector pin, continuous 12 A
Making capacity at inductive load with L/R>10 ms
0.2 s 30 A
1.0 s 10 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos j>0.4 250 V/8.0 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms 48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A

Maximum 72 outputs may be activated simultaneously. After 6 ms

an additional 24 outputs may be activated. The activation time for
the 96 outputs must not exceed 200 ms. 48 outputs can be activated

1307
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

during 1 s. Continued activation is possible with respect to current

consumption but after 5 minutes the temperature rise will adversely
affect the hardware life. Maximum two relays per BOM/IOM
should be activated continuously due to power dissipation.

22.2.9 Static binary output module (SOM)

22.2.9.1 Introduction

The static binary output module has six fast static outputs and six change over
output relays for use in applications with high speed requirements.

22.2.9.2 Design

The Static output module (SOM) have 6 normally open (NO) static outputs and 6
electromechanical relay outputs with change over contacts.

The SOM consists mainly of:

An MCU
A CAN-driver
6 static relays outputs
6 electromechanical relay outputs
A DC/DC converter
Connectors interfacing
CAN-bus to backplane CBM
IO-connectors to binary outputs (2 pcs.)

The following parts are supervised:

Interruption in relay coil

Short circuit of relay coil
Driver failure

1308
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

IEC09000974-1-en.vsd

IEC09000974 V1 EN

Figure 611: SOM Static output principle

IEC09000975 V1 EN

Figure 612: Connection diagram of the static output module

22.2.9.3 Signals
Table 989: SOM Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block binary outputs
BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 1
BO2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 2
BO3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 3
BO4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 4
Table continues on next page

1309
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

Name Type Default Description

BO5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 5
BO6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 6
BO7 BOOLEAN 0 Static binary output 7
BO8 BOOLEAN 0 Static binary output 8
BO9 BOOLEAN 0 Static binary output 9
BO10 BOOLEAN 0 Static binary output 10
BO11 BOOLEAN 0 Static binary output 11
BO12 BOOLEAN 0 Static binary output 12

Table 990: SOM Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Static binary output module status

22.2.9.4 Settings
Table 991: SOM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On

22.2.9.5 Monitored data

Table 992: SOM Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Static binary output
1=Error module status
BO1VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 1 value
0=0
BO1FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 1 force
1=Forced
BO1 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 1 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO2VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 2 value
0=0
BO2FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 2 force
1=Forced
BO2 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 2 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO3VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 3 value
0=0
Table continues on next page

1310
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

BO3FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 3 force
1=Forced
BO3 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 3 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO4VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 4 value
0=0
BO4FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 4 force
1=Forced
BO4 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 4 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO5VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 5 value
0=0
BO5FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 5 force
1=Forced
BO5 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 5 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO6VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 6 value
0=0
BO6FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 6 force
1=Forced
BO6 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 6 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO7VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 7 value
0=0
BO7FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 7 force
1=Forced
BO7 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 7 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO8VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 8 value
0=0
BO8FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 8 force
1=Forced
BO8 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 8 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO9VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 9 value
0=0
BO9FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 9 force
1=Forced
BO9 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 9 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO10VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 10 value
0=0
BO10FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 10 force
1=Forced
Table continues on next page

1311
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

BO10 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 10 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO11VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 11 value
0=0
BO11FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 11 force
1=Forced
BO11 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 11 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO12VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 12 value
0=0
BO12FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 12 force
1=Forced
BO12 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 12 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked

22.2.9.6 Technical data

Table 993: SOM - Static Output Module (reference standard: IEC 61810-2): Static binary outputs
Function of quantity Static binary output trip
Rated voltage 48 - 60 VDC 110 - 250 VDC
Number of outputs 6 6
Impedance open state ~300 k ~810 k
Test voltage across open contact, No galvanic separation No galvanic separation
1 min
Current carrying capacity:
Continuous 5A 5A
1.0s 10A 10A
Making capacity at capacitive load
with the maximum capacitance of
0.2 F :
0.2s 30A 30A
1.0s 10A 10A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R 48V / 1A 110V / 0.4A
40ms
60V / 0.75A 125V / 0.35A
220V / 0.2A
250V / 0.15A
Operating time <1ms <1ms

1312
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

Table 994: SOM - Static Output module data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2):
Electromechanical relay outputs
Function of quantity Trip and signal relays
Max system voltage 250V AC/DC
Number of outputs 6
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000V rms
Current carrying capacity:
Continuous 8A
1.0s 10A
Making capacity at capacitive load with the
maximum capacitance of 0.2 F:
0.2s 30A
1.0s 10A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R 40ms 48V / 1A
110V / 0.4A
125V / 0.35A
220V / 0.2A
250V / 0.15A

22.2.10 Binary input/output module (IOM)

22.2.10.1 Introduction

The binary input/output module is used when only a few input and output channels
are needed. The ten standard output channels are used for trip output or any
signaling purpose. The two high speed signal output channels are used for
applications where short operating time is essential. Eight optically isolated binary
inputs cater for required binary input information.

22.2.10.2 Design

The binary input/output module is available in two basic versions, one with
unprotected contacts and one with MOV (Metal Oxide Varistor) protected contacts.

Inputs are designed to allow oxide burn-off from connected contacts, and increase
the disturbance immunity during normal protection operate times. This is achieved
with a high peak inrush current while having a low steady-state current, see figure
606. Inputs are debounced by software.

Well defined input high and input low voltages ensures normal operation at battery
supply earth faults, see figure 605.

The voltage level of the inputs is selected when ordering.

1313
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance
and stored by the event recorder if present.

The binary I/O module, IOM, has eight optically isolated inputs and ten output
relays. One of the outputs has a change-over contact. The nine remaining output
contacts are connected in two groups. One group has five contacts with a common
and the other group has four contacts with a common, to be used as single-output
channels, see figure 613.

The binary I/O module also has two high speed output channels where a reed relay
is connected in parallel to the standard output relay.

For configuration of the input and output signals, refer to sections "Signal matrix
for binary inputs SMBI" and "Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO".

The making capacity of the reed relays are limited.

1314
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

IEC1MRK002801-AA11-UTAN-RAM V2 EN

Figure 613: Binary in/out module (IOM), input contacts named XA corresponds
to rear position X31, X41, and so on, and output contacts named
XB to rear position X32, X42, and so on

The binary input/output module version with MOV protected contacts can for
example be used in applications where breaking high inductive load would cause
excessive wear of the contacts.

The test voltage across open contact is lower for this version of the
binary input/output module.

1315
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

xx04000069.vsd

IEC04000069 V1 EN

Figure 614: IOM with MOV protection, relay example

22.2.10.3 Signals
Table 995: IOMIN Output signals
Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Binary input part of IOM module status
BI1 BOOLEAN Binary input 1
BI2 BOOLEAN Binary input 2
BI3 BOOLEAN Binary input 3
BI4 BOOLEAN Binary input 4
BI5 BOOLEAN Binary input 5
BI6 BOOLEAN Binary input 6
BI7 BOOLEAN Binary input 7
BI8 BOOLEAN Binary input 8

Table 996: IOMOUT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Block binary outputs
BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 1
BO2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 2
BO3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 3
BO4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 4
BO5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 5
BO6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 6
BO7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 7
BO8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 8
BO9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 9
BO10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 10
BO11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 11
BO12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 12

1316
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

22.2.10.4 Settings
Table 997: IOMIN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Binary input/output module in operation
On (On) or not (Off)
DebounceTime 0.001 - 0.020 s 0.001 0.001 Debounce time for binary inputs
OscBlock 1 - 40 Hz 1 40 Oscillation block limit
OscRelease 1 - 30 Hz 1 30 Oscillation release limit

22.2.10.5 Monitored data

Table 998: IOMIN Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Binary input part of IOM
1=Error module status

Table 999: IOMOUT Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
BO1VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 1 value
0=0
BO1FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 1 force
1=Forced
BO1 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 1 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO2VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 2 value
0=0
BO2FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 2 force
1=Forced
BO2 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 2 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO3VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 3 value
0=0
BO3FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 3 force
1=Forced
BO3 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 3 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO4VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 4 value
0=0
BO4FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 4 force
1=Forced
BO4 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 4 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
Table continues on next page

1317
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

BO5VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 5 value
0=0
BO5FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 5 force
1=Forced
BO5 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 5 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO6VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 6 value
0=0
BO6FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 6 force
1=Forced
BO6 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 6 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO7VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 7 value
0=0
BO7FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 7 force
1=Forced
BO7 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 7 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO8VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 8 value
0=0
BO8FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 8 force
1=Forced
BO8 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 8 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO9VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 9 value
0=0
BO9FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 9 force
1=Forced
BO9 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 9 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO10VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 10 value
0=0
BO10FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 10 force
1=Forced
BO10 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 10 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO11VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 11 value
0=0
BO11FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 11 force
1=Forced
BO11 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 11 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
Table continues on next page

1318
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

BO12VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 12 value
0=0
BO12FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 12 force
1=Forced
BO12 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 12 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked

22.2.10.6 Technical data

Table 1000: IOM - Binary input/output module
Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Binary inputs 8 -
DC voltage, RL 24/30 V RL 20%
48/60 V RL 20%
110/125 V RL 20%
220/250 V RL 20%
Power consumption -
24/30 V max. 0.05 W/input
48/60 V max. 0.1 W/input
110/125 V max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V max. 0.4 W/input

Table 1001: IOM - Binary input/output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel reed
relay)
Binary outputs 10 2
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC 250 V DC
Test voltage across open contact, 1000 V rms 800 V DC
1 min
Current carrying capacity
Per relay, continuous 8A 8A
Per relay, 1 s 10 A 10 A
Per process connector pin, 12 A 12 A
continuous
Making capacity at inductive load
with L/R>10 ms

0.2 s 30 A 0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 0.4 A
Making capacity at resistive load
220250 V/0.4 A
0.2 s 30 A 110125 V/0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 4860 V/0.2 A
2430 V/0.1 A
Table continues on next page

1319
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

Function or quantity Trip and signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel reed
relay)
Breaking capacity for AC, cos > 250 V/8.0 A 250 V/8.0 A
0.4
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R 48 V/1 A 48 V/1 A
< 40 ms 110 V/0.4 A 110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A 125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A 220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A 250 V/0.15 A
Maximum capacitive load - 10 nF

Maximum 72 outputs may be activated simultaneously. After 6 ms

an additional 24 outputs may be activated. The activation time for
the 96 outputs must not exceed 200 ms. 48 outputs can be activated
during 1 s. Continued activation is possible with respect to current
consumption but after 5 minutes the temperature rise will adversely
affect the hardware life.Maximum two relays per BOM/IOM
should be activated continuously due to power dissipation.

Table 1002: IOM with MOV - contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)

Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel
reed relay)
Binary outputs IOM: 10 IOM: 2
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC 250 V DC
Test voltage across open 250 V rms 250 V rms
contact, 1 min
Current carrying capacity
Per relay, continuous 8A 8A
Per relay, 1 s 10 A 10 A
Per process connector pin, 12 A 12 A
continuous
Making capacity at inductive
loadwith L/R>10 ms
0.2 s 30 A 0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 0.4 A
Making capacity at resistive load
220250 V/0.4 A
0.2 s 30 A 110125 V/0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 4860 V/0.2 A
2430 V/0.1 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos 250 V/8.0 A 250 V/8.0 A
j>0.4
Breaking capacity for DC with L/ 48 V/1 A 48 V/1 A
R < 40 ms 110 V/0.4 A 110 V/0.4 A
220 V/0.2 A 220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A 250 V/0.15 A
Maximum capacitive load - 10 nF

1320
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

Maximum 72 outputs may be activated simultaneously. After 6 ms

an additional 24 outputs may be activated. The activation time for
the 96 outputs must not exceed 200 ms. 48 outputs can be activated
during 1 s. Continued activation is possible with respect to current
consumption but after 5 minutes the temperature rise will adversely
affect the hardware life. Maximum two relays per BOM/IOM
should be activated continuously due to power dissipation.

22.2.11 mA input module (MIM)

22.2.11.1 Introduction

The milli-ampere input module is used to interface transducer signals in the 20 to

+20 mA range from for example OLTC position, temperature or pressure
transducers. The module has six independent, galvanically separated channels.

22.2.11.2 Design

The Milliampere Input Module has six independent analog channels with separated
protection, filtering, reference, A/D-conversion and optical isolation for each input
making them galvanically isolated from each other and from the rest of the module.

For configuration of the input signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for mA
inputs SMMI".

The analog inputs measure DC current in the range of +/- 20 mA. The A/D
converter has a digital filter with selectable filter frequency. All inputs are
calibrated separately The filter parameters and the calibration factors are stored in a
non-volatile memory on the module.

The calibration circuitry monitors the module temperature and starts an automatical
calibration procedure if the temperature drift is outside the allowed range.

1321
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

IEC99000504 V2 EN

Figure 615: MIM connection diagram

22.2.11.3 Signals
Table 1003: MIM Output signals
Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Milliampere input module status
CH1 REAL Analog input 1
CH2 REAL Analog input 2
CH3 REAL Analog input 3
Table continues on next page

1322
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

Name Type Description

CH4 REAL Analog input 4
CH5 REAL Analog input 5
CH6 REAL Analog input 6

22.2.11.4 Settings
Table 1004: MIM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On
MaxReportT 0 - 3600 s 1 1 Maximum time between reports
EnDeadBandCh1 Off - - Off Enable amplitude deadband reporting for
On channel 1
DeadBandCh1 0.00 - 20.00 mA 0.01 1.00 Deadband amplitude for channel 1
IMinCh1 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 4.00 Min current of transducer for Channel 1
IMaxCh1 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 20.00 Max current of transducer for Channel 1
ValueMinCh1 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 4.000 Min primary value corr. to IMinCh1
- 10000000000.000
ValueMaxCh1 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 20.000 Max primary value corr. to IMaxCh1
- 10000000000.000
EnDeadBandCh2 Off - - Off Enable amplitude deadband reporting for
On channel 2
DeadBandCh2 0.00 - 20.00 mA 0.01 1.00 Deadband amplitude for channel 2
IMinCh2 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 4.00 Min current of transducer for Channel 2
IMaxCh2 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 20.00 Max current of transducer for Channel 2
ValueMinCh2 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 4.000 Min primary value corr. to IMinCh2
- 10000000000.000
ValueMaxCh2 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 20.000 Max primary value corr. to IMaxCh2
- 10000000000.000
EnDeadBandCh3 Off - - Off Enable amplitude deadband reporting for
On channel 3
DeadBandCh3 0.00 - 20.00 mA 0.01 1.00 Deadband amplitude for channel 3
IMinCh3 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 4.00 Min current of transducer for Channel 3
IMaxCh3 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 20.00 Max current of transducer for Channel 3
ValueMinCh3 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 4.000 Min primary value corr. to IMinCh3
- 10000000000.000
ValueMaxCh3 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 20.000 Max primary value corr. to IMaxCh3
- 10000000000.000
EnDeadBandCh4 Off - - Off Enable amplitude deadband reporting for
On channel 4
DeadBandCh4 0.00 - 20.00 mA 0.01 1.00 Deadband amplitude for channel 4
IMinCh4 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 4.00 Min current of transducer for Channel 4
IMaxCh4 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 20.00 Max current of transducer for Channel 4
Table continues on next page

1323
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ValueMinCh4 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 4.000 Min primary value corr. to IMinCh4
- 10000000000.000
ValueMaxCh4 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 20.000 Max primary value corr. to IMaxCh4
- 10000000000.000
EnDeadBandCh5 Off - - Off Enable amplitude deadband reporting for
On channel 5
DeadBandCh5 0.00 - 20.00 mA 0.01 1.00 Deadband amplitude for channel 5
IMinCh5 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 4.00 Min current of transducer for Channel 5
IMaxCh5 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 20.00 Max current of transducer for Channel 5
ValueMinCh5 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 4.000 Min primary value corr. to IMinCh5
- 10000000000.000
ValueMaxCh5 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 20.000 Max primary value corr. to IMaxCh5
- 10000000000.000
EnDeadBandCh6 Off - - Off Enable amplitude deadband reporting for
On channel 6
DeadBandCh6 0.00 - 20.00 mA 0.01 1.00 Deadband amplitude for channel 6
IMinCh6 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 4.00 Min current of transducer for Channel 6
IMaxCh6 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 20.00 Max current of transducer for Channel 6
ValueMinCh6 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 4.000 Min primary value corr. to IMinCh6
- 10000000000.000
ValueMaxCh6 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 20.000 Max primary value corr. to IMaxCh6
- 10000000000.000

22.2.11.5 Monitored data

Table 1005: MIM Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Milliampere input module
1=Error status
CH1 REAL - - Analog input 1
CH2 REAL - - Analog input 2
CH3 REAL - - Analog input 3
CH4 REAL - - Analog input 4
CH5 REAL - - Analog input 5
CH6 REAL - - Analog input 6
CH1 REAL - A Service value analog
input 1
CH2 REAL - A Service value analog
input 2
CH3 REAL - A Service value analog
input 3
Table continues on next page

1324
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

CH4 REAL - A Service value analog
input 4
CH5 REAL - A Service value analog
input 5
CH6 REAL - A Service value analog
input 6

22.2.11.6 Technical data

Table 1006: MIM - mA input module
Quantity: Rated value: Nominal range:
Input resistance Rin = 194 Ohm -

Input range 5, 10, 20mA -

0-5, 0-10, 0-20, 4-20mA
Power consumption -
each mA-board 2W
each mA input 0.1 W

22.2.12 Serial and LON communication module (SLM)

22.2.12.1 Introduction

The serial and LON communication module (SLM) is used for SPA, IEC
60870-5-103, DNP3 and LON communication. The module has two optical
communication ports for plastic/plastic, plastic/glass or glass/glass. One port is
used for serial communication (SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP3 port) and one
port is dedicated for LON communication.

22.2.12.2 Design

The SLM is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the
NUM module. Three variants of the SLM are available with different combinations
of optical fiber connectors, see figure 616. The plastic fiber connectors are of snap-
in type and the glass fiber connectors are of ST type.

1325
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

I
EC0500760=1=en=Or
igi
nal
.psd
IEC05000760 V2 EN

Figure 616: The SLM variants, component side view

1 Receiver, LON
2 Transmitter, LON
3 Receiver, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3
4 Transmitter, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3
A Snap in connector for plastic fiber
B ST connector for glass fiber

Observe that when the SLM connectors are viewed from the rear
side of the IED, contact 4 above is in the uppermost position and
contact 1 in the lowest position.

22.2.12.3 Technical data

Table 1007: SLM LON port
Quantity Range or value
Optical connector Glass fibre: type ST
Plastic fibre: type HFBR snap-in
Fibre, optical budget Glass fibre: 11 dB (1000 m typically *)
Plastic fibre: 7 dB (10 m typically *)
Fibre diameter Glass fibre: 62.5/125 mm
Plastic fibre: 1 mm
*) depending on optical budget calculation

1326
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

Table 1008: SLM SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3 port

Quantity Range or value
Optical connector Glass fibre: type ST
Plastic fibre: type HFBR snap-in
Fibre, optical budget Glass fibre: 11 dB (3000ft/1000 m typically *)
Plastic fibre: 7 dB (80ft/25 m typically *)
Fibre diameter Glass fibre: 62.5/125 mm
Plastic fibre: 1 mm
*) depending on optical budget calculation

22.2.13 Galvanic RS485 communication module

22.2.13.1 Introduction

The Galvanic RS485 communication module (RS485) is used for DNP3.0 and IEC
60870-5-103 communication. The module has one RS485 communication port.
The RS485 is a balanced serial communication that can be used either in 2-wire or
4-wire connections. A 2-wire connection uses the same signal for RX and TX and
is a multidrop communication with no dedicated Master or slave. This variant
requires however a control of the output. The 4-wire connection has separated
signals for RX and TX multidrop communication with a dedicated Master and the
rest are slaves. No special control signal is needed in this case.

22.2.13.2 Design

The RS485 is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the
NUM module.

RS485 connector pinouts

The arrangement for the pins in the RS485 connector (figure 617) are presented in
table 1009:

Table 1009: The arrangement for the pins

Pin Name 2-wire Name 4-wire Description

1 RS485+ TX+ Receive/transmit high or transmit high
2 RS485 TX Receive/transmit
3 Term T-Term Termination resistor for transmitter (and receiver
in 2wir case) (connect to TX+)
4 N.A. R-Term Termination resistor for receiver (connect to RX
+)
5 N.A. RX Receive low
6 N.A. RX+ Receive high

1327
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

Angle
bracket

Screw
1
terminal
X3 2
1
2 RS485
3 PWB
Screw
4
terminal
5
X1
6

Backplane

IEC06000517 V1 EN

Figure 617: RS485 connector

2-wire: Connect pin 1 to pin 6 and pin 2 to pin 5

Termination (2-wire): Connect pin 1 to pin 3

Termination (4-wire): Connect pin 1 to pin 3 and pin 4 to pin 6

Soft ground connector pinouts

A second 2-pole screw connector is used for the connection of IO-ground. It can be
used in two combinations like:

Unconnected: No ground of the IO-part .

Soft grounded: The IO is connected to the GND with an RC net parallel with a
MOV

22.2.13.3 Technical data

Table 1010: Galvanic RS485 communication module
Quantity Range or value
Communication speed 240019200 bauds
External connectors RS-485 6-pole connector
Soft ground 2-pole connector

1328
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

22.2.14 Optical ethernet module (OEM)

22.2.14.1 Introduction

The optical fast-ethernet module is used to connect an IED to the communication

buses (like the station bus) that use the IEC 61850-8-1 protocol (OEM rear port A,
B). The process bus use the IEC 61850-9-2LE protocol (OEM rear port C, D). The
module has one or two optical ports with ST connectors.

22.2.14.2 Functionality

The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is used when communication systems

according to IEC6185081 have been implemented.

22.2.14.3 Design

The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is a PMC card and mounted as a mezzanine
card on the ADM. The OEM is a 100BASE-FXmodule and available as a single
channel or double channel unit.

IEC05000472=1=en=Original.vsd
IEC05000472 V3 EN

Figure 618: OEM layout, standard PMC format 2 channels

1: Transmitter
2: Receiver

1329
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

22.2.14.4 Technical data

Table 1011: OEM - Optical ethernet module
Quantity Rated value
Number of channels 1 or 2 (port A, B for IEC 61850-8-1 and port C, D
for IEC 61850-9-2LE)
Standard IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-FX
Type of fiber 62.5/125 mm multimode fibre
Wave length 1300 nm
Optical connector Type ST
Communication speed Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit/s

22.2.15 Line data communication module (LDCM)

22.2.15.1 Introduction

The line data communication module (LDCM) is used for communication between
the IEDs situated at distances <110 km or from the IED to optical to electrical
converter with G.703 interface located on a distances <3 km away. The LDCM
module sends and rereceives data, to and from another LDCM module. The IEEE/
ANSI standard format is used.

The line data communication module is used for binary signal transfer. The module
has one optical port with ST connectors see figure 619.

Line data communication module LDCM

Each module has one optical port, one for each remote end to which the IED
communicates.

Alternative cards for Long range (1550 nm single mode), Medium range (1310 nm
single mode) and Short range (850 nm multi mode) are available.

Class 1 laser product. Take adequate measures to protect the eyes.

Never look into the laser beam.

22.2.15.2 Design

The LDCM is a PCMIP type II single width format module. The LDCM can be
mounted on:

the ADM
the NUM

1330
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

ST

IO-connector
ST

IEC07000087=1=en=Original.vsd

IEC07000087 V2 EN

Figure 619: The SR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width format with two
PCI connectors and one I/O ST type connector

C
IEC06000393=1=en=Original.vsd

IEC06000393 V2 EN

Figure 620: The MR-LDCM and LR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width
format with two PCI connectors and one I/O FC/PC type connector

22.2.15.3 Technical data

1331
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

Table 1012: Line data communication module

Characteristic Range or value
Type of LDCM Short range (SR) Medium range (MR) Long range (LR)
Type of fibre Graded-index Singlemode 9/125 Singlemode 9/125 m
multimode m
62.5/125 m
Peak Emission
Wave length 820 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm
Nominal 865 nm 1330 nm 1580 nm
Maximum 792 nm 1290 nm 1520 nm
Minimum
Optical budget 13 dB (typical 22 dB (typical 26 dB (typical distance 110 km *)
Graded-index distance about 3 distance 80 km *)
multimode 62.5/125 km *)
mm, 9 dB (typical
distance about 2
km *)
Graded-index
multimode 50/125
mm

Optical connector Type ST Type FC/PC Type FC/PC

Protocol C37.94 C37.94 C37.94 implementation **)
implementation **)
Data transmission Synchronous Synchronous Synchronous
Transmission rate / 2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s 2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s 2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s
Data rate
Clock source Internal or Internal or derived Internal or derived from received
derived from from received signal signal
received signal
*) depending on optical budget calculation
**) C37.94 originally defined just for multimode; using same header, configuration and data format as
C37.94

22.2.16 Galvanic X.21 line data communication (X.21-LDCM)

22.2.16.1 Introduction

The galvanic X.21 line data communication module is used for connection to
telecommunication equipment, for example leased telephone lines. The module
supports 64 kbit/s data communication between IEDs.

Examples of applications:

Line differential protection

Binary signal transfer

1332
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

22.2.16.2 Design

The galvanic X.21 line data communication module uses a ABB specific PC*MIP
Type II format.

C
en07000196.vsd
IEC07000196 V1 EN

Figure 621: Overview of the X.21 LDCM module

1 4

1 8

9 15

3 2
en07000239.wmf
IEC07000239 V1 EN

Figure 622: The X.21 LDCM module external connectors

1. Ground selection connector for IO, screw terminals, 2-pole

2. Ground pin
3. Soft ground pin, see figure 623
4. X.21 Micro D-sub 15 pole male connector according to the V11 (X:27)
balanced version

1333
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

I/O

100kW 100nF

Soft ground

en07000242.vsd
IEC07000242 V1 EN

Figure 623: Schematic view of soft ground

Grounding

At special problems with ground loops, the soft ground connection for the IO-
ground can be tested.

Three different kinds of grounding principles can be set (used for fault tracing):
1. Direct ground - The normal grounding is direct ground, connect terminal 2
direct to the chassi.
2. No ground - Leave the connector without any connection.
3. Soft ground - Connect soft ground pin (3), see figure 622

X.21 connector

Table 1013: Pinout for the X.21 communication connector

Pin number Signal

1 Shield (ground)
2 TXD A
3 Control A
4 RXD A
6 Signal timing A
8 Ground
9 TXD B
10 Control B
11 RXD B
13 Signal timing B
5,7,12,14,15 Not used

1334
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

22.2.16.3 Functionality

The data format is HDLC. The speed for the transmission of the messages used is
64 kbit/s.

A maximum of 100 meter of cable is allowed to ensure the quality of the data
(deviation from X.21 standard cable length).

Synchronization

The X.21 LDCM works like a DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) and is normally
expecting synchronization from the DCE (Data Circuit Equipment). The
transmission is normally synchronized to the Signal Element Timing signal when a
device is a DTE. When the signal is high it will read the data at the receiver and
when the signal is low it will write data to the transmitter. This behaviour can be
inverted in the control register.

Normally an external multiplexer is used and it should act like the master.

When two X.21 LDCM is directly communicating with each other one must be set
as a master generating the synchronization for the other (the slave). The DTE
Signal Element Timing is created from the internal 64 kHz clock.

The Byte Timing signal is not used in ABB devices.

22.2.16.4 Technical data

Table 1014: Galvanic X.21 line data communication module (X.21-LDCM)
Quantity Range or value
Connector, X.21 Micro D-sub, 15-pole male, 1.27 mm (0.050") pitch
Connector, ground selection 2 pole screw terminal
Standard CCITT X21
Communication speed 64 kbit/s
Insulation 1 kV
Maximum cable length 100 m

22.2.17 GPS time synchronization module (GTM)

22.2.17.1 Introduction

This module includes a GPS receiver used for time synchronization. The GPS has
one SMA contact for connection to an antenna. It also includes an optical PPS ST-
connector output.

1335
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

22.2.17.2 Design

The GTM is a PCMIP-format card and is placed only on one of the ADM slots.
The antenna input connector is shielded and directly attached to a grounded plate to
eliminate the risk of electromagnetic interference.

All communication between the GCM and the NUM is via the PCI-bus. PPS time
data is sent from the GCM to the rest of the time system to provide 1s accuracy at
sampling level. An optical transmitter for PPS output is available for time
synchronization of another relay with an optical PPS input. The PPS output
connector is of ST-type for multimode fibre and could be used up to 1 km.

22.2.17.3 Monitored data

Table 1015: SYNCHGPS Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
NoOfSatellites INTEGER - - Number of GPS signals
from satellites

22.2.17.4 Technical data

Table 1016: GPS time synchronization module (GTM)
Function Range or value Accuracy
Receiver 1s relative UTC
Time to reliable time reference with antenna in new <30 minutes
position or after power loss longer than 1 month
Time to reliable time reference after a power loss <15 minutes
longer than 48 hours
Time to reliable time reference after a power loss <5 minutes
shorter than 48 hours

22.2.18 GPS antenna

22.2.18.1 Introduction

In order to receive GPS signals from the satellites orbiting the earth a GPS antenna
with applicable cable must be used.

22.2.18.2 Design

The antenna with a console for mounting on a horizontal or vertical flat surface or
on an antenna mast. See figure 624

1336
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

1 6

4 7

xx04000155.vsd
IEC04000155 V2 EN

Figure 624: Antenna with console

where:
1 GPS antenna
2 TNC connector
3 Console, 78x150 mm
4 Mounting holes 5.5 mm
5 Tab for securing of antenna cable
6 Vertical mounting position
7 Horizontal mounting position

Antenna cable
Use a 50 ohm coaxial cable with a male TNC connector in the antenna end and a
male SMA connector in the receiver end to connect the antenna to GTM. Choose
cable type and length so that the total attenuation is max. 26 dB at 1.6 GHz.

Make sure that the antenna cable is not charged when connected to
the antenna or to the receiver. Short-circuit the end of the antenna
cable with some metal device, when first connected to the antenna.
When the antenna is connected to the cable, connect the cable to the
receiver. REx670 must be switched off when the antenna cable is
connected.

1337
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

22.2.18.3 Technical data

Table 1017: GPS Antenna and cable
Function Value
Max antenna cable attenuation 26 db @ 1.6 GHz
Antenna cable impedance 50 ohm
Lightning protection Must be provided externally
Antenna cable connector SMA in receiver end
TNC in antenna end
Accuracy +/-1s

22.2.19 IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B

22.2.19.1 Introduction

The IRIG-B time synchronizing module is used for accurate time synchronizing of
the IED from a station clock.

The Pulse Per Second (PPS) input shall be used for synchronizing when IEC
61850-9-2LE is used.

Electrical (BNC) and optical connection (ST) for 0XX and 12X IRIG-B support.

22.2.19.2 Design

The IRIG-B module have two inputs. One input is for the IRIG-B that can handle
both a pulse-width modulated signal (also called unmodulated) and an amplitude
modulated signal (also called sine wave modulated). The other is an optical input
type ST for PPS to synchronize the time between several protections.

1338
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

ST

Y2

A1
T

IEC06000304=1=en=Original.ai
IEC06000304 V2 EN

Figure 625: IRIG-B PC-MIP board with top left ST connector for PPS 820 nm
multimode fibre optic signal input and lower left BNC connector for
IRIG-B signal input

22.2.19.3 Settings
Table 1018: IRIG-B Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SynchType BNC - - Opto Type of synchronization
Opto
TimeDomain LocalTime - - LocalTime Time domain
UTC
Encoding IRIG-B - - IRIG-B Type of encoding
1344
1344TZ
TimeZoneAs1344 MinusTZ - - PlusTZ Time zone as in 1344 standard
PlusTZ

22.2.19.4 Technical data

Table 1019: IRIG-B
Quantity Rated value
Number of channels IRIG-B 1
Number of channels PPS 1
Electrical connector:
Electrical connector IRIG-B BNC
Pulse-width modulated 5 Vpp
Amplitude modulated
low level 1-3 Vpp
high level 3 x low level, max 9 Vpp
Table continues on next page

1339
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

Quantity Rated value

Supported formats IRIG-B 00x, IRIG-B 12x
Accuracy +/-10s for IRIG-B 00x and +/-100s for IRIG-B 12x
Input impedance 100 k ohm
Optical connector:
Optical connector PPS and IRIG-B Type ST
Type of fibre 62.5/125 m multimode fibre
Supported formats IRIG-B 00x, PPS
Accuracy +/- 1s

22.3 Dimensions

22.3.1 Case without rear cover

A
D

B C

IEC08000164-2-en.vsd
IEC08000164 V2 EN

Figure 626: Case without rear cover

1340
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

K
F

G
H J

xx08000166.vsd

IEC08000166 V1 EN

Figure 627: Case without rear cover with 19 rack mounting kit

Case size (mm) A B C D E F G H J K

6U, 1/2 x 19 265.9 223.7 201.1 252.9 205.7 190.5 203.7 - 187.6 -
6U, 3/4 x 19 265.9 336.0 201.1 252.9 318.0 190.5 316.0 - 187.6 -
6U, 1/1 x 19 265.9 448.3 201.1 252.9 430.3 190.5 428.3 465.1 187.6 482.6
The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19 rack mounting kit

1341
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

22.3.2 Case with rear cover

A
D

B
C

IEC08000163-2-en.vsd
IEC08000163 V2 EN

Figure 628: Case with rear cover

1342
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

K
F

G
J
H
xx08000165.vsd

IEC08000165 V1 EN

Figure 629: Case with rear cover and 19 rack mounting kit

IEC05000503-2-en.vsd
IEC05000503 V2 EN

Figure 630: Rear cover case with details

Case size (mm) A B C D E F G H J K

6U, 1/2 x 19 265.9 223.7 242.1 255.8 205.7 190.5 203.7 - 228.6 -
6U, 3/4 x 19 265.9 336.0 242.1 255.8 318.0 190.5 316.0 - 228.6 -
6U, 1/1 x 19 265.9 448.3 242.1 255.8 430.3 190.5 428.3 465.1 228.6 482.6
The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19 rack mounting kit.

1343
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

22.3.3 Flush mounting dimensions

A C
B

E
D

IEC08000162-2-en.vsd
IEC08000162 V2 EN

Figure 631: Flush mounting

Cut-out dimensions (mm)

Case size
Tolerance A B C D
+/-1 +/-1
6U, 1/2 x 19" 210.1 254.3 4.0-10.0 12.5
6U, 3/4 x 19" 322.4 254.3 4.0-10.0 12.5
6U, 1/1 x 19" 434.7 254.3 4.0-10.0 12.5
E = 188.6 mm without rear protection cover, 229.6 mm with rear protection cover

1344
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

22.3.4 Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions

IEC06000182-2-en.vsd
IEC06000182 V2 EN

Figure 632: A 1/2 x 19 size 670 series IED side-by-side with RHGS6.

G
D
B
E

F
C
xx05000505.vsd

IEC05000505 V1 EN

Figure 633: Panel-cut out dimensions for side-by-side flush mounting

Case size (mm) A B C D E F G

Tolerance 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
6U, 1/2 x 19 214.0 259.3 240.4 190.5 34.4 13.2 6.4 diam
6U, 3/4 x 19 326.4 259.3 352.8 190.5 34.4 13.2 6.4 diam
6U, 1/1 x 19 438.7 259.3 465.1 190.5 34.4 13.2 6.4 diam

1345
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

22.3.5 Wall mounting dimensions

IEC04000471-2-en.vsd
IEC04000471 V2 EN

Figure 634: Wall mounting

Case size (mm) A B C D E

6U, 1/2 x 19 292.0 267.1 272.8 390.0 243.0
6U, 3/4 x 19 404.3 379.4 272.8 390.0 243.0
6U, 1/1 x 19 516.0 491.1 272.8 390.0 243.0

22.3.6 External resistor unit for high impedance differential

protection

WARNING! - USE EXTREME CAUTION!Dangerously high

voltages might be present on this equipment, especially on the plate
with resistors. Do any maintenance ONLY if the primary object
protected with this equipment is de-energized. If required by
national law/standard enclose the plate with resistors with a
protective cover or in a separate box!

1346
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

[1.48]
[6.97]

[4.02]
[0.33] [18.31] [0.79] [7.68]
[18.98]

Dimension
mm [inches] xx06000232.eps

IEC06000232 V2 EN

Figure 635: Dimension drawing of a one phase impedance resistor unit

[1.50]
[10.47]

[7.50]

[0.33] [18.31] [0.79] [7.68]

[18.98]

en06000234.eps
[inches]

IEC06000234 V2 EN

Figure 636: Dimension drawing of a three phase high impedance resistor unit

1347
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

22.4 Mounting alternatives

22.4.1 Flush mounting

22.4.1.1 Overview

The flush mounting kit are utilized for case sizes:

1/2 x 19
3/4 x 19
1/1 x 19
1/4 x 19 (RHGS6 6U)

Only a single case can be mounted in each cut-out on the cubicle panel, for class
IP54 protection.

Flush mounting cannot be used for side-by-side mounted IEDs

when IP54 class must be fulfilled. Only IP20 class can be obtained
when mounting two cases side-by-side in one (1) cut-out.

To obtain IP54 class protection, an additional factory mounted

sealing must be ordered when ordering the IED.

1348
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

22.4.1.2 Mounting procedure for flush mounting

IEC08000161-2-en.vsd
IEC08000161 V2 EN

Figure 637: Flush mounting details.

PosNo Description Quantity Type

1 Sealing strip, used to obtain IP54 class. The sealing strip is factory - -
mounted between the case and front plate.
2 Fastener 4 -
3 Groove - -
4 Screw, self tapping 4 2.9x9.5 mm
5 Joining point of sealing strip - -
6 Panel - -

1349
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

22.4.2 19 panel rack mounting

22.4.2.1 Overview

All IED sizes can be mounted in a standard 19 cubicle rack by using the for each
size suited mounting kit which consists of two mounting angles and fastening
screws for the angles.

The mounting angles are reversible which enables mounting of IED size 1/2 x 19
or 3/4 x 19 either to the left or right side of the cubicle.

Please note that the separately ordered rack mounting kit for side-by-
side mounted IEDs, or IEDs together with RHGS cases, is to be
selected so that the total size equals 19.

When mounting the mounting angles, be sure to use screws that

follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other
dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.

1350
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

22.4.2.2 Mounting procedure for 19 panel rack mounting

1a

1b

IEC08000160-2-en.vsd
IEC08000160 V2 EN

Figure 638: 19 panel rack mounting details

Pos Description Quantity Type

1a, 1b Mounting angles, which can be mounted, either to 2 -
the left or right side of the case.
2 Screw 8 M4x6

22.4.3 Wall mounting

22.4.3.1 Overview

All case sizes, 1/2 x 19, 3/4 x 19,1/1 x 19, can be wall mounted. It is also
possible to mount the IED on a panel or in a cubicle.

1351
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

When mounting the side plates, be sure to use screws that follows
the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions
than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.

If fiber cables are bent too much, the signal can be weakened. Wall
mounting is therefore not recommended for any communication
modules with fiber connection.

22.4.3.2 Mounting procedure for wall mounting

IEC13000266-1-en.vsd
DOCUMENT127716-IMG2265 V3 EN

Figure 639: Wall mounting details.

PosNo Description Quantity Type

1 Bushing 4 -
2 Screw 8 M4x10
3 Screw 4 M6x12 or
corresponding
Table continues on next page

1352
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

4 Mounting bar 2 -

5 Screw 6 M5x8
6 Side plate 2 -

22.4.3.3 How to reach the rear side of the IED

The IED can be equipped with a rear protection cover, which is recommended to
use with this type of mounting. See figure 640.

To reach the rear side of the IED, a free space of 80 mmis required on the unhinged
side.

3
1

80 mm 2

IEC06000135-2-en.vsd
IEC06000135 V3 EN

Figure 640: How to reach the connectors on the rear side of the IED.

PosNo Description Type

1 Screw M4x10
2 Screw M5x8
3 Rear protection cover (Ordered separately)

22.4.4 Side-by-side 19 rack mounting

22.4.4.1 Overview

IED case sizes, 1/2 x 19 or 3/4 x 19 and RHGS cases, can be mounted side-by-
side up to a maximum size of 19. For side-by-side rack mounting, the side-by-side
mounting kit together with the 19 rack panel mounting kit must be used. The
mounting kit has to be ordered separately.

1353
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, be sure to use
screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws
with other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs
inside the IED.

22.4.4.2 Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting

2
1

IEC04000456-2-en.vsd
IEC04000456 V2 EN

Figure 641: Side-by-side rack mounting details.

PosNo Description Quantity Type

1 Mounting plate 2 -
2, 3 Screw 16 M4x6
4 Mounting angle 2 -

22.4.4.3 IED in the 670 series mounted with a RHGS6 case

An 1/2 x 19 or 3/4 x 19 size IED can be mounted with a RHGS (6 or 12

depending on IED size) case. The RHGS case can be used for mounting a test
switch of type RTXP 24. It also has enough space for a terminal base of RX 2 type
for mounting of, for example, a DC-switch or two trip IEDs.

1354
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

1 2 1 2

1 1 1 1

2 2 2 2

3 3 3 3

4 4 4 4

5 5 5 5

6 6 6 6

7 7 7 7

8 8 8 8

IEC06000180-2-en.vsd
IEC06000180 V2 EN

Figure 642: IED in the 670 series (1/2 x 19) mounted with a RHGS6 case
containing a test switch module equipped with only a test switch
and a RX2 terminal base

22.4.5 Side-by-side flush mounting

22.4.5.1 Overview

It is not recommended to flush mount side by side mounted cases if IP54 is

required. If your application demands side-by-side flush mounting, the side-by-side
mounting details kit and the 19 panel rack mounting kit must be used. The
mounting kit has to be ordered separately. The maximum size of the panel cut out
is 19.

With side-by-side flush mounting installation, only IP class 20 is

obtained. To reach IP class 54, it is recommended to mount the
IEDs separately. For cut out dimensions of separately mounted
IEDs, see section "Flush mounting".

When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, be sure to use
screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws
with other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs
inside the IED.

1355
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

Please contact factory for special add on plates for mounting FT

switches on the side (for 1/2 19" case) or bottom of the relay.

22.4.5.2 Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting

1 2

IEC06000181-2-en.vsd
IEC06000181 V2 EN

Figure 643: Side-by-side flush mounting details (RHGS6 side-by-side with 1/2 x
19 IED).

PosNo Description Quantity Type

1 Mounting plate 2 -
2, 3 Screw 16 M4x6
4 Mounting angle 2 -

22.5 Technical data

22.5.1 Enclosure
Table 1020: Case
Material Steel sheet
Front plate Steel sheet profile with cut-out for HMI
Surface treatment Aluzink preplated steel
Finish Light grey (RAL 7035)

1356
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 22
IED hardware

Table 1021: Water and dust protection level according to IEC 60529

Front IP40 (IP54 with sealing strip)

Sides, top and bottom IP20
Rear side IP20 with screw compression type
IP10 with ring lug terminals

Table 1022: Weight

Case size Weight
6U, 1/2 x 19 10 kg
6U, 3/4 x 19 15 kg
6U, 1/1 x 19 18 kg

22.5.2 Connection system

Table 1023: CT and VT circuit connectors
Connector type Rated voltage and current Maximum conductor area
Screw compression type 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2 (AWG12)
2 x 2.5 mm2 (2 x AWG14)
Terminal blocks suitable for 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2 (AWG12)
ring lug terminals

Table 1024: Binary I/O connection system

Connector type Rated voltage Maximum conductor area
Screw compression type 250 V AC 2.5 mm2 (AWG14)
2 1 mm2 (2 x AWG18)
Terminal blocks suitable for 300 V AC 3 mm2 (AWG14)
ring lug terminals

Because of limitations of space, when ring lug terminal is ordered

for Binary I/O connections, one blank slot is necessary between two
adjacent IO cards. Please refer to the ordering particulars for details.

22.5.3 Influencing factors

Table 1025: Temperature and humidity influence
Parameter Reference value Nominal range Influence
Ambient temperature, +20 C -10 C to +55 C 0.02% /C
operate value
Relative humidity 10%-90% 10%-90% -
Operative range 0%-95%
Storage temperature -40 C to +85 C - -

1357
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

Table 1026: Auxiliary DC supply voltage influence on functionality during operation

Dependence on Reference value Within nominal range Influence
Ripple, in DC auxiliary voltage max. 2% 15% of EL 0.01% /%
Operative range Full wave rectified
Auxiliary voltage dependence, operate 20% of EL 0.01% /%
value
Interrupted auxiliary DC voltage 24-60 V DC 20%

90-250 V DC 20%
Interruption
interval
050 ms No restart
0 s Correct
behaviour at
power down
Restart time <300 s

Table 1027: Frequency influence (reference standard: IEC 602551)

Dependence on Within nominal range Influence
Frequency dependence, fr 2.5 Hz for 50 Hz 1.0% / Hz
operate value fr 3.0 Hz for 60 Hz

Frequency dependence fr 2.5 Hz for 50 Hz 2.0% / Hz

for distance protection fr 3.0 Hz for 60 Hz
operate value
Harmonic frequency 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr 2.0%
dependence (20%
content)
Harmonic frequency 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr 12.0%
dependence for distance
protection (10% content)
Harmonic frequency 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr 5.0%
dependence for high
impedance differential
protection (10% content)

22.5.4 Type tests according to standard

Table 1028: Electromagnetic compatibility
Test Type test values Reference standards
1 MHz burst disturbance 2.5 kV IEC 60255-26
100 kHz slow damped 2.5 kV IEC 61000-4-18, Class III
oscillatory wave immunity
test
Ring wave immunity test, 2-4 kV IEC 61000-4-12, Class IV
100 kHz
Surge withstand capability 2.5 kV, oscillatory IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1
test 4.0 kV, fast transient
Table continues on next page

1358
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Test
Electrostatic discharge
Direct application
Indirect application
Electrostatic discharge
Direct application
Indirect application
Fast transient disturbance
Surge immunity test
Power frequency immunity
test
Conducted common mode
immunity test
Power frequency magnetic
field test
Pulse magnetic field
immunity test
Damped oscillatory magnetic
field test
Radiated electromagnetic
field disturbance
Radiated electromagnetic
field disturbance
Conducted electromagnetic
field disturbance
Radiated emission
Radiated emission
Conducted emission
Table 1029: Insulation
Test
Dielectric test
Impulse voltage test
Insulation resistance
Table 1030: Environmental tests
Test
Cold operation test
Cold storage test
Dry heat operation test
Dry heat storage test
Table continues on next page
Technical Manual
Section 22
IED hardware
Type test values Reference standards
15 kV air discharge IEC 60255-26
8 kV contact discharge
8 kV contact discharge IEC 61000-4-2, Class IV
15 kV air discharge IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1
8 kV contact discharge
8 kV contact discharge
4 kV IEC 60255-26, Zone A
2-4 kV, 1.2/50 ms IEC 60255-26, Zone A
high energy
150-300 V, 50 Hz IEC 60255-26, Zone A
15 Hz-150 kHz IEC 61000-4-16, Class IV
1000 A/m, 3 s IEC 61000-4-8, Class V
100 A/m, cont.
1000 A/m IEC 6100049, Class V
100 A/m IEC 61000-4-10, Class V
20 V/m, 80-1000 MHz IEC 60255-26
1.4-2.7 GHz
20 V/m IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2
80-1000 MHz
10 V, 0.15-80 MHz IEC 60255-26
30-5000 MHz IEC 60255-26
30-5000 MHz IEEE/ANSI C63.4, FCC
0.15-30 MHz IEC 60255-26
Type test values Reference standard
2.0 kV AC, 1 min. IEC 60255-27
5 kV, 1.2/50 ms, 0.5 J
>100 MW at 500 VDC
Type test value Reference standard
Test Ad for 16 h at -25C IEC 60068-2-1
Test Ad for 16 h at -40C IEC 60068-2-1
Test Bd for 16 h at +70C IEC 60068-2-2
Test Bd for 16 h at +85C IEC 60068-2-2
1359
Section 22 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED hardware

Test Type test value Reference standard

Change of temperature test
Damp heat test, steady state
Damp heat test, cyclic
Test Nb for 5 cycles at -25C IEC 60068-2-14
to +85C
Test Ca for 10 days at +40 IEC 60068-2-78
C and humidity 93%
Test Db for 6 cycles at +25 IEC 60068-2-30
to +55 C and humidity 93 to
95% (1 cycle = 24 hours)

Table 1031: CE compliance

Test According to
Immunity EN 6025526
Emissivity EN 6025526
Low voltage directive EN 6025527

Table 1032: Mechanical tests

Test Type test values Reference standards
Vibration response test Class II IEC 60255-21-1
Vibration endurance test Class I IEC 60255-21-1
Shock response test Class I IEC 60255-21-2
Shock withstand test Class I IEC 60255-21-2
Bump test Class I IEC 60255-21-2
Seismic test Class II IEC 60255-21-3

1360
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 23
Labels

Section 23 Labels

23.1 Labels on IED

Front view of IED

2
3

6
6 5
7
xx06000574.ep
IEC06000574 V1 EN

1361
Technical Manual
Section 23 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Labels

1 Product type, description and serial number

2 Order number, dc supply voltage and rated
frequency
3 Optional, customer specific information
4 Manufacturer
5 Transformer input module, rated currents
and voltages
6 Transformer designations

IEC06000577-CUSTOMER-SPECIFIC V1 EN

7 Ordering and serial number

IEC06000576-POS-NO V1 EN

1362
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 23
Labels

Rear view of IED

4
en06000573.ep
IEC06000573 V1 EN

1 Warning label
2 Caution label
3 Class 1 laser product label

IEC06000575 V1 EN

4 Warning label

1363
Technical Manual
1364
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 24
Connection diagrams

Section 24 Connection diagrams

The connection diagrams are delivered on the IED Connectivity package DVD as
part of the product delivery.

The latest versions of the connection diagrams can be downloaded from

http://www.abb.com/substationautomation.

Connection diagrams for Customized products

Connection diagram, 670 series 2.0 1MRK002801-AE

Connection diagrams for Configured products

Connection diagram, RET670 2.0, A10 1MRK002803-TF

Connection diagram, RET670 2.0, A30 1MRK002803-TA

Connection diagram, RET670 2.0, B30 1MRK002803-TB

Connection diagram, RET670 2.0, A40 1MRK002803-TC

Connection diagram, RET670 2.0, B40 1MRK002803-TD

Connection diagram, RET670 2.0, A25 1MRK002803-TE

1365
Technical Manual
1366
1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Section 25 IED and functionality tests
Table 1033: Electromagnetic compatibility
Test
1 MHz burst disturbance
100 kHz slow damped
oscillatory wave immunity
test
Ring wave immunity test,
100 kHz
Surge withstand capability
test
Electrostatic discharge
Direct application
Indirect application
Electrostatic discharge
Direct application
Indirect application
Fast transient disturbance
Surge immunity test
Power frequency immunity
test
Conducted common mode
immunity test
Power frequency magnetic
field test
Pulse magnetic field
immunity test
Damped oscillatory magnetic
field test
Radiated electromagnetic
field disturbance
Radiated electromagnetic
field disturbance
Conducted electromagnetic
field disturbance
Radiated emission
Radiated emission
Conducted emission
Technical Manual
Section 25
IED and functionality tests
Type test values Reference standards
2.5 kV IEC 60255-26
2.5 kV IEC 61000-4-18, Class III
2-4 kV IEC 61000-4-12, Class IV
2.5 kV, oscillatory IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1
4.0 kV, fast transient
15 kV air discharge IEC 60255-26
8 kV contact discharge
8 kV contact discharge IEC 61000-4-2, Class IV
15 kV air discharge IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1
8 kV contact discharge
8 kV contact discharge
4 kV IEC 60255-26, Zone A
2-4 kV, 1.2/50 ms IEC 60255-26, Zone A
high energy
150-300 V, 50 Hz IEC 60255-26, Zone A
15 Hz-150 kHz IEC 61000-4-16, Class IV
1000 A/m, 3 s IEC 61000-4-8, Class V
100 A/m, cont.
1000 A/m IEC 6100049, Class V
100 A/m IEC 61000-4-10, Class V
20 V/m, 80-1000 MHz IEC 60255-26
1.4-2.7 GHz
20 V/m IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2
80-1000 MHz
10 V, 0.15-80 MHz IEC 60255-26
30-5000 MHz IEC 60255-26
30-5000 MHz IEEE/ANSI C63.4, FCC
0.15-30 MHz IEC 60255-26
1367
Section 25 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
IED and functionality tests

Table 1034: Insulation

Test Type test values Reference standard
Dielectric test 2.0 kV AC, 1 min. IEC 60255-27
Impulse voltage test 5 kV, 1.2/50 ms, 0.5 J
Insulation resistance >100 MW at 500 VDC

Table 1035: Environmental tests

Test Type test value Reference standard
Cold operation test Test Ad for 16 h at -25C IEC 60068-2-1
Cold storage test Test Ad for 16 h at -40C IEC 60068-2-1
Dry heat operation test Test Bd for 16 h at +70C IEC 60068-2-2
Dry heat storage test Test Bd for 16 h at +85C IEC 60068-2-2
Change of temperature test Test Nb for 5 cycles at -25C IEC 60068-2-14
to +85C
Damp heat test, steady state Test Ca for 10 days at +40 IEC 60068-2-78
C and humidity 93%
Damp heat test, cyclic Test Db for 6 cycles at +25 IEC 60068-2-30
to +55 C and humidity 93 to
95% (1 cycle = 24 hours)

Table 1036: CE compliance

Test According to
Immunity EN 6025526
Emissivity EN 6025526
Low voltage directive EN 6025527

Table 1037: Mechanical tests

Test Type test values Reference standards
Vibration response test Class II IEC 60255-21-1
Vibration endurance test Class I IEC 60255-21-1
Shock response test Class I IEC 60255-21-2
Shock withstand test Class I IEC 60255-21-2
Bump test Class I IEC 60255-21-2
Seismic test Class II IEC 60255-21-3

1368
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

Section 26 Inverse time characteristics

26.1 Application

In order to assure time selectivity between different overcurrent protections at

different points in the network different time delays for the different protections are
normally used. The simplest way to do this is to use definite time-lag. In more
sophisticated applications current dependent time characteristics are used. Both
alternatives are shown in a simple application with three overcurrent protections
operating in series.

I> I> I>

xx05000129.vsd
IEC05000129 V1 EN

Figure 644: Three overcurrent protections operating in series

Stage 3

Time
Stage 2 Stage 2

Stage 1 Stage 1 Stage 1

Fault point
position

en05000130.vsd

IEC05000130 V1 EN

Figure 645: Definite time overcurrent characteristics

1369
Technical Manual
Section 26 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics

Time

Fault point
position

en05000131.vsd

IEC05000131 V1 EN

Figure 646: Inverse time overcurrent characteristics with inst. function

The inverse time characteristic makes it possible to minimize the fault clearance
time and still assure the selectivity between protections.

To assure selectivity between protections there must be a time margin between the
operation time of the protections. This required time margin is dependent of
following factors, in a simple case with two protections in series:

Difference between pickup time of the protections to be co-ordinated

Opening time of the breaker closest to the studied fault
Reset times of the protections
Margin dependent of the time delay inaccuracy of the protections

Assume we have the following network case.

1370
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

A1 B1
Feeder

I> I>

Time axis

t=0 t=t1 t=t2 t=t3

en05000132.vsd

IEC05000132 V1 EN

Figure 647: Selectivity steps for a fault on feeder B1

where:
t=0 is The fault occurs
t=t1 is Protection B1 trips

t=t2 is Breaker at B1 opens

t=t3 is Protection A1 resets

In the case protection B1 shall operate without any intentional delay

(instantaneous). When the fault occurs the protections start to detect the fault
current. After the time t1 the protection B1 send a trip signal to the circuit breaker.
The protection A1 starts its delay timer at the same time, with some deviation in
time due to differences between the two protections. There is a possibility that A1
will start before the trip is sent to the B1 circuit breaker. At the time t2 the circuit
breaker B1 has opened its primary contacts and thus the fault current is interrupted.
The breaker time (t2 - t1) can differ between different faults. The maximum
opening time can be given from manuals and test protocols. Still at t2 the timer of
protection A1 is active. At time t3 the protection A1 is reset, that is the timer is stopped.

In most applications it is required that the times shall reset as fast as possible when
the current fed to the protection drops below the set current level, the reset time
shall be minimized. In some applications it is however beneficial to have some type
of delayed reset time of the overcurrent function. This can be the case in the
following applications:

1371
Technical Manual
Section 26 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics

If there is a risk of intermittent faults. If the current IED, close to the faults,
starts and resets there is a risk of unselective trip from other protections in the
system.
Delayed resetting could give accelerated fault clearance in case of automatic
reclosing to a permanent fault.
Overcurrent protection functions are sometimes used as release criterion for
other protection functions. It can often be valuable to have a reset delay to
assure the release function.

26.2 Principle of operation

26.2.1 Mode of operation

The function can operate in a definite time-lag mode or in a current definite inverse
time mode. For the inverse time characteristic both ANSI and IEC based standard
curves are available. Also programmable curve types are supported via the
component inputs: p, A, B, C pr, tr, and cr.

Different characteristics for reset delay can also be chosen.

If current in any phase exceeds the set start current value (here internal signal
startValue), a timer, according to the selected operating mode, is started. The
component always uses the maximum of the three phase current values as the
current level used in timing calculations.

In case of definite time-lag mode the timer will run constantly until the time is
reached or until the current drops below the reset value (start value minus the
hysteresis) and the reset time has elapsed.

For definite time delay curve ANSI/IEEE Definite time or IEC Definite time are
chosen.

The general expression for inverse time curves is according to equation 220.

A

t[ s ] = + B k
i p
-C
in >
EQUATION1189 V1 EN (Equation 220)

where:
p, A, B, C are constants defined for each curve type,
in> is the set start current for step n,
k is set time multiplier for step n and
i is the measured current.

1372
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

For inverse time characteristics a time will be initiated when the current reaches the
set start level. From the general expression of the characteristic the following can
be seen:

i p
(top - B k ) - C = Ak
in >
EQUATION1190 V1 EN (Equation 221)

where:
top is the operating time of the protection

The time elapsed to the moment of trip is reached when the integral fulfils
according to equation 222, in addition to the constant time delay:

t
i p
in > - C dt A k
0
EQUATION1191 V1 EN (Equation 222)

For the numerical protection the sum below must fulfil the equation for trip.

n i( j ) p
Dt - C A k
j =1 in >
EQUATION1192 V1 EN (Equation 223)

where:
j=1 is the first protection execution cycle when a fault has been
detected, that is, when

i
>1
in >
EQUATION1193 V1 EN

Dt is the time interval between two consecutive executions of the

protection algorithm,
n is the number of the execution of the algorithm when the trip
time equation is fulfilled, that is, when a trip is given and
i (j) is the fault current at time j

For inverse time operation, the inverse time characteristic is selectable. Both the
IEC and ANSI/IEEE standardized inverse time characteristics are supported.

For the IEC curves there is also a setting of the minimum time-lag of operation, see
figure 648.

1373
Technical Manual
Section 26 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics

Operate
time

tMin

Current
IMin
IEC05000133-3-en.vsd
IEC05000133 V2 EN

Figure 648: Minimum time-lag operation for the IEC curves

In order to fully comply with IEC curves definition setting parameter tMin shall be
set to the value which is equal to the operating time of the selected IEC inverse
time curve for measured current of twenty times the set current start value. Note
that the operating time value is dependent on the selected setting value for time
multiplier k.

In addition to the ANSI and IEC standardized characteristics, there are also two
additional inverse curves available; the RI curve and the RD curve.

The RI inverse time curve emulates the characteristic of the electromechanical

ASEA relay RI. The curve is described by equation 225:

k
t[ s ] =
in >
0.339 - 0.235
i
EQUATION1194 V1 EN (Equation 225)

where:
in> is the set start current for step n
k is set time multiplier for step n
i is the measured current

1374
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

The RD inverse curve gives a logarithmic delay, as used in the Combiflex

protection RXIDG. The curve enables a high degree of selectivity required for
sensitive residual earth-fault current protection, with ability to detect high-resistive
earth faults. The curve is described by equation 226:

i
t[ s ] = 5.8 - 1.35 ln
k in >
EQUATION1195 V1 EN (Equation 226)

where:
in> is the set start current for step n,
k is set time multiplier for step n and
i is the measured current

If the curve type programmable is chosen, the user can make a tailor made inverse
time curve according to the general equation 227.

A

t[ s ] = + Bk
i p
-C
in >
EQUATION1196 V1 EN (Equation 227)

Also the reset time of the delayed function can be controlled. There is the
possibility to choose between three different reset time-lags.
Instantaneous Reset
IEC Reset
ANSI Reset.

If instantaneous reset is chosen the timer will be reset directly when the current
drops below the set start current level minus the hysteresis.

If IEC reset is chosen the timer will be reset after a set constant time when the
current drops below the set start current level minus the hysteresis.

If ANSI reset time is chosen the reset time will be dependent of the current after
fault clearance (when the current drops below the start current level minus the
hysteresis). The timer will reset according to equation 228.

1375
Technical Manual
Section 26 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics

tr
t [s] = k
i
2

-1
in >
EQUATION1197 V2 EN (Equation 228)

where:
The set value tr is the reset time in case of zero current after fault clearance.

The possibility of choice of reset characteristics is to some extent dependent of the

choice of time delay characteristic.

For the definite time delay characteristics the possible reset time settings are
instantaneous and IEC constant time reset.

For ANSI inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time
characteristics are available; instantaneous, IEC constant time reset and ANSI
current dependent reset time.

For IEC inverse time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are
instantaneous and IEC set constant time reset).

For the programmable inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset
time characteristics are available; instantaneous, IEC constant time reset and ANSI
current dependent reset time. If the current dependent type is used settings pr, tr
and cr must be given, see equation 229:

tr
t [s] = k
i
pr

- cr
in >
EQUATION1198 V2 EN (Equation 229)

For RI and RD inverse time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings
are instantaneous and IEC constant time reset.

When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the

operate time of the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay
and the set definite time delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay
is required, it is of utmost importance to set the definite time delay
for that stage to zero.

1376
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

26.3 Inverse characteristics

Table 1038: ANSI Inverse time characteristics

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
2.0% or 40 ms

A
whichever is greater
t= + B k + tDef
(
I P - 1
)

EQUATION1249-SMALL V2 EN

Reset characteristic:

tr
t = k
(I 2
-1 )
EQUATION1250-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 ,

tr=29.1
ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 ,
tr=21.6
ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02,
tr=0.46
ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02,
tr=4.85
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0,
tr=30
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0,
tr=13.46
ANSI Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02,
tr=4.6

1377
Technical Manual
Section 26 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics

Table 1039: IEC Inverse time characteristics

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 IEC 60255-151, 2.0%
or 40 ms whichever is
A greater
t = P k
( I - 1)

EQUATION1251-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0
IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04
IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0
Programmable characteristic k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01
Operate characteristic: A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of
0.001
A B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
t = P + B k C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
(I - C ) P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of

0.001
EQUATION1370-SMALL V1 EN
TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps
Reset characteristic: of 0.001
CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
TR PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of
t = k 0.001
(I PR
- CR )
EQUATION1253-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

Table 1040: RI and RD type inverse time characteristics

Function Range or value Accuracy
RI type inverse characteristic k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 IEC 60255-151, 2.0%
or 40 ms whichever is
1 greater
t = k
0.236
0.339 -
I
EQUATION1137-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

RD type logarithmic inverse characteristic k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01

I
t = 5.8 - 1.35 In
k
EQUATION1138-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

1378
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

Table 1041: ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Line Differential Protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
5.0% or 40 ms

A
whichever is greater
t= + B k + tDef
(
I P - 1
)

EQUATION1249-SMALL V2 EN

Reset characteristic:

tr
t = k
(I 2
-1 )
EQUATION1250-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 ,

tr=29.1
ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 ,
tr=21.6
ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02,
tr=0.46
ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02,
tr=4.85
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0,
tr=30
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0,
tr=13.46
ANSI Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02,
tr=4.6

1379
Technical Manual
Section 26 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics

Table 1042: IEC Inverse time characteristics for Line Differential protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 IEC 60255-151, 5.0%
or 40 ms whichever is
A greater
t = P k
( I - 1)

EQUATION1251-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0
IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04
IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0
Programmable characteristic k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01
Operate characteristic: A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of
0.001
A B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
t = P + B k C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
(I - C ) P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of

0.001
EQUATION1370-SMALL V1 EN
TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps
Reset characteristic: of 0.001
CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
TR PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of
t = k 0.001
(I PR
- CR )
EQUATION1253-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

The parameter setting Characterist1 and 4/Reserved shall not be

used, since this parameter setting is for future use and not
implemented yet.

1380
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

Table 1043: RI and RD type inverse time characteristics for Line Differential protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
RI type inverse characteristic k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 IEC 60255-151, 5.0%
or 40 ms whichever is
1 greater
t = k
0.236
0.339 -
I
EQUATION1137-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

RD type logarithmic inverse characteristic k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01

I
t = 5.8 - 1.35 In
k
EQUATION1138-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

Table 1044: ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and
power protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: k = (0.10-2.00) in steps of 0.01 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
10.0% or 180 ms

A
whichever is greater
t= + B k + tDef
(
I P - 1 )

EQUATION1249-SMALL V2 EN

Reset characteristic:

tr
t = k
(I 2
-1 )
EQUATION1250-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 ,

tr=29.1
ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 ,
tr=21.6
ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02,
tr=0.46
ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02,
tr=4.85
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0,
tr=30
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0,
tr=13.46
ANSI Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02,
tr=4.6

1381
Technical Manual
Section 26 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics

Table 1045: IEC Inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and
power protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: k = (0.10-2.00) in steps of 0.01 IEC 60255-151,
10.0% or 180 ms
A whichever is greater
t = P k
( I - 1)

EQUATION1251-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0
IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04
IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0
Programmable characteristic k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01
Operate characteristic: A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of
0.001
A B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
t = P + B k C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
(I - C ) P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of

0.001
EQUATION1370-SMALL V1 EN
TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps
Reset characteristic: of 0.001
CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
TR PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of
t = k 0.001
(I PR
- CR )
EQUATION1253-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

The parameter setting Characterist1 and 4/Reserved shall not be

used, since this parameter setting is for future use and not
implemented yet.

1382
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

Table 1046: RI and RD type inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual
overcurrent and power protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
RI type inverse characteristic k = (0.10-2.00) in steps of 0.01 IEC 60255-151,
10.0% or 180 ms
1 whichever is greater
t = k
0.236
0.339 -
I
EQUATION1137-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

RD type logarithmic inverse characteristic k = (0.1-999) in steps of 0.01

I
t = 5.8 - 1.35 In
k
EQUATION1138-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

Table 1047: ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Voltage restrained time overcurrent protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: 0.10 k 3.00 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
5.0% or 40 ms

A
whichever is greater
t= + B k + tDef
(
I P - 1 )

EQUATION1249-SMALL V2 EN

Reset characteristic:

tr
t = k
(I 2
-1 )
EQUATION1250-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 ,

tr=29.1
ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 ,
tr=21.6
ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02,
tr=0.46
ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02,
tr=4.85
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0,
tr=30
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0,
tr=13.46
ANSI Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02,
tr=4.6

1383
Technical Manual
Section 26 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics

Table 1048: IEC Inverse time characteristics for Voltage restrained time overcurrent protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: 0.10 k 3.00 IEC 60255-151, 5.0%
or 40 ms whichever is
A greater
t = P k
( I - 1)

EQUATION1251-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0
IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04
IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0

Table 1049: Inverse time characteristics for overvoltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy
Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in 5.0% or 45 ms
steps of 0.01 whichever is greater
k
t =
U -U >

U >
EQUATION1436-SMALL V1 EN

U> = Uset
U = Umeasured

Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in

steps of 0.01
k 480
t =
2.0
32 U - U > - 0.5
- 0.035
U >
EQUATION1437-SMALL V1 EN

Type C curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in

steps of 0.01
k 480
t =
3.0
32 U - U > - 0.5
- 0.035
U >
EQUATION1438-SMALL V1 EN

Programmable curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in

steps of 0.01
kA A = (0.005-200.000)
t = +D in steps of 0.001
P
B U - U > B = (0.50-100.00) in
-C
steps of 0.01
U >
EQUATION1439-SMALL V1 EN
C = (0.0-1.0) in steps
of 0.1
D = (0.000-60.000) in
steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in
steps of 0.001

1384
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

Table 1050: Inverse time characteristics for undervoltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy
Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in 5.0% or 45 ms
steps of 0.01 whichever is greater
k
t =
U < -U


U<
EQUATION1431-SMALL V1 EN

U< = Uset
U = Umeasured

Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in

steps of 0.01
k 480
t = + 0.055
2.0
32 U < -U - 0.5

U <
EQUATION1432-SMALL V1 EN

U< = Uset
U = Umeasured

Programmable curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in

steps of 0.01
A = (0.005-200.000)
in steps of 0.001
kA B = (0.50-100.00) in
t = +D
U < -U P
steps of 0.01

B -C C = (0.0-1.0) in
U < steps of 0.1
EQUATION1433-SMALL V1 EN
D = (0.000-60.000)
U< = Uset in steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in
U = Umeasured
steps of 0.001

1385
Technical Manual
Section 26 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics

Table 1051: Inverse time characteristics for residual overvoltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy
Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 5.0% or 45 ms
0.01 whichever is
k greater
t =
U -U >

U>
EQUATION1436-SMALL V1 EN

U> = Uset
U = Umeasured

Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of

0.01
k 480
t =
2.0
32 U - U > - 0.5
- 0.035
U >
EQUATION1437-SMALL V1 EN

Type C curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of

0.01
k 480
t =
3.0
32 U - U > - 0.5
- 0.035
U >
EQUATION1438-SMALL V1 EN

Programmable curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of

0.01
kA A = (0.005-200.000) in
t = +D steps of 0.001
P
B U - U > B = (0.50-100.00) in
-C
steps of 0.01
U >
EQUATION1439-SMALL V1 EN
C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of
0.1
D = (0.000-60.000) in
steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in
steps of 0.001

1386
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

A070750 V2 EN

Figure 649: ANSI Extremely inverse time characteristics

1387
Technical Manual
Section 26 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics

A070751 V2 EN

Figure 650: ANSI Very inverse time characteristics

1388
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

A070752 V2 EN

Figure 651: ANSI Normal inverse time characteristics

1389
Technical Manual
Section 26 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics

A070753 V2 EN

Figure 652: ANSI Moderately inverse time characteristics

1390
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

A070817 V2 EN

Figure 653: ANSI Long time extremely inverse time characteristics

1391
Technical Manual
Section 26 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics

A070818 V2 EN

Figure 654: ANSI Long time very inverse time characteristics

1392
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

A070819 V2 EN

Figure 655: ANSI Long time inverse time characteristics

1393
Technical Manual
Section 26 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics

A070820 V2 EN

Figure 656: IEC Normal inverse time characteristics

1394
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

A070821 V2 EN

Figure 657: IEC Very inverse time characteristics

1395
Technical Manual
Section 26 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics

A070822 V2 EN

Figure 658: IEC Inverse time characteristics

1396
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

A070823 V2 EN

Figure 659: IEC Extremely inverse time characteristics

1397
Technical Manual
Section 26 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics

A070824 V2 EN

Figure 660: IEC Short time inverse time characteristics

1398
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

A070825 V2 EN

Figure 661: IEC Long time inverse time characteristics

1399
Technical Manual
Section 26 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics

A070826 V2 EN

Figure 662: RI-type inverse time characteristics

1400
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

A070827 V2 EN

Figure 663: RD-type inverse time characteristics

1401
Technical Manual
Section 26 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics

GUID-ACF4044C-052E-4CBD-8247-C6ABE3796FA6 V1 EN

Figure 664: Inverse curve A characteristic of overvoltage protection

1402
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

GUID-F5E0E1C2-48C8-4DC7-A84B-174544C09142 V1 EN

Figure 665: Inverse curve B characteristic of overvoltage protection

1403
Technical Manual
Section 26 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics

GUID-A9898DB7-90A3-47F2-AEF9-45FF148CB679 V1 EN

Figure 666: Inverse curve C characteristic of overvoltage protection

1404
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 26
Inverse time characteristics

GUID-35F40C3B-B483-40E6-9767-69C1536E3CBC V1 EN

Figure 667: Inverse curve A characteristic of undervoltage protection

1405
Technical Manual
Section 26 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics

GUID-B55D0F5F-9265-4D9A-A7C0-E274AA3A6BB1 V1 EN

Figure 668: Inverse curve B characteristic of undervoltage protection

1406
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 27
Glossary

Section 27 Glossary

27.1 Glossary

AC Alternating current
ACC Actual channel
ACT Application configuration tool within PCM600
A/D converter Analog-to-digital converter
ADBS Amplitude deadband supervision
ADM Analog digital conversion module, with time
synchronization
AI Analog input
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AR Autoreclosing
ASCT Auxiliary summation current transformer
ASD Adaptive signal detection
ASDU Application service data unit
AWG American Wire Gauge standard
BBP Busbar protection
BFOC/2,5 Bayonet fibre optic connector
BFP Breaker failure protection
BI Binary input
BIM Binary input module
BOM Binary output module
BOS Binary outputs status
BR External bistable relay
BS British Standards
BSR Binary signal transfer function, receiver blocks
BST Binary signal transfer function, transmit blocks
C37.94 IEEE/ANSI protocol used when sending binary signals
between IEDs
CAN Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for
serial communication

1407
Technical Manual
Section 27 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Glossary

CB Circuit breaker
CBM Combined backplane module
CCITT Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and
Telephony. A United Nations-sponsored standards body
within the International Telecommunications Union.
CCM CAN carrier module
CCVT Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer
Class C Protection Current Transformer class as per IEEE/ ANSI
CMPPS Combined megapulses per second
CMT Communication Management tool in PCM600
CO cycle Close-open cycle
Codirectional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves
two twisted pairs making it possible to transmit
information in both directions
COM Command
COMTRADE Standard Common Format for Transient Data Exchange
format for Disturbance recorder according to IEEE/ANSI
C37.111, 1999 / IEC60255-24
Contra-directional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves
four twisted pairs, two of which are used for transmitting
data in both directions and two for transmitting clock signals
COT Cause of transmission
CPU Central processing unit
CR Carrier receive
CRC Cyclic redundancy check
CROB Control relay output block
CS Carrier send
CT Current transformer
CU Communication unit
CVT or CCVT Capacitive voltage transformer
DAR Delayed autoreclosing
DARPA Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (The US
developer of the TCP/IP protocol etc.)
DBDL Dead bus dead line
DBLL Dead bus live line
DC Direct current
DFC Data flow control

1408
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 27
Glossary

DFT Discrete Fourier transform

DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DIP-switch Small switch mounted on a printed circuit board
DI Digital input
DLLB Dead line live bus
DNP Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE Std 1815-2012
DR Disturbance recorder
DRAM Dynamic random access memory
DRH Disturbance report handler
DSP Digital signal processor
DTT Direct transfer trip scheme
EHV network Extra high voltage network
EIA Electronic Industries Association
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EMF Electromotive force
EMI Electromagnetic interference
EnFP End fault protection
EPA Enhanced performance architecture
ESD Electrostatic discharge
F-SMA Type of optical fibre connector
FAN Fault number
FCB Flow control bit; Frame count bit
FOX 20 Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech,
data and protection signals
FOX 512/515 Access multiplexer
FOX 6Plus Compact time-division multiplexer for the transmission of
up to seven duplex channels of digital data over optical fibers
FUN Function type
G.703 Electrical and functional description for digital lines used
by local telephone companies. Can be transported over
balanced and unbalanced lines
GCM Communication interface module with carrier of GPS
receiver module
GDE Graphical display editor within PCM600
GI General interrogation command
GIS Gas-insulated switchgear

1409
Technical Manual
Section 27 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Glossary

GOOSE Generic object-oriented substation event

GPS Global positioning system
GSAL Generic security application
GTM GPS Time Module
HDLC protocol High-level data link control, protocol based on the HDLC
standard
HFBR connector Plastic fiber connector
type
HMI Human-machine interface
HSAR High speed autoreclosing
HV High-voltage
HVDC High-voltage direct current
IDBS Integrating deadband supervision
IEC International Electrical Committee
IEC 60044-6 IEC Standard, Instrument transformers Part 6:
Requirements for protective current transformers for
transient performance
IEC 60870-5-103 Communication standard for protection equipment. A
serial master/slave protocol for point-to-point
communication
IEC 61850 Substation automation communication standard
IEC 6185081 Communication protocol standard
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IEEE 802.12 A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s
on twisted-pair or optical fiber cable
IEEE P1386.1 PCI Mezzanine Card (PMC) standard for local bus
modules. References the CMC (IEEE P1386, also known
as Common Mezzanine Card) standard for the mechanics
and the PCI specifications from the PCI SIG (Special
Interest Group) for the electrical EMF (Electromotive force).
IEEE 1686 Standard for Substation Intelligent Electronic Devices
(IEDs) Cyber Security Capabilities
IED Intelligent electronic device
I-GIS Intelligent gas-insulated switchgear
IOM Binary input/output module
Instance When several occurrences of the same function are
available in the IED, they are referred to as instances of
that function. One instance of a function is identical to
another of the same kind but has a different number in the

1410
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 27
Glossary

IED user interfaces. The word "instance" is sometimes

defined as an item of information that is representative of a
type. In the same way an instance of a function in the IED
is representative of a type of function.
IP 1. Internet protocol. The network layer for the TCP/IP
protocol suite widely used on Ethernet networks. IP is a
connectionless, best-effort packet-switching protocol. It
provides packet routing, fragmentation and reassembly
through the data link layer.
2. Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529
IP 20 Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529, level 20
IP 40 Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529, level 40
IP 54 Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529, level 54
IRF Internal failure signal
IRIG-B: InterRange Instrumentation Group Time code format B,
standard 200
ITU International Telecommunications Union
LAN Local area network
LIB 520 High-voltage software module
LCD Liquid crystal display
LDCM Line differential communication module
LDD Local detection device
LED Light-emitting diode
LNT LON network tool
LON Local operating network
MCB Miniature circuit breaker
MCM Mezzanine carrier module
MIM Milli-ampere module
MPM Main processing module
MVAL Value of measurement
MVB Multifunction vehicle bus. Standardized serial bus
originally developed for use in trains.
NCC National Control Centre
NOF Number of grid faults
NUM Numerical module
OCO cycle Open-close-open cycle
OCP Overcurrent protection

1411
Technical Manual
Section 27 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Glossary

OEM Optical Ethernet module

OLTC On-load tap changer
OTEV Disturbance data recording initiated by other event than start/
pick-up
OV Overvoltage
Overreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a
fault condition. For example, a distance relay is
overreaching when the impedance presented to it is smaller
than the apparent impedance to the fault applied to the
balance point, that is, the set reach. The relay sees the
fault but perhaps it should not have seen it.
PCI Peripheral component interconnect, a local data bus
PCM Pulse code modulation
PCM600 Protection and control IED manager
PC-MIP Mezzanine card standard
PMC PCI Mezzanine card
POR Permissive overreach
POTT Permissive overreach transfer trip
Process bus Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near
proximity to the measured and/or controlled components
PSM Power supply module
PST Parameter setting tool within PCM600
PT ratio Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio
PUTT Permissive underreach transfer trip
RASC Synchrocheck relay, COMBIFLEX
RCA Relay characteristic angle
RISC Reduced instruction set computer
RMS value Root mean square value
RS422 A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital
data in point-to-point connections
RS485 Serial link according to EIA standard RS485
RTC Real-time clock
RTU Remote terminal unit
SA Substation Automation
SBO Select-before-operate
SC Switch or push button to close
SCL Short circuit location

1412
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 139-UEN - Section 27
Glossary

SCS Station control system

SCADA Supervision, control and data acquisition
SCT System configuration tool according to standard IEC 61850
SDU Service data unit
SLM Serial communication module.
SMA connector Subminiature version A, A threaded connector with
constant impedance.
SMT Signal matrix tool within PCM600
SMS Station monitoring system
SNTP Simple network time protocol is used to synchronize
computer clocks on local area networks. This reduces the
requirement to have accurate hardware clocks in every
embedded system in a network. Each embedded node can
instead synchronize with a remote clock, providing the
required accuracy.
SOF Status of fault
SPA Strmberg Protection Acquisition (SPA), a serial master/
slave protocol for point-to-point communication
SRY Switch for CB ready condition
ST Switch or push button to trip
Starpoint Neutral point of transformer or generator
SVC Static VAr compensation
TC Trip coil
TCS Trip circuit supervision
TCP Transmission control protocol. The most common
transport layer protocol used on Ethernet and the Internet.
TCP/IP Transmission control protocol over Internet Protocol. The
de facto standard Ethernet protocols incorporated into
4.2BSD Unix. TCP/IP was developed by DARPA for
Internet working and encompasses both network layer and
transport layer protocols. While TCP and IP specify two
protocols at specific protocol layers, TCP/IP is often used
to refer to the entire US Department of Defense protocol
suite based upon these, including Telnet, FTP, UDP and
RDP.
TEF Time delayed earth-fault protection function
TM Transmit (disturbance data)
TNC connector Threaded Neill-Concelman, a threaded constant impedance
version of a BNC connector

1413
Technical Manual
Section 27 1MRK 504 139-UEN -
Glossary

TP Trip (recorded fault)

TPZ, TPY, TPX, Current transformer class according to IEC
TPS
TRM Transformer Module. This module transforms currents and
voltages taken from the process into levels suitable for
further signal processing.
TYP Type identification
UMT User management tool
Underreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a
fault condition. For example, a distance relay is
underreaching when the impedance presented to it is
greater than the apparent impedance to the fault applied to
the balance point, that is, the set reach. The relay does not
see the fault but perhaps it should have seen it. See also
Overreach.
UTC Coordinated Universal Time. A coordinated time scale,
maintained by the Bureau International des Poids et
Mesures (BIPM), which forms the basis of a coordinated
dissemination of standard frequencies and time signals.
UTC is derived from International Atomic Time (TAI) by
the addition of a whole number of "leap seconds" to
synchronize it with Universal Time 1 (UT1), thus allowing
for the eccentricity of the Earth's orbit, the rotational axis
tilt (23.5 degrees), but still showing the Earth's irregular
rotation, on which UT1 is based. The Coordinated
Universal Time is expressed using a 24-hour clock, and
uses the Gregorian calendar. It is used for aeroplane and
ship navigation, where it is also sometimes known by the
military name, "Zulu time." "Zulu" in the phonetic
alphabet stands for "Z", which stands for longitude zero.
UV Undervoltage
WEI Weak end infeed logic
VT Voltage transformer
X.21 A digital signalling interface primarily used for telecom
equipment
3IO Three times zero-sequence current.Often referred to as the
residual or the earth-fault current
3UO Three times the zero sequence voltage. Often referred to as
the residual voltage or the neutral point voltage

1414
Technical Manual
1415
Contact us

1MRK 504 139-UEN - Copyright 2014 ABB. All rights reserved.

ABB AB
Substation Automation Products
SE-721 59 Vsters, Sweden
Phone +46 (0) 21 32 50 00
Fax +46 (0) 21 14 69 18

www.abb.com/substationautomation